diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 15157-8.txt | 9664 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 15157-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 213514 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 15157.txt | 9664 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 15157.zip | bin | 0 -> 213097 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
7 files changed, 19344 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/15157-8.txt b/15157-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..707c13f --- /dev/null +++ b/15157-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9664 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898: Volume +XVI, 1609, by H.E. Blair + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898: Volume XVI, 1609 + Explorations By Early Navigators, Descriptions Of The Islands And + Their Peoples, Their History And Records Of The Catholic Missions, + As Related In Contemporaneous Books And Manuscripts, Showing The + Political, Economic, Commercial And Religious Conditions Of Those + Islands From Their Earliest Relations With European Nations To The + Close Of The Nineteenth Century + + +Author: H.E. Blair + +Release Date: February 24, 2005 [EBook #15157] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE ISLANDS *** + + + + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman & the PG Distributed Proofreaders Team + + + + + + The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898 + + Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and + their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions, + as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the + political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those + islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the + close of the nineteenth century, + + Volume XVI, 1609 + + + + Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair and James Alexander Robertson + with historical introduction and additional notes by Edward Gaylord + Bourne. + + + + + + + + + + + +CONTENTS OF VOLUME XVI + + + + Preface + Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas (_concluded_). Antonio de Morga; + Mexico, 1609. + Conqvista de las Islas Malvcas. Bartolomé Leonardo de + Argensola; Madrid, 1609. + Bibliographical Data + Appendix: Customs of the Pampangas in their lawsuits. Juan + de Plasencia, O.S.F.; [1589?] + + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + + Title-page of _Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas_ (Mexici ad + Indos, 1609), another edition of Morga's work; photographic + reproduction of the facsimile presented in Zaragoza's edition + (Madrid, 1887); from copy in possession of Edward E. Ayer, + Chicago, which is supposed to be the only copy extant of + Zaragoza's edition. + View of corcoa (the vessel known as "caracoa"); photographic + facsimile of engraving in John Stevens's _Collection of Voyages + and Travels_ (London, 1711), i.--in Argensola's "Discovery + and conquest of the Molucco and Philippine Islands," p. 61; + from copy in library of Wisconsin Historical Society. + Autograph signature of Antonio de Morga; photographic facsimile + from MS. in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla. + Title-page of Conqvista de las Islas Malvcas, by Bartolome + Leonardo de Argensola (Madrid, 1609); photographic facsimile, + from copy in library of Harvard University. + + + + + +PREFACE + +In the present volume is concluded the notable work by Morga, _Sucesos +de las Islas Filipinas_, which was begun in _Vol_. XV. The reader is +referred to the preface of that volume for some account of the book, +and of the manner in which it is presented in this series. Another +book notable in the history of the Philippines is that of Argensola, +_Conqvista de las Islas Molvcas_ (Madrid, 1609). In presenting +here this work, the Editors follow the plan which proves to be +more or less necessary with many of the printed early histories of +the islands--that of translating in full only such parts of the +book as relate directly to the Philippines, and are of especial +value or importance; and furnishing a brief synopsis of all matter +omitted, in order that the reader may survey the book as a whole, +and understand the relations and connections of the parts that +are presented in full with those that are synopsized. This method +is rendered necessary by the limitations of this series in regard +to space, especially as most of the old histories--as Aduarte's, +San Agustin's, and La Concepción's--are exceedingly voluminous; +and, moreover, devote much space to the affairs of Japan, China, +and other countries outside the Philippines. All matter of this sort +must of course, be omitted; and much of what remains is more useful +for annotations, or is relatively unimportant for publication. The +Editors consider, as do many other persons interested in this series, +that it is desirable to present (especially in the early period of +the Philippine history) the larger part of these documents from the +manuscript and hitherto unpublished material largely conserved in +foreign archives; and that the needs of students and investigators +will thus be better served than by occupying the valuable and limited +space of this series with complete translations of books which can be +found in large American libraries. The location of all these will be +noted, so far as is possible, in the volume devoted to bibliographical +information at the end of this series; meanwhile the needs of most +readers will be suitably met by the synopses of omitted matter and the +free use of such works as those of La Concepción and San Antonio in +annotations. The Editors purpose to present a few of these histories, +especially in the earlier period, in very full form, so far as they +cover Philippine history; for these are original sources, from which +later writers obtained much of their material. These methods render +this series unusually rich in valuable historical material, all +carefully selected, and much of it greatly condensed by the excision +of extraneous, irrelevant, and unimportant matter. The parts thus +omitted and synopsized will be, as heretofore, indicated by enclosing +the synopses in brackets. + + + +Continuing his narrative, Morga describes his voyage to Mexico, +whither he goes (1603) to be a member of the Audiencia there. He then +relates the events of the Chinese uprising in Luzón in that year, +which has been fully described in previous volumes of this series; +and his picturesque although plain narrative casts new light upon that +episode. Many Spaniards in Manila are so alarmed by this danger that +they remove, with all their households and property, to Nueva España; +but one of the ships carrying them is lost at sea, and the other is +compelled, after great injury and loss, to return to Manila--a serious +calamity for the colony there. The governor does his best to fortify +the city, and reënforcements and supplies are provided for him from +Nueva España. Bishop Benavides dies (1605). Friars from the islands +go to Japan, but the emperor of that country is offended at their +preaching, and advises Acuña to restrain them. In the summer of 1605 +arrive supplies and men from Nueva España, and Acuña proceeds with his +preparations for the expedition against the Dutch in the Moluccas. In +the following spring he sets out on this enterprise, conducting it +in person; Morga describes this naval campaign in detail. Ternate is +captured by the Spaniards without bombardment, and with little loss to +themselves. The fugitive king of the island is persuaded to surrender +to the Spaniards and become a vassal of Felipe. Several other petty +rulers follow his example and promise not to allow the Dutch to engage +in the clove trade. Acuña builds a new fort there, and another in +Tidore, leaving Juan de Esquivel as governor of the Moluccas, with +a garrison and several vessels far their defense, and carrying to +Manila the king of Ternate and many of his nobles, as hostages. During +Acuña's absence a mutiny occurs among the Japanese near Manila, which +is quelled mainly by the influence of the friars. The governor dies, +apparently from poison, soon after his return to Manila. The trade +of the islands is injured by the restrictions laid upon it by the +home government; and the reduction of Ternate has not sufficed to +restrain the Moro pirates. The natives of the Moluccas are uneasy and +rebellious, especially as they have a prospect of aid from the Dutch, +who are endeavoring to regain their lost possessions there. Morga cites +a letter from a Spanish officer at La Palma, recounting the purpose +and outcome of van Noordt's expedition to the Indian archipelago. + +The historical part of Morga's account ends here; and the final +chapter is devoted to a description of the islands and their people, +the customs and religious beliefs of the natives, and the condition at +that time of the Spanish colony and the city of Manila. He describes +the principal islands of the Philippine group, beginning with Luzón; +the various races of inhabitants--Moros, Negritos, and Visayans: +their mode of dress, their occupations and industries, their habits +of life; their weapons, their ships and boats; the trees and fruits of +the islands; the animals and birds, both wild and tame; the reptiles, +fishes, and other creatures; and various plants. Among these is the +buyo (or betel); the habit of chewing it has become universal among the +Spaniards, of all classes, and poison is often administered through +its medium. Various means and methods of poisoning are described, +as well as some antidotes therefor. Some account is given of the +gold mines and pearl fisheries, and of other products of the country +which form articles of commerce. Morga describes the two great lakes +of Luzón (Bombon and Bai), Manila and its harbor and approaches, and +other principal ports, with some neighboring islands; and gives some +account of the Visayan people and the larger islands inhabited by them, +and of the tides in the archipelago. Then follows an interesting and +detailed account of the Filipino peoples, their language, customs, +beliefs, etc. The language used in Luzón and other northern islands +is different from that of the Visayas; but all the natives write, +expressing themselves fluently and correctly, and using a simple +alphabet which resembles the Arabic. Their houses, and their mode +of life therein, arc fully described; also their government, social +organization, and administration of justice. The classes and status +of slaves, and the causes of enslavement are recounted. Their customs +in marriages and dowries, divorces, adoption, and inheritance are +described; also in usury, trading, and punishment for crimes. The +standard of social purity is described by Morga as being very low; +yet infamous vices were not indigenous with them, but communicated by +foreigners, especially by the Chinese. The natives of Luzón appear +to be superior, both intellectually and morally, to the Visayan +peoples. Their religious beliefs and practices are recounted by Morga, +who naturally ascribes these to the influence of the devil. He also +narrates the entrance of Mahometanism into the islands, and how it +was checked by the coming of the Spaniards. + +Morga next sketches the condition at that time of Spanish colonies +in the islands. He describes the city of Manila in detail, with +its fortifications, arsenals, government and municipal buildings, +cathedral, and convents; also the seminary of Santa Potenciana, and +the hospitals. There are six hundred houses, mostly built of stone, +within the walls, and even more in the suburbs; "and all are the +habitations and homes of Spaniards." All the people, both men and +women, are clad and gorgeously adorned in silks; and nowhere is there +greater abundance of food, and of other necessaries of human life, +than in Manila. Morga enumerates the dignitaries, ecclesiastical +and civil, who reside in the city; and mentions it as the center +and metropolis of the archipelago. He then briefly describes the +other Spanish settlements in the Philippines; and mentions in their +turn the various orders and their work there, with the number of +laborers in each. He praises their efforts for the conversion, +education, and social improvement of the Indians. He defines the +functions of both the civil and the ecclesiastical authorities, +and the policy of the government toward the natives; and describes +the application and results in the Philippines of the encomienda +system imported thither from America. He deprecates the permission +given to the Indians for paying their tributes in kind or in money, +at their option; for it has led to their neglecting their former +industries, and thus to the general damage of the country. Slavery +still exists among them, but the Spaniards have been forbidden to +enslave the natives. Personal services of various sorts are due +from the latter, however, to their encomenderos, to the religious, +and to the king, for all of which they receive a moderate wage; and +all other services for the Spaniards are voluntary and paid. Close +restrictions are laid upon the intercourse of the Spaniards with +natives. Various information is given regarding appointments to +office, residencias, elections, town government, and finances; also +of the ecclesiastical organization, expenses, and administration, +as well as of the incomes of the religious orders. Morga recounts +the numbers, character, pay, and organization of the military and +naval forces in the islands. The bulk of the citizens are merchants +and traders, commerce being the chief occupation and support of the +Spanish colony. Manila is a market for all the countries of Eastern +Asia, from Japan to Borneo. The China trade is restricted to the +inhabitants of the Philippines; Morga describes its nature and extent, +and the manner in which it is conducted, as well as the character +and methods of the Chinese traders. A similar account is given of the +trade carried on with the Philippines by the Japanese, Borneans, and +other neighboring peoples, and of the shipment to Nueva España of the +goods thus procured. This last commerce is "so great and profitable, +and easy to control, that the Spaniards do not apply themselves to, +or engage in, any other industry," and thus not only they neglect to +avail themselves of and develop the natural resources of the country, +but the natives are neglecting and forgetting their former industries; +and the supply of silver in the country steadily flows out of it and +into the hands of infidels. Morga enumerates the officials, revenues, +and expenditures of the colonial government. As its income is too small +for its necessary expenses, the annual deficit is made up from the +royal treasury of Nueva España. But this great expense is incurred +"only for the Christianization and conversion of the natives, for +the hopes of greater fruits in other kingdoms and provinces of Asia." + +The large extent of the Chinese immigration to the islands is +disapproved by Morga, as unsafe to the Spaniards and injurious to the +natives. Some Chinese are needed for the service of the Spaniards, +for all the trades are carried on by them; but the number of Chinese +allowed to live in the islands should be restricted to those who are +thus needed. Morga describes the character, dress, mode of life, +and settlements of the Chinese near Manila; they are cared for in +religious matters by the Dominican friars. The Christian Chinese live +apart from the heathens, in a settlement of some five hundred people; +Morga has but a poor opinion of even these converts. Some account is +also given of the Japanese who have settled in Manila; Morga commends +them, and states that they prove to be good Christians. + +He ends his work by a detailed account of the navigation and voyage +to and from the Philippines. The Mexican port of departure for this +route has been removed from Navidad to Acapulco. Morga describes the +westward voyage; the stop at the Ladrone Islands, and the traffic +of the natives with the ships; and the route thence, and among the +Philippine Islands. The return route to Mexico is much more difficult +and dangerous; for the winds are varying and not always favorable, +and the ship must change its course more frequently, and go far north +to secure favoring winds, there encountering cold weather. These severe +changes cause much suffering, and even death; and the vessel makes this +voyage without once touching land until it reaches Acapulco, a period +of five or six months. Morga also describes the voyage to Spain by +way of Goa and the Cape of Good Hope, which also is long and dangerous. + + + +Argensola writes a history of "the conquest of the Malucas," and +begins by describing the islands thus named, their inhabitants, and +the customs, mode of dress, and language of the people. He relates +the current stories of their origin and of their early intercourse +with Occidental peoples, mainly through the spice trade. The earlier +expeditions of the Portuguese to the Moluccas arouse the hostility of +the natives; and so much difficulty and expense to the government is +thus occasioned that his councilors advise Felipe II to abandon the +Philippines and Moluccas, as not worth so much cost. This he refuses +to do, on account of the necessity and duty of converting the pagans +in those lands--a decision confirmed also by Felipe III. Argensola +enumerates the various arguments pro and con regarding the retention +of the islands by Spain, which he justifies for the sake of converting +the heathen. The points thus far given are those of the brief synopsis +which results from our examination of books i-iv in the _Conqvista_, +Turning to book v, we find a brief outline of the conquest of the +Philippines by Legazpi, their peoples, their chief products, and their +fauna. The expedition of Peñalosa to conquer Ternate is described; +it proves a failure, for various causes. The king of Spain sends the +"invincible armada" against England (1588), desiring to check the +inroads of Northern heretics against Spanish commerce in the Orient; +but that fleet is defeated, and dispersed. Santiago de Vera also +sends an expedition against Ternate, but it also is a failure. One +of the princes that island asks for Spanish aid to gain its royalty +for himself--offering, in return, to become a vassal of Spain; but +his death prevents any further arrangement of this sort. Gomez Perez +Dasmariñas undertakes an expedition for the conquest of the Moluccas, +of which and of his tragic end a full account is given in book vi, +furnishing much interesting information thereon which is not elsewhere +to be obtained. Dasmariñas drafts rowers from among the Filipino +natives and the Chinese, by force; this causes much resentment among +them. He obtains full reports of affairs in the Moluccas, and advice +regarding the conduct of the campaign, from the Jesuits in those +islands. Dasmariñas sets out on this expedition (October 17, 1594), +his own galley being manned by Chinese rowers. These, being harshly +treated, mutiny, and murder all the Spaniards on the galley save two +(October 25), a friar and the governor's secretary. The governor's +death renders necessary the appointment of a temporary successor to his +office; this is his son, Luis Perez Dasmariñas. The murderers return +to Luzón, with armed vessels, hoping to find the country defenseless +and conquer it; but the forces at Manila are sufficient to overawe +the Chinese. + +At this juncture, Langara, king of Camboja, asks for aid from the +Spaniards; and Dasmariñas sends for this purpose an expedition under +command of Gallinato. The Spaniards slay the usurper of the Cambojan +throne; this dignity is offered to Gallinato, but he refuses it, and +Ruiz and Velloso replace the rightful heir on the throne. Dasmariñas +himself undertakes another expedition to Camboja, at his own cost; +but he is driven by storms to the Chinese coast, some of his ships are +wrecked, and another is destroyed, with most of its crew, by Malays +at Camboja. These disasters put an end, for the time, to any further +attempts against Ternate. + +Argensola relates the exploits of Figueroa and his successors in +subduing the Mindanaos, who are aided by the king of Ternate, as +being in a sense his vassals. Felipe II dies (1598), and for a time +the affairs of Moluccas are neglected. Book vii mainly relates to +Dutch voyages to the Eastern Archipelago; the presence of the Dutch +encourages the Ternatans to keep up their resistance to the Spaniards +and Portuguese. Governor Acuña arrives in the Philippines (May, 1602), +and for some time is occupied with the internal affairs of the colony +and the establishment of amicable relations with the Japanese. These +matters being settled, he turns his mind toward the conquest of +the Moluccas; and he coöperates with the expedition under Furtado +de Mendoza, which had been sent for this purpose from India. The +combined fleets meet with temporary successes at Ternate, but are +finally compelled to abandon the undertaking. The home government +finally decides that it must be again and effectively prosecuted; +and that Acuña himself shall conduct another expedition against the +Moluccas. The royal decree for this (dated June 20 1604) is given +in full. + +Argensola relates the great fire in Manila and the Chinese +insurrection, both in 1603; he gives some information thereon which +is not found in other accounts. This revolt, although quelled, +causes great disturbance of business and industry, and much want +and distress, in Manila, which had so largely been dependent +upon its Chinese population. Soon afterward reënforcements and +supplies are received there from Mexico. In February, 1605, a Dutch +fleet appears in the Eastern archipelago, and captures Amboina and +Tidore. Portuguese fugitives from Tidore inform Acuña of the purpose +of the Dutch to attack the galleons on the Mexican route and perhaps +other Spanish interests; and to drive out the Spaniards from that +quarter of the world. He immediately sends more men to the garrisons +in the Pintados, and takes other precautions. The arrival of numerous +reënforcements at Manila encourages him and checks the insolence of +surrounding peoples. The Dutch aid the Ternatans, while Acuña makes +vigorous preparations for the expedition to be made against these +foes. He sails with over three thousand men, in thirty-six vessels, +from Iloilo on January 5, 1606. The flagship is wrecked at La Caldera; +the other vessels mistake their course, and do not reach the Moluccas +until late in March. They besiege Ternate, and finally carry it by +assault; the city and fort are pillaged by the soldiers. Afterward the +king is induced to surrender and Acuña makes a treaty with him. The +king surrenders his forts and restores all captives; delivers up any +Dutchmen or Spanish renegades who may be in Ternate; and gives up +the villages of Christian natives in adjacent islands. Acuña leaves a +strong garrison in Ternate, and carries the king and other captives +to Manila. A few weeks after his return, Acuña dies--by poison, +according to popular rumor. + +To this volume is appended (apropos of an allusion by Morga) an +interesting account of the ancient customs observed by the natives of +Pampanga in the administration of justice. These differed, according to +the social status of the parties concerned, and the kind of crime; but, +in general, certain fixed amounts were paid as the penalties for most +crimes, and in some cases the penalty was life for life. If the culprit +could not pay the fine, he was usually sold as a slave. Parricide and +infanticide were apparently unknown among them. Marriages, divorces, +inheritances, enslavements, disputes, etc., are all considered in this +account, obtained by the Franciscan Juan de Plasencia from the natives. + + +_The Editors_ +June, 1904. + + + + + +SUCESOS DE LAS ISLAS FILIPINAS (_concluded_) + +By Dr. Antonio de Morga. Mexico: at the shop of Geronymo Balli in +the year 1609; printed by Cornelio Adriano Cesar. + +SOURCE: The translation is made from the Harvard copy of the original +printed work. + +TRANSLATION: This is made by Alfonso de Salvio, Norman F. Hall, +and James Alexander Robertson. + + + + +EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS. [1] + + +Chapter Seventh (_concluded_) + +On the tenth [of July] [2] of the same year, the vessels +"Espiritu-Santo" and "Jesus Maria" left the port of Cabit en route +for Nueva España--in the wake of two smaller vessels, which had been +despatched a fortnight before--with the Filipinas merchandise. Don Lope +de Ulloa was their commander, while Doctor Antonio de Morga left those +islands in the almiranta, the "Santo Espiritu," to fill the office of +alcalde of the court of Mexico. Before leaving the bay, both vessels +were struck head on by a storm, and went dragging upon the coast, +buffeted by the heavy seas and winds, and amid dark and tempestuous +weather, from three in the afternoon until morning of the next day, +notwithstanding that they were anchored with two heavy cables in the +shelter of the land, and their topmasts struck. Then they grounded +upon the coast, in La Pampanga, ten leguas from Manila. The storm +lasted for three more consecutive days. Consequently it was regarded +as impossible for those vessels to sail and make their voyage, +inasmuch as the season was now well advanced, and the vessels +were very large and heavily laden, and were deeply imbedded in the +sand. Advice was immediately sent overland to Manila, whence were +brought several Chinese ships, cables, and anchors. By dint of the +great efforts exerted, both vessels, each singly, were fitted with +tackle and cables, which were rigged at the stern. There awaiting the +high tide, the ships were drawn, by force of capstan and men, stern +first for more than one legua through a bank of sand, upon which +they had struck, until they were set afloat, on the twenty-second +of July, St. Magdelen's day. Immediately they set sail again, +as the vessels had sustained no injury, nor sprung any leak; and +they made their voyage and navigation, under light winds, to the +coast of Nueva España. A violent south-southwest gale, accompanied +by heavy showers, hail, and cold, struck the ship "Espiritu Sancto" +on the tenth of November, in forty-two degrees, and within sight of +land. The wind was blowing obliquely toward the shore, upon which the +vessel was almost wrecked several times. The vessel suffered distress +and lost its rigging, while the crew was worn out by the voyage and +with the cold. The storm lasted until November twenty-second. On the +morning of that day, while the ship was in the trough of the waves, +and with topmasts shipped, it was struck by a squall of rain and hail, +accompanied by great darkness. A thunderbolt, descending the mainmast, +struck the vessel amidships. It killed three men besides wounding and +maiming eight others; it had entered the hatches, and torn open the +mainhatch, with a blaze of light, so that the interior of the ship +could be seen. Another thunderbolt fell down along the same mast +among the entire crew, and stunned sixteen persons, some of whom +were speechless and unconscious all that day. It left the vessel +by the pump-dale. The next day, the wind veered to north-northeast, +whereupon the ship set sail, and went coasting along the land, with +sufficient winds until the nineteenth of the month of December, +when it made port at Acapulco. There were found the two smaller +vessels that had sailed first from Manila. Three days later, General +Don Lope de Ulloa entered the same port of Acapulco, in the ship +"Jesus Maria." That vessel had sustained the same storms as the ship +"Espiritu Sancto." From the time when the two vessels had separated, +on sailing out of the channel of Capul, in the Filipinas Islands, +they had not sighted one another again during the entire voyage. + +In the same year six hundred and three, Governor Don Pedro de Acuña +sent the ship "Sanctiago" from Manila to Japon, with merchandise. It +was ordered to make its voyage to Quanto, in order to comply with the +desire and wish of Daifusama. As news had been already received of the +death of Fray Geronimo de Jesus, four of the most important religious +of his order in Manila--namely, Fray Diego de Bermeo [3] (who had been +provincial), Fray Alonso de la Madre de Dios, Fray Luys Sotello, [4] +and one other associate--sailed on that vessel for the said kingdom. + +As soon as the ships "Jesus Maria" and "Espiritu Sancto" sailed for +Nueva España, and the ship "Sanctiago" with the religious for Japon, +there was more time to discuss further the matter started by the coming +of the Chinese mandarins. For finding themselves unoccupied with other +matters, fear of the Sangleys became universal, and the suspicions that +were current that the Sangleys were about to commit some mischievous +outbreak. This the archbishop and some religious affirmed and told, +publicly and privately. At this time, a considerable number of Chinese +were living in Manila and its environs. Some of them were baptized +Christians living in the settlements of Baibai and Minondoc, [5] on the +other side of the river, opposite the city. Most of them were infidels, +occupied and living in these same settlements and in the shops of +the parián in the city; [they were employed] as merchants and in all +other occupations. The majority of them were fishermen, stonecutters, +charcoal-burners, porters, masons, and day-laborers. Greater security +was always felt in regard to the merchants, for they are the better +class of people, and those who are most interested, because of their +property. So great security was not felt about the others, even though +they were Christians; because, as they are a poor and covetous people, +they would be inclined to any act of meanness. However, it was always +thought that it would be difficult for them to cause any commotion, +unless a strong fleet came from China, on which they could rely. Talk +continued to increase daily, and with it suspicion; for some of the +Chinese themselves, both infidels and Christians, in order to prove +themselves friends of the Spaniards, and clean from all guilt, even +told the Spaniards that there was to be an insurrection shortly, +and other similar things. Although the governor always considered +these statements as fictions and the exaggerations of that nation, +and did not credit them, yet he was not so heedless that he did not +act cautiously and watch, although with dissembling, for whatever +might happen. He took pains to have the city guarded and the soldiers +armed, besides flattering the most prominent of the Chinese and the +merchants, whom he assured of their lives and property. The natives +of La Pampanga and other provinces near by were instructed beforehand +to supply the city with rice and other provisions, and to come to +reënforce it with their persons and arms, should necessity arise. The +same was done with some Japanese in the city. As all this was done +with some publicity, since it could not be done secretly, as so many +were concerned, one and all became convinced of the certainty of the +danger. Many even desired it, in order to see the peace disturbed, +and to have the opportunity to seize something. [6] From that time, +both in the city and its environs, where the Sangleys were living +scattered, these people began to persecute the Sangleys by word and +deed. The natives, Japanese and soldiers of the camp took from them +their possessions and inflicted on them other ill-treatment, calling +them dogs and traitors, and saying that they knew well that they +meant to rebel. But they said they would kill all the Sangleys first, +and that very soon, for the governor was preparing for it. This alone +was sufficient to make it necessary for the Sangleys to do what they +had no intention of doing. [7] Some of the most clever and covetous +set themselves to rouse the courage of the others, and to make +themselves leaders, telling the Sangleys that their destruction was +sure, according to the determination which they saw in the Spaniards, +unless they should anticipate the latter, since they [the Sangleys] +were so numerous, and attack and capture the city. They said that +it would not be difficult for them to kill the Spaniards, seize +their possessions, and become masters of the country, with the aid +and reënforcements that would immediately come to them from China, +as soon as the auspicious beginning that they would have made in +the matter should be known. In order to do this when the time came, +it was advisable to build a fort and quarters in some retired and +strong place near the city, where the people could gather and unite, +and where arms and supplies could be provided for the war. At least +such a fort would be sufficient to assure there their lives from +the outrages that they were expecting from the Spaniards. It was +learned that the chief mover in this matter was a Christian Sangley, +an old-time resident in the country, named Joan Bautista de Vera. [8] +He was rich and highly esteemed by the Spaniards, and feared and +respected by the Sangleys. He had often been governor of the latter, +and had many godchildren and dependents. He had become an excellent +Spaniard, and was courageous. He himself, exercising duplicity and +cunning, did not leave the city, or the houses of the Spanish during +this time, in order to arouse less suspicion of himself. From there +he managed the affair through his confidants; and in order to assure +himself better of the result, and to ascertain the number of men of +his race, and to make a census and list of them, he cunningly had +each of them ordered to bring him a needle, which he pretended to +be necessary for a certain work that he had to do. These needles he +placed, as he received them, in a little box; and when he took them +out of it, he found that he had sufficient men for his purpose. They +began to construct the fort or quarters immediately at a distance of +slightly more than one-half legua from the village of Tondo, among some +estuaries and swamps, and in a hidden location. [9] They stored there +some rice and other provisions, and weapons of little importance. The +Sangleys began to gather there, especially the masses--the common +people and day-laborers; for those of the parián, and the mechanics, +although urged to do the same, did not resolve to do it, and remained +quiet, guarding their houses and property. The restlessness of the +Sangleys daily continued to become more inflamed. This, and the +advices given to the governor and the Spaniards, kept the latter +more anxious and apprehensive, and made them talk more openly of the +matter. The Sangleys, seeing that their intention was discovered, and +that delay might be of so great harm to them, determined, although the +insurrection was planned for St. Andrew's day, the last of November, +to anticipate that day, and to lose no more time. On Friday, the +third day of the month of October, the eve of St. Francis, they +collected very hurriedly in the above-mentioned fort; consequently, +by nightfall, there were two thousand men in it. Joan Bautista de +Vera--a thief in the rôle of an honest man, since he was the leader +and organizer of the treason--went immediately to the city and +told the governor that the Sangleys had risen, and that they were +collecting on the other side of the river. The governor, suspecting +the mischief, had him immediately arrested and carefully guarded; +and he was afterward executed. Then, without tap of drum, the governor +ordered the companies, both of the camp and the city, to be notified, +and all to hold their arms in readiness. Very shortly after nightfall, +Don Luys Dasmariñas, who was living near the monastery and church of +Minondoc, on the other side of the river, came hurriedly to the city +to advise the governor that the Sangleys had revolted. He asked for +twenty soldiers to go to the other side [of the river], where he would +guard the said monastery. Cristoval de Axqueta, sargento-mayor of the +camp, went with these men, together with Don Luys. As the silence +of night deepened, the noise made by the Sangleys grew louder, for +they were continuing to assemble and were sounding horns and other +instruments, after their fashion. Don Luys remained to guard the +monastery, with the men brought from Manila, where he had placed +in shelter many women and children of Christian Sangleys, with the +religious. The sargento-mayor returned immediately to the city, +where he told of what was being done. The call to arms was sounded, +for the noise and shouts of the Sangleys, who had sallied out to set +fire to some houses in the country, was so great that it was thought +that they were devastating that district. The Sangleys burned, first, +a stone country-house belonging to Captain Estevan de Marquina. The +latter was living there with his wife and children; and none of them +escaped, except a little girl, who was wounded, but who was hidden +in a thicket. [10] Thence the Sangleys went to the settlement of +Laguio, [11] situated on the shore of the river, and burned it. They +killed several Indians of that settlement, and the rest fled to the +city. There the gates were already shut and all the people, with +arms in hand, manned the walls and other suitable posts, ready for +any emergency, until dawn. The enemy, who now had a greater number +of men, retired to their fort, to make another sally thence with more +force. Don Luys Dasmariñas, who was guarding the church and monastery +of Minondoc, expected hourly that the enemy was about to attack him, +and sent a messenger to the governor to beg for more men. These were +sent him, and consisted of regulars and inhabitants of the city, +under Captains Don Tomas Brabo de Acuña (the governor's nephew), +Joan de Alcega, Pedro de Arzeo, and Gaspar Perez, by whose counsel and +advice Don Luys was to be guided on this occasion. All was confusion, +shouting, and outcry in the city, particularly among the Indians, and +the women and children, who were coming thither for safety. Although, +to make certain of the Sangleys of the parián, their merchants had +been asked to come into the city, and bring their property, they did +not dare to do so; for they always thought that the enemy would take +the city because of their great force of numbers, and annihilate the +Spaniards, and they would all be in danger. Consequently they preferred +to remain in their parián, in order to join the victorious side. Don +Luys Dasmariñas thought it advisable to go in search of the enemy +immediately with the reënforcements sent him by the governor, before +they should all assemble and present a strong front. He left seventy +soldiers in Minondoc, in charge of Gaspar Perez; while with the rest, +about one hundred and forty of the best picked arquebusiers, he +went to the village of Tondo, in order to fortify himself in the +church, a stone building. He arrived there at eleven o'clock in the +morning. The Chinese, in number one thousand five hundred, arrived +at the same place at the same time, bent on the same purpose. An +hour's skirmish took place between the two sides, as to which one +would gain the monastery. Captain Gaspar Perez came up with the +reënforcement of the men left at Minondoc. The enemy retired to his +fort, with a loss of five hundred men. Gaspar Perez returned to his +post, where Pedro de Arzeo was also stationed. Don Luys Dasmariñas, +exultant over this fortunate engagement, determined immediately to +press forward in pursuit of the enemy with his men, notwithstanding +the heat of the sun and without waiting to rest his followers. He sent +Alferez Luys de Ybarren to reconnoiter. The latter brought word that +the enemy was in great force, and near by. Although Juan de Alcega +and others requested Don Luys to halt and rest his men, and await +the governor's orders as to what was to be done, his desire not to +lose the opportunity was so great that, rousing his men with harsh +words, in order to make them follow him, he marched forward until +they reached a swamp. After leaving the swamp, they came suddenly +into a large clearing, where the enemy was stationed. The latter, +upon seeing the Spaniards, surrounded them in force on all sides, +armed with clubs, some with catans, and a few with battle-axes. Don +Luys and his men, not being able to retreat, fought valiantly, and +killed a number of Sangleys. But finally, as the latter were in so +great force, they cut all the Spaniards to pieces, only four of whom +escaped, badly wounded; and these carried the news to Manila. [12] +This result was of great importance to the Sangleys, both because so +many and the best Spanish soldiers were killed in this place, and +because of the weapons that the Sangleys took from them, and which +they needed. With these arms they flattered themselves that their +object was more certain of accomplishment. Next day, October five, +the Sangleys sent the heads of Don Luys, Don Tomas, Joan de Alcega, +and other captains to the parián; and they told the Sangleys there +that, since the flower of Manila had been killed, they should revolt +and join them, or they would immediately come to kill them. The +confusion and grief of the Spaniards in the city was so great that +it prevented them from taking the precautions and exercising the +diligence demanded by the affair. But the sight of their necessity, +and the spirit of their governor and officials made them all remain +at their posts on the walls, arms in hand. They fortified as strongly +as possible the gates of the parián and of Dilao, and all that part of +the wall where the enemy might make an assault. They mounted a piece of +artillery above each gate, and stationed there the best men, among whom +were religious of all the orders. Upon that day, Sunday, the enemy, +flushed with the victory of the preceding day and their army swelled +by the additional men that joined them, attacked the city. Burning +and destroying everything in their path, they went to the river, for +there was no vessel with which to resist them, as all those of the +fleet were in the provinces of the Pintados. They entered the parián, +[13] and furiously assaulted the city gate, but were driven back by +the arquebuses and muskets, with the loss of many Sangleys. They +went to the church of Dilao, and there assaulted the gate and walls +(which were there lower), by means of scaling-ladders, with the same +determination. But they experienced the same resistance and loss, +which compelled them, on the approach of night, to retire with great +loss to the parián and to Dilao. That whole night the Spaniards +spent in guarding their wall, and in preparing for the morrow. The +enemy passed the night in the parián and at Dilao, making carts, +mantelets, scaling-ladders, artificial fire, and other contrivances, +for approaching and assaulting the wall, and for burning the gates, +and setting fire to everything. At dawn of the next day, Monday, the +Sangleys came together with these arms and tools, and having reached +the wall with their bravest and best-armed men, attacked it with +great fury and resolution. The artillery destroyed their machines, and +caused them so great injury and resistance with it and the arquebuses, +that the Sangleys were forced to retire again to the parián and +to Dilao, with heavy loss. Joan Xuarez Gallinato, accompanied by +some soldiers and a Japanese troop, made a sally from the Dilao gate +upon the Sangleys. They reached the church, when the Sangleys turned +upon them and threw the Japanese into disorder. The latter were the +cause of all retreating again to seek the protection of the walls, +whither the Sangleys pursued them. At this juncture Captain Don Luys de +Velasco entered Manila. He came from the Pintados in a stout caracoa, +manned by some good arquebusiers, while others manned some bancas that +sailed in the shelter of the caracoa. They approached the parián and +Dilao by the river, and harassed the enemy quartered there on that and +the two following days, so that they were compelled to abandon those +positions. These vessels set fire to the parián, and burned everything, +and pursued the enemy wherever they could penetrate. The Sangleys, +upon beholding their cause waning, and their inability to attain the +end desired, resolved to retire from the city, after having lost more +than four thousand men; to advise China, so that that country would +reënforce them; and for their support to divide their men into three +divisions in different districts--one among the Tingues of Passic, the +second among those of Ayonbon, and the third at La Laguna de Bay, San +Pablo, and Batangas. On Wednesday they abandoned the city completely, +and, divided as above stated, marched inland. Don Luys de Velasco, +with some soldiers and armed Indians who came from all sides to the +relief of Manila, accompanied by some Spaniards who guided them, and +the religious from their missions, went by way of the river in pursuit +of them, and pressed them, so that they killed and annihilated the +bands bound for the Tingues of Passic and for Ayombon. The majority +and main body of the Sangleys went to La Laguna de Bay, the mountains +of San Pablo, and Batangas, where they considered themselves more +secure. Burning towns and churches, and everything in their path, they +fortified themselves in the above-mentioned sites. Don Luys de Velasco, +with seventy soldiers, continued to pursue them, killing each day a +great number of them. On one occasion Don Luys was so closely engaged +with the enemy, that the latter killed him and ten soldiers of his +company, and fortified themselves again in San Pablo and Batangas, +where they hoped to be able to sustain themselves until the arrival +of reënforcements from China. [14] + +The governor, fearful of this danger, and desirous of finishing +the enemy, and giving entire peace to the country, sent Captain +and Sargento-mayor Cristoval de Axqueta Menchaca with soldiers +to pursue and finish the enemy. This man left with two hundred +Spaniards--soldiers and volunteers--three hundred Japanese, and one +thousand five hundred Pampanga and Tagál Indians, [15] on the twentieth +of October. He was so expeditious, that with little or no loss of +men, he found the Sangleys fortified in San Pablo and Batangas, and, +after fighting with them, killed and destroyed them all. None escaped, +except two hundred, who were taken alive to Manila for the galleys. The +captain was occupied in this for twenty days, and with it the war was +ended. Very few merchants were left in Manila, and they had taken the +good counsel to betake themselves, with their possessions, among the +Spaniards in the city. At the beginning of the war there were not +seven hundred Spaniards in the city capable of bearing arms. [16] + +After the end of the war, the need of the city began, for, because +of not having Sangleys who worked at the trades, and brought in +all the provisions, there was no food, nor any shoes to wear, +not even at excessive prices. The native Indians are very far from +exercising those trades, and have even forgotten much of farming, and +the raising of fowls, cattle, and cotton, and the weaving of cloth, +which they used to do in the days of their paganism and for a long +time after the conquest of the country. [17] In addition to this, +people thought that Chinese vessels would not come to the islands +with food and merchandise, on account of the late revolution. Above +all, they lived not without fear and suspicion that, instead of +the merchant vessels, an armed fleet would attack Manila, in order +to avenge the death of their Sangleys. All conspired to sadden the +minds of the Spaniards. After having sent Fray Diego de Guevara, +prior of the monastery of St. Augustine in Manila, to the court of +España by way of India, with news of this event--but who was unable +to reach Madrid for three years, because of his various fortunes +in India, Persia, and Italia, through which countries he went--they +immediately sent Captain Marco de la Cueva, together with Fray Luys +Gandullo of the Order of St. Dominic, to the city of Macao in China, +where the Portuguese were living, with letters for the chief captain +and the council of that city. These letters advised the latter of +the revolt of the Sangleys, and of the result of the war, so that, +if they should hear any rumors of a Chinese fleet, they could send +word. At the same time letters were taken from the governor to the +Tutons, Aytaos, and visitors of the provinces of Canton and Chincheo, +recounting the outbreak of the Chinese, which obliged the Spaniards +to kill them. Upon their arrival at Macao, Marcos de la Cueva and +Fray Luys Gandullo found no news of a fleet, but that everything was +quiet--although the Chinese had already heard of the insurrection and +much of the result, from some Sangleys who had fled from Manila in +champans, upon that occasion. It was immediately learned in Chincheo +that these Spaniards were in Macao, whereupon Captains Guansan Sinu +and Guachan, wealthy men and usually engaged in trade with Manila, +went to look for them. Having learned the truth of the event, they +took the letters for the mandarins and promised to deliver them. They +urged other merchants and vessels of Chincheo, who were afraid, to go +to Manila that year. This was very useful, for through them much of the +necessity that the city [of Manila] was suffering was supplied. With +this result and with some powder, saltpeter, and lead which Marcos +de la Cueva had provided for the magazines, the latter left Macao, +and sailed to Manila, which he reached in May, to the universal joy +of the city over the news that he brought--which began to be verified +immediately by the coming of the fleet of thirteen Chinese vessels +bearing food and merchandise. + +In the month of June of this year six hundred and three, [18] two +vessels were despatched from Manila to Nueva España, under command +of Don Diego de Mendoça who had been sent that year by the viceroy, +Marques de Montesclaros, with the usual reënforcements for the +islands. The flagship was "Nuestra Señora de los Remedios" and the +almiranta "Sant Antonio." + +Many rich men of Manila, warned by the past troubles, took passage +in these vessels with their households and property, for Nueva +España--especially in the almiranta--with the greatest wealth that +has ever left the Filipinas. Both vessels experienced so severe +storms during the voyage, in the altitude of thirty-four degrees, +and before having passed Japon, that the flagship, without masts and +greatly lightened and damaged, put back in distress to Manila. The +almiranta was swallowed up in the sea, and no one was saved. This was +one of the greatest shipwrecks and calamities that the Filipinas have +suffered since the past ones. + +During the rest of that year and that of six hundred and five, until +the sailing of the vessels which were to go to Castilla, [19] the +governor occupied himself in repairing the city, and supplying it with +provisions and ammunition, with the special object and care that the +decision which he was awaiting from the court for making an expedition +to Maluco--of which he had been advised and warned--should not find +him so unprepared as to cause him to delay the expedition. In this +he was very successful, for at that same time, the master-of-camp, +Joan de Esquivel, had arrived in Mexico with six hundred soldiers +from España. In Mexico more men were being enrolled, and a great +preparation was made of ammunition, food, money, and arms, which the +viceroy sent to the governor from Nueva España in March of that year, +by order of his Majesty, in order that he might go to Maluco. All +this arrived safely and in due season at Manila. + +Shortly after the ships had left Manila for Nueva España, and those +despatched thence by the viceroy had entered, Archbishop Don Fray +Miguel de Benavides died of a long illness. His body was buried +amid the universal devotion and grief of the city. [20] At this same +time, Don Pedro de Acuña received three letters, by the ships that +continued to come from China that year, with the merchandise and +with their principal captains. They were all of the same tenor--when +translated into Castilian--from the Tuton and Haytao, and from the +inspector-general of the province of Chincheo, and were on the matter +of the insurrection of the Sangleys and their punishment. They were +as follows: + + + + + +[This letter occupies folios 113b-115a of the original edition of +Morga. We have already presented that document in our V0L. XIII, +p. 287, which is translated from a copy of the original manuscript. The +answer of Acuña to this letter will be found in V0L. XIV, in the +second document of that volume.] + + + + + +The letter of the inspector-general was written on the twelfth of +the second month--which according to our reckoning is March of the +twenty-third year of the reign of Vandel [_i.e._, Wanleh]. The eunuch's +[21] letter was written on the sixteenth of the said month and year; +and that of the viceroy, on the twenty-second of the month. + +The governor answered these letters through the same messengers, +civilly and authoritatively. He gave an explanation of the deed and +justified the Spaniards, and offered friendship and trade anew with the +Chinese. He said that their property, which had remained in Manila, +would be restored to the owners, and that those imprisoned in the +galleys would be freed in due season. First, however, he intended to +use them for the Maluco expedition, which he was undertaking. + +The entrances into various provinces of Japon by the discalced +religious of St. Francis and those of St. Dominic and St. Augustine, +continued to be made, both in the Castilian vessel itself which was +despatched that year to the kingdoms of Quanto, [22] and in other +Japanese vessels which came to Manila with the silver and flour of the +Japanese, in order to trade. This was permitted and allowed by Daifu, +now called Cubosama, who that year sent the governor, through one of +his servants, certain weapons and presents, in return for others which +the governor had sent him. He answered the latter's letter as follows: + + + _Letter from Daifusama, lord of Japon, to governor Don Pedro + de Acuña, in the year one thousand six hundred and five._ + + I received two letters from your Lordship, and all the + gifts and presents mentioned in the memorandum. Among them, + when I received them, the wine made from grapes pleased + me greatly. During former years, your Lordship requested + permission for six vessels, and last year for four, and I + always granted your request. But, what angers me greatly is + that among the four vessels that your Lordship requested was + that one called "Antonio," which made the voyage without my + orders. This was a very lawless act, and in contempt of me. Can + it be, perhaps, that your Lordship would send to Japon without + my permission any vessel that you wished? Besides this, your + Lordship and others have often negotiated about the sects + of Japon, and requested many things in regard to them. This + likewise I cannot concede; for this region is called Xincoco + [Shinkoku], or "dedicated to the idols." These have been + honored with the highest adoration from the time of our + ancestors until now, and their acts I alone cannot undo or + destroy. Consequently, it is not at all advisable that your + religion be promulgated or preached in Japon; and if your + Lordship wish to preserve friendship with these kingdoms + of Japon and with me, do what I wish, and never do what is + displeasing to me. Lastly, many have told me that many wicked + and perverse Japanese, who go to that kingdom and live there + for many years, afterward return to Japon. This makes me + very angry. Consequently, your Lordship will, in the future, + allow no one of the Japanese to come here in the vessels that + come from your country. In other matters, your Lordship shall + act advisedly and prudently, and shall so conduct affairs, + that henceforth I may not be angered on account of them. + +The governor, carrying out his dearest wish, was to make the +expedition to Terrenate in the Malucos, which should be done quickly, +before the enemy could gather more strength than he had then; for +he had been informed that the Dutch, who had seized the island +and fortress of Amboino, had done the same with that of Tidore, +whence they had driven the Portuguese who had settled therein, and +had entered Terrenate, where they had established a trading-post for +the clove-trade. Accordingly, as soon as the despatches in regard to +this undertaking arrived from España, in June of six hundred and five, +and the men and supplies from Nueva España, which were brought at the +same time by the master-of-camp, Joan de Esquivel, the governor spent +the balance of this year in preparing the ships, men, and provisions +that he deemed necessary for the undertaking. Leaving behind in +Manila sufficient force for its defense, he went to the provinces of +Pintados, where the fleet was collected, in the beginning of the year +six hundred and six. + +By the fifteenth day of the month of March, the governor had +thoroughly prepared the fleet--which consisted of five ships, four +galleys with poop-lanterns [_galeras de fanal_], three galliots, four +champans, three funeas, two English lanchas, two brigantines, one +barca chata [23] for the artillery, and thirteen fragatas with high +freeboard. There were one thousand three hundred Spaniards, counting +regulars, captains and officers, substitutes [_entretenidos_], and +volunteers. Among them were some Portuguese captains and soldiers, +under charge of the chief captain of Tidore, [24] who was at that +island when the Dutch seized it. These Portuguese came from Malaca +to serve in the expedition. There were also four hundred Indian +pioneers--Tagáls and Pampangos of Manila--who went to serve at their +own cost, under their own officers, and with their own weapons. There +was a quantity of artillery of all kinds, ammunition, tools, and +provisions for nine months. [25] Don Pedro de Acuña left the point of +Hilohilo, which is near the town of Arevalo in the island of Panai, +[on the above day] with all this equipment, and coasting the island +of Mindanao, made port at La Caldera, in order to replenish his water, +wood, and other necessaries. + +The governor embarked in the galley "Santiago" and took under +his charge the other galleys and oared vessels. The ship "Jesus +Maria" acted as flagship of the other vessels, and was commanded +by the master-of-camp, Joan de Esquivel. Captain and Sargento-mayor +Cristoval de Azcueta Menchaca acted as admiral of the fleet, which, +after attending to its necessities at La Caldera, left that port. On +setting sail, the flagship, which was a heavy vessel, was unable to +leave port, and the currents drove it shoreward so that, without the +others being able to help it, it grounded. It was wrecked there, but +the crew, artillery, and a portion of its ammunition and clothing, +were saved. After setting fire to the ship, and taking what nails and +bolts they could, so that the Mindanaos could not make use of them, +the fleet continued its voyage. The galleys coasted along the island +of Mindanao, and the ships and other deep-draught vessels sailed in +the open sea, all making for the port of Talangame, in the island of +Terrenate. The vessels, although experiencing some changes of weather, +first sighted the islands of Maluco, after they had been reconnoitered +by a large Dutch ship, well equipped with artillery, which was anchored +at Terrenate. This vessel fired some heavy artillery at our vessels, +and then immediately entered the port, where it fortified itself under +shelter of the land, and with its artillery and crew and the people +of Terrenate. The master-of-camp went with his vessels to the island +of Tidore, where he was well received by the Moro chiefs and cachils; +for the king was away, as he had gone to the island of Bachan to be +married. The master-of-camp found four Dutch factors there, who were +trading for cloves. He learned from them that the ship at Terrenate +was from Holland, and was one of those which had sailed from Amboino +and seized Tidore, whence it had driven the Portuguese, and that it was +being laden with cloves. It was awaiting other vessels of its convoy, +for they had made friendship and treaties with Tidore and Terrenate, +in order to be protected against the Castilians and Portuguese. The +master-of-camp had the king of Tidore summoned immediately, and, +while awaiting Don Pedro de Acuña, rested his men and cleaned the +ships, and made gabions and other things necessary for the war. Don +Pedro de Acuña, through his pilots' fault, had gone thirty leguas +to leeward of the island of Terrenate toward the island of Celebes, +otherwise called Mateo. Recognizing that island, he returned to +Terrenate, and passing in sight of Talangame, discovered the Dutch +vessel. He tried to reconnoiter it, but after seeing that it was +harming his galleys with its artillery, and that the master-of-camp +was not there, he proceeded to Tidore, where he found the latter, +to the great joy of all. There they spent the remainder of the month +of March. At this juncture the king of Tidore arrived, with twelve +well-armed caracoas. He expressed joy at the governor's coming, to +whom he complained at length of the tyranny and subjection in which +he was kept by Sultan Zayde, [26] king of Terrenate, who was aided +by the Dutch. He offered to go in person to serve his Majesty in the +fleet, with six hundred men of Tidore. Don Pedro received him and +feasted him. Then, without any further delay at Tidore, or any more +concern about the ship at Talangame, he set about the chief purpose +for which they had come. On the last of March he started to return to +Terrenate. On that day he anchored in a harbor between the settlement +and the port, as did also the king of Tidore with his caracoas. That +same night the Dutch ship weighed anchor and went to Amboino. At dawn +of next day, April first, soldiers were landed with some difficulty, +with the intention of marching along the shore (which was a very close +and narrow stretch) to the fort, in order to plant the artillery, +with which to bombard it. As the governor thought that mischief would +ensue because of the narrowness and closeness of the pass, he landed +a number of pioneers on the high ground, to open another road, so +that the remainder of the army might pass, and the enemy be diverted +in several directions. By these efforts, he placed his camp under +the walls, although a great number of Terenatans came from various +directions to prevent him. The vanguard of the camp was in charge +of Joan Xuarez Gallinato and Captains Joan de Cuevas, Don Rodrigo +de Mendoça, Pasqual de Alarcon, Joan de Cervantes, Captain Vergara, +and Cristoval de Villagra, with their companies. The other captains +were in the body of the squadron. The rearguard was under command of +Captain Delgado, while the master-of-camp aided in all parts. The +army came up within range of the enemy's artillery, which suddenly +began to play. The governor came to see how the troops were formed, +and, leaving them at their post, returned to the fleet to have the +pieces brought out for bombarding, and to obtain refreshment for +the soldiers. Some high trees intervened between the troops and the +wall, in which the enemy had posted some scouts to reconnoiter the +field. They were driven down, and our own scouts posted there, who gave +advice from above of what was being done in the fort. Captain Vergara, +and after him, Don Rodrigo de Mendoça and Alarcon, went to reconnoiter +the walls, the bastion of Nuestra Señora, and the pieces mounted on +the ground there, and a low wall of rough stone which extended to +the mountain, where there was a bastion in which the wall ended. It +was called Cachiltulo, and was defended with pieces of artillery and +a number of culverins, muskets, arquebuses, and pikes; while many +other weapons peculiar to the Terenatans were placed along the wall +for its defense. Having seen and reconnoitered all this, although not +with impunity, because the enemy had killed six soldiers with the +artillery and wounded Alferez Joan de la Rambla in the knee with a +musket-ball, the Spaniards returned to the army. A trifle past noon, +a lofty site was reconnoitered, in the direction of the bastion of +Cachiltulo, whence the enemy could be attacked and driven from the +wall; and Captain Cuevas was ordered to occupy it with twenty-five +musketeers. Having done this, the enemy sent out a crowd of men +to prevent him from occupying it. A skirmish ensued, and the Moros +turned and retreated to their wall. Cuevas followed them so closely +and persisted so long, that he needed reënforcement. The scouts in +the trees gave information of what was being done, whereupon Captains +Don Rodrigo de Mendoça, Alarcon, Cervantes, and Vergara reënforced +him with their light-armed pikemen and halberdiers. They pursued +the enemy with so great rapidity and resolution that they entered +the walls behind them. However, some of the Spaniards were wounded, +and Captain Cervantes was pushed down from the wall and his legs +broken, which caused his death. Captain Don Rodrigo de Mendoça, +pursuing the enemy, who were retiring, ran inside the wall as far +as the cavalier of Nuestra Señora, while Vergara ran in the opposite +direction along the curtain of the wall to the bastion of Cachiltulo, +and went on as far as the mountain. By this time the main body of the +army had already assaulted the wall. Mutually aiding one another, +they mounted the wall and entered the place on all sides, although +with the loss of some dead and wounded soldiers. The soldiers were +stopped by a trench beyond the fort of Nuestra Señora, for the enemy +had retreated to a shed, which was fortified with a considerable number +of musketeers and arquebusiers, and four light pieces. They discharged +their arquebuses and muskets at the Spaniards, and threw cane spears +hardened in fire, and _bacacaes_, [27] after their fashion. The +Spaniards assaulted the shed, whereupon a Dutch artilleryman trying to +fire a large swivel-gun, with which he would have done great damage, +being confused did not succeed, and threw down the linstock, turned, +and fled. The enemy did the same after him, and abandoned the shed, +fleeing in all directions. Those who would do so embarked with the king +and some of his wives and the Dutch in one caracoa and four _juangas_ +[28] which they had armed near the king's fort. Captain Vergara entered +the fort immediately, but found it deserted. Don Rodrigo de Mendoça and +Villagra pursued the enemy toward the mountain for a long distance, +and killed many Moros. With this, at two o'clock in the afternoon, +the settlement and fort of Terrenate was completely gained. The +Spanish banners and standards were flung from it, without it having +been necessary for them to bombard the walls, as they had expected; +and the fort was taken at so slight cost to the Spaniards. Their dead +numbered fifteen men, and the wounded twenty more. The whole town was +reconnoitered, even its extremity--a small fort, called Limataen--which +contained two pieces of artillery, and two other pieces near the +mosque on the seashore. The loot of the place was of small importance, +for already the things of most value, and the women and children, +had been removed to the island of Moro, whither the king fled and +took refuge in a fort that he had there. Some products of that land +were found, and a great quantity of cloves. In the factory of the +Dutch were found two thousand ducados, some cloth goods and linens, +and many weapons, while in many places were excellent Portuguese and +Dutch artillery, a number of culverins and a quantity of ammunition, +of which possession was taken for his Majesty. [29] A guard was +placed over what was gained, and the place was put in a condition +for defense with some pieces taken from the fleet, while the governor +ordered and provided whatever else was advisable. + +Cachil Amuxa, the king's nephew and the greatest chief of Terrenate, +came with other cachils to make peace with the governor. He said +that he and all the Terenatans wished to be vassals of his Majesty, +and that they would have rendered homage long before, but the king +prevented them. The latter as a proud man, and, confident in his +own opinion, although he had been advised to surrender the fort to +his Majesty and render him homage, had steadily refused to do so, +having been encouraged and emboldened by the success that he had +gained upon other occasions. That was the reason that he found himself +in his present wretched condition. He offered to induce the king to +leave the fort of Moro if given assurance of life. Don Pedro de Acuña +received this Moro well, and as a Portuguese, Pablo de Lima--one of +those whom the Dutch had driven from Tidore, a man of high standing, +and well acquainted with the king--offered to accompany him, the +governor despatched them with a written passport as follows: + + + _Passport from Don Pedro de Acuña to the king of Terrenate_ + + I, Don Pedro de Acuña, governor, captain-general, and president + of the Filipinas Islands, and general of this army and fleet, + declare that, over my signature, I hereby give security of + life to the king of Terrenate, in order that he may come to + talk with me--both to him and those whom he may bring with + him--reserving to myself the disposal of all the others as + I may see fit. I certify this in his Majesty's name. And + I order that no person of this fleet molest him or any + of his possessions, and that all observe what is herein + contained. Given in Terrenate, April six, one thousand six + hundred and six. + + _Don Pedro de Acuña_ + + +Within nine days Cachilamuja and Pablo de Lima returned to Terrenate +with the king, the prince, his son, [30] and others of his relatives, +cachils and sangajes, [31] under the said passport. They placed +themselves under the governor's power, and he received them with +great affection and respect. He lodged the king and his son in a +good house in the settlement, under guard of a company. The king +restored the villages of Christians that his Majesty had possessed +in the island of Moro, when the fort of Terrenate was lost by the +Portuguese. He placed his person and kingdom in his Majesty's power, +and surrendered a quantity of muskets and heavy artillery that he had +in some forts of the said island. The governor did not despoil him +of his kingdom, but on the contrary allowed him to appoint two of his +men to govern, whose choice was to be ratified by himself. The king, +his son the prince, and their cachils and sangajes swore homage to his +Majesty. The kings of Tidore and Bachan, and the sangaje of La Bua did +the same, and covenanted and promised not to admit either the Dutch +or other nations into Maluco for the clove-trade. They promised, as +his Majesty's vassals, to go on all occasions to serve him with their +persons, men, and ships, whenever summoned by whomever commanded the +fort of Terrenate; that they would oppose no obstacles to the Moros +who wished to become Christians; that if any wicked Christian went +to their lands to turn renegade, they would surrender him; and other +suitable things. Therewith great and small were content and pleased, +since they were freed from the tyranny of the king of Terrenate. The +governor remitted to them the third part of the tributes which they +were wont to pay their king, and gave the Moros other advantages. Then +he planned a new and modern fort, in a very conspicuous and suitable +location, and began to build it. In order that the old fort might be +better defended while the new one was being completed, he reduced it +to a less size, by making new cavaliers and bastions, which he finished +and furnished with ramparts and stout gates. He commenced another fort +in the island of Tidore, on a good location near the settlement. After +placing in order whatever he judged necessary in Terrenate and Tidore, +and in the other towns and fortresses of Maluco, he returned with +his fleet to the Filipinas. He left the master-of-camp, Joan de +Esquivel, with a garrison of six hundred soldier--five hundred, +in five companies, for Terrenate--in the fort of Terrenate to act +as his assistant and as governor of Maluco; he also left there one +large forge and a number of smiths, sixty-five pioneers, thirty-five +stonecutters, two galliots, two well-armed brigantines, and crews of +rowers. The other company of soldiers [was to be stationed] in Tidore +under command of Captain Alarcon; while ammunition and provisions for +one year were left in both forts. In order to be more assured of the +[peaceful] condition of the country, he took the king of Terrenate +from it and carried him to Manila, as well as his son the prince, and +twenty-four cachils and sangajes, most of them the king's relatives, +to whom he showed every honor and good treatment. He explained to +them why he took them, and that their return to Maluco depended upon +the security and tranquillity with which the Moros should conduct +themselves in their obedience and service to his Majesty. [32] The +three Portuguese galliots returned to Malaca, taking with them the +Dutch who were in Maluco and the Portuguese captains and soldiers who +had come to take part in this expedition. The governor entered Manila +in triumph with the remainder of the fleet, on the last day of May, +six hundred and six. He was received there with acclamations of joy +and praise from the city, who gave thanks to God for so happy and +prompt result in an undertaking of so great weight and importance. + +During the governor's absence in Maluco, the royal Audiencia of +the islands governed the Filipinas. The Audiencia wished to drive +a number of Japanese from the city, for they were a turbulent +people and promised little security for the country. When this +was attempted and force employed, the Japanese resisted, and the +matter came to such a pass that they took arms to oppose it, and +it was necessary for the Spaniards to take their arms also. The +affair assumed definite proportions, and some on either side wished +to give battle. However, it was postponed by various means until, +through the efforts of certain religious, the Japanese were quieted; +and afterward as many as possible were embarked in vessels, although +they resented it greatly. This was one of the greatest dangers that +has threatened Manila, for the Spaniards were few in number, and the +Japanese more than one thousand five hundred, and they are a spirited +and very mettlesome race. Had they come to blows on this occasion, +the Spaniards would have fared ill. [33] + +The governor, upon entering Manila, took over immediately the affairs +of his government, especially the despatching of two vessels about to +sail to Nueva España. He was present in person in the port of Cabit +at the equipment and lading of the ships, and the embarcation of the +passengers. He was seized by some indisposition of the stomach which +compelled him to return to Manila and take to his bed. His pain and +vomiting increased so rapidly that, without its being possible to +relieve him, he died in great anguish on St. John's day, to the great +sorrow and grief of the country. Especially did the king of Terrenate +show and express his grief, for he had always received great honor +and kind treatment from the governor. It was suspected that his death +had been violent, because of the severity and the symptoms of his +illness. The suspicion increased, because the physicians and surgeons, +having opened his body, declared, from the signs that they found, +that he had been poisoned, which made his death more regrettable. [34] +The Audiencia buried the governor in the monastery of St. Augustine +at Manila, with the pomp and ostentation due to his person and +offices. Then, again taking charge of the government, the Audiencia +despatched the vessels to Nueva España, whence advice was sent to +his Majesty of the taking of Maluco and the death of the governor. + +The flagship, in which Don Rodrigo de Mendoça was sailing as general +and captain, reached Nueva España quickly with this news. The +almiranta, notwithstanding that it left the islands at the same +time, delayed more than six months. Eighty persons who perished +from disease were buried in the sea, while many others stricken by +the disease died of it upon landing at the port of Acapulco. Among +these was the licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera, auditor of Manila, +who had been appointed auditor of Mexico. + +At the arrival of these vessels, it was learned that since the death +of Don Pedro de Acuña, and the taking over of the government by the +Audiencia, no change had occurred in the affairs of the islands; +but that their commerce was restricted because of the prohibition +which forbade sending to the islands more than five hundred thousand +pesos each year of the proceeds from the sale of the merchandise in +Nueva España. On account of this the people were in need, as this +amount appeared little for the many Spaniards and for the extent +of the trade--by which all classes are sustained, as they have no +other resources or capital. Also, although the gaining of Maluco had +been so important for affairs in those islands themselves, and their +punishment for the reduction of the other rebels--especially those +of Mindanao and Jolo, from whom the Filipinas had received so great +injury--the desirable quiet and stability had not been secured. For +the Mindanaos and the Joloans were not yet discontinuing their +descents upon the provinces of the Pintados in their war-vessels, to +seize booty according to their custom--and this will continue until +a suitable expedition be sent against them--and Maluco affairs were +not failing to give Joan de Esquivel, the master-of-camp, sufficient +to do. He was acting as governor there and had but little security +from the natives, who, being a Mahometan people, and by nature easily +persuaded and fickle, are restless, and ready for disturbances and +wars. Daily and in different parts the natives were being incited +and aroused to rebellion; and although the master-of-camp and his +captains were endeavoring to punish and pacify them, they could not +do what was necessary to quiet so many disturbances as arose. The +soldiers were dying, and the food giving out; and the aid sent from +Manila could not arrive at the time or in so great quantity as was +requested, because of the perils of the voyage and the straits of +the royal treasury. [35] The coming of vessels to Maluco at this +time from Holanda and Zelanda was not less prejudicial to all our +interests; for the Dutch, having so great interests in the islands, +and having established their interests there so firmly, were coming +in squadrons by the India route, to recover what they had lost in +Amboino, Terrenate, and other islands. With their countenance, the +Moros were revolting against the Spaniards, who had their hands full +with them, and more so with the Dutch, for the latter were numerous, +and more dangerous enemies than the natives. + +The Dutch interest in these regions is so vast--both in the clove-trade +and that of other drugs and spices, and because they think that +they will have a gateway there for the subjugation of the whole +Orient--that, overcoming all the toil and dangers of the voyage, +they are continually coming to these islands in greater numbers and +with larger fleets. If a very fundamental and timely remedy be not +administered in this matter, it will increase to such an extent in +a short time that afterward no remedy can be applied. + +The English and Flemish usually make this voyage by way of the strait +of Magallanes. Francisco Draque [Drake] was the first to make it, +and some years later Tomas Liscander [Candish or Cavendish], who +passed by Maluco. + +Lately Oliver del Nort, a Fleming, made the voyage. The Spanish fleet +fought with his fleet amid the Filipinas Islands, at the end of the +year one thousand six hundred. In this fight, after the capture of +his almiranta (which was commanded by Lamberto Biezman) the flagship, +having lost nearly all its crew, and being much disabled, took to +flight. And as it afterward left the Filipinas, and was seen in Sunda +and the Java channels, so disabled, it seemed impossible for it to +navigate, and that it would surely be lost, as was recounted above +when treating of this. + +This pirate, although so crippled, had the good fortune to escape from +the Spaniards, and, after great troubles and hardships, he returned +to Amstradam with his ship "Mauricio," with only nine men alive, +reaching it on the twenty-sixth of August in the year six hundred +and one. He wrote the relation and the events of his voyage, and gave +plates of the battle and of the ships. This was afterward translated +into Latin and printed by Teodoro de Bri, a German, at Francfort, in +the year six hundred and two. Both relations are going the rounds, +and the voyage is regarded as a most prodigious feat and one of so +great hardships and perils. [36] + +Bartolome Perez, a pilot, gave the same news from the island of La +Palma. He, having come from England by way of Holanda, conversed +with Oliver del Nort, and the latter narrated to him his voyage +and sufferings, as mentioned by Licentiate Fernando de la Cueva in +a letter from the island of La Palma, [37] on the last of July, of +the year six hundred and four, to Marcos de la Cueva, his brother, +who was a resident of Manila, and one of the volunteers who embarked +on the Spanish flagship which fought with the pirate. This letter is +as follows. + + + I answer two of your Grace's letters in this: one dated July, + six hundred and one, and the other July, six hundred and + two. In both of them your Grace relates to me the shipwreck + that befell you and how you saved yourself by swimming. Long + before I saw your Grace's letters, I had learned of your + mishap, whereat I was very anxious and even quite grieved; + because of what was reported here, I imagined that your Grace + had a part in it. Consequently, I was singularly overjoyed + at the assurance that your Grace still possessed life and + health. Having them, one can conquer other things; and + without them human treasure has no value. By way of Flandes + (whence ships come daily to this island), I learned much, + nay, all the event, although not so minutely. For Oliver de + Nort, who was the Dutch general, with whom the engagement + occurred, arrived safely in Holanda, with eight men--and he + made nine--and without money. His purpose when he left the + rebellious states of Holanda and Zelanda, with five armed + vessels laden with merchandise--which were worth, principal + and merchandise, one hundred and fifty or two hundred thousand + ducados--was to trade and carry on commerce through the strait + (and such were his orders), in whatever parts he should + be, with friends or enemies. He was not to attack anyone, + but only to defend himself and to incline the Indians to + trade and exchange with him. All the vessels having reached + the strait together, three of them became separated there + because of storms, and must have been wrecked; for up to the + present nothing has been heard of them. Having seen himself so + abandoned, and that he could not restore his loss by trade, + or else because he did not receive a hospitable reception + from the inhabitants of Piru, he determined to exceed his + orders, and make that voyage one of plundering. Accordingly + he stationed himself at the mouth of the river to await + ships. The rest that befell, your Grace knows. Oliver de Nort + is a native of the city of Roterdam, and he reached it with + an anchor of wood. [38] He had no other with which to anchor, + nor indeed had he any other left. It is said that this is a + very heavy wood of the Indias, and he has placed it at the + door of his house, as a mark of distinction. He arrived, + as I say, with nine men, all told, very much worn out, + and as by a miracle. He has printed a book of his voyage, + with engravings of his vessels, and many other details of + what happened to him, and the hardships that they endured + in the fight and throughout the voyage, both to show his own + glory and to incite others to similar deeds. A pilot of this + island, one Bartolome Perez, was seized and taken to Inglaterra + before the peace or truce. He came through Holanda, where he + conversed at great length with Oliver. The latter told him + all that had happened to him, which is known to all, and was + discussed in this island before that voyage. Bartolome Perez + says that Oliver de Nort praised the Spaniards greatly, and + said they were the bravest men he had seen in his life. They + had gained the deck of his ship, and all the upper works, + when he cried out from below deck to set fire to the powder, + whereupon he believes that the Spaniards left for fear of + being blown up. The Dutch then had an opportunity to escape, + but so crippled were they that their reaching port seems a + miracle. The pilot says that he saw the anchor and the book, + and what pertains to the book is stated here. I have recounted + this to your Grace, because of the statements in your letter, + namely, that people considered them as lost, and so that so + singular a case may be known there. + + +Now the Dutch make the voyage more quickly and more safely, going +and coming, by way of India, but not touching at its ports or coasts, +until they reach the islands of the Javas [39]--Java major and Java +minor--and Samatra, Amboino, and the Malucas. Since they know the +district so well, and have experienced the immense profits ensuing to +them therefrom, it will be difficult to drive them from the Orient, +where they have inflicted so many losses in both spiritual and +temporal affairs. + + + +¶ _Relation of the Filipinas Islands and of their natives, antiquity, +customs, and government, both during the period of their paganism +and after their conquest by the Spaniards, and other details._ + +¶ _Chapter Eighth_ + +The islands of the eastern Ocean Sea, adjacent to farther Asia, +belonging to the crown of España, are generally called, by those who +navigate thither by way of the demarcation of Castilla and Castilla's +seas and lands of America, "the Western Islands;" for from the time +that one leaves España, he sails in the course of the sun from east +to west, until he reaches them. For the same reason they are called +"Eastern Islands" by those who sail from west to east by way of +Portuguese India, each of them circumscribing the world by voyaging +in opposite directions, until they meet at these islands, which are +numerous and of varying size; they are properly called Filipinas, +and are subject to the crown of Castilla. They lie within the tropic +of Cancer, and extend from twenty-four degrees north latitude to the +equinoctial line, which cuts the islands of Maluco. There are many +others on the other side of the line, in the tropic of Capricorn, +which extend for twelve degrees in south latitude. [40] The ancients +affirmed that each and all of them were desert and uninhabitable, [41] +but now experience has demonstrated that they deceived themselves; +for good climates, many people, and food and other things necessary +for human life are found there, besides many mines of rich metals, +with precious gems and pearls, and animals and plants, which nature +has not stinted. + +It is impossible to number all the islands--counting larger and +smaller--of this vast archipelago. Those comprised in the name and +government of Filipinas, number about forty large islands, besides +other smaller ones, all consecutive. The chiefest and best known are +Luzon, Mindoro, Tendaya, [42] Capul, Burias, Mazbate, Marinduque, +Leite, Camar, Ybabao, Sebu, Panay, Bohol, Catenduanes, Calamianes, +Mindanao, and others of less renown. + +The first island conquered and colonized by the Spaniards was +Sebu. [43] From there the conquest was started and continued in all +the neighboring islands. Those islands are inhabited by people, +natives of the same islands, called Viçayas; or by another name, +Pintados--for the more prominent of the men, from their youth, tattoo +their whole bodies, by pricking them wherever they are marked and then +throwing certain black powders over the bleeding surface, the figures +becoming indelible. But, as the chief seat of the government, and the +principal Spanish settlement, was moved to the island of Luzon--the +largest island, and that one nearest and opposite to Great China and +Japon--I shall treat of it first; for much that will be said of it is +similar in the others, to each of whose particulars and distinctive +details I shall pass in due time. + +This island of Luzon extends lengthwise, from the point and head where +one enters the Filipinas Islands (by the channel of Capul, which +lies in thirteen and one-half degrees north latitude) to the other +point in the province of Cagayan, called Cape Bojeador (and located +opposite China, in twenty degrees), more than two hundred leguas. In +some parts its width is more constricted than in others, especially in +the middle of the island, where it is so narrow that it is less than +thirty leguas from sea to sea, or from one coast to the other. The +whole island is more than four hundred leguas in circumference. + +The climates of this island are not harmonious; on the contrary, they +present a great diversity in its different districts and provinces. The +head and beginning of the island, in the region of the channel, is more +temperate in the interior, although the coasts are hot. The site of +the city of Manila is hot, for it is on the coast and is low; but in +its vicinity, quite near the city, there are districts and settlements +much cooler, where the heat is not oppressive. The same is true of the +other head of the island, opposite China, named Cagayan. The seasons +of the year--winter and summer--are contrary to those in Europe; for +the rains generally last in all these islands from the month of June +until the month of September, and are accompanied by heavy showers, +whirlwinds, and storms on sea and land. The summer lasts from October +to the end of May, with clear skies and fair winds at sea. However, +the winter and rainy season begins earlier in some provinces than +in others. [44] In Cagayan winter and summer almost coincide with +those of España, and come at the same seasons. + +The people inhabiting the province of Camarines and almost as far as +the provinces of Manila, in this great island of Luzon, both along +the coast and in the interior, are natives of this island. They are +of medium height, with a complexion like stewed quinces; and both +men and women are well-featured. They have very black hair, and +thin beards; and are very clever at anything that they undertake, +keen and passionate, and of great resolution. All live from their +labor and gains in the field, their fishing, and trade, going from +island to island by sea, and from province to province by land. + +The natives of the other provinces of this island as far as Cagayan are +of the same nature and disposition, except that it has been learned +by tradition that those of Manila and its vicinity were not natives +of this island, but came thither in the past and colonized it; and +that they are Malay natives, and come from other islands and remote +provinces. [45] + +In various parts of this island of Luzon are found a number of +natives black in color. Both men and women have woolly hair, and their +stature is not very great, although they are strong and robust. These +people are barbarians, and have but little capacity. They possess no +fixed houses or settlements, but wander in bands and hordes through +the mountains and rough country, changing from one site to another +according to the season. They support themselves in certain clearings, +and by planting rice, which they do temporarily, and by means of the +game that they bring down with their bows, in the use of which they +are very skilful and certain. [46] They live also on honey from the +mountains, and roots produced by the ground. They are a barbarous +people, in whom one cannot place confidence. They are much given to +killing and to attacking the settlements of the other natives, in which +they commit many depredations; and there is nothing that can be done +to stop them, or to subdue or pacify them, although this is always +attempted by fair or foul means, as opportunity and necessity demand. + +The province of Cagayan is inhabited by natives of the same complexion +as the others of the island, although they are better built, and more +valiant and warlike than the others. They wear their hair long and +hanging down the back. They have been in revolt and rebellion twice +since the first time when they were pacified; and there has been plenty +to do, on different occasions, in subduing them and repacifying them. + +The apparel and clothing of these natives of Luzon before the +entrance of the Spaniards into the country were generally, for the +men, certain short collarless garments of _cangan_, sewed together +in the front, and with short sleeves, and reaching slightly below +the waist; some were blue and others black, while the chiefs had +some red ones, called _chinanas_. [47] They also wore a strip of +colored cloth wrapped about the waist, and passed between the legs, +so that it covered the privy parts, reaching half-way down the thigh; +these are called _bahaques_. [48] They go with legs bare, feet unshod, +and the head uncovered, wrapping a narrow cloth, called _potong_ [49] +just below it, with which they bind the forehead and temples. About +their necks they wear gold necklaces, wrought like spun wax, [50] +and with links in our fashion, some larger than others. On their arms +they wear armlets of wrought gold, which they call _calombigas_, +and which are very large and made in different patterns. Some wear +strings of precious stones--cornelians and agates; and other blue +and white stones, which they esteem highly. [51] They wear around +the legs some strings of these stones, and certain cords, covered +with black pitch in many foldings, as garters. [52] + +In a province called Zambales, they wear the head shaved from the +middle forward. On the skull they have a huge lock of loose hair. [53] +The women throughout this island wear small jackets [_sayuelos_] +with sleeves of the same kinds of cloth and of all colors, called +_varos_. [54] They wear no shifts, but certain white cotton garments +which are wrapped about the waist and fall to the feet, while other +dyed cloths are wrapped about the body, like kirtles, and are very +graceful. The principal women have crimson ones, and some of silk, +while others are woven with gold, and adorned with fringe and other +ornaments. They wear many gold necklaces about the neck, calumbigas +on the wrists, large earrings of wrought gold in the ears, and rings +of gold and precious stones. Their black hair is done up in a very +graceful knot on the head. Since the Spaniards came to the country many +Indians do not wear _bahaques_, but wide drawers of the same cloths and +materials, and hats on their heads. The chiefs wear braids of wrought +gold containing many designs, while many of them wear shoes. The chief +women also wear beautiful shoes, many of them having shoes of velvet +adorned with gold, and white garments like petticoats. + +Men and women, and especially the chief people, are very clean and neat +in their persons and clothing, and of pleasing address and grace. They +dress their hair carefully, and regard it as being more ornamental when +it is very black. They wash it with water in which has been boiled +the bark of a tree called _gogo_. [55] They anoint it with aljonjoli +oil, prepared with musk, and other perfumes. All are very careful of +their teeth, which from a very early age they file and render even, +with stones and iron. [56] They dye them a black color, which is +lasting, and which preserves their teeth until they are very old, +although it is ugly to look at. [57] + +They quite generally bathe the entire body in the rivers and creeks, +both young and old, without reflecting that it could at any time be +injurious to them; [58] for in their baths do they find their best +medicines. When an infant is born, they immediately bathe it, and +the mother likewise. The women have needlework as their employment +and occupation, and they are very clever at it, and at all kinds of +sewing. They weave cloth and spin cotton, and serve in the houses +of their husbands and fathers. They pound the rice for eating, +[59] and prepare the other food. They raise fowls and swine, and +keep the houses, while the men are engaged in the labors of the +field, and in their fishing, navigation, and trading. They are not +very chaste, either single or married women; while their husbands, +fathers, or brothers are not very jealous or anxious about it. Both +men and women are so selfish and greedy that, if they are paid, they +are easily won over. When the husband finds his wife in adultery, +he is smoothed and pacified without any trouble--although, since they +have known Spaniards, some of those who assume to be more enlightened +among them have sometimes killed the adulterers. Both men and women, +especially the chiefs, walk slowly and sedately when upon their +visits, and when going through the streets and to the temples; and +are accompanied by many slaves, both male and female, with parasols +of silk which they carry to protect them from the sun and rain. The +women walk ahead and their female servants and slaves follow them; +behind these walk their husbands, fathers, or brothers, with their +man-servants and slaves. [60] + +Their ordinary food is rice pounded in wooden mortars, and cooked--this +is called _morisqueta_, [61] and is the ordinary bread of the whole +country--boiled fish (which is very abundant), the flesh of swine, +deer, and wild buffaloes (which they call _carabaos_). Meat and fish +they relish better when it has begun to spoil and when it stinks. [62] +They also eat boiled camotes (which are sweet potatoes), beans, +_quilites_ [63] and other vegetables; all kinds of bananas, guavas, +pineapples, custard apples, many varieties of oranges, and other +varieties of fruits and herbs, with which the country teems. Their +drink is a wine made from the tops of cocoa and nipa palm, of which +there is a great abundance. They are grown and tended like vineyards, +although without so much toil and labor. Drawing off the tuba, [64] +they distil it, using for alembics their own little furnaces and +utensils, to a greater or less strength, and it becomes brandy. This is +drunk throughout the islands. It is a wine of the clarity of water, +but strong and dry. If it be used with moderation, it acts as a +medicine for the stomach, and is a protection against humors and all +sorts of rheums. Mixed with Spanish wine, it makes a mild liquor, +and one very palatable and healthful. + +In the assemblies, marriages, and feasts of the natives of these +islands, the chief thing consists in drinking this wine, day and night, +without ceasing, when the turn of each comes, some singing and others +drinking. As a consequence, they generally become intoxicated without +this vice being regarded as a dishonor or disgrace. [65] + +The weapons of this people are, in some provinces, bow and arrows. But +those generally used throughout the islands are moderate-sized spears +with well-made points; and certain shields of light wood, with their +armholes fastened on the inside. These cover them from top to toe, +and are called _carasas_ [_kalasag_]. At the waist they carry a +dagger four fingers in breadth, the blade pointed, and a third of +a vara in length; the hilt is of gold or ivory. The pommel is open +and has two cross bars or projections, without any other guard. They +are called _bararaos_. They have two cutting edges, and are kept in +wooden scabbards, or those of buffalo-horn, admirably wrought. [66] +With these they strike with the point, but more generally with the +edge. When they go in pursuit of their opponent, they show great +dexterity in seizing his hair with one hand, while with the other +they cut off his head with one stroke of the bararao, and carry +it away. They afterward keep the heads suspended in their houses, +where they may be seen; and of these they make a display, in order +to be considered as valiant, and avengers of their enemies and of +the injuries committed by them. [67] + +Since they have seen the Spaniards use their weapons, many of the +natives handle the arquebuses and muskets quite skilfully. Before the +arrival of the Spaniards they had bronze culverins and other pieces +of cast iron, with which they defended their forts and settlements, +although their powder is not so well refined as that of the Spaniards. + +Their ships and boats are of many kinds; for on the rivers and creeks +inland they use certain very large canoes, each made from one log, +and others fitted with benches and made from planks, and built up +on keels. They have vireys and barangays, which are certain quick +and light vessels that lie low in the water, put together with little +wooden nails. These are as slender at the stern as at the bow, and they +can hold a number of rowers on both sides, who propel their vessels +with _bucçeyes_ or paddles, and with _gaones_ [68] on the outside +of the vessel; and they time their rowing to the accompaniment of +some who sing in their language refrains by which they understand +whether to hasten or retard their rowing. [69] Above the rowers is +a platform or gangway, built of bamboo, upon which the fighting-men +stand, in order not to interfere with the rowing of the oarsmen. In +accordance with the capacity of the vessels is the number of men on +these gangways. From that place they manage the sail, which is square +and made of linen, and hoisted on a support or yard made of two thick +bamboos, which serves as a mast. When the vessel is large, it also +has a foresail of the same form. Both yards, with their tackle, can be +lowered upon the gangway when the weather is rough. The helmsmen are +stationed in the stern to steer. It carries another bamboo framework +on the gangway itself; and upon this, when the sun shines hot, +or it rains, they stretch an awning made from some mats, woven from +palm-leaves. These are very bulky and close, and are called _cayanes_ +[70] Thus all the ship and its crew are covered and protected. There +are also other bamboo frameworks for each side of the vessel, which +are so long as the vessel, and securely fastened on. They skim the +water, without hindering the rowing, and serve as a counterpoise, +so that the ship cannot overturn nor upset, however heavy the sea, +or strong the wind against the sail. It may happen that the entire +hull of these vessels, which have no decks, may fill with water and +remain between wind and water, even until it is destroyed and broken +up, without sinking, because of these counterpoises. These vessels have +been used commonly throughout the islands since olden times. They have +other larger vessels called caracoas, _lapis_, and _tapaques_, which +are used to carry their merchandise, and which are very suitable, +as they are roomy and draw but little water. They generally drag +them ashore every night, at the mouths of rivers and creeks, among +which they always navigate without going into the open sea or leaving +the shore. All the natives can row and manage these boats. Some are +so long that they can carry one hundred rowers on a side and thirty +soldiers above to fight. The boats commonly used are barangays and +vireys, which carry a less crew and fighting force. Now they put +many of them together with iron nails instead of the wooden pegs and +the joints in the planks, while the helms and bows have beaks like +Castilian boats. [71] + +The land is well shaded in all parts by trees of different kinds, +and fruit-trees which beautify it throughout the year, both along +the shore and inland among the plains and mountains. It is very full +of large and small rivers, of good fresh water, which flow into the +sea. All of them are navigable, and abound in all kinds of fish, +which are very pleasant to the taste. For the above reason there +is a large supply of lumber, which is cut and sawed, dragged to the +rivers, and brought down, by the natives. This lumber is very useful +for houses and buildings, and for the construction of small and large +vessels. Many very straight thick trees, light and pliable, are found, +which are used as masts for ships and galleons. Consequently, vessels +of any size may be fitted with masts from these trees, made of one +piece of timber, without its being necessary to splice them or make +them of different pieces. For the hulls of the ships, the keels, +futtock-timbers, top-timbers, and any other kinds of supports and +braces, compass-timbers, transoms, knees small and large, and rudders, +all sorts of good timber are easily found; as well as good planking +for the sides, decks, and upper-works, from very suitable woods. [72] + +There are many native fruit-trees, such as the _sanctors_, _mabolos_, +tamarinds, _nancas_, custard-apples, papaws, guavas, and everywhere +many oranges, of all kinds--large and small, sweet and sour; +citrons, lemons, and ten or twelve varieties of very healthful and +palatable bananas. [73] There are many cocoa-palms bearing fruit +of pleasant taste--from which is made wine and common oil, which +is a very healing remedy for wounds; and other wild palms of the +forests--that do not yield cocoa-nuts, but serve as wood, and from +whose bark is made bonote, a tow for rigging and cables, and also for +calking ships. Efforts have been made to plant olives and quinces, +and other fruit-trees of España, but as yet they have had no success, +except with pomegranates and grapevines, which bear fruit the second +year. These bear abundance of exceedingly good grapes three times a +year; and some fig-trees have succeeded. Vegetables of every kind +grow well and very abundantly, but do not seed, and it is always +necessary to bring the seeds from Castilla, China, or Japon. + +In the Cagayan provinces are found chestnut-trees, which produce +fruit. In other districts are found pines and other trees which yield +certain very large pine-nuts, with a hard shell and a pleasant taste, +which are called piles. [74] There is abundance of cedar which is +called _calanta_, a beautiful red wood called _asana_, [75] ebony of +various qualities, and many other precious woods for all uses. The meat +generally eaten is that of swine, of which there is a great abundance, +and it is very palatable and wholesome. + +Beef is eaten, cattle being raised abundantly in stock-farms in +many different parts of the islands. The cattle are bred from those +of China and Nueva España. [76] The Chinese cattle are small, and +excellent breeders. Their horns are very small and twisted, and some +cattle can move them. They have a large hump upon the shoulders, and +are very manageable beasts. There are plenty of fowls like those of +Castilla, and others very large, which are bred from fowls brought +from China. They are very palatable, and make fine capons. Some of +these fowls are black in feather, skin, flesh, and bones, and are +pleasant to the taste. [77] Many geese are raised, as well as swans, +ducks, and tame pigeons brought from China. There is abundance of +flesh of wild game, such as venison, and wild boars, and in some parts +porcupines. There are many buffaloes, which are called carabaos, which +are raised in the fields and are very spirited; others are brought +tame from China; these are very numerous, and very handsome. These +last are used only for milking, and their milk is thicker and more +palatable than that of cows. + +Goats and kids are raised, although their flesh is not savory, because +of the humidity of the country. These animals sicken and die for that +reason, and because they eat certain poisonous herbs. Ewes and rams, +although often brought from Nueva España, never multiply. Consequently +there are none of these animals, for the climate and pasturage has not +as yet seemed suitable for them. [78] There were no horses, mares, or +asses in the islands, until the Spaniards had them brought from China +and brought them from Nueva España. Asses and mules are very rare, +but there are many horses and mares. Some farms are being stocked with +them, and those born there (mixed breeds for the most part) turn out +well, and have good colors, are good tempered and willing to work, and +are of medium size. Those brought from China are small, very strong, +good goers, treacherous, quarrelsome, and bad-tempered. Some horses +of good colors are brought from Japon. They have well-shaped bodies, +thick hair, large fetlocks, large legs and front hoofs, which makes +them look like draft-horses. Their heads are rather large, and their +mouths hard. They run but slowly, but walk well, and are spirited, +and of much mettle. The daily feed of the horses consists throughout +the year of green provender, [79] besides rice in the husk, which +keeps them very fat. [80] + +There are many fowls and field birds, and wild birds of wonderful +colors and very beautiful. There are no singing birds suitable for +keeping in cages, although some calendar larks [_Calandrias_] called +_fimbaros_, [81] smaller than those of España, are brought from Japon, +whose song is most sweet. There are many turtle-doves, ring-doves; +other doves with an extremely green plumage, and red feet and beaks; +and others that are white with a red spot on the breast, like a +pelican. Instead of quail, there are certain birds resembling them, +but smaller, which are called _povos_ [82] and other smaller birds +called mayuelas. [83] There are many wild chickens and cocks, which +are very small, and taste like partridge. There are royal, white, and +grey herons, flycatchers, and other shore birds, ducks, lavancos, [84] +crested cranes, sea-crows, eagles, eagle-owls, and other birds of prey, +although none are used for hawking. There are jays and thrushes as in +España, and white storks and cranes. [85] They do not rear peacocks, +rabbits, or hares, although they have tried to do so. It is believed +that the wild animals in the forests and fields eat and destroy them, +namely, the cats, foxes, badgers, and large and small rats, which +are very numerous, and other land animals. [86] + +Throughout these islands are found a great number of monkeys, of +various sizes, with which at times the trees are covered. There are +green and white parrots, but they are stupid in talking; and very +small parroquets, of beautiful green and red colors, which talk as +little. The forests and settlements have many serpents, of various +colors, which are generally larger than those of Castilla. Some have +been seen in the forests of unusual size, and wonderful to behold. [87] +The most harmful are certain slender snakes, of less than one vara +in length, which dart down upon passersby from the trees (where they +generally hang), and sting them; their venom is so powerful that +within twenty-four hours the person dies raving. + +There are many very large scorpions in the rivers and creeks, and a +great number of crocodiles, which are very bloodthirsty and cruel. They +quite commonly pull from their bancas the natives who go in those +boats, and cause many injuries among the horned cattle and the horses +of the stock-farms, when they go to drink. And although the people fish +for them often and kill them, they are never diminished in number. For +that reason, the natives set closely-grated divisions and enclosures +in the rivers and creeks of their settlements, where they bathe. There +they enter the water to bathe, secure from those monsters, which they +fear so greatly that they venerate and adore them, as if they were +beings superior to themselves. All their oaths and execrations, and +those which are of any weight with them (even among the Christians) +are, thus expressed: "So may the crocodile kill him!" They call the +crocodile _buhaya_ in their language. It has happened when some one +has sworn falsely, or when he has broken his word, that then some +accident has occurred to him with the crocodile, which God, whom he +offends, has so permitted for the sake of the authority and purity +of the truth, and the promise of it. [88] + +The fisheries of sea and rivers are most abundant, and include all +kinds of fish; both of fresh and salt water. These are generally used +as food throughout the entire country. There are many good sardines, +sea-eels, sea-breams (which they call _bacocos_), daces, skates, +_bicudas_, _tanguingues_, soles, _plantanos_, [89] _taraquitos_, +needle-fish, gilt-heads, and eels; large oysters, mussels, [90] +_porçebes_, crawfish, shrimp, sea-spiders, center-fish, and all kinds +of cockles, shad, white fish, and in the Tajo River of Cagayan, [91] +during their season, a great number of _bobos_, which come down to +spawn at the bar. In the lake of Bonbon, a quantity of tunny-fish, +not so large as those of España, but of the same shape, flesh, and +taste, are caught. Many sea-fish are found in the sea, such as whales, +sharks, _caellas_, _marajos_, _bufeos_, and other unknown species +of extraordinary forms and size. In the year of five hundred and +ninety-six, during a furious storm in the islands, a fish was flung +into shallow water on one of the Luzon coasts near the province of +Camarines. It was so huge and misshapen, that although it lay in +more than three and one-half braças of water, it could not again +get afloat, and died there. The natives said that they had never +seen anything like it, nor another shaped like it. Its head was of +wonderful size and fierce aspect. On its frontal it bore two horns, +which pointed toward its back. One of them was taken to Manila. It +was covered with its skin or hide, but had no hair or scales. It was +white, and twenty feet long. Where it joined the head it was as thick +as the thigh, and gradually tapered proportionally to the tip. It +was somewhat curved and not very round; and to all appearances, +quite solid. It caused great wonder in all beholders. [92] + +There is a fresh-water lake in the island of Luzon, five leguas from +Manila, which contains a quantity of fish. Many rivers flow into this +lake, and it empties into the sea through the river flowing from it +to Manila. It is called La Laguna de Bay ["Bay Lake"]. It is thirty +leguas in circumference, and has an uninhabited island in its middle, +where game abounds. [93] Its shores are lined with many native +villages. The natives navigate the lake, and commonly cross it in +their skiffs. At times it is quite stormy and dangerous to navigate, +when the north winds blow, for these winds make it very boisterous, +although it is very deep. + +Twenty leguas from Manila, in the province of Bonbon, is another lake +of the same name [Bonbon], not so extensive as the former, but with +a great abundance of fish. The natives' method of catching them is +by making corrals [94] of bejucos, which are certain slender canes +or rushes, solid and very pliant and strong; these are employed +for making cables for the natives' boats, as well as other kinds +of ropes. They catch the fish inside these corrals, having made the +enclosures fast by means of stakes. They also catch the fish in wicker +baskets made from the _bejucos_, but most generally with _atarrayas_, +[95] _esparaveles_, other small _barrederas_, [96] and with hand +lines and hooks. [97] The most usual food of the natives is a fish +as small as _pejerreyes_. [98] They dry and cure these fish in the +sun and air, and cook them in many styles. They like them better than +large fish. It is called _laulau_ among them. [99] + +Instead of olives and other pickled fruit, they have a green fruit, +like walnuts, which they call _paos_. [100] Some are small, and others +larger in size, and when prepared they have a pleasant taste. They also +prepare _charas_ [101] in pickle brine, and all sorts of vegetables +and greens, which are very appetizing. There is much ginger, and it +is eaten green, pickled, and preserved. There are also quantities +of _cachumba_ [102] instead of saffron and other condiments. The +ordinary dainty throughout these islands, and in many kingdoms of +the mainland of those regions, is _buyo_ [betel]. This is made from +a tree, [103] whose leaf is shaped like that of the mulberry. The +fruit resembles an oak acorn, and is white inside. [104] This fruit, +which is called _bonga_, is cut lengthwise in strips, and each strip is +put into an envelope or covering made from the leaf. With the _bonga_ +is thrown in a powder of quick lime. [105] This compound is placed +in the mouth and chewed. It is so strong a mixture, and burns so +much, that it induces sleep and intoxication. It burns the mouths of +those not used to it, and causes them to smart. The saliva and all +the mouth are made as red as blood. It does not taste bad. After +having been chewed [106] for a considerable time it is spit out, +when it no longer has any juice, which is called çapa [sapá]. They +consider very beneficial that quantity of the juice which has gone +into the stomach, for strengthening it, and for various diseases. It +strengthens and preserves the teeth and gums from all inflammations, +decay, and aches. They tell other wonderful effects of it. What has +been seen is that the natives and Spaniards--laymen and religious, +men and women--use it so commonly and generally that mornings and +afternoons, at parties and visits, and even alone in their houses, +all their refreshments and luxuries consist of buyos served on +heavily-gilded and handsomely adorned plates and trays like chocolate +in Nueva España. In these poison has been often administered from +which the persons eating them have died, and that quite commonly. + +The natives (especially the chiefs) take whenever they leave their +houses, for show and entertainment, their boxes of buyos--which they +call _buccetas_ [107]--ready to use, and the leaf, _bonga_, and quick +lime, separately. With these handsome boxes, which are made of metal +and of other materials, they carry the scissors and other tools for +making the buyo with cleanliness and neatness. Wherever they may stop, +they make and use their buyo. In the pariáns, or bazars, buyos are +sold ready made, and the outfit for making them. [108] + +The natives of these islands quite commonly use as venoms and poisons +the herbs of that class found throughout the islands. They are so +efficacious and deadly that they produce wonderful effects. There +is a lizard, commonly found in the houses, somewhat dark-green in +color, one palmo long, and as thick as three fingers, which is called +_chacon_. [109] They put this in a joint of bamboo, and cover it +up. The slaver of this animal during its imprisonment is gathered. It +is an exceedingly strong poison, when introduced as above stated, in +the food or drink, in however minute quantities. There are various +herbs known and gathered by the natives for the same use. Some of +them are used dry, and others green; some are to be mixed in food, +and others inhaled. Some kill by simply touching them with the hands +or feet, or by sleeping upon them. The natives are so skilful in +making compounds from these substances, that they mix and apply them +in such a manner that they take effect at once, or at a set time--long +or short, as they wish, even after a year. Many persons usually die +wretchedly by these means--especially Spaniards, who lack foresight, +and who are tactless and hated because of the ill-treatment that they +inflict upon the natives with whom they deal, either in the collection +of their tributes, or in other matters in which they employ them, +without there being any remedy for it. There are certain poisonous +herbs, with which, when the natives gather them, they carry, all ready, +other herbs which act as antidotes. In the island of Bohol is one herb +of such nature that the natives approach it from windward when they +cut it from the shrub on which it grows; for the very air alone that +blows over the herb is deadly. Nature did not leave this danger without +a remedy, for other herbs and roots are found in the same islands, of +so great efficacy and virtue that they destroy and correct the poison +and mischief of the others, and are used when needed. Accordingly, +when one knows what poison has been given him, it is not difficult, +if recourse be had in time, to cure it, by giving the herb that is +antidotal to such poison. At times it has happened that pressure has +been put upon the person suspected of having committed the evil to +make him bring the antidote, by which it has been remedied. There are +also other general antidotes, both for preservation against poison and +for mitigating the effects of poison that has been administered. But +the most certain and efficacious antidotes are certain small flies or +insects, of a violet color, found on certain bushes in the islands +of Pintados. These are shut up in a clean bamboo joint, and covered +over. There they breed and multiply. Ground rice is put in with them, +and they exist thereon. Every week they are visited [110] and the old +rice removed and new rice put in, and they are kept alive by this +means. If six of these insects are taken in a spoonful of wine or +water--for they emit no bad odor, and taste like cress--they produce +a wonderful effect. Even when people go to banquets or dinners where +there is any suspicion, they are wont to take with them these insects, +in order to preserve and assure themselves from any danger of poison +and venom. + +All these islands are, in many districts, rich in placers and mines +of gold, a metal which the natives dig and work. However, since the +advent of the Spaniards in the land, the natives proceed more slowly +in this, and content themselves with what they already possess in +jewels and gold ingots, handed down from antiquity and inherited from +their ancestors. [111] This is considerable, for he must be poor and +wretched who has no gold chains, calombigas [bracelets], and earrings. + +Some placers and mines were worked at Paracali in the province of +Camarines, where there is good gold mixed with copper. This commodity +is also traded in the Ylocos, for at the rear of this province, +which borders the seacoast, are certain lofty and rugged mountains +which extend as far as Cagayan. On the slopes of these mountains, +in the interior, live many natives, as yet unsubdued, and among whom +no incursion has been made, who are called Ygolotes. These natives +possess rich mines, many of gold and silver mixed. They are wont to +dig from them only the amount necessary for their wants. They descend +to certain places to trade this gold (without completing its refining +or preparation), with the Ylocos; there they exchange it for rice, +swine, carabaos, cloth, and other things that they need. [112] The +Ylocos complete its refining and preparation, and by their medium it +is distributed throughout the country. Although an effort has been +made with these Ygolotes to discover their mines, and how they work +them, and their method of working the metal, nothing definite has +been learned, for the Ygolotes fear that the Spaniards will go to +seek them for their gold, and say that they keep the gold better in +the earth than in their houses. [113] + +There are also many gold mines and placers in the other islands, +especially among the Pintados, on the Botuan River in Mindanao, +and in Sebu, where a mine of good gold is worked, called Taribon. If +the industry and efforts of the Spaniards were to be converted into +the working of the gold, as much would be obtained from any one of +these islands as from those provinces which produce the most in the +world. But since they attend to other means of gain rather than +to this, as will be told in due time, they do not pay the proper +attention to this matter. + +In some of these islands pearl oysters are found, especially in +the Calamianes, where some have been obtained that are large and +exceedingly clear and lustrous. [114] Neither is this means of profit +utilized. In all parts, seed pearls are found in the ordinary oysters, +and there are oysters as large as a buckler. From the [shells of the] +latter the natives manufacture beautiful articles. There are also +very large sea turtles in all the islands. Their shells are utilized +by the natives, and sold as an article of commerce to the Chinese +and Portuguese, and other nations who go after them and esteem them +highly, because of the beautiful things made from them. + +On the coasts of any of these islands are found many small white +snail shells, called _siguei_. The natives gather them and sell them +by measure to the Siamese, Cambodians, Pantanes, and other peoples +of the mainland. It serves there as money, and those nations trade +with it, as they do with cacao-beans in Nueva España. [115] + +Carabao horns are used as merchandise in trading with China; and +deerskins and dye-wood with Japon. The natives make use of everything +in trading with those nations and derive much profit therefrom. + +In this island of Luzon, especially in the provinces of Manila, +Panpanga, Pangasinan, and Ylocos, certain earthenware jars [_tibores_] +are found among the natives. They are very old, of a brownish color, +and not handsome. Some are of medium size, and others are smaller, +and they have certain marks and stamps. The natives are unable to +give any explanation of where or when they got them, for now they are +not brought to the islands or made there. The Japanese seek them and +esteem them, for they have found that the root of a plant called _cha_ +[tea]--which is drunk hot, as a great refreshment and medicine, among +the kings and lords of Japon--is preserved and keeps only in these +tibors. These are so highly valued throughout Japon, that they are +regarded as the most precious jewels of their closets and household +furniture. A tibor is worth a great sum, and the Japanese adorn them +outside with fine gold beautifully chased, and keep them in brocade +cases. Some tibors are valued and sold for two thousand taes of +eleven reals to the tae, or for less, according to the quality of +the tibor. It makes no difference if they are cracked or chipped, +for that does not hinder them from holding the tea. The natives of +these islands sell them to the Japanese for the best price possible, +and seek them carefully for this profit. However, few are found now, +because of the assiduity with which the natives have applied themselves +to that search. [116] + +At times the natives have found large pieces of ambergris on the +coasts. When they discovered that the Spaniards value it, they gathered +it, and have made profit from it. The past year of six hundred and +two, some natives found in the island of Sebu a good-sized piece of +ambergris, and when their encomendero heard of it, he took it, and +traded with them secretly for it, on the account of their tribute. It +is said that it weighed a good number of libras. Afterward he brought +it out and sold it by the ounce at a higher rate. [117] + +In the province and river of Butuan--which is pacified and assigned +to Spaniards, and is located in the island of Mindanao--the natives +practice another industry, which is very useful. As they possess +many civet cats, although smaller than those of Guinea, they make +use of the civet and trade it. This they do easily, for, when the +moon is in the crescent, they hunt the cats with nets, and capture +many of them. Then when they have obtained the civet, they loose the +cats. They also capture and cage some of them, which are sold in the +islands at very low prices. [118] + +Cotton is raised abundantly throughout the islands. It is spun and +sold in the skein to the Chinese and other nations, who come to +get it. Cloth of different patterns is also woven from it, and the +natives also trade that. Other cloths, called medriñaques, are woven +from the banana leaf. [119] + +The islands of Babuytanes [120] consist of many small islands lying +off the upper coast of the province of Cagayan. They are inhabited +by natives, whose chief industry consists in going to Cagayan, in +their tapaques, with swine, fowls, and other food, and ebony spears, +for exchange. The islands are not assigned as encomiendas, nor is +any tribute collected from them. There are no Spaniards among them, +as those natives are of less understanding and less civilized [than +the others]. Accordingly no Christians have been made among them, +and they have no justices. + +Other islands, called the Catenduanes, lie off the other head of +the island of Luzon, opposite the province of Camarines, in fourteen +degrees of north latitude, near the strait of Espiritu Santo. They +are islands densely populated with natives of good disposition, who +are all assigned to Spaniards. They possess instruction and churches, +and have an alcalde-mayor who administers justice to them. Most of +them cultivate the soil, but some are engaged in gold-washing, and +in trading between various islands, and with the mainland of Luzon, +very near those islands. [121] + +The island of Luzon has a bay thirty leguas in circumference on +its southern coast, situated about one hundred leguas from the cape +of Espiritu Santo, which is the entrance to the Capul channel. Its +entrance is narrow, and midway contains an island called Miraveles +[_i.e._, Corregidor] lying obliquely across it, which makes the +entrance narrow. This island is about two leguas long and one-half +legua wide. It is high land and well shaded by its many trees. It +contains a native settlement of fifty persons, and there the watchman +of the bay has his fixed abode and residence. There are channels at +both ends of the island, where one may enter the bay. The one at the +south is one-half legua wide, and has a rock in its middle called El +Fraile ["the friar"]. The one on the north is much narrower, but any +ships of any draft whatever can enter and go out by both channels. The +entire bay is of good depth, and clean, and has good anchorages in all +parts. It is eight leguas from these entrances to the colony of Manila +and the bar of the river. A large harbor is formed two leguas south +of Manila, with a point of land that shelters it. That point has a +native settlement called Cabit, [122] and it gives name to the harbor, +which is used as a port for the vessels. It is very capacious and well +sheltered from the vendavals--whether the southeast, and southwest, the +west, and west-southwest, or the north-northeast and north winds. It +has a good anchorage, with a clean and good bottom. There is a good +entrance quite near the land, more than one and one-half leguas wide, +for the ingress and egress of vessels. All the shores of this bay are +well provided with abundant fisheries, of all kinds. They are densely +inhabited by natives. Above Manila there is a province of more than +twenty leguas in extent called La Pampanga. This province possesses +many rivers and creeks that irrigate it. They all flow and empty +into the bay. This province contains many settlements of natives, and +considerable quantities of rice, fruits, fish, meat, and other foods. +[123] + +The bar of the river of Manila, which is in the same bay, near the +colony of Manila on one side and Tondo on the other, is not very deep +because of certain sand shoals on it, which change their position at +the time of the freshets and obstruct it. Consequently, although the +water is deep enough for any vessel past the bar, still, unless they +are fragatas, vireys, or other small vessels, they cannot pass the bar +to enter the river. In respect to galleys, galliots, and the vessels +from China, which draw but little water, they must enter empty, and +at high tide, and by towing. Such vessels anchor in the bay outside +the bar, and, for greater security enter the port of Cabit. + +There is another good port called Ybalon, [124] twenty leguas from +the channel of the same island of Luzon, which is sheltered from the +vendavals, and has a good entrance and anchorage. There the vessels +that enter to escape the vendaval find shelter, and wait until the +brisa returns, by which to go to Manila, eighty leguas away. + +On the coasts of Pangasinan, Ylocos, and Cagayan, there are some +ports and bars, where ships can enter and remain, such as the harbor +of Marihuma, [125] the port El Frayle ["the friar"], [126] that of +Bolinao, the bar of Pangasinan, that of Bigan, the bar of Camalayuga, +at the mouth of the Tajo River (which goes up two leguas to the +chief settlement of Cagayan)--besides other rivers, bars, harbors, +and shelters of less account for smaller vessels throughout the coasts +of this island. + +Quite near this large island of Luzon, many other islands, large +and small, are located; they are inhabited by the same natives as +Luzon, who have gold placers, sowed fields, and their trading. Such +are Marinduque, Tablas Island, Mazbate, Burias, Banton, Bantonillo, +and others of less importance. The nearest of them to Manila is the +island of Mindoro. It is more than eighty leguas long and about two +hundred in circumference. It has many settlements of the same natives, +and the side lying next the provinces of Balayan and Calilaya is so +near and close to the island of Luzon, that it forms a strait which +contains powerful currents and races, through which the ships going +to and from Manila enter and leave. The winds and currents there are +very strong. It is about one-half a legua wide. In that part is the +chief town of this island of Mindoro. It has a port that is called El +Varadero ["the place for laying up ships"] for large vessels. There +are also other anchorages and bars throughout this island for smaller +vessels; and many settlements and natives on all the coasts of this +island. All of the settlements abound in rice, food, and gold-placers, +and all kinds of game and timber. [127] + +The cape of Espiritu Santo, which is sighted by ships entering the +Filipinas Islands on the way from Nueva España, is in an island called +Tendaya, [128] in about thirteen degrees. Twenty leguas south after +turning this cape of Espiritu Santo lie the island of Viri, and many +others which are sighted. Through them an entrance opens to the island +of Sebu by a strait called San Juanillo, which is formed by these +islands. It is not very good or safe for the larger ships. But toward +the north after leaving this course, one reaches the island of Capul, +which forms a strait and channel of many currents and rough waves, +through which the ships enter. Before reaching the strait there is a +rock, or barren islet, called San Bernardino; this strait is formed by +the coast of the island of Luzon and that of the island of Capul. Its +channel is about one legua long and less wide. + +On leaving this strait, after having entered by it, three small islets +form a triangle. They are called the islands of Naranjos ["Oranges"], +and are lofty and inaccessible with steep rocks. Upon them ships are +wont to be driven by the powerful currents, even though they try to +escape them. These are not inhabited, but the others [Capul, Viri, +etc.] are large islands containing many settlements of natives and +all kinds of provisions and food. + +South of this district lie the islands of Biçayas, or, as they are +also called, Pintados. They are many in number, thickly populated with +natives. Those of most renown are Leite, Ybabao, [129] Camar [Samar], +Bohol, island of Negros, Sebu, Panay, Cuyo, and the Calamianes. All +the natives of these islands, both men and women, are well-featured, +of a good disposition, and of better nature, and more noble in their +actions than the inhabitants of the islands of Luzon and its vicinity. + +They differ from them in their hair, which the men wear cut in a cue, +like the ancient style in España. Their bodies are tattooed with many +designs, but the face is not touched. [130] They wear large earrings +of gold and ivory in their ears, and bracelets of the same; certain +scarfs wrapped round the head, very showy, which resemble turbans, +and knotted very gracefully and edged with gold. They wear also a +loose collarless jacket with tight sleeves, whose skirts reach half +way down the leg. These garments are fastened in front and are made +of medriñaque and colored silks. They wear no shirts or drawers, but +bahaques [_i.e._, breech-clouts] of many wrappings, which cover their +privy parts, when they remove their skirts and jackets. The women are +good-looking and graceful. They are very neat, and walk slowly. Their +hair is black, long, and drawn into a knot on the head. Their robes +are wrapped about the waist and fall downward. These are made of all +colors, and they wear collarless jackets of the same material. Both +men and women go naked and without any coverings, [131] and barefoot, +and with many gold chains, earrings, and wrought bracelets. + +Their weapons consist of large knives curved like cutlasses, spears, +and caraças [_i.e._, shields]. They employ the same kinds of boats as +the inhabitants of Luzon. They have the same occupations, products, +and means of gain as the inhabitants of all the other islands. These +Visayans are a race less inclined to agriculture, and are skilful +in navigation, and eager for war and raids for pillage and booty, +which they call _mangubas_. [132] This means "to go out for plunder." + +Near the principal settlement of the island of Sebu, there is a fine +port for all manner of vessels. It has a good entrance and furnishes +shelter at all times. It has a good bottom and is an excellent +anchorage. There are also other ports and bars of less importance +and consideration, as in all these islands, for smaller vessels. + +This island of Sebu is an island of more than one hundred leguas in +circumference. It has abundance of provisions, and gold mines and +placers, and is inhabited by natives. + +Beyond it lie other islands, very pleasant and well populated, +especially the island of Panay. Panay is a large island, more +than one hundred leguas in circumference, containing many native +settlements. [133] It produces considerable quantities of rice, +palm-wine, and all manner of provisions. It has flourishing and +wealthy settlements, on what is called the river of Panay. The +chief one is Oton, which has a bar and port for galleys and ships, +shipyards for building large ships, and a great amount of timber for +their construction. There are many natives, who are masters of all +kinds of shipbuilding. Near this island lies an islet eight leguas +in circumference, which is densely populated by natives who are all +carpenters. They are excellent workmen, and practice no other trade +or occupation; and, without a single tree of any size on this whole +islet, they practice this art with great ability. From there all the +islands are furnished with workmen for carpentry. The island is called +that of the Cagayanes. + +After the island of Sebu follow immediately the island of Mindanao, +an island of more than three hundred leguas in circumference, and +Joló, which is small. Lower down is the island of Borneo, a very +large island, more than five hundred leguas in circumference. All of +these islands are densely populated, although that of Borneo is not +subdued. Neither is that of Mindanao in entirety, but only the river +of Botuan, Dapitan, and the province and coast of Caragan. + +Below this island [Mindanao], before reaching that of Borneo, lie +the islands of the Calamianes. They are very numerous, and consist of +islands of various sizes, which are densely inhabited with natives; +they have some supply of provisions and engage in certain kinds +of husbandry. However the most usual occupation is that of their +navigations from island to island in pursuit of their trading and +exchange, and their fisheries; while those who live nearest the island +of Borneo are wont to go on piratical raids and pillage the natives +in other islands. + +The flow- and ebb-tides, and the high and low tides among these +islands are so diverse in them that they have no fixed rule, +either because of the powerful currents among these islands, or +by some other natural secret of the flux and reflux which the moon +causes. No definite knowledge has been arrived at in this regard, +for although the tides are highest during the opposition of the moon, +and are higher in the month of March than throughout the rest of the +year, there is so great variation in the daily tides that it causes +surprise. Some days there are two equal tides between day and night, +while other days there is but one. At other times the flow during the +day is low, and that of the night greater. They usually have no fixed +hour, for it may happen to be high-tide one day at noon, while next day +high-tide may be anticipated or postponed many hours. Or the tide of +one day may be low, and when a smaller one is expected for next day, +it may be much greater. + +The language of all the Pintados and Biçayas is one and the same, +by which they understand one another when talking, or when writing +with the letters and characters of their own which they possess. These +resemble those of the Arabs. The common manner of writing among the +natives is on leaves of trees, and on bamboo bark. Throughout the +islands the bamboo is abundant; it has huge and misshapen joints, +and lower part is a very thick and solid tree. [134] + +The language of Luzon and those islands in its vicinity differs widely +from that of the Bicayas. [135] The language of the island of Luzon +is not uniform, for the Cagayans have one language and the Ylocos +another. The Zambales have their own particular language, while the +Pampangos also have one different from the others. The inhabitants of +the province of Manila, the Tagáls, have their own language, which +is very rich and copious. By means of it one can express elegantly +whatever he wishes, and in many modes and manners. It is not difficult, +either to learn or to pronounce. + +The natives throughout the islands can write excellently with certain +characters, almost like the Greek or Arabic. These characters are +fifteen in all. Three are vowels, which are used as are our five. The +consonants number twelve, and each and all of them combine with +certain dots or commas, and so signify whatever one wishes to write, +as fluently and easily as is done with our Spanish alphabet. The method +of writing was on bamboo, but is now on paper, commencing the lines +at the right and running to the left, in the Arabic fashion. Almost +all the natives, both men and women, write in this language. There +are very few who do not write it excellently and correctly. + +This language of the province of Manila [_i.e._, the Tagál] extends +throughout the province of Camarines, and other islands not contiguous +to Luzon. There is but little difference in that spoken in the various +districts, except that it is spoken more elegantly in some provinces +than in others. [136] + +The edifices and houses of the natives of all these Filipinas +Islands are built in a uniform manner, as are their settlements; +for they always build them on the shores of the sea, between rivers +and creeks. The natives generally gather in districts or settlements +where they sow their rice, and possess their palm trees, nipa and +banana groves, and other trees, and implements for their fishing +and sailing. A small number inhabit the interior, and are called +tinguianes; they also seek sites on rivers and creeks, on which they +settle for the same reasons. + +The houses and dwellings of all these natives are universally set upon +stakes and _arigues_ [_i.e._, columns] high above the ground. Their +rooms are small and the roofs low. They are built and tiled with wood +and bamboos, [137] and covered and roofed with nipa-palm leaves. Each +house is separate, and is not built adjoining another. In the lower +part are enclosures made by stakes and bamboos, where their fowls +and cattle are reared, and the rice pounded and cleaned. One ascends +into the houses by means of ladders that can be drawn up, which are +made from two bamboos. Above are their open _batalanes_ [galleries] +used for household duties; the parents and [grown] children live +together. There is little adornment and finery in the houses, which +are called _bahandin_. [138] + +Besides these houses, which are those of the common people and those +of less importance, there are the chiefs' houses. They are built +upon trees and thick arigues, with many rooms and comforts. They are +well constructed of timber and planks, and are strong and large. They +are furnished and supplied with all that is necessary, and are much +finer and more substantial than the others. They are roofed, however, +as are the others, with the palm-leaves called nipa. These keep out +the water and the sun more than do shingles or tiles, although the +danger from fires is greater. + +The natives do not inhabit the lower part of their houses, because +they raise their fowls and cattle there, and because of the damp +and heat of the earth, and the many rats, which are enormous and +destructive both in the houses and sowed fields; and because, as +their houses are generally built on the sea shore, or on the banks of +rivers and creeks, the waters bathe the lower parts, and the latter +are consequently left open. + +There were no kings or lords throughout these islands who ruled over +them as in the manner of our kingdoms and provinces; but in every +island, and in each province of it, many chiefs were recognized by +the natives themselves. Some were more powerful than others, and +each one had his followers and subjects, by districts and families; +and these obeyed and respected the chief. Some chiefs had friendship +and communication with others, and at times wars and quarrels. [139] + +These principalities and lordships were inherited in the male +line and by succession of father and son and their descendants. If +these were lacking, then their brothers and collateral relatives +succeeded. Their duty was to rule and govern their subjects and +followers, and to assist them in their interests and necessities. What +the chiefs received from their followers was to be held by them in +great veneration and respect; and they were served in their wars and +voyages, and in their tilling, sowing, fishing, and the building of +their houses. To these duties the natives attended very promptly, +whenever summoned by their chief. They also paid the chiefs tribute +(which they called _buiz_), in varying quantities, in the crops that +they gathered. The descendants of such chiefs, and their relatives, +even though they did not inherit the lordship, were held in the +same respect and consideration. Such were all regarded as nobles, +and as persons exempt from the services rendered by the others, or +the plebeians, who were called _timaguas_. [140] The same right of +nobility and chieftainship was preserved for the women, just as for +the men. When any of these chiefs was more courageous than others +in war and upon other occasions, such a one enjoyed more followers +and men; and the others were under his leadership, even if they were +chiefs. These latter retained to themselves the lordship and particular +government of their own following, which is called _barangai_ among +them. They had _datos_ and other special leaders [_mandadores_] +who attended to the interests of the barangay. + +The superiority of these chiefs over those of their barangai was so +great that they held the latter as subjects; they treated these well +or ill, and disposed of their persons, their children, and their +possessions, at will, without any resistance, or rendering account +to anyone. For very slight annoyances and for slight occasions, they +were wont to kill and wound them, and to enslave them. It has happened +that the chiefs have made perpetual slaves of persons who have gone +by them, while bathing in the river, or who have raised their eyes +to look at them less respectfully and for other similar causes. [141] + +When some natives had suits or disputes with others over matters of +property and interest, or over personal injuries and wrongs received, +they appointed old men of the same district, to try them, the parties +being present. If they had to present proofs, they brought their +witnesses there, and the case was immediately judged according to +what was found, according to the usages of their ancestors on like +occasions; and that sentence was observed and executed without any +further objection or delay. [142] + +The natives' laws throughout the islands were made in the same manner, +and they followed the traditions and customs of their ancestors, +without anything being written. Some provinces had different customs +than others in some respects. However, they agreed in most, and in +all the islands generally the same usages were followed. [143] + +There are three conditions of persons among the natives of these +islands, and into which their government is divided: the chiefs, +of whom we have already treated; the timaguas, who are equivalent to +plebeians; and slaves, those of both chiefs and timaguas. + +The slaves were of several classes. Some were for all kinds of work +and slavery, like those which we ourselves hold. Such are called +_saguiguilires_; [144] they served inside the house, as did likewise +the children born of them. There are others who live in their +own houses with their families, outside the house of their lord; +and come, at the season, to aid him in his sowings and harvests, +among his rowers when he embarks, in the construction of his house +when it is being built, and to serve in his house when there are +guests of distinction. These are bound to come to their lord's house +whenever he summons them, and to serve in these offices without any +pay or stipend. These slaves are called _namamahays_, [145] and their +children and descendants are slaves of the same class. From these +slaves--_saguiguilirs_ and _namamahays_--are issue, some of whom are +whole slaves, some of whom are half slaves, and still others one-fourth +slaves. It happens thus: if either the father or the mother was free, +and they had an only child, he was half free and half slave. If they +had more than one child, they were divided as follows: the first +follows the condition of the father, free or slave; the second that +of the mother. If there were an odd number of children, the last was +half free and half slave. Those who descended from these, if children +of a free mother or father, were only one-fourth slaves, because of +being children of a free father or mother and of a half-slave. These +half slaves or one-fourth slaves, whether saguiguilirs or namamahays, +served their masters during every other moon; and in this respect so +is such condition slavery. + +In the same way, it may happen in divisions between heirs that a slave +will fall to several, and serves each one for the time that is due +him. When the slave is not wholly slave, but half or fourth, he has +the right, because of that part that is free, to compel his master to +emancipate him for a just price. This price is appraised and regulated +for persons according to the quality of their slavery, whether it be +saguiguilir or namamahay, half slave or quarter slave. But, if he is +wholly slave, the master cannot be compelled to ransom or emancipate +him for any price. + +The usual price of a sanguiguilir slave among the natives is, at most, +generally ten taes of good gold, or eighty pesos; if he is namamahay, +half of that sum. The others are in the same proportion, taking into +consideration the person and his age. + +No fixed beginning can be assigned as the origin of these kinds of +slavery among these natives, because all the slaves are natives of +the islands, and not strangers. It is thought that they were made in +their wars and quarrels. The most certain knowledge is that the most +powerful made the others slaves, and seized them for slight cause or +occasion, and many times for loans and usurious contracts which were +current among them. The interest, capital, and debt, increased so much +with delay that the borrowers became slaves. Consequently all these +slaveries have violent and unjust beginnings; and most of the suits +among the natives are over these, and they occupy the judges in the +exterior court with them, and their confessors in that of conscience. +[146] + +These slaves comprise the greatest wealth and capital of the natives +of these islands, for they are very useful to them and necessary +for the cultivation of their property. They are sold, traded, and +exchanged among them, just as any other mercantile article, from one +village to another, from one province to another, and likewise from +one island to another. Therefore, and to avoid so many suits as would +occur if these slaveries were examined, and their origin and source +ascertained, they are preserved and held as they were formerly. + +The marriages of these natives, commonly and generally were, and +are: Chiefs with women chiefs; timaguas with those of that rank; and +slaves with those of their own class. But sometimes these classes +intermarry with one another. They considered one woman, whom they +married, as the legitimate wife and the mistress of the house; and +she was styled _ynasaba_. [147] Those whom they kept besides her +they considered as friends. The children of the first were regarded +as legitimate and whole heirs of their parents; the children of the +others were not so regarded, and were left something by assignment, +but they did not inherit. + +The dowry was furnished by the man, being given by his parents. The +wife furnished nothing for the marriage, until she had inherited it +from her parents. The solemnity of the marriage consisted in nothing +more than the agreement between the parents and relatives of the +contracting parties, the payment of the dowry agreed upon to the father +of the bride, [148] and the assembling at the wife's parents' house of +all the relatives to eat and drink until they would fall down. At night +the man took the woman to his house and into his power, and there she +remained. These marriages were annulled and dissolved for slight cause, +with the examination and judgment of the relatives of both parties, +and of the old men, who acted as mediators in the affairs. At such +a time the man took the dowry (which they call _vigadicaya_), [149] +unless it happened that they separated through the husband's fault; +for then it was not returned to him, and the wife's parents kept +it. The property that they had acquired together was divided into +halves, and each one disposed of his own. If one made any profits in +which the other did not have a share or participate, he acquired it +for himself alone. + +The Indians were adopted one by another, in presence of the +relatives. The adopted person gave and delivered all his actual +possessions to the one who adopted him. Thereupon he remained +in his house and care, and had a right to inherit with the other +children. [150] + +Adulteries were not punishable corporally. If the adulterer paid the +aggrieved party the amount adjudged by the old men and agreed upon +by them, then the injury was pardoned, and the husband was appeased +and retained his honor. He would still live with his wife and there +would be no further talk about the matter. + +In inheritances all the legitimate children inherited equally from +their parents whatever property they had acquired. If there were any +movable or landed property which they had received from their parents, +such went to the nearest relatives and the collateral side of that +stock, if there were no legitimate children by an ynasaba. This was +the case either with or without a will. In the act of drawing a will, +there was no further ceremony than to have written it or to have +stated it orally before acquaintances. + +If any chief was lord of a barangai, then in that case, the eldest son +of an ynasaba succeeded him. If he died, the second son succeeded. If +there were no sons, then the daughters succeeded in the same order. If +there were no legitimate successors, the succession went to the +nearest relative belonging to the lineage and relationship of the +chief who had been the last possessor of it. + +If any native who had slave women made concubines of any of them, +and such slave woman had children, those children were free, as was +the slave. But if she had no children, she remained a slave. [151] + +These children by a slave woman, and those borne by a married woman, +were regarded as illegitimate, and did not succeed to the inheritance +with the other children, neither were the parents obliged to leave +them anything. Even if they were the sons of chiefs, they did not +succeed to the nobility or chieftainship of the parents, nor to their +privileges, but they remained and were reckoned as plebeians and in +the number and rank of the other timaguas. + +The contracts and negotiations of these natives were generally illegal, +each one paying attention to how he might better his own business +and interest. + +Loans with interest were very common and much practiced, and the +interest incurred was excessive. The debt doubled and increased all +the time while payment was delayed, until it stripped the debtor of +all his possessions, and he and his children, when all their property +was gone, became slaves. [152] + +Their customary method of trading was by bartering one thing for +another, such as food, cloth, cattle, fowls, lands, houses, fields, +slaves, fishing-grounds, and palm-trees (both nipa and wild). Sometimes +a price intervened, which was paid in gold, as agreed upon, or in metal +bells brought from China. These bells they regard as precious jewels; +they resemble large pans and are very sonorous. [153] They play upon +these at their feasts, and carry them to the war in their boats instead +of drums and other instruments. There are often delays and terms for +certain payments, and bondsmen who intervene and bind themselves, +but always with very usurious and excessive profits and interests. + +Crimes were punished by request of the aggrieved parties. Especially +were thefts punished with greater severity, the robbers being enslaved +or sometimes put to death. [154] The same was true of insulting words, +especially when spoken to chiefs. They had among themselves many +expressions and words which they regarded as the highest insult, +when said to men and women. These were pardoned less willingly and +with greater difficulty than was personal violence, such as wounding +and assaulting. [155] + +Concubinage, rape, and incest, were not regarded at all, unless +committed by a timagua on the person of a woman chief. It was +a quite ordinary practice for a married man to have lived a long +time in concubinage with the sister of his wife. Even before having +communication with his wife he could have had access for a long +time to his mother-in-law, especially if the bride were very young, +and until she were of sufficient age. This was done in sight of all +the relatives. + +Single men are called _bagontaos_, [156] and girls of marriageable age, +_dalagas_. Both classes are people of little restraint, and from early +childhood they have communication with one another, and mingle with +facility and little secrecy, and without this being regarded among +the natives as a cause for anger. Neither do the parents, brothers, +or relatives, show any anger, especially if there is any material +interest in it, and but little is sufficient with each and all. + +As long as these natives lived in their paganism, it was not known +that they had fallen into the abominable sin against nature. But after +the Spaniards had entered their country, through communication with +them--and still more, through that with the Sangleys, who have come +from China, and are much given to that vice--it has been communicated +to them somewhat, both to men and to women. In this matter it has +been necessary to take action. + +The natives of the islands of Pintados, especially the women, are very +vicious and sensual. Their perverseness has discovered lascivious +methods of communication between men and women; and there is one to +which they are accustomed from their youth. The men skilfully make +a hole in their virile member near its head, and insert therein a +serpent's head, either of metal or ivory, and fasten it with a peg of +the same material passed through the hole, so that it cannot become +unfastened. With this device, they have communication with their wives, +and are unable to withdraw until a long time after copulation. They are +very fond of this and receive much pleasure from it, so that, although +they shed a quantity of blood, and receive other harm, it is current +among them. These devices are called _sagras,_ and there are very few +of them, because since they have become Christians, strenuous efforts +are being made to do away with these, and not consent to their use; +and consequently the practice has been checked in great part. [157] + +Herbalists and witches are common among these natives, but are not +punished or prohibited among them, so long as they do not cause any +special harm. But seldom could that be ascertained or known. + +There were also men whose business was to ravish and take away +virginity from young girls. These girls were taken to such men, and +the latter were paid for ravishing them, for the natives considered it +a hindrance and impediment if the girls were virgins when they married. + +In matters of religion, the natives proceeded more barbarously and +with greater blindness than in all the rest. For besides being pagans, +without any knowledge of the true God, they neither strove to discover +Him by way of reason, nor had any fixed belief. The devil usually +deceived them with a thousand errors and blindnesses. He appeared to +them in various horrible and frightful forms, and as fierce animals, +so that they feared him and trembled before him. They generally +worshiped him, and made images of him in the said forms. These they +kept in caves and private houses, where they offered them perfumes +and odors, and food and fruit, calling them _anitos_. [158] + +Others worshiped the sun and the moon, and made feasts and +drunken revels at the conjunction of those bodies. Some worshiped a +yellow-colored bird that dwells in their woods, called _batala_. They +generally worship and adore the crocodiles when they see them, by +kneeling down and clasping their hands, because of the harm that +they receive from those reptiles; they believe that by so doing +the crocodiles will become appeased and leave them. Their oaths, +execrations, and promises are all as above mentioned, namely, "May +_buhayan_ eat thee, if thou dost not speak truth, or fulfil what thou +hast promised," and similar things. + +There were no temples throughout those islands, nor houses generally +used for the worship of idols; but each person possessed and made +in his house his own _anitos_, [159] without any fixed rite or +ceremony. They had no priests or religious to attend to religious +affairs, except certain old men and women called _catalonas_. These +were experienced witches and sorcerers, who kept the other people +deceived. The latter communicated to these sorcerers their desires +and needs, and the catalonas told them innumerable extravagancies and +lies. The catalonas uttered prayers and performed other ceremonies to +the idols for the sick; and they believed in omens and superstitions, +with which the devil inspired them, whereby they declared whether the +patient would recover or die. Such were their cures and methods, and +they used various kinds of divinations for all things. All this was +with so little aid, apparatus, or foundation--which God permitted, so +that the preaching of the holy gospel should find those of that region +better prepared for it, and so that those natives would confess the +truth more easily, and it would be less difficult to withdraw them +from their darkness, and the errors in which the devil kept them for +so many years. They never sacrificed human beings as is done in other +kingdoms. They believed that there was a future life where those +who had been brave and performed valiant feats would be rewarded; +while those who had done evil would be punished. But they did not +know how or where this would be. [160] + +They buried their dead in their own houses, and kept their bodies +and bones for a long time in chests. They venerated the skulls of the +dead as if they were living and present. Their funeral rites did not +consist of pomp or assemblages, beyond those of their own house--where, +after bewailing the dead, all was changed into feasting and drunken +revelry among all the relatives and friends. [161] + +A few years before the Spaniards subdued the island of Luzon, +certain natives of the island of Borneo began to go thither to trade, +especially to the settlement of Manila and Tondo; and the inhabitants +of the one island intermarried with those of the other. These Borneans +are Mahometans, and were already introducing their religion among the +natives of Luzon, and were giving them instructions, ceremonies, and +the form of observing their religion, by means of certain _gazizes_ +[162] whom they brought with them. Already a considerable number, +and those the chiefest men, were commencing, although by piecemeal, +to become Moros, and were being circumcised [163] and taking the +names of Moros. Had the Spaniards' coming been delayed longer, that +religion would have spread throughout the island, and even through the +others, and it would have been difficult to extirpate it. The mercy +of God checked it in time; for, because of being in so early stages, +it was uprooted from the islands, and they were freed from it, that +is, in all that the Spaniards have pacified, and that are under the +government of the Filipinas. That religion has spread and extended +very widely in the other islands outside of this government, so that +now almost all of their natives are Mahometan Moros, and are ruled +and instructed by their _gaçizes_ and other _morabitos_; [164] these +often come to preach to and teach them by way of the strait of Ma[la]ca +and the Red Sea, through which they navigate to reach these islands. + +The arrival of the Spaniards in these Filipinas Islands, since the +year one thousand five hundred and sixty-four, the pacification and +conversion that has been made therein, their mode of governing, and +the provisions of his Majesty during these years for their welfare, +have caused innovations in many things, such as are usual to kingdoms +and provinces that change their religion and sovereign. The foremost +has been that, besides the name of Filipinas which all the islands +took and received from the beginning of their conquest, they belong +to a new kingdom and seigniory to which his Majesty, Filipo Second, +our sovereign, gave the name of Nuevo Reyno de Castilla ["New Kingdom +of Castilla"]. By his royal concession, he made the city of Manila +capital of it, and gave to it as a special favor, among other things, +a crowned coat-of-arms which was chosen and assigned by his royal +person. This is an escutcheon divided across. In the upper part is a +castle on a red field, and in the lower a lion of gold, crowned and +rampant, holding a naked sword in its right paw. One-half of the body +is in the form of a dolphin upon the waters of the sea, to signify +that the Spaniards crossed the sea with their arms to conquer this +kingdom for the crown of Castilla. [165] + +The city of Manila was founded by the adelantado Miguel Lopez de +Legazpi, first governor of the Filipinas, in the island of Luzon. It +occupies the same site where Rajamora had his settlement and fort--as +has been related more at length--at the mouth of the river which +empties into the bay, on a point between the river and the sea. The +whole site was occupied by this new settlement, and Legazpi apportioned +it to the Spaniards in equal building-lots. It was laid out with +well-arranged streets and squares, straight and level. A sufficiently +large main square [_Plaza mayor_] was left, fronting which were erected +the cathedral church and municipal buildings. He left another square, +that of arms [_Plaza de armas_], fronting which was built the fort, as +well as the royal buildings. He gave sites for the monasteries, [166] +hospital, and chapels which were to be built, as being a city which +was to grow and increase continually--as already it has done; for, +in the course of the time that has passed, that city has flourished +as much as the best of all the cities in those regions. + +The city is completely surrounded with a stone wall, which is more +than two and one-half varas wide, and in places more than three. It +has small towers and traverses at intervals. [167] It has a fortress +of hewn stone at the point that guards the bar and the river, with a +ravelin close to the water, upon which are mounted some large pieces +of artillery. This artillery commands the sea and river, while other +pieces are mounted farther up to defend the bar, besides some other +moderate-sized field-pieces and swivel-guns. These fortifications +have their vaults for storing supplies and munitions, and a magazine +for the powder, which is well guarded and situated in the inner +part; and a copious well of fresh water. There are also quarters +for the soldiers and artillerymen, and the house of the commandant +[alcayde]. The city has been lately fortified on the land side at the +Plaza de armas, where it is entered by a strong wall and two salient +towers, defended with artillery, which command the wall and gate. This +fortress is called Santiago, and has a company of thirty soldiers +with their officers, and eight artillerymen who guard the gate and +entrance by watches--all in charge of a commandant who lives inside, +and has the guard and custody of the fort. + +There is another fortress, also of stone, in the same wall, within +culverin range, located at the end [168] of the curtain, which extends +along the shore of the bay. It is called Nuestra Señora de Guia, and +is a very large round tower. It has its own court, well, and quarters +inside, as well as the magazine, and other rooms for work. It has a +traverse extending to the beach, on which are mounted a dozen large and +moderate-sized pieces, which command the bay and sweep the wall, which +extends along the shore to the gate and to the fort of Santiago. On +the other side the fortress has a large salient tower, mounted with +four large pieces, which command the shore ahead in the direction of +the chapel of Nuestra Señora de Guia. The gate and entrance is within +the city and is guarded by a company of twenty soldiers and their +officers, six artillerymen, and one commandant and his lieutenant, +who live inside. + +On the land side, where the wall extends, there is a rampart called +Sant Andres, which mounts six pieces of artillery that command in +all directions, and some swivel-guns. Farther on is another traverse +called San Gabriel, opposite the parián of the Sangleys, with a like +amount of artillery. Both have some soldiers and an ordinary guard. + +The wall has a sufficient height, and is furnished with battlements and +turrets, built in the modern style, for its defense. It has a circuit +of about one legua, which can be made entirely on top. It has many +broad steps of the same hewn stone, at intervals inside. There are +three principal city gates on the land side, and many other posterns +opening at convenient places on the river and beach, for the service +of the city. Each and all of them are locked before nightfall by +the ordinary patrols. These carry the keys to the guard-room of the +royal buildings. In the morning when day comes, the patrols return +with the keys and open the city. [169] + +The royal arsenals front on the Plaza de armas. In them are kept and +guarded all the supplies of ammunition, food, rigging, iron, copper, +lead, artillery, arquebuses, and other things belonging to the royal +estate. They have their own officers and workmen, and are placed in +charge of the royal officials. + +Near these arsenals is located the powder-house, with its master, +workmen, and convicts, where powder is generally ground in thirty +mortars, and that which is spoiled is refined. [170] + +The building for the founding of artillery is located on a suitable +site in another part of the city. It has its molds, ovens, and tools, +founders, and workmen who work it. [171] + +The royal buildings are very beautiful and sightly, and contain many +rooms. They have many windows opening toward the sea and the Plaza +de armas. They are all built of stone and have two courts, with +upper and lower galleries raised on stout pillars. The governor and +president lives inside with his family. There is a hall for the royal +Audiencia, which is very large and stately; also a separate chapel, +a room for the royal seal, [172] and offices for the scriveners of the +Audiencia, and the government. There are also other apartments for the +royal treasury and the administration of the royal officials, while a +large porch opens on the street with two principal doors, where the +guardroom is located. There is one company of regular arquebusiers, +who come in daily with their banners to stand guard. Opposite, on the +other side of the street, is another edifice for the royal treasury +and those in charge of it. [173] + +The houses of the cabildo, located on the square, are built of +stone. They are very sightly and have handsome halls. On the ground +floor is the prison, and the court of the alcaldes-in-ordinary. [174] + +On the same square is situated the cathedral church. It is built +of hewn stone, and has three naves, and its main chapel, and choir, +with high and low seats. The choir is shut in by railings, and has +its organ, missal-stands, and other necessary things. The cathedral +has also its sacristan [175] and his apartments and offices. + +Within the city is the monastery of St. Augustine. It is very large +and has many dormitories, a refectory and kitchens. They are now +completing a church, which is one of the most sumptuous in those +districts. This convent has generally fifty religious. [176] + +The monastery of St. Dominic is inside the walls. It contains +about forty religious. It was built of stone, and was very well +constructed. It has a church, house, and all offices. It has lately +been rebuilt, and much better; for it was completely destroyed in +the burning of the city in the year six hundred and three. + +The monastery of St. Francis is farther on. It is well constructed +of stone, and its church is being rebuilt. It contains about forty +discalced religious. + +The residence [_colegio_] of the Society of Jesus is established near +the fortress of Nuestra Señora de Guia. It contains twenty religious +of their order, and is an excellent stone house and church. There +they study Latin, the arts, and cases of conscience. Connected with +them is a seminary and convictorio [177] for Spanish scholars, with +their rector. These students wear gowns of tawny-colored frieze with +red facings. [178] + +In another part of the city stands a handsome house, walled in, with +its stone church, called San Andres and Santa Potenciana. It is a royal +foundation, and a rectoress lives there. It has a revolving entrance +and a parlor, and the rectoress has other confidential assistants; +and there shelter is given to needy women and girls of the city, +in the form of religious retirement. Some of the girls leave the +house to be married, while others remain there permanently. It has +its own house for work, and its choir. His Majesty assists them with +a portion of their maintenance; the rest is provided by their own +industry and property. They have their own steward and their priest, +who administers the sacraments to them. [179] + +In another part is the royal hospital for Spaniards, with its +physician, apothecary, surgeons, managers, and servants. It and its +church are built of stone; and it has its sick rooms and the bed +service. In it all the Spaniards are treated. It is usually quite +full; it is under the royal patronage. His Majesty provides the most +necessary things for it. Three discalced religious of St. Francis +act there as superintendents, and they prove very advantageous for +the corporal and spiritual relief of the sick. It was burned in the +conflagration of the former year six hundred and three, and is now +being rebuilt. + +There is another charitable hospital in charge of the Confraternity of +that name. It was founded in the city of Manila by the Confraternity +of La Misericordia of Lisboa, and by the other confraternities of +India. [180] It has apostolic bulls for works of charity, such as +burying the dead, supporting the modest poor, marrying orphans, and +relieving many necessities. There the slaves of the city are treated, +and lodgings are likewise provided for poor women. + +Next to the monastery of St. Francis is located the hospital for +natives, [181] which is under royal patronage. It was founded with +alms, by a holy lay-brother of St. Francis, one Fray Joan Clemente. A +great many natives, suffering from all diseases, are treated there +with great care and attention. It has a good edifice and workrooms +built of stone. The discalced religious of St. Francis manage it; +and three priests and four lay-brothers, of exemplary life, live +there. These are the physicians, surgeons, and apothecaries of the +hospital, and are so skilful and useful, that they cause many marvelous +cures, both in medicine and in surgery. + +The streets of the city are compactly built up with houses, mostly of +stone, although some are of wood. Many are roofed with clay tiling, and +others with nipa. They are excellent edifices, lofty and spacious, and +have large rooms and many windows, and balconies, with iron gratings, +that embellish them. More are daily being built and finished. There +are about six hundred houses within the walls, and a greater number, +built of wood, in the suburbs; and all are the habitations and homes +of Spaniards. + +The streets, squares, and churches are generally filled with people +of all classes, especially Spaniards--all, both men and women, +clad and gorgeously adorned in silks. They wear many ornaments and +all kinds of fine clothes, because of the ease with which these are +obtained. Consequently this is one of the settlements most highly +praised, by the foreigners who resort to it, of all in the world, +both for the above reason, and for the great provision and abundance +of food and other necessaries for human life found there, and sold +at moderate prices. + +Manila has two drives for recreation. One is by land, along the point +called Nuestra Señora de Guia. It extends for about a legua along +the shore, and is very clean and level. Thence it passes through a +native street and settlement, called Bagunbayan, to a chapel, much +frequented by the devout, called Nuestra Señora de Guia, and continues +for a goodly distance further to a monastery and mission-house of +the Augustinians, called Mahalat. [182] + +The other drive extends through one of the city gates to a native +settlement, called Laguio, by which one may go to a chapel of San +Anton, and to a monastery and mission-house of discalced Franciscans, +a place of great devotion, near the city, called La Candelaria. [183] + +This city is the capital of the kingdom and the head of the +government of all the islands. It is the metropolis of the other +cities and settlements of the islands. In it reside the Audiencia and +Chancillería of his Majesty, and the governor and captain-general of +the islands. [184] + +Manila has a city cabildo with two alcaldes-in-ordinary, twelve +perpetual regidors, an alguaçil-mayor [_i.e._, chief constable], +a royal standard-bearer, the scrivener of the cabildo, and other +officials. + +The archbishop of the Filipinas Islands resides in this city. He has +his metropolitan church, and all the cathedral dignitaries--canons, +racioneros, medias racioneros, [185] chaplains, and sacristans--and a +music-choir, who chant to the accompaniment of the organ and of flutes +[_ministriles_]. The cathedral is quite ornate and well decorated, +and the Divine offices are celebrated there with the utmost gravity +and ceremony. As suffragans the cathedral has three bishops--namely, +in the island of Sebu, and in Cagayan and Camarines. [186] + +There is a royal treasury with three royal officials--factor, +accountant, and treasurer--by whom the royal revenue of all the +islands is managed. [187] + +The vessels sailing annually to Nueva España with the merchandise and +investments of all the islands are despatched from the city of Manila; +and they return thither from Nueva España with the proceeds of this +merchandise, and the usual reënforcements. + +In the city is established the camp of the regular soldiers whom his +Majesty has had stationed in the islands. + +Several galleys are also stationed at Manila with their general and +captains, as well as other war-vessels, of deep draft, and smaller +ones built like those used by the natives, to attend to the needs of +all the islands. + +The majority of the vessels from China, Japon, Maluco, Borney, Sian, +Malaca, and India, that come to the Filipinas with their merchandise +and articles of trade, gather in the bay and river of Manila. In that +city they sell and trade for all the islands and their settlements. + +In the province [of Cagayán] of this same island of Luzon was founded +the city of Segovia, [188] during the term of Don Gonçalo Ronquillo, +the third governor. It has two hundred Spanish inhabitants who live in +wooden houses on the shore of the Tajo River, two leguas from the sea +and port of Camalayuga. There is a stone fort near the city for the +defense of it and of the river. This fort mounts some artillery, and +has its own commandant. Besides the inhabitants, there are generally +one hundred regular soldiers, arquebusiers, and their officers. They +are all in charge and under command of the alcalde-mayor of the +province, who is its military commander. + +In that city is established a bishop and his church, although at +present the latter has no dignitaries or prebendaries. [189] There +is a city cabildo consisting of two alcaldes, six regidors, and an +alguacil-mayor. The city abounds in all kinds of food and refreshment +at very cheap prices. + +The city of Caçeres was founded in the province of Camarines of the +same island of Luzon, during the term of Doctor Sande, governor of +the Filipinas. It has about one hundred Spanish inhabitants; and +has its cabildo, consisting of alcaldes, regidors, and officials. A +bishop of that province is established there and has his church, +although without dignitaries or prebendaries. A monastery of discalced +Franciscans is located there. The government and military affairs of +that province are under one alcalde-mayor and war-captain, who resides +in Caçeres. The latter is a place abounding in and furnished with all +kinds of provisions, at very low rates. It is founded on the bank of +a river, four leguas inland from the sea, and its houses are of wood. + +The fourth city is that called Santisimo Nombre de Jesus; it is located +in the island of Sebu, in the province of Bicayas or Pintados. It was +the first Spanish settlement and was founded by the adelantado Miguel +Lopez de Legazpi, the first governor. It is a fine seaport, whose water +is very clear and deep, and capable of holding many vessels. The city +has an excellent stone fort, which mounts a considerable quantity of +artillery, and which has its commandant and officers for the guard +and defense of the port and of the city. It is sufficiently garrisoned +with regulars, and is under command of the alcalde-mayor, the military +commander of the province, who lives in the city. The settlement +contains about two hundred Spanish inhabitants who live in houses +of wood. It has a cabildo, consisting of two alcaldes-in-ordinary, +eight regidors, and an alguacil-mayor and his officers. It has a +bishop and his church, like those of other cities of these islands, +without prebendaries. [190] + +The city is provided with food by, and is a station for, the ships +going from Maluco to Manila. Through his Majesty's concession they keep +there a deep-draft merchant vessel, which generally leaves its port +for Nueva España, laden with the merchandise of the products gathered +in those provinces. It has a monastery of Augustinian religious and +a seminary of the Society of Jesus. + +The town of Arevalo was founded on the island of Oton [Panay], during +the term of Don Gonçalo Ronquillo. [191] It contains about eighty +Spanish inhabitants, and is located close to the sea. It has a wooden +fort, which mounts some artillery, and a monastery of the Order of +St. Augustine; also a parish church, with its own vicar and secular +priest. This church belongs to the diocese of the Sebu bishopric. + +It has a cabildo, consisting of alcaldes, regidors, and other +officials. There is one alcalde-mayor and military leader in those +provinces. The town is well supplied with all kinds of provisions, +sold at very low rates. + +The settlement of Villa Fernandina, [192] which was founded in the +province of the Ilocos on the island of Luzon, is settled by Spaniards, +but very few of them remain there. It has a church, with its own vicar +and secular priest. Now no mention will be made of it, on account of +what has been said. The alcalde-mayor of the province resides there, +and the town is situated in the diocese of the Cagayan bishopric. + +From the earliest beginning of the conquest and pacification of +the Filipinas Islands, the preaching of the holy gospel therein +and the conversion of the natives to our holy Catholic faith were +undertaken. The first to set hand to this task were the religious +of the Order of St. Augustine, who went there with the adelantado +Legazpi in the fleet of discovery, and those of the same order who +went afterward to labor in this work, and toiled therein with great +fervor and zeal. Thus, finding the harvest in good season, they +gathered the first fruits of it, and converted and baptized many +infidels throughout the said islands. [193] + +Next to them in the fame of this conversion, the discalced religious +of the Order of St. Francis went to the islands by way of Nueva +España; then those of the Order of St. Dominic, and of the Society of +Jesus. [194] Lastly, the discalced Augustinian Recollects went. One and +all, after being established in the islands, worked in the conversion +and instruction of the natives. Consequently they have made--and +there are now in all the islands--a great number of baptized natives, +besides many others in many parts, who, for want of laborers, have been +put off, and are awaiting this blessing and priests to minister to +them. Hitherto there have been but few missions in charge of secular +priests, as not many of these have gone to the islands; and as very +few have been ordained there, for lack of students. + +The Order of St. Augustine has many missions in the islands of Pintados +and has established and occupied monasteries and various visitas. [195] +In the island of Luzon, they have those of the province of Ylocos, +some in Pangasinan, and all those of La Pampanga--a large number of +monasteries; while in the province of Manila and its vicinity they +have others, which are flourishing. + +The Order of St. Dominic has the missions of the province of Cagayan, +and others in the province of Pangasinan, where are many monasteries +and visitas. They also administer others about the city. + +The Order of St. Francis has some missions and monasteries about +Manila, all the province of Camarines and the coast opposite, and La +Laguna de Bay. These include many missions. + +The Society of Jesus has three large missions in the neighborhood +of Manila, which have many visitas. In the Pintados it has many +others on the islands of Sebu, Leite, Ybabao, Camar [Samar], Bohol, +and others near by. They have good men, who are solicitous for the +conversion of the natives. + +These four orders have produced many good results in the conversion +of these islands, as above stated; and in good sooth the people +have taken firm hold of the faith, as they are a people of so good +understanding. They have recognized the errors of their paganism +and the truths of the Christian religion; and they possess good and +well-built churches and monasteries of wood with their reredoses and +beautiful ornaments, and all the utensils, crosses, candlesticks, +and chalices of silver and gold. Many devotions are offered, and there +are many confraternities. There is assiduity in taking the sacraments +and in attendance on the Divine services; and the people are careful +to entertain and support their religious (to whom they show great +obedience and respect) by the many alms that they give them, as well +as by those that they give for the suffrages and the burial of their +dead, which they provide with all punctuality and liberality. + +At the same time that the religious undertook to teach the natives +the precepts of religion, they labored to instruct them in matters +of their own improvement, and established schools for the reading +and writing of Spanish among the boys. They taught them to serve in +the church, to sing the plain-song, and to the accompaniment of the +organ; to play the flute, to dance, and to sing; and to play the +harp, guitar, and other instruments. In this they show very great +adaptability, especially about Manila; where there are many fine +choirs of chanters and musicians composed of natives, who are skilful +and have good voices. There are many dancers, and musicians on the +other instruments which solemnize and adorn the feasts of the most +holy sacrament, and many other feasts during the year. The native +boys present dramas and comedies, both in Spanish and in their own +language, very charmingly. This is due to the care and interest of +the religious, who work tirelessly for the natives' advancement. [196] + +In these islands there is no native province or settlement which +resists conversion or does not desire it. But, as above stated, +baptism has been postponed in some districts, for lack of workers +to remain with the people, in order that they may not retrograde and +return to their idolatries. In this work, the best that is possible +is done, for the mission-fields are very large and extensive. In many +districts the religious make use, in their visitas, of certain of the +natives who are clever and well instructed, so that these may teach +the others to pray daily, instruct them in other matters touching +religion, and see that they come to mass at the central missions; and +in this way they succeed in preserving and maintaining their converts. + +Hitherto, the orders who control these missions in virtue of the +_omnimodo_ and other apostolic concessions [197] have attended to the +conversion of the natives, administered the sacraments, looked after +the spiritual and temporal and ecclesiastical affairs of the natives, +and absolved them in cases of difficulty. But now that there are an +archbishop and bishops, this is being curtailed, and the management +of these affairs is being given to the bishops, as the archbishop's +vicars--although not to such an extent, nor has the administration +of these natives been placed in their charge, in matters of justice, +and under the inspection and superintendence of the bishops, as they +have endeavored to obtain. [198] + +The governor and royal Audiencia of Manila attend to what it is +advisable to provide and direct for the greatest accomplishment and +advancement of this conversion, and the administration of the natives +and their missions--both by causing the encomenderos to assist +the religious and churches, in the encomiendas that they enjoy, +with the stipends and necessary expenses of the missions; and by +furnishing from the royal revenues what pertains to it, which is no +less a sum. [199] They also ordain whatever else is required to be +provided and remedied for the said missions and for the advancement +of the natives. This also is attended to by the archbishop and the +bishops in what pertains to them in their duty and charge as pastors. + +The Holy Office of the Inquisition, residing in Mexico of Nueva +España, has its commissaries, servants, and helpers in Manila and +in the bishoprics of the islands, who attend to matters touching +the Holy Office. They never fail to have plenty to do there because +of the entrance of so many strangers into those districts. However, +this holy tribunal does not have jurisdiction of the causes pertaining +to the natives, as the latter are so recently converted. + +All these islands are subdued, and are governed from Manila by means +of alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, and lieutenants, each of whom rules +and administers justice in his own district and province. Appeals from +their acts and sentences go to the royal Audiencia. The governor and +captain-general provides what pertains to government and war. + +The chiefs, who formerly held the other natives in subjection, +now have no power over them in the tyrannical manner of former +days. This was not the least benefit received by these natives in +having been freed from such servitude. However, it is true that +matters touching the slavery of former days have remained on the +same footing as before. The king our sovereign has ordered by his +decrees that the honors of the chiefs be preserved to them as such; +and that the other natives recognize them and assist them with certain +of the labors that they used to give when pagans. This is done with +the lords and possessors of barangays, and those belonging to such and +such a barangay are under that chief's control. When he harvests his +rice, they go one day to help him; and the same if he builds a house, +or rebuilds one. This chief lord of a barangay collects tribute from +his adherents, and takes charge of these collections, to pay them to +the encomendero. [200] + +Besides the above, each village has a governor [201] who is elected. He +and his constables who are called _vilangos_ [202] comprise the +usual magistracy among the natives. The governor hears civil suits +where a moderate sum is involved; in appeal, the case goes to the +corregidor or alcalde-mayor of the province. These governors are +elected annually by the votes of all the married natives of such +and such a village. The governor of Manila confirms the election, +and gives the title of governor to the one elected, and orders him to +take the residencia of the outgoing governor. [203] This governor, +in addition to the vilangos and scrivener (before whom he makes his +acts in writing, in the language of the natives of that province), +[204] holds also the chiefs--lords of barangays, and those who are +not so--under his rule and government, and, for any special service, +such as collections of tributes, and assignments of personal services, +as his _datos_ and _mandones_. [205] They do not allow the chiefs to +oppress the timaguas or slaves under their control. + +The same customs observed by these natives in their paganism, are +observed by them since they have become Christians, in so far as +they are not contrary to natural law, especially as to their slavery, +successions, inheritances, adoptions, wills, and lawful trading. In +their suits, they always allege and prove the custom, and are judged +by it, according to royal decrees to that effect. In other causes +which do not involve their customs, and in criminal cases, the matter +is determined by law as among Spaniards. + +All of these islands and their natives, so far as they were pacified, +were apportioned into encomiendas from the beginning. To the royal +crown were allotted those which were chief towns and ports, and the +dwellers of the cities and towns; and also other special encomiendas +and villages in all the provinces, for the necessities and expenses +of the royal estate. All the rest was assigned to the conquerors and +settlers who have served and labored for the conquest and pacification, +and in the war. This matter is in charge of the governor, who takes +into consideration the merits and services of the claimants. [206] +In like manner the villages that become vacant are assigned. There +are many very excellent encomiendas throughout the islands, and they +offer many profits, both by the amount of their tributes and by the +nature and value of what is paid as tribute. [207] The encomienda +lasts, according to the royal laws and decrees, and by the regular +order and manner of succession to them, for two lives; but it may +be extended to a third life, by permission. After it becomes vacant, +it is again assigned and granted anew. + +The tributes paid to their encomenderos by the natives were assigned +by the first governor, Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, in the provinces of +Vicayas and Pintados, and in the islands of Luzon and its vicinity; +they were equal to the sum of eight reals annually for an entire +tribute from each tributario. The natives were to pay it in their +products--in gold, cloth, cotton, rice, bells, fowls, and whatever +else they possessed or harvested. The fixed price and value of each +article was assigned so that, when the tribute was paid in any one +of them, or in all of them, it should not exceed the value of the +eight reals. So it has continued until now, and the governors have +increased the appraisements and values of the products at different +times, as they have deemed advisable. + +The encomenderos have made great profits in collecting in kind, for, +after they acquired possession of the products, they sold them at +higher prices. By this they increased their incomes and the proceeds +of their encomiendas considerably; until a few years ago his Majesty, +by petition of the religious and the pressure that they brought to +bear on him in this matter, ordered for this region that the natives +should pay their tribute in whatever they wished--in kind or in +money--without being compelled to do otherwise. Consequently, when +they should have paid their eight reals, they would have fulfilled +their obligation. Accordingly this rule was initiated; but experience +demonstrates that, although it seemed a merciful measure, and one +favorable to the natives, it is doing them great injury. For, since +they naturally dislike to work, they do not sow, spin, dig gold, +rear fowls, or raise other food supplies, as they did before, when +they had to pay the tribute in those articles. They easily obtain, +without so much work, the peso of money which is the amount of their +tribute. Consequently it follows that the natives have less capital +and wealth, because they do not work; and the country, which was +formerly very well provided and well-supplied with all products, +is now suffering want and deprivation of them. The owners of the +encomiendas, both those of his Majesty and those of private persons +who possess them, have sustained considerable loss and reduction in +the value of the encomiendas. + +When Gomez Perez Dasmariñas was appointed governor of the Filipinas, +he brought royal decrees ordering the formation of the camp in Manila, +with an enrollment of four hundred paid soldiers, with their officers, +galleys, and other military supplies, for the defense and security +of the country. Before that time all the Spanish inhabitants had +attended to that without any pay. Then an increase of two reals to +each tributario over the eight reals was ordered. This was to be +collected by the encomenderos at the same time when they collected +the eight reals of the tribute, and was to be delivered and placed +in the royal treasury. There this amount was to be entered on an +account separate from that of the other revenue of his Majesty, and +was to be applied in the following manner: one and one-half reals for +the expenses of the said camp and war stores; and the remaining half +real for the pay of the prebendaries of the Manila church, which his +Majesty pays from his treasury, until such time as their tithes and +incomes suffice for their sustenance. [208] + +These tributes are collected from all the natives, Christians and +infidels, in their entirety--except that in those encomiendas without +instruction the encomendero does not take the fourth part of the eight +reals (which equals two reals) for himself, since that encomienda has +no instruction or expenses for it; but he takes them and deposits +them in Manila, in a fund called "the fourths." [209] The money +obtained from this source is applied to and spent in hospitals for +the natives, and in other works beneficial to them, at the option of +the governor. As fast as the encomiendas are supplied with instruction +and religious, the collection of these fourths and their expenditure +in these special works cease. + +Some provinces have taken the census of their natives; and according to +these the tributes and the assignment of the two reals are collected. + +In most of the provinces no census has been taken, and the tributes +are collected when due by the encomenderos and their collectors, +through the chiefs of their encomiendas, by means of the lists and +memoranda of former years. From them the names of the deceased and of +those who have changed their residence are erased, and the names of +those who have grown up, and of those who have recently moved into the +encomienda, are added. When any shortage is perceived in the accounts, +a new count is requested and made. + +The natives are free to move from one island to another, and from +one province to another, and pay their tribute for that year in which +they move and change their residence in the place to which they move; +and to move from a Christian village that has instruction to another +village possessing it. But, on the other hand, they may not move from +a place having instruction to one without it, nor in the same village +from one barangay to another, nor from one faction to another. In +this respect, the necessary precautions are made by the government, +and the necessary provisions by the Audiencia, so that this system +may be kept, and so that all annoyances resulting from the moving of +the settled natives of one place to another place may be avoided. + +Neither are the natives allowed to go out of their villages for +trade, except by permission of the governor, or of his alcaldes-mayor +and justices, or even of the religious, who most often have been +embarrassed by this, because of the instruction. This is done so that +the natives may not wander about aimlessly when there is no need of +it, away from their homes and settlements. + +Those natives who possess slaves pay their tributes for them if the +slaves are _saguiguilirs_. If the slaves are _namamahays_ living +outside their owners' houses, they pay their own tributes, inasmuch +as they possess their own houses and means of gain. + +The Spaniards used to have slaves from these natives, whom they had +bought from them, and others whom they obtained in certain expeditions +during the conquest and pacification of the islands. This was stopped +by a brief of his Holiness [210] and by royal decrees. Consequently, +all of these slaves who were then in the possession of the Spanish, +and who were natives of these islands, in whatever manner they had +been acquired, were freed; and the Spaniards were forever prohibited +from holding them as slaves, or from capturing them for any reason, or +under pretext of war, or in any other manner. The service rendered by +these natives is in return for pay and daily wages. The other slaves +and captives that the Spaniards possess are Cafres and blacks brought +by the Portuguese by way of India, and are held in slavery justifiably, +in accordance with the provincial councils and the permissions of +the prelates and justices of those districts. + +The natives of these islands have also their personal services, which +they are obliged to render--in some parts more than in others--to +the Spaniards. These are done in different ways, and are commonly +called the _polo_. [211] For, where there are alcaldes-mayor and +justices, they assign and distribute certain natives by the week +for the service of their houses. They pay these servants a moderate +wage, which generally amounts to one-fourth real per day, and rice +for their food. The same is done by the religious for the mission, +and for their monasteries and churches, and for their works, and for +public works. [212] + +The Indians also furnish rice, and food of all kinds, at the prices +at which they are valued and sold among the natives. These prices +are always very moderate. The datos, vilangos, and fiscals make the +division, collect, and take these supplies from the natives; and in +the same manner they supply their encomenderos when these go to make +the collections. + +The greatest service rendered by these natives is on occasions of war, +when they act as rowers and crews for the vireys and vessels that go +on the expeditions, and as pioneers for any service that arises in +the course of the war, although their pay and wages are given them. + +In the same way natives are assigned and apportioned for the king's +works, such as the building of ships, the cutting of wood, the trade +of making the rigging, [213] the work in the artillery foundry, and +the service in the royal [214] magazines; and they are paid their +stipend and daily wage. + +In other things pertaining to the service of the Spaniards and their +expeditions, works, and any other service, performed by the natives, +the service is voluntary, and paid by mutual agreement; [215] for, +as hitherto, the Spaniards have worked no mines, nor have they given +themselves to the gains to be derived from field labors, there is no +occasion for employing the natives in anything of that sort. + +Most of the Spaniards of the Filipinas Islands reside in the city +of Manila, the capital of the kingdom, and where the chief trade +and commerce is carried on. Some encomenderos live in provinces or +districts adjacent to Manila, while other Spaniards live in the +cities of Segovia, Caçeres, Santisimo Nombre de Jesus (in Sebu), +and in the town of Arevalo, where they are settled, and where most +of them have their encomiendas. + +Spaniards may not go to the Indian villages, [216] except for the +collection of the tributes when they are due; and then only the +alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, and justices. It is not permitted these +to remain continually in one settlement of their district, but they +must visit as much of it as possible. They must change their residence +and place of abode every four months to another chief village and +settlement, where all the natives may obtain the benefit of their +presence; and so that the natives may receive as slight annoyance +as possible in supporting them and in the ordinary service that they +render them. [217] + +The governor makes appointments to all offices. When the term of office +expires, the royal Aurdiencia orders the residencia of each official +to be taken, and his case is decided in accordance therewith; and +until the residencia is completed, the incumbent cannot be appointed +to any other duty or office. The governor also appoints commandants +of forts, companies, and other military officials, in all the cities, +towns, and hamlets of the islands. [218] + +Certain offices of regidors and notaries have been sold by royal decree +for one life. But the sale of these offices has been superseded, +as it is now considered that the price paid for them is of little +consideration, while the disadvantage of perpetuating the purchasers +in office by this method is greater. + +Elections of alcaldes-in-ordinary for all the Spanish towns are held +on New Year's day by the cabildo and magistracy. The residencias +of these alcaldes-in-ordinary and their cabildos are ordered by +his Majesty to be taken at the same time as that of the governor +and captain-general of the islands is taken; and they give account +of the administration of the revenues and the estates under their +care. However, the governor may take it before this, every year, +or whenever he thinks it expedient and cause the balances of their +accounts to be collected. With the governor's advice and permission +the expenses desired by the towns are made. + +The city of Manila has sufficient public funds for certain years, +through the fines imposed by its judges; in its own particular +possessions, inside and outside the city; in the reweighing of the +merchandise and the rents of all the shops and sites of the Sangleys +in the parián; and in the monopoly on playing cards. All this was +conceded to the city by his Majesty, especially for the expenses of +its fortification. [219] These revenues are spent for that purpose; for +the salaries of its officials, and those of the agents sent to España; +and for the feasts of the city, chief of which are St. Potenciana's +day, May nineteen, when the Spaniards entered and seized the city, +and the day of St. Andrew, November 30, the date on which the pirate +Limahon was conquered and driven from the city. On that day the city +officials take out the municipal standard, and to the sound of music go +to vespers and mass at the church of San Andres, where the entire city, +with the magistracy and cabildo and the royal Audiencia, assemble +with all solemnity. The above revenues are also used in receiving +the governors at their first arrival in the country, in the kings' +marriage feasts, and the births of princes, and in the honors and +funeral celebrations for the kings and princes who die. In all the +above the greatest possible display is made. + +The other cities and settlements do not possess as yet so many +sources of wealth or revenue, or the occasions on which to spend +them--although, as far as possible, they take part in them, in all +celebrations of the same kind. + +The Spaniards living in the islands are divided into five classes of +people: namely, prelates, religious, and ecclesiastical ministers, +both secular and regular; encomenderos, settlers, and conquerors; +soldiers, officers, and officials of war (both on land and sea), +and those for navigation; merchants, business men, and traders; and +his Majesty's agents for government, justice, and administration of +his royal revenue. + +The ecclesiastical prelates have already been stated, and are as +follows: The archbishop of Manila, who resides in the city, as +metropolitan, in charge of his cathedral church; he has a salary +of four thousand pesos, [220] which is paid from the royal treasury +annually. Likewise the salaries paid to the holders of the dignidades, +[221] canonries, and other prebends, and those performing other +services, are paid in the same manner. They are all under royal +patronage, and are provided in accordance with the king's orders. The +archbishop's office and jurisdiction consists of and extends to all, +both the spiritual and temporal, that is ecclesiastic, and to its +management. [222] + +The bishop of the city of Santisimo Nombre de Jesus in Sibu, that +of Segovia in Cagayan, and that of Caceres in Camarines, have the +same rights of jurisdiction and enjoy the same privileges in their +dioceses, since they are suffragans of the archbishop of Manila; +appeal from their judgments is made to the latter, and he summons and +convokes them to his provincial councils whenever necessary. They +receive each an annual salary of five hundred thousand maravedis +for their support, which is paid from the royal treasury of Manila, +besides their offerings and pontifical dues. All together it is quite +sufficient for their support, according to the convenience of things +and the cheapness of the country. At present the bishops do not possess +churches with prebendaries nor is any money set aside for that. [223] + +The regular prelates are the provincials of the four mendicant orders, +namely, St. Dominic, St. Augustine, St. Francis, the Society of +Jesus, and the discalced Augustinians. [224] Each prelate governs +his own order and visits the houses. The orders have nearly all the +missions to the natives under their charge, in whatever pertains to +the administration of the sacraments and conversion--by favor of, +and in accordance with, their privileges and the apostolic bulls, in +which until now they have maintained themselves--and in what pertains +to judicial matters, as vicars of the bishops, and through appointment +and authorization of the latter. The discalced Augustinians as yet +have no missions, as they have but recently entered the islands. + +The monasteries are supported by certain special incomes that they +possess and have acquired--especially those of the Augustinians +and those of the Society--and by help and concessions granted by +his Majesty. The Dominicans and Franciscans do not possess or allow +incomes or properties; [225] and for them, as for the other orders, +the principal source of revenue is in the alms, offerings, and aid +given by the districts where they are established and where they have +charge. This help is given by both Spaniards and natives, very piously +and generously. They are aided also by the stipend given them from +the encomiendas for the instruction that they give there. Consequently +the religious of the orders live well and with the comfort necessary. + +The first encomenderos, conquerors, and settlers of the islands, +and their issue, are honorably supported by the products of their +encomiendas, and by certain means of gain and trading interests that +they possess, as do the rest of the people. There are a great number of +them, each one of whom lives and possesses his house in the city and +settlement of Spaniards in whose province he has his encomienda. This +they do in order not to abandon their encomiendas, and thus they are +nearer the latter for their needs and for collections. + +Now but few of the first conquerors who gained the country and went +there for its conquest with the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi +remain alive. + +The soldiers and officers of war and of naval expeditions formerly +consisted of all the dwellers and inhabitants of the islands, who +rendered military service without any pay or salary. They went on all +the expeditions and pacifications that arose, and guarded the forts +and presidios, and cities and settlements. This was their principal +exercise and occupation. They were rewarded by the governor, who +provided them with encomiendas, offices, and profits of the country +according to their merits and services. [226] + +At that time the soldiers of the islands were the best in the +Indias. They were very skilful and well-disciplined by both land +and sea, and were esteemed and respected by all those nations. They +gloried in their arms, and in acquitting themselves valiantly. + +Afterward, when Gomez Perez Das Mariñas entered upon the government of +the Filipinas, he founded the regular camp of four hundred soldiers: +the arquebusiers, with pay of six pesos per month; the musketeers, +with eight pesos; six captains, with annual pay of four hundred +and twenty pesos apiece; their alféreces, sergeants, corporals, +standard-bearers, and drummers, with pay in proportion to their +duties; one master-of-camp, with annual pay of one thousand four +hundred pesos; one sargento-mayor with captain's pay; one adjutant of +the sargento-mayor and field-captain, with monthly pay of ten pesos; +two castellans; commandants of the two fortresses of Manila, with +four hundred pesos apiece annually; their lieutenants; squads of +soldiers and artillerymen; one general of galleys, with annual pay +of eight hundred pesos; each galley one captain, with annual pay of +three hundred pesos; their boatswains, boatswains' mates, coxswains, +alguacils of the galleys, soldiers, artillerymen, master-carpenters, +riggers, sailors, conscripts, [227] galley-crews of Spanish, Sangley, +and native convicts, condemned for crimes; and, when there is lack +of convicts, good rowers are obtained from the natives for pay, +for the period of the expedition and the occasion of the voyage. [228] + +In the vessels and fleets of large vessels for the Nueva España line, +the ships that are sent carry a general, admiral, masters, boatswains, +commissaries, stewards, alguacils, sergeants of marine artillery +[_condestables_], artillerymen, sailors, pilots and their assistants, +common seamen, carpenters, calkers, and coopers, all in his Majesty's +pay, on the account of Nueva España, from whose royal treasury they +are paid. All that is necessary for this navigation is supplied +there. Their provisions and appointments are made by the viceroy; +and this has hitherto pertained to him, even though the ships may have +been constructed in the Filipinas. They sail thence with their cargo +of merchandise for Nueva España, and return thence to the Filipinas +with the reënforcements of soldiers and supplies, and whatever else +is necessary for the camp, besides passengers and religious, and the +money proceeding from the investments and merchandise. [229] + +After the establishment of a regular camp for guard and expeditions, +the other inhabitants, dwellers, and residents were enrolled without +pay under the banners of six captains of the Filipinas, for special +occasions requiring the defense of the city. But they were relieved +of all other duties pertaining to the troops, unless they should +offer of their own accord to go upon any expedition, or volunteer +for any special occasion, in order to acquire merits and benefits, so +that they may be given encomiendas that become vacant, and offices, +and the means of profit of the country. They are not compelled or +obliged to do this, unless they are encomenderos. Consequently all +have given themselves to trading, as there is no other occupation, +but they are not unmindful of military service. + +His Majesty prohibits all who are in his pay in the military forces +of the islands from engaging in commerce; and orders the governor +not to allow this, or permit them to export goods to Nueva España. If +the governors would observe that order, it would not be amiss. [230] + +The merchants and business men form the bulk of the residents of +the islands, because of the great amount of merchandise brought +there--outside of native products--from China, Japon, Maluco, Malaca, +Sian, Camboja, Borneo, and other districts. They invest in this +merchandise and export it annually in the vessels that sail to Nueva +España, and at times to Japon, where great profits are made from +raw silk. Thence on the return to Manila are brought the proceeds, +which hitherto have resulted in large and splendid profits. + +Through the very great increase of this trade--which was harmful +and prejudicial to the Spanish merchants who shipped goods to Peru +and Nueva España, and to the royal duties collected on the shipments +from España--and through the business men of Mexico and Peru having +become greedy of trade and commerce with the Filipinas, by means of +their agents and factors, so that the trade with España was ceasing +in great measure, and the merchants were sending to the Filipinas for +their investments great consignments of silver, which by that means +flowed yearly from his Majesty's kingdoms, to fall into the possession +of infidels: all persons of Nueva España and Peru were prohibited from +trading and engaging in commerce in the Filipinas, and from taking the +Chinese merchandise to those regions. [231] Permission was given to +the inhabitants and residents of the Filipinas that they alone might +trade in the said merchandise, and export it. They are to take these +goods themselves, or send them with persons who belong to the islands, +so that they may sell them. From the proceeds of the said merchandise, +they may not carry to the Filipinas more than five hundred thousand +pesos each year. [232] + +A considerable number of _somas_ and junks (which are large +vessels) generally come from Great China to Manila, laden with +merchandise. Every year thirty or even forty ships are wont to come, +and although they do not come together, in the form of a trading +and war fleet, still they do come in groups with the monsoon and +settled weather, which is generally at the new moon in March. They +belong to the provinces of Canton, Chincheo, and Ucheo [Fo-Kien], +and sail from those provinces. They make their voyage to the city of +Manila in fifteen or twenty days, sell their merchandise, and return +in good season, before the vendavals set in--the end of May and a +few days of June--in order not to endanger their voyage. + +These vessels come laden with merchandise, and bring wealthy merchants +who own the ships, and servants and factors of other merchants who +remain in China. They leave China with the permission and license +of the Chinese viceroys and mandarins. The merchandise that they +generally bring and sell to the Spaniards consists of raw silk in +bundles, of the fineness of two strands [_dos cabeças_], and other +silk of poorer quality; fine untwisted silk, white and of all colors, +wound in small skeins; quantities of velvets, some plain, and some +embroidered in all sorts of figures, colors, and fashions--others with +body of gold, and embroidered with gold; woven stuffs and brocades, of +gold and silver upon silk of various colors and patterns; quantities +of gold and silver thread in skeins over thread and silk--but the +glitter of all the gold and silver is false, and only on paper; +damasks, satins, taffetans, _gorvaranes_, _picotes_, [233] and other +cloths of all colors, some finer and better than others; a quantity +of linen made from grass, called lençesuelo [handkerchief]; [234] +and white cotton cloth of different kinds and qualities, for all +uses. They also bring musk, benzoin, and ivory; many bed ornaments, +hangings, coverlets, and tapestries of embroidered velvet; damask +and gorvaran of different shades; tablecloths, cushions, and carpets; +horse-trappings of the same stuff, and embroidered with glass beads and +seed-pearls; also some pearls and rubies, sapphires and crystal-stones; +metal basins, copper kettles, and other copper and cast-iron pots; +quantities of all sorts of nails, sheet-iron, tin and lead; saltpetre +and gunpowder. They supply the Spaniards with wheat flour; preserves +made of orange, peach, _scorzonera_, [235] pear, nutmeg, and ginger, +and other fruits of China; salt pork and other salt meats; live fowls +of good breed, and very fine capons; quantities of green fruit, oranges +of all kinds; excellent chestnuts, walnuts, pears, and _chicueyes_ +[236] (both green and dried, a delicious fruit); quantities of fine +thread of all kinds, needles, and knick-knacks; little boxes and +writing-cases; beds, tables, chairs, and gilded benches, painted in +many figures and patterns. They bring domestic buffaloes; geese that +resemble swans; horses, some mules and asses; even caged birds, some +of which talk, while others sing, and they make them play innumerable +tricks. The Chinese furnish numberless other gewgaws and ornaments +of little value and worth, which are esteemed among the Spaniards; +besides a quantity of fine crockery of all kinds; _canganes_, [237] +_sines_, and black and blue robes; _tacley_, which are beads of all +kinds; strings of cornelians, and other beads and precious stones of +all colors; pepper and other spices; and rarities--which, did I refer +to them all, I would never finish, nor have sufficient paper for it. + +As soon as the ship reaches the mouth of the bay of Manila, the +watchman stationed at the island of Miraveles goes out to it in a +light vessel. Having examined the ship, he puts a guard of two or three +soldiers on it, so that it may anchor upon the bar, near the city, and +to see that no one shall disembark from the vessel, or anyone enter it +from outside, until the vessel has been inspected. By the signal made +with fire by the watchman from the said island, and the advice that he +sends in all haste to the city--of what ship it is, whence it has come, +what merchandise and people it brings--before the vessel has finished +anchoring, the governor and the city generally know all about it. [238] + +When the vessel has arrived and anchored, the royal officials go to +inspect it and the register of the merchandise aboard it. At the +same time the valuation of the cargo is made according to law, of +what it is worth in Manila; for the vessel immediately pays three per +cent on everything to his Majesty. [239] After the register has been +inspected and the valuation made, then the merchandise is immediately +unloaded by another official into champans, and taken to the Parián, +or to other houses and magazines, outside of the city. There the +goods are freely sold. + +No Spaniard, Sangley, or other person is allowed to go to the ship +to buy or trade merchandise, food, or anything else. Neither is it +allowed, when the merchandise is ashore, to take it from them or +buy it with force and violence; but the trade must be free, and the +Sangleys can do what they like with their property. + +The ordinary price of the silks (both raw and woven) and the +cloths--which form the bulk of the cargo--is settled leisurely, and +by persons who understand it, both on the part of the Spaniards and +that of the Sangleys. The purchase price is paid in silver and reals, +for the Sangleys do not want gold, or any other articles, and will not +take other things to China. All the trading must be completed by the +end of the month of May, or thereabout, in order that the Sangleys +may return and the Spaniards have the goods ready to lade upon the +vessels that go to Nueva España by the end of June. However, the +larger dealers and those who have most money usually do their trading +after that time, at lower rates, and keep the merchandise until the +following year. Certain Sangleys remain in Manila with a portion of +their merchandise for the same purpose, when they have not had a good +sale for it, in order to go on selling it more leisurely. The Sangleys +are very skilful and intelligent traders, and of great coolness and +moderation, in order to carry on their business better. They are ready +to trust and accommodate freely whoever they know treats them fairly, +and does not fail in his payments to them when these are due. On +the other hand, as they are a people without religion or conscience, +and so greedy, they commit innumerable frauds and deceits in their +merchandise. The purchaser must watch them very closely, and know +them, in order not to be cheated by them. The purchasers, however, +acquit themselves by their poor payments and the debts that they incur; +and both sides generally keep the judges and Audiencia quite busy. + +Some Japanese and Portuguese merchantmen also come every year from +the port of Nangasaque in Japon, at the end of October with the north +winds, and at the end of March. They enter and anchor at Manila +in the same way. The bulk of their cargo is excellent wheat-flour +for the provisioning of Manila, and highly prized salt meats. They +also bring some fine woven silk goods of mixed colors; beautiful +and finely-decorated screens done in oil and gilt; all kinds of +cutlery; many suits of armor, spears, catans, and other weapons, +all finely wrought; writing-cases, boxes and small cases of wood, +japanned and curiously marked; other pretty gewgaws; excellent fresh +pears; barrels and casks of good salt tunny; cages of sweet-voiced +larks, called _fimbaros_; and other trifles. In this trading, some +purchases are also made, without royal duties being collected from +those vessels. The bulk of the merchandise is used in the country, but +some goods are exported to Nueva España. The price is generally paid +in reals, although they are not so greedy for them as the Chinese, +for there is silver in Japon. They generally bring a quantity of it +as merchandise in plates, and it is sold at moderate rates. + +These vessels return to Japon at the season of the vendavals, during +the months of June and July. They carry from Manila their purchases, +which are composed of raw Chinese silk, gold, deerskin, and brazil-wood +for their dyes. They take honey, manufactured wax, palm and Castilian +wine, civet-cats, large tibors in which to store their tea, glass, +cloth, and other curiosities from España. + +Some Portuguese vessels sail to Manila annually during the monsoon of +the vendavals, from Maluco, Malaca, and India. They take merchandise +consisting of spices--cloves, cinnamon, and pepper; slaves, +both blacks and Cafres; cotton cloth of all sorts, fine muslins +[_caniquies_], linens, gauzes, _rambuties_, and other delicate +and precious cloths; amber, and ivory; cloths edged with _pita_, +[240] for use as bed-covers; hangings, and rich counterpanes from +Vengala [Bengal], Cochin, and other countries; many gilt articles +and curiosities; jewels of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, topazes, +balas-rubies, and other precious stones, both set and loose; many +trinkets and ornaments from India; wine, raisins, and almonds; +delicious preserves, and other fruits brought from Portugal and +prepared in Goa; carpets and tapestries from Persia and Turquia, +made of fine silks and wools; beds, writing-cases, parlor-chairs, +and other finely-gilded furniture, made in Macao; needle-work in +colors and in white, of chain-lace and royal point lace, and other +fancy-work of great beauty and perfection. Purchases of all the above +are made in Manila, and paid in reals and gold. The vessels return +in January with the brisas, which is their favorable monsoon. They +carry to Maluco provisions of rice and wine, crockery-ware, and +other wares needed there; while to Malaca they take only the gold or +money, besides a few special trinkets and curiosities from España, +and emeralds. The royal duties are not collected from these vessels. + +A few smaller vessels also sail from Borneo, during the vendavals. They +belong to the natives of that island, and return during the first part +of the brisas. They enter the river of Manila and sell their cargoes +in their vessels. These consist of fine and well-made palm-mats, a few +slaves for the natives, sago--a certain food of theirs prepared from +the pith of palms--and tibors; large and small jars, glazed black and +very fine, which are of great service and use; and excellent camphor, +which is produced on that island. Although beautiful diamonds are found +on the opposite coast, they are not taken to Manila by those vessels, +for the Portuguese of Malaca trade for them on that coast. These +articles from Borneo are bought more largely by the natives than by +the Spaniards. The articles taken back by the Borneans are provisions +of wine and rice, cotton cloth, and other wares of the islands, +which are wanting in Borneo. + +Very seldom a few vessels sail to Manila from Sian and Camboja. They +carry some benzoin, pepper, ivory, and cotton cloth; rubies and +sapphires, badly cut and set; a few slaves; rhinoceros horns, and the +hides, hoofs, and teeth of this animal; and other goods. In return they +take the wares found in Manila. Their coming and return is between the +brisas and the vendavals, during the months of April, May, and June. + +In these classes of merchandise, and in the products of the +islands--namely, gold, cotton cloth, mendriñaque, and cakes of white +and yellow wax--do the Spaniards effect their purchases, investments, +and exports for Nueva España. They make these as is most suitable +for each person, and lade them on the vessels that are to make the +voyage. They value and register these goods, for they pay into the +royal treasury of Manila, before the voyage, the two per cent royal +duties on exports, besides the freight charges of the vessel, which +amount to forty Castilian ducados [241] per tonelada. This latter is +paid at the port of Acapulco in Nueva España, into the royal treasury +of the said port, in addition to the ten per cent duties for entrance +and first sale in Nueva España. [242] + +Inasmuch as the ships which are despatched with the said merchandise +are at his Majesty's account, and other ships cannot be sent, there +is generally too small a place in the cargo for all the purchases. For +that reason the governor divides the cargo-room among all the shippers, +according to their wealth and merits, after they have been examined +by intelligent men, appointed for that purpose. Consequently every +man knows from his share how much he can export, and only that amount +is received in the vessel; and careful and exact account is taken of +it. Trustworthy persons are appointed who are present at the lading; +and space is left for the provisions and passengers that are to go +in the vessels. When the ships are laden and ready to sail, they +are delivered to the general and the officials who have them in +charge. Then they start on their voyage at the end of the month of +June, with the first vendavals. + +This trade and commerce is so great and profitable, and easy to +control--for it only lasts three months in the year, from the +time of the arrival of the ships with their merchandise, until +those vessels that go to Nueva España take that merchandise--that +the Spaniards do not apply themselves to, or engage in, any other +industry. Consequently, there is no husbandry or field-labor worthy of +consideration. Neither do the Spaniards work the gold mines or placers, +which are numerous. They do not engage in many other industries that +they could turn to with great profit, if the Chinese trade should +fail them. That trade has been very hurtful and prejudicial in +this respect, as well as for the occupations and farm industries in +which the natives used to engage. Now the latter are abandoning and +forgetting those labors. Besides, there is the great harm and loss +resulting from the immense amount of silver that passes annually by +this way [of the trade], into the possession of infidels, which can +never, by any way, return into the possession of the Spaniards. + +His Majesty's agents for the government and justice, and the royal +officials for the management of his Majesty's revenue, are as follows: +First, the governor and captain-general of all the islands, who +is at the same time president of the royal Audiencia of Manila. He +has a salary of eight thousand pesos de minas per year for all his +offices. [243] He possesses his own body-guard of twelve halberdiers, +whose captain receives three hundred pesos per year. The governor alone +provides and regulates all that pertains to war and government, with +the advice of the auditors of the Audiencia in difficult matters. He +tries in the first instance the criminal cases of the regular soldiers, +and any appeals from his decisions go to the Audiencia. [244] The +governor appoints many alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, deputies, and +other magistrates, throughout the islands and their provinces, for +carrying on the government and justice, and for military matters. These +appointments are made before a government chief scrivener appointed +by his Majesty, who helps the governor. + +The governor likewise takes part with the royal Audiencia, as +its president, in whatever pertains to its duties. The Audiencia +consists of four auditors and one fiscal--each of whom receives an +annual salary of two thousand pesos de minas [245]--one reporter, +one court scrivener, one alguacil-mayor, with his assistants, one +governor of the prison of the court, one chancellor, one registrar, +two bailiffs, one chaplain and sacristan, one executioner, attorneys, +and receivers. The Audiencia tries all causes, civil and criminal, +taken to it from all the provinces of its district. [246] These +include the Filipinas Islands and the mainland of China, already +discovered or to be discovered. The Audiencia has the same authority +as the chancillerías of Valladolid and Granada in España. At the same +time, the Audiencia provides whatever is advisable for the proper +and systematic management of the royal exchequer. + +His Majesty's revenues in the Filipinas Islands are in charge +of and their tribunal consists of three royal officials. They are +appointed by his Majesty, and consist of a factor, an accountant, and +a treasurer. They each receive an annual salary of five hundred and +ten thousand maravedis. They have their clerk of mines, and registrars +of the royal revenues, and their executive and other officials, all +of whom reside in Manila. From that city they manage and attend to +everything pertaining to the royal revenues throughout the islands. + +His Majesty has a number of encomiendas apportioned to his royal crown +throughout the provinces of the Filipinas Islands. The tributes of +those encomiendas are collected for his royal treasury by his royal +officials and the collectors engaged for that purpose by the royal +officials. From year to year these amount to thirty thousand pesos, +after deducting costs and expenses. They collect, from one year to +another, eight thousand pesos in tributes from the Sangleys--both +Christians and infidels. [247] + +They also collect the fifth of all gold dug in the islands. By +special concession for a limited period, the tenth is collected +instead of the fifth. There is a declaration concerning it, to the +effect that the natives shall pay no fifths or other duties on the +jewels and gold inherited by them from their ancestors before his +Majesty owned the country. Sufficient measures have been taken for +the clear understanding of this concession and its investigation, +for that on which the tenth has once been paid, and the steps to +be taken in the matter. From one year to another they collect ten +thousand pesos from these fifths, for much is concealed. [248] + +The assignment of two reals from each tributario inures to the royal +treasury and is paid into it, for the pay of the soldiers and the +stipend of the prebendaries. These are collected from the encomenderos, +in proportion to, and on the account of, their tributes, and amount +annually to thirty-four thousand pesos. + +The fines and expenses of justice are committed to the care of the +treasurer of the royal revenues, and are kept in the treasury. They +amount annually to three thousand pesos. + +The three per cent duties on the Chinese merchandise of the Sangley +vessels average forty thousand pesos annually. [249] + +The two per cent duties paid by the Spaniards for exporting merchandise +to Nueva España amount annually to twenty thousand pesos. On the +merchandise and money sent from Nueva España to the Filipinas, +result eight thousand pesos more. Consequently, in these things and +in other dues of less importance that belong to the royal treasury, +his Majesty receives about one hundred and fifty thousand pesos, +or thereabout, annually in the Filipinas. [250] + +Inasmuch as this amount does not suffice for the expenses that are +incurred, the royal treasury of Nueva España sends annually to that of +the Filipinas, in addition to the above revenues, some assistance in +money--a greater or less sum, as necessity requires. For his Majesty +has thus provided for it from the proceeds of the ten per cent duties +on the Chinese merchandise that are collected at the port of Acapulco +in Nueva España. This assistance is given into the keeping of the +royal officials in Manila, and they take charge of it, with the rest +of the revenues that they manage and collect. + +From all this gross sum of his Majesty's revenue, the salaries of +the governor and royal Audiencia are paid, as well as the stipends +of prelates and ecclesiastical prebendaries, the salaries of the +magistrates, and of the royal officials and their assistants; the +pay of all the military officers and regular soldiers; his Majesty's +share of the stipends for instruction, and the building of churches +and their ornaments; the concessions and gratifications that he has +allowed to certain monasteries, and private persons; the building +of large vessels for the navigation to Nueva España, and of galleys +and other vessels for the defense of the islands; expenses for +gunpowder and ammunition; the casting of artillery, and its care; +the expense arising for expeditions and individual undertakings +in the islands, and in their defense; that of navigations to, and +negotiations with, the kingdoms in their vicinity, which are quite +common and necessary. Consequently, since his Majesty's revenues in +these islands are so limited, and his expenses so great, the royal +treasury falls short, and suffers poverty and need. [251] + +The proceeds from the ten per cent duties and the freight charges of +the ships, which are collected at Acapulco in Nueva España, on the +merchandise sent there from the Filipinas, although considerable, are +also not always sufficient for the expenses incurred in Nueva España +with the ships, soldiers, ammunition, and other supplies sent annually +to the Filipinas. These expenses are generally greatly in excess +of those duties, and the amount is made up from the royal treasury +of Mexico. Consequently, the king our sovereign derives as yet no +profit from any revenues of the Filipinas, but rather an expenditure, +by no means small, from his revenues in Nueva España. He sustains the +Filipinas only for the christianization and conversion of the natives, +and for the hopes of greater fruits in other kingdoms and provinces of +Asia, which are expected through this gateway, at God's good pleasure. + +Every year the Audiencia audits the accounts of the royal officials of +his Majesty's revenues, strikes the balances, and sends the accounts +to the tribunal of accounts in Mexico. [252] + +In the city of Manila, and in all those Spanish settlements of the +islands, reside Sangleys, who have come from Great China, besides +the merchants. They have appointed settlements and are engaged in +various trades, and go to the islands for their livelihood. Some +possess their pariáns and shops. Some engage in fishing and farming +among the natives, throughout the country; and go from one island to +another to trade, in large or small champans. [253] + +The annual vessels from Great China bring these Sangleys in great +numbers, especially to the city of Manila, for the sake of the profits +that are gained from their fares. As there is a superabundance of +population in China, and the wages and profits there are little, +they regard as of importance whatever they get in the Filipinas. + +Very great annoyances result from this; for, not only can there be +little security to the country with so many infidels, but the Sangleys +are a wicked and vicious race. Through intercourse and communication +with them, the natives improve little in Christianity and morals. And +since they come in such numbers and are so great eaters, they raise +the price of provisions, and consume them. + +It is true that the city could not be maintained or preserved without +these Sangleys; for they are the mechanics in all trades, and are +excellent workmen and work for suitable prices. But a less number of +them would suffice for this, and would avoid the inconvenience of so +many people as are usually in Manila when the ships arrive--to say +nothing of the many Chinese who go about among the islands, under +pretext of trading with the natives, and there commit innumerable +crimes and offenses. At the least, they explore all the country, the +rivers, creeks, and ports, and know them better than the Spaniards +do; and they will be of great harm and injury in case of any revolt +or hostile invasion of the islands. + +In order to remedy all the above, it was ordered that the vessels +should not bring so many people of this kind, under penalties that +are executed; that, when the vessels return to China, they take +these Sangleys back with them; that only a convenient number of +merchants remain in Manila, in the Parián, and the mechanics of +all necessary trades; and that these must have written license, +under severe penalties. In the execution of this, an auditor of the +Audiencia is engaged by special commission every year, together with +some assistants. On petition of the city cabildo, he usually allows +as many Sangleys to remain as are necessary for the service of all +trades and occupations. The rest are embarked and compelled to return +in the vessels going to China, and a great deal of force and violence +[254] is necessary to accomplish it. + +Those merchants and artisans who remained in Manila before the revolt +of the year six hundred and three had settled the Parián and its +shops. The Parián is a large enclosed alcaicería of many streets, +at some distance from the city walls. It is near the river, and its +location is called San Graviel. There they have their own governor, +who has his tribunal and prison, and his assistants; these administer +justice to them, and watch them day and night, so that they may live +in security, and not commit disorders. + +Those who cannot find room in this Parián live opposite, on the other +side of the river, where Tondo is, in two settlements called Baybay +and Minondoc. They are in charge of the alcalde-mayor of Tondo, and +under the ministry of the religious of St. Dominic, who labor for their +conversion, and for that purpose have learned the Chinese language. + +The Dominicans have two monasteries with the requisite assistants, +and a good hospital for the treatment of Sangleys. In a district +kept separate from the infidels, they have a settlement of baptized +Sangleys, with their wives, households, and families, numbering five +hundred inhabitants; and the religious are continually baptizing +others and settling them in that village. But few of them turn out +well, for they are a vile and restless race, with many vices and bad +customs. Their having become Christians is not through the desire +or wish for salvation, but for the temporal conveniences that they +have there, and because some are unable to return to China because +of debts incurred and crimes committed there. + +Each and all, both Christians and infidels, go unarmed and in their +national garb. This consists of long garments with wide sleeves, made +of blue cangan (but white for mourning, while the chief men wear them +of black and colored silks); wide drawers of the same material; half +hose of felt; very broad shoes, according to their fashion, made of +blue silk embroidered with braid--with several soles, well-sewed--and +of other stuffs. Their hair is long and very black, and they take +good care of it. They do it up on the head in a high knot, [255] +under a very close-fitting hood or coif of horsehair, which reaches +to the middle of the forehead. They wear above all a high round cap +made of the same horsehair, in different fashions, by which their +different occupations, and each man's rank, are distinguished. The +Christians differ only in that they cut their hair short, and wear +hats, as do the Spaniards. + +They are a light-complexioned people and tall of body. They have +scant beards, are very stout-limbed, and of great strength. They +are excellent workmen, and skilful in all arts and trades. They are +phlegmatic, of little courage, treacherous and cruel when opportunity +offers, and very covetous. They are heavy eaters of all kinds of meat, +fish, and fruits; but they drink sparingly, and then of hot beverages. + +They have a governor of their own race, a Christian, who has his +officials and assistants. He hears their cases in affairs of justice, +in their domestic and business affairs. Appeals from him go to the +alcalde-mayor of Tondo or of the Parián, and from all these to the +Audiencia, which also gives especial attention to this nation and +whatever pertains to it. + +No Sangley can live or own a house outside these settlements of +the Parián, and of Baybay and Minondoc. Native settlements are not +allowed in Sangley settlements, or even near them. No Sangley can go +among the islands, or as much as two leguas from the city, without +special permission. Much less can he remain in the city at night, +after the gates are shut, under penalty of death. + +There are generally some Japanese, both Christian and infidel, in +Manila. These are left by the vessels from Japon, although they are +not so numerous as the Chinese. They have their special settlement and +location outside the city, between the Sangley Parián and the suburb of +Laguio, near the monastery of La Candelaria. There they are directed +by discalced religious of St. Francis, by means of interpreters +whom the fathers keep for that purpose. They are a spirited race, +of good disposition, and brave. They wear their own costume, namely, +kimonos of colored silks and cotton, reaching half way down the leg, +and open in front; wide, short drawers; close-fitting half-boots of +leather, [256] and shoes like sandals, with the soles of well-woven +straw. They go bare-headed, and shave the top of the head as far +back as the crown. Their back hair is long, and fastened upon the +skull in a graceful knot. They carry their catans, large and small, +in the belt. They have scant beards, and are a race of noble bearing +and behavior. They employ many ceremonies and courtesies, and attach +much importance to honor and social standing. They are resolute in +any necessity or danger. + +Those who become Christians prove very good, and are very devout +and observant in their religion; for only the desire for salvation +incites them to adopt our religion, so that there are many Christians +in Japon. Accordingly they return freely, and without opposition, +to their own country. At most there are about five hundred Japanese +of this nation in Manila, for they do not go to other parts of the +islands, and such is their disposition that they return to Japon, and +do not tarry in the islands; consequently very few of them usually +remain in the islands. They are treated very cordially, as they are +a race that demand good treatment, and it is advisable to do so for +the friendly relations between the islands and Japon. [257] + +Few people come from the other nations--Sian, Camboja, Borneo, Patan, +and other islands--outside our government; and they immediately return +in their vessels. Consequently, there is nothing special to be said +of them, except that care is exercised in receiving and despatching +them well, and seeing that they return quickly to their own countries. + +Since I have told, in the short time at my disposal, the +characteristics of the Filipinas Islands, and their customs and +practices, it will not be inappropriate to discuss the navigation to +them since it is made thither from Nueva España; the return voyage, +which is not short, or without great dangers and hardships; and that +made in the eastern direction. + +When the islands were conquered in the year of one thousand five +hundred and seventy-four [_sic; sc_. 1564], the Spanish fleet sailed +under command of the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, from Puerto +de la Navidad [258] situated in the South Sea, on the coast of Nueva +España, in the province and district of Xalisco and Galicia, where +resides the royal Audiencia of Guadalajara. A few later voyages +were made also from the same port, until the point for the sending +of these vessels was removed, for better and greater convenience, +to the port of Acapulco, located farther south on the same coast, +in sixteen and one-half degrees of latitude; it is eighty leguas from +Mexico, and in its district. It is an excellent port, sheltered from +all weather; and has a good entrance and good anchorages. Its vicinity +is advantageous, being better provisioned and more populous than that +of La Navidad. There a large Spanish colony has been established, +with its alcalde-mayor, and royal officials who have charge of his +Majesty's treasury; and these attend to the despatch of the vessels. + +The vessels that sail to the Filipinas, as they are despatched annually +on his Majesty's account, must necessarily leave in the certain season +of the brisas, which begin in the month of November and last until the +end of March. This navigation should not be made at any other season, +for from June the vendavals blow, and they are contrary to the voyage. + +As a rule, these ships sail and are despatched at the end of February, +or at the latest by the twentieth of March. They sail west toward the +islands of Las Velas, [259] otherwise called the Ladrones. The island +of Guan, one of them, lies in thirteen degrees of latitude. Inasmuch +as the vessels on leaving Acapulco are wont sometimes to encounter +calms, they sail south from sixteen and one-half degrees, in which +the port is situated, until they strike the brisas, which is generally +at ten or eleven degrees. By this route they sail continually before +the wind, and without changing the sails, with fresh and fair brisas, +and in other moderate weather, for one thousand eight hundred leguas, +without sighting any mainland or island. Then leaving to the south +the Barbudos and other islands, and advancing gradually to a latitude +of thirteen degrees, they sail until they sight the island of Guan; +and above it, in fourteen degrees, that of La Çarpana [Seypan]. This +voyage to those Ladrones Islands lasts generally seventy days. + +The natives of those islands, who go naked, and are a very robust +and barbarous race, go out to sea to meet the ships as soon as they +discover them, at a distance of four to six leguas, with many vessels; +these are one-masted, and are very slender and light. These vessels +have a counterpoise of bamboo to leeward, and their sails are made +of palm-leaves and are lateen-sails. Two or three men go in each one +with oars and paddles. They carry loads of flying-fish, dorados, +[260] cocoa-nuts, bananas, sweet potatoes, bamboos full of water, +and certain mats; and when they reach the ships, they trade these for +iron from the hoops of casks, and bundles of nails, which they use +in their industries, and in the building of their ships. Since some +Spaniards and religious have lived among them, because of Spanish +ships being wrecked or obliged to take refuge there, they come more +freely to our ships and enter them. + +Our ships sail between the two islands of Guan and Çarpana toward the +Filipinas and the cape of Espiritu Santo, a distance of three hundred +leguas farther on, in the latitude of about thirteen degrees. This +distance is made in ten or twelve days with the brisas; but it may +happen, if the ships sail somewhat late, that they encounter vendavals, +which endanger their navigation, and they enter the islands after +great trouble and stormy weather. + +From the cape of Espiritu Santo, the ships enter the strait of Capul +at the islands of Mazbate and Burias; thence they sail to Marinduque +and the coast of Calilaya, the strait of Mindoro, the shoals of +Tuley, and the mouth of Manila Bay. Thence, they go to the port of +Cabit. This is a voyage of one hundred leguas from the entrance to +the islands and is made in one week. This is the end of the voyage, +which is good and generally without storms, if made in the proper time. + +These vessels now make the return voyage from the Filipinas to Nueva +España with great difficulty and danger, for the course is a long one +and there are many storms and various temperatures. The ships depart, +on this account, very well supplied with provisions, and suitably +equipped. Each one sails alone, hoisting as much sail as possible, +and one does not wait for the other, nor do they sight one another +during the voyage. + +They leave the bay and port of Cabit at the first setting-in of +the vendavals, between the same islands and by the same straits, +by the twentieth of June and later. As they set out amid showers, +and are among islands, they sail with difficulty until they leave +the channel at Capul. Once in the open sea, they catch the vendaval, +and voyage east, making more progress when they reach the latitude +of fourteen or fifteen degrees. + +Then the brisa starts. This wind is the ordinary one in the South Sea, +especially in low latitudes. Since it is a head wind, the course is +changed, and the bow is pointed betwen the north and east, as much +as the wind will allow. With this they reach a higher latitude, and +the ship is kept in this course until the vendaval returns. Then, +by means of it, the ship again takes an eastern course in that +latitude where it happens to be, and keeps that direction as long +as that wind lasts. When the vendaval dies, the ship takes the best +course that the winds allow, by the winds then blowing between north +and east. If the wind is so contrary that it is north or northwest, +so that the ship cannot take that course, the other course is taken +so that they may continue to maintain their voyage without losing +time. At four hundred leguas from the islands they sight certain +volcanoes and ridges of the islands of Ladrones, which run north as +far as twenty-four degrees. [261] Among these they generally encounter +severe storms and whirl-winds. At thirty-four degrees is the cape of +Sestos, [262] at the northern head of Japon, six hundred leguas from +the Filipinas. They sail among other islands, which are rarely seen, +in thirty-eight degrees, encountering the same dangers and storms, +and in a cold climate, in the neighborhood of the islands Rica de +Oro ["rich in gold"] and Rica de Plata ["rich in silver"], which are +but seldom seen. [263] After passing them the sea and open expanse +of water is immense, and the ship can run free in any weather. This +gulf is traversed for many leguas with such winds as are encountered, +until a latitude of forty-two degrees is reached, toward the coast of +Nueva España. They seek the winds that generally prevail at so high a +latitude, which are usually northwest. After a long voyage the coast +of Nueva España is sighted, and from Cape Mendoçino (which lies in +forty-two and one-half degrees) the coast extends nine hundred leguas +to the port of Acapulco, which lies in sixteen and one-half degrees. + +When the ships near the coast, which they generally sight betwen forty +and thirty-six degrees, the cold is very severe, and the people suffer +and die. Three hundred leguas before reaching land, signs of it are +seen, by certain _aguas malas_, [264] as large as the hand, round +and violet colored, with a crest in the middle like a lateen sail, +which are called _caravelas_ ["caravels"]. This sign lasts until the +ship is one hundred leguas from land; and then are discovered certain +fish, with half the body in the form of a dog; [265] these frolic with +one another near the ship. After these _perrillos_ ["little dogs"] +are seen the _porras_ ["knobsticks"], which are certain very long, +hollow shoots of a yellow herb with a ball at the top, and which +float on the water. At thirty leguas from the coast are seen many +great bunches of grass which are carried down to the sea by the +great rivers of the country. These grasses are called _balsas_ +["rafts or floats"]. Also many perrillos are seen, and, in turn, +all the various signs. Then the coast is discovered, and it is very +high and clear land. Without losing sight of land, the ship coasts +along it with the northwest, north-northwest, and north winds, which +generally prevail on that coast, blowing by day toward the land, +and by night toward the sea again. With the decrease of the latitude +and the entrance into a warm climate the island of Cenizas [ashes] +is seen, and afterward that of Cedros [cedars]. Thence one sails until +the cape of San Lucas is sighted, which is the entrance of [the gulf +of] California. From that one traverses the eighty leguas intervening +to the islands of Las Marias and the cape of Corrientes ["currents"], +which is on the other side of California in Val de Vanderas ["valley of +banners"], and the provinces of Chametla. Thence one passes the coast +of Colima, Sacatul, Los Motines ["the mutinies"], and Ciguatanejo, +and enters the port of Acapulco--without having made a way-station or +touched land from the channel of Capul in the Filipinas throughout +the voyage. The voyage usually lasts five months or thereabout, +but often six and even more. [266] + +By way of India, one may sail from the Filipinas to España, by making +the voyage to Malaca, and thence to Cochin and Goa, a distance +of one thousand two hundred leguas. This voyage must be made with +the brisas. From Goa one sails by way of India to the cape of Buena +Esperança [Good Hope], and to the Terceras [_i.e._, Azores] Islands, +and thence to Portugal and the port of Lisboa. This is a very long +and dangerous voyage, as is experienced by the Portuguese who make +it every year. From India they usually send letters and despatches to +España by way of the Bermejo ["Red"] Sea, by means of Indians. These +send them through Arabia to Alexandria, and thence by sea to Venecia +[Venice] and thence to España. + +A galleon bound for Portugal sails and is despatched from the fort of +Malaca, in certain years, by the open sea, without touching at India +or on its coasts. It reaches Lisboa much more quickly than do the Goa +vessels. It generally sails on the fifth of January, and does not leave +later than that; nor does it usually anticipate that date. However, +not any of these voyages are practiced by the Castilians--who are +prohibited from making them--except the one made by way of Nueva +España, both going and coming, as above described. And although the +effort has been made, no better or shorter course has been found by +way of the South Sea. [267] + +_Laus Deo_ + + + + +CONQUISTA DE LAS ISLAS MALUCAS + + +By the licentiate Bartolomé Leonardo de Argensola. Madrid; [published] +by Alonso Martin, in the year M.DC.IX. + +SOURCE: This is translated and synopsized from the original printed +work, for which purpose have been used the copies belonging to Harvard +University and to Edward E. Ayer, of Chicago. + +TRANSLATION: This document is translated and synopsized by James +A. Robertson. + + + + + + CONQUEST OF THE MALUCAS ISLANDS. + + Dedicated to King Felipe III, Our Sovereign. + + Written by Licentiate + Bartolome Leonardo de Argensola, + chaplain of her Majesty the Empress, + and Rector of Villahermosa. + + Madrid. Printed by Alonso Martin M DC IX. + + + + + +CONQUEST OF THE MALUCAS ISLANDS + +[The usual licenses and preliminary matter precede Argensola's +[268] history. The license of the king permitting the author, +and no other, to have the book printed and sold for the following +ten years, bears date "Madrid, January twenty-four, one thousand +six hundred and nine." The license and approbation of the ordinary, +Doctor Cetina, dated "Madrid, December 30, 1608," certifies that the +history contains nothing against the Catholic faith. Pedro de Valencia, +royal chronicler, under date of "Madrid, January 14, 1609," approves +the work as deserving publicity. Licentiate Murcia de la Llana, +after comparing a single printed copy with the original manuscript, +appends a list of errata, with certification that, with these, the +book corresponds to the original. This bears date "Madrid, May 4, +1609." Pedro Zapata del Marmol, at "Madrid, May seven, one thousand +six hundred and nine," appraises the book and orders that it be sold +at four maravedis per pliego or fold, thus making the price of the +book, since it contains one hundred and six pliegos, twelve reals, +sixteen maravedis. In his dedication, dated "Madrid, May 4, 1609," +Argensola requests the king to read his book, as it "contains victories +of the Church." The author's brother, Lupercio Leonardo de Argensola, +secretary of the empress, chief chronicler of the king in Aragón, +writes a letter "to the readers," in which he meets their arguments +or supposed arguments, and defends the title and contents of the book, +the method of treatment, the style, and its _raison d'être_. + +The work contains ten books, the first four of which consist almost +entirely of matters extraneous to the Philippines, such as Maluco +matters, the history of Pedro Sarmiento's expedition through the Strait +of Magellan in search of Drake, etc. The last six books contain more +Philippine matter, and while Argensola cannot always be credited with +the same reliability as Morga, he often supplements the latter. His +introduction in the first book reads as follows:] [269] + +I write of the reduction of the Malucas Islands to the obedience of +Felipe III, king of España, and the reduction of their kings to their +former vassalage, which their predecessors rendered, and which was +introduced anew by Don Pedro de Acuña, governor of the Filipinas and +general of the Spanish fleet. That was a victory worthy the foresight +of so pious a monarch, of the care of the dignified ministers of his +supreme council, and of the valor of our nation: not so greatly because +of the rare fertility of those provinces, as because by it was taken +from the northern fleets one great compelling motive for sailing our +seas, so that they should not infect the purity of the new faith of +the Asiatic Indians, and the inhabitants of our colonies who trade +with them, with heresy. The short time in which the undertaking +was completed does not detract from its praise; on the contrary, +it can, by that very fact, occupy a worthy place among more copious +narratives. Well do I see the dangers to which I expose myself, but I +am also confident that I shall not find a defense wanting. Illustrious +sculptors or painters are wont to esteem highly the heads, arms, +and other members, that are copied perfectly from living bodies, in +imitation of which they form all the parts, when they wish to make any +figure. Those ignorant of art despise that preparation, and only enjoy +the statue or picture, which is composed of all its members, and do not +examine the imperfections that they may possess. My present relation +of the recovery of those kingdoms will be judged by this esteem and +by this contempt. For the wise, who know how history is formed, will +esteem this part drawn from life. Others who read, as they confess, +only to pass the time, will value it but little--preferring some +highly fabulous monstrosities, or a prolix book, which, under the +name of history, contains a marvelous number of people, and their +deaths; and which gives events, not as God disposed them, but as they +desire them. Hence it happens that many things worth knowing remain +hidden, for, since they are deferred tor general histories, they are +contemporaneously written but meagerly, by those concerned in them; +and when their manuscripts are wanted, they are not to be found, or +else bind the writer to the laws imposed on him by those who wished +to leave that memorial through their self-love or any other passion, +and he can make no examination of their truth. Consequently to free a +success so important as that of Ternate, the capital of all Maluco, +from this danger, I was ordered to write it, during the lifetime of +those who engaged in it either actively, or through counsel I am so +fully informed of what is needful to write this history, that I hope +to supply my want of ability by the truth. Of this alone have I deemed +it fitting to advise the reader, and not of the advantage that will be +derived from a perusal of this relation. For if the reader desire my +relation, any advice on my part will be superfluous; and otherwise, +even though such advice guide him rightly, it will be impossible to +achieve anything thereby. + +[The first four books treat somewhat briefly of the legendary history +and the European discovery of the the Malucos; their importance +in trade, by reason of their spices, and other resources; their +inhabitants; the early Portuguese domination and cruelties, and the +consequent risings and rebellions of the natives; the civil wars +between Ternate and Tidors; and the accession of Felipe II to the +Portuguese crown. The following extracts and abstracts are made from +various parts of these four books:] + +The eastern archipelago ... embraces so many islands, that +even yet we do not know their exact number. Modern writers make +five divisions of this archipelago, which are themselves a like +number of archipelagos--namely, Maluco, Moro, Papuas, Celebes, +and Amboyno. The name of the first in that language is Moloc, +and means the same as "capital," for it is the capital of all the +adjacent parts; and, according to others, Maluco, which signifies +in Arabic, as par excellence, "the kingdom." It is reduced to five +chief islands, all under one meridian, all in sight of one another, +and lying within a distance of twenty-five leguas. They lie across +the equator, their most northern latitude being one-half degree, +and their most southern one degree. They are bounded on the west by +the island of Xilòlo, called Batochina de Moro by the Portuguese, +and Alemaera by the Malucos. Of the many islands round about, which +are also called Malucas, ... the following are remarkable for the +abundance of their spice, namely--beginning at the north-Ternate, +Tydore, Motiel, Maquien, and Bacham. In the time of their former +pagans they were called Cape, Duco, Moutil, Mara, and Seque ... The +inhabitants differ from one another, as it were, by the miraculous +kindness of nature. The women are light-complexioned and beautiful, +while the men have a complexion somewhat darker than a quince. The +hair is smooth, and many anoint it with fragrant oils. They have +large eyes and long eyelashes, which, with their eyebrows, they +wear blackened. Their bodies are robust, and they are much given +to war, but to all other employment they are slothful. They live +long, grow gray early, and are always active, on sea no less than +on land. Hospitable and kind to guests, they are importunate and +insistent in their demands when they become familiar. They are full of +self-interest in their dealings, and make use of tricks, frauds, and +lies. They are poor, and consequently proud; and, to name many vices +in one, they are ungrateful. The Chinese occupied all these islands +when they subjugated all that orient, then the Javanese and Malays, +and lastly the Persians and Arabs. These last, by means of commerce, +introduced the superstitions of Mahomet among the worship of their +gods (of whom some families boasted as ancestors). Their laws are +barbarous. They set no limit to their marriages. The chief wife of the +king, called _putriz_ in their language, determines nobility and the +right to the succession--to which her children are preferred, even +when they are younger than the children of other mothers. Not even +the slightest theft is pardoned, but adultery is easily excused. At +daybreak, those appointed for this duty sound (by law) large timbrels +in the streets of the settlements, in order to awaken married people, +whom, on account of human propagation, they judge worthy of political +care. The majority of crimes are punished by death. In other things +they obey the tyranny or will of the conqueror. The headdress of +the men consists of colored Turkish turbans, with many feathers in +them. That of the king, which corresponds to a crown, has the form +of a miter in its peak. The remainder of the clothing universally +consists of jackets which they call _cheninas_, and trousers of +blue, crimson, green, or violet damask. Of the same material are +their cloaks, which are short and military, and fastened diagonally +or knotted on the shoulder, after the fashion of the ancient Roman +garments, as known to us by the writings, statues, and other traces +of those times. The women show off their hair, now letting it hang, +and again knotting it upon the head, and placing various kinds of +flowers in the bands that hold it; so that, in the adjustment of +their headdress, they are not embarrassed by veils, plumage, or +feathers. All that variety, even without art, adorns them. They +wear bracelets, earrings, and necklaces of diamonds and rubies, +and long strings of pearls--ornaments that are not prohibited to +the common people; as neither are silks, which are especially worn +by the women after the fashion of Persians and Turks. These are all +the wealth of the seas and surrounding lands. Men and women betoken +in their dress the natural haughtiness of their disposition. The +variety of their languages is not little. It may happen that one +village cannot understand the language of the next. Malay, being most +easy to pronounce, is most common. From the variety of languages +it is inferred that these islands have been populated by different +nations. Antiquity, and the art of navigating in those districts, is +ascribed to the Chinese. Others affirm that the Malucos are descended +from the Javanese, who, attracted by the sweetness of the odors wafted +by the spices, stopped at Maluco. They took a cargo of cloves, which +until then were unknown, and, continuing to trade in these, carried +them in their vessels to the Persian and Arabian straits. They went +throughout those provinces, carrying also ilks, and chinaware--products +of the resources and skill of the Chinese. The cloves, by means +of the Persians and Arabs, came to the Greeks and Romans. Several +Roman emperors tried to conquer the east, in order to find the spice +regions, so much did they desire the spice. Believing that they all +came from China, they gave them Chinese names. The Spaniards formerly +brought the spices with other merchandise from the Bermejo [_i.e._, +Red] or Erithrean Sea. The kings of Egypt once gained possession of +the spices, and they reached Europe by way of the Asiatics. When the +Romans made Egypt one of their provinces, they continued the trade. The +Genoese, much later, transferring the commerce to Theodosia (now Cafa) +distributed the spices, and there Venecia and other trading nations +established their agents and factories. They sailed later by way of +the Caspian Sea and Trapisonda; but the trade fell with the empire, +and the Turks carried this merchandise in caravans of camels +and dromedaries to Barcito, Lepo, and Damasco, and to various +Mediterranean ports. [270] The sultans of Cayro restored this trade +to the Bermejo Sea, and to Alexandria by the Nilo [_i.e._, Nile] +River. The Portuguese deprived the sultans of it, after their conquest +of the Eastern Indias, and now they bring the spices by way of the +cape of Buena Esperanza in their fleets; while with those that sail +along the coasts of Arabia and Persia, and to the cape of Guardafun, +they prohibit drugs being taken to Cayro, sinking or capturing the +vessel that tries to do so. The sultan's trade was suppressed by this +fear and the security that was introduced, and all the spices come +on the account of the royal crown to India, with innumerable delays, +until they reach Lisboa. He who is master of the navigation will be +master of this pleasing wealth. + +[Mindanao--which, as appears from an allusion by Argensola, was not +always considered a portion of the Philippines proper--is visited +by one of the early Portuguese conquerors, Captain Pinto, being sent +there by Tristan de Atayde "and to the neighboring islands, to provide +themselves with the necessities of life." There "he visited the king, +by whom he was courteously received; and after his credentials were +examined, and consultation over his requests was held with the Sangages +[271] of the king's council, peace and friendship were made. Pinto +sold his merchandise at whatever price he wished, and traded for +and bought a cargo of provisions at will." (Book ii, pp. 49-50.) The +desire for cloves [272] on the part of the Portuguese is so strong in +the Malucos that the natives determine to burn their trees, although +"the clove harvest forms the wealth of the Maluco kings," in order +to cause them to leave. Although the threat is not carried out, +wars prevail constantly between natives and conquerors. The contests +become so vindictive and troublesome that they lead to arguments +for abandoning the Philippines after Felipe II's accession to the +throne. The passages relating to this are as follows:] + +The apprehensions of this danger had made the ministers of all those +provinces anxious, for their fears were being confirmed by proofs +of manifest rebellion. In Goa, Diego Lopez de Mezquita was already +a prisoner in the fortress of Benastirim, and under a strong guard, +and the viceroy was awaiting the decision from España to dispose of +him and of the soldiers; for they feared lest the Ternatans would make +use of the great help that could be sent them by the Chinese; which +could be sent much more easily if the matters then being discussed +in Castilla were made certain. It was reported that the Council of +State--having noted that the Filipinas not only did not augment the +royal incomes, but were even lessening them, and were the occasion for +fruitless expense; and that they were so numerous and so difficult +of conservation--had proposed to King Filipo, our sovereign, to +abandon them, and withdraw the Audiencia and presidios that sustained +them. They added to this argument the example of the Chinese kings and +nations, who also had abandoned those islands--although they are so +near and can aid them so easily, that the islands may be reckoned as a +part of their mainland. They said that as España was governing them, +signal detriment was being received, and there were no hopes that +any betterment would be obtained in future; for the amount of silver +passing thither from Nueva España, both for regular expenses and for +merchandise, was immense. For the same reason, and by the same road, +that treasure was being sent by the hands of the Chinese to the center +of those kingdoms, which, intractable by the severity of their laws, +are debarred by those laws, as by arms and fortifications, from all +trade with foreigners. They asserted that the monarchy, scattered and +divided by so many seas, and climes, could scarcely be reduced to one +whole; and that human foresight could not bind, by means of ability, +provinces separated by nature with so distant boundaries. These +arguments, they said, were born not of the mind, but of experience, +a truth manifest to the senses. All other arguments that could be +adduced against this reasoning they declared to be honorable and +full of generous sound, but difficult of execution. It would be +more advisable to increase the power of the king in Europe, where +the forces could attend to emergencies without the casualties that +militate against them in outside seas and dominions. Each one of these +arguments was enforced so minutely by the ministers of the treasury +that this proposition merited consideration and examination. Had +God permitted the king to exclude the Filipinas from his monarchy, +and leave them exposed to the power of whomsoever should seize them +first, the Malucans would have so strengthened the condition of their +affairs that it would have been impregnable. + +This same resolution has been communicated on other occasions, and +in the reign of King Filipo Third, now reigning. He, conforming +to his father's reply, has ever refused to accept counsel so +injurious. Consequently, that most prudent monarch answered that the +Filipinas would be conserved in their present condition, and that the +Audiencia would be granted sufficient authority so that justice could +be more thoroughly administered; for in the completeness and rigor +of justice the king based the duration and energy of the state. For +the same reason, the military force there would be strengthened, +and the royal incomes of Nueva España, or those of any other of his +kingdoms, would be expended for that purpose, for all the treasures, +and those still to be discovered in the bosom of the mines, must be +applied to the propagation of the gospel. For what, he asked, would +the enemies of the gospel say, if they should see that the Filipinas +were deprived of the light, and of the ministers who preach it, +because they did not produce metals and wealth as did other rich +islands in Assia and America? He said that the entire power of the +sovereigns must minister to this superior end, as sons of the Church +and assistants of the apostolic voice, which is being continued in +the successes of the first preaching. If he had refused to yield +one jot in his severity to his northern vassals, [273] or to grant +them liberty for their consciences, why should he relent toward the +pagans and Mahometans, who are the harvest that God has assigned him, +in order to enrich the Church with those so remote children? By this +wise he enjoined silence on the discussion, and with this glorious +aim the decision has ever been made when zeal or human convenience +has discussed the abandonment of those states.... This religious +motive influenced Felipo; but, besides it, those who had experience +of those Asiatic sources of wealth urged others. The most abundant +wealth consists of diamonds, rubies, large and seed pearls, amber, +musk, civet, and camphor, from Borneo and China; vermilion, coral, +quicksilver, copper, and white cloth, from Cambaya and Mengala; rugs, +carpets, fine counterpanes, camlets, from Persia; brocades, ivory, +rhubarb, cardamoms, cassia, [274] incense, benzoin, wax, china, +lac for medicine and dyes, cloves, and mace, from Banda; with gold, +silver, and pearls, medicinal woods, aroes, eagle-wood, calambuco, +[275] ebony, and innumerable other rare plants, drugs, spices, and +ornaments. They say that Venecia lost all this when the commerce +passed to Portugal [276] (Book ii, pp. 84-86).... + +[While the war between the Portuguese and the natives is at its +height, a galleon passes which is later found to have been neither +Spanish nor Portuguese, as the natives fear, "but a ship of Venetians, +private persons, on its way from Manila to China, with various bartered +merchandise of those states and of the east" (Book ii, p. 89). + +A native envoy visits Felipe II in Lisbon, but fails to accomplish +much. The later wars between Portuguese and Spaniards and natives +are characterized by assistance for the latter from English and Dutch +sources. King Felipe "especially to recover Témate," turns "his eyes +to the convenience afforded by all the Filipinas, to a greater extent +than India." Later he orders by "his royal decree" that "all the +governors of the Filipinas should be instructed to aid the Malucas, +and all the Indian states of the Portuguese crown; for this may be +done more conveniently from those islands than from India itself" +(Book iv, p. 140). Argensola recurring again to the proposition of +abandoning the Philippines and other islands, says:] + +The reader should also consider, that although avarice is sometimes +mixed up in the ministry of the preaching of the gospel, and lawless +acts are committed by our captains and soldiers, yet such excesses do +not make the cause less just. He should consider also that, supposing +that his Majesty should choose, for excellent state reasons (as we +said were proposed), to abandon those districts of Asia, as the Chinese +did, and to narrow the bounds of his monarchy, the cause of the faith +would not permit it. Our kings are ministers of the faith, and sons +of the Catholic church, and any war waged for the introduction of the +gospel is most important, and of the greatest profit, even though it +be to acquire or to gain desert provinces. Besides the Filipinas have +shown how docile are their natives, and how thoroughly they benefit by +the example and company of the Spaniards--the tokens of the affection +with which they have received the faith and aid the religious who are +extending the faith and carrying it to China, Japon, Camboxa, Mindanao, +the Malucas, and the other places where endures idolatry or friendship +with the demons (which the former owners of the country left to them +when they excluded those places from their dominion), or the fictions +of Mahomet, which those places afterward admitted. This is the chief +reason for conserving those provinces. (Book iv, pp. 161, 162.) + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Fifth + +After the Luzones or Manilas Islands--both these being ancient +names--had been discovered by Magallanes, Sebastian Cano returned +to España, after the former's death and the successive deaths of +his companions, in that venerable ship which--as if significant of +its voyage, which contains more of truth than of probability--they +called "Vitoria." Sebastian Cano was a mountaineer, from the hamlet +of Guetaria in the Pyrenees Mountains, according to Mapheo, [277] in +his Latin history. In his history he devotes much space to the great +courage of Cano, and his skill in the arts of navigation. He recounts +the universal respect and admiration bestowed upon Cano, since he was +the first in the age of mortals to circumnavigate this globe. And in +truth, what estimation can remain to the fabulous Argonauts, Tiphys +and Jason, and the other navigators whom the elegance or the daring +of Grecia extols, when compared to our Cano? He was the first witness +of the commerce of the seas, and nature opened to his eyes what had +been reserved until then for them; and he was allowed to explore it +all, and to furnish a beginning in so arduous endeavors for the law +that saves and renders eternal. After the death of Magallanes, the +Lusones Islands--which ought to have inherited his name, as being +his sepulcher, as the strait did because of his passage through +it--changed that name for that of Filipinas, [278] in the year one +thousand five hundred and sixty-five; although those islands of that +eastern archipeago are also called by that name. Adelantado Miguel de +Legaspe, who was sent from Nueva España by Viceroy Don Luys de Velasco +with a Spanish fleet, made port in those islands. He conquered first +the island of Zebu and those in its vicinity, where he remained six +years. That region is called by another name, Pintados, still preserved +by different portions of that coast, because the Indians at that time +went about naked, and with their bodies adorned and painted [_i.e._, +tattooed] in various colors. Legaspe left a guard there and went to +occupy Luzon, one hundred and fifty leguas from Zebû. He fought the +barbarians, whom, after the surprise of our ships, weapons, and faces +had worn off, the same novelty encouraged. Legaspe anchored in a bay +four leguas wide, which shows an island midway in its entrance, now +called Marívelez. The bay has a circuit of thirty leguas to the city of +Manila, and is eight leguas wide from north to east. The inhabitants +of that city resisted him with greater courage than the Pintados, for +they had artillery and a fort. But after the Spaniards had taken that, +the defenders of it surrendered. This was done quickly, and allowed +no time for the inhabitants to unite. Thus did Legaspe enter Manila, +a place fortified by nature. At one point of it (which is surrounded by +the water of the bay) is a river of considerable volume, whose source +is the great Lake of Vay [Bay], five leguas distant. This point, narrow +and slender at first, becomes wider immediately, for the seashore +turns toward the southwest, and the bank of the river toward the east, +so that a very considerable space is left for the city. The city is +entirely surrounded with water, except that part between the west +and south. Legaspe founded the city then with wooden buildings, for +wood is produced abundantly in those regions. The roofs of the houses +were covered with nipa leaves, which resemble our mace-reed, [279] +and which form a sufficient defense against the rains. It is, however, +an inflammable material, and is the occasion of the great fires that +have happened there so often. Luzon is more densely populated than +any of the many islands--which are called Filipinas in honor of King +Filipo II, and which, as is affirmed, number eleven thousand. Luzon has +a circumference of three hundred and fifty leguas. Beyond the bay it +runs one hundred leguas to the north, as far as Nueva Segovia; from +the beginning of that province (namely, Cape Bojador), it runs for +thirty leguas east to the promontory of El Engaño. Thence the coast +runs south for eighty leguas, and then with another changed direction +for forty leguas to what they call Embocadero ["the channel"], that is, +the strait opposite the island Tandaya, which is distant eighty more +leguas from the bay. Consequently the island has the shape of a square; +it has many harbors, but few capacious ports. Manila is in slightly +more than fourteen degrees of northern latitude, and in longitude +(reckoning from the Canarias) one hundred and sixty. The most northern +part of Luzon lies in nineteen degrees [of latitude]. With the sea +between them, the great kingdom of China lies on that side of it, +seventy leguas away; while the islands of Japon lie to the northeast, +at a distance of two hundred and fifty leguas. On the east is the open +ocean, and on the south the greatest of the archipelagos of the ocean, +which is divided into live archipelagos. These are broken up into so +many islands, kingdoms, and provinces, that one would believe that +nature did not desire men to ascertain their number. Both Javas, +our Malucas, Borneo, and Nueva Guinea are known; on the west, +and at a distance of three hundred leguas, Malaca, Sian, Patan, +Camboxa, Cochinchina, and other different provinces on the mainland +of Asia. The Chinese abandoned living in our Filipinas, but not its +trade; nor did the cultivation or the fertility of the islands for +that Reason cease. Wheat and other necessary grains are produced +there in abundance: deer, Cattle, buffaloes, goats, and wild boars; +and fruits and spices. If there be anything lacking, the Chinese from +Chincheo bring it, such as chinaware and silks. The wine always used +and drunk there is made from palms, by cutting off the clusters of +fruit that they produce, when green--that fruit is called cocos--from +which, after cutting the leaf stalks, they gather the liquor that +flows forth, and boil it in jars, until it becomes so strong that +it causes intoxication and has the same effects as the strongest +Spanish wine. Of native fruits, there are oranges, lemons, and +very sweet citrons; while they have fig and pear-trees introduced +from España. They rear sparrow-hawks, herons [_martinetes_], and +royal eagles in great abundance. They have a great many different +kinds of parrots, and other birds, large and small. In the rivers +and lakes are many horrible caymans or crocodiles; these kill the +Indians very easily--and especially the children, who go carelessly +to their haunts--as well as the cattle when they go to drink. Not +a few times has it happened that they have seized the cattle by the +muzzles and pulled them beneath the water, and drowned them without +power to resist, however large the animal may be. Then the carcass +is dragged ashore and devoured ... Indians are found so courageous +that, notwithstanding the fierceness of those animals, they kill them +with their hands. They cover the left hand and arm with a glove made +from buffalo hide, and hold therein a stake or peg, somewhat longer +than a tercia, [280] and about as thick as the wrist, and sharpened +at both ends. Then they enter the river until the water reaches the +waist. The crocodile rushes upon the Indian with open mouth to devour +him. The latter presents to it his protected arm and the hand with the +stake, so that the beast may seize it, and runs it into the animal's +mouth in such a position that it cannot shut its mouth or make use +of its strong teeth to attack its slayer. Feeling the pain of the +sharp stake the crocodile becomes so docile that it neither resists +nor attacks, nor dares move, for the slightest movement causes it +pain. Thereupon the barbarian, pulling strongly on the stake, wounds +the beast repeatedly with a dagger (carried in the right hand) in the +throat, until it bleeds to death. Then it is drawn ashore with lines +and ropes, with the aid of other Indians who unite to drag it in; and +many are needed, because of the huge bodies of those crocodiles. They +resemble lizards, but are furnished with scales so strong that scarce +can an arquebus-shot dent them. The only vulnerable spots are the +throat and under parts of the legs [_i.e._, where they join the +body], where nature has given them a certain sweet odor, which the +Indians use. Besides cattle, all the animals of Africa and more are +found in those islands--tigers, lions, bears, foxes, monkeys, apes, +squirrels--and in some of them are many civet-cats. These last are wont +to be hunted extensively, in order to take them to different nations +with the other merchandise of China--linens, silks, earthenware, iron, +copper, steel, quicksilver, and innumerable other things, which are +transported annually from those provinces. Religion and government +are the same as those of España; but in those islands that are still +unsubdued, foolish idolatry prevails. They attribute immortality +to their souls, but they believe that souls wander from one body to +another, according to that ridiculous [doctrine of] transmigration +invented or declared by Pythagoras. Trading is much in vogue, and is +advanced by the Chinese commerce. The Filipinos are more courageous +than their other neighbors. The Spaniards and creoles do not belie +their high origin. + +By order of King Filipo an army was formed from all this people, in +order to attempt to take the forts of Maluco. Don Gonçalo Ronquillo +de Peñalosa was governor. Although he had received beforehand certain +information by way of trade and the spies that had gone there, he +was not satisfied with them, and sent another soldier to Maluco. The +latter changed his clothes, and then with that and his aspect, +which was not unlike that of the natives, and their language, which +he spoke fluently, went to Tydore. He found our men very desirous of +the enterprise, and the king of that island ready to push it with his +forces. He went to Ternate with the merchants, and saw the fortresses +and the reefs about the ports; and sounded their friendship with +the English. He found that the latter landed and traded securely--or +rather, as if by right. Nor was the multitude of secret Christians +unknown to him, who would take up arms in due season; nor any of the +other things, that, as an experienced spy, it was necessary for him to +report. Thereupon Ronquillo prepared about three hundred Spaniards and +more than one thousand five hundred Filipinos, with ammunition, food, +and sailors. With three large vessels and a considerable number of +smaller ones, he set sail toward Maluco at the proper season. Pedro +Sarmiento was general, an energetic and experienced man, who still +lives in Manila. He set out courageously and energetically, in order +to destroy any of the enemies then sailing those seas. Several days +previous his Majesty had appointed Pablo de Lima to the charge of +Ternate, if it were gained; and had allowed his brother, Francisco +de Lima, the concession of two voyages to Maluco, in consideration of +their services and those of Henrique, their father. Pablo had married +a Christian woman, and a devout one, although she was a relative +of the king of Tydore, who is not a Christian. For this reason, and +because he possessed in Ternate the ancient inheritance to the towns of +Guita, Mofaquia, Mofaguita, Pauate, Pelueri, Sansuma, Tahane, Mayloa, +and Soma; and in the island of Maquien, Sabele, Talapao, Talatoa, +Mofabouaua, Tabalola, Tagono, Bobaba, and Molapa--of the majority of +which the Ternatan king had dispossessed him, as well as Bitua and +other towns in Tydore, on the pretext of his having abandoned them--he +went to Manila, where he discussed with the governor the method of +facilitating the conquest, on the very eve of its execution. His +counsel was favored, and he gave it as it was his own cause. For, +in addition to the inheritance that the king of Ternate had usurped +from him, he expected to get the island of Moutil, which had belonged +to his ancestors. The expedition was also authorized by the presence +of Don Juan Ronquillo, the governor's nephew, who held equal authority +by land and sea with Sarmiento. If there were anything wanting, it was +thought that it would be supplied easily by the valor of the soldiers, +together with the shortness of the voyage and the carelessness of the +enemy. But the divided command proved an obstacle to that hope. Their +voyage was not stormy, but neither was it so favorable that they +were enabled to anchor exactly at Ternate, as was necessary in order +to deprive the enemy from using their own vigilance. They went to +Moutil to anchor, and within sight of the inhabitants of the land, +fought with some hostile _janquas_. [281] These were captured, and +the Christians found within them were set at liberty. As Pablo de Lima +knew the harbors, and as the people of the island did not possess the +forces necessary to defend themselves against a fleet, and as it was +easily attacked on the sides, it surrendered. The natives came with +branches of palms, citron-trees, and gariofylos [_i.e., caryophyllus_], +or clove-trees, as tokens of peace, and to beg pardon. They obtained +both, and for master, Pablo de Lima. However the vesting him with that +domain proved cf little utility; for a few days after, all the people +slipped away, either considering themselves more secure in Ternate, or +to meet the enemy--who must necessarily carry the war to that island, +as happened. Sarmiento repaired his vessels on that island [_i.e._, +Moutil], and without the loss of a single soldier, and flushed by +his first victory, went to Talangame, passing through the hostile +caracoas, which had been fitted up hastily and without order. The +fort and the king, in possession of our artillery--especially the +rampart, which was enlarged and afterward called Cachil Tulo, after +the king's uncle, who built it--were in readiness long before, and +were threatening some great disaster. Our men landed on that side, +but their landing was opposed by the Ternatans. However night put an +end to battle, and each side retiring to safety, our men finished +landing and mounting their artillery, in the position and manner +counseled by Pablo de Lima, who ever since then has been general of +artillery in the fort of Tydore. The king of that island wished to +join our troops, as was shown by certain actions, and by his promises +to Alférez Dueñas; but he doubted the fortune of the Castilians, as +if he had not had many experiences of it. Now the occasion persuaded +him and fidelity bound him, but he still hesitated. The doubt of that +king is believed to have hurt the outcome of the affair. Sarmiento, +after having mounted the artillery and securely fortified himself, +and after having taken some captives (from whom he learned the food +supply and arms of the besieged), commenced to hem in the enemy, and +to bombard them furiously. However he did not scare them, for they +answered boldly. It became necessary to seize the high places, from +which, as from commanding eminences--which were leveled later--our +men harassed the enemy. Had they persevered in this, it would have +sufficed to end the war. But to such an extent did sickness reign +in our camp, that no better medicine was found than that of absence, +and deferring this undertaking to another time. The assistance from +Tydore was of no consequence. They proved lukewarm friends, and all +the rest was spiritless. Heaven knows the other reasons. There must +have been some stronger ones; for, in reality, the camp was raised, +and after embarking returned to Manila, without having had any greater +effect than to increase the confidence of the enemy. + +Then only the English nation disturbed Spanish dominion in that +orient. Consequently King Filipo desired not only to forbid it with +arms near at hand, but also to furnish an example, by their punishment, +to all the northern nations, so that they should not undertake the +invasions that we see. A beginning was made in this work in the year +one thousand five hundred and eighty-eight, as is related in the +following discourse. + +[The beheading of Mary Stuart, the English confederation with Holland, +and the building, disaster, and defeat of the "invincible armada" +follow. The narrative continues:] + +The Hollanders or Zealanders, confederated with Queen Isabel [_i.e._, +Elizabeth of England], being witnesses of that event [_i.e._, the +defeat of the armada], were encouraged to aspire to greater efforts, +in disobedience to their religion and to their sovereign, to usurp +the eastern riches--mines, spices, drugs, and silks--as is seen by +their reckless voyages, in which they have been emulous of the recent +examples set by the English, and by the more ancient ones left us +by Colon, Alburquerque, Magallanes, Gama, and Cortes, as we shall +see later.... + +After Santiago de Vera became governor of the Filipinas, he was +especially ordered to equip a fleet to attack Ternate, where the +English, from that time forward, were trading with all security. All +nations had established factories there, except the Javanese and the +Lascars. More than two thousand five hundred Moros from Meca were +preaching their abominable doctrine. They did not fear Portugal; all +their fear was caused by the Castilians, whom but lately they found +pledged to vengeance. The king of Ternate knew that Sarmiento and +Ronquillo would have taken it, had not disease prevented them. When the +new preparation was learned in Tydore, the rumor was taken to Ternate +by spies. That king immediately summoned his vassals, especially the +islanders of Maquien and Homero, who, inasmuch as those islands are +so densely populated, responded with forty caracoas. The number would +have been greater, but the king would not permit that more should be +equipped than he requested, as he could not conceal his dread lest +they rebel, as the lands were full of Christians, and the tributes +that he had imposed on them were so excessive. Santiago de Vera made +Captain Juan Morones general, who was not lacking in prudence, just as +valor was not lacking to the soldiers, or ammunition and artillery to +the fleet. Pablo de Lima assisted in both forces. But whether caused +by natural ambition, or want of harmony in some other way, they were +so disunited that one would have prophesied jealousies before they +left Manila. They set sail in good weather, and escaped the greatest +hardships of the sea. But when they considered themselves safe, +all the elements were loosed upon the fleet. Light and reckoning +failed them. The boats were shattered and the most important one +sunk, with the loss of all its crew. That was the galleon called +"Santa Helena," which was carrying the pieces to bombard the fortress, +and considerable of the other ammunition and apparatus. However they +persisted, and the king of Bacham assisted them with the men that he +had raised under the pretext of sweeping the sea of certain enemies; +and, as a baptized Christian, he bewailed the apostasy that he had +made, because of persecution, from the glorious confession of our +faith, and promised the restitution of his soul. + +[The futile operations of the Spaniards at Ternate follow. Refusing +advice, the commander tries to take the main fort instead of attacking +in different places with small detachments. Finally the siege is +raised, when the enemy is almost starved out. Communication with +traders from Europe is again free to Ternate, "especially with their +new friends, the English." But internal disputes and ambitions in +Ternate lead to the following letter to Santiago de Vera from Cachil +Tulo, uncle of the illegitimate king of Ternate:] + +My brother, Cachil Babu, former king of Ternate, wrote to Portugal to +the king, requesting justice on a man who killed his father and mine, +in return for which he promised to deliver to his Majesty the fort +of Ternate, of which he had been dispossessed. And as his Majesty +succeeded to the kingdoms of Portugal, he answered my brother's letter +by Cachil Naique, his ambassador. But when it arrived, my brother was +already dead, for which reason we did not then deliver the fortress, as +a bastard son had succeeded him, whom the Ternatans, with the help of +the king of Tydore, elevated as king, although he had no right to the +throne. He refused to fulfil his father's promise and pledge. Neither +would he take my counsel or that of my brother, Cachil Mandraxa, +rightful heir of the kingdom, namely, that he deliver the fortress, +as his father had promised the Portuguese--not because he could not +defend himself from them or from his Majesty, but expressly because +he had been thus ordered by his father and my brother. It must not +be understood that it was taken from us by force of arms, but that +we of ourselves had this will to deliver the fortress to serve his +Majesty. Upon seeing us with this intention he determined to kill +my brother, his uncle, the rightful heir of the kingdom, by having +him stabbed by the hand of a slave, under his word and security and +mine. Therefore, considering such action of my nephew senseless, +and that he refuses to fulfil what his father and I and my brothers +promised to his Majesty, I have determined, now and henceforth, to +become the true vassal and servant of his Majesty. By this present +I bind myself, and I swear by my religion, as I did so swear, and I +shall not annul my pledge, through the father-vicar Antonio Ferreyra, +to give all my help and aid for the taking of the fort, with all my +kindred and friends, until his Majesty's captain takes possession of +it or he who shall hereafter come with the Portuguese and Castilians, +who shall be in his company. [This I shall do] provided that the +captain or captains in his Majesty's name shall fulfil toward me the +signed promise of Duarte Pereyra, the chief captain, inasmuch as I +gave him another such message. That is to proclaim me king of Ternate, +as soon as he shall take possession of the fort for his Majesty; for +it belongs to me both through my father, and by the service that I am +rendering, and that I hope to render later, to his Majesty. Therefore, +I beseech your Lordship for favor, and request you in his Majesty's +name to aid me by sending the greatest possible number of soldiers; +and that quickly, so that this my intention and will to serve his +Majesty in this may be achieved, and, as I hope, without loss of +life--although, as your Lordship will have learned, this fortress +is well garrisoned. The order and arrangement that these soldiers +would better observe will be written to your Lordship by the chief +captain. Given in Tydore, where I have come for this purpose, as the +father-vicar Antonio Ferreyra and the auditor Antonio de Matos will +testify, whom, as such persons, I begged to sign for me. May 23. + +[The letter of the Portuguese commander verifies the above letter, +and asks for four hundred Spanish soldiers, under pretext of sending +them "to drive the Javanese from those seas, whose friendship +the Ternatans value more than ours." They at least will keep the +English from Ternatan ports. Fifteen fragatas and one galleon will +be enough, and they are to be accompanied by Filipino pioneers. He +tries to persuade the governor to undertake the expedition. Vera +is anxious to do so, but is unable to attempt it at once. Meanwhile +Cachil Tulo dies, and the vigilance required in watching the Chinese +and Japanese in the Philippines renders it impossible to send the +expedition to Ternate. "Each one of these expeditions made inroads on +the treasury and forces of the province, to so great an extent that +it was necessary to allow a breathing-space to each of them." It is +thought that a joint expedition from Malaca and Manila will accomplish +more, and this is made some years later, under Andres Furtado de +Mendoza, of whose character and some of whose deeds there follows an +account. The island of Ceylon, its products and fauna are partially +described, and some of its connection with the Portugese. Returning +to Philippine matters, the narrative continues:] + +At this time Santiago de Vera was already dismissed from his +governorship of the Filipinas. After he had communicated with Andres +Furtado, and received an answer from him, in which the latter coincided +with his desire, fortune disturbed these beginnings, and Furtado became +embroiled with those who did not love him, and Santiago de Vera was +withdrawn from his office. Gomez Perez de las Mariñas, knight of the +habit of Santiago, succeeded him. He was a man of great reputation, +a native of Betanços in the kingdom of Galicia. He reached Filipinas +in the year one thousand five hundred and ninety. He brought his +son Don Luis with him, a knight of the habit of Alcántara. The new +governor found Manila open to attack, without the form of a city, +and without any money with which to improve it. More than two hundred +thousand pesos were needed for it. However, by his plans and schemes, +he completed the work without public or private loss. He established +a monopoly of playing cards, imposed fines for excessive play, +punished illicit combinations and frauds among the provision-dealers +and the shops of that class: from all of which resulted the walls of +Manila, which measured twelve thousand eight hundred and forty-nine +geometric feet [_i.e._, Spanish feet], each foot being one tercia. To +this he added his own careful oversight, and the assistance of the +inhabitants, who aided willingly because of the request and example of +their chief. The city had but one fort, and that badly constructed. He +built another at the entrance to the river, to which he gave the name +of Santiago, and enclosed the old one. He finished the cathedral, +and, from the foundation, the church of Santa Potenciana, patroness +of the island, as a shelter for women. Then he started the casting of +cannon, and brought good artisans, who furnished the city with large +and small artillery. He built galleys for the trade and commerce or +merchandise--the subsistence of those lands. And in fulfilment of his +promises in España, he cast his eyes on Ternate and all of Maluco, on +the late disgrace and the unfortunate results of his predecessors who +had attempted the conquest of that choice kingdom, and the punishments +of its tyrants. He communicated these thoughts orally and by letters +with zealous persons, more particularly with Marta, [282] a priest of +the Society of Jesus, a serious and energetic man, whose experience +and instruction had been of great use in those regions. This man gave +him information, counsels, and helpers for the preparation and for +the work. One of the latter was Brother Gaspar Gomez, a Spaniard, +a lay religious of the same society. Among the many conferences that +were held upon this matter, I find an exhortation from Father Antonio +Marta, in a letter written from Tydore. As it is the original, and +good for the better understanding, I will place it here, translated +from the Portuguese.... + +[The letter above mentioned holds out to Dasmariñas the three +inducements of service to the king, service to God, and personal +ambition, in the proposed Molucca expedition. The war will be an +arduous one, for "it will be fought not with the Ternatans alone, but +with all the Moros of this archipelago," and the natives are brave and +determined. "The people of Tydore already say that they do not want +Spaniards in these regions," and Gomez Perez will find it prudent to +dissemble with them, "so that they will not join the Ternatans." Father +Marta sends a map of the archipelago, promises immense booty, and +assures the governor of the prayers of the religious. This letter, +and conferences with one Geronymo de Azevedo and Brother Gaspar +Gomez, decided the governor to undertake the expedition. He sent +Gaspar Gomez with instructions to visit and inspect various parts of +the archipelago; and the latter visited Ternate, Tydore, Mindanao, +both Javas, and other regions as far as Malaca. The rest of book +five is taken up with a relation of Pedro de Acuña's services and +his appointment to Cartagena in Nueva España.] + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Sixth + +Meanwhile Gomez Perez, attentive to his preparation, concealed his +purpose, while not sparing the expenses pertaining to ships, food, +and men. Among other supplies, he built four fine galleys. To man +them--as is there reported--he employed a means that was considered +severe. He ordered that the number of Indians sufficient to equip the +galleys [283] be purchased from those who were the slaves of other +Indian chiefs, and that the Spanish encomenderos should pay for these +men from their own money. The price assigned for each Indian was two +taes of gold--each tae being slightly more than one onza--the value +formerly general among them for slaves. He promised that the sum +spent by the encomenderos for that purpose would be repaid afterward +from the royal exchequer. However, this did not seem any lessening +of the severity, for he improperly called those Indians slaves; but +[among themselves] their masters treat them and love them as children, +feed them at their tables, and marry them to their daughters. Besides, +slaves were then valued higher. To the anger of those who were about +to be sold, was joined that of the encomenderos, who were obliged to +contribute from their property for expenses--which, in their opinion, +were not very necessary--and to offend their tributaries by forcibly +seizing them; while they themselves would never collect the price +they were paying in advance, which was [to them] the most certain +thing. The governor gave out that those galleys were to assure the +country and defend it from the danger that threatened; for he knew +absolutely that the emperor of Japon was going to attack it with +a huge war-fleet. Without galleys it could not be defended, and +consequently he was forced to man them with those slaves, since other +rowers were lacking. These slaves were not to be chained in the galley, +or treated as convicts; but would receive so great kindness that they +themselves would prefer that treatment to that of their owners, whom +they already had as fathers and fathers-in-law. These arguments, +and the pressing need for defense, silenced all objections. But +they did not silence report, for already it was known that he had +come from España, pledged to the king, his ministers, relatives, and +backers, to the Ternate undertaking; and, although he concealed it, +unknown authors divulged it. Yet some tried to persuade him not to +entrust the defense of Filipinas to the Chinese or Sangleys, for no +bond, natural or civil, had ever bound or attracted them to any love +for the islands. They bade him remember the recent example of what +those people did on an occasion on which they were employed by his +predecessor, and to be on his guard against them. He [_i.e._, Vera], +sending a reënforcement of men, ammunition, and food to the fort and +settlement of Cagayàn--which is on the shore of that island of Luzon, +eighty leguas from the city of Manila--inasmuch as he then had no ship +in which to send them, and being constrained by his present necessity, +thought that he could supply the deficiency by using for that purpose +a ship of the Chinese, then anchored at that port and about to return +to China. He ordered the reënforcement to be embarked on that boat +and the Chinese to convey it; and to leave it, on passing, at its +destination, since that was directly on their way. He promised the +Chinese to recompense and reward them for that service. They offered +to do it with great display of willingness, howbeit that their cunning +was seen in the sequel, and what opportunity teaches to him that awaits +it. The Chinese set sail, and on the second day, while our Spaniards +were asleep, and quite sure of being among friends and faithful ones, +the Chinese attacked them in the night, so suddenly that they could +not defend themselves. They were all beheaded and thrown into the +sea. The Chinese pillaged all their cargo, and after dividing the +booty, sailed for their own country. They only kept with them one +wretched Spanish woman who accompanied our men. They left her alive, +but after having insulted and maltreated her, left her on the first +Chinese shore that they reached. She went then to the magistrates +there, and informed them of the treachery committed by those people, +and of the violence that they had inflicted on her. But although +the judges were courteous to her, no satisfaction was given her for +her injuries, and she was unable to obtain justice. On the contrary +they ordered her to be taken into the interior by certain agents, +and delivered to other supreme judges. On that journey, which was +very long and many leguas, she endured greater hardships--until +some governors, taking compassion on her and her tears, took her to +the city of Macao, where the Portuguese reside, and they set her at +liberty. Through that means, the whole deed was learned, and was in +the mouth of all in Manila; and upon the occasion of this expedition, +they exaggerated it still more. + +Finally, all of the slaves demanded by Governor Gomez Perez had to be +supplied, but with injuries and acts of oppression; and with the same +injuries and oppression they were all put on the galleys. There they +remained some time before sailing, and some of them died, because they +were unused to that life. All those slaves proved insufficient to man +all the galleys, and the flagship was without rowers. On that account, +and in order to complete the work, more severe methods were used than +at first. The governor ordered that two hundred and fifty Chinese be +drafted from those who go to Filipinas to trade, in order to man or +equip the flagship. Each of them was to be paid two pesos monthly from +the royal treasury. The governor assured them that they would not be +chained, but free, and could have their weapons and serve as soldiers, +and would only have to row the galley during calms, if any should +occur, and in order to double certain headlands. This decision being +communicated to the Chinese, they ail refused it as an intolerable +burden. But when our governor insisted upon this, in order to carry +out his design, the Chinese governor assembled his people in order +to discuss the matter, and to plan how they might choose two hundred +and fifty from among them all; and he threatened that he would take +every tenth man by their houses. That threat disturbed them so much, +that the next day, all their windows were closed, and the merchants +closed their shops; and the community was deprived of the provisions +which were supplied to it by them. Our governor, upon seeing this, +saying that they had mutinied, had about fifty of them seized, +the first whom he could find, and put them in the galleys at the +oar. Thereupon the rest, being cowed, assembled, and made up from +among their number all the two hundred and fifty. And inasmuch as no +one of them wished to be of that number, they distributed among those +who accepted that service twenty thousand pesos, which were given +as a present to those Chinese who would go on the galley, each one +being given eighty pesos, besides the king's pay. With this good aid, +Chinese were not wanting to consent to act as rowers, although the +twenty thousand pesos were spent among them--or, more correctly, among +the officers. From those two hundred and fifty Chinese, five companies +were formed, and five Chinese Christians appointed as captains. They +made their musters and reviews, with pikes and catans--which are +but slightly different from cutlasses--and appeared to be happy +and contented. Amid these occupations Brother Gaspar Gomez came +unexpectedly to Manila, loaded with information which he referred to +the governor in a number of private conferences. He said that the king +of Ternate was not badly prepared, although his forces were somewhat +weakened by his not being in very great harmony with the majority of +the chiefs of his kingdom. Many were threatening to rebel because of +his tyrannies and excessive levies of tribute. Now Javanese, Lascars, +and Moros from Meca no longer resorted to Ternate, as they did in +the time when Captain Morones went there during the term of Santiago +de Vera. Gaspar Gomez gave very detailed information about the two +forts of Talangame. He found that the king of Ternate usually had +about three thousand soldiers, one thousand of them arquebusiers; +while a considerable number came from the other kingdoms of his +crown. They fought with missile weapons, campilans, and shields, and +other armor of coats-of-mail and helmets, which Portuguese had traded +for spice. They had considerable ammunition, all made by themselves +from materials taken there by the Javanese as payment for cloves. Their +chief place was the city of Ternate, where the king and all his court +resided. Consequently it was the best guarded, and from that place +the others obtained strength, courage, and all reënforcement. Gaspar +Gomez advised that our army attack before dawn, for all assaults +made at dawn on that people had always succeeded well. If our fleet +could arrive unseen, it would without doubt conquer. But that king +had placed spies and sentinels on almost all of his islands, and +even in Canela, Sarrangán, and Mindanao. From the fort of Amboyno and +from the kings of Syan [_i.e._, Siaó] and Tidore, a goodly number of +bronze culverins and much other artillery could be brought in their +caracoas. The Amboynos would send these at command, and they would +be sent from Syan and Tydore as soon as requested; for, besides doing +homage to the crown of España, those kings are hostile to Ternate. The +supplies necessary to finish the war, even in case the king of Tydore +should fail them (of whom it might be suspected that he did not wish +to see his enemy totally destroyed), were the artillery and craft that +were being prepared; and more than one thousand two hundred soldiers, +well-armed and equipped with coats-of-mail and helmets, until they +should go to the island of Banda in order to garrison that island as it +needed. There should be a number of light vessels to catch the enemy +when fleeing. Thus would the war be finished entirely and quickly, +and without bloodshed. The infidel Ternatans themselves even said +and published the same. They confessed that, if a large contingent of +soldiers should reach their land, they would universally render homage +without fighting. Consequently he inferred that secret Christians +were living in the Malucas. The entire conquest of that island of +Banda was very useful and advantageous, and of slight risk; and its +maintenance was of great importance to the inhabitants of Amboyno, +which belongs to us. Gaspar Gomez also affirmed that the Portuguese +were facilitating the enterprise considerably, and recounted the +interest and profit that would accrue to his Majesty. Father Antonio +Marta was also of that opinion, in whom Governor Gomez Perez placed +so great faith. Brother Gaspar Gomez to these so full reports and +information added such details that he quite set on fire the mind of +the governor. + +At this time the king of Camboxa, named Landara, sent the governor an +embassy through two Spanish captains, accompanied by many Cambodians, +with the requisite authority for prosecuting his cause. That barbarous +king took care that his ambassadors should not be natives of his +kingdoms, because of the lack of confidence with which his vassals +inspired him as to their faithfulness. He chose the ambassadors from +different classes, so that a good result might come from the difference +of their characters and dispositions. One was a Portuguese, Diego +Veloso by name, and the other a Castilian, Blas Ruyz de Fernan +Gonçalez. [284] They presented Gomez Perez with a fine gift, +consisting of a considerable quantity of ivory, benzoin, chinaware, +pieces of silks and cottons, and an elephant of a noble disposition, +as was learned later by experience. They proposed their embassy, which +was, in short, to beg help against the king of Syan [_i.e._, Siam], +who was about to attack the Cambodian king with a vast army. The latter +in recognition of that aid offered to become a vassal of the king of +España, and a Christian. That king was certain that so valorous and +courageous a knight as Gomez Perez would, under no circumstance, refuse +a deed in which God would receive so obvious a service, and that would +be so advantageous to the crown of España. The governor accepted the +present, and responded to it by another of certain European products, +and thanked the king for his confidence in applying to him. However, +it was impossible for him to set about that help just then, or divert +any portion of those forces that were prepared to punish the king of +Ternate and recover that kingdom and the rest of Maluco, which had +rebelled with so great an insult and outrage to the Spanish nation. His +Highness should trust in God our Lord, and persevere in his attempt to +serve him in the holy and true religion. When the Ternate enterprise +was over, he would take his force to the relief of Camboxa. With +these hopes, which were fulfilled by Don Luys de las Mariñas, his son, +those ambassadors left. In order to give them truthful satisfaction +and a just cause for the delay, it was necessary to publish the true +purpose of that fleet, which until then had been kept secret. + +Then the governor determined upon his departure, and tried to take +with him as many men as possible. They were enlisted, willingly or +by force--those who were requested and those who were compelled, +alike. The encomenderos and soldiers caused a prodigal expense in +ships, supplies and parades--which, because of the great opportunity +furnished for all that in Filipinas, exceeded the governor's power and +wishes. The governor sent Don Luys, his son, with all the regulars to +the island of Cebu, where all the fleet was to be assembled. There he +remained six months, awaiting new orders. Gomez Perez was detained +in Manila, planning matters of importance. Two days before leaving, +while a guest and dining at the house of Pedro de Roxas, his assistant, +where he was wont to amuse himself in heavy gaming and merriment, +he became so gay--beyond his custom, and contrary to the harshness +of his character--that many interpreted it as his last farewell, +and an omen of what happened. He recounted in conversation, amid +much laughter, that father Fray Vicente, of the Franciscan order, +had told him that that enterprise could not succeed; for the army +was composed of conscripted men, and especially because the married +men were going. The governor left Manila October seventeen, with six +royal galleys, one galleon, one fusta, one fragatin, and a number of +fragatas, caracoas, and vireys--different varieties of craft of the +natives of the country. All the vessels, those belonging to his Majesty +and those of his vassals who offered their persons for his service, +totaled one hundred. There were one thousand well-armed Spaniards +and more than four hundred arquebusiers from the vicinity of Manila; +and another thousand of those called Visaias, people who use lances, +shields, and bows and arrows. Besides these, there were more than four +hundred others, Chinese, of those living throughout that island; and +of those who come to trade, another goodly number, with pay--the great +majority of whom were conscripts rather than volunteers. There was in +the galleys a quantity of food for the fleet. The governor appointed +his son, Don Luys Perez, as lieutenant of the fleet, and ordered him, +as above stated, to assemble it at the island of Cebú. He himself +embarked in the flagship, a vessel of twenty-eight benches, manned +by two hundred and fifty Chinese; and eighty Spaniards also embarked +in it. They reached Cabite, whence they sailed on the nineteenth, +together with several vessels carrying private persons, who followed +the governor at their own expense. They coasted the island of Manila, +until they reached Balajàn; then they separated, for the vessels did +not lose sight of shore, while the governor sailed in the open sea. On +the twenty-fifth, he came alone to pass the night at the promontory of +Azufre [285] ["Sulphur Point"] on the island of Manila, opposite that +of Caça, where the current runs strong and the sea is choppy. As it +was during the blowing of the brisa, the galley could not advance. It +anchored under shelter of the point, but, through the strength of +the current, dragged slightly. In order to return to its shelter, +the Chinese were kept incessantly at the oar. In fact, they rowed +with little energy--either because they were men new to that labor, +and forced to the oar by violence; or because they were fatigued, and +harassed by those who commanded them. Other contrary winds assailed +them, which further impeded the voyage. In order to double certain +promontories of the land, it was necessary to ply the oars, and to +urge on the rowers with the severity and punishment generally used +in galleys. They thought that harsh, and contrary to the governor's +assurance, when he promised them that they would be treated with +affection. But neither the whip nor threats, nor overcoming the +currents by dint of the sweat of their limbs, seemed to them so +intolerable and injurious as to hear from the governor's mouth harsh +and severe words, ordering them to row manfully; for did they not, +he would put them in chains, and cut off their hair. Such an insult +among the Chinese is worthy of death, for they place all their honor in +their hair. They keep it carefully tended and gaily decked, and esteem +it as highly as ladies in Europa; and, in dressing it, display their +taste and their social standing. They determined to mutiny, in order +not to suffer such an insult and disgrace. Having appointed for that +purpose the following night (namely, the twenty-fifth of October), +when the Spaniards had lain down tired out upon the benches, and in +other places in the hull, the Chinese did the same. However, they +so cunningly divided themselves that each Chinese lay down beside +a Spaniard, and pretended to sleep. Just before the hour of dawn, +which they considered the most suitable time and the safest of all, +upon seeing the Spaniards in their soundest slumber, the Chinese, +at the sound of a shrill whistle (which was the signal agreed upon +among them), all arose at the same moment; and each one with the +greatest haste put on a white tunic or shirt, so that, in the midst +of the uproar and the darkness, they might recognize one another, +and distinguish those to be killed. However, for the greater security +of the deed, they also lit a considerable number of wax tapers, which +they had concealed in the folds of the white tunics. Then they seized +their catans, which are sharper and more curved than our cutlasses, +and each Chinese commenced, without disturbing the silence, to strike +his neighboring Spaniard; and then, with the increase of their fury, +to behead all those who were sleeping. More than sixty had embarked +on the flagship, among them the servants of the governor, and others, +old soldiers, who in order to oblige and accommodate him were enduring +discomfort. They had been gambling all the night; and being tired, +and because of the excessive heat, were sleeping naked, some in the +midship gangway, others on the benches, while the more favored ones, +to whom were given better quarters, slept aft. The governor went into +his cabin to sleep. The Chinese proceeded to slaughter those who, +suspecting nothing, were sleeping; it was done so quickly that when +some of those asleep in the stern awakened, the other Spaniards were +already dead. The guard did not perceive it, and such carelessness +could admit of no excuse, for they had been sufficiently warned, and +examples had preceded. Some waked, but finding themselves wounded and +confused, jumped overboard, where most of them were drowned. Some--a +very few--jumped overboard before being wounded, but they were also +drowned, although they were near shore, for they could not reach land +because of the strength of the current. Twelve escaped, and many dead +bodies were found on the beach. The Chinese, now grown bolder, seized +the pikes that they had hidden under the benches, and with outcries +completed their treachery. The governor, who was sleeping below the +hatchway, with a lantern or candle, awaked. In order to awaken him, +the Chinese themselves began purposely to make a greater noise; while +they cried out to him and begged him to come out and settle a quarrel +among the "Castillas," as they call the Spaniards. He, either for that +reason, or thinking that the galley was dragging as on other occasions, +arose in his shirt, opened the hatchway, looked out, and pushed his +body half way through it. At that same time, the Chinese fell upon him +with their cutlasses, and fatally wounded him. They cleft his head, +transfixed him with their pikes, and ran him through with more than +barbaric ferocity. Perceiving that his death was near at hand, he +retired, and took the prayer-book of his order, which he always kept +with him, and an image of our Lady. Between those two refuges, which +were later found bathed in his blood, he yielded up his life. However +he did not die immediately, for they found him later in his bed, +tightly holding the image, where he bled to death. About him were +the bodies of Daniel Gomez de Leon, his valet, Pantaleon de Brito, +Suero Diaz, Juan de Chaves, Pedro Maseda, Juan de San Juan, Carrion +Ponce, and Francisco Castillo--all servants of his--besides the bodies +of four very valiant slaves, who merited the same end. The outcome +was not learned until dawn, for not one of the Chinese dared enter +the governor's room that night, fearing lest a portion of the eighty +Spaniards of the galley had taken refuge there, so cowardly did their +guilt make them. The only survivors in the galley were Fray Francisco +Montilla, a discalced religious of St. Francis, and Juan de Cuellar, +the governor's secretary, who were sleeping below decks--where the +Chinese, since they are so cowardly, did not dare descend for three +days, until after the fury of the first attack had ceased. Then they +put them ashore on the Ylocos coast, on the same island of Luzon, +so that the natives would let them take water, and because the friar +and the secretary had made a certain compact with them, to surrender, +if no harm was done them. The Chinese, assured that no other longtime +Christians were alive, commenced to cry out and rejoice loudly at +having committed that deed, saying now they had no one to fear. + +The Spaniards, who were in other boats, near the land, although they +saw the lights, and indistinctly heard the noise from the flagship, +supposed that it was some unexpected work connected with the galley, +or something of that sort. When they learned what was happening, +after a long interval, from those who escaped by swimming, they could +not remedy it and consequently remained quiet. They were but few, +and of inadequate force, and their enterprise was ruined. They waited +until the morning, and when it dawned they saw that the galley had +already set its bastard, [286] and was sailing toward China with the +wind astern, and they could not follow it. It made its voyage, as the +wind served it, along all the coast of the island, until they cleared +Luzon, the Sangleys continuing to celebrate their victory. [287].... + +[The secretary and friar, after suffering great tortures of mind from +the Chinese, who threatened often to kill them, are saved at last, +through the superstition of the Chinese, and left ashore on the +Ilocos coast. The Chinese show their cowardice in a conflict with +the natives on that coast, whither they return later "to sacrifice +to the demon" one of their Christian Filipino prisoners. Being unable +to reach China, they land at Cochinchina, "where the king of Tunquin +seizes their cargo, and two large pieces of artillery embarked for +the expedition to Maluco, the royal standard, and all the jewels, +ornaments, and money. He let the galley drift ashore." The news +causes great lamentation in Manila. "Some of those who hated the +governor rejoiced, but their wrath immediately vanished and they wept +generally." Subsequent events follow:] + +... The news having been learned in Manila, and no papers of the +governor being found, appointing his successor (although it was known +that he had a royal decree for this), and believing it had been lost +in the galley along with much of his own property, and that of the +king and private persons: the city appointed Licentiate Rojas as +governor, and he filled the post for forty days. But the secretary, +Juan de Cuellar, together with Fray Francisco de Montilla, returning +in a wretched plight to Manila, reported that Gomez Perez, before +leaving, had left the appointment drawn in favor of his son, Don Luis; +and that they would find it in a box in the convent of St. Augustine +with other papers, in care of Fray Diego Muñoz. Rojas had already +sent an order to Cebu for all the men of the expedition to return, +which was obeyed. Thereupon Don Luis, having come, by virtue of the +authority delegated by his father, although with certain protests, +succeeded to that government, until the arrival of Don Francisco Tello. + +Such was the end of that cavalier, whose achievements, judged +by themselves, have worth, and receive worth also by his zeal in +performing them. He did not lack political and military virtues, +or prudence in both. But he shut his eyes to examples, and, contrary +to their teaching, dared promise himself results, so that he became +rash and even confident. But Christian charity excuses all this. + +Don Luis, his kindred, and friends, wished to continue the expedition +to Maluco, and Father Antonio Fernandez came for that purpose from +Tydore; but it was not carried out. The fleet was broken up, which was +a signal providence for the Filipinas Islands. For at the beginning +of the following year, one thousand five hundred and ninety-four, +a considerable number of Chinese vessels, laden with men and arms, +but no merchandise as was their wont, came to the islands. The vessels +brought seven mandarins, some of the greatest viceroys or governors of +their provinces. It was rumored and was proved that when they learned +that, as Gomez Perez had undertaken that expedition (on which he had +been accompanied by all the Spaniards), they would find the country +unarmed, they were of a mind to conquer it or sack it--which would +have been very easy for them, had they found it as they expected. The +mandarins left their ships twice to visit Don Luis, attended by +a great pomp and retinue. He received them kindly, and gave each +mandarin a gold necklace. They told him that they had come by order +of their king to get the Chinese who were wandering unsettled among +those islands without his leave. But this was considered a pretext +for the truth, for so many mandarins were unnecessary for it, or so +many armed ships and supplies. Those Chinese were the same as those +who killed Gomez Perez, men from Chincheo. Accordingly Don Luis, +as against a known offender, sent his own cousin, Don Fernando de +Castro, in a vessel to recount their treachery to the Chinese king; +but the voyage turned out badly, and this effort wholly failed. + +At this time Langara, king of Camboxa, requested help earnestly, and +asked Don Luis to keep the promise that his father had made him some +time before. Consequently, in fulfilment of it, and so that those +forces, or some portion of them, should continue in the service of +the Church, for which they were prepared as a benefit for Ternate, +he determined to aid that king with them. + +[A description of Camboxa follows, with observations on its religion, +wealth, products, industries, and fauna. The account of the first +expedition to that country is as follows:] + +Don Luis, with zeal to reduce those nations to the bosom of the +Church, and their wealth and kings to the vassalage of the Spanish +crown, equipped three vessels. In them he sent Captain Juan Xuarez +Gallinato--a native of Tenerife, one of the Canarias Islands--with one +hundred and twenty Spaniards, besides some Filipinos. They left Cebù, +but a terrible storm immediately overtook them, and separated the +boats. Gallinato, borne by the fury of the winds, put in at Maláca, +and the other two vessels at Camboxa. They ascended the river, +where they learned that the king of Sian had routed him of Camboxa, +his neighbor. The latter, with the wretched remnants of his army, +fled to the kingdom of the Laos, also a neighboring people, but +inhuman. While he was begging charity from those most hard-hearted +people, the king of Sian had introduced as king of Camboxa one +Prauncar, nicknamed "Boca tuerta el Traydor" [_i.e._, "Wry-mouth, +the Traitor"], brother of the conquered king. This event did not +hinder the aid that the Spaniards were bringing, under the name of an +embassy. They reached the city of Chordumulo, eighty leguas' distance +from the bar. Leaving forty Spaniards in the ships, forty others went +to visit the place where the king was residing. They immediately made +efforts to visit him, but he refused to be seen that day. However, +he ordered a good lodging to be given them and had them told that he +would grant them audience in three days. But Diego Veloso and Blas +Ruyz--either by their former knowledge of the country, or actuated +by later craftiness, proceeding from their interpretation of that +suspicious delay--visiting a beautiful Indian woman of the king's +house, were secretly told by her that, since she was admitted to +and even desired in the affairs of that usurper, she knew that he +was intending to have them all killed. In the three days that he had +assigned them, as a rest from their journey, he was preparing men, +and the manner of executing his purpose. The Spaniards thanked her for +the warning, not without promises of reward. They were not dismayed at +the news of their peril. On the contrary, thanking the Indian woman +anew for it, they took an heroic although rash decision. They agreed +to invest the king's palace that night, and if necessary, to resist +a whole army. They set about the accomplishment of that enterprise, +disproportionate to human strength. They set fire to the powder +magazine. The townspeople ran up to its aid, or to see the damage. Amid +the confusion, the Spaniards entered the palace, and since they knew +the royal apartments, they penetrated them, until they encountered +the king in person. Having cut to pieces the soldiers of his guard, +they killed him also with their daggers. He defended himself and +cried out, but when his men arrived with help they found that he had +bled to death. The rumor of this deed aroused the guard, and then the +city, which has more than thirty thousand inhabitants. These seizing +their arms, more than fifteen thousand men pursued the Spaniards +with the arms that fury placed in their hands, and with many armed +elephants, which were not unskilled in warfare. Our two captains +formed their squadron, and continued to retire in excellent order, +always fighting, and killing not a few enemies. The battle lasted all +night, and until the second day, when they reached the ships with +incredible effort. They embarked and left that kingdom full of new +dissensions. The second day after, Gallinato arrived in his ship. He +landed, upon hearing of the event, as he thought that he would not be +fulfilling his duty if, when he heard the drums and bells, and saw the +streets and port, before filled with traders, but now with squadrons, +he did not take help to the Spaniards. He gave express orders to his +followers to act with all decorum, so that they might relieve the +anxiety of the Cambodians and reassure them, both by their bearing and +in the calmness of their arguments. The chief men of Camboxa visited +them peacefully, and Gallinato treated them very courteously. He +might have performed some great exploit, but seeing that he had +so few troops for the undertaking, and that affairs had now taken +another form and different condition, he determined to withdraw. He +opposed the majority of those influential men, who promised him the +crown of the kingdom, since they were well inclined to the Spaniards +and to foreign domination. From this came that flippant report that +Gallinato was king of Camboxa, which was believed by many in España; +and it was represented in the theaters of that country with acclaim +and applause. Some men well versed in affairs of those provinces were +of opinion that if Gallinato had embraced the opportunity, he might +have seized Camboxa and added it to the Spanish crown. I have seen +letters from Velloso and Blas Ruiz to the Audiencia of Manila after +the event, in which they say the same, and complain of Gallinato for +reprimanding what they did. But Gallinato--whose prudence and valor, +which had been proved on the most perilous occasions in that Eastern +land, and many years before in the wars of Flandes, would not allow +him to be easily affected by popular applause--showing an honorable +aversion to this temptation, sailed away, to return to Manila. He +took in provisions at Cauchinchina. Blas Ruyz and Diego Veloso had +also landed there before, and went alone overland to the kingdom of +the Laos, which lies west of Cauchinchina, to find the deposed king +Langara, to restore him to his throne. They found that he was already +dead, but that his son was living. Upon them telling him that they +had killed the usurper, his uncle and enemy, he went immediately to +his kingdom with Veloso and Ruyz, accompanied by ten thousand men, +whom the king of the Laos gave him, contrary to all expectations. He +attacked Camboxa, where Ruyz and Veloso always faithfully accompanied +him, both during the war, and afterward in the government. After +that the king sent another embassy to Filipinas, asking for men +to quiet the rebellions in the kingdom; and he and his vassals +promised to receive the faith of Jesus Christ. He also promised a +great portion of Camboxa to the Spaniards, so that they might live +off its tributes. This embassy reached Manila, just when Don Luis +had left the government and handed it over to Don Francisco Tello, +which gave occasion to Ternate to establish its tyrannies more firmly. + +[A short account of Pedro de Acuña's fortification of Cartagena, +in the West Indies, is given, and the consequent withdrawal, without +attack, of the Hawkins and Drake fleet despatched in 1595 by Queen +Elizabeth. Acuña shows in every way the ability of a good commander.] + +But let us return to Assia. The Cambodians still hoped to receive +aid from the Filipinas by their usual promise of conversion and +vassalage. Don Luis de las Mariñas accepted the expedition, to make +it in person and at his own cost. He left Manila with Don Diego Jordan +(an Italian), Don Pedro de Figueroa, Pedro Villeatil, and Hernando de +los Rios Coronel, Spanish captains--the last named at present a priest, +and who had also been in the first war of Camboxa. A furious tempest +struck them in the open sea, which lasted three days, with the usual +horrors. The shipwreck was pitiful. Two vessels were knocked to pieces, +and the sea swallowed up all the men, provisions, and war materials. Of +all the soldiers and sailors who shipped aboard the almiranta, only +five escaped, by swimming to the Chinese shore. Some soldiers also +escaped from the flagship, which was broken by the waves, among whom +was Captain Hernando de los Rios. The other vessel reached Camboxa +almost destroyed, after heavy storms. It found in the Camboxa River +eight Malay junks. The Spaniards, seeing that the junks were carrying +certain slaves stolen from the king of Camboxa, whom they were coming +to help, inconsiderately grappled with the Malays. The latter, who +were carrying many and unusual fire devices, having recourse to these +rather than to force and arms, burnt our ship, and then in the fire and +smoke killed the majority of the Spaniards. Blas Ruiz and Diego Veloso +were not there at that time; but soon afterward they were besieged +in their quarters by the popular fury, and barbarously murdered in +the country where they were negotiating with the king. Those few +Spaniards who could escape went to the kingdom of Sian, and thence +to Manila. Heaven permitted that this should be the end of all that +preparation made to recover Ternate and the other Malucas. The tyrant +there exulted over the news, and attributed the events to his good +fortune, interpreting them as an approbation of his cause. Then he +confederated anew with our enemies. + +Don Francisco Tello, an Andalusian knight, succeeded Gomez Perez +in the government of Filipinas. He reached Manila in the year one +thousand five hundred and ninety-six. He immediately set himself to +learn the condition in which his predecessors had left matters, and +to provide aid for the garrisons. For, since the emperor of Japon had +caused those glorious martyrdoms among the religious of the Order of +St. Francis, in the year one thousand five hundred and ninety-five, +of which news had so lately been received, it was feared that he was +going to menace Filipinas. + +The inhabitants of the islands [_sic_] of Mindanao hate our nation as +deeply as do the Ternatans, and take arms against us in each and every +disturbance, as they did in that last one of Ternate. Consequently +Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa made certain agreements with Don +Francisco Tello, by virtue of which he made war on the Mindanaos and +Ternatans at his own expense. [288] Estevan Rodriguez was so rich that +he could undertake that exploit with safety. He lived in Arevalo, +a town of the island of Panàz [_sic_], one of the Filipinas. He set +out with some galleys, fragatas, and champans, and one ship, with +Spanish soldiers; and more than one thousand five hundred natives from +Pintados, as pioneers. He reached the river of Mindanao April twenty, +one thousand five hundred and ninety-six, whereupon the natives of +the place (who are especially called Mindanaos) on seeing so brave a +people, fled along up the river, and abandoned their settlement to +the fury of war. The majority of them arrived at the town Buyahen, +where Raxamura, king of the Mindanaos, was then living. The latter, +because of his youthful age, did not have the government in charge, and +everything depended on Silonga, an esteemed soldier and captain. Our +men, proceeding up the river, reached Tampacan, five leguas from the +above village. Prince Dinguilibót, uncle of Monao, its legitimate +lord (also a youth), was governing it. These rulers were, of their +own accord, friends to the Spaniards and consequently, on seeing +their arms, went out peacefully to meet them, and offered them their +help. They told the Spaniards that the enemy--and they were also +hostile to the men of Buyahèn--had taken refuge in their fort at that +place. Estevan Rodriguez, having heard the news and having complimented +those princes, ordered the fleet to weigh anchor and to continue the +pursuit for four leguas, always up stream, to Buyahèn. Having arrived, +he landed his men on St. Mark's day. Master-of-camp Juan de la Xara +led the men, although they landed with but little order, for they had +not fought with the Mindanaos, and thought that it would be easy to +rout them--as if for that reason, or for any other consideration, one +should permit a lack of military discipline. Estevan Rodriguez tried +to correct the confusion by his presence, by landing in person. He went +clad in armor so strong, that a charge from an esmeril [289] would not +pass through it. Only his head was unarmed, but covered with a cap and +plumes, while a negro carried his helmet. He was accompanied by five +well-armed soldiers. He had not taken more than fifty steps, when an +Indian named Ubal suddenly ran out of some dense tufted thickets, and, +attacking him with his campilan, cleft open his head. Ubal was the +brother of Silonga, and owner of the only cow in all that country. He +killed it three days previous to this misfortune, and, inviting his +friends to the feast, promised to kill the most distinguished person +of the Spaniards in that war. He fulfilled his word, for Estevan +Rodriguez fell, from his wound, and died three days afterward, +without having answered a single word to the questions asked him, +although he declared his answers by signs. The five Spaniards, on +seeing their captain wounded--so suddenly that the murderer appeared +and the blow was heard at the same moment--fell upon Ubal and cut him +to pieces. They informed Master-of-camp Xara of the general's death, +who, stifling his resentment, withdrew his men, and built a fort in +the most suitable place, near the river. He founded there his colony, +with suitable arrangements, so that our people could settle it. He +appointed regidors and ministers of justice, and called it Nueva +Murcia in honor of the Murcia of España, his native region. Then +he left affairs incomplete, intending to marry the widow of Estevan +Rodriguez, Doña Ana de Oseguera; and reached Filipinas in the first +part of June. Governor Don Francisco Tello, hearing of the event +at El Embocadero, [290] one hundred leguas from Manila, and having +been warned of Xara's design in coming, arrested him at his arrival, +and sent Captain Toribio de Miranda to take charge of the war in +Mindanao. The latter found the troops withdrawn to the port of La +Caldera, which is on the same island, but distant thirty-six leguas +from the mouth of the river. There they remained until August, when +Don Francisco Tello appointed Don Juan Ronquillo in Manila as captain; +he was also captain of the galleys. He also appointed as captains, to +accompany him, Pedro Arceo, Covarrubias and others; as master-of-camp, +Diego Chaves Cañizares; as sargento-mayor, Garcia Guerrero; and as +captains of infantry, Christoval Villagra and Cervan Gutierrez. Don +Juan arrived with this reënforcement to attack the enemy, and fell +upon them so suddenly that, seeing themselves exhausted, they begged +help from the king of Ternate--whom the Mindanaos recognize by certain +payments which are the same, or almost the same, as tributes. Buizàn, +a brother of Silonga, went on that embassy to Ternate, and negotiated +so efficaciously that the Ternate king sent seven caracoas with him, +six pieces of artillery, two medium-sized pieces, and some falcons, +together with six hundred men. These, sailing to the river of Mindanao, +tried to ascend as far as Buyahèn by it. But they found at its mouths +great obstructions to pass, because in one branch the largest Spanish +fort threatened them, and the galleys and other boats; and in the +other was a narrow pass, which ran to a point, on which was built a +rampart guarded by forty men. From that place to the other side of +the river, our men had themselves built a very strong wooden bridge, +close to which a galliot plied. The Ternatans, seeing so strong a +defense on both sides, resolved to fortify themselves on the chief +mouth of the river. They built a small fort, and, together with an +equal number of Mindanao soldiers, shut themselves up in it. This +news aroused General Ronquillo to dislodge them. He went down to +accomplish it with the galleys and other vessels, and one hundred +and forty well-armed men. He landed with one hundred and sixteen +men, together with Captains Ruy Gomez Arellano, Garcia Guerrero, +Christoval Villagra, and Alonso de Palma. He met the enemy at a +distance of eighty paces on the bank of the river. The Ternatans +and Mindanaos had carefully cleared the front of their fort, but +had designedly left a thicket at one side of it, where three hundred +Ternatans were ambushed, while the rest were inside the fortress. As +both parties saw how few of our men were attacking them, they grew +ashamed of their fortress and ambush. Threatening our men insolently, +they showed themselves and advanced upon the Spaniards. They found +so great opposition from our men that without using any stratagem, +or for no other reason beyond natural strength, at the first shock of +battle nearly all the Ternatans were killed, and the rest fled. Our +men pursued them until they killed them all. The men of Tampaca, +who had been neutral until then, in consideration of the dealings of +Fortune, and seeing that she had declared in our favor, took up arms +for us. Only seventy-seven Ternatans, badly wounded, escaped; and +fifty of these were drowned in the river, into which they had thrown +themselves in desperation. Only three of the twenty-seven survived, +and they informed their king of it. The Spaniards seized the boats, +artillery and spoils of she conquered, and became encouraged to +continue the war against infidels. + +Don Francisco Tello was not neglectful of other similar occurrences. He +learned by his spies, and rumor had it, that the emperor of Japon +was collecting a large army and preparing many boats for it, and +large supplies of arms and food. It was also learned that he was +securing himself, by treaty, from the Chinese, of whom the Japanese, +because of their natural enmity, live in fear. Hence they inferred +that he was equipping himself to make war outside his kingdoms. He +had negotiated and concluded alliances with the king of Ternate, +and with other neighbors who were hostile to the Spanish crown. From +all of those actions there resulted eager conjectures that all that +tempest was threatening the Filipinas, and particularly their capital, +Manila. The governor prepared his forces, and under pretext of saluting +that barbaric emperor with a present, sent Captain Alderete to find +out the truth. The ambassador left for Japon in July. At the same time, +Don Francisco sent the galleon "San Felipe" to Nueva España with advice +of those rumors. Those two vessels, that of Alderete and the "San +Felipe," met in Japon, and the natives did not conceive well-disposed +intents concerning them. Alderete learned thoroughly the forces and +designs of the Japanese, and his efforts were of use in clearing up +the apprehensions prevalent in Manila, and preventing unreasonable +fears. He brought another splendid present to the governor, and both +sides made provision for any possible outcome. + +The Audiencia was again established in Manila in the year one thousand +five hundred and ninety-eight, for King Filipo was prudently conferring +authority on that province. The auditors--Licentiates Zambrano, Mezcoa, +[291] and Tellez de Almaçan--and Fiscal Geronymo Salazar y Salcedo, +formed it. + +[The same year when the Audiencia was reëstablished, Felipe II dies at +the Escorial (September 13, 1598) and is succeeded by his son Felipe +III. Neglect falls upon Molucca affairs:] + +... Now at this time Heaven was hastening the reduction of the Malucas, +and the punishment of the persecution of the faithful, although the +tyrants acted more insolently. But since the enterprise had to be +prepared and executed in the Filipinas Islands, and determined and +encouraged in the supreme Council of the Indias, it was advisable for +the president and counselors to display some warmth in the cause--which +by unhappy circumstances, as one despaired of, no one enlivened; and +the papers of discussion and notices belonging to it were forgotten +and heaped together.... + +[Meanwhile the alliance of Ternate with the English continues. Book +vi ends with a tale of occurrences in the household of the king +of Ternate.] + + + + + +[The greater part of the seventh book is taken up with the translation +or condensation from the Dutch relation of the first voyage of van +Nek to the East Indies. A critical resume of Erasmus's description +of Holland and its people is given, which allows Argensola, as a +churchman and good Catholic, to inveigh against the heresies and many +religions of the Dutch. As a consequence of the Dutch expedition, +the Ternatans gain new life in their opposition to the Portuguese and +Spaniards. Frequent embassies are sent to Manila from the Portuguese +and natives at Tidore, requesting aid for the Moluccas--which Francisco +Tello was neglecting, as other matters appeared more important. One +embassy, in charge of the brother of the king of Tidore, is followed +by another in charge of a Portuguese, Marcos Diaz de Febra, who +presents a letter from the Tidore ruler to Dr. Morga. The embassy is +successful, and in 1602 Diaz returns to Tidore with reënforcements and +a promise of an expedition from Manila. In the Philippines themselves, +the Chinese are continually congregating in greater numbers, and are +rapidly becoming a menace, although the governor is blind to that fact, +and claims that they are necessary to the well-being of the community.] + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Eighth + +[Molucca affairs are given considerable attention in the administration +of Governor Pedro de Acuña. The petitions for aid, sent to the +Philippines from those islands, continue. Tello is removed from +the governorship, and Acuña sent to take his place. The latter is +received in Manila (May, 1602) with great rejoicing, as his merits +and reputation are well known. Tello's death occurs in Manila while +waiting to give his residencia. Acuña enters into affairs with great +energy. The narrative continues (p. 270):] + +... The new governor was pained at beholding the poverty of the royal +chest and treasury, and himself under the obligation of preserving +the king's and his own credit. The Malucas formed part of this +consideration, for their reduction was a considerable part of his +duty. But he reassured himself, believing that he might supply the +lack of money by energy. He attended to matters personally, as was +his custom, both those in Manila and those in its vicinity. He built +galleys and other boats, which were greatly needed for the defense +of the sea, which was then infested by pirates and near-by enemies, +especially the Mindanaos. He visited then the provinces of Pintados, +and attended to the needs of those regions. In one of these visits, +besides the storms suffered by his little vessel (which carried only +three soldiers), another signal danger overtook him. Twenty-two English +vessels, enriched with the booty that they had seized from the islands +of that government, tried to attack and capture him. But for lack of +a tide they remained stranded, and could not row. Don Pedro saw that +they threw overboard more than two thousand of their many Spanish +and islander captives in order to lighten themselves. They also +threw overboard a beautiful Spanish girl seventeen years old. Later, +the Manila fleet went in pursuit of them, and it was able to capture +some of the pirates, and they were punished. But that punishment was +much less than their cruelty. [292] Don Pedro tried to remove the +hindrances to the enterprise that he was meditating; but had to delay +for some months what he most wished to hasten, in order to despatch +Joloan and Japanese matters. + +Chiquiro, the Japanese ambassador, had recently arrived in Manila, +bearing a present of the products and industries of those kingdoms, +and letters; he also had orders to negotiate for friendship with the +governor, and commerce between the Japanese emperor (by name Daifusama) +and the Filipinas and Nueva España. The proximity of those provinces, +the power of the Japanese kings, their natural dispositions, and +other circumstances which experience showed to be worthy of serious +consideration, demanded that that commerce be not refused--although, +for the same reasons, the opinion was expressed that it was not +advisable. But since that barbarian had once espoused that desire, +it was not easy to find a means to settle the matter without causing +jealousy or anger. Dayfusama requested then that the Spaniards trade +in Quanto, a port of one of his own provinces; that they establish +friendship, so that the Japanese could go to Nueva España; that +the governor send him masters and workmen to build ships for him in +Japon, in order to continue that navigation. Dayfusama insisted upon +this, having been persuaded by one of our religious of the Order +of St. Francis, one Fray Geronymo de Jesus, whom the Japanese king +esteemed greatly. This was a serious matter, and in many ways most +damaging to the Filipinas. In those islands, the greatest security +against those provinces has consisted for many years in the lack of +ships and pilots among the Japanese, together with their ignorance +of the art of navigation. It has been observed by experts that, +whenever that insolent barbarian has shown any intention to arm against +Manila, he has been prevented by this obstacle. Consequently to send +him workmen and masters to build Spanish vessels for him, would be +equivalent to providing him weapons against the Spaniards themselves; +and the navigation of the Japanese would be the prelude to the +destruction of Filipinas and Nueva España, while long voyages by the +Japanese were inadvisable, and moreover contrary to safety. Considering +all these reasons, Governor Don Pedro de Acuña ordered the ambassador +Chiquiro to be entertained splendidly. He gave him some presents +for his king and for himself, and despatched a vessel with another +present--a moderate one, so that it might not argue fear, as it would +if he took too much. It sailed together with the ship of Dayfusama and +his ambassador, both being filled with articles of barter. The letters +of Don Pedro contained long compliments at his pleasure in procuring +the establishment of greater friendship. But he said that, although he +had received full power from King Filipe for things pertaining to the +government of Filipinas, that part of the king's embassy touching his +request for sailors and the building of Spanish ships he was unable to +decide, until he should inform the viceroy of Nueva España; nor could +the viceroy decide it without special orders from his Majesty. He +promised the Japanese king to write about it for him, and to aid the +accomplishment of so just a desire. But he warned him that it would +be necessary to wait more than three years for the furtherance and +resolution of the matter, because of the distance and accidents of +so long voyages. It was ordered that the same Fray Geronymo himself +should deliver all this message to Dayfusama. Geronymo de Jesus was +written to in secret, instructing and reproving him. He was ordered +to tell the Japanese monarch that the governor esteemed his good will +exhibited toward the commerce and friendship of the Spaniards, and his +own great desire for them. He was to encourage him to keep the peace, +which the governor himself would keep without any infringement. But +he was ordered subtly to divert the king's mind from similar desires +and propositions, and not to facilitate any of them; for although +perhaps there were no hidden deceit in the then reigning monarch, +or any interest greater than that of friendship, it might cause great +harm in times of a less well-intentioned successor, who might abuse +the navigation, and turn it against those who taught it to them. The +governor promised to send another ship soon to trade. Fray Geronymo +was to give the king hopes that some Spanish masters of Spanish boats +would sail in it. Dayfusama was to be patient, and should consider +how offended he would be, if his servants were to open up any new +commerce without consulting him, or without his order. + +With this despatch Chiquiro returned to Japon in his ship.... + +[A storm however overtakes him near Formosa, and his ship is wrecked +and he and his men drowned, the event being learned only long +after. "Daifusama, being persuaded by Fray Geronymo, had granted +leave for our religion to be preached in his kingdoms, to build +our churches, and for all who wished to profess our religion with +public authority." Accordingly the orders send various missionaries +to different districts of Japan. "Many persuaded Don Pedro not to +send away these religious, but, although those persuasions were well +founded, and obstacles put in the way of their departure, it was +determined to allow them to go.... These religious did not find in +the provinces proof of the desires that had been told them. Very few +Japanese were converted, and fewer were disposed toward it, for the +king and tonos [chiefs] ... did not love our religion." Don Pedro +sends the promised ship to Japan laden with "dye-wood, deerskins, +raw silk, and various other articles." Thus Japanese demands are met, +and the emperor is satisfied with the diplomatic answer returned +to him. Meanwhile "Don Pedro's thought bore on the recovery of the +Malucas." Letters pass between him and the Portuguese commander Andrea +Furtado de Mendoza in regard to the expedition, and aid from the +Philippines, and the hostilities of the Dutch. (The Jesuit brother +Gaspar Gomez had been sent by Acuña from Mexico to Spain, to show +the necessity and advantages of the expedition; after various delays +it was set on foot, and Furtado obtained many successes in Amboina, +where he had some encounters with the Dutch. The king of Ternate +asked help from Java and Mindanao.)] + +The season and necessity compelled General Furtado to request +urgently the help that was being prepared in Filipinas. Amboino +is eighty leguas from those islands. Accordingly he sent Father +Andres Pereyra, a Jesuit, and Captain Antonio Brito Fogaço, in May +of the year one thousand six hundred and two. They reached Cebù July +twenty-five. They sailed thence for Manila, August six, and entered +that city September five. Don Pedro de Acuña rejoiced greatly over +their arrival. He asked them--so great was his desire and interest, +or rather, his noble rivalry--minutely concerning the expeditions of +General Furtado. Since the latter had referred to them in his letters, +they gave an extended relation of them, and executed his embassy, +each one fulfilling the office that he professed. Don Pedro did not +delay the sending [of reënforcements.] He assembled the council of +war, where it was resolved to send Furtado the help that he requested, +without delay, although they felt obliged to accommodate themselves to +the necessities of the country. Following this decision the governor +sent a message to the provinces of Pintados ordering captain Juan +Xuarez Gallinato, chief of them, to provide all necessaries for the +expedition, and himself to sail with his best disciplined infantry +from Cebù to the city of Arevalo, the place assigned for assembling +the fleet. Gallinato did this, and also sent a vessel to Otón to +lade as much as possible of the supplies. It reached Otón October +twenty-eight, and the same day Don Pedro left Manila for Pintados, +in order, by his presence, to inspire greater haste in the despatch +of the fleet, which was already almost ready in Otón. He arrived +there November thirteen. So fiery was his spirit that he assembled +the reënforcement and entrusted it to Juan Xuarez Gallinato--without +allowing the expeditions from Xolo and Mindanao to embarrass him, even +though he saw the natives of those islands, divided into different +bodies among the Pintados, pillaging and murdering his Majesty's +vassals--and appointed him general and commander of that expedition. + +[Furtado, after asking the reënforcement from Acuña, goes to the +Moluccas. Some of his men are defeated in a naval engagement with +the natives, whereupon Furtado builds a fort at the friendly island +of Machian.] + +After the fleet, military stores and food had been collected, +they were delivered to Gallinato by the auditors and fiscal of the +Audiencia. The supplies consisted of one thousand fanegas of cleaned +rice, three hundred head of cattle, two hundred jars of wine, eighty +quintals of nails and bolts, forty quintals of powder, three hundred +Ylocos blankets, seven hundred varas of Castilian wool, one hundred +sail-needles, and thirty jugs of oil. The men amounted to two hundred +soldiers--one hundred and sixty-five arquebusiers and thirty-five +musketeers--twenty-two sailors, several pilots, one master, three +artillerymen in the "Santa Potenciana," and twenty common seamen. The +monthly expense of all that equipment amounted to twenty-two thousand +two hundred and sixty pesos. This having been done on the part of +the governor and Audiencia, they required Father Andres Pereyra +and Captain Brito to go with the reënforcement--which Gallinato had +ready, with its colors, and with Captains Christoval Villagrà and +Juan Fernandez de Torres. The company of Captain Don Tomas Bravo, the +governor's nephew, son of Don Garcia his brother, was left behind; but +the captain went, and served bravely on the expedition. The infantry +was taken on the ship "Sancta Potenciana," and on the fragatas "Santo +Anton," "San Sebastian," "San Buenaventura," and "San Francisco." The +fleet left the port of Yloilo January twenty, one thousand six hundred +and three, and reached La Caldera in Mindanao the twenty-fifth. They +remained there until the twenty-eighth, as they had some information +concerning those enemies. Then they sailed toward Maluco, and sighted +the island of Siao February seven, and at dawn of the next day that +of Taolân, four leguas from Siao. There the fragata "Sant Anton" was +wrecked on a shoal of the island, which gave greater anxiety to the +fleet. Gallinato made efforts so that the men should not perish. He +sent Captain Villagrà, who saved them, as well as the weapons and +the pieces of artillery; the rest was left in the sea. They continued +their voyage and sighted the island of Ternate February thirteen. On +the fourteenth they entered that of Tydore, where they heard of +Andres Furtado's arrival. There they rested but little, in order +to join him sooner. Sailing thence with a good breeze they reached +Ternate, and made harbor at Talangame, one legua from the fortress, +on the sixteenth of the same month. The fleets saluted one another +with tokens of friendly regard, and the generals did the same.... + +[The active campaign soon begins, and notwithstanding some +few successes in the siege of Ternate by Furtado and Gallinato, +sickness, and want of ammunition and provisions, compel the Portuguese +commander to withdraw before the superior forces and equipment of the +Ternatans. Thereupon Gallinato and his men return to the Philippines +via Tidore, while Furtado intends going to Amboina and perhaps to +Malaca. About April of this same year the Jesuit brother, Gaspar +Gomez, reaches Spain, to argue before the Council of the Indias the +necessity of an effective expedition from the Philippines. There it is +agreed that Acuña shall undertake one in person. The following year a +letter received from Acuña by the council describes the ill-success of +Furtado's expedition and the necessity for an effective expedition from +the Philippines, a synopsis of the letter being given by our author.] + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Ninth + +[The action of the council finally secured the king's assent to the +Molucca expedition, and the following decree was sent to Acuña:] + +... Don Pedro de Acuña, my governor and captain-general of the +Filipinas Islands, and president of my royal Audiencia therein. On +September twenty of the past year, six hundred and three, I wrote you +by an advice-boat on which Gaspar Gomez, of the Society of Jesus, took +passage for Nueva España, my resolution in regard to what you wrote +me from Nueva España, when you went to take charge of that office, +about the Ternate expedition. In accordance with that resolution, +I have ordered a contingent of five hundred men to be collected in +these kingdoms, which are to be conveyed in the trading fleet that +sails to Nueva España this year. I wrote to the viceroy to have +another five hundred men enlisted so that, at the very least, eight +hundred men could be sent you for this enterprise. I have appointed +four captains for the contingent from these kingdoms. One of them, +namely, Admiral Juan de Esquivel, is to be commander and governor of +the said soldiers. I have also appointed six substitutes, practiced and +experienced soldiers, so that, in case any of the said captains die, +these may take command of the men, and that they may be in charge +of the companies to be raised in Nueva España, as I am writing to +the viceroy. I have assigned forty ducados per month as pay to the +said captains; to Admiral Juan de Esquivel the sum of sixty; and to +the substitutes, twenty-five escudos apiece until ahey reach Nueva +España. Thenceforward the said Juan de Esquivel, in case I order +him to be given the title of master-of-camp, shall enjoy the sum of +one hundred and twenty ducados per month; but if he serves with the +title of commander and governor of the said soldiers, he shall have +sixty. The substitutes shall receive forty; and the soldiers--both +those levied in España and those to be raised in Nueva España--shall +have the sum of eight ducados per month. I have ordered the viceroy, +in accordance with the above, to send to those islands the necessary +money to meet the pay of the soldiers for one year. If they are +detained longer in other affairs of my service, he shall also furnish +what may be necessary after advice from you. I have thought it best +to advise you of the above, in order to charge and order you that, +if the pay of the soldiers can be moderated, in respect to what is +there paid men of that rank, you may reform the schedule justifiably, +advising me thereof, and the viceroy of Nueva España. However, you +shall make no alteration in the pay of Admiral Juan de Esquivel, +or of the captains, alférezes, or substitutes. I have also ordered +the viceroy to provide you with whatever may be necessary, up to +the amount of the one hundred and twenty thousand ducados that you +have asked for this undertaking; also six pieces of artillery for +bombardment, and five hundred quintals of arquebus powder. The men +sent from here are armed with muskets and arquebuses. You shall be +careful in the distribution of this money, and in all the rest you +shall exercise the advisable care, system, and caution. You shall +endeavor to attain the end sought, as I confidently expect from you, +with the men sent from España, and those from Nueva España, together +with those whom you shall have collected in those islands for the +expedition to Ternate. If possible, you shall make the expedition +in person, as you have offered to do, and shall leave those islands +provided as it fitting. In case conditions are such that you cannot +go in person, on this expedition, then you shall appoint another man +of the experience and qualities requisite for it, who may take entire +charge of it; and for this I grant you authority. It is my will that, +in case of your death while on the expedition, or through any other +cause, or the death of the person whom you may appoint for it, Admiral +Juan de Esquivel succeed in it and continue it. All the sea and land +forces who shall take part in the said expedition, shall obey him as +they would yourself. I declare that, in this event, and in case of +your death, and the succession of the said Juan de Esquivel to the +charge of the expedition, he shall be subject and subordinate to my +royal Audiencia in those islands. The captains in whose charge is the +infantry raised in these kingdoms, I have selected as worthy men who +have served. Accordingly I charge and order you chat you honor and +favor them as far as possible, for in that I shall consider myself +served. You shall not dismiss them or deprive them of their companies +to give these to others, without just cause, unless it be to appoint +them to better offices. However, if they should commit crimes you +may punish them, as their superior. It is supposed that by the time +of the arrival of these soldiers at those islands--and they shall +leave Nueva España in the first vessels, after the arrival of the +trading fleet there--you will have matters so well in hand that you +may begin the expedition immediately. I charge you straitly to do +with circumspectness, consideration, and caution what I expect from so +gallant a soldier. These men are to be well disciplined and drilled, +and everything so ordered that the desired and so important effect +may be gained, for you see the risk in this and its expense. You shall +endeavor, as I charge you, to have the advisable care and order taken +in the efficient distribution and collection of my revenues, and the +avoidance of superfluous expense. Of the course of events you shall +keep me advised on all occasions. After recovering the fort of Ternate, +you shall place there and on the island the garrison necessary for +its safety. I have ordered the viceroy of Nueva España, if he has +any opportunity for it, to advise you as soon as the men raised here +arrive there [_i.e._, in Nueva España], and that he report clearly to +you the contingent enlisted in that country, and that will be raised +in any other way, as well as the time that they will leave there, so +that you may take the necessary precautions concerning them from those +islands. If you consider it advisable for these men to stop anywhere +and not to go to Manila, you shall so order it, or give any other +orders that you deem most advisable, in anything. Valladolid. June +twenty, one thousand six hundred and four. + +After the above decree was sent, its dispositions began to be carried +out in España. Before this, in the preceding year one thousand six +hundred and three, while governor Don Pedro was occupied in the +preparations necessary for this purpose [_i.e._, of the expedition], +an accident occurred in Filipinas which threatened their loss and +other greater misfortunes. In the month of April a fire broke out +in Manila and burnt the richest part and more than half of the city, +and it was impossible to keep the goods from burning which had been +discharged from the ships recently arrived from Nueva España which +were being kept in the most secure of the houses. Two hundred and +seventy houses, wood and stone, were burned, and even the monastery +of St. Dominic (both house and church), the royal Spanish hospital, +and the magazines; and not a single edifice was left standing in +the burned area. Fourteen Spaniards were burned, among whom was +Licentiate Sanz, canon of the cathedral, together with some Indians +and negroes. The loss was estimated at one million.... + +[The incident of the coming of the three Chinese mandarins and their +pretense of looking for an island of gold is described. This with +certain rumors, readily believed, leads to the outbreak of feeling +against the Chinese or Sangleys resident in Manila and other parts of +the island. That same year (1603), the insurrection by them takes +active shape. Argensola's account is substantially the same as +that of other writers. He traces the insurrection during its rise, +and progress, and the retreat of the Sangicys, with the consequent +slaughters of those people. The following extracts and synopses are +made from his account:] + +At the time when Covernor Don Pedro was attending most closely to +the war with Maluco, there occurred in Manila a circumstance such +that it might not only have suspended the war, but extinguished the +entire province. A man was residing in Manila who had remained there +when the great pirate Limaon (of whose history popular accounts are +current) came against the city. He was formerly an idolater, and, as +was reported, served the pirate for a lewd purpose. His name was Encàn, +and he was a native of Semygua in the province of Chincheo. He was +baptized during Santiago de Vera's term, and took the latter's surname, +being called Baptista de Vera. He proved sagacious, industrious, and +of efficacious energy, by means of which, exercising his trading, he +came to possess great wealth and to have influence with the governors +of Filipinas. Through his arrangements the Sangleys negotiated with +Don Pedro, asking his consent to finish a parapet of the wall that +he was completing, at their own cost; for they, as a portion of the +commonwealth, wished to do this service for his Majesty. Each of them +offered four reals for the work. This service and the thanks of the +citizens, whom Encàn or Baptista had bought by benefits, destroyed +or decreased the suspicions conceived against their conspiracy. He +was respected by the Spaniards and loved by the Sangleys. He had twice +been their governor, and had many adopted sons and dependents.... Near +the Parián was another district inhabited by Japanese, a race hostile +to the Sangleys, with whom they are at constant war in their own +country. The governor summoned their headmen, and sounded them by kind +methods, as he wished to know how to depend on them on any occasion, +and if they would help against the Chinese if war came. The Japanese, +puffed up by the confidence that he placed in them, and elated that +time would give them an opportunity to fight against their enemy, +answered that they were ready to die with the Spaniards. Some trouble +arose from this wise effort, and as the Japanese kept the secret +badly, or referred to it with exaggeration, it became public that +Don Pedro was going to kill the Sangleys with their help. Some of +the Japanese told them that, so that the Sangleys could flee and pay +them for the warning. Many Sangleys tried to take to the mountains, +while all were in fear. Those who wished to revolt were able to +persuade the others to do the same, and to quiet the anxious by +promises. In fact, the greater portion of them determined to rebel, +and assigned St. Francis' day for the beginning of the insurrection, +at the hour when the Christians would be busied in their churches, +in the holy feast. Some said that the time assigned for it was during +the night, when twenty-five thousand of them would enter the city and +behead our men. Some indications of it escaped, notwithstanding their +secrecy. Juan de Talavera, parish priest of the hamlet of Quiapo, +informed the archbishop that an Indian woman, with whom a Sangley was +in love, had revealed to him the plot for St. Francis's day.... All +these advices and some others were learned immediately by the governor +and the royal Audiencia. It would be sufficient to see the haste with +which the Chinese sold everything, even to their shoes, and adjusted +their debts--although this was interpreted rather as a design to go +away than one of treason. In order to relieve them from fear of the +Spaniards and Japanese, the governor talked to them himself, and +had the pledge of safety and the royal faith published anew in all +districts. But no effort could quiet them. Three days before that +of St. Francis, more than four hundred Anhay merchants remained in +the city, because they had been unable to sell their goods. These, +upon seeing the others in confusion because of the report that the +Spaniards and Japanese were about to kill them, sent their embassy +to Don Pedro by one Chicàn, also an Anhay or Chincheo.... He came at +night, being in fear of the other Chinese. He communicated their fears +to the governor and their present uncertainty; and stated that they +did not know what resolution to take, and consequently came to him +for advice and protection. The governor, after hearing him and having +completely assured him with his answer, went next day personally to +talk to Chicàn's companions, and satisfied them with affectionate +words, saying that the Spanish nation is not accustomed to execute +or to consent to such deceits. After this talk they were quieted, +but those who had evil intentions were not satisfied.... + +[At the first outbreak of the insurrection, Encàn is sent to reassure +and quiet the Sangleys. He returns very late "telling Don Pedro that +he had been in danger of being elected their chief, and that they +wished to force him to accept it." In the slaughter of Don Luis +Dasmariñas and his men which soon follows, over thirty Spaniards +manage to escape. The Japanese aid the Spaniards, while the Sangleys +try to induce all their countrymen of the Parian to join them.] + +The few Sangleys in the Parián caused the Spaniards no less anxiety +than the many in the fort, both because they had them for so near +neighbors and as they supposed that if these saw our cause declining, +they would join their countrymen. Besides, it was known that the +insurgents had sent to ask those in the Parián to join them, and had +advised them of the Spaniards whom they had killed. This was declared +by a Sangley, who was caught while crossing the river by swimming, +by the sentinel of the river-boats. He, confessing, when put to the +torture, that he was a spy, and that he gave and carried messages, +was beheaded. On the other side, it was considered that although it +would lessen the anxiety to kill all the Sangleys or to attempt it, +it did not appear a just punishment toward people of whose crime +they were uncertain--much more so, since they had come to Filipinas +to conduct their trading in good faith, and the governor had given +them his word for their safety if they were quiet and did not mix in +the rebellion.... + +[It is finally resolved to induce the peaceful Sangleys to take refuge +in the Augustinian convent. However, they refuse to take advantage +of the offer, although some put their goods in safety. Meanwhile +the hostile Sangleys attempt to incite them to join their ranks, +and on their refusal, turn upon them "and kill more than two +hundred." Encàn is found concealed in a house for fear of capture, +whereupon he confesses his part in the rebellion. The religious +take up arms against the insurgents, notable among them being Fray +Antonio Flores, an Augustinian lay-brother, and formerly a soldier: +he is credited with having slain six hundred Sangleys in the final +slaughter. The Chinese, after driving in an attacking party of five +hundred men under Gallinato, assault the walls of the city, but are +finally driven back with great slaughter. Their Parián is burned, +and they begin their retreat, going to San Pablo and other districts, +pursued by the Spaniards and natives, who kill immense crowds of them +and disperse the rest. Spaniards, Japanese, and Pampangos are sent +out under Sargento-mayor Azcueta, and the insurrection is crushed with +terrible slaughter; "for the Japanese and natives are so ferocious that +nothing can restrain them." The final result of the last campaign shows +that only "slightly more than one hundred [of the Sangleys] survived, +who were kept alive for the galleys. Eight natives and six Japanese +died on our side in these two battles [_i.e._, the slaughters of the +pursuit]. No Spaniard was killed, although many were wounded." Encàn +is "hanged and quartered, his head exposed on the site of the Parián, +and his goods confiscated; and in the days following, justice gave the +same punishment to other guilty Chinese." The insurrection costs the +lives of more than twenty-three thousand Chinese and only five hundred +are left for the galleys. "Some say that the number of Sangleys killed +was greater, but in order that the illegality in admitting so many +into the country contrary to royal prohibitions might not be seen, the +officials concealed or diminished the numbers of those that perished."] + +Don Pedro had had some advices of how well affected his Majesty was +to the enterprise of Maluco. Awaiting the effects of that decision, +he wrote by all the ways possible; and by India, to solicit those who +had charge of the matter. Relieved from the hindrance caused by the +Sangleys, he turned his mind to the preparation and equipment of the +fleet, for the time when he should be ordered to set out. But the end +of this war was the beginning of other needs for Manila. Mechanical +trades were stopped, and there was no work or provisions. Prices +of food increased with their lack. All supplies had been formerly +in great abundance, and were obtained through the Sangleys, for the +Indian natives lack the willingness and the energy for such work. The +cultivation of the land, the care of raising fowls, the weaving +of cloth, all of which industries they had exercised in their old +days of infidelity, they had forgotten. Especially was the Pariàn or +Alcayceria wasted by fire and sword. It was once so full of gain and +abundance that Don Pedro wrote to one of his relatives in España, a +short time after his arrival at Manila, these following words of it: +"This city is remarkable for the size of its buildings, which have +surprised me. I shall mention only one, which is the chief one. It has +an Alcayceria that contains all kinds of silks and gold, and mechanical +trades; and for these things there are more than four hundred shops, +and generally more than eight thousand men who trade therein. When +the trading fleets come from China with their merchandise, which is +the present time of the year, there are always more than thirteen +or fourteen thousand men. They bring wonderful things, that are not +found in Europa." Besides this, Don Pedro feared that the chastisement +inflicted in the slaughter would discourage the intercourse of the +Sangleys with us, and that the vessels that were wont to come from +China with food would not come. Greater and universal was the fear +that in place of trading ships, armed vessels would come to avenge the +Sangleys. Don Pedro sent the prior of Manila, Fray Diego de Guevara, to +España by way of India, with advices of the deed and of his fears. The +incidents that befell him on his voyage in India itself, and in Persia, +Turquia, and Italia, forced him to delay three years before he could +reach the court, where he found other despatches already arrived. + +At the same time Don Pedro sent Captain Marcos de la Cueva, together +with Fray Luis Gandullo, a Dominican, to Macao--a city of China, where +Portuguese reside--with letters for the commandant and council of +that city, advising them of the rebellion of the Sangleys, and of its +result, so that they might advise him by all ways, at any rumor of an +armed fleet in China. They took letters also for the tutons, haytaos, +and inspectors of the provinces of Canton and Chincheo, giving account +of the transgression of the Chinese, and how it obliged the Spaniards +to inflict so severe a punishment. The ambassadors found the country +quiet upon their arrival, although some fugitive Sangleys, fleeing +from Manila in champans, had related the disturbances among them. The +arrival of those Spanish at Macao was learned in Chincheo. Immediately +some of the most wealthy captains who ordinarily go to Manila, whose +names were Guansàn, Sinú, and Guachuan, went to see them. Having +understood the truth of the matter, they took upon themselves [the +delivery of] the message sent to the mandarins by Don Pedro, and the +mandarins received it by their means. The Chincheo merchants determined +to return to their trade at Filipinas, and left Macao in their vessels +with our ambassadors, taking a quantity of powder, saltpeter and lead, +with which the public magazines were supplied. In the following May, +thirteen Chinese ships made port at Manila, and afterward many others +returned thither to continue that commerce. Don Pedro sent to Nueva +España the vessels that had brought the relief for the islands. The +flagship foundered and not a person or a plank escaped. He did not +cease at this time to store the city with provisions and ammunition, +in order to find himself free for the expedition to Maluco. At this +juncture, Master-of-camp Juan de Esquivel came from Mexico with six +hundred soldiers, with the report that more men, money, and other +preparations of arms, food, and ammunition were being collected in +Nueva España, at the order of his Majesty; these all arrived at Manila +in due season. At that time died its great archbishop, Don Miguel de +Benavides, to the universal sorrow of the country. + +The Chinese ships that returned for the trade bore letters to the +governor in reply to his despatch. Three letters of one tenor came +from the tuton or viceroy, the haytao, and the inspector-general of +the province of Chincheo. Translated by the interpreters into Spanish, +they read as follows: + +[See this letter in _Vol_. XIII, pp. 287-291 of this series.] + +The governor answered these letters by the same messengers, making use +of terms of courtesy and authority. [293] He related the rebellion +of the Sangleys from its inception. He justified the defense of the +Spaniards, and the punishment inflicted upon the delinquents. He says +that no community can govern without punishing those who are evil, +any more than by not rewarding the blameless. Consequently he does +not repent of what was done, as it was to check him who was trying +to destroy us. The inspector should consider what he should do, if +any similar case happened in China. What he was sorry for was in not +having been able to save any of the Anhays among the Sangley merchants, +who perished among the guilty. But it was impossible to prevent that, +for the violence of war does not allow some to be killed and others +exempted, especially since they were unknown to the soldiers in +the heat of war. Employing clemency toward those captured alive, +he condemned them to row in the galleys, which is the punishment +substituted by the Castilians for those who merit death. However, if +they in China thought that the punishment should be lessened, he would +give them liberty. "But it should be noted," says Don Pedro, "that +this might be the cause that, if so serious a crime were unpunished, +they would fall into it a second time, a thing that would close all the +gates to kindness. The goods of the Chinese killed are in deposit. And +in order that it may be seen that I am not moved by any other zeal +than that of justice, I shall have these immediately delivered to their +heirs, or to those to whom they rightfully pertain. I am not moved to +any of these things by any consideration other than that of right. To +tell me that if I do not free the prisoners, permission will be given, +to the relatives in China of those who were killed in the rebellion, +to come with a fleet to Manila, causes no disturbance in my mind; +for I consider the Chinese as so sensible a race, that they will +not be incited to such things with little foundation and especially +since we have; on our side, given them no occasion for it. In case +any other resolution is followed, we Spaniards are people who know +how to defend our rights, religion, and country very well. And do not +let the Chinese consider themselves lords of all the world, as they +give out; for we Castilians, who have measured it with palmos, know +with exactness the lands of China, where it will be well to know that +the king of España has continual wars with kings as powerful as their +own [_i.e.,_ the Chinese king], and subdues them and inflicts great +troubles upon them. It is no new case, when our enemies imagine that +we are defeated, to find us desolating and destroying the confines +of their lands, and not ceasing until we have hurled them from their +thrones and taken away their scepters. I would be very sorry for a +change in trade, but I also believe that the Chinese do not wish to +lose it, since so great gain accrues from it, and the Chinese take +to their kingdom so much of our silver, which is never diminished +in amount, in exchange for their merchandise, which is composed of +poor articles that are soon worn out." The English ships that reached +the coast of China, he was determined not to receive, for they are +not Spaniards, but their enemies, and are pirates. Consequently +if they came to Manila they would be punished. "Finally, because +we Spaniards always justify our causes, and we pride ourselves on +the fact that no one in the world can say that we usurp other men's +possessions or make war on our friends, all that is herein promised +will be fulfilled. And hereafter let those in China understand that +we never do anything through fear, or because of the threats of our +enemies." Don Pedro concludes by offering to continue the friendship +with the kingdoms of China by new bonds of peace, saying that he would +release the prisoners in his galleys in due time, although he first +intended to make use of them, as he did, in the expedition of Maluco, +which would soon be despatched. All this he strictly observed. + +Don Pedro received other letters during those same days from the +emperor of Japon, in which, after thanking him for a present of +grape wine--besides other rich presents--that Don Pedro had sent him, +he earnestly requested commerce.... + +[This letter, of which Argensola presents a mere synopsis, is given +complete by Morga, _q.v. ante_.] + +In this same year, one thousand six hundred and four, the islands of +Holanda and Zelanda, in pursuance of their custom, assembled a fleet +of twelve vessels, large and well equipped, and some smaller ones; +and, as if masters of sea and wind, steered their course toward India +by the known routes. In a short time they reached the cape of Buena +Esperança. All the captains had gone at other times on that voyage, and +the pilots esteemed themselves of no less experience. Their general was +Estevan Drage, [294] faithless alike to his church and to his king.... + +[Thence this fleet continues its course along Mosambique, India, and +neighboring shores, Java, Sumatra, etc., taking prizes and trading. In +February, 1605, they capture Amboina, where they receive the submission +of the Portuguese and allow religious freedom. Finally part of the +vessels go to the Moluccas, where, with the aid of the king of Ternate, +the fort of Tidore is captured--although the Portuguese are warned +beforehand of their coming by English vessels (for the Spanish and +English kings were then friends), and the English leave powder and +shot for its defense. Some Portuguese leave the island, "many going +to the Filipinas, where Governor Don Pedro interviewed them in order +to learn the condition of affairs at Maluco." The narrative continues:] + +One of those who escaped from the fort of Tydore, and reached the town +of Arevalo in Filipinas, was Antonio de Silva, a Portuguese. Besides +being a soldier he was a _naguatato_ or interpreter. This man +gave a judicial account of the matter and added that the English +[_i. e._. Dutch] general, while taking him a prisoner from Amboino, +took a sea-chart, and began to look for Mindoro, Manila, and +Cabite. Being asked by Silva, for what purpose he was looking for +them, he learned that the general intended, in case hit undertaking +at Maluco did not succeed well, to try to capture one of the vessels +plying between Filipinas and Nueva España. Silva replied to him +that it was not time for those vessels to sail, either way; for the +first [_i. e._, those from Nueva España], arrive about May ten, +and the others [_i. e._, those going to Nueva España], sail June +ten. Notwithstanding, this was the end or desire of the Dutchman's +navigation; for he determined to get information in Mindoro, to depart +thence to Macàn, to send an ambassador to China, and to avenge the +insult offered by Don Pablos of Portugal in those provinces. Thence he +would lade pepper in Patane, then see if he could defeat the Chinese +ships at the strait of Sincapura [_i.e._, Singapore] on their way to +Malaca; and at all events, continue along that same route his return to +Holanda, laden with wealth. All this did the Dutch general communicate +to Antonio de Silva, as to one who would go to Holanda with him; for he +was a soldier and a skilled interpreter of both languages, and Estevan +Drage made much of him for that reason. Certain others who had fought +and escaped the slaughter of Tydore confirmed this news. Don Pedro +learned it, and grieved over it, as he was so zealous in the service of +the Church and of his king. He considered sorrowfully when he saw that +not even one turret of a fortress was left in Maluco to the crown of +España, and how securely a rebel to God and to his legitimate sovereign +held them. And because the prosperity of Dutch affairs made the Dutch +powerful and determined, the governor assembled his council of war, +and appointed Captains Antonio Freyle, chief of the fleet of Pintados, +Pedro Sevil, Estevan de Alcaçar, and Bernardino Alfonso to go to the +garrisons of the Pintados and those of other islands that were in +danger, with their infantry companies. He strengthened the ships, and +prepared his artillery, as if he were near a victorious enemy who was +executing his threats with so great success. Antonio de Silva showed +an original letter from another Dutch general, written in the island +of Borneo to the king of Ternate, sent by Philipo Bissegóp, a ship +captain. In it the general expressed his compliments and sent him a +present of a number of varas of different fine cloths from Holanda, +six bales containing vessels of musk, twelve flasks of rose water, +six _arrates_ [295] of _Amfión_ [296]--a Dutch compound used, as above +stated, for fighting, which takes away or disturbs the reason--and +six barrels of powder. He gave the king an account of the unfortunate +voyage, and the obstacles, storms, and dangers that Andres Furtado had +until his arrival at Malaca after leaving Ternate. He called the king +"most serene prince and powerful king of Maluco, Bandas, Amboino," +and an infinite number of other islands. He congratulated him on the +success attained upon his arrival at Maluco. He promised him to go to +Ternate with the greater forces that he was awaiting from Holanda, +and garrison the forts, in order to extirpate entirely their common +enemy, the king of España. He encouraged him by this hope to hold out +until then. He assured him that he would overrun all those seas from +Maluco, and would extend his empire to China, without any opposition +from the Filipinos or Japanese. For this purpose he requested the king +[of Borneo] to renew friendship with Mindanao, and to give the king +of those islands to understand that he was a friend to the Dutch, and +consequently to facilitate the ports, commerce, and friendships that +were necessary for their voyages. That was what was advisable above +all considerations of the state. He said that he should be warned +and assured that nothing was attended to with more lukewarmness in +España, than to strive or attempt to preserve the greater part of their +provinces, or at least, any form of union. Therefore, all the farthest +colonies that recognized their crown, ought to esteem highly the delay +with which they help and deliberate from España. For while they are +believing, or examining in order to believe, the news of events, +affairs are assuming another condition; and hence neither Spanish +counsels nor arms arrive in time. The greater part of these things had +been taught to his Highness by experience, and the writer's desire +to serve him obliged him to write those things to the king. Antonio +de Sylva added that he knew with certainty that the king of Ternate +had not neglected to take any of the precautions that the Dutchman +asked him to take; and that he had even proposed to his men to go to +fight far from their islands. Although it was never feared that they +would be bold enough to do so, on that occasion Don Pedro was made more +anxious by this information, because the city had been left so weakened +by the Sangley affair. He was trying, moreover, to supply their lack, +so that the late evils might not again happen; for it was so necessary +to further by another road the trade of Filipinas, and to provide +for its domestic security, in order to be able to take the field. + +But time, which is wont both to take away and to give hopes, consoled +Don Pedro in those afflictions, and brought him in a few months from +Nueva España some ships of private persons, and afterward, in good +season, the ships of the regular trading fleet. They reached Manila +on St. Matthew's eve. In them were the Spaniards who left España +for that undertaking, together with more than two hundred others +whom the viceroy of Nueva España, the Marques de Montesclaros, sent +to Don Pedro, together with the other military stores and money, +in accordance with the royal decree. Some of this came in charge +of Brother Gaspar Gomez, who was received with incredible joy. He +presented to the governor all his despatches. Care was immediately +taken to lodge the captains and soldiers, and assign them quickly +to their stations, so that all might believe that the only thing +intended with them was the safety of the Filipinas, which were +threatened by the emperor of Japon and by the conspiracies of the +Sangleys. Corroboration of this report was sent in various directions +that it might increase and be disseminated outside the kingdom, in +order not to give information to those whom the Spaniards had reason +to fear. Besides, although the report of that great preparation +was useful to the Spaniards in opinion and in conjectures, yet the +actual strength of the forces with which the country was supplied, +besides the reputation of our affairs, acted for defense and security +in them all. In Japon the knowledge alone that Manila was full of +infantry and of armed vessels tempered or dispelled the irritation +felt by their king because Don Pedro denied him shipbuilders. The +Chincheos also refrained from attempting vengeance on an enemy whose +victories were followed by so great succor. Don Pedro considered the +whole question, and inferred from every one of these advices that +he could absent himself from Manila. However the king of Ternate, +as one overjoyed at having escaped from the Spanish yoke, paid +little heed to all that was told him from his neighboring kingdoms, +for he thought that the Spaniards were never to return to their +former possessions. The captains of Holanda, who rebuilt the burned +fortress in Tydore, sent him some large bronze cannon, culverins, +and a considerable number of muskets; and sent him some engineers +from those who came on those ships, so that they might inspect his +fortifications and reside in them or in his city. Some accepted that +abode, and the loose and irreligious liberty of life permitted in that +country. There, by reason of the many trading-posts and fleets from +the north, they lived as if they were not outside their own countries, +since they had intercourse with their kinsmen and friends, or at least +with men of their nation. Exiled Castilians and Portuguese reached +the port of Oton in Filipinas daily. Among them was Pablo de Lima, +a man of long experience, and now general of artillery in Tydore. He +added to the news of the recent destruction, the joy with which the +Dutch disinterred the pieces that he had tried to hide, and how they +had sent ashore more arms and forces from their ships. This man was +received with great honor because of his worth, and because he was one +of those dispossessed, by the king of Ternate, of vassals and other +property in Tydore. For later events, they profited by his warnings +and advice. All, by various employments, although with equal desire, +took part in the furtherance of the war--in building ships, and +collecting provisions, arms, and ammunition. So great was Don Pedro's +vigilance that he was not wanting in the least duty with example and +encouragement. Consequently, it may be asserted that he carried on +the whole enterprise; for he lent a hand in the labors of all. + + +Conquest of the Malucas islands +Book Tenth + +In human actions the moral doctrine is hidden; and judicious writers +are wont to deduce this from the relation of events, as the fruit +of their history. But in writing of the conquest and conservation +of barbarous lands (which is founded on navigations and garrisons), +what civil precepts of those who establish and compose the political +life--however sagacious statecraft may have made them--can we bring +to the reader's view? And what can be offered in this matter that the +reader could not infer as a necessary consequence, contained in the +preceding propositions? Since, then, the subject forbids us this role, +let us finish it, and redeem the promise by which we bound ourselves +at the beginning. Don Pedro de Acuña, now general of the fleet which +was assembled in Filipinas, attended at the same time to its despatch +and to the safety of the province, which he was about to abandon to +go personally upon so stubborn an undertaking. Some attribute the loss +of all the Malucas to Don Pedro's good fortune, so that, time offering +him greater material, the victory might be more glorious. He provided +very diligently what was needed for the war and for almost all the +casualties thereof. The point or promontory of Yloilo extends into +the sea not far from Arevalo in the island of Panay. It is spacious +enough to serve as a camping-place and suitable for those arms then +prepared. There the fleet was assembled. It consisted of five large +ships, and six galleys; three galliots, like galizabras, belonging +to the crown of Portugal--in one of which Pedro Alvarez de Abreo, +commandant of the fort of Tydore, embarked, while the other two were +in charge of Juan Rodriguez Camelo, a commandant sent from Malaca by +General Andres Furtado de Mendoça, to aid with his prudence and his +strength, and to carry to him information of the outcome; one flat +galliot for unloading artillery, which carried three hundred baskets +of rice; four vessels [297] built for transporting the provisions; +two ten-ton champans, carrying one thousand six hundred baskets of +clean rice; two English lanchas, in which the Portuguese went [to +Manila] after the loss of the Tydore fort; seven fragatas belonging +to his Majesty, and seven belonging to individuals; and as many other +champans--in all thirty-six sail. Master-of-camp Juan de Esquivel +took twelve companies of Spanish infantry, of which four were levied +in Andaluzia--namely, his own, that of Captain Pablo Garrucho, that of +Pedro Sevil, that of Lucas de Vergara Gaviria; and six in Nueva España, +namely, that of Don Rodrigo de Mendoça (this gentleman is the son of +Don Juan de Baeça y Castilla and of Doña Maria de Mendoça, and on the +latter side grandson to the marques de Montesclaros; and left Italia +to serve his Majesty in Filipinas, at the request of the viceroy of +Nueva España, his kinsman), the company of Captain Pascual de Alarcon +Pacheco, that of Martin de Esquivel, that of Bernardino Alfonso, +that of Pedro Delgado, and that of Estevan de Alcaçar. The other two, +under Captains Juan Guerra de Cervantes and Christoval de Villagrâ, +were from the camp of Manila and the province of Pintados. All of +these with their officers amounted to one thousand four hundred +and twenty-three Spaniards. Under Master-of-camp Don Guillermo +and Captains Don Francisco Palaot, Don Juan Lit, Don Luys, and Don +Agustin Lont were three hundred and forty-four Pampanga and Tagál +Indians; while there were also six hundred and twenty men from the +same tribes for the naval and military service, and six hundred and +forty-nine rowers. The entire fleet, exclusive of the household and +following of the general, amounted to three thousand and ninety-five +men; they had seventy-five pieces of various kinds of artillery, +and all the materials for navigating, disembarking, and fighting, +and for bombarding walls. + +Don Pedro left the port of Yloilo with this armament January five, one +thousand six hundred and six, in doubtful weather, but as courageous +as ever. He reached the island of Mindanao, hostile to the Spanish +name and allied with the Ternatans, and anchored in the port of La +Caldera to take in water. There the flagship, called "Jesus Maria," in +which Master-of-camp Esquivel was sailing, began to drag the anchors +with which it was moored--an action which the sailors name by the +peculiar word _garrar_ [298]--and, in order to save itself, had to +set sail. But finding that it could not double a point in this way, +it fired two shots as a call for help, just when the rudder struck. The +galleys hastened to give it a tow, but some cables were snapped atwain; +and their efforts were in vain, for the sea and winds prevented the +work. Captain Villagrà was given charge of the rescue of the men and +provisions aboard the flagship. Although many possessions of the king +and of private persons were lost, by incredible effort he saved the +bulk of the provisions and of the clothing, and all the men, artillery, +powder, cables, rigging, and sails. In order that the Mindanaos might +not enjoy the spoils of the shipwreck, he set fire to the hull, after +taking out the nails and bolts. They felt this first misfortune because +of its very importance, and because the soldiers, a class often given +to foolish superstitions, interpreted it in a sinister manner. The +general's prudence calmed everything. He ordered the master-of-camp +to proceed with the fleet from La Caldera to the port of Talangame, +which, as we have said, is situated in the island of Ternate. Don +Pedro accompanied him with his galleys until they got outside the +strait of Sambuanga, a place dangerous because of its currents and +reefs. For that reason they towed the ships, until this danger was +past, and because of a calm that overtook them. The fleet took the +open sea. The galleys, in order to take in water enough to last until +reaching Ternate, coasted along gradually; for the men rescued from the +submerged flagship were distributed in them and in the other boats, and +their weight and peril was greater. The most skilful pilots of those +seas managed the galleys, but notwithstanding their care and that of +the captains and experienced sailors, they fell off their course and +reached the islands of the Celebes or of Mateo, more than sixty leguas +to the leeward of Ternate. Contrary winds were blowing, and they had +to correct their mistake by dint of rowing. In that manner, and with +great difficulty, they reached Ternate March twenty-six, on Easter +day. With their observance of that day, so propitious to all creation, +they forgot their past dangers, and changed them into joy and hope. + +[Don Pedro finds the rest of his fleet at Tidore instead of at Ternate, +as he has expected; but sees at the latter place a Dutch ship, +which shows fight. However, leaving the ship for the present, Acuña +sets about the reduction of Ternate with his own forces and those +of the king of Tidore. Landing at Ternate April first, that fort is +approached in two divisions, meeting with no opposition until they +arrive near the walls. Gallinato's advice as to placing the soldiers +is followed, and the Ternatan scouts in trees are replaced by those +of the besiegers. Active operations begin, and after various minor +successes the wall is carried by assault, and the old fortress built +by the Portuguese is captured. On entering the city the soldiers fall +to looting.] + +When the men entered the city, every one gave himself to his fury and +to plundering. Don Pedro had issued a proclamation, conceding that all +the enemy captured within those four days should become slaves. The +captains halted near the old church of San Pablo, which had been +fortified by the enemy for this war. There were various opinions as to +what course was to be followed. Some thought that they should attend +to preserving what was gained; others that they should go ahead to +gain the chief fortress. Captains Vergara and Villagrà were of the +latter opinion; and so great was the exuberance of the soldiers and +their desire for danger that one of them, a native of Estremadura, +of the company of Captain Sevil--who was an Arragonese, and a gallant +fighter, who also approved the advice to pass on--seized Captain +Villagrà in his arms, and carried him thus for more than ten paces, +exclaiming, "O good captain, attack the enemy, attack him!" and then +set him down. Thereupon the captain struck him with the flat of his +sword, because he had at such a time seized him so impudently. The +soldier bowed, and said gracefully and smilingly, "Give me another, +by God! [_cuerpo de Dios_] and attack them!" In fact Vergara and +Villagrà attacked the principal fortress with few men and gained it, +and were the first to enter its gates. However they were not the +first to go up, for while they were ascending very quickly by the +stairs, at the entrance of the hall an old soldier, named Barela, +a corporal to Captain Cervantes, hurried past them. He, on entering, +took a gilded water-jar, shaped like an urn and very skilfully chased, +from a rich side board and salver placed in the hall, saying to the +captains, "Gentlemen, I take this in token that I entered here with +your Graces." Accordingly he took it, with the consent of all. Then +the entire palace was given over to the pillage of the soldiers, +and exposed to their greed. Don Pedro tried to restrain them, but +was obeyed only near the end of the sack. + +[The king of Ternate and a few of his kinsmen, together with the Dutch, +escape, the former going to the island of Gilolo. The reduction +of the lesser forts continues, and some of the king's relatives +who are well affected to the Spanish, offer to induce the king to +surrender. This he does after a formal safe-conduct has been given +by Acuña. Don Pedro receives him in a manner befitting his rank, +and houses him sumptuously, but at the same time keeps him carefully +guarded. Several days later a treaty is made with the king.] + +Two days after, the governor ordered Master-of-camp Gallinato and +Captain Villagrà, together with Pablo de Lima, to confer with the +captive king concerning what agreement it was advisable to make +with him in his Majesty's name for the security and solidity of +matters. They were to persuade him that that was the way to attain +merit and oblige our king to make better conditions in his favor. The +three came, accompanied by other influential persons, among whom +were some Augustinian, Dominican, and Jesuit religious, all of whom +served in their ministry praiseworthily. The king did not refuse to +capitulate. After some discussion as to what form it should take, +through the medium of Pablo de Lima, and after conceding to the +king some things that he requested from the king, our sovereign, +they wrote and signed the following agreements: + +The first thing demanded from King Cachil Sultan Zayde, of Ternate, +and from the rest imprisoned with his Highness who may have any +part in it, is that he is to deliver to his Majesty King Filipo, our +sovereign, the forts that he now possesses--namely, those of Xilolo, +Sabubù, Gamocanora, Tacome, those of Maquien, those of Sula, and the +others. He answers to this that he will deliver to his Majesty the +forts above declared, and that he will send the prince his son, and +Cachil Amuxa, his cousin, with the person or persons who shall go to +take possession of them; and that they shall be delivered up with all +the artillery, ammunition, muskets, and arquebuses contained in them. + +The second. That he shall make restitution of all the captives that +he holds, who may be our subjects, whether Christians or infidels, +from the provinces of Pintados and from the other provinces subject to +the Spaniards in the Filipinas Islands. He answered that all that are +found at present shall be delivered up immediately, and that those who +do not appear now shall be delivered up as they shall be found later. + +The third. That he shall deliver up the Dutch in his power. He replied +that when he left this fort of Ternate, thirteen or fourteen Dutchmen +with him took to flight, and he thought that they went to the Dutch +vessel, for he has not seen them. However, if they appear, he will +deliver them up immediately. + +The fourth. He shall deliver up the Spanish renegades who were in +this fort of Ternate. He answered that there was only one there, and +that he fled like the others the day the fort was taken, and he does +not know where he is, but that he shall be sought and delivered up. + +The fifth. That he shall also deliver up all the villages in the +island of Batochina or El Moro, which were formerly Christian; as well +as the islands of Marotay, and Herrao, which were also Christian, +with all the artillery and ammunition in them. He answered that he +is ready to deliver up everything, as he did with his person. + +Don Pedro de Acuña, governor and captain-general of the Filipinas +Islands, president of the royal Audiencia resident therein, and +general of this Maluco fleet, entrusted these capitulations to General +Juan Xuarez Gallinato and captain Christoval de Villagra. They made +them in the form above declared, with the help of Pablo de Lima, a +Portuguese native of these islands, who was the interpreter of the +[Moro] language. The said king affixed his signature, according to +his custom. It was done in the fort of Ternate April ten, one thousand +six hundred and six. The said general and captain, and the said Pablo +de Lima, also signed it. + +The king signed it in Persian characters with graceful curves, and +the Spaniards simply. This original agreement was brought to España +with the other authentic documents. + +[Possession is formally taken of the newly-subdued and of the +reconquered territory in the name of the king of Spain; and after +consultation it is determined to take the king of Ternate to Manila, +leaving governors appointed to carry on his government. All swear +homage to the Spanish monarch, and promise not to admit the Dutch +or other foreigners to their clove trade, and not to prevent +missionary work. Acuña orders a new fort to be built at Tidore, +remits a third part of the tribute to be paid by the Ternatans, +and, after strengthening the fort at Terate, leaves Juan de Esquivel +there with six hundred men, boats, ammunition, and supplies, to act +as governor of all the Moluccas, while he returns to Manila with his +prisoners. Trouble begins immediately, and Esquival is kept busy with +expeditions to the various islands and forts, while the Dutch again +begin their machinations; and sickness fights powerfully against +the Spaniards. At Mindanao, a conspiracy to escape is discovered +among the prisoners, for Mindanao is friendly to the Ternatans. The +narrative continues:] + +In all the time that we have described, no news of our victory +reached Filipinas. From this silence and suspense they argued in +those regions, and especially in Manila, that Don Pedro and his fleet +had perished, or that he had succeeded so poorly that general sorrow +would be caused. Never was virtue free from envious ones who pursue +it, and such were not wanting to Don Pedro in Manila. But although +these were well known [_some words misprinted in text_]--so that +popular suspicion makes them the authors of the poison from which +it was believed that that great knight died, twenty-two days after +his arrival--we ahall suppress their names; since it is unworthy +of the author, who has to maintain neutrality (and indifference, +in fact) to give strength to a rumor which even yet is based only +upon a suspicion. All are now dead, and judged before the tribunal +where not one thought passes without examination. These men, then, +spread the rumor that Don Pedro, having assaulted Ternate, entered it +easily; but that his men became so embarrassed in the midst of their +great plundering that the barbarians, having reflected, attacked +the Spaniards and made them retreat, after killing the majority of +them. They said that the general, ashamed of his lack of discipline, +did not dare return to Manila. When that report reached the Indians' +ears, it did so great harm that they began to rebel, especially in +the provinces of Camarines and Pintados. The friars who were already +attending to their instruction could do nothing with them, for they +asked, since the Malucans were victorious, why they should remain +subject to the Spaniards, who did not defend them from the Moros. They +said that the latter would, with Ternate's protection, plunder them +daily, and worse thenceforward. They did not stop at mere murmurs, +for they began to confer concerning them, and to talk of executing +their plans. But all vanished before the truth and the news of it, +which preceded the arrival of the conquerors..... + +[The conquerors are given a triumphant reception, and the captives +are cheered with hopes of an early release by a decree from Spain, +and lodged comfortably. The king of Ternate has a letter written to +the Spanish monarch, in which he entreats his clemency. Argensola +ends with the reflection that "the Malucos being, then, reduced, our +ministers and preachers went thither, and the voice of the evangelist +began to be heard in the remotest confines of the land."] + + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA + +_Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas_, by Antonio de Morga.--See +Bibliographical Data in _Vol_. XV. + +_Conqvista de las Islas Malvcas_, by Bartolomé Leonardo de +Argensola.--This is partly translated in full, partly synopsized, +from the original printed work, from the copies owned by Harvard +University, and Edward E. Ayer, of Chicago. + + + +APPENDIX: CUSTOMS OF THE PAMPANGAS IN THEIR LAWSUITS + +[The following extract forms the second part of a treatise found +in the body of _Ordinances enacted by the Audiencia of Manila_, +given in _Vols_. X and XI. The first part is entitled "Relation of +the customs which the Indians were accustomed to observe in these +islands; written by Fray Joan de Plaçençia, and sent to Doctor Stiago +de Vera, former president of the royal Audiencia which resided in +these islands." This is signed with Plasencia's name. The second +part, headed as below, bears no signature, but is doubtless by +Plasencia. From their appearance in the body of the above document, +it is probable that the Audiencia considered them in assembly. Both +these reports were written by Plasencia at the command of the governor +or of the Audiencia, in order that the local Spanish magistrates +might be guided by the customs of the natives in deciding matters +of law or justice among the Indians. The first part, omitted here, +is the same, with a few verbal changes, as the relation published in +_Vol_. VII. pp. 173-185; but it is dated, "Narcan, October twenty-four, +one thousand five hundred and eighty-nine" (but this may have been +an error of the clerk of the Audiencia). The second part (_Vol_. VII, +pp. 185-196) is not found in the above Audiencia document.] + + + +Instructions regarding the customs which the natives of Pampanga +formerly observed in their lawsuits + +They never had anyone whom they all generally obeyed, except that +only in each barangay they obeyed their chief, whose people are +called timaguas. Among the chiefs, lords of barangay, he who was most +powerful tyrannized over the others, even though they were brothers, +because they were all intent upon their own interests. + +2. In what concerns regulation in regard to supplies for the country, +they had none, and everyone bought and sold as he could; beyond that +each chief who ruled a barangay ordered his people to sow at the +proper time, and made them assist him at seed-time and harvest. + +3. The timaguas, or common people, came before their chief with their +suits, and he settled them in this way. Whatever petition was made +before them, the chief summoned the party on whom the demand was made, +and asked him if he would come to an agreement with the other and +opposite party. If the two parties made such agreement, there was no +suit. If they would not agree, he exacted an oath from them that they +would submit to his judgment. Then he immediately asked for a _viva +voce_ examination of both, because among these people there were no +writings any suits. If both parties gave like testimony, with the +same number of witnesses, they split the difference of the amount of +the suit. If the number of witnesses was not equal on either side, +such and such a one was condemned to the whole amount, or released +from the claim. If the defeated party would not pay according to the +sentence, the other party and the judge proceeded against him with +the armed hand, and forced him to comply with it. The witnesses were +paid according to their rank, and the judge also. The payment of +the judge and witnesses was so excessive, that they shared equally +with him who won in the suit. The witnesses of the condemned party +were paid nothing; and if anything had been given to them before the +decision of the suit, it was taken back from them. + +4. _Item_: In regard to any murders that occurred, they ruled in this +wise. If one chief killed another chief, the relatives and friends +of the murdered man went to war immediately with the murderer and his +kindred; and if they killed the murderer, the quarrel and difference +between them was ended. If not, they killed as many as possible of his +followers. After these parties had grown weary of their strife, and +a certain time had elapsed after the murder, the other chiefs of the +village or district endeavored to reconcile them. The reconciliation +was as follows. The murderer was to give and pay to the relatives +of the murdered man seventy or eighty taes of gold; and if he were a +prominent chief, one hundred or more. Then they all remained friends, +and one half was divided among the children of the murdered man, +if he had any, or his parents, brothers, or kindred; and the other +half among those chiefs who reconciled them, and the timaguas of the +murdered man's barangay, although the chiefs took the greater part. If +the children or relatives of the deceased refused to be reconciled, +all the chiefs proceeded against them, and assisted the party of the +murderer until the said agreement was completed. + +5. In case any timagua killed any chief or his child, the relatives +of the deceased put the murderer to death, together with his wife +and children, if they succeeded in catching him. They seized all his +property, which they divided among the children of the murdered man, +if he had any, and if not, among his parents, relatives, or brothers; +and if he had no kindred, among those who executed the vengeance for +the murder, this usually being his successor in the barangay. + +6. If the murdered man was a timagua, and the murderer a chief, the +latter gave to the children or heirs of the murdered man the sum of +ten to twenty taes of gold; but if the murdered man had no heirs, +it was divided between the judge passing sentence--who was one of the +chiefs, appointed by the others of the village for the purpose--and +among the said chiefs, the judge taking one half and the others the +other half. Of this they gave no part to the murderer, even though +he was a chief. + +7. _Item_: If one timagua killed another timagua, and had nothing +with which to pay the penalty--ten to twenty taes of gold--all the +chiefs of the village killed him for it, if his own chief did not do +this, by hanging him to a tree or _arigue_ [_i.e._, prop of a house] +or piercing him with many lance-thrusts. + +8. If any woman killed any man, or another woman, by poison or steel +or any other way, the judgment was in conformity with the one above, +with consideration for the said conditions. + +9. If a brother killed a brother or an uncle, or a nephew his uncle, +he did not die for it; but they took all his property away from him +for the heirs of the murdered man, of which they gave no share to the +murderer, even though he should be an heir. This was determined by the +chief of the barangay to which the murderer and the murdered belonged, +if each party were of his barangay. The chiefs of the barangay were +judges, and shared with the heirs of the deceased. + +10. Concerning the murder of a child by a father, or a father by +a child, no precise information could be secured regarding the +punishment, because all asserted that they never remembered such a +murder to have happened. + +11. In case of the burning of any village or crops, if the incendiary +was a chief, he paid for all the damage caused by the fire--which the +chiefs of such town and those nearest it determined--according to +the amount of the damage, even though they did not leave the chief +who set the fire one mais of gold. If the damage did not exceed his +property, and he had some property left over, he retained it. If +the incendiary were a timagua, he was executed, and his goods were +seized to repair the damage. If these did not suffice to pay for it, +they sold his wife and children as slaves, to pay for the said damage. + +12. Concerning thieves: If the thief were a chief, he returned the +plunder, and was fined in proportion to the theft, according to the +opinion of one of the chiefs of the village, whom the other chiefs +selected as judge for that purpose. They say that they ordinarily +appointed the oldest and the most intelligent. The latter could +moderate the penalty, which was divided between the judge and the +other chiefs, the judge taking one half. + +13. If a timagua or slave committed a theft: If the thief were +a timagua, they compelled him to return his booty, and fined him +according to the regulations of the preceding section. If he had +nothing with which to pay, they sold him in another village, in order +to pay what he owed, as a penalty for the theft. If the thief were a +slave, his master paid for him, or delivered the said slave to the +party, and he was soundly lashed. If the owner of the said stolen +goods caught the thief in the act of such robbery, he could kill or +beat him without any penalty. + +14. As for the old men, old women, and witches who committed murders +by any of their practices, when it was ascertained that they had +killed any person with their witchcraft or tricks, the chief of their +barangay, or of the barangay of the murdered man, could kill them with +daggers if he pleased; and if these chiefs did not do this, any of the +other chiefs could kill the criminals. Their property was seized, and +one half was given to the relatives of the murdered man, and the other +half to him who executed the sentence upon such sorcerers and witches. + +15. Insulting words caused great anger among these natives, and it +was considered a very grave offense, especially among the chiefs. They +fined the culprits in heavy sums therefor, inflicting this penalty in +order not to cause murders, and in the following manner. The insulted +person and he who insulted him named a chief, who must be greater +than those in the whole province, to hear this suit, who accepted +and decided it. If either of the two parties refused to conform to +the agreement which the judge prescribed, there was a custom among +them that each one lavished expense, on his own account, on feasts +and assemblies, and he who spent the greater sum they considered the +more powerful and honorable. From these debaucheries and gatherings +sometimes resulted wars between them. If either one of the two was +the most considerable chief of the province, three or four, chosen by +the rest, judged the case. In case the injurious words were said by a +timagua to a chief, if the said timagua had nothing wherewith to pay +the penalty imposed--which was very excessive--he was made a slave; +and if the insulted party were a great chief, the timagua's wife and +children were made slaves. If the chief applied insulting words to +any timagua, the penalty was very light, and many times nothing. + +16. Their marriage custom was to have one wife--from whom they would +separate and marry another, on any occasion or change of feeling--and +to have three or four other women. They always considered that one the +legitimate wife with whom they naturally cohabited. The man always +gave the dowry, and this, together with certain gatherings in which +they drank, was considered marriage. If the man separated from his +wife, he lost the dowry which he had given her. If she separated +from the man, she returned double the dowry which she had received, +even though she had children. The property acquired during marriage, +they always divided equally. They never disinherited the children +in life or death, even though they were born of many women, if they +had been married to these. The other children, born of other women, +whom we call bastards, they called _asiao yndepat_. These did not +inherit, but they always gave them something. Even if any one had no +legitimate child at his death, the bastard could not inherit at all, +but the property went to the nearest relatives of the deceased. + +17. They were not accustomed to will more to any child, except in small +sums, as three or four taes, or small pieces of land of the like value. + +18. When anyone became a widower and no children had been born to the +husband and wife, the whole dowry was returned. But if any sons or +daughters had been born to them, even though these were dead at the +time of bereavement, not more than half the dowry was returned. + +19. If any child were living at the time of the death of the father +or mother, all the property of the deceased was inherited by the +child or children. If they were not old enough to administer it, +the parents of the deceased kept and used it, and not the surviving +father or mother of the minors. If the minor died afterward, neither +the father nor the mother inherited it, but the minor's grandparents, +or the nearest relatives of the deceased from whom the minor had +inherited the property. + +20. Among the slaves, the father and mother shared equally. If both +were slaves of one master, the children were so also. If one slave +belonged to one master and the other to another, the children were +divided in this way. The master of the father took the eldest, the +master of the mother, the second; and so on in this order with the +rest. If there were an odd one, the two masters of the parents divided +him; that is, the slave served both masters equally. If either the +father or mother were free, the children were divided in the same way, +so that if the father was free, the eldest son or daughter was free. On +the contrary, if the father was a slave, the eldest son or daughter was +a slave. This arrangement was kept and observed among them, namely, +to give an equal share to both the father and mother. If one of them +was free or half-free, they gave his part to him and to his children +in proportion to the amount which fell to his lot. + +21. If any chiefs wrangled over their cultivated lands, they came +before the other chiefs of the village; and these tried them, and +received testimony orally from both sides, under oath, according to +their usage--which was sweating by the crocodile, the sun, the moon, +and many other things by which they swore. In conformity with the +evidence of each one, the suit between the said chiefs was decided; +and if either one of them refused to comply with the sentence, all the +chiefs together compelled him to observe it. This order was adhered +to in this matter. + +22. All the aforesaid information I have endeavored to procure from +the oldest inhabitants of this province, and from all the priors of +the province. If it be not set forth in a style as good as I ought +to use, I beg your Lordship to pardon its defects, for the sake of +my good will, etc. + + + + + + +NOTES + +[1] Following in a translation of the title-page of the other +edition of Morga's work, which shows that a second edition of the +_Sucesos_ was published in the same year as was the first. A reduced +facsimile of this title-page--from the facsimile reproduction in +the Zaragoza edition (Madrid, 1887)--forms the frontispiece to the +present volume. It reads thus: "Events in the Philipinas Islands: +addressed to Don Christoval Gomez de Sandoval y Rojas, duke de Cea, +by Doctor Antonio de Morga, alcalde of criminal causes in the royal +Audiencia of Nueva España, and consultor for the Holy Office of the +Inquisition. At Mexico in the Indias, in the year 1609." In the lower +left-hand corner of the engraved title appears the engraver's name: +"Samuel Estradanus, of Antwerp, made this." + +[2] The month is omitted in the text.--_Stanley_. + +[3] Fray Diego Bermeo, a native of Toledo, became a Franciscan +friar; and in 1580 went to Mexico, and three years later to the +Philippines. After spending many years as a missionary in Luzón and +Mindoro, he was elected provincial of his order in the islands (in +1599, and again in 1608). Going to Japan as commissary provincial--in +1603, according to Morga, but 1604 as given by Huerta (_Estado_, +p. 446)--he was obliged by severe illness to return to Manila; he +died there on December 12, 1609. + +[4] Luis Sotelo, belonging to an illustrious family of Sevilla, +made his profession as a Franciscan in 1594. Joining the Philippine +mission, he reached the islands in 1600; and he spent the next two +years in ministering to the Japanese near Manila, and in the study of +their language. In 1600 he went to Japan, where he zealously engaged +in missionary labors. Ten years later, he was sentenced to death for +preaching the Christian religion; but was freed from this danger by +Mazamune, king of Boxu, who sent the Franciscan as his ambassador to +Rome and Madrid. Returning from this mission, Sotelo arrived in the +Philippines in 1618, and four years later resumed his missionary +labors in Japan. In 1622 he was again imprisoned for preaching, +and was confined at Omura for two years, during which time he wrote +several works, in both the Spanish and Japanese languages. Sotelo was +finally burned at the stake in Omura, August 25, 1624. See Huerta's +_Estado_, pp. 392-394. + +[5] The present towns of San Nicolás, San Fernando, etc., lying +between Binondo and the sea.--_Rizal_. + +[6] This remark of Morga can be applied to many other insurrections +that occurred later--not only of Chinese, but also of natives--and +probably even to many others which, in the course of time, will be +contrived.--_Rizal_. + +[7] These devices, of which certain persons always avail themselves +to cause a country to rebel, are the most efficacious to bring such +movements to a head. "If thou wishest thy neighbor's dog to become mad, +publish that it is mad," says an old refrain.--_Rizal_. + +[8] This is the famous Eng-Kang of the histories of +Filipinas.--_Rizal_. + +[9] The Rizal edition of Morga omits the last part of this sentence, +the original of which is _"entre vnos esteros y cienagas, lugar +escondido."_ + +[10] "The Chinese killed father Fray Bernardo de Santo Catalina, agent +of the holy office, of the order of St. Dominic ... They attacked +Quiapo, and after killing about twenty people, set fire to it. Among +these they burned alive a woman of rank, and a boy."--_Rizal_. This +citation is made from Leonardo de Argensola's _Conquistas de las +Molucas_ (Madrid, 1609), a synopsis of which will follow Morga's work. + +[11] We are unaware of the exact location of this settlement of +Laguio. It is probably the present village of Kiapo, which agrees +with the text and is mentioned by Argensola. Nevertheless, from the +description of this settlement given by Morga (_post_, chapter viii) +and Chirino, it can be inferred that Laguio was located on the present +site of the suburb of La Concepción. In fact, there is even a street +called Laguio between Malate and La Ermita.--_Rizal_. + +[12] "Fine helmets were found broken in with clubs... About thirty +also escaped (among whom was Father Farfan), who were enabled to do so +because of being in the rear, and lightly armed" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[13] Argensola says that the Chinese killed many peaceful merchants in +the parián, while others hanged themselves of their own accord. Among +these Argensola mentions General Hontay and the rich Chican--according +to the relation of Fray Juan Pobre, because the latter had refused +to place the famous Eng-Kang at the head of the movement.--_Rizal_. + +[14] "And they tried to persuade the natives to unite with them; +but the latter refused, and on the contrary killed as many of the +Sangleys as they caught" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[15] Argensola says that "four thousand Pampangos, armed in the +custom of their country, with bows and arrows, half-pikes, shields, +and long broad daggers," were sent by the alcalde of Pampanga to the +relief of Manila, which now needed soldiers.--_Rizal_. + +[16] In this struggle many cruelties were committed and many quiet +and friendly Chinese killed. Don Pedro de Acuña, who could not +prevent or stifle this terrible insurrection in its beginnings, also +contributed to the horrible butcheries that ensued. "Accordingly +many Spaniards and natives went to hunt the disbanded Sangleys, +at Don Pedro's order." Hernando de Avalos, alcalde of La Pampanga, +seized more than 400 pacific Sangleys, "and leading them to an estuary, +manacled two and two, delivered them to certain Japanese, who killed +them. Father Fray Diego de Guevara of the order of St. Augustine, prior +of Manila, who made this relation, preached to the Sangleys first, +but only five abandoned their idolatry." ... Would he not have done +better to preach to Alcalde Avalos, and to remind him that he was a +man? The Spanish historians say that the Japanese and Filipinos showed +themselves cruel in the killing of the Chinese. It is quite probable, +considering the rancor and hate with which they were regarded. But +their commanders contributed to it also by their example. It is said +that more than 23,000 Chinese were killed. "Some assert that the number +of Sangleys killed was greater, but in order that the illegality +committed in allowing so many to enter the country contrary to the +royal prohibitions might not be known, the officials covered up or +diminished the number of those who perished" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[17] The coming of the Spaniards to the Filipinas, and their +government, together with the immigration of the Chinese, killed the +industry and agriculture of the country. The terrible competition +of the Chinese with any individual of another race is well known, +for which reason the United States and Australia refuse to admit +them. The indolence, then, of the inhabitants of the Filipinas, is +derived from the lack of foresight of the government. Argensola says +the same thing, and could not have copied Morga, since their works +were published in the same year, in countries very distant from one +another, and the two contain wide differences.--_Rizal_. + +The Chinese question has always been of great importance in the +Philippines. The dislike of the Filipino for the Chinese seemed +instinctive and was deep-rooted. The subject of the Chinese immigration +to the islands has served for special legislation on many occasions +in Spain, but they have nevertheless persisted in their trading and +occupations therein. See Stanley's edition of Morga, appendix II, +pp. 363-368; and _Los Chinos en Filipinos_ (Manila, 1886). + +[18] This should be six hundred and four.--_Rizal_. + +[19] Nueva España.--_Rizal_. + +[20] This archbishop seems to have been a principal cause of the +disturbance and massacre of the Chinese, by taking a leading part in +exciting suspicion against them.--_Stanley_. + +[21] The Arab travelers of the ninth century mention that eunuchs +were employed in China, especially for the collection of the revenue, +and that they were called _thoucam_.--_Stanley_. + +[22] "In earlier times a barrier, which ran from Osaka to the +border of Yamato and Omi, separated the thirty-three western from +the thirty-three eastern provinces. The former were collectively +entitled Kuwansei (pronounce Kánsé), _i.e._, westward of the Gate; the +latter Kuwantô (pronounce Kántô), _i.e._, eastward of the Gate. Later, +however, when under the Tokugawa régime the passes leading to the plain +in which Yedo, the new capital of Shôgune, grew up were carefully +guarded; by the Gate (Kuwan) was understood the great guard on the +Hakone Pass, and Kuwantô or Kuwantô-Hashiu, the eight provinces east of +it: Sagami, Musashi, Kôtsuke, Shimotsuke, Hitachi, Shimosa, Katsusa, +and Awa." Thus defined by Rein, in his _Japan_, p. II, Cf. Griffis, +_Mikado's Empire_, p. 68, note. + +[23] A flat-bottomed boat, capable of carrying heavy loads. + +[24] Pedro Alvares de Abreu.--_Rizal_. + +[25] According to Argensola, who gives a succinct relation of this +expedition, the number engaged in it were as follows: Spaniards and +their officers, 1,423; Pampangos and Tagáls (without their chiefs), +344; _idem_, for maritime and military service, 620; rowers, +649; Indian chiefs, 5; total 3,041. But he adds that all those +of the fleet, exclusive of the general's household and followers, +numbered 3,095. Probably the 54 lacking in the above number were the +Portuguese under command of Abreu and Camelo, although Argensola +does not mention Portuguese soldiers.... The names of the Indian +chiefs attending the expedition at their own cost were: Don Guillermo +(Palaot), master-of-camp; and Captains Don Francisco Palaot, Don Juan +Lit, Don Luis Lont, and Don Agustin Lont. These must have behaved +exceedingly well, for after the assault on Ternate, Argensola says: +"Not a person of consideration among the Spaniards or the Indians +remained unwounded."--_Rizal_. + +[26] Said Dini Baraka ja.--_Rizal_. + +[27] Combés (_Mindanao_, Retana's ed., cols. 73, 74) describes the +bagacay as a small, slender reed, hardened in fire and sharp-pointed; +it is hurled by a Moro at an enemy with unerring skill, and sometimes +five are discharged in one volley. He narrates surprising instances of +the efficacy of this weapon, and says that "there is none more cruel, +at close range." + +[28] Stanley translates this "flat-boats." Retana and Pastells +(Combés's _Mindanao_, col. 787) derive this word from Chinese _chun_, +"a boat," and regard the _joanga_ (_juanga_) as a small junk. + +[29] "The soldiers, having entered the city, gave themselves +universally to violence and pillage. Don Pedro had issued a +proclamation conceding that all of the enemy captured within those +four days, should be slaves" (Argensola). During the sack, which +Don Pedro was unable to restrain, neither children nor young girls +were spared. One girl was killed because two soldiers disputed for +her.--_Rizal_. + +[30] "The prince's name was Sulamp Gariolano. This step was contrary +to the advice of Queen Celicaya" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[31] Sangajy, a Malay title (Marsden).--_Stanley_. + +[32] The Jesuit Father Luis Fernández, Gallinato, and Esquivel made +negotiations with the king for this exile, and Father Colin attributes +its good outcome to the cleverness of the former. What was then +believed to be prudent resulted afterward as an impolitic measure, +and bore very fatal consequences; for it aroused the hostility of all +the Molucas, even that of their allies, and made the Spanish name +as odious as was the Portuguese. The priest Hernando de los Rios, +Bokemeyer, and other historians, moreover, accuse Don Pedro de Acuña +of bad faith in this; but, strictly judged, we believe that they do +so without foundation. Don Pedro in his passport assured the lives of +the king and prince, but not their liberty. Doubtless a trifle more +generosity would have made the conqueror greater, and the odium of +the Spanish name less, while it would have assured Spanish domination +of that archipelago. The unfortunate king never returned to his own +country. Hernando de los Rios says that during Don Pedro de Acuña's +life he was well treated, but that during the administration of Don +Juan de Silva "I have seen him in a poor lodging where all the rain +fell on him, and they were starving him to death." He is described by +Argensola as of "robust proportions, and his limbs are well formed. His +neck and much of his breast are bare. His flesh is of a cloudy color, +rather black than gray. The features of his face are like those of an +European. His eyes are large and full, and he seems to dart sparks +from them. His large eyelashes, his thick bristling beard, and his +mustaches add to his fierceness. He always wears his campilan, dagger, +and kris, both with hilts in the form of gilded serpents' heads." This +description was taken from a picture sent to Spain.--_Rizal_. + +[33] Other disturbances occurred also, because of Don Pedro's enemies +having spread the news that the expedition had been destroyed, and +most of those making it killed. "This report, having come to the ears +of the Indians, was so harmful that they began to mutiny, especially +in the provinces of Camarines and Pintados. The friars who instructed +them could already do, nothing with them, for they asked why, since +the inhabitants of the Malucos were victorious, should they be subject +to the Spaniards, who did not defend them from the Moros. They said +that the Moros would plunder them daily with the help of Ternate, +and that it would be worse henceforth" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +La Concepción states (_Hist. de Philipinas_, iv, p. 103) that these +Japanese were settled in Dilao; and that the immediate cause of their +mutiny was the killing of a Japanese by a Spaniard, in a quarrel. + +[34] The authors of this poisoning were then known in Manila, and +according to Argensola were those envious of the governor. "But +although they were known as such, so that the suspicion of the crowd +makes them the authors of the poisoning we shall repress their names +... for all are now dead" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +Cf. La Concepción (_Hist. de Philipinas_, iv, pp. 105, 106); he +ascribes the report of Acuña's poisoning to the physicians, who sought +thus to shield their own ignorance of his disease. + +[35] These were the results of having taken the king and his chiefs, +who had entrusted themselves to Don Pedro de Acuña, prisoners to +Manila, the king of Tidore, the ally of España, had already found +means to break the alliance. The governors appointed by the captive +king refused to have anything to do with the Spaniards. Fear was +rampant in all parts, and the spirit of vengeance was aroused. "When +his vassals saw the ill-treatment that the Spaniards inflicted on +their king, they hated us so much that they acquired an equal liking +for our enemies. (Her. de los Rios)." Don Pedro lacked the chief +characteristic of Legazpi.--_Rizal_. + +[36] This relation forms an appendix to Theodore de Bry's _Ninth +part of America_ (Frankfort, 1601), and was printed by Matthew Becker +(Frankfort, 1602). The copper plates are different from those of the +Dutch edition of the relation.--_Stanley_. + +The plates representing Oliver van Noordt's fleet, presented in +the preceding volume, are taken from tome xvi of Theodore de Bry's +_Peregrinationes_ (first ed.), by courtesy of the Boston Public +Library. The title-page of the relation reads in part: "Description +dv penible voyage faict entovr de l'univers ou globe terrestre, par +Sr. Olivier dv Nort d'Avtrecht, ... Le tout translaté du Flamand en +Franchois, ... Imprimé a Amsterdame. Ches Cornille Claessz fur l'Eau +au Livre a Escrire, l'An 1602." This relation was reprinted in 1610, +and numerous editions have appeared since. + +[37] One of the Canary Islands. + +[38] This anchor was given him by a Japanese captain, in Manila Bay, +on December 3, 1600.--_Stanley_. + +[39] What we now call Java used to be called Java major, and the +island of Bali was Java minor.--_Stanley_. + +[Note: Inasmuch as Morga enters somewhat largely into the ancient +customs of the Tagáls and other Filipino peoples in the present +chapter, and as some of Rizal's notes indicative of the ancient culture +of those peoples are incorporated in notes that follow, we deem it +advisable to invite attention to Lord Stanley's remarks in the preface +to his translation of Morga (p. vii), and Pardo de Tavera's comment +in his _Biblioteca Filipina_ (Washington, 1903), p. 276. Stanley says: +"The inhabitants of the Philippines previous to the Spanish settlement +were not like the inhabitants of the great Indian Peninsula, people +with a civilization as that of their conquerors. Excepting that they +possessed the art of writing, and an alphabet of their own, they do +not appear to have differed in any way from the Dayaks of Borneo as +described by Mr. Boyle in his recent book of adventures amongst that +people. Indeed there is almost a coincidence of verbal expressions in +the descriptions he and De Morga give of the social customs, habits, +and superstitions of the two peoples they are describing; though many +of these coincidences are such as are incidental to life in similar +circumstances, there are enough to lead one to suppose a community of +origin of the inhabitants of Borneo and Luzon." Pardo de Tavera says +after quoting the first part of the above: "Lord Stanley's opinion is +dispassionate and not at all at variance with historical truth." The +same author says also that Blumentritt's prologue and Rizal's notes +in the latter's edition of Morga have so aroused the indignation of +the Spaniards that several have even attacked Morga.] + +[40] More exactly from 25° 40' north latitude to 12° south latitude, +if we are to include Formosa in the group, which is inhabited likewise +by the same race.--_Rizal_. + +[41] We confess our ignorance with respect to the origin of this +belief of Morga, which, as one can observe, was not his belief in +the beginning of the first chapter. Already from the time of Diodorus +Siculus (first century B. C.), Europe received information of these +islands by one Iamboule, a Greek, who went to them (to Sumatra at +least), and who wrote afterward the relation of his voyage. He gave +therein detailed information of the number of the islands, of their +inhabitants, of their writing, navigation, etc. Ptolemy mentions +three islands in his geography, which are called Sindæ in the Latin +text. They are inhabited by the aginnatai. Mercator interprets those +islands as Celebes, Gilolo, and Amboina. Ptolemy also mentions the +island agajou daimonoc (Borneo), five baroussai (Mindanao, Leite, +Sebu, etc.), three sabade'ibai (the Java group--iabadiou) and ten +masniolai where a large loadstone was found. Colin surmises that +these are the Manilas.--_Rizal_. + +Colin (_Labor Evangelica_, Madrid, 1663) discusses the discovery and +naming of the Philippines. He quotes Ptolemy's passage that speaks +of islands called the Maniolas, whence many suppose came the name +Manilas, sometimes given to the islands. But as pointed out in a +letter dated March 14, 1904, by James A. LeRoy, Spanish writers have +wasted more time on the question than it merits. Mr. LeRoy probably +conjectures rightly that many old Chinese and Japanese documents will +be found to contain matter relating to the Philippines prior to the +Spanish conquest. + +[42] It is very difficult now to determine exactly which is this island +of Tendaya, called Isla Filipina for some years. According to Father +Urdaneta's relations, this island was far to the east of the group, +past the meridian of Maluco. Mercator locates it in Panay, and Colin +in Leyte, between Abuyog and Cabalían--contrary to the opinion of +others, who locate it in Ibabao, or south of Samar. But according to +other documents of that period, there is no island by that name, but +a chief called Tendaya, lord of a village situated in that district; +and, as the Spaniards did not understand the Indians well at that time, +many contradictions thus arose in the relations of that period. We +see that, in Legazpi's expedition, while the Spaniards talked of +islands, the Indians talked of a man, etc. After looking for Tandaya +for ten days they had to continue without finding it "and we passed +on without seeing Tandaya or Abuyo." It appears, nevertheless, that +the Spaniards continued to give this name to the southwestern part +of Samar, calling the southeastern part Ibabao or Zibabao and the +northern part of the same island Samar.--_Rizal_. + +[43] Sugbú, in the dialect of the country.--_Rizal_. + +[44] Morga considers the rainy season as winter, and the rest of +the year as summer. However this is not very exact, for at Manila, +in December, January, and February, the thermometer is lower than +in the months of August and September. Consequently, in its seasons +it is like those of España and those of all the rest of the northern +hemisphere.--_Rizal_. + +[45] The ancient traditions made Sumatra the original home of the +Filipino Indians. These traditions, as well as the mythology and +genealogies mentioned by the ancient historians, were entirely lost, +thanks to the zeal of the religious in rooting out every national pagan +or idolatrous record. With respect to the ethnology of the Filipinas, +see Professor Blumentritt's very interesting work, _Versuch einer +Etnographie der Philippinen_ (Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1882).--_Rizal_. + +[46] This passage contradicts the opinion referred to in Boyle's +_Adventures among the Dyaks of Borneo_, respecting the ignorance of +the Dyaks in the use of the bow, which seems to imply that other South +Sea islanders are supposed to share this ignorance. These aboriginal +savages of Manila resemble the Pakatans of Borneo in their mode of +life.--_Stanley_. + +[47] We do not know the origin of this word, which does not seem to +be derived from _China_. If we may make a conjecture, we will say +that perhaps a poor phonetic transcription has made _chinina_ from +the word _tininã_ (from _tinã_) which in Tagál signifies _teñido_ +["dyed stuff"], the name of this article of clothing, generally of but +one color throughout. The chiefs wore these garments of a red color, +which made, according to Colin, "of fine gauze from India."--_Rizal_. + +[48] Bahag "a richly dyed cloth, generally edged with gold" among +the chiefs.--_Rizal_. + +[49] "They wrapped it in different ways, now in the Moro style, +like a turban without the top part, now twisted and turned in the +manner of the crown of a hat. Those who esteemed themselves valiant +let the ends of the cloth, elaborately embroidered, fall down the +back to the buttocks. In the color of the cloth, they showed their +chieftaincy, and the device of their undertakings and prowess. No +one was allowed to use the red potong until he had killed at least +one man. And in order to wear them edged with certain edgings, +which were regarded as a crown, they must have killed seven men" +(Colin). Even now any Indian is seen to wear the _balindang_ in the +manner of the _putong_. _Putong_ signifies in Tagál, "to crown" or +"to wrap anything around the head."--_Rizal_. + +[50] This is the reading of the original (_cera hilada_). It seems +more probable that this should read "spun silk," and that Morga's +amanuensis misunderstood _seda_ ("silk") as _cera_ ("wax"), or else +it is a misprint. + +[51] "They also have strings of bits of ivory" (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[52] "The last complement of the gala dress was, in the manner of our +sashes, a richly dyed shawl crossed at the shoulder and fastened under +the arm" (even today the men wear the _lambong_ or mourning garment +in this manner) "which was very usual with them. The Bisayans, in +place of this, wore robes or loose garments, well made and collarless, +reaching to the instep, and embroidered in colors. All their costume, +in fact, was in the Moorish manner, and was truly elegant and rich; +and even today they consider it so" (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[53] This manner of headdress, and the long robe of the Visayans, +have an analogy with the Japanese coiffure and kimono.--_Rizal_. + +[54] Barõ.--_Rizal_. + +[55] A tree (_Entada purseta_) which grows in most of the provinces +of the Philippines. It contains a sort of filament, from which is +extracted a soapy foam, which is much used for washing clothes. This +foam is also used to precipitate the gold in the sand of rivers. Rizal +says the most common use is that described above. + +[56] This custon still exists.--_Rizal_. + +[57] This custom exists also among the married women of Japan, as a +sign of their chastity. It is now falling into disuse.--_Rizal_. + +[58] The Filipinos were careful not to bathe at the hour of the siesta, +after eating, during the first two days of a cold, when they have +the herpes, and some women during the period of menstruation.--_Rizal_. + +[59] This work, although not laborious, is generally performed +now by the men, while the women do only the actual cleaning of the +rice.--_Rizal_. + +[60] This custom is still to be seen in some parts.--_Rizal_. + +[61] A name given it by the Spaniards. Its Tagál name is +_kanin_.--_Rizal_. + +[62] The fish mentioned by Morga is not tainted, but is the +_bagoong_.--_Rizal_. + +[63] A term applied to certain plants (_Atmaranthus_, _Celosia_, +etc.) of which the leaves are boiled and eaten. + +[64] From the Tagál _tubã_, meaning sap or juice.--_Rizal_. + +[65] The Filipinos have reformed in this respect, due perhaps to the +wine-monopoly. Colin says that those intoxicated by this wine were +seldom disagreeable or dangerous, but rather more witty and sprightly; +nor did they show any ill effects from drinking it.--_Rizal_. + +[66] This weapon has been lost, and even its name is gone. A proof +of the decline into which the present Filipinos have fallen is the +comparison of the weapons that they manufacture now, with those +described to us by the historians. The hilts of the _talibones_ now +are not of gold or ivory, nor are their scabbards of horn, nor are +they admirably wrought.--_Rizal_. + +_Balarao_, dagger, is a Vissayan word.--_Stanley_. + +[67] The only other people who now practice head-hunting are the +Mentenegrins.--_Stanley_. + +[68] A Tagál word meaning oar.--_Stanley_. + +[69] A common device among barbarous or semi-civilized peoples, +and even among boatmen in general. These songs often contain many +interesting and important bits of history, as well as of legendary +lore. + +[70] _Karang_, signifying awnings.--_Rizal_ and _Stanley_. + +[71] The Filipinos, like the inhabitants of the Marianas--who are no +less skilful and dexterous in navigation--far from progressing, have +retrograded; since, although boats are now built in the islands, +we might assert that they are all after European models. The +boats that held one hundred rowers to a side and thirty soldiers +have disappeared. The country that once, with primitive methods, +built ships of about 2,000 toneladas, today [1890] has to go to +foreign ports, as Hong-Kong, to give the gold wrenched from the poor, +in exchange for unserviceable cruisers. The rivers are blocked up, +and navigation in the interior of the islands is perishing, thanks to +the obstacles created by a timid and mistrusting system of government; +and there scarcely remains in the memory anything but the name of all +that naval architecture. It has vanished, without modern improvements +having come to replace it in such proportion as, during the past +centuries, has occurred in adjacent countries....--_Rizal_. + +[72] It seems that some species of trees disappeared or became +very scarce because of the excessive ship-building that took place +later. One of them is the _betis_.--_Rizal_. + +Blanco states (_Flora_, ed. 1845, p. 281) that the betis (_Azaola +betis_) was common in Pampanga and other regions. + +Delgado describes the various species of trees in the Philippines +in the first six treatises of the first part of the fourth book +of _Historia general de Filipinas_ (Manila, 1892). He mentions by +name more than seventy trees grown on the level plains and near the +shores; more than forty fruit-trees; more than twenty-five species +grown in the mountains; sixteen that actually grow in the water; and +many kinds of palms. See also _Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_ +(Washington, 1902), pp. 85-95, and Buzeta and Bravo's _Diccionario_ +(Madrid, 1850), i, pp. 29-36. + +[73] _Sanctor_ is called _santol_ (_Sandoricum indicum_--Cavanilles), +in Delgado (_ut supra_, note 71). The tree resembles a walnut-tree. Its +leaves are rounded and as large as the palm of the hand, and are +dark green in color. Excellent preserves are made from the fruit, +which was also eaten raw by the Indians. The leaves of the tree +have medicinal properties and were used as poultices. _Mabolo_ +(_Diospyros discolor_--Willd.) signifies in Tagál a thing or +fruit enclosed in a soft covering. The tree is not very high. The +leaves are large, and incline to a red color when old. The fruit +is red and as large as a medium-sized quince, and has several large +stones. The inside of the fruit is white, and is sweet and firm, and +fragrant, but not very digestible. The wood resembles ebony, is very +lustrous, and is esteemed for its solidity and hardness. The _nanca_ +[_nangka_, _nangca_; translated by Stanley, jack-fruit] (_Artocarpus +integrifolia_--Willd.), was taken to the Philippines from India, +where it was called _yaca_. The tree is large and wide-spreading, +and has long narrow leaves. It bears fruit not only on the branches, +but on the trunk and roots. The fruit is gathered when ripe, at +which time it exhales an aromatic odor. On opening it a yellowish +or whitish meat is found, which is not edible. But in this are found +certain yellow stones, with a little kernel inside resembling a large +bean; this is sweet, like the date, but has a much stronger odor. It +is indigestible, and when eaten should be well masticated. The shells +are used in cooking and resemble chestnuts. The wood is yellow, solid, +and especially useful in making certain musical instruments. Buzeta +and Bravo (_Diccionario_, i, p. 35) say that there are more than +fifty-seven species of bananas in the Philippines. + +[74] Pilê (_Canarium commune_--Linn.). Delgado (_ut supra_) says that +this was one of the most notable and useful fruits of the islands. It +was generally confined to mountainous regions and grew wild. The +natives used the fruit and extracted a white pitch from the tree. The +fruit has a strong, hard shell. The fruit itself resembles an almond, +both in shape and taste, although it is larger. The tree is very high, +straight, and wide-spreading. Its leaves are larger than those of +the almond-tree. + +[75] Delgado (_ut supra_) describes the tree (_Cedrela +toona_--Roxb.) called _calanta_ in Tagál, and _lanipga_ in +Visayan. The tree is fragrant and has wood of a reddish color. It +was used for making the hulls of vessels, because of its strength and +lightness. The same author describes also the _asana_ (_Pterocarpus +indicus_--Willd.) or as it is called in the Visayas, _naga_ or +_narra_--as an aromatic tree, of which there are two varieties, male +and female. The wood of the male tree is pinkish, while that of the +female tree is inclined to white. They both grow to a great size and +are used for work requiring large timber. The wood has good durable +qualities and is very impervious to water, for which reason it was +largely used as supports for the houses. Water in which pieces of the +wood were placed, or the water that stood in vessels made of this wood, +had a medicinal value in dropsy and other diseases. In the provinces +of Albay and Camarines the natives made curiously-shaped drinking +vessels from this wood. + +[76] So many cattle were raised that Father Gaspar de San Agustin, when +speaking of Dumangas, says: "In this convent we have a large ranch for +the larger cattle, of so many cows that they have at times numbered +more than thirty, thousand ... and likewise this ranch contains many +fine horses."--_Rizal_. + +[77] To the flesh of this fowl, called in Tagál _ulikbâ_, are +attributed medicinal virtues.--_Rizal_. + +[78] These animals now [1890] exist in the islands, but are held in +small esteem.--_Rizal_. + +[79] See chapter on the mammals of the islands, in _Report_ of +U. S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 307-312. At its end is the +statement that but one species of monkey is known, and one other is +reported, to exist in the Philippines; and that "the various other +species of monkey which have been assigned to the Philippines by +different authors are myths pure and simple." + +[80] _Camalote_, for _gamalote_, a plant like maize, with a leaf a +yard long and an inch wide. This plant grows to a height of two yards +and a half, and when green serves for food for horses (Caballero's +_Dictionary_, Madrid, 1856).--_Stanley_. + +At that time the name for _zacate_ (hay).--_Rizal_. + +[81] In Japanese _fimbari_, larks (Medhurst's _Japanese +Vocabulary_).--_Stanley_. + +[82] _Pogos_, from the Tagál pugô.--_Rizal_. + +Delgado (_ut supra_) describes the pogos as certain small gray birds, +very similar to the sparrows in Spain. They are very greedy, and if +undisturbed would totally destroy the rice-fields. Their scientific +name is _Excalfactoria chinensis_ (Linn.). + +[83] Stanley conjectures that this word is a misprint for _maynelas_, +a diminutive of _maina_, a talking bird. Delgado (_ut supra_) describes +a bird called _maya_ (_Munia jagori_--Cab.; _Ploceus baya_--Blyth.; +and _Ploceus hypoxantha_--Tand.), which resembles the pogo, being +smaller and of a cinnamon color, which pipes and has an agreeable song. + +[84] Stanley translates this as "wild ducks." Delgado (_ut supra_) +describes a bird called _lapay_ (_Dendrocygna vagans_--Eyton.), +as similar to the duck in body, but with larger feet, which always +lives in the water, and whose flesh is edible. + +[85] For descriptions of the birds in the Philippines, see Delgado +(_ut supra_) book v, part i, 1st treatise, pp. 813-853; _Report_ of +U.S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 312-316; and _Gazetteer of +the Philippine Islands_ (Washington, 1902), pp. 170, 171. There are +more than five hundred and ninety species of birds in the islands, of +which three hundred and twenty-five are peculiar to the archipelago, +and largely land birds. There are thirty-five varieties of doves and +pigeons, all edible. + +[86] There are now domestic rabbits, and plenty of peacocks.--_Rizal_. + +[87] Doubtless the python, which is often domesticated in the +Philippines. See _Vol_. XII, p. 259, note 73. + +[88] La Gironiére (_Twenty Years in the Philippines_--trans. from +French, London, 1853) describes an interesting fight with a huge +crocodile near his settlement of Jala-Jala. The natives begged for +the flesh in order to dry it and use it as a specific against asthma, +as they believed that any asthmatic person who lived on the flesh for +a certain time would be infallibly cured. Another native wished the +fat as an antidote for rheumatic pain. The head of this huge reptile +was presented to an American, who in turn presented it to the Boston +Museum. Unfortunately La Gironiére's picturesque descriptions must +often be taken with a grain of salt. For some information regarding +the reptiles of the islands see _Report_ of U.S. Philippine Commission, +1900, iii, pp. 317-319. + +[89] Unless we are mistaken, there is a fish in the Filipinas called +_Pámpano_.--_Rizal_. + +[90] For catalogue and scientific description of the mollusks of +the Philippines, see the work of Joaquín González Hidalgo--now +(1904) in course of publication by the Real Academia de Ciencias of +Madrid--_Estudios preliminares sobre la fauna malacológica de las +Islas Filipinas._ + +[91] The Río Grande.--_Rizal_. + +[92] No fish is known answering to this description.--_Stanley_. + +[93] The island of Talim.--_Rizal_. + +[94] Retana thinks (Zúñiga, ii, p. 545*) that this device was +introduced among the Filipinos by the Borneans. + +[95] A species of fishing-net. Stanley's conjecture is wrong. + +[96] _Esparavel_ is a round fishing-net, which is jerked along by +the fisher through rivers and shallow places. _Barredera_ is a net +of which the meshes are closer and tighter than those of common nets, +so that the smallest fish may not escape it. + +[97] Cf. methods of fishing of North American Indians, _Jesuit +Relations_, vi, pp. 309-311, liv, pp. 131, 306-307. + +[98] A species of fish in the Mediterranean, about three pulgadas +[inches] long. Its color is silver, lightly specked with black. + +[99] The fish now called _lawlaw_ is the dry, salted sardine. The +author evidently alludes to the _tawilis_ of Batangas, or to the +_dilis_, which is still smaller, and is used as a staple by the +natives.--_Rizal_. + +For information regarding the fishes of the Philippines, see Delgado +(_ut supra_), book v, part iv, pp. 909-943; _Gazetteer of the +Philippine Islands_ (_ut supra_), pp. 171-172; and (with description +of methods of fishing) _Report_ of U. S. Philippine Commission, 1900, +iii, pp. 319-324. + +[100] Pahõ. A species of very small mango from one and one-half +to five centimeters in its longer diameter. It has a soft pit, and +exhales a strong pitchy odor.--_Rizal_. + +[101] A Spanish word signifying a cryptogamous plant; perhaps referring +to some species of mushroom. + +[102] In Tagál this is kasubhã. It comes from the Sanskrit _kasumbha_, +or Malay _kasumba_ (Pardo de Tavera's _El Sanscrito en la lengua +tagalog_).--_Rizal_. + +This plant is the safflower or bastard saffron (_Certhamus +tinctorius_); its flowers are used in making a red dye. + +[103] Not a tree, but a climber. The plants are cultivated by +training them about some canes planted in the middle of certain +little channels which serve to convey irrigation to the plant twice +each day. A plantation of betel--or ikmó, as the Tagáls call it--much +resembles a German hop-garden.--_Rizal_. + +[104] This fruit is not that of the betel or _buyo_, but of the _bonga_ +(Tagál _buñga_), or areca palm.--_Rizal_. + +[105] Not quicklime, but well slaked lime.--_Rizal_. + +Rizal misprints _un poco de cal viva_ for _vn poluc de cal viua_. + +[106] The original word is _marcada_. Rizal is probably correct in +regarding it as a misprint for _mascada_, chewed. + +[107] It is not clear who call these caskets by that name. I imagine +it to be the Spanish name, properly spelt _buxeta_. The king of +Calicut's betel box is called _buxen_ in the Barcelona MS. of the +Malabar coasts.--_Stanley_. + +[108] See _Vol_. IV, p. 222, note 31; also Delgado (_ut supra_), +pp. 667-669. Delgado says that _bonga_ signifies fruit. + +[109] Tagál, _tukõ_.--_Rizal_. + +[110] This word in the original is _visitandolas_; Rizal makes +it _irritandolas_ (shaking or irritating them), but there are not +sufficient grounds for the change. + +[111] The Indians, upon seeing that wealth excited the rapacity of +the encomenderos and soldiers, abandoned the working of the mines, +and the religious historians assert that they counseled them to a +similar action in order to free them from annoyances. Nevertheless, +according to Colin (who was "informed by well-disposed natives") +more than 100,000 pesos of gold annually, conservatively stated, +was taken from the mines during his time, after eighty years of +abandonment. According to "a manuscript of a grave person who had +lived long in these islands" the first tribute of the two provinces +of Ilocos and Pangasinan alone amounted to 109,500 pesos. A single +encomendero, in 1587, sent 3,000 taheles of gold in the "Santa Ana," +which was captured by Cavendish.--_Rizal_. + +[112] This was prohibited later.--_Rizal_. + +[113] See _Vol_. XIV, pp. 301-304. + +According to Hernando de los Rios the province of Pangasinan was said +to contain a quantity of gold, and that Guido de Labazaris sent some +soldiers to search for it; but they returned in a sickly state and +suppressed all knowledge of the mines in order not to be sent back +there. The Dominican monks also suppressed all knowledge of the mines +on account of the tyranny of which gold had been the cause in the +West Indies.--_Stanley_. + +[114] Pearl-fishing is still carried on along the coasts of Mindanao +and Palawan, and in the Sulu archipelago. In the latter region pearls +are very abundant and often valuable; the fisheries there are under +the control of the sultan of Sulu, who rents them, appropriating for +himself the largest pearls. + +[115] Probably the cowry (_Cypræa moneta_). Crawfurd states +(_Dict. Ind. Islands_, p. 117) that in the Asiatic archipelago this +shell is found only on the shores of the Sulu group, and that it +"seems never to have been used for money among the Indian Islanders +as it has immemorially been by the Hindus." + +[116] Jagor, _Travels in the Philippines_ (Eng. trans., London, 1875), +devotes a portion of his chapter xv to these jars. He mentions the +great prices paid by the Japanese for these vessels. On p. 164, occurs +a translation of the above paragraph, but it has been mistranslated +in two places. Stanley cites the similar jars found among the Dyaks +of Borneo--the best called _gusih_--which were valued at from $1,500 +to $3,000, while the second grade were sold for $400. That they are +very ancient is proved by one found among other remains of probably the +copper age. From the fact that they have been found in Cambodia, Siam, +Cochinchina, and the Philippines, Rizal conjectures that the peoples +of these countries may have had a common center of civilization at +one time. + +[117] "Not many years ago," says Colin (1663), "a large piece [of +ambergris] was found in the island of Joló, that weighed more than +eight arrobas, of the best kind, namely, the gray."--_Rizal_. + +[118] This industry must now be forgotten, for it is never heard +of.--_Rizal_. + +[119] Perhaps Morga alludes to the _sinamay_, which was woven from +abaká, or filament of the plant _Musa textilis_. The abaká is taken +from the trunk and not the leaf.--_Rizal_. + +[120] This name seems to be Malay, _Babu-utan_, wild swine.--_Stanley_. + +[121] The men of these islands were excellent carpenters and +ship-builders. "They make many very light vessels, which they take +through the vicinity for sale in a very curious manner. They build +a large vessel, undecked, without iron nail or any fastening. Then, +according to the measure of its hull, they make another vessel that +fits into it. Within that they put a second and a third. Thus a +large biroco contains ten or twelve vessels, called biroco, virey, +barangay, and binitan." These natives were "tattooed, and were +excellent rowers and sailors; and although they are upset often, +they never drown." The women are very masculine. "They do not +drink from the rivers, although the water is very clear, because it +gives them nausea.... The women's costumes are chaste and pretty, +for they wear petticoats in the Bisayan manner, of fine medriñaque, +and _lamboncillos_, which resemble close-fitting sayuelos [_i.e._, +woolen shifts worn by certain classes of religious]. They wear long +robes of the same fine medriñaque. They gather the hair, which is +neatly combed, into a knot, on top of the head, and place a rose in +it. On their forehead they wear a band of very fine wrought gold, +two fingers wide. It is very neatly worked and on the side encircling +the head it is covered with colored taffeta. In each ear they wear +three gold earrings, one in the place where Spanish women wear them, +and two higher up. On their feet they wear certain coverings of thin +brass, which sound when they walk." (The citations herein are from +Colin.) These islands have also retrograded.--_Rizal_. + +[122] Cavite derives its name from the Tagál word _cavit_, a creek, +or bend, or hook, for such is its form.--_Stanley_. + +[123] This province had decreased so greatly in population and +agriculture, a half century later, that Gaspar de San Agustin said: +"Now it no longer has the population of the past, because of the +insurrection of that province, when Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara +was governor of these islands, and because of the incessant cutting +of the timber for the building of his Majesty's ships, which prevents +them from cultivating their extremely fertile plain." Later, when +speaking of Guagua or Wawà, he says: "This town was formerly very +wealthy because of its many chiefs, and because of the abundant +harvests gathered in its spacious plains, which are now submerged by +the water of the sea."--_Rizal_. + +[124] Now the port of Sorsogón.--_Rizal_. + +[125] Now the port of Mariveles (?).--_Rizal_. + +[126] Subik (?).--_Rizal_. + +[127] Mindoro is at present [1890] so depopulated that the minister of +the Colonies, in order to remedy this result of Spanish colonization, +wishes to send there the worst desperadoes of the peninsula, to see +if great criminals will make good colonists and farmers. All things +considered, given the condition of those who go, it is indubitable +that the race that succeeds must know how to defend itself and live, +so that the island may not be depopulated again.--_Rizal_. + +[128] Samar. This proves contrary to the opinion of Colin, who places +Tendaya in Leite.--_Rizal_. + +[129] Southeastern part of Samar.--_Rizal_. + +[130] Colin says, however, that they did tattoo the chins and +about the eyes [_barbas y cejas_]. The same author states also that +the tattooing was done little by little and not all at once. "The +children were not tattooed, but the women tattooed one hand and +part of the other. In this island of Manila the Ilocos also tattooed +themselves, although not so much as did the Visayans." The Negritos, +Igorrotes, and other independent tribes of the Filipinas still tattoo +themselves. The Christians have forgotten the practice. The Filipinas +used only the black color, thus differing from the Japanese, who +employ different colors, as red and blue, and carry the art to a +rare perfection. In other islands of the Pacific, the women tattoo +themselves almost as much as the men. Dr. Wilhelm Joest's _Tätowiren +Narbenzeichnen und Körperbemahlen_ (Berlin, 1887) treats the matter +very succinctly.--_Rizal_. + +[131] This is a confused statement, after what just precedes it and +according to the evidence of Father Chirino (see _Vol_. XII, chapter +vii). Morga must mean that they wore no cloak or covering when they +went outside the house, as did the Tagáls (both men and women), who +used a kind of cape.--_Rizal_. [This is the sense in which Stanley +understood and translated this passage.] + +[132] _Gûbat_, grove, field, in Tagál. _Mangubat_ [so printed in +the text of Rizal's edition] signifies in Tagál "to go hunting, +or to the wood," or even "to fight."--_Rizal_. + +[133] "At the arrival of the Spaniards at this island (Panay)" says +San Agustín, "it was said to have more than 50,000 families. But +they decreased greatly ... and at present it has about 14,000 +tributarios--6,000 apportioned to the crown, and 8,000 to individual +encomenderos." They had many gold-mines, and obtained gold by +washing the sand in the Panay River; "but instigated by the outrages +received from the alcaldes-mayor," says the same historian, "they +have ceased to dig it, preferring to live in poverty than to endure +such troubles."--_Rizal_. + +[134] This entire paragraph is omitted in the Rizal edition. In the +original it is as follows: + +_La Lengua de todos, los Pintados y Bicayas, es vna mesma, por do se +entienden, hablando y escriuiendo, en letras y caratores que tienen +particulares, que semejan á los Arabigos, y su comun escribir entre +los naturales, es en hojas de arboles, y en cañas, sobre la corteza; +que en todas las islas ay muchas, de disforme grueso los cañutos, +y el pie es vn arbol muy grueso y maciço_. + +[135] This difference is no greater than that between the Spanish, +Portuguese, and Italian.--_Rizal_. + +[136] See Chirino (_Relacion de las islas Filipinas_) _Vol_. XII, +chapters xv-xvii. His remarks, those of Morga, and those of other +historians argue a considerable amount of culture among the Filipino +peoples prior to the Spanish conquest. A variety of opinions have been +expressed as to the direction of the writing. Chirino, San Antonio, +Zúñiga, and Le Gentil, say that it was vertical, beginning at the +top. Colin, Ezguerra, and Marche assert that it was vertical but in +the opposite direction. Colin says that the horizontal form was adopted +after the arrival of the Spaniards. Mas declares that it was horizontal +and from left to right, basing his arguments upon certain documents +in the Augustinian archives in Manila. The eminent Filipino scholar, +Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera has treated the subject in a work entitled +"_Contribucion para el estudio de los antiguos alfabetos filipinos_" +(Losana, 1884). See Rizal's notes on p. 291 of his edition of Morga. + +[137] This portion of this sentence is omitted in Stanley. + +[138] Báhay is "house" in Tagál; _pamamáhay_ is that which is in the +interior and the house. _Bahandin_ may be a misprint for _bahayín_, +an obsolete derivative.--_Rizal_. + +[139] Cf. this and following sections with Loarca's relation, _Vol_. V, +of this series; and with Plasencia's account, _Vol_. VII, pp. 173-196. + +[140] Timawá.--_Rizal_. + +[141] The condition of these slaves was not always a melancholy +one. Argensola says that they ate at the same table with their masters, +and married into their families. The histories fail to record the +assassination for motives of vengeance of any master or chief by +the natives, as they do of encomenderos. After the conquest the evil +deepened. The Spaniards made slaves without these pretexts, and without +those enslaved being Indians of their jurisdiction--going moreover, +to take them away from their own villages and islands. Fernando de los +Rios Coronel, in his memorial to the king (Madrid, 1621) pp. 24-25, +speaks in scathing terms of the cruelties inflicted on the natives +in the construction of ships during the governorship of Juan de +Silva. A letter from Felipe II to Bishop Domingo de Salazar shows +the awful tyranny exercised by the encomenderos upon the natives, +whose condition was worse than that of slaves.--_Rizal_. + +[142] For remarks on the customs formerly observed by the natives of +Pampanga in their suits, see appendix to this volume. + +[143] This fundamental agreement of laws, and this general uniformity, +prove that the mutual relations of the islands were widespread, and the +bonds of friendship more frequent than were wars and quarrels. There +may have existed a confederation, since we know from the first +Spaniards that the chief of Manila was commander-in-chief of the +sultan of Borneo. In addition, documents of the twelfth century that +exist testify the same thing.--_Rizal_. + +[144] This word must be _sagigilid_ in its Tagál form. The root _gílid_ +signifies in Tagál, "margin," "strand," or "shore." The reduplication +of the first syllable, if tonic, signifies active future action. If +not tonic and the suffix _an_ be added, it denotes the place where +the action of the verb is frequently executed. The preposition _sa_ +indicates place, time, reference. The atonic reduplication may also +signify plurality, in which case the singular noun would be _sagílid_, +_i.e._, "at the margin," or "the last"--that is, the slave. Timawá +signifies now in Tagál, "in peace, in quietness, tranquil, free," +etc. _Maginoo_, from the root _ginoo_, "dignity," is now the title of +the chiefs; and the chief's reunion is styled _kaginoóhan_. Colin says, +nevertheless, that the Chiefs used the title _gat_ or _lakan_, and the +women _dayang_. The title of _mama_ applied now to men, corresponds +to "uncle," "Señor," "Monsieur," "Mr.," etc.; and the title _al_ +of women to the feminine titles corresponding to these.--_Rizal_. + +[145] _Namamahay_ (from _bahay_, "house"), "he who lives in his own +house." This class of slaves, if they may be so called, exists even +yet. They are called _kasamá_ (because of being now the laborers of a +capitalist or farmer), _bataan_ ("servant," or "domestic"), _kampon, +tao_, etc. + +[146] This class of slavery still exists [1890] in many districts, +especially in the province of Batangas; but it must be admitted that +their condition is quite different from that of the slave in Greece or +Rome, or that of the negro, and even of those made slaves formerly by +the Spaniards. Thanks to their social condition and to their number in +that time, the Spanish domination met very little resistance, while +the Filipino chiefs easily lost their independence and liberty. The +people, accustomed to the yoke, did not defend the chiefs from +the invader, nor attempt to struggle for liberties that they never +enjoyed. For the people, it was only a change of masters. The nobles, +accustomed to tyrannize by force, had to accept the foreign tyranny, +when it showed itself stronger than their own. Not encountering love +or elevated feelings in the enslaved mass, they found themselves +without force or power.--_Rizal_. + +[147] _Inasawa_, or more correctly _asawa_ (consort).--_Rizal_. + +[148] This dowry, if one may call it so, represented to the parents +an indemnity for the care and vigilance that they had exercised in +their daughter's education. The Filipina woman, never being a burden +to any one (either to her parents or to her husband), but quite the +contrary, represents a value, whose loss to the possessor must be +substituted.... The Tagál wife is free, and treated with consideration; +she trades and contracts, almost always with the approbation of her +husband, who consults her in all his acts. She takes care of the money, +and educates the children, half of whom belong to her...--_Rizal_. + +[149] _Bigay-káya_, "to give what one can," "a voluntary offering, +a present of good will" ... This _bigay-káya_ devolved entire +to the married couple, according to Colin, if the son-in-law was +obedient to his parents-in-law; if not, it was divided among all the +heirs. "Besides the dowry, the chiefs used to give certain gifts to +the parents and relatives, and even to the slaves, which were great +or less according to the rank of the one married." (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[150] This good custom still exists, ... although it is gradually +passing away.--_Rizal_. + +[151] Such is the law throughout most parts of Asia; in Siam the +woman becomes free without having children. It is only in America that +fathers could and did sell their own children into slavery.--_Stanley_. + +[152] This condition of affairs and the collection of usury is true +still [1890]. Morga's words prove true not only of the Indian, but also +of the mestizos, the Spaniards, and even of various religious. So far +has it gone that the government itself not only permits it, but also +exacts the capital and even the person to pay the debts of others, as +happens with the _cabeza de barangay_ [head of a barangay].--_Rizal_. + +[153] The _tam-tam_ and the _pum-piang_ are still used.--_Rizal_. + +[154] The early Filipinos had a great horror of theft, and even the +most anti-Filipino historian could not accuse them of being a thievish +race. Today, however, they have lost their horror of that crime. One +of the old Filipino methods of investigating theft was as follows: +"If the crime was proved, but not the criminal, if more than one was +suspected ... each suspect was first obliged to place a bundle of +cloth, leaves, or whatever he wished on a pile, in which the thing +stolen might be hidden. Upon the completion of this investigation +if the stolen property was found in the pile, the suit ceased." The +Filipinos also practiced customs very similar to the "judgments of +God" of the middle ages, such as putting suspected persons, by pairs, +under the water and adjudging guilty him who first emerged.--_Rizal_. + +[155] The Filipino today prefers a beating to scoldings or +insults.--_Rizal_. + +[156] From _bago_, new, and _tao_, man: he who has become a +man.--_Rizal_. + +[157] In speaking of a similar custom in Australia, Eyre (_Central +Australia_, i, p. 213), says: "This extraordinary and inexplicable +custom must have a great tendency to prevent the rapid increase of the +population."--_Stanley_. [Stanley does not translate this paragraph +of the text.] + +[158] It appears that the natives called _anito_ a tutelary genius, +either of the family, or extraneous to it. Now, with their new +religious ideas, the Tagáls apply the term _anito_ to any superstition, +false worship, idol, etc.--_Rizal_. + +[159] Others besides Morga mention oratories in caves, where the idols +were kept, and where aromatics were burned in small brasiers. Chirino +found small temples in Taitay adjoining the principal houses. [See +_Vol_. XII. of this series, chapter xxi.] It appears that temples were +never dedicated to _bathala maykapal_, nor was sacrifice ever offered +him. The temples dedicated to the _anito_ were called ulañgo.--_Rizal_. + +[160] San Agustín says that hell was called _solad_, and paradise, +_kalualhatian_ (a name still in existence), and in poetical language, +_ulugan_. The blest abodes of the inhabitants of Panay were in the +mountain of Madias.--_Rizal_. + +[161] Cf. the "wake" of the Celtic and Gaelic peasants. Cf. also the +North-American Indian burial ceremonies, and reverence paid to the +dead, in _Jesuit Relations_, i, p. 215; ii, pp. 21, 149; viii, p. 21; +x, pp. 169, 247, 283-285, 293; xiii, 259; xxi, 199; xxiii, 31; lxv, +141; etc. + +In the Filipino burials, there were mourners who composed panegyrics +in honor of the dead, like those made today. "To the sound of this +sad music the corpse was washed, and perfumed with storax, gum-resin, +or other perfumes made from tree gums, which are found in all these +woods. Then the corpse was shrouded, being wrapped in more or less +cloth according to the rank of the deceased. The bodies of the more +wealthy were anointed and embalmed in the manner of the Hebrews, +with aromatic liquors, which preserved them from decay.... The +burial-place of the poor was in pits dug in the ground under their +own houses. After the bodies of the rich and powerful were kept and +bewailed for three days, they were placed in a chest or coffin of +incorruptible wood, adorned with rich jewels, and with small sheets +of gold in the mouth and over the eyes. The coffin was all in one +piece, and the lid was so adjusted that no air could enter. Because +of these precautions the bodies have been found after many years, +still uncorrupted. These coffins were deposited in one of three +places, according to the inclination and arrangement of the deceased, +either on top of the house among the treasures ... or underneath it, +but raised from the ground; or in the ground itself, in an open hole +surrounded with a small railing ... nearby they were wont to place +another box filled with the best clothes of the deceased; and at +meal-time they set various articles of food there in dishes. Beside +the men were laid their weapons, and beside the women their looms or +other implements of work" (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[162] _Kasis._ This is another instance of the misapplication of this +Arabic term, which means exclusively a Christian priest.--_Stanley_. + +[163] This custom has not fallen into disuse among the Filipinos, +even among the Catholics.--_Rizal_. + +Lieutenant Charles Norton Barney, of the medical department of the +U. S. Army, has an article in _Journal_ of the Association of Military +Surgeons for September, 1903, on "Circumcision and Flagellation +among the Filipinos." In regard to circumcision he states that it +"is a very ancient custom among the Philippine _indios_, and so +generalized that at least seventy or eighty per cent of males in the +Tagál country have undergone the operation." Those uncircumcised at +the age of puberty are taunted by their fellows, and such are called +"_suput_," a word formerly meaning "constricted" or "tight," but now +being extended to mean "one who cannot easily gain entrance in sexual +intercourse." The "operation has no religious significance," nor is +it done for cleanliness, "but from custom and disinclination to be +ridiculed," probably [as Morga proves] having been learned from the +Moros. The friars were unable to check the custom. Among the Tagáls +the operation is called "_tuli_," and the method of circumcising +is described at length. The author derives his information from a +mestizo and a full-blooded native. The custom is mentioned by Foreman. + +[164] Appellation given to their ecclesiastical sages by Mahometans. + +[165] See the king's decree granting this coat-of-arms, in _Vol_. IX, +pp. 211-215, with two representations of the coat-of-arms. + +[166] Convents occupy almost one-third part of the walled +city.--_Rizal_. + +[167] The walls did not even have any moats then; these were dug after +the English invasion of 1762. The walls were also rearranged at that +time, and perfected with the lapse of time and the needs that arose +in the city.--_Rizal_. + +[168] Rizal misprints _al cabo del lienço_ as _al campo del lienzo_. + +[169] Now [1890] the gates of the city are open all night, and in +certain periods, passage along the streets and through the walls is +allowed at all hours.--_Rizal_. + +[170] This powder-mill has several times changed its site. It was +afterward near Maalat on the seashore, and then was moved to Nagtahá, +on the bank of the Pasig.--_Rizal_. + +[171] Probably on the same site where the great Tagál cannon-foundry +had formerly stood, which was burned and destroyed by the Spaniards +at their first arrival in Manila. San Agustin declares the Tagál +foundry to have been as large as that at Málaga.--_Rizal_. + +[172] The Rizal edition omits the words, _muy grande y autorizada, +capilla aparte, camara del sello real_. + +[173] The treasury building. The governor's palace was destroyed +in 1863.--_Rizal_. + +[174] The Audiencia and cabildo buildings were also destroyed, but +the latter has been rebuilt.--_Rizal_. + +[175] The Rizal edition misprints _sacristan_ as _sacristías_. + +[176] This is the largest convent in Manila.--_Rizal_. + +[177] Among the Jesuits, that part of a college where the pensioners +or boarders live and receive their instruction. + +[178] This college of San José was founded in 1601, although the royal +decree for it had been conceded in 1585. The number of collegiates to +enter was thirteen, among whom was a nephew of Francisco Tello and +a son of Dr. Morga. From its inception Latin was taught there. In +a suit with the College of Santo Tomás, the Jesuits obtained a +favorable decision; and it was recognized as the older institution, +and given the preference in public acts. The historians say that at +its inauguration the students wore bonnets covered with diamonds and +pearls. At present [1890] this college, after having moved from house +to house, has become a school of pharmacy attached to Santo Tomás, +and directed by the Dominican rector.--_Rizal_. + +[179] After many varying fortunes, this institution has wholly +disappeared.--_Rizal_. + +[180] The Confraternity of Mercy [_Hermandad de la Misericordia_] +was founded in 1594, by an ecclesiastic named Juan Fernández de +León.--_Rizal_. + +[181] San Juan de Dios [St. John of God].--_Rizal_. + +[182] Better, Maalat. The Spaniards pronounced this later +Malate. There lived the chief Tagáls after they were deprived of +their houses in Manila, among whom were the families of Raja Matanda +and Raja Soliman. San Augustín says that even in his day many of the +ancient nobility dwelt there, and that they where very urbane and +cultured. "The Men hold various positions in Manila, and certain +occupations in some of the local public functions. The women make +excellent lace, in which they are so skilfull that the Dutch women +cannot surpass them." This is still true of the women.--_Rizal_. + +[183] Now the town of Paco.--_Rizal_. + +[184] _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. ii, tit. xv, ley xi, defines +the district of the Audiencia and states certain perogatives of the +governor and auditors as follows: "In the city of Manila, in the +island of Luzon, capital of the Felipinas, shall reside our royal +Audiencia and Chancillería, with a president who shall be governor and +captain-general, four auditors, who shall also be alcaldes of criminal +cases, one fiscal, one alguacil-mayor, one lieutenant of the grand +chancillor, and the other ministers and officials necessary. It shall +have as its district the said island of Luzon, and all the rest of the +Filipinas, the archipelago of China and its mainland as yet discovered +and to be discovered. We order the governor and captain-general of +the said islands and provinces and president of the royal Audiencia +in them, to hold personal charge in peace and war of the superior +government of all the district of the said Audiencia, and to make the +provisions and concessions in our royal name, which in accordance with +the laws of this _Recopilación_ and of these kingdoms of Castilla, +and with the instructions and powers that he shall get from us, he +should and can make. In things and matters of importance that arise in +the government, the said president governor shall discuss them with +the auditors of the said Audiencia, so that they, after consulting, +may give him their opinion. He, after hearing them, shall take what +course is most advisable to the service of God and to ours, and the +peace and quiet of that province and community." Felipe II, Aranjuez, +May 5, 1583; Toledo, May 25, 1596, in ordinance of the Audiencia; +Felipe IV in this _Recopilación._ + +[185] The original is _canongias, raciones, y medias raciones_, +which literally refers to the office or prebend instead of the +individual. We retain the above terms as expressing the persons who +held these prebends. + +[186] Literaly, the original translates "in the islands of Sebu, +Cagayan, and Camerines." + +[187] This is so changed now [1890] and the employees so increased in +number, that the annual expenses amount to more than 2,000,000 pesos, +while the intendant's salary is 12,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[188] This city has disapeared from the map and from the earth. An +inconsiderable town named Lal-ló occupies its site. It is still +[1890], however, named as the appointment of the bishopric of Bigan, +the actual residence of the bishop.--_Rizal_. + +[189] An attempt was made to supply the lack of prebends in the +cathedral cities of the Philippines by the following law: "Inasmuch as +the bishops of the churches of Nueva Cáceres, Nueva Segovia, and of the +Name of Jesus of the Filipinas Islands should have men to assist them +in the pontifical acts, and the bishops should have all the propriety +possible in their churches, and divine worship more reverence; and +inasmuch as there are no tithes with which a few prebendaries can be +sustained in the churches: therefore our governor of those islands +shall appoint to each of the said churches two ecclesiastics of good +life and example, who shall aid and assist the bishop in the pontifical +acts, and in all else relating to divine worship. He shall assign +them a certain modest sum for their support from our royal treasury, +so that with that they may for the present serve the churches, until +there be more opportunity for endowing them with prebendaries and +providing other necessary things." Felipe III, San Lorenzo, October 5, +1606. _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. i, tit. vi, ley xviii. + +[190] The Rizal edition omits a considerable portion of this +paragraph. The omission is as follows: _para guarda del puerto, y +defensa de la ciudad, con bastante guarnicion de soldados de paga, a +orden del alcalde mayor, capitan a guerra de la prouincia que reside +en la ciudad. Sera la poblazon, de dozientos vezinos Españoles, +con casas de madera, tiene Cabildo, de dos alcaldes ordinarios, +ocho rejidores, alguazil mayor y sus oficiales_. + +[191] Now [1890] of slight importance. Of its former grandeur there +remain only 1,000 inhabitants, with a parochial house, a justice's +house, a prison, and a primary school.--_Rizal_. + +[192] Vigan or Bigan.--_Rizal_. + +[193] Legazpi also had two secular priests, Juan de Vivero and Juan +de Villanueva, who had part in the first conversions.--_Rizal_. + +[194] The Jesuits preceded the Dominicans seven years as missionaries +to the Filipinas. The first Jesuits came over with Domingo de Salazar, +the first bishop, and his Dominican associate.--_Rizal_. + +[195] _Visita_: here meaning a district which has no resident +missionary, but is visited by religious from some mission station, +on which the visita is therefore dependent. + +[196] Cf. with the musical ability of the Filipinos that displayed by +the North American Indians, as described in _The Jesuit Relations_, +vols. vi, p. 183; xviii, p. 161; xxiii, p. 213; xxvii, p. 117; xxxi, +p. 219; xxxviii, pp. 259, 263; etc. + +[197] Chirino (chapter vii) mentions the apportionment, by the king, of +distinct districts to the different orders. The Augustinian authorities +in Mexico granted permission to those of their order going to the +Philippines to establish themselves wherever they wished in the islands +(see _Vol_. II, pp. 161-168), and the latter exercised the omnimodo +[i.e., entire] ecclesiastical authority, as conceded by the popes, +until the arrival of the Franciscans in 1577. Papal concessions +probably marked out the districts as apportioned by the king. + +[198] Morga refers, with his characteristic prudence, to the great +question of diocesan visits, which commenced with Fray Domingo +de Salazar, and which could not be ended until 1775, in the time +of Anda--thanks to the energy of the latter and the courage of +Archbishop Don Basilio Sancho de Santa Justa y Rufina, when after +great disturbances they succeeded in subjecting the regular curas to +the inspection of the bishops. Morga, however, shows that he did not +approve the claims of the religious to independence, but does not +dare to state so distinctly.--_Rizal_. + +[199] The Augustinians received also one-fourth part of the tribute +from the villages while they were building churches; and 200 pesos +fuertes [_i.e._, ten-real pieces] and 200 cavans [the cavan equals +25 gantas, or 137 Spanish libras] of cleaned rice for four religious +who heard confessions during Lent. Fifty cavans of cleaned rice per +person seems to us too much. It results that each friar consumes 12 +1/2 libras of rice or 27 chupas [the chupa is 1/8 ganta or 3 litros] +daily, thirteen times as much as any Indian.--_Rizal_. + +[200] _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. vi, tit. vii, ley xvi, contains the +following in regard to the native chiefs: "It is not right that the +Indian chiefs of Filipinas be in a worse condition after conversion; +rather should they have such treatment that would gain their affection +and keep them loyal, so that with the spiritual blessings that God +has communicated to them by calling them to His true knowledge, +the temporal blessings may be joined, and they may live contentedly +and comfortably. Therefore, we order the governors of those islands +to show them good treatment and entrust them, in our name, with the +government of the Indians, of whom they were formerly the lords. In +all else the governors shall see that the chiefs are benefited justly, +and the Indians shall pay them something as a recognition, as they did +during the period of their paganism, provided it be without prejudice +to the tributes that are to be paid us, or prejudicial to that which +pertains to their encomenderos." Felipe II, Madrid, June 11, 1594. + +[201] The _gobernadorcillo_ ["little or petty governor"]. + +[202] _Bilangõ_ signifies today in Tagál "the act of imprisoning," +and _bilanguan_ "the prison."--_Rizal_. + +[203] For good expositions of local government in modern times, see +Bowring, _Visit to the Philippine Isles_ (London, 1859), pp. 87-93; and +Montero y Vidal, _Archipiélago Filipino_ (Madrid, 1886), pp. 162-168. + +[204] These are now [1890] made in Spanish.--_Rizal_. + +[205] Names of petty officers: the former the name of an +officer in oriental countries; the second signifying one who +commands. Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera (_Costumbres de los Tagalos_, +Madrid, 1892, p. 10, note 1) says the word dato is now unused by +the Tagáls. _Datu_ or _datuls_ primitively signified "grandfather," +or "head of the family," which was equivalent to the head of the +barangay. This name is used in Mindanao and Joló to designate certain +chiefs. + +[206] A later law in _Recopilación de leyes_ (lib. vi, tit. viii, ley +xi) regulates the encomienda--giving power as follows: "The governor +and captain-general of Filipinas shall apportion the encomiendas, +in accordance with the regulations to worthy persons, without having +other respect than to the service of God our Lord, and our service, +the welfare of the public cause, and the remuneration of the most +deserving. Within sixty days, reckoned from the time that he shall +have heard of the vacancy, he shall be obliged to apportion them. If +he does not do so, the right to apportion them shall devolve upon +and pertain to our royal Audiencia of those islands, and we order +the Audiencia to apportion them, paying heed to the laws, within six +days, and to avail itself of the edicts and diligences issued by the +governor without other new ones. In case the governor shall not have +issued edicts and diligences, the Audiencia shall issue them and make +the provision within twenty days." Felipe III, Madrid, June 4, 1620. + +[207] The rapidity with which many of these encomenderos amassed +great wealth in a few years is known, and that they left colossal +fortunes at their death. Some were not satisfied with the tributes +and with what they demanded, but made false measures, and balances +that weighed twice as much as was indicated. They often exacted the +tributes in certain products only, and appraised the same at what +value they wished.--_Rizal_. + +[208] A law in _Recopilación de leyes_ (lib. vi, tit. v, ley lxv) +cites the above provision and confirms it anew: "In order to provide +instruction for certain villages of the Filipinas Islands, which did +not enjoy it, or if they had it, it was not sufficient, it was resolved +to increase the tribute, which was formerly eight reals, or its value, +per peso, to the proportion of ten Castilian reals apiece. It was +ordered that the increased amount be placed in our royal treasury, +and one-half real of it be applied to paying the obligations which had +to be met in regard to the tithes, while the one and one-half reals +would remain to pay those soldiers there and for other purposes; +in consideration of the fact that the funds necessary to send out +religious, who are employed in the preaching of the holy gospel, +are supplied from our royal treasury, and that the encomenderos were +obliged to pay for the ordinary instruction from the eight reals, +and the part of the building of churches that fell to their share, +while the Indians had the choice of paying all the tribute in money +or in products, or in both. Thus was it enacted and voted. We order +no innovation to be made in this regard, in consideration of the +welfare and conservation of those provinces and their natives, and +so that the choice of paying in money shall not occasion any lack of +products and cause sterility." Felipe II, San Lorenzo, August 1589; +Felipe III, Zamora, February 16, 1602. + +[209] The following law regulates supervision of the accounts of this +fund: "Inasmuch as, when any encomienda of the Filipinas Islands +happens to be without instruction, the fourth part of the tribute +collected by the encomendero is deposited in a box with three keys, +in order that it may be converted into benefices for the Indians; +and as it is advisable that that ordinance be executed sensibly and +properly, and that we should know the amount of it and how it is +apportioned: therefore, we order our presidents, the governors of the +Filipinas Islands, that whenever they deem it advisable to examine +the account, they shall appoint for that purpose one of the officials +of our royal treasury of those islands--the one most suitable for +it--who shall examine them. The fiscal of our royal Audiencia shall +investigate them before they are finished; and shall ask and see that +they are executed with the care that the matter requires in regard +to their items, charges, articles, and balances, and whatever else +is advisable. He shall advise our president and governor of it all, +so that he may assist him in what may be necessary, and advise us of +the result." Felipe III, Madrid, June 4, 1620, in _Recopilación de +leyes_, lib. i, tit. xiii, ley xiv. + +[210] The bull here referred to was issued by Gregory XIV, and dated +April 18, 1591. The seventh section reads as follows: "Finally, +since, as we have learned, our very dear son in Christ, Philip, +Catholic King of the Spains, on account of the many deceits wont to +be practised therein, has forbidden any Spaniard in the aforesaid +Philippine Islands to dare to take, or have, or hold any slaves, +or servants, even by right of just and unjust war, or of purchase, +or by whatsoever other title, or pretext; although some, despite the +edict, or mandate, of King Philip himself, still keep the same slaves +in their power: therefore in order that, as is befitting to reason +and equity, the Indians themselves may freely and safely without +any fear of bondage come and go to their Christian doctrinas, and to +their own homes and possessions, we order and command all and singular +the persons living in the same islands, of whatsoever state, degree, +condition, order, and rank they may be, in virtue of holy obedience and +under pain of excommunication, on the publication of these presents, +in accordance with the edict, or mandate of the said King Philip, +to release wholly free, without deceit and guile, whatsoever Indian +slaves and servants they may have, or hold; nor ever for the future +in any manner to take or keep captives, or servants."--[Translated +from the original by _Rev. T. C. Middleton_, O.S.A.] + +[211] This [1890] has disappeared from legislation, although the +personal services for España are still continued, and are fifteen +days.--_Rizal_. + +[212] _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. vi, tit. xii, ley xii, treating of +personal services, reads as follows: "The religious and the ministers +of the instruction, and the alcaldes-mayor of the Filipinas Islands +have a weekly repartimiento of Indians which they call _tanores_, so +that the Indians may serve them without pay; and besides the villages +contribute to them the fish necessary to them on Fridays, which is +against reason and justice. We order the governor and captain-general, +the Audiencia, and any other of our justices, to stop and not allow +this personal service and contribution, so that the villages shall +in no manner perform it, and we declare the villages free from any +obligation that they have or may have." This law is dated Madrid, +March 17, 1608. + +[213] Taal was one of the villages where the most rigging was made +for the royal ships.--_Rizal_. + +[214] This word _reales_ is omitted in the Rizal edition. + +[215] A comparatively early law (_Recopilación de leyes_, lib. vi, +tit. i, ley xv), prohibits the forcible removal of the natives for +expeditions of conquest from one island to another. It is as follows: +"We order that the Indians in the Filipinas Islands be not taken +from one island to another forcibly in order to make incursions, and +against their will, unless it be under very necessary circumstances, +and paying them for their work and trouble. They shall be well treated +and receive no injury." Felipe II, Madrid, November 7, 1574. + +[216] In Java also the Dutch restrict Europeans from roaming about +the country; this is a good regulation for the protection of the +inhabitants.--_Stanley_. + +[217] Stanley praises these regulations; Rizal deplores them, as +keeping the men in authority out of touch with the people. + +[218] _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. iv, tit. x, ley vii, has the +following law, dated Madrid, March 17, 1608: "The governor and +captain-general of Filipinas shall for the present appoint the +magistracy [_regimiento_] of the city of Manila, choosing persons +who shall prove to be suitable for the office and zealous for the +service of God our Lord, and for ours; and he shall not remove them +without our special order." + +[219] Many royal decrees related to playing cards. The monopoly +ceased to exist perhaps before the government monopoly on betel was +initiated.--_Rizal_ (in part). + +[220] In 1890 he received 12,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[221] The prebend, in Spanish cathedrals, superior to a canonry. + +The following laws (xvi and xvii, respectively) as to the appointments +of vacant prebends, are found in _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. i, +tit. vi. + +"Because of the great distance from these kingdoms to the Filipinas +Islands and the inconvenience that might result from the prebends +falling vacant without any provision being made until we present those +who shall take them, we order the governor and captain-general of the +said islands that, when dignidades, canonries, and other prebends in +the metropolitan church become vacant, he shall present other persons +of the sufficiency and characteristics required, so that they may +serve in place of their predecessors, until we provide persons for +them. They shall receive the stipend that their predecessors shall have +received. The governor shall observe the rules made by the laws of this +titulo in his presentations." Felipe II, Guadalupe, March 26, 1580. + +"We order our governors of the Filipinas Islands, and charge the +archbishops of Manila, that when any prebends of that church become +vacant, they send us three nominations for each one, instead of one +only, with very minute advice of their sufficiency, learning, degrees, +and all other qualities that are found in those proposed, so that +after examination, we may appoint the one most suitable." Felipe III, +Lerma, June 28, 1608. + +[222] In 1890 the Filipinas were paying 36,670 pesos annually for +one dean, four dignitarios, five canons, four racioneros, four +medio-racioneros, and other inferior helpers, including the choir, +a total of twenty-six individuals; 3,330 pesos annually is to be +added for sacristans, singers, and orchestra.--_Rizal_. + +[223] Their salary amounted to from 750 to 1,000 pesos. Now [1890] +the salary of each bishop is 6,000 pesos, with two father assistants +at 100 to 150 pesos per month.--_Rizal_. + +[224] Thus in original, but it is carelessly worded; for the Society +of Jesus is not one of the mendicant orders. + +[225] All of the orders held property and had regular means of revenue, +later; while the Dominicans held enormous property in both the islands +and at Hong Kong.--_Rizal_. + +[226] The following law is from _Recopilación de leyes_ (lib. iii, +tit. x, ley xiv): "The governor and captain-general of the Filipinas +Islands shall be careful to reward the soldiers who shall have +served us there, and their sons, with the posts and emoluments at +his disposal, in accordance with the ordinances, and [he shall do it] +with all fairness, so that they may have some remuneration. He shall +keep in toto the laws relating to this." Felipe III, Lerma, July 23, +1605; Madrid, December 19, 1618. + +[227] _Consejeles_: men sent to service by order of a municipal +council. + +[228] The pay of various of the above officers and men in 1890 was as +follows: Filipino infantrymen, 4 pesos per month; Spanish artillerymen, +13-15 pesos, plus some céntimos, per month; Filipino artillerymen, +4 pesos, plus some céntimos, per month; captains, 1,500-1,800 pesos +per year; alféreces, 975-1,050 pesos per year; first sergeants, +European, 318-360 pesos per year--native, 180 pesos per year; +second sergeants, European, 248.06-307.50 pesos per year--native, +156 pesos per year; first corporals, European, 189.56-202 pesos per +year--native, 84 pesos per year; second corporals, European, 174-192 +pesos per year--native corporals, 72 pesos per year; the _segundo cabo_ +[lieutenant-commander], 12,000 pesos per year; sargento-mayor _de +plaza_ (now lieutenant-colonel), 225 pesos per month; vice-admiral +[_contra-almirante, general de galeras_], 16,392 pesos per year; +frigate and ship captains, 2,700-5,760 pesos per year, according to +their duties and grades.--_Rizal_. + +The following laws from _Recopilación de leyes_ regulate the +pay of the soldiers and some of the officers, and impose certain +restrictions on the soldiers, and provide for certain appointments: +"Each soldier established in the Filipinas Islands shall be paid +eight pesos per month, each captain, fifty, each alférez, twenty, +and each sergeant, ten. The governor and captain-general of the said +islands shall give all the men of the companies thirty ducados to each +company of additional pay, as is done in other districts, providing +the additional pay of each one does not exceed ten pesos per year. We +order that all be well paid. When the governor shall provide any of +the captains, officers, or soldiers with an encomienda, or other post, +he shall not allow him to draw pay. While they draw pay they shall +not be allowed to trade or traffic, so that that occupation may not +divert or distract them from their proper exercise and employment +of war. For the same reason, no pay shall be granted to any soldier +who serves any other person, whomsoever he be." Felipe II, Añover, +August 9, 1589, clause 34 of his instructions; Felipe III, Ventosilla, +November 4, 1606; lib. iii, tit. x, ley xiii. + +"We order that when the post of general of artillery of the Filipinas +Islands becomes vacant, either by the death or promotion of its +occupant, or for any other cause, the governor and captain-general +shall not fill it without first notifying us and without our special +order for it. We permit him to appoint a captain of artillery and a +sargento-mayor, and he may assign each of them thirty pesos' pay. We +approve the increase of two pesos in the pay of the musketeers. It +is our will that the pay of the governor's captain of the guard be +increased five pesos, in addition to his fifteen pesos, and that +a like sum be granted to the commandants of forts when they have a +captain of infantry." Felipe II, clause of letter, Madrid, June 11, +1594; Felipe IV, Madrid, January 30, 1631; lib. iii, tit. v, ley iii. + +[229] A definite law, as is shown in _Recopilación de leyes_, +lib. iii. tit. iv, ley xiii, charged the viceroys of Nueva España +to send help to the Philippines. The law is as follows: "We charge +and order the viceroys of Nueva España to aid the governor and +captain-general of Filipinas on all occasions that arise, with very +special care, promptness, and diligence, with whatever the latter +shall request; and with the men, arms, ammunition, and money, that he +deems necessary for the conservation of those islands, salaries [the +original is _sueldos_, perhaps a misprint for _suelos_, signifying +'provinces' or 'districts'], presidios, and whatever else is under +his charge." Felipe III, Aranjuez, May 25, 1607. + +The two following laws impose certain restrictions on the +reënforcements sent to the Philippines from Nueva España: + +"One of the captains who shall raise men in Nueva España as +reënforcements for the Filipinas Islands, shall act as their agent +to the port of Acapulco. There he shall deliver them to the general, +or commander of the ships about to sail; but no captain shall take +passage or go to the islands with the men of his company." Felipe III, +Zamora, February 16, 1602; lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xvi. + +"Among the men sent by the viceroy, who shall go as a reënforcement +from Nueva España to Filipinas, he shall not allow, under any +circumstances, or admit, any mestizos or mulattoes, because of +the annoyances that have been experienced from them." Felipe III, +Valladolid, August 30, 1608; lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xv. + +[230] See _ante_, note 227, the citation of the law from _Recopilación +de leyes_, lib. iii, tit. x, ley xiii. + +[231] See _Vol_. XII ("Various documents relating to commerce"), +pp. 57-75. + +Bañuelos y Carrillo, in his relation to the king, says: "That the +inhabitants of the Manilas should be allowed to export as many +boat-loads as possible of the country's produce--such as wax, gold, +perfumes, ivory, and cotton cloth [_lampotes_]--which they must buy +from the natives of the country, who would thus be hindered from +selling them to the Dutch. In this way we would make those peoples +friendly, and supply Nueva España with their merchandise; and the +money taken to Manila would not leave that city.... Your Majesty +should consider that one and one-half millions in gold go to China +annually." This commerce was advantageous to the Celestial empire +alone and to certain individuals of Manila. It was fatal to España, +and harmful to the islands, whose industry was gradually perishing +like that of the metropolis.--_Rizal_. + +[232] See in _Vol_. VIII, pp. 316-318, a royal decree enforcing these +prohibitions under severe penalties. + +[233] Coarse stuff made of goat's hair, or a glossy silk stuff; +probably the latter is intended in the text. _Gorvoran_ or _gorgoran_ +is a sort of silk grogram. + +[234] This fabric is now called Piña. It is made from threads +stripped from fibers of the leaf of that plant or fruit, and which +are never longer than half a yard. It cannot be woven at all times, +as extreme heat or humidity affects the fiber. The machinery employed +is of wood, unmixed with any metal, and of rude construction. This +fabric is stronger than any other of equal fineness, and its color is +unaffected by time or washing. The pieces are generally only 1 1/2 feet +wide: the price varies from 1.s. 4d. to 2s. 6d. per yard. Piña of a +yard wide is from six reals to a dollar (of eight reals) a yard. All +the joinings of the threads are of knots made by the fingers. It is +fabricated solely by native Indians in many parts of the Philippines, +but especially in Ilo-Ilo. The use of this stuff is extensive, and +the value is estimated at 500,000 dollars or £120,000; the value of +the annual export of it to Europe for dresses, handkerchiefs, collars, +scarfs, and wristbands, which are beautifully embroidered at Manila, +is estimated at 20,000 dollars annually. (Mr. Consul Farren, January +21, 1851).--_Stanley_. + +In order to obtain the fiber of this plant, the fruit is first cut, +so that the leaf may become as long and broad as possible. When +the leaves are well developed they are torn off, and scraped with a +sharp instrument to separate the fleshy part and leave the fiber; +this is washed, dried in the sun, combed out, and classed in four +grades according to its fineness. The cloth has a peculiar softness +and delicacy; and it is said that that made formerly (one or two +centuries ago) was much finer than that made now. + +[235] _Scorzonera_ is a genus of composite plants, of numerous +species; the leaves or roots of many are used as vegetables or +salads. _S. tuberosa_ and other Eastern species have edible roots. + +[236] Delgado (_ut supra_) says that this fruit (_Diospyros kaki_, +Linn.) was brought by the Chinese traders, and called _Xi-cu_ +in their language, whence is derived the word _chiquey_. It is a +beautiful scarlet fruit, although there is another species of a +yellow color. Both are sweet and pleasant to the taste. Some of the +yellow variety were grown in the Visayas, but Delgado says the tree +is not indigenous to the islands. The fruit is shaped like an acorn +but is about as large as a lemon. The peel is soft and the interior +like honey, and it contains several seeds. The tree is wide-spreading +but not very tall. The leaves are small and almost round. _D. kaki_ +is the Chinese or Japanese persimmon; _D. virginiana_ is the American +persimmon. From other species is obtained the valuable wood called +ebony. + +[237] This must be the cloth and not the porcelain of Kaga, which +even today is so highly esteemed.--_Rizal_. + +[238] With very slight differences, this custom and ceremony is +continued to the present [1890].--_Rizal_. + +[239] "A three per cent duty was imposed in the Filipinas on +merchandise, for the payment of the troops. We order that part of the +law to be observed, but that pertaining to the other things paid from +those duties to be repealed." Añover, August 9, 1589. (Ley xxii.) + +"We ordain that the Chinese, Japanese, Siamese, Borneans, and all other +foreigners, who go to the ports of the Filipinas Islands, pay no duty +on food, supplies, and materials that they take to those islands, +and that this law be kept in the form in w, hich it may have been +introduced, and not otherwise." Añover, August 9, 1589. (Ley xxiv.) + +"On the Chinese merchandise and that from other countries, shipped to +Nueva España by way of Filipinas, an impost ad valorem tax of ten per +cent shall be collected, based on their value in the ports and regions +where the goods shall be discharged. This tax shall be imposed mildly +according to the rule, and shall be a tax additional to that usually +paid on departure both from the said Filipinas Islands and from the +provinces of Nueva España, to any other places where they may and +shall be taken." El Pardo, November 1, 1591. (Ley xxi.) + +"We order that the duty of three per cent collected in the Filipinas +Islands on the merchandise taken thither by the Chinese be increased by +another three per cent." El Pardo, November 20, 1606. (Ley xxiii.) The +above laws are from _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. viii, tit. xv. + +[240] The agave (_Agave americana_; the _maguey_ of Mexico) is found in +the Philippines, and is called _pita_, but Delgado and Blanco think +that it was not indigenous there. Its fibers were used in former +times for making the native textile called _nipis_, manufactured +in the Visayas. As used in the text, _pita_ means, apparently, some +braid or other ornament of agave fibers. + +[241] The ducado of Castilla was worth slightly more than two +pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[242] These imposts and fetters, which the products of the country +did not escape, are still [1890] in force, so that foreign markets +must be sought, since the markets of the mother-country offer no +greater advantages. According to a document of 1640, this commerce +netted the government 350,000 pesos annually.--_Rizal_. + +[243] The salary is now [1890] 40,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[244] _Recopilación de leyes_ (lib. iv, tit. i, ley v) outlines the +governor's and Audiencia's power in regard to conquests by private +individuals, as follows: "We grant permission to the governor and +president of the Filipinas Islands and its Audiencia to make contracts +for new explorations and conquests [_pacificaciones_] with persons, +who are willing to covenant to do it at their own expense and not at +that of our royal treasury; and to give them the titles of captains +and masters-of-camp, but not those of adelantados [_i.e._, governors] +and marshals. Those contracts and agreements such men may execute, with +the concurrence of the Audiencia, until we approve them, provided that +they observe the laws enacted for war, conquest, and exploration, so +straitly, that for any negligence, the terms of their contract will be +observed, and those who exceed the contract shall incur the penalties +imposed; also provided the parties shall receive our confirmation +within a brief period assigned by the governor." Felipe II, Guadalupe, +April 1, 1580; Toledo, May 25, 1596, a clause of instructions. + +[245] There are eight auditors now [1890], and their salary +has increased to 4,700 pesos, while that of the fiscal is 5,500 +pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[246] _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. v, tit. xv, ley xxviii, contains +the following on suits arising from residencias, dated Lerma, June +23, 1608: "Suits brought during the residencia against governors, +captains-general, presidents, auditors, and fiscals of our Audiencia +of Manila, and against any other officials, both civil and criminal, +shall pass in appeal and be concluded in that Audiencia, if they do +not exceed one thousand pesos of the current money." + +[247] The tributes of the Indians in the Filipinas amount to more +than 4,000,000 pesos now [1890]; and from the Chinese are derived +225,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[248] Now since there is no exploitation of gold mines, and since +the Indians have no jewels that would justify this tenth or fifth, +the Spaniards substitute for this the imposts upon property, which +amount to 105,400 pesos, and that upon industry, which amounts to +1,433,200 pesos. In 1640, the revenue from the above source [fifths or +tenths] had decreased so greatly, that only 750 pesos were collected +annually.--_Rizal_. + +[249] Import duties now [1890] amount to 1,700,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[250] Export duties now [1890] amount to 285,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[251] According to Hernando de los Rios, the Filipinas Islands could +have been self-sustaining from the beginning from their own products, +had it not been for the expeditions and adventurous conquests in the +Moluccas, Camboja, etc.... In the governorship of Don Juan de Silva, +the treasury owed, for the war in the Moluccas, more than 2,000,000 +pesos to the Indians, besides what it must have owed to the inhabitants +of Manila.--_Rizal_. + +[252] This excellent custom has entirely perished.--_Rizal_. + +"The president of our royal Audiencia of Filipinas and one auditor +of that body, shall, at the beginning of each year, examine the +accounts of our royal officials, and shall finish their examination +within the two months of January and February. On finishing their +examination they shall send a copy of them to our council for the +reason contained in the following law. Should the examination not be +finished in the said time, our officials shall receive no salary. The +auditor who shall assist in examining the accounts shall receive as +a compensation the twenty-five thousand maravedis that are ordained; +but he shall receive that amount only in that year that he shall send +the said accounts concluded to our council." Ordinance 97, Toledo, +May 15, 1596. (Ley ix.) + +"For the accounts of our royal treasury, which must be furnished in +the usual form by our officials of the Filipinas Islands annually, +during the administration of their duties, the officials shall +deliver for inventory all the books and orders pertaining to those +accounts, and all that shall be requested from them and that shall +be necessary. They shall continue the course of their administration +[of their duties] with new and similar books. These accounts shall be +concluded before the governor of those islands, and the auditor whom +the Audiencia and the fiscal of that body may appoint. In case of the +finding of any doubts and remarks it is our will that the auditor and +governor resolve and determine them, so that they may be concluded and +finished. And inasmuch as the factor and overseer must give account of +certain things in kind and products of great weight and tediousness, +we order that that account be examined every three years, and that +the concluding and settling of the doubts and remarks shall be made +in the form declared. And we order that when the said accounts of +the said islands are completed and the net balances struck, they +shall be sent to our Council of the Indias, so that the accountants +of its accounts may revise and make additions to them according to +the manner of the accountancy." Valladolid, January 25, 1605. (Ley x.) + +The above two laws are taken from _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. viii, +tit. xxix. + +[253] The Chinese engaged in agriculture and fishing now [1890] +are very few.--_Rizal_. + +[254] The Rizal edition misprints _fuerça è premio_ as _fuerza +á premio._ + +[255] The custom of shaving the head, now prevalent among the Chinese, +was imposed upon them by their Tartar conquerors. + +[256] A kind of stocking called _tabi_.--_Rizal_. + +[257] The following law was issued at Segovia July 4, 1609, and +appears in _Recopilación de leyes_, lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xviii: +"The governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands shall +ever strive to maintain friendly relations, peace, and quiet, with +the emperor of Japon. He shall avail himself, for that purpose, of +the most prudent and advisable means, as long as conditions permit; +and he shall not risk the reputation of our arms and state in those +seas and among oriental nations." + +[258] This port (established before 1540) was in Colima, Mexico, +near the present Manzanillo. It was plundered and burned by the +English adventurer Thomas Candish, on August 24-25, 1587. + +[259] Thus named because seamen and voyagers noticed especially +the lateen sails of the light vessels used by the natives of the +Marianas.--_Rizal_. + +[260] A marine fish (_Sparus auratus_), thus named because it has +spots of golden-yellow color. + +[261] A chart of the Indian Ocean, by L. S. de la Rochette +(pub. London, 1803, by W. Faden, geographer to the king) shows three +volcanoes in about 25° north latitude, and but a few degrees north +of the Ladrones. One of them is called "La Desconocida, or Third +Volcano," and the following is added: "The Manilla ships always try +to make this Volcano." + +[262] A group of islands called Shidsi To, lying in 34° 20'.--_Rizal_. + +[263] "Thirty-eight degrees" is probably an error for "twenty-eight +degrees," and these islands [the first ones mentioned in the above +sentence] would be the Mounin-Sima Islands, lying between 26° 35' +and 27° 45'; and Lot's Wife in 29° 51', and Crespo, in 32° 46', +which [latter] are supposed by the _Univers Pittoresque_ to be the +Roca de Oro [rock of gold] and the Roca de Plata of the ancient +maps.--_Stanley_. + +For these latter islands, see _Vol_. XIV, p. 272, note 45. + +[264] A fungous substance that grows in the sea, and contains signs +of life. + +[265] Probably the dogfish, a species of shark. + +[266] Most of these places can be identified on the old maps of +the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, and most of the names +are retained today. The island of Cedros is shown on a map of 1556 +(Ramusio: _Vniversale della parte del mondo nvovamente ritrovata_). The +island of Cenizas is shown, on the old maps, in about 32°, and Cedros +in about 29°. The Marias or Tres Marias Islands are Maria Madre, +Maria Magdalena, and Maria Cleofas. Cape Corrientes is south of +La Valle de Banderas and Chametla. Socatul is called Socatula and +Zocatula. An English map of 1626, engraved by Abraham Goos, shows +the town of Ciguatlan, north of Aquapulco, which may be the same as +Morga's Ciguatanejo. Los Motines cannot be identified. + +[267] Acosta in his _History of the Indies_ (Hakluyt Soc. edition, +London, 1880) says of the courses between the Philippines and New +Spain: "The like discourse is of the Navigation made into the South +sea, going from New Spaine or Peru to the Philippines or China, and +returning from the Philippines or China to New Spaine, the which is +easie, for that they saile alwaies from East to West neere the line, +where they finde the Easterly windes to blow in their poope. In the +yeere 1584, there went a shippe from Callao in Lima to the Philippines, +which sailed 2000 and 700 leagues without sight of land, and the +first it discovered was the Iland of Lusson, where they tooke port, +having performed their voiage in two moneths, without want of winde or +any torment, and their course was almost continually vnder the line; +... The returne is like vnto the voiage from the Indies vnto Spaine, +for those which returne from the Philippines or China to Mexico, +to the end they may recover the Westerne windes, they mount a great +height, vntill they come right against the Ilands of Iappon, and, +discovering the Caliphornes, they returne by the coast of New Spaine +to the port of Acapulco." + +[268] Bartolomé Leonardo de Argensola was born in 1566 of a family +of Italian origin, being the second son. Taking orders, he became +rector of Villahermosa in 1588, and chaplain to Maria of Austria, +the queen, in 1598. After the latter's death he was commissioned by +the Conde de Lemos, president of the Council of the Indias, to write +a history of the conquest of the Moluccas. He later spent some time in +the kingdom of Naples, and about 1618 was made historian of Aragón. He +died at Zaragoza in 1631. In addition to the present history, which +is noted for its excellent literary style, he wrote _Primera parte +de los anales de Aragón_ (Zaragoza, 1630) the continuation of the +_Anales of Zurita_. He was also a poet, whose poems are remarkable for +their purity of style and loftiness of sentiment; they are published, +with those of his elder brother, under the title _Rimas de Lupercio +i del doctor Bartolomé Leonardo de Argensola_ (Zaragoza, 1634). One +of the chief poems is an ode in honor of the church after the battle +of Lepanto. + +[269] The original book contains numerous side notes indicative of +the subject matter of the text. We omit such notes in our translated +extracts. + +[270] The above places are identified as follows: Cafa is the +modern Kaffa or Theodosia, a Russian seaport on the Black Sea; +Trapisonda is either the city or district of Trebizond or Tarabozan +(called by the Turks Tarabesoon, and formerly Traplezus); Barcito +(misprint for Bareito?), Lepo, and Damasco, are Beirut, Aleppo, +and Damascus respectively. + +[271] Argensola defines this title, which he also spells _sangaje_, +as equivalent to "count" or "duke," and says that it may be derived +from _senchaq,_ a Turkish word meaning "captain." + +[272] Argensola gives a description of the clove in book ii, pp. 52-54 +of his work. + +[273] The Dutch. + +[274] _Cañafístulo_: referring to the drug known as senna, which is +obtained from the leaves of several species of _Cassia_. According +to Retana (Zúñiga's _Estadismo_, ii, p. 454*) the Bisayan name for +this plant is _ibabao_ (the ancient name of Samar Island). + +[275] "Eagle" (Latin, _aguila_) is here a corruption of the Malay +name _agila_, referring to the fragrant, resinous wood of a tree +(_Aguilaria agallocha_) used for many centuries by Asiatic peoples, +especially the Chinese, for incense; it is also called "Kalambak" +and "aloes-wood." Calambuco is another species of this genus, its +wood little fragrant, but used in cabinet work (_Century Dictionary_). + +[276] True wealth and prosperity of the republic of Venice were +largely due to its preëminence in the Oriental trade, carried on by +the overland route through Asia, in caravans. By the discovery of +the Cape of Good Hope the Portuguese opened the sea-route to India, +by which the products of the East were carried to Europe more cheaply +and in greater abundance; and the decline of Venetian prestige and +wealth rapidly followed (in the sixteenth century). + +[277] This probably refers to Giovanni Pietro Maffei, a noted +Jesuit scholar and writer, and the book mentioned is his _Historiarum +Indicarum Libri xvi_ (Fiorenze, 1588). Maffei was born at Bergame about +1536, according to Moreri, but in 1533 according to Sommervogel. In +1563 he accepted the chair of rhetoric at Genoa, where he also acted +as secretary of the republic of Genoa. August 26, 1565 (Sommervogel) +he entered the Jesuit novitiate. He occupied a high place in the +order until his death at Tivoli, October 20, 1603. Besides the book +mentioned above, he wrote also a life of St. Ignatius Loyola, and a +history of the pontificate of Gregory XIII, the latter of which was +never published. His temper was irascible and his personality not +very pleasing. He strove always to maintain a pure Latin style in +his Latin writings. + +[278] Argensola, like Morga, confuses the naming of the Philippine +archipelago. + +[279] The aquatic plant commonly known as "cat-tail flag" or reed +(_Typha latifolía_). + +[280] A measure, one-third vara in length. + +[281] Small armed vessels like rafts. + +[282] This was Father Antonio Marta, a Neapolitan, and superior of +the Jesuit missions in the Malucas; with him was associated Antonio +Pereira, so prominent in the expedition of Hurtado de Mendoza. See +La Concepcion's account of Marta's services at this time (_Hist. de +Philipinas_, ii, pp. 197-204). Marta is not mentioned by Sommervogel. + +[283] See Dasmariñas's version of this proceeding, in _Vol_. VIII, +pp. 239, 294; he there states that the Indians thus taken were to be +freed at the end of three years' service. Cf. _Vol_. X, p. 214. + +[284] See letters sent by Dasmariñas and his son Luis to the king of +Camboja, as a result of this embassy, in Vol. IX, pp. 76-78 and 86, +87; and accounts of the Spanish expeditions to that country under Luis +Dasmariñas, in Vol. IX, pp. 161-180, and X, pp. 216, 217, 226-240--also +in Morga's _Sucesos_, chaps. V, VI (in Vol. XV of this series). + +[285] Punta Azufre is on the southern coast of Batangas, Luzón; at +a little distance is Punta Cazador--at the extreme southern point of +Calúmpan peninsula--probably the Caça of the text. + +[286] _Bastardo_: the large sail which is hoisted on> a galley when +there is little wind. + +[287] Cf. La Concepcion's account of Dasmariñas's expedition, in +_Hist. de Philipinas_, ii, pp. 194-212. + +[288] See accounts of this and later expeditions to conquer Mindanao, +in _Vol_. IX, pp. 181-188, 281-298; and X, pp. 53-75, 214, 215, +219-226. + +[289] A small piece of ordnance. + +[290] One of the early appellations of the strait between the northwest +point of Samar and the southeast point of Luzón, now known as San +Bernardino Strait. As it was the regular outlet for the vessels plying +between the Philippines and Nueva España, this strait was also called +Paso de Acapulco ("the Acapulco passage"). By some authorities the +meridian of San Bernardino was used as the standard, or "meridian +of departure." See San Antonio's _Chronicas_, part i, 55 (cited by +Retana in Zúñiga's _Estadismo_, ii, p. 156*; see also p. 409*). + +[291] This is an error or misprint for "Morga." + +[292] See Morga's account of this, where it appears that these were +not English, but native Moro boats. + +[293] The governor's letter is given by Argensola partly in synopsis, +and partly in direct quotation. The latter we enclose in quotation +marks. Sec in _Vol_. XIV (pp. 44-50) this letter, translated from +the MS. preserved in the Sevilla archives; that is apparently at +least a duplicate of the original letter to the Chinese official, +and one of the despatches sent to Spain by Acuña. + +[294] This Dutch commander, was Steven van der Hagen, and this his +second voyage to East Indian waters. See _Vol_. XV, appendix B. + +[295] A Portuguese pound, containing sixteen ounces. + +[296] _Anfión_: a name given to opium in the East Indies. + +[297] In the text, _funcas_; apparently a misprint for _fustas_ +or for _juncos_. + +[298] A word derived from _garra_ (of Old High German origin), +signifying "the foot of a bird" or "the paw of a beast;" _i.e._, the +anchor metaphorically "claws" the bottom of the water where it rests, +struggling to retain its hold against the force of the wind. See +Echegaray's _Diccionario general etimológico_ (Madrid, 1887-89). + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898: +Volume XVI, 1609, by H.E. Blair + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE ISLANDS *** + +***** This file should be named 15157-8.txt or 15157-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/5/1/5/15157/ + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman & the PG Distributed Proofreaders Team + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/15157-8.zip b/15157-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2bdc083 --- /dev/null +++ b/15157-8.zip diff --git a/15157.txt b/15157.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b68159 --- /dev/null +++ b/15157.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9664 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898: Volume +XVI, 1609, by H.E. Blair + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898: Volume XVI, 1609 + Explorations By Early Navigators, Descriptions Of The Islands And + Their Peoples, Their History And Records Of The Catholic Missions, + As Related In Contemporaneous Books And Manuscripts, Showing The + Political, Economic, Commercial And Religious Conditions Of Those + Islands From Their Earliest Relations With European Nations To The + Close Of The Nineteenth Century + + +Author: H.E. Blair + +Release Date: February 24, 2005 [EBook #15157] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE ISLANDS *** + + + + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman & the PG Distributed Proofreaders Team + + + + + + The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898 + + Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and + their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions, + as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the + political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those + islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the + close of the nineteenth century, + + Volume XVI, 1609 + + + + Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair and James Alexander Robertson + with historical introduction and additional notes by Edward Gaylord + Bourne. + + + + + + + + + + + +CONTENTS OF VOLUME XVI + + + + Preface + Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas (_concluded_). Antonio de Morga; + Mexico, 1609. + Conqvista de las Islas Malvcas. Bartolome Leonardo de + Argensola; Madrid, 1609. + Bibliographical Data + Appendix: Customs of the Pampangas in their lawsuits. Juan + de Plasencia, O.S.F.; [1589?] + + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + + Title-page of _Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas_ (Mexici ad + Indos, 1609), another edition of Morga's work; photographic + reproduction of the facsimile presented in Zaragoza's edition + (Madrid, 1887); from copy in possession of Edward E. Ayer, + Chicago, which is supposed to be the only copy extant of + Zaragoza's edition. + View of corcoa (the vessel known as "caracoa"); photographic + facsimile of engraving in John Stevens's _Collection of Voyages + and Travels_ (London, 1711), i.--in Argensola's "Discovery + and conquest of the Molucco and Philippine Islands," p. 61; + from copy in library of Wisconsin Historical Society. + Autograph signature of Antonio de Morga; photographic facsimile + from MS. in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla. + Title-page of Conqvista de las Islas Malvcas, by Bartolome + Leonardo de Argensola (Madrid, 1609); photographic facsimile, + from copy in library of Harvard University. + + + + + +PREFACE + +In the present volume is concluded the notable work by Morga, _Sucesos +de las Islas Filipinas_, which was begun in _Vol_. XV. The reader is +referred to the preface of that volume for some account of the book, +and of the manner in which it is presented in this series. Another +book notable in the history of the Philippines is that of Argensola, +_Conqvista de las Islas Molvcas_ (Madrid, 1609). In presenting +here this work, the Editors follow the plan which proves to be +more or less necessary with many of the printed early histories of +the islands--that of translating in full only such parts of the +book as relate directly to the Philippines, and are of especial +value or importance; and furnishing a brief synopsis of all matter +omitted, in order that the reader may survey the book as a whole, +and understand the relations and connections of the parts that +are presented in full with those that are synopsized. This method +is rendered necessary by the limitations of this series in regard +to space, especially as most of the old histories--as Aduarte's, +San Agustin's, and La Concepcion's--are exceedingly voluminous; +and, moreover, devote much space to the affairs of Japan, China, +and other countries outside the Philippines. All matter of this sort +must of course, be omitted; and much of what remains is more useful +for annotations, or is relatively unimportant for publication. The +Editors consider, as do many other persons interested in this series, +that it is desirable to present (especially in the early period of +the Philippine history) the larger part of these documents from the +manuscript and hitherto unpublished material largely conserved in +foreign archives; and that the needs of students and investigators +will thus be better served than by occupying the valuable and limited +space of this series with complete translations of books which can be +found in large American libraries. The location of all these will be +noted, so far as is possible, in the volume devoted to bibliographical +information at the end of this series; meanwhile the needs of most +readers will be suitably met by the synopses of omitted matter and the +free use of such works as those of La Concepcion and San Antonio in +annotations. The Editors purpose to present a few of these histories, +especially in the earlier period, in very full form, so far as they +cover Philippine history; for these are original sources, from which +later writers obtained much of their material. These methods render +this series unusually rich in valuable historical material, all +carefully selected, and much of it greatly condensed by the excision +of extraneous, irrelevant, and unimportant matter. The parts thus +omitted and synopsized will be, as heretofore, indicated by enclosing +the synopses in brackets. + + + +Continuing his narrative, Morga describes his voyage to Mexico, +whither he goes (1603) to be a member of the Audiencia there. He then +relates the events of the Chinese uprising in Luzon in that year, +which has been fully described in previous volumes of this series; +and his picturesque although plain narrative casts new light upon that +episode. Many Spaniards in Manila are so alarmed by this danger that +they remove, with all their households and property, to Nueva Espana; +but one of the ships carrying them is lost at sea, and the other is +compelled, after great injury and loss, to return to Manila--a serious +calamity for the colony there. The governor does his best to fortify +the city, and reenforcements and supplies are provided for him from +Nueva Espana. Bishop Benavides dies (1605). Friars from the islands +go to Japan, but the emperor of that country is offended at their +preaching, and advises Acuna to restrain them. In the summer of 1605 +arrive supplies and men from Nueva Espana, and Acuna proceeds with his +preparations for the expedition against the Dutch in the Moluccas. In +the following spring he sets out on this enterprise, conducting it +in person; Morga describes this naval campaign in detail. Ternate is +captured by the Spaniards without bombardment, and with little loss to +themselves. The fugitive king of the island is persuaded to surrender +to the Spaniards and become a vassal of Felipe. Several other petty +rulers follow his example and promise not to allow the Dutch to engage +in the clove trade. Acuna builds a new fort there, and another in +Tidore, leaving Juan de Esquivel as governor of the Moluccas, with +a garrison and several vessels far their defense, and carrying to +Manila the king of Ternate and many of his nobles, as hostages. During +Acuna's absence a mutiny occurs among the Japanese near Manila, which +is quelled mainly by the influence of the friars. The governor dies, +apparently from poison, soon after his return to Manila. The trade +of the islands is injured by the restrictions laid upon it by the +home government; and the reduction of Ternate has not sufficed to +restrain the Moro pirates. The natives of the Moluccas are uneasy and +rebellious, especially as they have a prospect of aid from the Dutch, +who are endeavoring to regain their lost possessions there. Morga cites +a letter from a Spanish officer at La Palma, recounting the purpose +and outcome of van Noordt's expedition to the Indian archipelago. + +The historical part of Morga's account ends here; and the final +chapter is devoted to a description of the islands and their people, +the customs and religious beliefs of the natives, and the condition at +that time of the Spanish colony and the city of Manila. He describes +the principal islands of the Philippine group, beginning with Luzon; +the various races of inhabitants--Moros, Negritos, and Visayans: +their mode of dress, their occupations and industries, their habits +of life; their weapons, their ships and boats; the trees and fruits of +the islands; the animals and birds, both wild and tame; the reptiles, +fishes, and other creatures; and various plants. Among these is the +buyo (or betel); the habit of chewing it has become universal among the +Spaniards, of all classes, and poison is often administered through +its medium. Various means and methods of poisoning are described, +as well as some antidotes therefor. Some account is given of the +gold mines and pearl fisheries, and of other products of the country +which form articles of commerce. Morga describes the two great lakes +of Luzon (Bombon and Bai), Manila and its harbor and approaches, and +other principal ports, with some neighboring islands; and gives some +account of the Visayan people and the larger islands inhabited by them, +and of the tides in the archipelago. Then follows an interesting and +detailed account of the Filipino peoples, their language, customs, +beliefs, etc. The language used in Luzon and other northern islands +is different from that of the Visayas; but all the natives write, +expressing themselves fluently and correctly, and using a simple +alphabet which resembles the Arabic. Their houses, and their mode +of life therein, arc fully described; also their government, social +organization, and administration of justice. The classes and status +of slaves, and the causes of enslavement are recounted. Their customs +in marriages and dowries, divorces, adoption, and inheritance are +described; also in usury, trading, and punishment for crimes. The +standard of social purity is described by Morga as being very low; +yet infamous vices were not indigenous with them, but communicated by +foreigners, especially by the Chinese. The natives of Luzon appear +to be superior, both intellectually and morally, to the Visayan +peoples. Their religious beliefs and practices are recounted by Morga, +who naturally ascribes these to the influence of the devil. He also +narrates the entrance of Mahometanism into the islands, and how it +was checked by the coming of the Spaniards. + +Morga next sketches the condition at that time of Spanish colonies +in the islands. He describes the city of Manila in detail, with +its fortifications, arsenals, government and municipal buildings, +cathedral, and convents; also the seminary of Santa Potenciana, and +the hospitals. There are six hundred houses, mostly built of stone, +within the walls, and even more in the suburbs; "and all are the +habitations and homes of Spaniards." All the people, both men and +women, are clad and gorgeously adorned in silks; and nowhere is there +greater abundance of food, and of other necessaries of human life, +than in Manila. Morga enumerates the dignitaries, ecclesiastical +and civil, who reside in the city; and mentions it as the center +and metropolis of the archipelago. He then briefly describes the +other Spanish settlements in the Philippines; and mentions in their +turn the various orders and their work there, with the number of +laborers in each. He praises their efforts for the conversion, +education, and social improvement of the Indians. He defines the +functions of both the civil and the ecclesiastical authorities, +and the policy of the government toward the natives; and describes +the application and results in the Philippines of the encomienda +system imported thither from America. He deprecates the permission +given to the Indians for paying their tributes in kind or in money, +at their option; for it has led to their neglecting their former +industries, and thus to the general damage of the country. Slavery +still exists among them, but the Spaniards have been forbidden to +enslave the natives. Personal services of various sorts are due +from the latter, however, to their encomenderos, to the religious, +and to the king, for all of which they receive a moderate wage; and +all other services for the Spaniards are voluntary and paid. Close +restrictions are laid upon the intercourse of the Spaniards with +natives. Various information is given regarding appointments to +office, residencias, elections, town government, and finances; also +of the ecclesiastical organization, expenses, and administration, +as well as of the incomes of the religious orders. Morga recounts +the numbers, character, pay, and organization of the military and +naval forces in the islands. The bulk of the citizens are merchants +and traders, commerce being the chief occupation and support of the +Spanish colony. Manila is a market for all the countries of Eastern +Asia, from Japan to Borneo. The China trade is restricted to the +inhabitants of the Philippines; Morga describes its nature and extent, +and the manner in which it is conducted, as well as the character +and methods of the Chinese traders. A similar account is given of the +trade carried on with the Philippines by the Japanese, Borneans, and +other neighboring peoples, and of the shipment to Nueva Espana of the +goods thus procured. This last commerce is "so great and profitable, +and easy to control, that the Spaniards do not apply themselves to, +or engage in, any other industry," and thus not only they neglect to +avail themselves of and develop the natural resources of the country, +but the natives are neglecting and forgetting their former industries; +and the supply of silver in the country steadily flows out of it and +into the hands of infidels. Morga enumerates the officials, revenues, +and expenditures of the colonial government. As its income is too small +for its necessary expenses, the annual deficit is made up from the +royal treasury of Nueva Espana. But this great expense is incurred +"only for the Christianization and conversion of the natives, for +the hopes of greater fruits in other kingdoms and provinces of Asia." + +The large extent of the Chinese immigration to the islands is +disapproved by Morga, as unsafe to the Spaniards and injurious to the +natives. Some Chinese are needed for the service of the Spaniards, +for all the trades are carried on by them; but the number of Chinese +allowed to live in the islands should be restricted to those who are +thus needed. Morga describes the character, dress, mode of life, +and settlements of the Chinese near Manila; they are cared for in +religious matters by the Dominican friars. The Christian Chinese live +apart from the heathens, in a settlement of some five hundred people; +Morga has but a poor opinion of even these converts. Some account is +also given of the Japanese who have settled in Manila; Morga commends +them, and states that they prove to be good Christians. + +He ends his work by a detailed account of the navigation and voyage +to and from the Philippines. The Mexican port of departure for this +route has been removed from Navidad to Acapulco. Morga describes the +westward voyage; the stop at the Ladrone Islands, and the traffic +of the natives with the ships; and the route thence, and among the +Philippine Islands. The return route to Mexico is much more difficult +and dangerous; for the winds are varying and not always favorable, +and the ship must change its course more frequently, and go far north +to secure favoring winds, there encountering cold weather. These severe +changes cause much suffering, and even death; and the vessel makes this +voyage without once touching land until it reaches Acapulco, a period +of five or six months. Morga also describes the voyage to Spain by +way of Goa and the Cape of Good Hope, which also is long and dangerous. + + + +Argensola writes a history of "the conquest of the Malucas," and +begins by describing the islands thus named, their inhabitants, and +the customs, mode of dress, and language of the people. He relates +the current stories of their origin and of their early intercourse +with Occidental peoples, mainly through the spice trade. The earlier +expeditions of the Portuguese to the Moluccas arouse the hostility of +the natives; and so much difficulty and expense to the government is +thus occasioned that his councilors advise Felipe II to abandon the +Philippines and Moluccas, as not worth so much cost. This he refuses +to do, on account of the necessity and duty of converting the pagans +in those lands--a decision confirmed also by Felipe III. Argensola +enumerates the various arguments pro and con regarding the retention +of the islands by Spain, which he justifies for the sake of converting +the heathen. The points thus far given are those of the brief synopsis +which results from our examination of books i-iv in the _Conqvista_, +Turning to book v, we find a brief outline of the conquest of the +Philippines by Legazpi, their peoples, their chief products, and their +fauna. The expedition of Penalosa to conquer Ternate is described; +it proves a failure, for various causes. The king of Spain sends the +"invincible armada" against England (1588), desiring to check the +inroads of Northern heretics against Spanish commerce in the Orient; +but that fleet is defeated, and dispersed. Santiago de Vera also +sends an expedition against Ternate, but it also is a failure. One +of the princes that island asks for Spanish aid to gain its royalty +for himself--offering, in return, to become a vassal of Spain; but +his death prevents any further arrangement of this sort. Gomez Perez +Dasmarinas undertakes an expedition for the conquest of the Moluccas, +of which and of his tragic end a full account is given in book vi, +furnishing much interesting information thereon which is not elsewhere +to be obtained. Dasmarinas drafts rowers from among the Filipino +natives and the Chinese, by force; this causes much resentment among +them. He obtains full reports of affairs in the Moluccas, and advice +regarding the conduct of the campaign, from the Jesuits in those +islands. Dasmarinas sets out on this expedition (October 17, 1594), +his own galley being manned by Chinese rowers. These, being harshly +treated, mutiny, and murder all the Spaniards on the galley save two +(October 25), a friar and the governor's secretary. The governor's +death renders necessary the appointment of a temporary successor to his +office; this is his son, Luis Perez Dasmarinas. The murderers return +to Luzon, with armed vessels, hoping to find the country defenseless +and conquer it; but the forces at Manila are sufficient to overawe +the Chinese. + +At this juncture, Langara, king of Camboja, asks for aid from the +Spaniards; and Dasmarinas sends for this purpose an expedition under +command of Gallinato. The Spaniards slay the usurper of the Cambojan +throne; this dignity is offered to Gallinato, but he refuses it, and +Ruiz and Velloso replace the rightful heir on the throne. Dasmarinas +himself undertakes another expedition to Camboja, at his own cost; +but he is driven by storms to the Chinese coast, some of his ships are +wrecked, and another is destroyed, with most of its crew, by Malays +at Camboja. These disasters put an end, for the time, to any further +attempts against Ternate. + +Argensola relates the exploits of Figueroa and his successors in +subduing the Mindanaos, who are aided by the king of Ternate, as +being in a sense his vassals. Felipe II dies (1598), and for a time +the affairs of Moluccas are neglected. Book vii mainly relates to +Dutch voyages to the Eastern Archipelago; the presence of the Dutch +encourages the Ternatans to keep up their resistance to the Spaniards +and Portuguese. Governor Acuna arrives in the Philippines (May, 1602), +and for some time is occupied with the internal affairs of the colony +and the establishment of amicable relations with the Japanese. These +matters being settled, he turns his mind toward the conquest of +the Moluccas; and he cooeperates with the expedition under Furtado +de Mendoza, which had been sent for this purpose from India. The +combined fleets meet with temporary successes at Ternate, but are +finally compelled to abandon the undertaking. The home government +finally decides that it must be again and effectively prosecuted; +and that Acuna himself shall conduct another expedition against the +Moluccas. The royal decree for this (dated June 20 1604) is given +in full. + +Argensola relates the great fire in Manila and the Chinese +insurrection, both in 1603; he gives some information thereon which +is not found in other accounts. This revolt, although quelled, +causes great disturbance of business and industry, and much want +and distress, in Manila, which had so largely been dependent +upon its Chinese population. Soon afterward reenforcements and +supplies are received there from Mexico. In February, 1605, a Dutch +fleet appears in the Eastern archipelago, and captures Amboina and +Tidore. Portuguese fugitives from Tidore inform Acuna of the purpose +of the Dutch to attack the galleons on the Mexican route and perhaps +other Spanish interests; and to drive out the Spaniards from that +quarter of the world. He immediately sends more men to the garrisons +in the Pintados, and takes other precautions. The arrival of numerous +reenforcements at Manila encourages him and checks the insolence of +surrounding peoples. The Dutch aid the Ternatans, while Acuna makes +vigorous preparations for the expedition to be made against these +foes. He sails with over three thousand men, in thirty-six vessels, +from Iloilo on January 5, 1606. The flagship is wrecked at La Caldera; +the other vessels mistake their course, and do not reach the Moluccas +until late in March. They besiege Ternate, and finally carry it by +assault; the city and fort are pillaged by the soldiers. Afterward the +king is induced to surrender and Acuna makes a treaty with him. The +king surrenders his forts and restores all captives; delivers up any +Dutchmen or Spanish renegades who may be in Ternate; and gives up +the villages of Christian natives in adjacent islands. Acuna leaves a +strong garrison in Ternate, and carries the king and other captives +to Manila. A few weeks after his return, Acuna dies--by poison, +according to popular rumor. + +To this volume is appended (apropos of an allusion by Morga) an +interesting account of the ancient customs observed by the natives of +Pampanga in the administration of justice. These differed, according to +the social status of the parties concerned, and the kind of crime; but, +in general, certain fixed amounts were paid as the penalties for most +crimes, and in some cases the penalty was life for life. If the culprit +could not pay the fine, he was usually sold as a slave. Parricide and +infanticide were apparently unknown among them. Marriages, divorces, +inheritances, enslavements, disputes, etc., are all considered in this +account, obtained by the Franciscan Juan de Plasencia from the natives. + + +_The Editors_ +June, 1904. + + + + + +SUCESOS DE LAS ISLAS FILIPINAS (_concluded_) + +By Dr. Antonio de Morga. Mexico: at the shop of Geronymo Balli in +the year 1609; printed by Cornelio Adriano Cesar. + +SOURCE: The translation is made from the Harvard copy of the original +printed work. + +TRANSLATION: This is made by Alfonso de Salvio, Norman F. Hall, +and James Alexander Robertson. + + + + +EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS. [1] + + +Chapter Seventh (_concluded_) + +On the tenth [of July] [2] of the same year, the vessels +"Espiritu-Santo" and "Jesus Maria" left the port of Cabit en route +for Nueva Espana--in the wake of two smaller vessels, which had been +despatched a fortnight before--with the Filipinas merchandise. Don Lope +de Ulloa was their commander, while Doctor Antonio de Morga left those +islands in the almiranta, the "Santo Espiritu," to fill the office of +alcalde of the court of Mexico. Before leaving the bay, both vessels +were struck head on by a storm, and went dragging upon the coast, +buffeted by the heavy seas and winds, and amid dark and tempestuous +weather, from three in the afternoon until morning of the next day, +notwithstanding that they were anchored with two heavy cables in the +shelter of the land, and their topmasts struck. Then they grounded +upon the coast, in La Pampanga, ten leguas from Manila. The storm +lasted for three more consecutive days. Consequently it was regarded +as impossible for those vessels to sail and make their voyage, +inasmuch as the season was now well advanced, and the vessels +were very large and heavily laden, and were deeply imbedded in the +sand. Advice was immediately sent overland to Manila, whence were +brought several Chinese ships, cables, and anchors. By dint of the +great efforts exerted, both vessels, each singly, were fitted with +tackle and cables, which were rigged at the stern. There awaiting the +high tide, the ships were drawn, by force of capstan and men, stern +first for more than one legua through a bank of sand, upon which +they had struck, until they were set afloat, on the twenty-second +of July, St. Magdelen's day. Immediately they set sail again, +as the vessels had sustained no injury, nor sprung any leak; and +they made their voyage and navigation, under light winds, to the +coast of Nueva Espana. A violent south-southwest gale, accompanied +by heavy showers, hail, and cold, struck the ship "Espiritu Sancto" +on the tenth of November, in forty-two degrees, and within sight of +land. The wind was blowing obliquely toward the shore, upon which the +vessel was almost wrecked several times. The vessel suffered distress +and lost its rigging, while the crew was worn out by the voyage and +with the cold. The storm lasted until November twenty-second. On the +morning of that day, while the ship was in the trough of the waves, +and with topmasts shipped, it was struck by a squall of rain and hail, +accompanied by great darkness. A thunderbolt, descending the mainmast, +struck the vessel amidships. It killed three men besides wounding and +maiming eight others; it had entered the hatches, and torn open the +mainhatch, with a blaze of light, so that the interior of the ship +could be seen. Another thunderbolt fell down along the same mast +among the entire crew, and stunned sixteen persons, some of whom +were speechless and unconscious all that day. It left the vessel +by the pump-dale. The next day, the wind veered to north-northeast, +whereupon the ship set sail, and went coasting along the land, with +sufficient winds until the nineteenth of the month of December, +when it made port at Acapulco. There were found the two smaller +vessels that had sailed first from Manila. Three days later, General +Don Lope de Ulloa entered the same port of Acapulco, in the ship +"Jesus Maria." That vessel had sustained the same storms as the ship +"Espiritu Sancto." From the time when the two vessels had separated, +on sailing out of the channel of Capul, in the Filipinas Islands, +they had not sighted one another again during the entire voyage. + +In the same year six hundred and three, Governor Don Pedro de Acuna +sent the ship "Sanctiago" from Manila to Japon, with merchandise. It +was ordered to make its voyage to Quanto, in order to comply with the +desire and wish of Daifusama. As news had been already received of the +death of Fray Geronimo de Jesus, four of the most important religious +of his order in Manila--namely, Fray Diego de Bermeo [3] (who had been +provincial), Fray Alonso de la Madre de Dios, Fray Luys Sotello, [4] +and one other associate--sailed on that vessel for the said kingdom. + +As soon as the ships "Jesus Maria" and "Espiritu Sancto" sailed for +Nueva Espana, and the ship "Sanctiago" with the religious for Japon, +there was more time to discuss further the matter started by the coming +of the Chinese mandarins. For finding themselves unoccupied with other +matters, fear of the Sangleys became universal, and the suspicions that +were current that the Sangleys were about to commit some mischievous +outbreak. This the archbishop and some religious affirmed and told, +publicly and privately. At this time, a considerable number of Chinese +were living in Manila and its environs. Some of them were baptized +Christians living in the settlements of Baibai and Minondoc, [5] on the +other side of the river, opposite the city. Most of them were infidels, +occupied and living in these same settlements and in the shops of +the parian in the city; [they were employed] as merchants and in all +other occupations. The majority of them were fishermen, stonecutters, +charcoal-burners, porters, masons, and day-laborers. Greater security +was always felt in regard to the merchants, for they are the better +class of people, and those who are most interested, because of their +property. So great security was not felt about the others, even though +they were Christians; because, as they are a poor and covetous people, +they would be inclined to any act of meanness. However, it was always +thought that it would be difficult for them to cause any commotion, +unless a strong fleet came from China, on which they could rely. Talk +continued to increase daily, and with it suspicion; for some of the +Chinese themselves, both infidels and Christians, in order to prove +themselves friends of the Spaniards, and clean from all guilt, even +told the Spaniards that there was to be an insurrection shortly, +and other similar things. Although the governor always considered +these statements as fictions and the exaggerations of that nation, +and did not credit them, yet he was not so heedless that he did not +act cautiously and watch, although with dissembling, for whatever +might happen. He took pains to have the city guarded and the soldiers +armed, besides flattering the most prominent of the Chinese and the +merchants, whom he assured of their lives and property. The natives +of La Pampanga and other provinces near by were instructed beforehand +to supply the city with rice and other provisions, and to come to +reenforce it with their persons and arms, should necessity arise. The +same was done with some Japanese in the city. As all this was done +with some publicity, since it could not be done secretly, as so many +were concerned, one and all became convinced of the certainty of the +danger. Many even desired it, in order to see the peace disturbed, +and to have the opportunity to seize something. [6] From that time, +both in the city and its environs, where the Sangleys were living +scattered, these people began to persecute the Sangleys by word and +deed. The natives, Japanese and soldiers of the camp took from them +their possessions and inflicted on them other ill-treatment, calling +them dogs and traitors, and saying that they knew well that they +meant to rebel. But they said they would kill all the Sangleys first, +and that very soon, for the governor was preparing for it. This alone +was sufficient to make it necessary for the Sangleys to do what they +had no intention of doing. [7] Some of the most clever and covetous +set themselves to rouse the courage of the others, and to make +themselves leaders, telling the Sangleys that their destruction was +sure, according to the determination which they saw in the Spaniards, +unless they should anticipate the latter, since they [the Sangleys] +were so numerous, and attack and capture the city. They said that +it would not be difficult for them to kill the Spaniards, seize +their possessions, and become masters of the country, with the aid +and reenforcements that would immediately come to them from China, +as soon as the auspicious beginning that they would have made in +the matter should be known. In order to do this when the time came, +it was advisable to build a fort and quarters in some retired and +strong place near the city, where the people could gather and unite, +and where arms and supplies could be provided for the war. At least +such a fort would be sufficient to assure there their lives from +the outrages that they were expecting from the Spaniards. It was +learned that the chief mover in this matter was a Christian Sangley, +an old-time resident in the country, named Joan Bautista de Vera. [8] +He was rich and highly esteemed by the Spaniards, and feared and +respected by the Sangleys. He had often been governor of the latter, +and had many godchildren and dependents. He had become an excellent +Spaniard, and was courageous. He himself, exercising duplicity and +cunning, did not leave the city, or the houses of the Spanish during +this time, in order to arouse less suspicion of himself. From there +he managed the affair through his confidants; and in order to assure +himself better of the result, and to ascertain the number of men of +his race, and to make a census and list of them, he cunningly had +each of them ordered to bring him a needle, which he pretended to +be necessary for a certain work that he had to do. These needles he +placed, as he received them, in a little box; and when he took them +out of it, he found that he had sufficient men for his purpose. They +began to construct the fort or quarters immediately at a distance of +slightly more than one-half legua from the village of Tondo, among some +estuaries and swamps, and in a hidden location. [9] They stored there +some rice and other provisions, and weapons of little importance. The +Sangleys began to gather there, especially the masses--the common +people and day-laborers; for those of the parian, and the mechanics, +although urged to do the same, did not resolve to do it, and remained +quiet, guarding their houses and property. The restlessness of the +Sangleys daily continued to become more inflamed. This, and the +advices given to the governor and the Spaniards, kept the latter +more anxious and apprehensive, and made them talk more openly of the +matter. The Sangleys, seeing that their intention was discovered, and +that delay might be of so great harm to them, determined, although the +insurrection was planned for St. Andrew's day, the last of November, +to anticipate that day, and to lose no more time. On Friday, the +third day of the month of October, the eve of St. Francis, they +collected very hurriedly in the above-mentioned fort; consequently, +by nightfall, there were two thousand men in it. Joan Bautista de +Vera--a thief in the role of an honest man, since he was the leader +and organizer of the treason--went immediately to the city and +told the governor that the Sangleys had risen, and that they were +collecting on the other side of the river. The governor, suspecting +the mischief, had him immediately arrested and carefully guarded; +and he was afterward executed. Then, without tap of drum, the governor +ordered the companies, both of the camp and the city, to be notified, +and all to hold their arms in readiness. Very shortly after nightfall, +Don Luys Dasmarinas, who was living near the monastery and church of +Minondoc, on the other side of the river, came hurriedly to the city +to advise the governor that the Sangleys had revolted. He asked for +twenty soldiers to go to the other side [of the river], where he would +guard the said monastery. Cristoval de Axqueta, sargento-mayor of the +camp, went with these men, together with Don Luys. As the silence +of night deepened, the noise made by the Sangleys grew louder, for +they were continuing to assemble and were sounding horns and other +instruments, after their fashion. Don Luys remained to guard the +monastery, with the men brought from Manila, where he had placed +in shelter many women and children of Christian Sangleys, with the +religious. The sargento-mayor returned immediately to the city, +where he told of what was being done. The call to arms was sounded, +for the noise and shouts of the Sangleys, who had sallied out to set +fire to some houses in the country, was so great that it was thought +that they were devastating that district. The Sangleys burned, first, +a stone country-house belonging to Captain Estevan de Marquina. The +latter was living there with his wife and children; and none of them +escaped, except a little girl, who was wounded, but who was hidden +in a thicket. [10] Thence the Sangleys went to the settlement of +Laguio, [11] situated on the shore of the river, and burned it. They +killed several Indians of that settlement, and the rest fled to the +city. There the gates were already shut and all the people, with +arms in hand, manned the walls and other suitable posts, ready for +any emergency, until dawn. The enemy, who now had a greater number +of men, retired to their fort, to make another sally thence with more +force. Don Luys Dasmarinas, who was guarding the church and monastery +of Minondoc, expected hourly that the enemy was about to attack him, +and sent a messenger to the governor to beg for more men. These were +sent him, and consisted of regulars and inhabitants of the city, +under Captains Don Tomas Brabo de Acuna (the governor's nephew), +Joan de Alcega, Pedro de Arzeo, and Gaspar Perez, by whose counsel and +advice Don Luys was to be guided on this occasion. All was confusion, +shouting, and outcry in the city, particularly among the Indians, and +the women and children, who were coming thither for safety. Although, +to make certain of the Sangleys of the parian, their merchants had +been asked to come into the city, and bring their property, they did +not dare to do so; for they always thought that the enemy would take +the city because of their great force of numbers, and annihilate the +Spaniards, and they would all be in danger. Consequently they preferred +to remain in their parian, in order to join the victorious side. Don +Luys Dasmarinas thought it advisable to go in search of the enemy +immediately with the reenforcements sent him by the governor, before +they should all assemble and present a strong front. He left seventy +soldiers in Minondoc, in charge of Gaspar Perez; while with the rest, +about one hundred and forty of the best picked arquebusiers, he +went to the village of Tondo, in order to fortify himself in the +church, a stone building. He arrived there at eleven o'clock in the +morning. The Chinese, in number one thousand five hundred, arrived +at the same place at the same time, bent on the same purpose. An +hour's skirmish took place between the two sides, as to which one +would gain the monastery. Captain Gaspar Perez came up with the +reenforcement of the men left at Minondoc. The enemy retired to his +fort, with a loss of five hundred men. Gaspar Perez returned to his +post, where Pedro de Arzeo was also stationed. Don Luys Dasmarinas, +exultant over this fortunate engagement, determined immediately to +press forward in pursuit of the enemy with his men, notwithstanding +the heat of the sun and without waiting to rest his followers. He sent +Alferez Luys de Ybarren to reconnoiter. The latter brought word that +the enemy was in great force, and near by. Although Juan de Alcega +and others requested Don Luys to halt and rest his men, and await +the governor's orders as to what was to be done, his desire not to +lose the opportunity was so great that, rousing his men with harsh +words, in order to make them follow him, he marched forward until +they reached a swamp. After leaving the swamp, they came suddenly +into a large clearing, where the enemy was stationed. The latter, +upon seeing the Spaniards, surrounded them in force on all sides, +armed with clubs, some with catans, and a few with battle-axes. Don +Luys and his men, not being able to retreat, fought valiantly, and +killed a number of Sangleys. But finally, as the latter were in so +great force, they cut all the Spaniards to pieces, only four of whom +escaped, badly wounded; and these carried the news to Manila. [12] +This result was of great importance to the Sangleys, both because so +many and the best Spanish soldiers were killed in this place, and +because of the weapons that the Sangleys took from them, and which +they needed. With these arms they flattered themselves that their +object was more certain of accomplishment. Next day, October five, +the Sangleys sent the heads of Don Luys, Don Tomas, Joan de Alcega, +and other captains to the parian; and they told the Sangleys there +that, since the flower of Manila had been killed, they should revolt +and join them, or they would immediately come to kill them. The +confusion and grief of the Spaniards in the city was so great that +it prevented them from taking the precautions and exercising the +diligence demanded by the affair. But the sight of their necessity, +and the spirit of their governor and officials made them all remain +at their posts on the walls, arms in hand. They fortified as strongly +as possible the gates of the parian and of Dilao, and all that part of +the wall where the enemy might make an assault. They mounted a piece of +artillery above each gate, and stationed there the best men, among whom +were religious of all the orders. Upon that day, Sunday, the enemy, +flushed with the victory of the preceding day and their army swelled +by the additional men that joined them, attacked the city. Burning +and destroying everything in their path, they went to the river, for +there was no vessel with which to resist them, as all those of the +fleet were in the provinces of the Pintados. They entered the parian, +[13] and furiously assaulted the city gate, but were driven back by +the arquebuses and muskets, with the loss of many Sangleys. They +went to the church of Dilao, and there assaulted the gate and walls +(which were there lower), by means of scaling-ladders, with the same +determination. But they experienced the same resistance and loss, +which compelled them, on the approach of night, to retire with great +loss to the parian and to Dilao. That whole night the Spaniards +spent in guarding their wall, and in preparing for the morrow. The +enemy passed the night in the parian and at Dilao, making carts, +mantelets, scaling-ladders, artificial fire, and other contrivances, +for approaching and assaulting the wall, and for burning the gates, +and setting fire to everything. At dawn of the next day, Monday, the +Sangleys came together with these arms and tools, and having reached +the wall with their bravest and best-armed men, attacked it with +great fury and resolution. The artillery destroyed their machines, and +caused them so great injury and resistance with it and the arquebuses, +that the Sangleys were forced to retire again to the parian and +to Dilao, with heavy loss. Joan Xuarez Gallinato, accompanied by +some soldiers and a Japanese troop, made a sally from the Dilao gate +upon the Sangleys. They reached the church, when the Sangleys turned +upon them and threw the Japanese into disorder. The latter were the +cause of all retreating again to seek the protection of the walls, +whither the Sangleys pursued them. At this juncture Captain Don Luys de +Velasco entered Manila. He came from the Pintados in a stout caracoa, +manned by some good arquebusiers, while others manned some bancas that +sailed in the shelter of the caracoa. They approached the parian and +Dilao by the river, and harassed the enemy quartered there on that and +the two following days, so that they were compelled to abandon those +positions. These vessels set fire to the parian, and burned everything, +and pursued the enemy wherever they could penetrate. The Sangleys, +upon beholding their cause waning, and their inability to attain the +end desired, resolved to retire from the city, after having lost more +than four thousand men; to advise China, so that that country would +reenforce them; and for their support to divide their men into three +divisions in different districts--one among the Tingues of Passic, the +second among those of Ayonbon, and the third at La Laguna de Bay, San +Pablo, and Batangas. On Wednesday they abandoned the city completely, +and, divided as above stated, marched inland. Don Luys de Velasco, +with some soldiers and armed Indians who came from all sides to the +relief of Manila, accompanied by some Spaniards who guided them, and +the religious from their missions, went by way of the river in pursuit +of them, and pressed them, so that they killed and annihilated the +bands bound for the Tingues of Passic and for Ayombon. The majority +and main body of the Sangleys went to La Laguna de Bay, the mountains +of San Pablo, and Batangas, where they considered themselves more +secure. Burning towns and churches, and everything in their path, they +fortified themselves in the above-mentioned sites. Don Luys de Velasco, +with seventy soldiers, continued to pursue them, killing each day a +great number of them. On one occasion Don Luys was so closely engaged +with the enemy, that the latter killed him and ten soldiers of his +company, and fortified themselves again in San Pablo and Batangas, +where they hoped to be able to sustain themselves until the arrival +of reenforcements from China. [14] + +The governor, fearful of this danger, and desirous of finishing +the enemy, and giving entire peace to the country, sent Captain +and Sargento-mayor Cristoval de Axqueta Menchaca with soldiers +to pursue and finish the enemy. This man left with two hundred +Spaniards--soldiers and volunteers--three hundred Japanese, and one +thousand five hundred Pampanga and Tagal Indians, [15] on the twentieth +of October. He was so expeditious, that with little or no loss of +men, he found the Sangleys fortified in San Pablo and Batangas, and, +after fighting with them, killed and destroyed them all. None escaped, +except two hundred, who were taken alive to Manila for the galleys. The +captain was occupied in this for twenty days, and with it the war was +ended. Very few merchants were left in Manila, and they had taken the +good counsel to betake themselves, with their possessions, among the +Spaniards in the city. At the beginning of the war there were not +seven hundred Spaniards in the city capable of bearing arms. [16] + +After the end of the war, the need of the city began, for, because +of not having Sangleys who worked at the trades, and brought in +all the provisions, there was no food, nor any shoes to wear, +not even at excessive prices. The native Indians are very far from +exercising those trades, and have even forgotten much of farming, and +the raising of fowls, cattle, and cotton, and the weaving of cloth, +which they used to do in the days of their paganism and for a long +time after the conquest of the country. [17] In addition to this, +people thought that Chinese vessels would not come to the islands +with food and merchandise, on account of the late revolution. Above +all, they lived not without fear and suspicion that, instead of +the merchant vessels, an armed fleet would attack Manila, in order +to avenge the death of their Sangleys. All conspired to sadden the +minds of the Spaniards. After having sent Fray Diego de Guevara, +prior of the monastery of St. Augustine in Manila, to the court of +Espana by way of India, with news of this event--but who was unable +to reach Madrid for three years, because of his various fortunes +in India, Persia, and Italia, through which countries he went--they +immediately sent Captain Marco de la Cueva, together with Fray Luys +Gandullo of the Order of St. Dominic, to the city of Macao in China, +where the Portuguese were living, with letters for the chief captain +and the council of that city. These letters advised the latter of +the revolt of the Sangleys, and of the result of the war, so that, +if they should hear any rumors of a Chinese fleet, they could send +word. At the same time letters were taken from the governor to the +Tutons, Aytaos, and visitors of the provinces of Canton and Chincheo, +recounting the outbreak of the Chinese, which obliged the Spaniards +to kill them. Upon their arrival at Macao, Marcos de la Cueva and +Fray Luys Gandullo found no news of a fleet, but that everything was +quiet--although the Chinese had already heard of the insurrection and +much of the result, from some Sangleys who had fled from Manila in +champans, upon that occasion. It was immediately learned in Chincheo +that these Spaniards were in Macao, whereupon Captains Guansan Sinu +and Guachan, wealthy men and usually engaged in trade with Manila, +went to look for them. Having learned the truth of the event, they +took the letters for the mandarins and promised to deliver them. They +urged other merchants and vessels of Chincheo, who were afraid, to go +to Manila that year. This was very useful, for through them much of the +necessity that the city [of Manila] was suffering was supplied. With +this result and with some powder, saltpeter, and lead which Marcos +de la Cueva had provided for the magazines, the latter left Macao, +and sailed to Manila, which he reached in May, to the universal joy +of the city over the news that he brought--which began to be verified +immediately by the coming of the fleet of thirteen Chinese vessels +bearing food and merchandise. + +In the month of June of this year six hundred and three, [18] two +vessels were despatched from Manila to Nueva Espana, under command +of Don Diego de Mendoca who had been sent that year by the viceroy, +Marques de Montesclaros, with the usual reenforcements for the +islands. The flagship was "Nuestra Senora de los Remedios" and the +almiranta "Sant Antonio." + +Many rich men of Manila, warned by the past troubles, took passage +in these vessels with their households and property, for Nueva +Espana--especially in the almiranta--with the greatest wealth that +has ever left the Filipinas. Both vessels experienced so severe +storms during the voyage, in the altitude of thirty-four degrees, +and before having passed Japon, that the flagship, without masts and +greatly lightened and damaged, put back in distress to Manila. The +almiranta was swallowed up in the sea, and no one was saved. This was +one of the greatest shipwrecks and calamities that the Filipinas have +suffered since the past ones. + +During the rest of that year and that of six hundred and five, until +the sailing of the vessels which were to go to Castilla, [19] the +governor occupied himself in repairing the city, and supplying it with +provisions and ammunition, with the special object and care that the +decision which he was awaiting from the court for making an expedition +to Maluco--of which he had been advised and warned--should not find +him so unprepared as to cause him to delay the expedition. In this +he was very successful, for at that same time, the master-of-camp, +Joan de Esquivel, had arrived in Mexico with six hundred soldiers +from Espana. In Mexico more men were being enrolled, and a great +preparation was made of ammunition, food, money, and arms, which the +viceroy sent to the governor from Nueva Espana in March of that year, +by order of his Majesty, in order that he might go to Maluco. All +this arrived safely and in due season at Manila. + +Shortly after the ships had left Manila for Nueva Espana, and those +despatched thence by the viceroy had entered, Archbishop Don Fray +Miguel de Benavides died of a long illness. His body was buried +amid the universal devotion and grief of the city. [20] At this same +time, Don Pedro de Acuna received three letters, by the ships that +continued to come from China that year, with the merchandise and +with their principal captains. They were all of the same tenor--when +translated into Castilian--from the Tuton and Haytao, and from the +inspector-general of the province of Chincheo, and were on the matter +of the insurrection of the Sangleys and their punishment. They were +as follows: + + + + + +[This letter occupies folios 113b-115a of the original edition of +Morga. We have already presented that document in our V0L. XIII, +p. 287, which is translated from a copy of the original manuscript. The +answer of Acuna to this letter will be found in V0L. XIV, in the +second document of that volume.] + + + + + +The letter of the inspector-general was written on the twelfth of +the second month--which according to our reckoning is March of the +twenty-third year of the reign of Vandel [_i.e._, Wanleh]. The eunuch's +[21] letter was written on the sixteenth of the said month and year; +and that of the viceroy, on the twenty-second of the month. + +The governor answered these letters through the same messengers, +civilly and authoritatively. He gave an explanation of the deed and +justified the Spaniards, and offered friendship and trade anew with the +Chinese. He said that their property, which had remained in Manila, +would be restored to the owners, and that those imprisoned in the +galleys would be freed in due season. First, however, he intended to +use them for the Maluco expedition, which he was undertaking. + +The entrances into various provinces of Japon by the discalced +religious of St. Francis and those of St. Dominic and St. Augustine, +continued to be made, both in the Castilian vessel itself which was +despatched that year to the kingdoms of Quanto, [22] and in other +Japanese vessels which came to Manila with the silver and flour of the +Japanese, in order to trade. This was permitted and allowed by Daifu, +now called Cubosama, who that year sent the governor, through one of +his servants, certain weapons and presents, in return for others which +the governor had sent him. He answered the latter's letter as follows: + + + _Letter from Daifusama, lord of Japon, to governor Don Pedro + de Acuna, in the year one thousand six hundred and five._ + + I received two letters from your Lordship, and all the + gifts and presents mentioned in the memorandum. Among them, + when I received them, the wine made from grapes pleased + me greatly. During former years, your Lordship requested + permission for six vessels, and last year for four, and I + always granted your request. But, what angers me greatly is + that among the four vessels that your Lordship requested was + that one called "Antonio," which made the voyage without my + orders. This was a very lawless act, and in contempt of me. Can + it be, perhaps, that your Lordship would send to Japon without + my permission any vessel that you wished? Besides this, your + Lordship and others have often negotiated about the sects + of Japon, and requested many things in regard to them. This + likewise I cannot concede; for this region is called Xincoco + [Shinkoku], or "dedicated to the idols." These have been + honored with the highest adoration from the time of our + ancestors until now, and their acts I alone cannot undo or + destroy. Consequently, it is not at all advisable that your + religion be promulgated or preached in Japon; and if your + Lordship wish to preserve friendship with these kingdoms + of Japon and with me, do what I wish, and never do what is + displeasing to me. Lastly, many have told me that many wicked + and perverse Japanese, who go to that kingdom and live there + for many years, afterward return to Japon. This makes me + very angry. Consequently, your Lordship will, in the future, + allow no one of the Japanese to come here in the vessels that + come from your country. In other matters, your Lordship shall + act advisedly and prudently, and shall so conduct affairs, + that henceforth I may not be angered on account of them. + +The governor, carrying out his dearest wish, was to make the +expedition to Terrenate in the Malucos, which should be done quickly, +before the enemy could gather more strength than he had then; for +he had been informed that the Dutch, who had seized the island +and fortress of Amboino, had done the same with that of Tidore, +whence they had driven the Portuguese who had settled therein, and +had entered Terrenate, where they had established a trading-post for +the clove-trade. Accordingly, as soon as the despatches in regard to +this undertaking arrived from Espana, in June of six hundred and five, +and the men and supplies from Nueva Espana, which were brought at the +same time by the master-of-camp, Joan de Esquivel, the governor spent +the balance of this year in preparing the ships, men, and provisions +that he deemed necessary for the undertaking. Leaving behind in +Manila sufficient force for its defense, he went to the provinces of +Pintados, where the fleet was collected, in the beginning of the year +six hundred and six. + +By the fifteenth day of the month of March, the governor had +thoroughly prepared the fleet--which consisted of five ships, four +galleys with poop-lanterns [_galeras de fanal_], three galliots, four +champans, three funeas, two English lanchas, two brigantines, one +barca chata [23] for the artillery, and thirteen fragatas with high +freeboard. There were one thousand three hundred Spaniards, counting +regulars, captains and officers, substitutes [_entretenidos_], and +volunteers. Among them were some Portuguese captains and soldiers, +under charge of the chief captain of Tidore, [24] who was at that +island when the Dutch seized it. These Portuguese came from Malaca +to serve in the expedition. There were also four hundred Indian +pioneers--Tagals and Pampangos of Manila--who went to serve at their +own cost, under their own officers, and with their own weapons. There +was a quantity of artillery of all kinds, ammunition, tools, and +provisions for nine months. [25] Don Pedro de Acuna left the point of +Hilohilo, which is near the town of Arevalo in the island of Panai, +[on the above day] with all this equipment, and coasting the island +of Mindanao, made port at La Caldera, in order to replenish his water, +wood, and other necessaries. + +The governor embarked in the galley "Santiago" and took under +his charge the other galleys and oared vessels. The ship "Jesus +Maria" acted as flagship of the other vessels, and was commanded +by the master-of-camp, Joan de Esquivel. Captain and Sargento-mayor +Cristoval de Azcueta Menchaca acted as admiral of the fleet, which, +after attending to its necessities at La Caldera, left that port. On +setting sail, the flagship, which was a heavy vessel, was unable to +leave port, and the currents drove it shoreward so that, without the +others being able to help it, it grounded. It was wrecked there, but +the crew, artillery, and a portion of its ammunition and clothing, +were saved. After setting fire to the ship, and taking what nails and +bolts they could, so that the Mindanaos could not make use of them, +the fleet continued its voyage. The galleys coasted along the island +of Mindanao, and the ships and other deep-draught vessels sailed in +the open sea, all making for the port of Talangame, in the island of +Terrenate. The vessels, although experiencing some changes of weather, +first sighted the islands of Maluco, after they had been reconnoitered +by a large Dutch ship, well equipped with artillery, which was anchored +at Terrenate. This vessel fired some heavy artillery at our vessels, +and then immediately entered the port, where it fortified itself under +shelter of the land, and with its artillery and crew and the people +of Terrenate. The master-of-camp went with his vessels to the island +of Tidore, where he was well received by the Moro chiefs and cachils; +for the king was away, as he had gone to the island of Bachan to be +married. The master-of-camp found four Dutch factors there, who were +trading for cloves. He learned from them that the ship at Terrenate +was from Holland, and was one of those which had sailed from Amboino +and seized Tidore, whence it had driven the Portuguese, and that it was +being laden with cloves. It was awaiting other vessels of its convoy, +for they had made friendship and treaties with Tidore and Terrenate, +in order to be protected against the Castilians and Portuguese. The +master-of-camp had the king of Tidore summoned immediately, and, +while awaiting Don Pedro de Acuna, rested his men and cleaned the +ships, and made gabions and other things necessary for the war. Don +Pedro de Acuna, through his pilots' fault, had gone thirty leguas +to leeward of the island of Terrenate toward the island of Celebes, +otherwise called Mateo. Recognizing that island, he returned to +Terrenate, and passing in sight of Talangame, discovered the Dutch +vessel. He tried to reconnoiter it, but after seeing that it was +harming his galleys with its artillery, and that the master-of-camp +was not there, he proceeded to Tidore, where he found the latter, +to the great joy of all. There they spent the remainder of the month +of March. At this juncture the king of Tidore arrived, with twelve +well-armed caracoas. He expressed joy at the governor's coming, to +whom he complained at length of the tyranny and subjection in which +he was kept by Sultan Zayde, [26] king of Terrenate, who was aided +by the Dutch. He offered to go in person to serve his Majesty in the +fleet, with six hundred men of Tidore. Don Pedro received him and +feasted him. Then, without any further delay at Tidore, or any more +concern about the ship at Talangame, he set about the chief purpose +for which they had come. On the last of March he started to return to +Terrenate. On that day he anchored in a harbor between the settlement +and the port, as did also the king of Tidore with his caracoas. That +same night the Dutch ship weighed anchor and went to Amboino. At dawn +of next day, April first, soldiers were landed with some difficulty, +with the intention of marching along the shore (which was a very close +and narrow stretch) to the fort, in order to plant the artillery, +with which to bombard it. As the governor thought that mischief would +ensue because of the narrowness and closeness of the pass, he landed +a number of pioneers on the high ground, to open another road, so +that the remainder of the army might pass, and the enemy be diverted +in several directions. By these efforts, he placed his camp under +the walls, although a great number of Terenatans came from various +directions to prevent him. The vanguard of the camp was in charge +of Joan Xuarez Gallinato and Captains Joan de Cuevas, Don Rodrigo +de Mendoca, Pasqual de Alarcon, Joan de Cervantes, Captain Vergara, +and Cristoval de Villagra, with their companies. The other captains +were in the body of the squadron. The rearguard was under command of +Captain Delgado, while the master-of-camp aided in all parts. The +army came up within range of the enemy's artillery, which suddenly +began to play. The governor came to see how the troops were formed, +and, leaving them at their post, returned to the fleet to have the +pieces brought out for bombarding, and to obtain refreshment for +the soldiers. Some high trees intervened between the troops and the +wall, in which the enemy had posted some scouts to reconnoiter the +field. They were driven down, and our own scouts posted there, who gave +advice from above of what was being done in the fort. Captain Vergara, +and after him, Don Rodrigo de Mendoca and Alarcon, went to reconnoiter +the walls, the bastion of Nuestra Senora, and the pieces mounted on +the ground there, and a low wall of rough stone which extended to +the mountain, where there was a bastion in which the wall ended. It +was called Cachiltulo, and was defended with pieces of artillery and +a number of culverins, muskets, arquebuses, and pikes; while many +other weapons peculiar to the Terenatans were placed along the wall +for its defense. Having seen and reconnoitered all this, although not +with impunity, because the enemy had killed six soldiers with the +artillery and wounded Alferez Joan de la Rambla in the knee with a +musket-ball, the Spaniards returned to the army. A trifle past noon, +a lofty site was reconnoitered, in the direction of the bastion of +Cachiltulo, whence the enemy could be attacked and driven from the +wall; and Captain Cuevas was ordered to occupy it with twenty-five +musketeers. Having done this, the enemy sent out a crowd of men +to prevent him from occupying it. A skirmish ensued, and the Moros +turned and retreated to their wall. Cuevas followed them so closely +and persisted so long, that he needed reenforcement. The scouts in +the trees gave information of what was being done, whereupon Captains +Don Rodrigo de Mendoca, Alarcon, Cervantes, and Vergara reenforced +him with their light-armed pikemen and halberdiers. They pursued +the enemy with so great rapidity and resolution that they entered +the walls behind them. However, some of the Spaniards were wounded, +and Captain Cervantes was pushed down from the wall and his legs +broken, which caused his death. Captain Don Rodrigo de Mendoca, +pursuing the enemy, who were retiring, ran inside the wall as far +as the cavalier of Nuestra Senora, while Vergara ran in the opposite +direction along the curtain of the wall to the bastion of Cachiltulo, +and went on as far as the mountain. By this time the main body of the +army had already assaulted the wall. Mutually aiding one another, +they mounted the wall and entered the place on all sides, although +with the loss of some dead and wounded soldiers. The soldiers were +stopped by a trench beyond the fort of Nuestra Senora, for the enemy +had retreated to a shed, which was fortified with a considerable number +of musketeers and arquebusiers, and four light pieces. They discharged +their arquebuses and muskets at the Spaniards, and threw cane spears +hardened in fire, and _bacacaes_, [27] after their fashion. The +Spaniards assaulted the shed, whereupon a Dutch artilleryman trying to +fire a large swivel-gun, with which he would have done great damage, +being confused did not succeed, and threw down the linstock, turned, +and fled. The enemy did the same after him, and abandoned the shed, +fleeing in all directions. Those who would do so embarked with the king +and some of his wives and the Dutch in one caracoa and four _juangas_ +[28] which they had armed near the king's fort. Captain Vergara entered +the fort immediately, but found it deserted. Don Rodrigo de Mendoca and +Villagra pursued the enemy toward the mountain for a long distance, +and killed many Moros. With this, at two o'clock in the afternoon, +the settlement and fort of Terrenate was completely gained. The +Spanish banners and standards were flung from it, without it having +been necessary for them to bombard the walls, as they had expected; +and the fort was taken at so slight cost to the Spaniards. Their dead +numbered fifteen men, and the wounded twenty more. The whole town was +reconnoitered, even its extremity--a small fort, called Limataen--which +contained two pieces of artillery, and two other pieces near the +mosque on the seashore. The loot of the place was of small importance, +for already the things of most value, and the women and children, +had been removed to the island of Moro, whither the king fled and +took refuge in a fort that he had there. Some products of that land +were found, and a great quantity of cloves. In the factory of the +Dutch were found two thousand ducados, some cloth goods and linens, +and many weapons, while in many places were excellent Portuguese and +Dutch artillery, a number of culverins and a quantity of ammunition, +of which possession was taken for his Majesty. [29] A guard was +placed over what was gained, and the place was put in a condition +for defense with some pieces taken from the fleet, while the governor +ordered and provided whatever else was advisable. + +Cachil Amuxa, the king's nephew and the greatest chief of Terrenate, +came with other cachils to make peace with the governor. He said +that he and all the Terenatans wished to be vassals of his Majesty, +and that they would have rendered homage long before, but the king +prevented them. The latter as a proud man, and, confident in his +own opinion, although he had been advised to surrender the fort to +his Majesty and render him homage, had steadily refused to do so, +having been encouraged and emboldened by the success that he had +gained upon other occasions. That was the reason that he found himself +in his present wretched condition. He offered to induce the king to +leave the fort of Moro if given assurance of life. Don Pedro de Acuna +received this Moro well, and as a Portuguese, Pablo de Lima--one of +those whom the Dutch had driven from Tidore, a man of high standing, +and well acquainted with the king--offered to accompany him, the +governor despatched them with a written passport as follows: + + + _Passport from Don Pedro de Acuna to the king of Terrenate_ + + I, Don Pedro de Acuna, governor, captain-general, and president + of the Filipinas Islands, and general of this army and fleet, + declare that, over my signature, I hereby give security of + life to the king of Terrenate, in order that he may come to + talk with me--both to him and those whom he may bring with + him--reserving to myself the disposal of all the others as + I may see fit. I certify this in his Majesty's name. And + I order that no person of this fleet molest him or any + of his possessions, and that all observe what is herein + contained. Given in Terrenate, April six, one thousand six + hundred and six. + + _Don Pedro de Acuna_ + + +Within nine days Cachilamuja and Pablo de Lima returned to Terrenate +with the king, the prince, his son, [30] and others of his relatives, +cachils and sangajes, [31] under the said passport. They placed +themselves under the governor's power, and he received them with +great affection and respect. He lodged the king and his son in a +good house in the settlement, under guard of a company. The king +restored the villages of Christians that his Majesty had possessed +in the island of Moro, when the fort of Terrenate was lost by the +Portuguese. He placed his person and kingdom in his Majesty's power, +and surrendered a quantity of muskets and heavy artillery that he had +in some forts of the said island. The governor did not despoil him +of his kingdom, but on the contrary allowed him to appoint two of his +men to govern, whose choice was to be ratified by himself. The king, +his son the prince, and their cachils and sangajes swore homage to his +Majesty. The kings of Tidore and Bachan, and the sangaje of La Bua did +the same, and covenanted and promised not to admit either the Dutch +or other nations into Maluco for the clove-trade. They promised, as +his Majesty's vassals, to go on all occasions to serve him with their +persons, men, and ships, whenever summoned by whomever commanded the +fort of Terrenate; that they would oppose no obstacles to the Moros +who wished to become Christians; that if any wicked Christian went +to their lands to turn renegade, they would surrender him; and other +suitable things. Therewith great and small were content and pleased, +since they were freed from the tyranny of the king of Terrenate. The +governor remitted to them the third part of the tributes which they +were wont to pay their king, and gave the Moros other advantages. Then +he planned a new and modern fort, in a very conspicuous and suitable +location, and began to build it. In order that the old fort might be +better defended while the new one was being completed, he reduced it +to a less size, by making new cavaliers and bastions, which he finished +and furnished with ramparts and stout gates. He commenced another fort +in the island of Tidore, on a good location near the settlement. After +placing in order whatever he judged necessary in Terrenate and Tidore, +and in the other towns and fortresses of Maluco, he returned with +his fleet to the Filipinas. He left the master-of-camp, Joan de +Esquivel, with a garrison of six hundred soldier--five hundred, +in five companies, for Terrenate--in the fort of Terrenate to act +as his assistant and as governor of Maluco; he also left there one +large forge and a number of smiths, sixty-five pioneers, thirty-five +stonecutters, two galliots, two well-armed brigantines, and crews of +rowers. The other company of soldiers [was to be stationed] in Tidore +under command of Captain Alarcon; while ammunition and provisions for +one year were left in both forts. In order to be more assured of the +[peaceful] condition of the country, he took the king of Terrenate +from it and carried him to Manila, as well as his son the prince, and +twenty-four cachils and sangajes, most of them the king's relatives, +to whom he showed every honor and good treatment. He explained to +them why he took them, and that their return to Maluco depended upon +the security and tranquillity with which the Moros should conduct +themselves in their obedience and service to his Majesty. [32] The +three Portuguese galliots returned to Malaca, taking with them the +Dutch who were in Maluco and the Portuguese captains and soldiers who +had come to take part in this expedition. The governor entered Manila +in triumph with the remainder of the fleet, on the last day of May, +six hundred and six. He was received there with acclamations of joy +and praise from the city, who gave thanks to God for so happy and +prompt result in an undertaking of so great weight and importance. + +During the governor's absence in Maluco, the royal Audiencia of +the islands governed the Filipinas. The Audiencia wished to drive +a number of Japanese from the city, for they were a turbulent +people and promised little security for the country. When this +was attempted and force employed, the Japanese resisted, and the +matter came to such a pass that they took arms to oppose it, and +it was necessary for the Spaniards to take their arms also. The +affair assumed definite proportions, and some on either side wished +to give battle. However, it was postponed by various means until, +through the efforts of certain religious, the Japanese were quieted; +and afterward as many as possible were embarked in vessels, although +they resented it greatly. This was one of the greatest dangers that +has threatened Manila, for the Spaniards were few in number, and the +Japanese more than one thousand five hundred, and they are a spirited +and very mettlesome race. Had they come to blows on this occasion, +the Spaniards would have fared ill. [33] + +The governor, upon entering Manila, took over immediately the affairs +of his government, especially the despatching of two vessels about to +sail to Nueva Espana. He was present in person in the port of Cabit +at the equipment and lading of the ships, and the embarcation of the +passengers. He was seized by some indisposition of the stomach which +compelled him to return to Manila and take to his bed. His pain and +vomiting increased so rapidly that, without its being possible to +relieve him, he died in great anguish on St. John's day, to the great +sorrow and grief of the country. Especially did the king of Terrenate +show and express his grief, for he had always received great honor +and kind treatment from the governor. It was suspected that his death +had been violent, because of the severity and the symptoms of his +illness. The suspicion increased, because the physicians and surgeons, +having opened his body, declared, from the signs that they found, +that he had been poisoned, which made his death more regrettable. [34] +The Audiencia buried the governor in the monastery of St. Augustine +at Manila, with the pomp and ostentation due to his person and +offices. Then, again taking charge of the government, the Audiencia +despatched the vessels to Nueva Espana, whence advice was sent to +his Majesty of the taking of Maluco and the death of the governor. + +The flagship, in which Don Rodrigo de Mendoca was sailing as general +and captain, reached Nueva Espana quickly with this news. The +almiranta, notwithstanding that it left the islands at the same +time, delayed more than six months. Eighty persons who perished +from disease were buried in the sea, while many others stricken by +the disease died of it upon landing at the port of Acapulco. Among +these was the licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera, auditor of Manila, +who had been appointed auditor of Mexico. + +At the arrival of these vessels, it was learned that since the death +of Don Pedro de Acuna, and the taking over of the government by the +Audiencia, no change had occurred in the affairs of the islands; +but that their commerce was restricted because of the prohibition +which forbade sending to the islands more than five hundred thousand +pesos each year of the proceeds from the sale of the merchandise in +Nueva Espana. On account of this the people were in need, as this +amount appeared little for the many Spaniards and for the extent +of the trade--by which all classes are sustained, as they have no +other resources or capital. Also, although the gaining of Maluco had +been so important for affairs in those islands themselves, and their +punishment for the reduction of the other rebels--especially those +of Mindanao and Jolo, from whom the Filipinas had received so great +injury--the desirable quiet and stability had not been secured. For +the Mindanaos and the Joloans were not yet discontinuing their +descents upon the provinces of the Pintados in their war-vessels, to +seize booty according to their custom--and this will continue until +a suitable expedition be sent against them--and Maluco affairs were +not failing to give Joan de Esquivel, the master-of-camp, sufficient +to do. He was acting as governor there and had but little security +from the natives, who, being a Mahometan people, and by nature easily +persuaded and fickle, are restless, and ready for disturbances and +wars. Daily and in different parts the natives were being incited +and aroused to rebellion; and although the master-of-camp and his +captains were endeavoring to punish and pacify them, they could not +do what was necessary to quiet so many disturbances as arose. The +soldiers were dying, and the food giving out; and the aid sent from +Manila could not arrive at the time or in so great quantity as was +requested, because of the perils of the voyage and the straits of +the royal treasury. [35] The coming of vessels to Maluco at this +time from Holanda and Zelanda was not less prejudicial to all our +interests; for the Dutch, having so great interests in the islands, +and having established their interests there so firmly, were coming +in squadrons by the India route, to recover what they had lost in +Amboino, Terrenate, and other islands. With their countenance, the +Moros were revolting against the Spaniards, who had their hands full +with them, and more so with the Dutch, for the latter were numerous, +and more dangerous enemies than the natives. + +The Dutch interest in these regions is so vast--both in the clove-trade +and that of other drugs and spices, and because they think that +they will have a gateway there for the subjugation of the whole +Orient--that, overcoming all the toil and dangers of the voyage, +they are continually coming to these islands in greater numbers and +with larger fleets. If a very fundamental and timely remedy be not +administered in this matter, it will increase to such an extent in +a short time that afterward no remedy can be applied. + +The English and Flemish usually make this voyage by way of the strait +of Magallanes. Francisco Draque [Drake] was the first to make it, +and some years later Tomas Liscander [Candish or Cavendish], who +passed by Maluco. + +Lately Oliver del Nort, a Fleming, made the voyage. The Spanish fleet +fought with his fleet amid the Filipinas Islands, at the end of the +year one thousand six hundred. In this fight, after the capture of +his almiranta (which was commanded by Lamberto Biezman) the flagship, +having lost nearly all its crew, and being much disabled, took to +flight. And as it afterward left the Filipinas, and was seen in Sunda +and the Java channels, so disabled, it seemed impossible for it to +navigate, and that it would surely be lost, as was recounted above +when treating of this. + +This pirate, although so crippled, had the good fortune to escape from +the Spaniards, and, after great troubles and hardships, he returned +to Amstradam with his ship "Mauricio," with only nine men alive, +reaching it on the twenty-sixth of August in the year six hundred +and one. He wrote the relation and the events of his voyage, and gave +plates of the battle and of the ships. This was afterward translated +into Latin and printed by Teodoro de Bri, a German, at Francfort, in +the year six hundred and two. Both relations are going the rounds, +and the voyage is regarded as a most prodigious feat and one of so +great hardships and perils. [36] + +Bartolome Perez, a pilot, gave the same news from the island of La +Palma. He, having come from England by way of Holanda, conversed +with Oliver del Nort, and the latter narrated to him his voyage +and sufferings, as mentioned by Licentiate Fernando de la Cueva in +a letter from the island of La Palma, [37] on the last of July, of +the year six hundred and four, to Marcos de la Cueva, his brother, +who was a resident of Manila, and one of the volunteers who embarked +on the Spanish flagship which fought with the pirate. This letter is +as follows. + + + I answer two of your Grace's letters in this: one dated July, + six hundred and one, and the other July, six hundred and + two. In both of them your Grace relates to me the shipwreck + that befell you and how you saved yourself by swimming. Long + before I saw your Grace's letters, I had learned of your + mishap, whereat I was very anxious and even quite grieved; + because of what was reported here, I imagined that your Grace + had a part in it. Consequently, I was singularly overjoyed + at the assurance that your Grace still possessed life and + health. Having them, one can conquer other things; and + without them human treasure has no value. By way of Flandes + (whence ships come daily to this island), I learned much, + nay, all the event, although not so minutely. For Oliver de + Nort, who was the Dutch general, with whom the engagement + occurred, arrived safely in Holanda, with eight men--and he + made nine--and without money. His purpose when he left the + rebellious states of Holanda and Zelanda, with five armed + vessels laden with merchandise--which were worth, principal + and merchandise, one hundred and fifty or two hundred thousand + ducados--was to trade and carry on commerce through the strait + (and such were his orders), in whatever parts he should + be, with friends or enemies. He was not to attack anyone, + but only to defend himself and to incline the Indians to + trade and exchange with him. All the vessels having reached + the strait together, three of them became separated there + because of storms, and must have been wrecked; for up to the + present nothing has been heard of them. Having seen himself so + abandoned, and that he could not restore his loss by trade, + or else because he did not receive a hospitable reception + from the inhabitants of Piru, he determined to exceed his + orders, and make that voyage one of plundering. Accordingly + he stationed himself at the mouth of the river to await + ships. The rest that befell, your Grace knows. Oliver de Nort + is a native of the city of Roterdam, and he reached it with + an anchor of wood. [38] He had no other with which to anchor, + nor indeed had he any other left. It is said that this is a + very heavy wood of the Indias, and he has placed it at the + door of his house, as a mark of distinction. He arrived, + as I say, with nine men, all told, very much worn out, + and as by a miracle. He has printed a book of his voyage, + with engravings of his vessels, and many other details of + what happened to him, and the hardships that they endured + in the fight and throughout the voyage, both to show his own + glory and to incite others to similar deeds. A pilot of this + island, one Bartolome Perez, was seized and taken to Inglaterra + before the peace or truce. He came through Holanda, where he + conversed at great length with Oliver. The latter told him + all that had happened to him, which is known to all, and was + discussed in this island before that voyage. Bartolome Perez + says that Oliver de Nort praised the Spaniards greatly, and + said they were the bravest men he had seen in his life. They + had gained the deck of his ship, and all the upper works, + when he cried out from below deck to set fire to the powder, + whereupon he believes that the Spaniards left for fear of + being blown up. The Dutch then had an opportunity to escape, + but so crippled were they that their reaching port seems a + miracle. The pilot says that he saw the anchor and the book, + and what pertains to the book is stated here. I have recounted + this to your Grace, because of the statements in your letter, + namely, that people considered them as lost, and so that so + singular a case may be known there. + + +Now the Dutch make the voyage more quickly and more safely, going +and coming, by way of India, but not touching at its ports or coasts, +until they reach the islands of the Javas [39]--Java major and Java +minor--and Samatra, Amboino, and the Malucas. Since they know the +district so well, and have experienced the immense profits ensuing to +them therefrom, it will be difficult to drive them from the Orient, +where they have inflicted so many losses in both spiritual and +temporal affairs. + + + +¶ _Relation of the Filipinas Islands and of their natives, antiquity, +customs, and government, both during the period of their paganism +and after their conquest by the Spaniards, and other details._ + +¶ _Chapter Eighth_ + +The islands of the eastern Ocean Sea, adjacent to farther Asia, +belonging to the crown of Espana, are generally called, by those who +navigate thither by way of the demarcation of Castilla and Castilla's +seas and lands of America, "the Western Islands;" for from the time +that one leaves Espana, he sails in the course of the sun from east +to west, until he reaches them. For the same reason they are called +"Eastern Islands" by those who sail from west to east by way of +Portuguese India, each of them circumscribing the world by voyaging +in opposite directions, until they meet at these islands, which are +numerous and of varying size; they are properly called Filipinas, +and are subject to the crown of Castilla. They lie within the tropic +of Cancer, and extend from twenty-four degrees north latitude to the +equinoctial line, which cuts the islands of Maluco. There are many +others on the other side of the line, in the tropic of Capricorn, +which extend for twelve degrees in south latitude. [40] The ancients +affirmed that each and all of them were desert and uninhabitable, [41] +but now experience has demonstrated that they deceived themselves; +for good climates, many people, and food and other things necessary +for human life are found there, besides many mines of rich metals, +with precious gems and pearls, and animals and plants, which nature +has not stinted. + +It is impossible to number all the islands--counting larger and +smaller--of this vast archipelago. Those comprised in the name and +government of Filipinas, number about forty large islands, besides +other smaller ones, all consecutive. The chiefest and best known are +Luzon, Mindoro, Tendaya, [42] Capul, Burias, Mazbate, Marinduque, +Leite, Camar, Ybabao, Sebu, Panay, Bohol, Catenduanes, Calamianes, +Mindanao, and others of less renown. + +The first island conquered and colonized by the Spaniards was +Sebu. [43] From there the conquest was started and continued in all +the neighboring islands. Those islands are inhabited by people, +natives of the same islands, called Vicayas; or by another name, +Pintados--for the more prominent of the men, from their youth, tattoo +their whole bodies, by pricking them wherever they are marked and then +throwing certain black powders over the bleeding surface, the figures +becoming indelible. But, as the chief seat of the government, and the +principal Spanish settlement, was moved to the island of Luzon--the +largest island, and that one nearest and opposite to Great China and +Japon--I shall treat of it first; for much that will be said of it is +similar in the others, to each of whose particulars and distinctive +details I shall pass in due time. + +This island of Luzon extends lengthwise, from the point and head where +one enters the Filipinas Islands (by the channel of Capul, which +lies in thirteen and one-half degrees north latitude) to the other +point in the province of Cagayan, called Cape Bojeador (and located +opposite China, in twenty degrees), more than two hundred leguas. In +some parts its width is more constricted than in others, especially in +the middle of the island, where it is so narrow that it is less than +thirty leguas from sea to sea, or from one coast to the other. The +whole island is more than four hundred leguas in circumference. + +The climates of this island are not harmonious; on the contrary, they +present a great diversity in its different districts and provinces. The +head and beginning of the island, in the region of the channel, is more +temperate in the interior, although the coasts are hot. The site of +the city of Manila is hot, for it is on the coast and is low; but in +its vicinity, quite near the city, there are districts and settlements +much cooler, where the heat is not oppressive. The same is true of the +other head of the island, opposite China, named Cagayan. The seasons +of the year--winter and summer--are contrary to those in Europe; for +the rains generally last in all these islands from the month of June +until the month of September, and are accompanied by heavy showers, +whirlwinds, and storms on sea and land. The summer lasts from October +to the end of May, with clear skies and fair winds at sea. However, +the winter and rainy season begins earlier in some provinces than +in others. [44] In Cagayan winter and summer almost coincide with +those of Espana, and come at the same seasons. + +The people inhabiting the province of Camarines and almost as far as +the provinces of Manila, in this great island of Luzon, both along +the coast and in the interior, are natives of this island. They are +of medium height, with a complexion like stewed quinces; and both +men and women are well-featured. They have very black hair, and +thin beards; and are very clever at anything that they undertake, +keen and passionate, and of great resolution. All live from their +labor and gains in the field, their fishing, and trade, going from +island to island by sea, and from province to province by land. + +The natives of the other provinces of this island as far as Cagayan are +of the same nature and disposition, except that it has been learned +by tradition that those of Manila and its vicinity were not natives +of this island, but came thither in the past and colonized it; and +that they are Malay natives, and come from other islands and remote +provinces. [45] + +In various parts of this island of Luzon are found a number of +natives black in color. Both men and women have woolly hair, and their +stature is not very great, although they are strong and robust. These +people are barbarians, and have but little capacity. They possess no +fixed houses or settlements, but wander in bands and hordes through +the mountains and rough country, changing from one site to another +according to the season. They support themselves in certain clearings, +and by planting rice, which they do temporarily, and by means of the +game that they bring down with their bows, in the use of which they +are very skilful and certain. [46] They live also on honey from the +mountains, and roots produced by the ground. They are a barbarous +people, in whom one cannot place confidence. They are much given to +killing and to attacking the settlements of the other natives, in which +they commit many depredations; and there is nothing that can be done +to stop them, or to subdue or pacify them, although this is always +attempted by fair or foul means, as opportunity and necessity demand. + +The province of Cagayan is inhabited by natives of the same complexion +as the others of the island, although they are better built, and more +valiant and warlike than the others. They wear their hair long and +hanging down the back. They have been in revolt and rebellion twice +since the first time when they were pacified; and there has been plenty +to do, on different occasions, in subduing them and repacifying them. + +The apparel and clothing of these natives of Luzon before the +entrance of the Spaniards into the country were generally, for the +men, certain short collarless garments of _cangan_, sewed together +in the front, and with short sleeves, and reaching slightly below +the waist; some were blue and others black, while the chiefs had +some red ones, called _chinanas_. [47] They also wore a strip of +colored cloth wrapped about the waist, and passed between the legs, +so that it covered the privy parts, reaching half-way down the thigh; +these are called _bahaques_. [48] They go with legs bare, feet unshod, +and the head uncovered, wrapping a narrow cloth, called _potong_ [49] +just below it, with which they bind the forehead and temples. About +their necks they wear gold necklaces, wrought like spun wax, [50] +and with links in our fashion, some larger than others. On their arms +they wear armlets of wrought gold, which they call _calombigas_, +and which are very large and made in different patterns. Some wear +strings of precious stones--cornelians and agates; and other blue +and white stones, which they esteem highly. [51] They wear around +the legs some strings of these stones, and certain cords, covered +with black pitch in many foldings, as garters. [52] + +In a province called Zambales, they wear the head shaved from the +middle forward. On the skull they have a huge lock of loose hair. [53] +The women throughout this island wear small jackets [_sayuelos_] +with sleeves of the same kinds of cloth and of all colors, called +_varos_. [54] They wear no shifts, but certain white cotton garments +which are wrapped about the waist and fall to the feet, while other +dyed cloths are wrapped about the body, like kirtles, and are very +graceful. The principal women have crimson ones, and some of silk, +while others are woven with gold, and adorned with fringe and other +ornaments. They wear many gold necklaces about the neck, calumbigas +on the wrists, large earrings of wrought gold in the ears, and rings +of gold and precious stones. Their black hair is done up in a very +graceful knot on the head. Since the Spaniards came to the country many +Indians do not wear _bahaques_, but wide drawers of the same cloths and +materials, and hats on their heads. The chiefs wear braids of wrought +gold containing many designs, while many of them wear shoes. The chief +women also wear beautiful shoes, many of them having shoes of velvet +adorned with gold, and white garments like petticoats. + +Men and women, and especially the chief people, are very clean and neat +in their persons and clothing, and of pleasing address and grace. They +dress their hair carefully, and regard it as being more ornamental when +it is very black. They wash it with water in which has been boiled +the bark of a tree called _gogo_. [55] They anoint it with aljonjoli +oil, prepared with musk, and other perfumes. All are very careful of +their teeth, which from a very early age they file and render even, +with stones and iron. [56] They dye them a black color, which is +lasting, and which preserves their teeth until they are very old, +although it is ugly to look at. [57] + +They quite generally bathe the entire body in the rivers and creeks, +both young and old, without reflecting that it could at any time be +injurious to them; [58] for in their baths do they find their best +medicines. When an infant is born, they immediately bathe it, and +the mother likewise. The women have needlework as their employment +and occupation, and they are very clever at it, and at all kinds of +sewing. They weave cloth and spin cotton, and serve in the houses +of their husbands and fathers. They pound the rice for eating, +[59] and prepare the other food. They raise fowls and swine, and +keep the houses, while the men are engaged in the labors of the +field, and in their fishing, navigation, and trading. They are not +very chaste, either single or married women; while their husbands, +fathers, or brothers are not very jealous or anxious about it. Both +men and women are so selfish and greedy that, if they are paid, they +are easily won over. When the husband finds his wife in adultery, +he is smoothed and pacified without any trouble--although, since they +have known Spaniards, some of those who assume to be more enlightened +among them have sometimes killed the adulterers. Both men and women, +especially the chiefs, walk slowly and sedately when upon their +visits, and when going through the streets and to the temples; and +are accompanied by many slaves, both male and female, with parasols +of silk which they carry to protect them from the sun and rain. The +women walk ahead and their female servants and slaves follow them; +behind these walk their husbands, fathers, or brothers, with their +man-servants and slaves. [60] + +Their ordinary food is rice pounded in wooden mortars, and cooked--this +is called _morisqueta_, [61] and is the ordinary bread of the whole +country--boiled fish (which is very abundant), the flesh of swine, +deer, and wild buffaloes (which they call _carabaos_). Meat and fish +they relish better when it has begun to spoil and when it stinks. [62] +They also eat boiled camotes (which are sweet potatoes), beans, +_quilites_ [63] and other vegetables; all kinds of bananas, guavas, +pineapples, custard apples, many varieties of oranges, and other +varieties of fruits and herbs, with which the country teems. Their +drink is a wine made from the tops of cocoa and nipa palm, of which +there is a great abundance. They are grown and tended like vineyards, +although without so much toil and labor. Drawing off the tuba, [64] +they distil it, using for alembics their own little furnaces and +utensils, to a greater or less strength, and it becomes brandy. This is +drunk throughout the islands. It is a wine of the clarity of water, +but strong and dry. If it be used with moderation, it acts as a +medicine for the stomach, and is a protection against humors and all +sorts of rheums. Mixed with Spanish wine, it makes a mild liquor, +and one very palatable and healthful. + +In the assemblies, marriages, and feasts of the natives of these +islands, the chief thing consists in drinking this wine, day and night, +without ceasing, when the turn of each comes, some singing and others +drinking. As a consequence, they generally become intoxicated without +this vice being regarded as a dishonor or disgrace. [65] + +The weapons of this people are, in some provinces, bow and arrows. But +those generally used throughout the islands are moderate-sized spears +with well-made points; and certain shields of light wood, with their +armholes fastened on the inside. These cover them from top to toe, +and are called _carasas_ [_kalasag_]. At the waist they carry a +dagger four fingers in breadth, the blade pointed, and a third of +a vara in length; the hilt is of gold or ivory. The pommel is open +and has two cross bars or projections, without any other guard. They +are called _bararaos_. They have two cutting edges, and are kept in +wooden scabbards, or those of buffalo-horn, admirably wrought. [66] +With these they strike with the point, but more generally with the +edge. When they go in pursuit of their opponent, they show great +dexterity in seizing his hair with one hand, while with the other +they cut off his head with one stroke of the bararao, and carry +it away. They afterward keep the heads suspended in their houses, +where they may be seen; and of these they make a display, in order +to be considered as valiant, and avengers of their enemies and of +the injuries committed by them. [67] + +Since they have seen the Spaniards use their weapons, many of the +natives handle the arquebuses and muskets quite skilfully. Before the +arrival of the Spaniards they had bronze culverins and other pieces +of cast iron, with which they defended their forts and settlements, +although their powder is not so well refined as that of the Spaniards. + +Their ships and boats are of many kinds; for on the rivers and creeks +inland they use certain very large canoes, each made from one log, +and others fitted with benches and made from planks, and built up +on keels. They have vireys and barangays, which are certain quick +and light vessels that lie low in the water, put together with little +wooden nails. These are as slender at the stern as at the bow, and they +can hold a number of rowers on both sides, who propel their vessels +with _bucceyes_ or paddles, and with _gaones_ [68] on the outside +of the vessel; and they time their rowing to the accompaniment of +some who sing in their language refrains by which they understand +whether to hasten or retard their rowing. [69] Above the rowers is +a platform or gangway, built of bamboo, upon which the fighting-men +stand, in order not to interfere with the rowing of the oarsmen. In +accordance with the capacity of the vessels is the number of men on +these gangways. From that place they manage the sail, which is square +and made of linen, and hoisted on a support or yard made of two thick +bamboos, which serves as a mast. When the vessel is large, it also +has a foresail of the same form. Both yards, with their tackle, can be +lowered upon the gangway when the weather is rough. The helmsmen are +stationed in the stern to steer. It carries another bamboo framework +on the gangway itself; and upon this, when the sun shines hot, +or it rains, they stretch an awning made from some mats, woven from +palm-leaves. These are very bulky and close, and are called _cayanes_ +[70] Thus all the ship and its crew are covered and protected. There +are also other bamboo frameworks for each side of the vessel, which +are so long as the vessel, and securely fastened on. They skim the +water, without hindering the rowing, and serve as a counterpoise, +so that the ship cannot overturn nor upset, however heavy the sea, +or strong the wind against the sail. It may happen that the entire +hull of these vessels, which have no decks, may fill with water and +remain between wind and water, even until it is destroyed and broken +up, without sinking, because of these counterpoises. These vessels have +been used commonly throughout the islands since olden times. They have +other larger vessels called caracoas, _lapis_, and _tapaques_, which +are used to carry their merchandise, and which are very suitable, +as they are roomy and draw but little water. They generally drag +them ashore every night, at the mouths of rivers and creeks, among +which they always navigate without going into the open sea or leaving +the shore. All the natives can row and manage these boats. Some are +so long that they can carry one hundred rowers on a side and thirty +soldiers above to fight. The boats commonly used are barangays and +vireys, which carry a less crew and fighting force. Now they put +many of them together with iron nails instead of the wooden pegs and +the joints in the planks, while the helms and bows have beaks like +Castilian boats. [71] + +The land is well shaded in all parts by trees of different kinds, +and fruit-trees which beautify it throughout the year, both along +the shore and inland among the plains and mountains. It is very full +of large and small rivers, of good fresh water, which flow into the +sea. All of them are navigable, and abound in all kinds of fish, +which are very pleasant to the taste. For the above reason there +is a large supply of lumber, which is cut and sawed, dragged to the +rivers, and brought down, by the natives. This lumber is very useful +for houses and buildings, and for the construction of small and large +vessels. Many very straight thick trees, light and pliable, are found, +which are used as masts for ships and galleons. Consequently, vessels +of any size may be fitted with masts from these trees, made of one +piece of timber, without its being necessary to splice them or make +them of different pieces. For the hulls of the ships, the keels, +futtock-timbers, top-timbers, and any other kinds of supports and +braces, compass-timbers, transoms, knees small and large, and rudders, +all sorts of good timber are easily found; as well as good planking +for the sides, decks, and upper-works, from very suitable woods. [72] + +There are many native fruit-trees, such as the _sanctors_, _mabolos_, +tamarinds, _nancas_, custard-apples, papaws, guavas, and everywhere +many oranges, of all kinds--large and small, sweet and sour; +citrons, lemons, and ten or twelve varieties of very healthful and +palatable bananas. [73] There are many cocoa-palms bearing fruit +of pleasant taste--from which is made wine and common oil, which +is a very healing remedy for wounds; and other wild palms of the +forests--that do not yield cocoa-nuts, but serve as wood, and from +whose bark is made bonote, a tow for rigging and cables, and also for +calking ships. Efforts have been made to plant olives and quinces, +and other fruit-trees of Espana, but as yet they have had no success, +except with pomegranates and grapevines, which bear fruit the second +year. These bear abundance of exceedingly good grapes three times a +year; and some fig-trees have succeeded. Vegetables of every kind +grow well and very abundantly, but do not seed, and it is always +necessary to bring the seeds from Castilla, China, or Japon. + +In the Cagayan provinces are found chestnut-trees, which produce +fruit. In other districts are found pines and other trees which yield +certain very large pine-nuts, with a hard shell and a pleasant taste, +which are called piles. [74] There is abundance of cedar which is +called _calanta_, a beautiful red wood called _asana_, [75] ebony of +various qualities, and many other precious woods for all uses. The meat +generally eaten is that of swine, of which there is a great abundance, +and it is very palatable and wholesome. + +Beef is eaten, cattle being raised abundantly in stock-farms in +many different parts of the islands. The cattle are bred from those +of China and Nueva Espana. [76] The Chinese cattle are small, and +excellent breeders. Their horns are very small and twisted, and some +cattle can move them. They have a large hump upon the shoulders, and +are very manageable beasts. There are plenty of fowls like those of +Castilla, and others very large, which are bred from fowls brought +from China. They are very palatable, and make fine capons. Some of +these fowls are black in feather, skin, flesh, and bones, and are +pleasant to the taste. [77] Many geese are raised, as well as swans, +ducks, and tame pigeons brought from China. There is abundance of +flesh of wild game, such as venison, and wild boars, and in some parts +porcupines. There are many buffaloes, which are called carabaos, which +are raised in the fields and are very spirited; others are brought +tame from China; these are very numerous, and very handsome. These +last are used only for milking, and their milk is thicker and more +palatable than that of cows. + +Goats and kids are raised, although their flesh is not savory, because +of the humidity of the country. These animals sicken and die for that +reason, and because they eat certain poisonous herbs. Ewes and rams, +although often brought from Nueva Espana, never multiply. Consequently +there are none of these animals, for the climate and pasturage has not +as yet seemed suitable for them. [78] There were no horses, mares, or +asses in the islands, until the Spaniards had them brought from China +and brought them from Nueva Espana. Asses and mules are very rare, +but there are many horses and mares. Some farms are being stocked with +them, and those born there (mixed breeds for the most part) turn out +well, and have good colors, are good tempered and willing to work, and +are of medium size. Those brought from China are small, very strong, +good goers, treacherous, quarrelsome, and bad-tempered. Some horses +of good colors are brought from Japon. They have well-shaped bodies, +thick hair, large fetlocks, large legs and front hoofs, which makes +them look like draft-horses. Their heads are rather large, and their +mouths hard. They run but slowly, but walk well, and are spirited, +and of much mettle. The daily feed of the horses consists throughout +the year of green provender, [79] besides rice in the husk, which +keeps them very fat. [80] + +There are many fowls and field birds, and wild birds of wonderful +colors and very beautiful. There are no singing birds suitable for +keeping in cages, although some calendar larks [_Calandrias_] called +_fimbaros_, [81] smaller than those of Espana, are brought from Japon, +whose song is most sweet. There are many turtle-doves, ring-doves; +other doves with an extremely green plumage, and red feet and beaks; +and others that are white with a red spot on the breast, like a +pelican. Instead of quail, there are certain birds resembling them, +but smaller, which are called _povos_ [82] and other smaller birds +called mayuelas. [83] There are many wild chickens and cocks, which +are very small, and taste like partridge. There are royal, white, and +grey herons, flycatchers, and other shore birds, ducks, lavancos, [84] +crested cranes, sea-crows, eagles, eagle-owls, and other birds of prey, +although none are used for hawking. There are jays and thrushes as in +Espana, and white storks and cranes. [85] They do not rear peacocks, +rabbits, or hares, although they have tried to do so. It is believed +that the wild animals in the forests and fields eat and destroy them, +namely, the cats, foxes, badgers, and large and small rats, which +are very numerous, and other land animals. [86] + +Throughout these islands are found a great number of monkeys, of +various sizes, with which at times the trees are covered. There are +green and white parrots, but they are stupid in talking; and very +small parroquets, of beautiful green and red colors, which talk as +little. The forests and settlements have many serpents, of various +colors, which are generally larger than those of Castilla. Some have +been seen in the forests of unusual size, and wonderful to behold. [87] +The most harmful are certain slender snakes, of less than one vara +in length, which dart down upon passersby from the trees (where they +generally hang), and sting them; their venom is so powerful that +within twenty-four hours the person dies raving. + +There are many very large scorpions in the rivers and creeks, and a +great number of crocodiles, which are very bloodthirsty and cruel. They +quite commonly pull from their bancas the natives who go in those +boats, and cause many injuries among the horned cattle and the horses +of the stock-farms, when they go to drink. And although the people fish +for them often and kill them, they are never diminished in number. For +that reason, the natives set closely-grated divisions and enclosures +in the rivers and creeks of their settlements, where they bathe. There +they enter the water to bathe, secure from those monsters, which they +fear so greatly that they venerate and adore them, as if they were +beings superior to themselves. All their oaths and execrations, and +those which are of any weight with them (even among the Christians) +are, thus expressed: "So may the crocodile kill him!" They call the +crocodile _buhaya_ in their language. It has happened when some one +has sworn falsely, or when he has broken his word, that then some +accident has occurred to him with the crocodile, which God, whom he +offends, has so permitted for the sake of the authority and purity +of the truth, and the promise of it. [88] + +The fisheries of sea and rivers are most abundant, and include all +kinds of fish; both of fresh and salt water. These are generally used +as food throughout the entire country. There are many good sardines, +sea-eels, sea-breams (which they call _bacocos_), daces, skates, +_bicudas_, _tanguingues_, soles, _plantanos_, [89] _taraquitos_, +needle-fish, gilt-heads, and eels; large oysters, mussels, [90] +_porcebes_, crawfish, shrimp, sea-spiders, center-fish, and all kinds +of cockles, shad, white fish, and in the Tajo River of Cagayan, [91] +during their season, a great number of _bobos_, which come down to +spawn at the bar. In the lake of Bonbon, a quantity of tunny-fish, +not so large as those of Espana, but of the same shape, flesh, and +taste, are caught. Many sea-fish are found in the sea, such as whales, +sharks, _caellas_, _marajos_, _bufeos_, and other unknown species +of extraordinary forms and size. In the year of five hundred and +ninety-six, during a furious storm in the islands, a fish was flung +into shallow water on one of the Luzon coasts near the province of +Camarines. It was so huge and misshapen, that although it lay in +more than three and one-half bracas of water, it could not again +get afloat, and died there. The natives said that they had never +seen anything like it, nor another shaped like it. Its head was of +wonderful size and fierce aspect. On its frontal it bore two horns, +which pointed toward its back. One of them was taken to Manila. It +was covered with its skin or hide, but had no hair or scales. It was +white, and twenty feet long. Where it joined the head it was as thick +as the thigh, and gradually tapered proportionally to the tip. It +was somewhat curved and not very round; and to all appearances, +quite solid. It caused great wonder in all beholders. [92] + +There is a fresh-water lake in the island of Luzon, five leguas from +Manila, which contains a quantity of fish. Many rivers flow into this +lake, and it empties into the sea through the river flowing from it +to Manila. It is called La Laguna de Bay ["Bay Lake"]. It is thirty +leguas in circumference, and has an uninhabited island in its middle, +where game abounds. [93] Its shores are lined with many native +villages. The natives navigate the lake, and commonly cross it in +their skiffs. At times it is quite stormy and dangerous to navigate, +when the north winds blow, for these winds make it very boisterous, +although it is very deep. + +Twenty leguas from Manila, in the province of Bonbon, is another lake +of the same name [Bonbon], not so extensive as the former, but with +a great abundance of fish. The natives' method of catching them is +by making corrals [94] of bejucos, which are certain slender canes +or rushes, solid and very pliant and strong; these are employed +for making cables for the natives' boats, as well as other kinds +of ropes. They catch the fish inside these corrals, having made the +enclosures fast by means of stakes. They also catch the fish in wicker +baskets made from the _bejucos_, but most generally with _atarrayas_, +[95] _esparaveles_, other small _barrederas_, [96] and with hand +lines and hooks. [97] The most usual food of the natives is a fish +as small as _pejerreyes_. [98] They dry and cure these fish in the +sun and air, and cook them in many styles. They like them better than +large fish. It is called _laulau_ among them. [99] + +Instead of olives and other pickled fruit, they have a green fruit, +like walnuts, which they call _paos_. [100] Some are small, and others +larger in size, and when prepared they have a pleasant taste. They also +prepare _charas_ [101] in pickle brine, and all sorts of vegetables +and greens, which are very appetizing. There is much ginger, and it +is eaten green, pickled, and preserved. There are also quantities +of _cachumba_ [102] instead of saffron and other condiments. The +ordinary dainty throughout these islands, and in many kingdoms of +the mainland of those regions, is _buyo_ [betel]. This is made from +a tree, [103] whose leaf is shaped like that of the mulberry. The +fruit resembles an oak acorn, and is white inside. [104] This fruit, +which is called _bonga_, is cut lengthwise in strips, and each strip is +put into an envelope or covering made from the leaf. With the _bonga_ +is thrown in a powder of quick lime. [105] This compound is placed +in the mouth and chewed. It is so strong a mixture, and burns so +much, that it induces sleep and intoxication. It burns the mouths of +those not used to it, and causes them to smart. The saliva and all +the mouth are made as red as blood. It does not taste bad. After +having been chewed [106] for a considerable time it is spit out, +when it no longer has any juice, which is called capa [sapa]. They +consider very beneficial that quantity of the juice which has gone +into the stomach, for strengthening it, and for various diseases. It +strengthens and preserves the teeth and gums from all inflammations, +decay, and aches. They tell other wonderful effects of it. What has +been seen is that the natives and Spaniards--laymen and religious, +men and women--use it so commonly and generally that mornings and +afternoons, at parties and visits, and even alone in their houses, +all their refreshments and luxuries consist of buyos served on +heavily-gilded and handsomely adorned plates and trays like chocolate +in Nueva Espana. In these poison has been often administered from +which the persons eating them have died, and that quite commonly. + +The natives (especially the chiefs) take whenever they leave their +houses, for show and entertainment, their boxes of buyos--which they +call _buccetas_ [107]--ready to use, and the leaf, _bonga_, and quick +lime, separately. With these handsome boxes, which are made of metal +and of other materials, they carry the scissors and other tools for +making the buyo with cleanliness and neatness. Wherever they may stop, +they make and use their buyo. In the parians, or bazars, buyos are +sold ready made, and the outfit for making them. [108] + +The natives of these islands quite commonly use as venoms and poisons +the herbs of that class found throughout the islands. They are so +efficacious and deadly that they produce wonderful effects. There +is a lizard, commonly found in the houses, somewhat dark-green in +color, one palmo long, and as thick as three fingers, which is called +_chacon_. [109] They put this in a joint of bamboo, and cover it +up. The slaver of this animal during its imprisonment is gathered. It +is an exceedingly strong poison, when introduced as above stated, in +the food or drink, in however minute quantities. There are various +herbs known and gathered by the natives for the same use. Some of +them are used dry, and others green; some are to be mixed in food, +and others inhaled. Some kill by simply touching them with the hands +or feet, or by sleeping upon them. The natives are so skilful in +making compounds from these substances, that they mix and apply them +in such a manner that they take effect at once, or at a set time--long +or short, as they wish, even after a year. Many persons usually die +wretchedly by these means--especially Spaniards, who lack foresight, +and who are tactless and hated because of the ill-treatment that they +inflict upon the natives with whom they deal, either in the collection +of their tributes, or in other matters in which they employ them, +without there being any remedy for it. There are certain poisonous +herbs, with which, when the natives gather them, they carry, all ready, +other herbs which act as antidotes. In the island of Bohol is one herb +of such nature that the natives approach it from windward when they +cut it from the shrub on which it grows; for the very air alone that +blows over the herb is deadly. Nature did not leave this danger without +a remedy, for other herbs and roots are found in the same islands, of +so great efficacy and virtue that they destroy and correct the poison +and mischief of the others, and are used when needed. Accordingly, +when one knows what poison has been given him, it is not difficult, +if recourse be had in time, to cure it, by giving the herb that is +antidotal to such poison. At times it has happened that pressure has +been put upon the person suspected of having committed the evil to +make him bring the antidote, by which it has been remedied. There are +also other general antidotes, both for preservation against poison and +for mitigating the effects of poison that has been administered. But +the most certain and efficacious antidotes are certain small flies or +insects, of a violet color, found on certain bushes in the islands +of Pintados. These are shut up in a clean bamboo joint, and covered +over. There they breed and multiply. Ground rice is put in with them, +and they exist thereon. Every week they are visited [110] and the old +rice removed and new rice put in, and they are kept alive by this +means. If six of these insects are taken in a spoonful of wine or +water--for they emit no bad odor, and taste like cress--they produce +a wonderful effect. Even when people go to banquets or dinners where +there is any suspicion, they are wont to take with them these insects, +in order to preserve and assure themselves from any danger of poison +and venom. + +All these islands are, in many districts, rich in placers and mines +of gold, a metal which the natives dig and work. However, since the +advent of the Spaniards in the land, the natives proceed more slowly +in this, and content themselves with what they already possess in +jewels and gold ingots, handed down from antiquity and inherited from +their ancestors. [111] This is considerable, for he must be poor and +wretched who has no gold chains, calombigas [bracelets], and earrings. + +Some placers and mines were worked at Paracali in the province of +Camarines, where there is good gold mixed with copper. This commodity +is also traded in the Ylocos, for at the rear of this province, +which borders the seacoast, are certain lofty and rugged mountains +which extend as far as Cagayan. On the slopes of these mountains, +in the interior, live many natives, as yet unsubdued, and among whom +no incursion has been made, who are called Ygolotes. These natives +possess rich mines, many of gold and silver mixed. They are wont to +dig from them only the amount necessary for their wants. They descend +to certain places to trade this gold (without completing its refining +or preparation), with the Ylocos; there they exchange it for rice, +swine, carabaos, cloth, and other things that they need. [112] The +Ylocos complete its refining and preparation, and by their medium it +is distributed throughout the country. Although an effort has been +made with these Ygolotes to discover their mines, and how they work +them, and their method of working the metal, nothing definite has +been learned, for the Ygolotes fear that the Spaniards will go to +seek them for their gold, and say that they keep the gold better in +the earth than in their houses. [113] + +There are also many gold mines and placers in the other islands, +especially among the Pintados, on the Botuan River in Mindanao, +and in Sebu, where a mine of good gold is worked, called Taribon. If +the industry and efforts of the Spaniards were to be converted into +the working of the gold, as much would be obtained from any one of +these islands as from those provinces which produce the most in the +world. But since they attend to other means of gain rather than +to this, as will be told in due time, they do not pay the proper +attention to this matter. + +In some of these islands pearl oysters are found, especially in +the Calamianes, where some have been obtained that are large and +exceedingly clear and lustrous. [114] Neither is this means of profit +utilized. In all parts, seed pearls are found in the ordinary oysters, +and there are oysters as large as a buckler. From the [shells of the] +latter the natives manufacture beautiful articles. There are also +very large sea turtles in all the islands. Their shells are utilized +by the natives, and sold as an article of commerce to the Chinese +and Portuguese, and other nations who go after them and esteem them +highly, because of the beautiful things made from them. + +On the coasts of any of these islands are found many small white +snail shells, called _siguei_. The natives gather them and sell them +by measure to the Siamese, Cambodians, Pantanes, and other peoples +of the mainland. It serves there as money, and those nations trade +with it, as they do with cacao-beans in Nueva Espana. [115] + +Carabao horns are used as merchandise in trading with China; and +deerskins and dye-wood with Japon. The natives make use of everything +in trading with those nations and derive much profit therefrom. + +In this island of Luzon, especially in the provinces of Manila, +Panpanga, Pangasinan, and Ylocos, certain earthenware jars [_tibores_] +are found among the natives. They are very old, of a brownish color, +and not handsome. Some are of medium size, and others are smaller, +and they have certain marks and stamps. The natives are unable to +give any explanation of where or when they got them, for now they are +not brought to the islands or made there. The Japanese seek them and +esteem them, for they have found that the root of a plant called _cha_ +[tea]--which is drunk hot, as a great refreshment and medicine, among +the kings and lords of Japon--is preserved and keeps only in these +tibors. These are so highly valued throughout Japon, that they are +regarded as the most precious jewels of their closets and household +furniture. A tibor is worth a great sum, and the Japanese adorn them +outside with fine gold beautifully chased, and keep them in brocade +cases. Some tibors are valued and sold for two thousand taes of +eleven reals to the tae, or for less, according to the quality of +the tibor. It makes no difference if they are cracked or chipped, +for that does not hinder them from holding the tea. The natives of +these islands sell them to the Japanese for the best price possible, +and seek them carefully for this profit. However, few are found now, +because of the assiduity with which the natives have applied themselves +to that search. [116] + +At times the natives have found large pieces of ambergris on the +coasts. When they discovered that the Spaniards value it, they gathered +it, and have made profit from it. The past year of six hundred and +two, some natives found in the island of Sebu a good-sized piece of +ambergris, and when their encomendero heard of it, he took it, and +traded with them secretly for it, on the account of their tribute. It +is said that it weighed a good number of libras. Afterward he brought +it out and sold it by the ounce at a higher rate. [117] + +In the province and river of Butuan--which is pacified and assigned +to Spaniards, and is located in the island of Mindanao--the natives +practice another industry, which is very useful. As they possess +many civet cats, although smaller than those of Guinea, they make +use of the civet and trade it. This they do easily, for, when the +moon is in the crescent, they hunt the cats with nets, and capture +many of them. Then when they have obtained the civet, they loose the +cats. They also capture and cage some of them, which are sold in the +islands at very low prices. [118] + +Cotton is raised abundantly throughout the islands. It is spun and +sold in the skein to the Chinese and other nations, who come to +get it. Cloth of different patterns is also woven from it, and the +natives also trade that. Other cloths, called medrinaques, are woven +from the banana leaf. [119] + +The islands of Babuytanes [120] consist of many small islands lying +off the upper coast of the province of Cagayan. They are inhabited +by natives, whose chief industry consists in going to Cagayan, in +their tapaques, with swine, fowls, and other food, and ebony spears, +for exchange. The islands are not assigned as encomiendas, nor is +any tribute collected from them. There are no Spaniards among them, +as those natives are of less understanding and less civilized [than +the others]. Accordingly no Christians have been made among them, +and they have no justices. + +Other islands, called the Catenduanes, lie off the other head of +the island of Luzon, opposite the province of Camarines, in fourteen +degrees of north latitude, near the strait of Espiritu Santo. They +are islands densely populated with natives of good disposition, who +are all assigned to Spaniards. They possess instruction and churches, +and have an alcalde-mayor who administers justice to them. Most of +them cultivate the soil, but some are engaged in gold-washing, and +in trading between various islands, and with the mainland of Luzon, +very near those islands. [121] + +The island of Luzon has a bay thirty leguas in circumference on +its southern coast, situated about one hundred leguas from the cape +of Espiritu Santo, which is the entrance to the Capul channel. Its +entrance is narrow, and midway contains an island called Miraveles +[_i.e._, Corregidor] lying obliquely across it, which makes the +entrance narrow. This island is about two leguas long and one-half +legua wide. It is high land and well shaded by its many trees. It +contains a native settlement of fifty persons, and there the watchman +of the bay has his fixed abode and residence. There are channels at +both ends of the island, where one may enter the bay. The one at the +south is one-half legua wide, and has a rock in its middle called El +Fraile ["the friar"]. The one on the north is much narrower, but any +ships of any draft whatever can enter and go out by both channels. The +entire bay is of good depth, and clean, and has good anchorages in all +parts. It is eight leguas from these entrances to the colony of Manila +and the bar of the river. A large harbor is formed two leguas south +of Manila, with a point of land that shelters it. That point has a +native settlement called Cabit, [122] and it gives name to the harbor, +which is used as a port for the vessels. It is very capacious and well +sheltered from the vendavals--whether the southeast, and southwest, the +west, and west-southwest, or the north-northeast and north winds. It +has a good anchorage, with a clean and good bottom. There is a good +entrance quite near the land, more than one and one-half leguas wide, +for the ingress and egress of vessels. All the shores of this bay are +well provided with abundant fisheries, of all kinds. They are densely +inhabited by natives. Above Manila there is a province of more than +twenty leguas in extent called La Pampanga. This province possesses +many rivers and creeks that irrigate it. They all flow and empty +into the bay. This province contains many settlements of natives, and +considerable quantities of rice, fruits, fish, meat, and other foods. +[123] + +The bar of the river of Manila, which is in the same bay, near the +colony of Manila on one side and Tondo on the other, is not very deep +because of certain sand shoals on it, which change their position at +the time of the freshets and obstruct it. Consequently, although the +water is deep enough for any vessel past the bar, still, unless they +are fragatas, vireys, or other small vessels, they cannot pass the bar +to enter the river. In respect to galleys, galliots, and the vessels +from China, which draw but little water, they must enter empty, and +at high tide, and by towing. Such vessels anchor in the bay outside +the bar, and, for greater security enter the port of Cabit. + +There is another good port called Ybalon, [124] twenty leguas from +the channel of the same island of Luzon, which is sheltered from the +vendavals, and has a good entrance and anchorage. There the vessels +that enter to escape the vendaval find shelter, and wait until the +brisa returns, by which to go to Manila, eighty leguas away. + +On the coasts of Pangasinan, Ylocos, and Cagayan, there are some +ports and bars, where ships can enter and remain, such as the harbor +of Marihuma, [125] the port El Frayle ["the friar"], [126] that of +Bolinao, the bar of Pangasinan, that of Bigan, the bar of Camalayuga, +at the mouth of the Tajo River (which goes up two leguas to the +chief settlement of Cagayan)--besides other rivers, bars, harbors, +and shelters of less account for smaller vessels throughout the coasts +of this island. + +Quite near this large island of Luzon, many other islands, large +and small, are located; they are inhabited by the same natives as +Luzon, who have gold placers, sowed fields, and their trading. Such +are Marinduque, Tablas Island, Mazbate, Burias, Banton, Bantonillo, +and others of less importance. The nearest of them to Manila is the +island of Mindoro. It is more than eighty leguas long and about two +hundred in circumference. It has many settlements of the same natives, +and the side lying next the provinces of Balayan and Calilaya is so +near and close to the island of Luzon, that it forms a strait which +contains powerful currents and races, through which the ships going +to and from Manila enter and leave. The winds and currents there are +very strong. It is about one-half a legua wide. In that part is the +chief town of this island of Mindoro. It has a port that is called El +Varadero ["the place for laying up ships"] for large vessels. There +are also other anchorages and bars throughout this island for smaller +vessels; and many settlements and natives on all the coasts of this +island. All of the settlements abound in rice, food, and gold-placers, +and all kinds of game and timber. [127] + +The cape of Espiritu Santo, which is sighted by ships entering the +Filipinas Islands on the way from Nueva Espana, is in an island called +Tendaya, [128] in about thirteen degrees. Twenty leguas south after +turning this cape of Espiritu Santo lie the island of Viri, and many +others which are sighted. Through them an entrance opens to the island +of Sebu by a strait called San Juanillo, which is formed by these +islands. It is not very good or safe for the larger ships. But toward +the north after leaving this course, one reaches the island of Capul, +which forms a strait and channel of many currents and rough waves, +through which the ships enter. Before reaching the strait there is a +rock, or barren islet, called San Bernardino; this strait is formed by +the coast of the island of Luzon and that of the island of Capul. Its +channel is about one legua long and less wide. + +On leaving this strait, after having entered by it, three small islets +form a triangle. They are called the islands of Naranjos ["Oranges"], +and are lofty and inaccessible with steep rocks. Upon them ships are +wont to be driven by the powerful currents, even though they try to +escape them. These are not inhabited, but the others [Capul, Viri, +etc.] are large islands containing many settlements of natives and +all kinds of provisions and food. + +South of this district lie the islands of Bicayas, or, as they are +also called, Pintados. They are many in number, thickly populated with +natives. Those of most renown are Leite, Ybabao, [129] Camar [Samar], +Bohol, island of Negros, Sebu, Panay, Cuyo, and the Calamianes. All +the natives of these islands, both men and women, are well-featured, +of a good disposition, and of better nature, and more noble in their +actions than the inhabitants of the islands of Luzon and its vicinity. + +They differ from them in their hair, which the men wear cut in a cue, +like the ancient style in Espana. Their bodies are tattooed with many +designs, but the face is not touched. [130] They wear large earrings +of gold and ivory in their ears, and bracelets of the same; certain +scarfs wrapped round the head, very showy, which resemble turbans, +and knotted very gracefully and edged with gold. They wear also a +loose collarless jacket with tight sleeves, whose skirts reach half +way down the leg. These garments are fastened in front and are made +of medrinaque and colored silks. They wear no shirts or drawers, but +bahaques [_i.e._, breech-clouts] of many wrappings, which cover their +privy parts, when they remove their skirts and jackets. The women are +good-looking and graceful. They are very neat, and walk slowly. Their +hair is black, long, and drawn into a knot on the head. Their robes +are wrapped about the waist and fall downward. These are made of all +colors, and they wear collarless jackets of the same material. Both +men and women go naked and without any coverings, [131] and barefoot, +and with many gold chains, earrings, and wrought bracelets. + +Their weapons consist of large knives curved like cutlasses, spears, +and caracas [_i.e._, shields]. They employ the same kinds of boats as +the inhabitants of Luzon. They have the same occupations, products, +and means of gain as the inhabitants of all the other islands. These +Visayans are a race less inclined to agriculture, and are skilful +in navigation, and eager for war and raids for pillage and booty, +which they call _mangubas_. [132] This means "to go out for plunder." + +Near the principal settlement of the island of Sebu, there is a fine +port for all manner of vessels. It has a good entrance and furnishes +shelter at all times. It has a good bottom and is an excellent +anchorage. There are also other ports and bars of less importance +and consideration, as in all these islands, for smaller vessels. + +This island of Sebu is an island of more than one hundred leguas in +circumference. It has abundance of provisions, and gold mines and +placers, and is inhabited by natives. + +Beyond it lie other islands, very pleasant and well populated, +especially the island of Panay. Panay is a large island, more +than one hundred leguas in circumference, containing many native +settlements. [133] It produces considerable quantities of rice, +palm-wine, and all manner of provisions. It has flourishing and +wealthy settlements, on what is called the river of Panay. The +chief one is Oton, which has a bar and port for galleys and ships, +shipyards for building large ships, and a great amount of timber for +their construction. There are many natives, who are masters of all +kinds of shipbuilding. Near this island lies an islet eight leguas +in circumference, which is densely populated by natives who are all +carpenters. They are excellent workmen, and practice no other trade +or occupation; and, without a single tree of any size on this whole +islet, they practice this art with great ability. From there all the +islands are furnished with workmen for carpentry. The island is called +that of the Cagayanes. + +After the island of Sebu follow immediately the island of Mindanao, +an island of more than three hundred leguas in circumference, and +Jolo, which is small. Lower down is the island of Borneo, a very +large island, more than five hundred leguas in circumference. All of +these islands are densely populated, although that of Borneo is not +subdued. Neither is that of Mindanao in entirety, but only the river +of Botuan, Dapitan, and the province and coast of Caragan. + +Below this island [Mindanao], before reaching that of Borneo, lie +the islands of the Calamianes. They are very numerous, and consist of +islands of various sizes, which are densely inhabited with natives; +they have some supply of provisions and engage in certain kinds +of husbandry. However the most usual occupation is that of their +navigations from island to island in pursuit of their trading and +exchange, and their fisheries; while those who live nearest the island +of Borneo are wont to go on piratical raids and pillage the natives +in other islands. + +The flow- and ebb-tides, and the high and low tides among these +islands are so diverse in them that they have no fixed rule, +either because of the powerful currents among these islands, or +by some other natural secret of the flux and reflux which the moon +causes. No definite knowledge has been arrived at in this regard, +for although the tides are highest during the opposition of the moon, +and are higher in the month of March than throughout the rest of the +year, there is so great variation in the daily tides that it causes +surprise. Some days there are two equal tides between day and night, +while other days there is but one. At other times the flow during the +day is low, and that of the night greater. They usually have no fixed +hour, for it may happen to be high-tide one day at noon, while next day +high-tide may be anticipated or postponed many hours. Or the tide of +one day may be low, and when a smaller one is expected for next day, +it may be much greater. + +The language of all the Pintados and Bicayas is one and the same, +by which they understand one another when talking, or when writing +with the letters and characters of their own which they possess. These +resemble those of the Arabs. The common manner of writing among the +natives is on leaves of trees, and on bamboo bark. Throughout the +islands the bamboo is abundant; it has huge and misshapen joints, +and lower part is a very thick and solid tree. [134] + +The language of Luzon and those islands in its vicinity differs widely +from that of the Bicayas. [135] The language of the island of Luzon +is not uniform, for the Cagayans have one language and the Ylocos +another. The Zambales have their own particular language, while the +Pampangos also have one different from the others. The inhabitants of +the province of Manila, the Tagals, have their own language, which +is very rich and copious. By means of it one can express elegantly +whatever he wishes, and in many modes and manners. It is not difficult, +either to learn or to pronounce. + +The natives throughout the islands can write excellently with certain +characters, almost like the Greek or Arabic. These characters are +fifteen in all. Three are vowels, which are used as are our five. The +consonants number twelve, and each and all of them combine with +certain dots or commas, and so signify whatever one wishes to write, +as fluently and easily as is done with our Spanish alphabet. The method +of writing was on bamboo, but is now on paper, commencing the lines +at the right and running to the left, in the Arabic fashion. Almost +all the natives, both men and women, write in this language. There +are very few who do not write it excellently and correctly. + +This language of the province of Manila [_i.e._, the Tagal] extends +throughout the province of Camarines, and other islands not contiguous +to Luzon. There is but little difference in that spoken in the various +districts, except that it is spoken more elegantly in some provinces +than in others. [136] + +The edifices and houses of the natives of all these Filipinas +Islands are built in a uniform manner, as are their settlements; +for they always build them on the shores of the sea, between rivers +and creeks. The natives generally gather in districts or settlements +where they sow their rice, and possess their palm trees, nipa and +banana groves, and other trees, and implements for their fishing +and sailing. A small number inhabit the interior, and are called +tinguianes; they also seek sites on rivers and creeks, on which they +settle for the same reasons. + +The houses and dwellings of all these natives are universally set upon +stakes and _arigues_ [_i.e._, columns] high above the ground. Their +rooms are small and the roofs low. They are built and tiled with wood +and bamboos, [137] and covered and roofed with nipa-palm leaves. Each +house is separate, and is not built adjoining another. In the lower +part are enclosures made by stakes and bamboos, where their fowls +and cattle are reared, and the rice pounded and cleaned. One ascends +into the houses by means of ladders that can be drawn up, which are +made from two bamboos. Above are their open _batalanes_ [galleries] +used for household duties; the parents and [grown] children live +together. There is little adornment and finery in the houses, which +are called _bahandin_. [138] + +Besides these houses, which are those of the common people and those +of less importance, there are the chiefs' houses. They are built +upon trees and thick arigues, with many rooms and comforts. They are +well constructed of timber and planks, and are strong and large. They +are furnished and supplied with all that is necessary, and are much +finer and more substantial than the others. They are roofed, however, +as are the others, with the palm-leaves called nipa. These keep out +the water and the sun more than do shingles or tiles, although the +danger from fires is greater. + +The natives do not inhabit the lower part of their houses, because +they raise their fowls and cattle there, and because of the damp +and heat of the earth, and the many rats, which are enormous and +destructive both in the houses and sowed fields; and because, as +their houses are generally built on the sea shore, or on the banks of +rivers and creeks, the waters bathe the lower parts, and the latter +are consequently left open. + +There were no kings or lords throughout these islands who ruled over +them as in the manner of our kingdoms and provinces; but in every +island, and in each province of it, many chiefs were recognized by +the natives themselves. Some were more powerful than others, and +each one had his followers and subjects, by districts and families; +and these obeyed and respected the chief. Some chiefs had friendship +and communication with others, and at times wars and quarrels. [139] + +These principalities and lordships were inherited in the male +line and by succession of father and son and their descendants. If +these were lacking, then their brothers and collateral relatives +succeeded. Their duty was to rule and govern their subjects and +followers, and to assist them in their interests and necessities. What +the chiefs received from their followers was to be held by them in +great veneration and respect; and they were served in their wars and +voyages, and in their tilling, sowing, fishing, and the building of +their houses. To these duties the natives attended very promptly, +whenever summoned by their chief. They also paid the chiefs tribute +(which they called _buiz_), in varying quantities, in the crops that +they gathered. The descendants of such chiefs, and their relatives, +even though they did not inherit the lordship, were held in the +same respect and consideration. Such were all regarded as nobles, +and as persons exempt from the services rendered by the others, or +the plebeians, who were called _timaguas_. [140] The same right of +nobility and chieftainship was preserved for the women, just as for +the men. When any of these chiefs was more courageous than others +in war and upon other occasions, such a one enjoyed more followers +and men; and the others were under his leadership, even if they were +chiefs. These latter retained to themselves the lordship and particular +government of their own following, which is called _barangai_ among +them. They had _datos_ and other special leaders [_mandadores_] +who attended to the interests of the barangay. + +The superiority of these chiefs over those of their barangai was so +great that they held the latter as subjects; they treated these well +or ill, and disposed of their persons, their children, and their +possessions, at will, without any resistance, or rendering account +to anyone. For very slight annoyances and for slight occasions, they +were wont to kill and wound them, and to enslave them. It has happened +that the chiefs have made perpetual slaves of persons who have gone +by them, while bathing in the river, or who have raised their eyes +to look at them less respectfully and for other similar causes. [141] + +When some natives had suits or disputes with others over matters of +property and interest, or over personal injuries and wrongs received, +they appointed old men of the same district, to try them, the parties +being present. If they had to present proofs, they brought their +witnesses there, and the case was immediately judged according to +what was found, according to the usages of their ancestors on like +occasions; and that sentence was observed and executed without any +further objection or delay. [142] + +The natives' laws throughout the islands were made in the same manner, +and they followed the traditions and customs of their ancestors, +without anything being written. Some provinces had different customs +than others in some respects. However, they agreed in most, and in +all the islands generally the same usages were followed. [143] + +There are three conditions of persons among the natives of these +islands, and into which their government is divided: the chiefs, +of whom we have already treated; the timaguas, who are equivalent to +plebeians; and slaves, those of both chiefs and timaguas. + +The slaves were of several classes. Some were for all kinds of work +and slavery, like those which we ourselves hold. Such are called +_saguiguilires_; [144] they served inside the house, as did likewise +the children born of them. There are others who live in their +own houses with their families, outside the house of their lord; +and come, at the season, to aid him in his sowings and harvests, +among his rowers when he embarks, in the construction of his house +when it is being built, and to serve in his house when there are +guests of distinction. These are bound to come to their lord's house +whenever he summons them, and to serve in these offices without any +pay or stipend. These slaves are called _namamahays_, [145] and their +children and descendants are slaves of the same class. From these +slaves--_saguiguilirs_ and _namamahays_--are issue, some of whom are +whole slaves, some of whom are half slaves, and still others one-fourth +slaves. It happens thus: if either the father or the mother was free, +and they had an only child, he was half free and half slave. If they +had more than one child, they were divided as follows: the first +follows the condition of the father, free or slave; the second that +of the mother. If there were an odd number of children, the last was +half free and half slave. Those who descended from these, if children +of a free mother or father, were only one-fourth slaves, because of +being children of a free father or mother and of a half-slave. These +half slaves or one-fourth slaves, whether saguiguilirs or namamahays, +served their masters during every other moon; and in this respect so +is such condition slavery. + +In the same way, it may happen in divisions between heirs that a slave +will fall to several, and serves each one for the time that is due +him. When the slave is not wholly slave, but half or fourth, he has +the right, because of that part that is free, to compel his master to +emancipate him for a just price. This price is appraised and regulated +for persons according to the quality of their slavery, whether it be +saguiguilir or namamahay, half slave or quarter slave. But, if he is +wholly slave, the master cannot be compelled to ransom or emancipate +him for any price. + +The usual price of a sanguiguilir slave among the natives is, at most, +generally ten taes of good gold, or eighty pesos; if he is namamahay, +half of that sum. The others are in the same proportion, taking into +consideration the person and his age. + +No fixed beginning can be assigned as the origin of these kinds of +slavery among these natives, because all the slaves are natives of +the islands, and not strangers. It is thought that they were made in +their wars and quarrels. The most certain knowledge is that the most +powerful made the others slaves, and seized them for slight cause or +occasion, and many times for loans and usurious contracts which were +current among them. The interest, capital, and debt, increased so much +with delay that the borrowers became slaves. Consequently all these +slaveries have violent and unjust beginnings; and most of the suits +among the natives are over these, and they occupy the judges in the +exterior court with them, and their confessors in that of conscience. +[146] + +These slaves comprise the greatest wealth and capital of the natives +of these islands, for they are very useful to them and necessary +for the cultivation of their property. They are sold, traded, and +exchanged among them, just as any other mercantile article, from one +village to another, from one province to another, and likewise from +one island to another. Therefore, and to avoid so many suits as would +occur if these slaveries were examined, and their origin and source +ascertained, they are preserved and held as they were formerly. + +The marriages of these natives, commonly and generally were, and +are: Chiefs with women chiefs; timaguas with those of that rank; and +slaves with those of their own class. But sometimes these classes +intermarry with one another. They considered one woman, whom they +married, as the legitimate wife and the mistress of the house; and +she was styled _ynasaba_. [147] Those whom they kept besides her +they considered as friends. The children of the first were regarded +as legitimate and whole heirs of their parents; the children of the +others were not so regarded, and were left something by assignment, +but they did not inherit. + +The dowry was furnished by the man, being given by his parents. The +wife furnished nothing for the marriage, until she had inherited it +from her parents. The solemnity of the marriage consisted in nothing +more than the agreement between the parents and relatives of the +contracting parties, the payment of the dowry agreed upon to the father +of the bride, [148] and the assembling at the wife's parents' house of +all the relatives to eat and drink until they would fall down. At night +the man took the woman to his house and into his power, and there she +remained. These marriages were annulled and dissolved for slight cause, +with the examination and judgment of the relatives of both parties, +and of the old men, who acted as mediators in the affairs. At such +a time the man took the dowry (which they call _vigadicaya_), [149] +unless it happened that they separated through the husband's fault; +for then it was not returned to him, and the wife's parents kept +it. The property that they had acquired together was divided into +halves, and each one disposed of his own. If one made any profits in +which the other did not have a share or participate, he acquired it +for himself alone. + +The Indians were adopted one by another, in presence of the +relatives. The adopted person gave and delivered all his actual +possessions to the one who adopted him. Thereupon he remained +in his house and care, and had a right to inherit with the other +children. [150] + +Adulteries were not punishable corporally. If the adulterer paid the +aggrieved party the amount adjudged by the old men and agreed upon +by them, then the injury was pardoned, and the husband was appeased +and retained his honor. He would still live with his wife and there +would be no further talk about the matter. + +In inheritances all the legitimate children inherited equally from +their parents whatever property they had acquired. If there were any +movable or landed property which they had received from their parents, +such went to the nearest relatives and the collateral side of that +stock, if there were no legitimate children by an ynasaba. This was +the case either with or without a will. In the act of drawing a will, +there was no further ceremony than to have written it or to have +stated it orally before acquaintances. + +If any chief was lord of a barangai, then in that case, the eldest son +of an ynasaba succeeded him. If he died, the second son succeeded. If +there were no sons, then the daughters succeeded in the same order. If +there were no legitimate successors, the succession went to the +nearest relative belonging to the lineage and relationship of the +chief who had been the last possessor of it. + +If any native who had slave women made concubines of any of them, +and such slave woman had children, those children were free, as was +the slave. But if she had no children, she remained a slave. [151] + +These children by a slave woman, and those borne by a married woman, +were regarded as illegitimate, and did not succeed to the inheritance +with the other children, neither were the parents obliged to leave +them anything. Even if they were the sons of chiefs, they did not +succeed to the nobility or chieftainship of the parents, nor to their +privileges, but they remained and were reckoned as plebeians and in +the number and rank of the other timaguas. + +The contracts and negotiations of these natives were generally illegal, +each one paying attention to how he might better his own business +and interest. + +Loans with interest were very common and much practiced, and the +interest incurred was excessive. The debt doubled and increased all +the time while payment was delayed, until it stripped the debtor of +all his possessions, and he and his children, when all their property +was gone, became slaves. [152] + +Their customary method of trading was by bartering one thing for +another, such as food, cloth, cattle, fowls, lands, houses, fields, +slaves, fishing-grounds, and palm-trees (both nipa and wild). Sometimes +a price intervened, which was paid in gold, as agreed upon, or in metal +bells brought from China. These bells they regard as precious jewels; +they resemble large pans and are very sonorous. [153] They play upon +these at their feasts, and carry them to the war in their boats instead +of drums and other instruments. There are often delays and terms for +certain payments, and bondsmen who intervene and bind themselves, +but always with very usurious and excessive profits and interests. + +Crimes were punished by request of the aggrieved parties. Especially +were thefts punished with greater severity, the robbers being enslaved +or sometimes put to death. [154] The same was true of insulting words, +especially when spoken to chiefs. They had among themselves many +expressions and words which they regarded as the highest insult, +when said to men and women. These were pardoned less willingly and +with greater difficulty than was personal violence, such as wounding +and assaulting. [155] + +Concubinage, rape, and incest, were not regarded at all, unless +committed by a timagua on the person of a woman chief. It was +a quite ordinary practice for a married man to have lived a long +time in concubinage with the sister of his wife. Even before having +communication with his wife he could have had access for a long +time to his mother-in-law, especially if the bride were very young, +and until she were of sufficient age. This was done in sight of all +the relatives. + +Single men are called _bagontaos_, [156] and girls of marriageable age, +_dalagas_. Both classes are people of little restraint, and from early +childhood they have communication with one another, and mingle with +facility and little secrecy, and without this being regarded among +the natives as a cause for anger. Neither do the parents, brothers, +or relatives, show any anger, especially if there is any material +interest in it, and but little is sufficient with each and all. + +As long as these natives lived in their paganism, it was not known +that they had fallen into the abominable sin against nature. But after +the Spaniards had entered their country, through communication with +them--and still more, through that with the Sangleys, who have come +from China, and are much given to that vice--it has been communicated +to them somewhat, both to men and to women. In this matter it has +been necessary to take action. + +The natives of the islands of Pintados, especially the women, are very +vicious and sensual. Their perverseness has discovered lascivious +methods of communication between men and women; and there is one to +which they are accustomed from their youth. The men skilfully make +a hole in their virile member near its head, and insert therein a +serpent's head, either of metal or ivory, and fasten it with a peg of +the same material passed through the hole, so that it cannot become +unfastened. With this device, they have communication with their wives, +and are unable to withdraw until a long time after copulation. They are +very fond of this and receive much pleasure from it, so that, although +they shed a quantity of blood, and receive other harm, it is current +among them. These devices are called _sagras,_ and there are very few +of them, because since they have become Christians, strenuous efforts +are being made to do away with these, and not consent to their use; +and consequently the practice has been checked in great part. [157] + +Herbalists and witches are common among these natives, but are not +punished or prohibited among them, so long as they do not cause any +special harm. But seldom could that be ascertained or known. + +There were also men whose business was to ravish and take away +virginity from young girls. These girls were taken to such men, and +the latter were paid for ravishing them, for the natives considered it +a hindrance and impediment if the girls were virgins when they married. + +In matters of religion, the natives proceeded more barbarously and +with greater blindness than in all the rest. For besides being pagans, +without any knowledge of the true God, they neither strove to discover +Him by way of reason, nor had any fixed belief. The devil usually +deceived them with a thousand errors and blindnesses. He appeared to +them in various horrible and frightful forms, and as fierce animals, +so that they feared him and trembled before him. They generally +worshiped him, and made images of him in the said forms. These they +kept in caves and private houses, where they offered them perfumes +and odors, and food and fruit, calling them _anitos_. [158] + +Others worshiped the sun and the moon, and made feasts and +drunken revels at the conjunction of those bodies. Some worshiped a +yellow-colored bird that dwells in their woods, called _batala_. They +generally worship and adore the crocodiles when they see them, by +kneeling down and clasping their hands, because of the harm that +they receive from those reptiles; they believe that by so doing +the crocodiles will become appeased and leave them. Their oaths, +execrations, and promises are all as above mentioned, namely, "May +_buhayan_ eat thee, if thou dost not speak truth, or fulfil what thou +hast promised," and similar things. + +There were no temples throughout those islands, nor houses generally +used for the worship of idols; but each person possessed and made +in his house his own _anitos_, [159] without any fixed rite or +ceremony. They had no priests or religious to attend to religious +affairs, except certain old men and women called _catalonas_. These +were experienced witches and sorcerers, who kept the other people +deceived. The latter communicated to these sorcerers their desires +and needs, and the catalonas told them innumerable extravagancies and +lies. The catalonas uttered prayers and performed other ceremonies to +the idols for the sick; and they believed in omens and superstitions, +with which the devil inspired them, whereby they declared whether the +patient would recover or die. Such were their cures and methods, and +they used various kinds of divinations for all things. All this was +with so little aid, apparatus, or foundation--which God permitted, so +that the preaching of the holy gospel should find those of that region +better prepared for it, and so that those natives would confess the +truth more easily, and it would be less difficult to withdraw them +from their darkness, and the errors in which the devil kept them for +so many years. They never sacrificed human beings as is done in other +kingdoms. They believed that there was a future life where those +who had been brave and performed valiant feats would be rewarded; +while those who had done evil would be punished. But they did not +know how or where this would be. [160] + +They buried their dead in their own houses, and kept their bodies +and bones for a long time in chests. They venerated the skulls of the +dead as if they were living and present. Their funeral rites did not +consist of pomp or assemblages, beyond those of their own house--where, +after bewailing the dead, all was changed into feasting and drunken +revelry among all the relatives and friends. [161] + +A few years before the Spaniards subdued the island of Luzon, +certain natives of the island of Borneo began to go thither to trade, +especially to the settlement of Manila and Tondo; and the inhabitants +of the one island intermarried with those of the other. These Borneans +are Mahometans, and were already introducing their religion among the +natives of Luzon, and were giving them instructions, ceremonies, and +the form of observing their religion, by means of certain _gazizes_ +[162] whom they brought with them. Already a considerable number, +and those the chiefest men, were commencing, although by piecemeal, +to become Moros, and were being circumcised [163] and taking the +names of Moros. Had the Spaniards' coming been delayed longer, that +religion would have spread throughout the island, and even through the +others, and it would have been difficult to extirpate it. The mercy +of God checked it in time; for, because of being in so early stages, +it was uprooted from the islands, and they were freed from it, that +is, in all that the Spaniards have pacified, and that are under the +government of the Filipinas. That religion has spread and extended +very widely in the other islands outside of this government, so that +now almost all of their natives are Mahometan Moros, and are ruled +and instructed by their _gacizes_ and other _morabitos_; [164] these +often come to preach to and teach them by way of the strait of Ma[la]ca +and the Red Sea, through which they navigate to reach these islands. + +The arrival of the Spaniards in these Filipinas Islands, since the +year one thousand five hundred and sixty-four, the pacification and +conversion that has been made therein, their mode of governing, and +the provisions of his Majesty during these years for their welfare, +have caused innovations in many things, such as are usual to kingdoms +and provinces that change their religion and sovereign. The foremost +has been that, besides the name of Filipinas which all the islands +took and received from the beginning of their conquest, they belong +to a new kingdom and seigniory to which his Majesty, Filipo Second, +our sovereign, gave the name of Nuevo Reyno de Castilla ["New Kingdom +of Castilla"]. By his royal concession, he made the city of Manila +capital of it, and gave to it as a special favor, among other things, +a crowned coat-of-arms which was chosen and assigned by his royal +person. This is an escutcheon divided across. In the upper part is a +castle on a red field, and in the lower a lion of gold, crowned and +rampant, holding a naked sword in its right paw. One-half of the body +is in the form of a dolphin upon the waters of the sea, to signify +that the Spaniards crossed the sea with their arms to conquer this +kingdom for the crown of Castilla. [165] + +The city of Manila was founded by the adelantado Miguel Lopez de +Legazpi, first governor of the Filipinas, in the island of Luzon. It +occupies the same site where Rajamora had his settlement and fort--as +has been related more at length--at the mouth of the river which +empties into the bay, on a point between the river and the sea. The +whole site was occupied by this new settlement, and Legazpi apportioned +it to the Spaniards in equal building-lots. It was laid out with +well-arranged streets and squares, straight and level. A sufficiently +large main square [_Plaza mayor_] was left, fronting which were erected +the cathedral church and municipal buildings. He left another square, +that of arms [_Plaza de armas_], fronting which was built the fort, as +well as the royal buildings. He gave sites for the monasteries, [166] +hospital, and chapels which were to be built, as being a city which +was to grow and increase continually--as already it has done; for, +in the course of the time that has passed, that city has flourished +as much as the best of all the cities in those regions. + +The city is completely surrounded with a stone wall, which is more +than two and one-half varas wide, and in places more than three. It +has small towers and traverses at intervals. [167] It has a fortress +of hewn stone at the point that guards the bar and the river, with a +ravelin close to the water, upon which are mounted some large pieces +of artillery. This artillery commands the sea and river, while other +pieces are mounted farther up to defend the bar, besides some other +moderate-sized field-pieces and swivel-guns. These fortifications +have their vaults for storing supplies and munitions, and a magazine +for the powder, which is well guarded and situated in the inner +part; and a copious well of fresh water. There are also quarters +for the soldiers and artillerymen, and the house of the commandant +[alcayde]. The city has been lately fortified on the land side at the +Plaza de armas, where it is entered by a strong wall and two salient +towers, defended with artillery, which command the wall and gate. This +fortress is called Santiago, and has a company of thirty soldiers +with their officers, and eight artillerymen who guard the gate and +entrance by watches--all in charge of a commandant who lives inside, +and has the guard and custody of the fort. + +There is another fortress, also of stone, in the same wall, within +culverin range, located at the end [168] of the curtain, which extends +along the shore of the bay. It is called Nuestra Senora de Guia, and +is a very large round tower. It has its own court, well, and quarters +inside, as well as the magazine, and other rooms for work. It has a +traverse extending to the beach, on which are mounted a dozen large and +moderate-sized pieces, which command the bay and sweep the wall, which +extends along the shore to the gate and to the fort of Santiago. On +the other side the fortress has a large salient tower, mounted with +four large pieces, which command the shore ahead in the direction of +the chapel of Nuestra Senora de Guia. The gate and entrance is within +the city and is guarded by a company of twenty soldiers and their +officers, six artillerymen, and one commandant and his lieutenant, +who live inside. + +On the land side, where the wall extends, there is a rampart called +Sant Andres, which mounts six pieces of artillery that command in +all directions, and some swivel-guns. Farther on is another traverse +called San Gabriel, opposite the parian of the Sangleys, with a like +amount of artillery. Both have some soldiers and an ordinary guard. + +The wall has a sufficient height, and is furnished with battlements and +turrets, built in the modern style, for its defense. It has a circuit +of about one legua, which can be made entirely on top. It has many +broad steps of the same hewn stone, at intervals inside. There are +three principal city gates on the land side, and many other posterns +opening at convenient places on the river and beach, for the service +of the city. Each and all of them are locked before nightfall by +the ordinary patrols. These carry the keys to the guard-room of the +royal buildings. In the morning when day comes, the patrols return +with the keys and open the city. [169] + +The royal arsenals front on the Plaza de armas. In them are kept and +guarded all the supplies of ammunition, food, rigging, iron, copper, +lead, artillery, arquebuses, and other things belonging to the royal +estate. They have their own officers and workmen, and are placed in +charge of the royal officials. + +Near these arsenals is located the powder-house, with its master, +workmen, and convicts, where powder is generally ground in thirty +mortars, and that which is spoiled is refined. [170] + +The building for the founding of artillery is located on a suitable +site in another part of the city. It has its molds, ovens, and tools, +founders, and workmen who work it. [171] + +The royal buildings are very beautiful and sightly, and contain many +rooms. They have many windows opening toward the sea and the Plaza +de armas. They are all built of stone and have two courts, with +upper and lower galleries raised on stout pillars. The governor and +president lives inside with his family. There is a hall for the royal +Audiencia, which is very large and stately; also a separate chapel, +a room for the royal seal, [172] and offices for the scriveners of the +Audiencia, and the government. There are also other apartments for the +royal treasury and the administration of the royal officials, while a +large porch opens on the street with two principal doors, where the +guardroom is located. There is one company of regular arquebusiers, +who come in daily with their banners to stand guard. Opposite, on the +other side of the street, is another edifice for the royal treasury +and those in charge of it. [173] + +The houses of the cabildo, located on the square, are built of +stone. They are very sightly and have handsome halls. On the ground +floor is the prison, and the court of the alcaldes-in-ordinary. [174] + +On the same square is situated the cathedral church. It is built +of hewn stone, and has three naves, and its main chapel, and choir, +with high and low seats. The choir is shut in by railings, and has +its organ, missal-stands, and other necessary things. The cathedral +has also its sacristan [175] and his apartments and offices. + +Within the city is the monastery of St. Augustine. It is very large +and has many dormitories, a refectory and kitchens. They are now +completing a church, which is one of the most sumptuous in those +districts. This convent has generally fifty religious. [176] + +The monastery of St. Dominic is inside the walls. It contains +about forty religious. It was built of stone, and was very well +constructed. It has a church, house, and all offices. It has lately +been rebuilt, and much better; for it was completely destroyed in +the burning of the city in the year six hundred and three. + +The monastery of St. Francis is farther on. It is well constructed +of stone, and its church is being rebuilt. It contains about forty +discalced religious. + +The residence [_colegio_] of the Society of Jesus is established near +the fortress of Nuestra Senora de Guia. It contains twenty religious +of their order, and is an excellent stone house and church. There +they study Latin, the arts, and cases of conscience. Connected with +them is a seminary and convictorio [177] for Spanish scholars, with +their rector. These students wear gowns of tawny-colored frieze with +red facings. [178] + +In another part of the city stands a handsome house, walled in, with +its stone church, called San Andres and Santa Potenciana. It is a royal +foundation, and a rectoress lives there. It has a revolving entrance +and a parlor, and the rectoress has other confidential assistants; +and there shelter is given to needy women and girls of the city, +in the form of religious retirement. Some of the girls leave the +house to be married, while others remain there permanently. It has +its own house for work, and its choir. His Majesty assists them with +a portion of their maintenance; the rest is provided by their own +industry and property. They have their own steward and their priest, +who administers the sacraments to them. [179] + +In another part is the royal hospital for Spaniards, with its +physician, apothecary, surgeons, managers, and servants. It and its +church are built of stone; and it has its sick rooms and the bed +service. In it all the Spaniards are treated. It is usually quite +full; it is under the royal patronage. His Majesty provides the most +necessary things for it. Three discalced religious of St. Francis +act there as superintendents, and they prove very advantageous for +the corporal and spiritual relief of the sick. It was burned in the +conflagration of the former year six hundred and three, and is now +being rebuilt. + +There is another charitable hospital in charge of the Confraternity of +that name. It was founded in the city of Manila by the Confraternity +of La Misericordia of Lisboa, and by the other confraternities of +India. [180] It has apostolic bulls for works of charity, such as +burying the dead, supporting the modest poor, marrying orphans, and +relieving many necessities. There the slaves of the city are treated, +and lodgings are likewise provided for poor women. + +Next to the monastery of St. Francis is located the hospital for +natives, [181] which is under royal patronage. It was founded with +alms, by a holy lay-brother of St. Francis, one Fray Joan Clemente. A +great many natives, suffering from all diseases, are treated there +with great care and attention. It has a good edifice and workrooms +built of stone. The discalced religious of St. Francis manage it; +and three priests and four lay-brothers, of exemplary life, live +there. These are the physicians, surgeons, and apothecaries of the +hospital, and are so skilful and useful, that they cause many marvelous +cures, both in medicine and in surgery. + +The streets of the city are compactly built up with houses, mostly of +stone, although some are of wood. Many are roofed with clay tiling, and +others with nipa. They are excellent edifices, lofty and spacious, and +have large rooms and many windows, and balconies, with iron gratings, +that embellish them. More are daily being built and finished. There +are about six hundred houses within the walls, and a greater number, +built of wood, in the suburbs; and all are the habitations and homes +of Spaniards. + +The streets, squares, and churches are generally filled with people +of all classes, especially Spaniards--all, both men and women, +clad and gorgeously adorned in silks. They wear many ornaments and +all kinds of fine clothes, because of the ease with which these are +obtained. Consequently this is one of the settlements most highly +praised, by the foreigners who resort to it, of all in the world, +both for the above reason, and for the great provision and abundance +of food and other necessaries for human life found there, and sold +at moderate prices. + +Manila has two drives for recreation. One is by land, along the point +called Nuestra Senora de Guia. It extends for about a legua along +the shore, and is very clean and level. Thence it passes through a +native street and settlement, called Bagunbayan, to a chapel, much +frequented by the devout, called Nuestra Senora de Guia, and continues +for a goodly distance further to a monastery and mission-house of +the Augustinians, called Mahalat. [182] + +The other drive extends through one of the city gates to a native +settlement, called Laguio, by which one may go to a chapel of San +Anton, and to a monastery and mission-house of discalced Franciscans, +a place of great devotion, near the city, called La Candelaria. [183] + +This city is the capital of the kingdom and the head of the +government of all the islands. It is the metropolis of the other +cities and settlements of the islands. In it reside the Audiencia and +Chancilleria of his Majesty, and the governor and captain-general of +the islands. [184] + +Manila has a city cabildo with two alcaldes-in-ordinary, twelve +perpetual regidors, an alguacil-mayor [_i.e._, chief constable], +a royal standard-bearer, the scrivener of the cabildo, and other +officials. + +The archbishop of the Filipinas Islands resides in this city. He has +his metropolitan church, and all the cathedral dignitaries--canons, +racioneros, medias racioneros, [185] chaplains, and sacristans--and a +music-choir, who chant to the accompaniment of the organ and of flutes +[_ministriles_]. The cathedral is quite ornate and well decorated, +and the Divine offices are celebrated there with the utmost gravity +and ceremony. As suffragans the cathedral has three bishops--namely, +in the island of Sebu, and in Cagayan and Camarines. [186] + +There is a royal treasury with three royal officials--factor, +accountant, and treasurer--by whom the royal revenue of all the +islands is managed. [187] + +The vessels sailing annually to Nueva Espana with the merchandise and +investments of all the islands are despatched from the city of Manila; +and they return thither from Nueva Espana with the proceeds of this +merchandise, and the usual reenforcements. + +In the city is established the camp of the regular soldiers whom his +Majesty has had stationed in the islands. + +Several galleys are also stationed at Manila with their general and +captains, as well as other war-vessels, of deep draft, and smaller +ones built like those used by the natives, to attend to the needs of +all the islands. + +The majority of the vessels from China, Japon, Maluco, Borney, Sian, +Malaca, and India, that come to the Filipinas with their merchandise +and articles of trade, gather in the bay and river of Manila. In that +city they sell and trade for all the islands and their settlements. + +In the province [of Cagayan] of this same island of Luzon was founded +the city of Segovia, [188] during the term of Don Goncalo Ronquillo, +the third governor. It has two hundred Spanish inhabitants who live in +wooden houses on the shore of the Tajo River, two leguas from the sea +and port of Camalayuga. There is a stone fort near the city for the +defense of it and of the river. This fort mounts some artillery, and +has its own commandant. Besides the inhabitants, there are generally +one hundred regular soldiers, arquebusiers, and their officers. They +are all in charge and under command of the alcalde-mayor of the +province, who is its military commander. + +In that city is established a bishop and his church, although at +present the latter has no dignitaries or prebendaries. [189] There +is a city cabildo consisting of two alcaldes, six regidors, and an +alguacil-mayor. The city abounds in all kinds of food and refreshment +at very cheap prices. + +The city of Caceres was founded in the province of Camarines of the +same island of Luzon, during the term of Doctor Sande, governor of +the Filipinas. It has about one hundred Spanish inhabitants; and +has its cabildo, consisting of alcaldes, regidors, and officials. A +bishop of that province is established there and has his church, +although without dignitaries or prebendaries. A monastery of discalced +Franciscans is located there. The government and military affairs of +that province are under one alcalde-mayor and war-captain, who resides +in Caceres. The latter is a place abounding in and furnished with all +kinds of provisions, at very low rates. It is founded on the bank of +a river, four leguas inland from the sea, and its houses are of wood. + +The fourth city is that called Santisimo Nombre de Jesus; it is located +in the island of Sebu, in the province of Bicayas or Pintados. It was +the first Spanish settlement and was founded by the adelantado Miguel +Lopez de Legazpi, the first governor. It is a fine seaport, whose water +is very clear and deep, and capable of holding many vessels. The city +has an excellent stone fort, which mounts a considerable quantity of +artillery, and which has its commandant and officers for the guard +and defense of the port and of the city. It is sufficiently garrisoned +with regulars, and is under command of the alcalde-mayor, the military +commander of the province, who lives in the city. The settlement +contains about two hundred Spanish inhabitants who live in houses +of wood. It has a cabildo, consisting of two alcaldes-in-ordinary, +eight regidors, and an alguacil-mayor and his officers. It has a +bishop and his church, like those of other cities of these islands, +without prebendaries. [190] + +The city is provided with food by, and is a station for, the ships +going from Maluco to Manila. Through his Majesty's concession they keep +there a deep-draft merchant vessel, which generally leaves its port +for Nueva Espana, laden with the merchandise of the products gathered +in those provinces. It has a monastery of Augustinian religious and +a seminary of the Society of Jesus. + +The town of Arevalo was founded on the island of Oton [Panay], during +the term of Don Goncalo Ronquillo. [191] It contains about eighty +Spanish inhabitants, and is located close to the sea. It has a wooden +fort, which mounts some artillery, and a monastery of the Order of +St. Augustine; also a parish church, with its own vicar and secular +priest. This church belongs to the diocese of the Sebu bishopric. + +It has a cabildo, consisting of alcaldes, regidors, and other +officials. There is one alcalde-mayor and military leader in those +provinces. The town is well supplied with all kinds of provisions, +sold at very low rates. + +The settlement of Villa Fernandina, [192] which was founded in the +province of the Ilocos on the island of Luzon, is settled by Spaniards, +but very few of them remain there. It has a church, with its own vicar +and secular priest. Now no mention will be made of it, on account of +what has been said. The alcalde-mayor of the province resides there, +and the town is situated in the diocese of the Cagayan bishopric. + +From the earliest beginning of the conquest and pacification of +the Filipinas Islands, the preaching of the holy gospel therein +and the conversion of the natives to our holy Catholic faith were +undertaken. The first to set hand to this task were the religious +of the Order of St. Augustine, who went there with the adelantado +Legazpi in the fleet of discovery, and those of the same order who +went afterward to labor in this work, and toiled therein with great +fervor and zeal. Thus, finding the harvest in good season, they +gathered the first fruits of it, and converted and baptized many +infidels throughout the said islands. [193] + +Next to them in the fame of this conversion, the discalced religious +of the Order of St. Francis went to the islands by way of Nueva +Espana; then those of the Order of St. Dominic, and of the Society of +Jesus. [194] Lastly, the discalced Augustinian Recollects went. One and +all, after being established in the islands, worked in the conversion +and instruction of the natives. Consequently they have made--and +there are now in all the islands--a great number of baptized natives, +besides many others in many parts, who, for want of laborers, have been +put off, and are awaiting this blessing and priests to minister to +them. Hitherto there have been but few missions in charge of secular +priests, as not many of these have gone to the islands; and as very +few have been ordained there, for lack of students. + +The Order of St. Augustine has many missions in the islands of Pintados +and has established and occupied monasteries and various visitas. [195] +In the island of Luzon, they have those of the province of Ylocos, +some in Pangasinan, and all those of La Pampanga--a large number of +monasteries; while in the province of Manila and its vicinity they +have others, which are flourishing. + +The Order of St. Dominic has the missions of the province of Cagayan, +and others in the province of Pangasinan, where are many monasteries +and visitas. They also administer others about the city. + +The Order of St. Francis has some missions and monasteries about +Manila, all the province of Camarines and the coast opposite, and La +Laguna de Bay. These include many missions. + +The Society of Jesus has three large missions in the neighborhood +of Manila, which have many visitas. In the Pintados it has many +others on the islands of Sebu, Leite, Ybabao, Camar [Samar], Bohol, +and others near by. They have good men, who are solicitous for the +conversion of the natives. + +These four orders have produced many good results in the conversion +of these islands, as above stated; and in good sooth the people +have taken firm hold of the faith, as they are a people of so good +understanding. They have recognized the errors of their paganism +and the truths of the Christian religion; and they possess good and +well-built churches and monasteries of wood with their reredoses and +beautiful ornaments, and all the utensils, crosses, candlesticks, +and chalices of silver and gold. Many devotions are offered, and there +are many confraternities. There is assiduity in taking the sacraments +and in attendance on the Divine services; and the people are careful +to entertain and support their religious (to whom they show great +obedience and respect) by the many alms that they give them, as well +as by those that they give for the suffrages and the burial of their +dead, which they provide with all punctuality and liberality. + +At the same time that the religious undertook to teach the natives +the precepts of religion, they labored to instruct them in matters +of their own improvement, and established schools for the reading +and writing of Spanish among the boys. They taught them to serve in +the church, to sing the plain-song, and to the accompaniment of the +organ; to play the flute, to dance, and to sing; and to play the +harp, guitar, and other instruments. In this they show very great +adaptability, especially about Manila; where there are many fine +choirs of chanters and musicians composed of natives, who are skilful +and have good voices. There are many dancers, and musicians on the +other instruments which solemnize and adorn the feasts of the most +holy sacrament, and many other feasts during the year. The native +boys present dramas and comedies, both in Spanish and in their own +language, very charmingly. This is due to the care and interest of +the religious, who work tirelessly for the natives' advancement. [196] + +In these islands there is no native province or settlement which +resists conversion or does not desire it. But, as above stated, +baptism has been postponed in some districts, for lack of workers +to remain with the people, in order that they may not retrograde and +return to their idolatries. In this work, the best that is possible +is done, for the mission-fields are very large and extensive. In many +districts the religious make use, in their visitas, of certain of the +natives who are clever and well instructed, so that these may teach +the others to pray daily, instruct them in other matters touching +religion, and see that they come to mass at the central missions; and +in this way they succeed in preserving and maintaining their converts. + +Hitherto, the orders who control these missions in virtue of the +_omnimodo_ and other apostolic concessions [197] have attended to the +conversion of the natives, administered the sacraments, looked after +the spiritual and temporal and ecclesiastical affairs of the natives, +and absolved them in cases of difficulty. But now that there are an +archbishop and bishops, this is being curtailed, and the management +of these affairs is being given to the bishops, as the archbishop's +vicars--although not to such an extent, nor has the administration +of these natives been placed in their charge, in matters of justice, +and under the inspection and superintendence of the bishops, as they +have endeavored to obtain. [198] + +The governor and royal Audiencia of Manila attend to what it is +advisable to provide and direct for the greatest accomplishment and +advancement of this conversion, and the administration of the natives +and their missions--both by causing the encomenderos to assist +the religious and churches, in the encomiendas that they enjoy, +with the stipends and necessary expenses of the missions; and by +furnishing from the royal revenues what pertains to it, which is no +less a sum. [199] They also ordain whatever else is required to be +provided and remedied for the said missions and for the advancement +of the natives. This also is attended to by the archbishop and the +bishops in what pertains to them in their duty and charge as pastors. + +The Holy Office of the Inquisition, residing in Mexico of Nueva +Espana, has its commissaries, servants, and helpers in Manila and +in the bishoprics of the islands, who attend to matters touching +the Holy Office. They never fail to have plenty to do there because +of the entrance of so many strangers into those districts. However, +this holy tribunal does not have jurisdiction of the causes pertaining +to the natives, as the latter are so recently converted. + +All these islands are subdued, and are governed from Manila by means +of alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, and lieutenants, each of whom rules +and administers justice in his own district and province. Appeals from +their acts and sentences go to the royal Audiencia. The governor and +captain-general provides what pertains to government and war. + +The chiefs, who formerly held the other natives in subjection, +now have no power over them in the tyrannical manner of former +days. This was not the least benefit received by these natives in +having been freed from such servitude. However, it is true that +matters touching the slavery of former days have remained on the +same footing as before. The king our sovereign has ordered by his +decrees that the honors of the chiefs be preserved to them as such; +and that the other natives recognize them and assist them with certain +of the labors that they used to give when pagans. This is done with +the lords and possessors of barangays, and those belonging to such and +such a barangay are under that chief's control. When he harvests his +rice, they go one day to help him; and the same if he builds a house, +or rebuilds one. This chief lord of a barangay collects tribute from +his adherents, and takes charge of these collections, to pay them to +the encomendero. [200] + +Besides the above, each village has a governor [201] who is elected. He +and his constables who are called _vilangos_ [202] comprise the +usual magistracy among the natives. The governor hears civil suits +where a moderate sum is involved; in appeal, the case goes to the +corregidor or alcalde-mayor of the province. These governors are +elected annually by the votes of all the married natives of such +and such a village. The governor of Manila confirms the election, +and gives the title of governor to the one elected, and orders him to +take the residencia of the outgoing governor. [203] This governor, +in addition to the vilangos and scrivener (before whom he makes his +acts in writing, in the language of the natives of that province), +[204] holds also the chiefs--lords of barangays, and those who are +not so--under his rule and government, and, for any special service, +such as collections of tributes, and assignments of personal services, +as his _datos_ and _mandones_. [205] They do not allow the chiefs to +oppress the timaguas or slaves under their control. + +The same customs observed by these natives in their paganism, are +observed by them since they have become Christians, in so far as +they are not contrary to natural law, especially as to their slavery, +successions, inheritances, adoptions, wills, and lawful trading. In +their suits, they always allege and prove the custom, and are judged +by it, according to royal decrees to that effect. In other causes +which do not involve their customs, and in criminal cases, the matter +is determined by law as among Spaniards. + +All of these islands and their natives, so far as they were pacified, +were apportioned into encomiendas from the beginning. To the royal +crown were allotted those which were chief towns and ports, and the +dwellers of the cities and towns; and also other special encomiendas +and villages in all the provinces, for the necessities and expenses +of the royal estate. All the rest was assigned to the conquerors and +settlers who have served and labored for the conquest and pacification, +and in the war. This matter is in charge of the governor, who takes +into consideration the merits and services of the claimants. [206] +In like manner the villages that become vacant are assigned. There +are many very excellent encomiendas throughout the islands, and they +offer many profits, both by the amount of their tributes and by the +nature and value of what is paid as tribute. [207] The encomienda +lasts, according to the royal laws and decrees, and by the regular +order and manner of succession to them, for two lives; but it may +be extended to a third life, by permission. After it becomes vacant, +it is again assigned and granted anew. + +The tributes paid to their encomenderos by the natives were assigned +by the first governor, Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, in the provinces of +Vicayas and Pintados, and in the islands of Luzon and its vicinity; +they were equal to the sum of eight reals annually for an entire +tribute from each tributario. The natives were to pay it in their +products--in gold, cloth, cotton, rice, bells, fowls, and whatever +else they possessed or harvested. The fixed price and value of each +article was assigned so that, when the tribute was paid in any one +of them, or in all of them, it should not exceed the value of the +eight reals. So it has continued until now, and the governors have +increased the appraisements and values of the products at different +times, as they have deemed advisable. + +The encomenderos have made great profits in collecting in kind, for, +after they acquired possession of the products, they sold them at +higher prices. By this they increased their incomes and the proceeds +of their encomiendas considerably; until a few years ago his Majesty, +by petition of the religious and the pressure that they brought to +bear on him in this matter, ordered for this region that the natives +should pay their tribute in whatever they wished--in kind or in +money--without being compelled to do otherwise. Consequently, when +they should have paid their eight reals, they would have fulfilled +their obligation. Accordingly this rule was initiated; but experience +demonstrates that, although it seemed a merciful measure, and one +favorable to the natives, it is doing them great injury. For, since +they naturally dislike to work, they do not sow, spin, dig gold, +rear fowls, or raise other food supplies, as they did before, when +they had to pay the tribute in those articles. They easily obtain, +without so much work, the peso of money which is the amount of their +tribute. Consequently it follows that the natives have less capital +and wealth, because they do not work; and the country, which was +formerly very well provided and well-supplied with all products, +is now suffering want and deprivation of them. The owners of the +encomiendas, both those of his Majesty and those of private persons +who possess them, have sustained considerable loss and reduction in +the value of the encomiendas. + +When Gomez Perez Dasmarinas was appointed governor of the Filipinas, +he brought royal decrees ordering the formation of the camp in Manila, +with an enrollment of four hundred paid soldiers, with their officers, +galleys, and other military supplies, for the defense and security +of the country. Before that time all the Spanish inhabitants had +attended to that without any pay. Then an increase of two reals to +each tributario over the eight reals was ordered. This was to be +collected by the encomenderos at the same time when they collected +the eight reals of the tribute, and was to be delivered and placed +in the royal treasury. There this amount was to be entered on an +account separate from that of the other revenue of his Majesty, and +was to be applied in the following manner: one and one-half reals for +the expenses of the said camp and war stores; and the remaining half +real for the pay of the prebendaries of the Manila church, which his +Majesty pays from his treasury, until such time as their tithes and +incomes suffice for their sustenance. [208] + +These tributes are collected from all the natives, Christians and +infidels, in their entirety--except that in those encomiendas without +instruction the encomendero does not take the fourth part of the eight +reals (which equals two reals) for himself, since that encomienda has +no instruction or expenses for it; but he takes them and deposits +them in Manila, in a fund called "the fourths." [209] The money +obtained from this source is applied to and spent in hospitals for +the natives, and in other works beneficial to them, at the option of +the governor. As fast as the encomiendas are supplied with instruction +and religious, the collection of these fourths and their expenditure +in these special works cease. + +Some provinces have taken the census of their natives; and according to +these the tributes and the assignment of the two reals are collected. + +In most of the provinces no census has been taken, and the tributes +are collected when due by the encomenderos and their collectors, +through the chiefs of their encomiendas, by means of the lists and +memoranda of former years. From them the names of the deceased and of +those who have changed their residence are erased, and the names of +those who have grown up, and of those who have recently moved into the +encomienda, are added. When any shortage is perceived in the accounts, +a new count is requested and made. + +The natives are free to move from one island to another, and from +one province to another, and pay their tribute for that year in which +they move and change their residence in the place to which they move; +and to move from a Christian village that has instruction to another +village possessing it. But, on the other hand, they may not move from +a place having instruction to one without it, nor in the same village +from one barangay to another, nor from one faction to another. In +this respect, the necessary precautions are made by the government, +and the necessary provisions by the Audiencia, so that this system +may be kept, and so that all annoyances resulting from the moving of +the settled natives of one place to another place may be avoided. + +Neither are the natives allowed to go out of their villages for +trade, except by permission of the governor, or of his alcaldes-mayor +and justices, or even of the religious, who most often have been +embarrassed by this, because of the instruction. This is done so that +the natives may not wander about aimlessly when there is no need of +it, away from their homes and settlements. + +Those natives who possess slaves pay their tributes for them if the +slaves are _saguiguilirs_. If the slaves are _namamahays_ living +outside their owners' houses, they pay their own tributes, inasmuch +as they possess their own houses and means of gain. + +The Spaniards used to have slaves from these natives, whom they had +bought from them, and others whom they obtained in certain expeditions +during the conquest and pacification of the islands. This was stopped +by a brief of his Holiness [210] and by royal decrees. Consequently, +all of these slaves who were then in the possession of the Spanish, +and who were natives of these islands, in whatever manner they had +been acquired, were freed; and the Spaniards were forever prohibited +from holding them as slaves, or from capturing them for any reason, or +under pretext of war, or in any other manner. The service rendered by +these natives is in return for pay and daily wages. The other slaves +and captives that the Spaniards possess are Cafres and blacks brought +by the Portuguese by way of India, and are held in slavery justifiably, +in accordance with the provincial councils and the permissions of +the prelates and justices of those districts. + +The natives of these islands have also their personal services, which +they are obliged to render--in some parts more than in others--to +the Spaniards. These are done in different ways, and are commonly +called the _polo_. [211] For, where there are alcaldes-mayor and +justices, they assign and distribute certain natives by the week +for the service of their houses. They pay these servants a moderate +wage, which generally amounts to one-fourth real per day, and rice +for their food. The same is done by the religious for the mission, +and for their monasteries and churches, and for their works, and for +public works. [212] + +The Indians also furnish rice, and food of all kinds, at the prices +at which they are valued and sold among the natives. These prices +are always very moderate. The datos, vilangos, and fiscals make the +division, collect, and take these supplies from the natives; and in +the same manner they supply their encomenderos when these go to make +the collections. + +The greatest service rendered by these natives is on occasions of war, +when they act as rowers and crews for the vireys and vessels that go +on the expeditions, and as pioneers for any service that arises in +the course of the war, although their pay and wages are given them. + +In the same way natives are assigned and apportioned for the king's +works, such as the building of ships, the cutting of wood, the trade +of making the rigging, [213] the work in the artillery foundry, and +the service in the royal [214] magazines; and they are paid their +stipend and daily wage. + +In other things pertaining to the service of the Spaniards and their +expeditions, works, and any other service, performed by the natives, +the service is voluntary, and paid by mutual agreement; [215] for, +as hitherto, the Spaniards have worked no mines, nor have they given +themselves to the gains to be derived from field labors, there is no +occasion for employing the natives in anything of that sort. + +Most of the Spaniards of the Filipinas Islands reside in the city +of Manila, the capital of the kingdom, and where the chief trade +and commerce is carried on. Some encomenderos live in provinces or +districts adjacent to Manila, while other Spaniards live in the +cities of Segovia, Caceres, Santisimo Nombre de Jesus (in Sebu), +and in the town of Arevalo, where they are settled, and where most +of them have their encomiendas. + +Spaniards may not go to the Indian villages, [216] except for the +collection of the tributes when they are due; and then only the +alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, and justices. It is not permitted these +to remain continually in one settlement of their district, but they +must visit as much of it as possible. They must change their residence +and place of abode every four months to another chief village and +settlement, where all the natives may obtain the benefit of their +presence; and so that the natives may receive as slight annoyance +as possible in supporting them and in the ordinary service that they +render them. [217] + +The governor makes appointments to all offices. When the term of office +expires, the royal Aurdiencia orders the residencia of each official +to be taken, and his case is decided in accordance therewith; and +until the residencia is completed, the incumbent cannot be appointed +to any other duty or office. The governor also appoints commandants +of forts, companies, and other military officials, in all the cities, +towns, and hamlets of the islands. [218] + +Certain offices of regidors and notaries have been sold by royal decree +for one life. But the sale of these offices has been superseded, +as it is now considered that the price paid for them is of little +consideration, while the disadvantage of perpetuating the purchasers +in office by this method is greater. + +Elections of alcaldes-in-ordinary for all the Spanish towns are held +on New Year's day by the cabildo and magistracy. The residencias +of these alcaldes-in-ordinary and their cabildos are ordered by +his Majesty to be taken at the same time as that of the governor +and captain-general of the islands is taken; and they give account +of the administration of the revenues and the estates under their +care. However, the governor may take it before this, every year, +or whenever he thinks it expedient and cause the balances of their +accounts to be collected. With the governor's advice and permission +the expenses desired by the towns are made. + +The city of Manila has sufficient public funds for certain years, +through the fines imposed by its judges; in its own particular +possessions, inside and outside the city; in the reweighing of the +merchandise and the rents of all the shops and sites of the Sangleys +in the parian; and in the monopoly on playing cards. All this was +conceded to the city by his Majesty, especially for the expenses of +its fortification. [219] These revenues are spent for that purpose; for +the salaries of its officials, and those of the agents sent to Espana; +and for the feasts of the city, chief of which are St. Potenciana's +day, May nineteen, when the Spaniards entered and seized the city, +and the day of St. Andrew, November 30, the date on which the pirate +Limahon was conquered and driven from the city. On that day the city +officials take out the municipal standard, and to the sound of music go +to vespers and mass at the church of San Andres, where the entire city, +with the magistracy and cabildo and the royal Audiencia, assemble +with all solemnity. The above revenues are also used in receiving +the governors at their first arrival in the country, in the kings' +marriage feasts, and the births of princes, and in the honors and +funeral celebrations for the kings and princes who die. In all the +above the greatest possible display is made. + +The other cities and settlements do not possess as yet so many +sources of wealth or revenue, or the occasions on which to spend +them--although, as far as possible, they take part in them, in all +celebrations of the same kind. + +The Spaniards living in the islands are divided into five classes of +people: namely, prelates, religious, and ecclesiastical ministers, +both secular and regular; encomenderos, settlers, and conquerors; +soldiers, officers, and officials of war (both on land and sea), +and those for navigation; merchants, business men, and traders; and +his Majesty's agents for government, justice, and administration of +his royal revenue. + +The ecclesiastical prelates have already been stated, and are as +follows: The archbishop of Manila, who resides in the city, as +metropolitan, in charge of his cathedral church; he has a salary +of four thousand pesos, [220] which is paid from the royal treasury +annually. Likewise the salaries paid to the holders of the dignidades, +[221] canonries, and other prebends, and those performing other +services, are paid in the same manner. They are all under royal +patronage, and are provided in accordance with the king's orders. The +archbishop's office and jurisdiction consists of and extends to all, +both the spiritual and temporal, that is ecclesiastic, and to its +management. [222] + +The bishop of the city of Santisimo Nombre de Jesus in Sibu, that +of Segovia in Cagayan, and that of Caceres in Camarines, have the +same rights of jurisdiction and enjoy the same privileges in their +dioceses, since they are suffragans of the archbishop of Manila; +appeal from their judgments is made to the latter, and he summons and +convokes them to his provincial councils whenever necessary. They +receive each an annual salary of five hundred thousand maravedis +for their support, which is paid from the royal treasury of Manila, +besides their offerings and pontifical dues. All together it is quite +sufficient for their support, according to the convenience of things +and the cheapness of the country. At present the bishops do not possess +churches with prebendaries nor is any money set aside for that. [223] + +The regular prelates are the provincials of the four mendicant orders, +namely, St. Dominic, St. Augustine, St. Francis, the Society of +Jesus, and the discalced Augustinians. [224] Each prelate governs +his own order and visits the houses. The orders have nearly all the +missions to the natives under their charge, in whatever pertains to +the administration of the sacraments and conversion--by favor of, +and in accordance with, their privileges and the apostolic bulls, in +which until now they have maintained themselves--and in what pertains +to judicial matters, as vicars of the bishops, and through appointment +and authorization of the latter. The discalced Augustinians as yet +have no missions, as they have but recently entered the islands. + +The monasteries are supported by certain special incomes that they +possess and have acquired--especially those of the Augustinians +and those of the Society--and by help and concessions granted by +his Majesty. The Dominicans and Franciscans do not possess or allow +incomes or properties; [225] and for them, as for the other orders, +the principal source of revenue is in the alms, offerings, and aid +given by the districts where they are established and where they have +charge. This help is given by both Spaniards and natives, very piously +and generously. They are aided also by the stipend given them from +the encomiendas for the instruction that they give there. Consequently +the religious of the orders live well and with the comfort necessary. + +The first encomenderos, conquerors, and settlers of the islands, +and their issue, are honorably supported by the products of their +encomiendas, and by certain means of gain and trading interests that +they possess, as do the rest of the people. There are a great number of +them, each one of whom lives and possesses his house in the city and +settlement of Spaniards in whose province he has his encomienda. This +they do in order not to abandon their encomiendas, and thus they are +nearer the latter for their needs and for collections. + +Now but few of the first conquerors who gained the country and went +there for its conquest with the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi +remain alive. + +The soldiers and officers of war and of naval expeditions formerly +consisted of all the dwellers and inhabitants of the islands, who +rendered military service without any pay or salary. They went on all +the expeditions and pacifications that arose, and guarded the forts +and presidios, and cities and settlements. This was their principal +exercise and occupation. They were rewarded by the governor, who +provided them with encomiendas, offices, and profits of the country +according to their merits and services. [226] + +At that time the soldiers of the islands were the best in the +Indias. They were very skilful and well-disciplined by both land +and sea, and were esteemed and respected by all those nations. They +gloried in their arms, and in acquitting themselves valiantly. + +Afterward, when Gomez Perez Das Marinas entered upon the government of +the Filipinas, he founded the regular camp of four hundred soldiers: +the arquebusiers, with pay of six pesos per month; the musketeers, +with eight pesos; six captains, with annual pay of four hundred +and twenty pesos apiece; their alfereces, sergeants, corporals, +standard-bearers, and drummers, with pay in proportion to their +duties; one master-of-camp, with annual pay of one thousand four +hundred pesos; one sargento-mayor with captain's pay; one adjutant of +the sargento-mayor and field-captain, with monthly pay of ten pesos; +two castellans; commandants of the two fortresses of Manila, with +four hundred pesos apiece annually; their lieutenants; squads of +soldiers and artillerymen; one general of galleys, with annual pay +of eight hundred pesos; each galley one captain, with annual pay of +three hundred pesos; their boatswains, boatswains' mates, coxswains, +alguacils of the galleys, soldiers, artillerymen, master-carpenters, +riggers, sailors, conscripts, [227] galley-crews of Spanish, Sangley, +and native convicts, condemned for crimes; and, when there is lack +of convicts, good rowers are obtained from the natives for pay, +for the period of the expedition and the occasion of the voyage. [228] + +In the vessels and fleets of large vessels for the Nueva Espana line, +the ships that are sent carry a general, admiral, masters, boatswains, +commissaries, stewards, alguacils, sergeants of marine artillery +[_condestables_], artillerymen, sailors, pilots and their assistants, +common seamen, carpenters, calkers, and coopers, all in his Majesty's +pay, on the account of Nueva Espana, from whose royal treasury they +are paid. All that is necessary for this navigation is supplied +there. Their provisions and appointments are made by the viceroy; +and this has hitherto pertained to him, even though the ships may have +been constructed in the Filipinas. They sail thence with their cargo +of merchandise for Nueva Espana, and return thence to the Filipinas +with the reenforcements of soldiers and supplies, and whatever else +is necessary for the camp, besides passengers and religious, and the +money proceeding from the investments and merchandise. [229] + +After the establishment of a regular camp for guard and expeditions, +the other inhabitants, dwellers, and residents were enrolled without +pay under the banners of six captains of the Filipinas, for special +occasions requiring the defense of the city. But they were relieved +of all other duties pertaining to the troops, unless they should +offer of their own accord to go upon any expedition, or volunteer +for any special occasion, in order to acquire merits and benefits, so +that they may be given encomiendas that become vacant, and offices, +and the means of profit of the country. They are not compelled or +obliged to do this, unless they are encomenderos. Consequently all +have given themselves to trading, as there is no other occupation, +but they are not unmindful of military service. + +His Majesty prohibits all who are in his pay in the military forces +of the islands from engaging in commerce; and orders the governor +not to allow this, or permit them to export goods to Nueva Espana. If +the governors would observe that order, it would not be amiss. [230] + +The merchants and business men form the bulk of the residents of +the islands, because of the great amount of merchandise brought +there--outside of native products--from China, Japon, Maluco, Malaca, +Sian, Camboja, Borneo, and other districts. They invest in this +merchandise and export it annually in the vessels that sail to Nueva +Espana, and at times to Japon, where great profits are made from +raw silk. Thence on the return to Manila are brought the proceeds, +which hitherto have resulted in large and splendid profits. + +Through the very great increase of this trade--which was harmful +and prejudicial to the Spanish merchants who shipped goods to Peru +and Nueva Espana, and to the royal duties collected on the shipments +from Espana--and through the business men of Mexico and Peru having +become greedy of trade and commerce with the Filipinas, by means of +their agents and factors, so that the trade with Espana was ceasing +in great measure, and the merchants were sending to the Filipinas for +their investments great consignments of silver, which by that means +flowed yearly from his Majesty's kingdoms, to fall into the possession +of infidels: all persons of Nueva Espana and Peru were prohibited from +trading and engaging in commerce in the Filipinas, and from taking the +Chinese merchandise to those regions. [231] Permission was given to +the inhabitants and residents of the Filipinas that they alone might +trade in the said merchandise, and export it. They are to take these +goods themselves, or send them with persons who belong to the islands, +so that they may sell them. From the proceeds of the said merchandise, +they may not carry to the Filipinas more than five hundred thousand +pesos each year. [232] + +A considerable number of _somas_ and junks (which are large +vessels) generally come from Great China to Manila, laden with +merchandise. Every year thirty or even forty ships are wont to come, +and although they do not come together, in the form of a trading +and war fleet, still they do come in groups with the monsoon and +settled weather, which is generally at the new moon in March. They +belong to the provinces of Canton, Chincheo, and Ucheo [Fo-Kien], +and sail from those provinces. They make their voyage to the city of +Manila in fifteen or twenty days, sell their merchandise, and return +in good season, before the vendavals set in--the end of May and a +few days of June--in order not to endanger their voyage. + +These vessels come laden with merchandise, and bring wealthy merchants +who own the ships, and servants and factors of other merchants who +remain in China. They leave China with the permission and license +of the Chinese viceroys and mandarins. The merchandise that they +generally bring and sell to the Spaniards consists of raw silk in +bundles, of the fineness of two strands [_dos cabecas_], and other +silk of poorer quality; fine untwisted silk, white and of all colors, +wound in small skeins; quantities of velvets, some plain, and some +embroidered in all sorts of figures, colors, and fashions--others with +body of gold, and embroidered with gold; woven stuffs and brocades, of +gold and silver upon silk of various colors and patterns; quantities +of gold and silver thread in skeins over thread and silk--but the +glitter of all the gold and silver is false, and only on paper; +damasks, satins, taffetans, _gorvaranes_, _picotes_, [233] and other +cloths of all colors, some finer and better than others; a quantity +of linen made from grass, called lencesuelo [handkerchief]; [234] +and white cotton cloth of different kinds and qualities, for all +uses. They also bring musk, benzoin, and ivory; many bed ornaments, +hangings, coverlets, and tapestries of embroidered velvet; damask +and gorvaran of different shades; tablecloths, cushions, and carpets; +horse-trappings of the same stuff, and embroidered with glass beads and +seed-pearls; also some pearls and rubies, sapphires and crystal-stones; +metal basins, copper kettles, and other copper and cast-iron pots; +quantities of all sorts of nails, sheet-iron, tin and lead; saltpetre +and gunpowder. They supply the Spaniards with wheat flour; preserves +made of orange, peach, _scorzonera_, [235] pear, nutmeg, and ginger, +and other fruits of China; salt pork and other salt meats; live fowls +of good breed, and very fine capons; quantities of green fruit, oranges +of all kinds; excellent chestnuts, walnuts, pears, and _chicueyes_ +[236] (both green and dried, a delicious fruit); quantities of fine +thread of all kinds, needles, and knick-knacks; little boxes and +writing-cases; beds, tables, chairs, and gilded benches, painted in +many figures and patterns. They bring domestic buffaloes; geese that +resemble swans; horses, some mules and asses; even caged birds, some +of which talk, while others sing, and they make them play innumerable +tricks. The Chinese furnish numberless other gewgaws and ornaments +of little value and worth, which are esteemed among the Spaniards; +besides a quantity of fine crockery of all kinds; _canganes_, [237] +_sines_, and black and blue robes; _tacley_, which are beads of all +kinds; strings of cornelians, and other beads and precious stones of +all colors; pepper and other spices; and rarities--which, did I refer +to them all, I would never finish, nor have sufficient paper for it. + +As soon as the ship reaches the mouth of the bay of Manila, the +watchman stationed at the island of Miraveles goes out to it in a +light vessel. Having examined the ship, he puts a guard of two or three +soldiers on it, so that it may anchor upon the bar, near the city, and +to see that no one shall disembark from the vessel, or anyone enter it +from outside, until the vessel has been inspected. By the signal made +with fire by the watchman from the said island, and the advice that he +sends in all haste to the city--of what ship it is, whence it has come, +what merchandise and people it brings--before the vessel has finished +anchoring, the governor and the city generally know all about it. [238] + +When the vessel has arrived and anchored, the royal officials go to +inspect it and the register of the merchandise aboard it. At the +same time the valuation of the cargo is made according to law, of +what it is worth in Manila; for the vessel immediately pays three per +cent on everything to his Majesty. [239] After the register has been +inspected and the valuation made, then the merchandise is immediately +unloaded by another official into champans, and taken to the Parian, +or to other houses and magazines, outside of the city. There the +goods are freely sold. + +No Spaniard, Sangley, or other person is allowed to go to the ship +to buy or trade merchandise, food, or anything else. Neither is it +allowed, when the merchandise is ashore, to take it from them or +buy it with force and violence; but the trade must be free, and the +Sangleys can do what they like with their property. + +The ordinary price of the silks (both raw and woven) and the +cloths--which form the bulk of the cargo--is settled leisurely, and +by persons who understand it, both on the part of the Spaniards and +that of the Sangleys. The purchase price is paid in silver and reals, +for the Sangleys do not want gold, or any other articles, and will not +take other things to China. All the trading must be completed by the +end of the month of May, or thereabout, in order that the Sangleys +may return and the Spaniards have the goods ready to lade upon the +vessels that go to Nueva Espana by the end of June. However, the +larger dealers and those who have most money usually do their trading +after that time, at lower rates, and keep the merchandise until the +following year. Certain Sangleys remain in Manila with a portion of +their merchandise for the same purpose, when they have not had a good +sale for it, in order to go on selling it more leisurely. The Sangleys +are very skilful and intelligent traders, and of great coolness and +moderation, in order to carry on their business better. They are ready +to trust and accommodate freely whoever they know treats them fairly, +and does not fail in his payments to them when these are due. On +the other hand, as they are a people without religion or conscience, +and so greedy, they commit innumerable frauds and deceits in their +merchandise. The purchaser must watch them very closely, and know +them, in order not to be cheated by them. The purchasers, however, +acquit themselves by their poor payments and the debts that they incur; +and both sides generally keep the judges and Audiencia quite busy. + +Some Japanese and Portuguese merchantmen also come every year from +the port of Nangasaque in Japon, at the end of October with the north +winds, and at the end of March. They enter and anchor at Manila +in the same way. The bulk of their cargo is excellent wheat-flour +for the provisioning of Manila, and highly prized salt meats. They +also bring some fine woven silk goods of mixed colors; beautiful +and finely-decorated screens done in oil and gilt; all kinds of +cutlery; many suits of armor, spears, catans, and other weapons, +all finely wrought; writing-cases, boxes and small cases of wood, +japanned and curiously marked; other pretty gewgaws; excellent fresh +pears; barrels and casks of good salt tunny; cages of sweet-voiced +larks, called _fimbaros_; and other trifles. In this trading, some +purchases are also made, without royal duties being collected from +those vessels. The bulk of the merchandise is used in the country, but +some goods are exported to Nueva Espana. The price is generally paid +in reals, although they are not so greedy for them as the Chinese, +for there is silver in Japon. They generally bring a quantity of it +as merchandise in plates, and it is sold at moderate rates. + +These vessels return to Japon at the season of the vendavals, during +the months of June and July. They carry from Manila their purchases, +which are composed of raw Chinese silk, gold, deerskin, and brazil-wood +for their dyes. They take honey, manufactured wax, palm and Castilian +wine, civet-cats, large tibors in which to store their tea, glass, +cloth, and other curiosities from Espana. + +Some Portuguese vessels sail to Manila annually during the monsoon of +the vendavals, from Maluco, Malaca, and India. They take merchandise +consisting of spices--cloves, cinnamon, and pepper; slaves, +both blacks and Cafres; cotton cloth of all sorts, fine muslins +[_caniquies_], linens, gauzes, _rambuties_, and other delicate +and precious cloths; amber, and ivory; cloths edged with _pita_, +[240] for use as bed-covers; hangings, and rich counterpanes from +Vengala [Bengal], Cochin, and other countries; many gilt articles +and curiosities; jewels of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, topazes, +balas-rubies, and other precious stones, both set and loose; many +trinkets and ornaments from India; wine, raisins, and almonds; +delicious preserves, and other fruits brought from Portugal and +prepared in Goa; carpets and tapestries from Persia and Turquia, +made of fine silks and wools; beds, writing-cases, parlor-chairs, +and other finely-gilded furniture, made in Macao; needle-work in +colors and in white, of chain-lace and royal point lace, and other +fancy-work of great beauty and perfection. Purchases of all the above +are made in Manila, and paid in reals and gold. The vessels return +in January with the brisas, which is their favorable monsoon. They +carry to Maluco provisions of rice and wine, crockery-ware, and +other wares needed there; while to Malaca they take only the gold or +money, besides a few special trinkets and curiosities from Espana, +and emeralds. The royal duties are not collected from these vessels. + +A few smaller vessels also sail from Borneo, during the vendavals. They +belong to the natives of that island, and return during the first part +of the brisas. They enter the river of Manila and sell their cargoes +in their vessels. These consist of fine and well-made palm-mats, a few +slaves for the natives, sago--a certain food of theirs prepared from +the pith of palms--and tibors; large and small jars, glazed black and +very fine, which are of great service and use; and excellent camphor, +which is produced on that island. Although beautiful diamonds are found +on the opposite coast, they are not taken to Manila by those vessels, +for the Portuguese of Malaca trade for them on that coast. These +articles from Borneo are bought more largely by the natives than by +the Spaniards. The articles taken back by the Borneans are provisions +of wine and rice, cotton cloth, and other wares of the islands, +which are wanting in Borneo. + +Very seldom a few vessels sail to Manila from Sian and Camboja. They +carry some benzoin, pepper, ivory, and cotton cloth; rubies and +sapphires, badly cut and set; a few slaves; rhinoceros horns, and the +hides, hoofs, and teeth of this animal; and other goods. In return they +take the wares found in Manila. Their coming and return is between the +brisas and the vendavals, during the months of April, May, and June. + +In these classes of merchandise, and in the products of the +islands--namely, gold, cotton cloth, mendrinaque, and cakes of white +and yellow wax--do the Spaniards effect their purchases, investments, +and exports for Nueva Espana. They make these as is most suitable +for each person, and lade them on the vessels that are to make the +voyage. They value and register these goods, for they pay into the +royal treasury of Manila, before the voyage, the two per cent royal +duties on exports, besides the freight charges of the vessel, which +amount to forty Castilian ducados [241] per tonelada. This latter is +paid at the port of Acapulco in Nueva Espana, into the royal treasury +of the said port, in addition to the ten per cent duties for entrance +and first sale in Nueva Espana. [242] + +Inasmuch as the ships which are despatched with the said merchandise +are at his Majesty's account, and other ships cannot be sent, there +is generally too small a place in the cargo for all the purchases. For +that reason the governor divides the cargo-room among all the shippers, +according to their wealth and merits, after they have been examined +by intelligent men, appointed for that purpose. Consequently every +man knows from his share how much he can export, and only that amount +is received in the vessel; and careful and exact account is taken of +it. Trustworthy persons are appointed who are present at the lading; +and space is left for the provisions and passengers that are to go +in the vessels. When the ships are laden and ready to sail, they +are delivered to the general and the officials who have them in +charge. Then they start on their voyage at the end of the month of +June, with the first vendavals. + +This trade and commerce is so great and profitable, and easy to +control--for it only lasts three months in the year, from the +time of the arrival of the ships with their merchandise, until +those vessels that go to Nueva Espana take that merchandise--that +the Spaniards do not apply themselves to, or engage in, any other +industry. Consequently, there is no husbandry or field-labor worthy of +consideration. Neither do the Spaniards work the gold mines or placers, +which are numerous. They do not engage in many other industries that +they could turn to with great profit, if the Chinese trade should +fail them. That trade has been very hurtful and prejudicial in +this respect, as well as for the occupations and farm industries in +which the natives used to engage. Now the latter are abandoning and +forgetting those labors. Besides, there is the great harm and loss +resulting from the immense amount of silver that passes annually by +this way [of the trade], into the possession of infidels, which can +never, by any way, return into the possession of the Spaniards. + +His Majesty's agents for the government and justice, and the royal +officials for the management of his Majesty's revenue, are as follows: +First, the governor and captain-general of all the islands, who +is at the same time president of the royal Audiencia of Manila. He +has a salary of eight thousand pesos de minas per year for all his +offices. [243] He possesses his own body-guard of twelve halberdiers, +whose captain receives three hundred pesos per year. The governor alone +provides and regulates all that pertains to war and government, with +the advice of the auditors of the Audiencia in difficult matters. He +tries in the first instance the criminal cases of the regular soldiers, +and any appeals from his decisions go to the Audiencia. [244] The +governor appoints many alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, deputies, and +other magistrates, throughout the islands and their provinces, for +carrying on the government and justice, and for military matters. These +appointments are made before a government chief scrivener appointed +by his Majesty, who helps the governor. + +The governor likewise takes part with the royal Audiencia, as +its president, in whatever pertains to its duties. The Audiencia +consists of four auditors and one fiscal--each of whom receives an +annual salary of two thousand pesos de minas [245]--one reporter, +one court scrivener, one alguacil-mayor, with his assistants, one +governor of the prison of the court, one chancellor, one registrar, +two bailiffs, one chaplain and sacristan, one executioner, attorneys, +and receivers. The Audiencia tries all causes, civil and criminal, +taken to it from all the provinces of its district. [246] These +include the Filipinas Islands and the mainland of China, already +discovered or to be discovered. The Audiencia has the same authority +as the chancillerias of Valladolid and Granada in Espana. At the same +time, the Audiencia provides whatever is advisable for the proper +and systematic management of the royal exchequer. + +His Majesty's revenues in the Filipinas Islands are in charge +of and their tribunal consists of three royal officials. They are +appointed by his Majesty, and consist of a factor, an accountant, and +a treasurer. They each receive an annual salary of five hundred and +ten thousand maravedis. They have their clerk of mines, and registrars +of the royal revenues, and their executive and other officials, all +of whom reside in Manila. From that city they manage and attend to +everything pertaining to the royal revenues throughout the islands. + +His Majesty has a number of encomiendas apportioned to his royal crown +throughout the provinces of the Filipinas Islands. The tributes of +those encomiendas are collected for his royal treasury by his royal +officials and the collectors engaged for that purpose by the royal +officials. From year to year these amount to thirty thousand pesos, +after deducting costs and expenses. They collect, from one year to +another, eight thousand pesos in tributes from the Sangleys--both +Christians and infidels. [247] + +They also collect the fifth of all gold dug in the islands. By +special concession for a limited period, the tenth is collected +instead of the fifth. There is a declaration concerning it, to the +effect that the natives shall pay no fifths or other duties on the +jewels and gold inherited by them from their ancestors before his +Majesty owned the country. Sufficient measures have been taken for +the clear understanding of this concession and its investigation, +for that on which the tenth has once been paid, and the steps to +be taken in the matter. From one year to another they collect ten +thousand pesos from these fifths, for much is concealed. [248] + +The assignment of two reals from each tributario inures to the royal +treasury and is paid into it, for the pay of the soldiers and the +stipend of the prebendaries. These are collected from the encomenderos, +in proportion to, and on the account of, their tributes, and amount +annually to thirty-four thousand pesos. + +The fines and expenses of justice are committed to the care of the +treasurer of the royal revenues, and are kept in the treasury. They +amount annually to three thousand pesos. + +The three per cent duties on the Chinese merchandise of the Sangley +vessels average forty thousand pesos annually. [249] + +The two per cent duties paid by the Spaniards for exporting merchandise +to Nueva Espana amount annually to twenty thousand pesos. On the +merchandise and money sent from Nueva Espana to the Filipinas, +result eight thousand pesos more. Consequently, in these things and +in other dues of less importance that belong to the royal treasury, +his Majesty receives about one hundred and fifty thousand pesos, +or thereabout, annually in the Filipinas. [250] + +Inasmuch as this amount does not suffice for the expenses that are +incurred, the royal treasury of Nueva Espana sends annually to that of +the Filipinas, in addition to the above revenues, some assistance in +money--a greater or less sum, as necessity requires. For his Majesty +has thus provided for it from the proceeds of the ten per cent duties +on the Chinese merchandise that are collected at the port of Acapulco +in Nueva Espana. This assistance is given into the keeping of the +royal officials in Manila, and they take charge of it, with the rest +of the revenues that they manage and collect. + +From all this gross sum of his Majesty's revenue, the salaries of +the governor and royal Audiencia are paid, as well as the stipends +of prelates and ecclesiastical prebendaries, the salaries of the +magistrates, and of the royal officials and their assistants; the +pay of all the military officers and regular soldiers; his Majesty's +share of the stipends for instruction, and the building of churches +and their ornaments; the concessions and gratifications that he has +allowed to certain monasteries, and private persons; the building +of large vessels for the navigation to Nueva Espana, and of galleys +and other vessels for the defense of the islands; expenses for +gunpowder and ammunition; the casting of artillery, and its care; +the expense arising for expeditions and individual undertakings +in the islands, and in their defense; that of navigations to, and +negotiations with, the kingdoms in their vicinity, which are quite +common and necessary. Consequently, since his Majesty's revenues in +these islands are so limited, and his expenses so great, the royal +treasury falls short, and suffers poverty and need. [251] + +The proceeds from the ten per cent duties and the freight charges of +the ships, which are collected at Acapulco in Nueva Espana, on the +merchandise sent there from the Filipinas, although considerable, are +also not always sufficient for the expenses incurred in Nueva Espana +with the ships, soldiers, ammunition, and other supplies sent annually +to the Filipinas. These expenses are generally greatly in excess +of those duties, and the amount is made up from the royal treasury +of Mexico. Consequently, the king our sovereign derives as yet no +profit from any revenues of the Filipinas, but rather an expenditure, +by no means small, from his revenues in Nueva Espana. He sustains the +Filipinas only for the christianization and conversion of the natives, +and for the hopes of greater fruits in other kingdoms and provinces of +Asia, which are expected through this gateway, at God's good pleasure. + +Every year the Audiencia audits the accounts of the royal officials of +his Majesty's revenues, strikes the balances, and sends the accounts +to the tribunal of accounts in Mexico. [252] + +In the city of Manila, and in all those Spanish settlements of the +islands, reside Sangleys, who have come from Great China, besides +the merchants. They have appointed settlements and are engaged in +various trades, and go to the islands for their livelihood. Some +possess their parians and shops. Some engage in fishing and farming +among the natives, throughout the country; and go from one island to +another to trade, in large or small champans. [253] + +The annual vessels from Great China bring these Sangleys in great +numbers, especially to the city of Manila, for the sake of the profits +that are gained from their fares. As there is a superabundance of +population in China, and the wages and profits there are little, +they regard as of importance whatever they get in the Filipinas. + +Very great annoyances result from this; for, not only can there be +little security to the country with so many infidels, but the Sangleys +are a wicked and vicious race. Through intercourse and communication +with them, the natives improve little in Christianity and morals. And +since they come in such numbers and are so great eaters, they raise +the price of provisions, and consume them. + +It is true that the city could not be maintained or preserved without +these Sangleys; for they are the mechanics in all trades, and are +excellent workmen and work for suitable prices. But a less number of +them would suffice for this, and would avoid the inconvenience of so +many people as are usually in Manila when the ships arrive--to say +nothing of the many Chinese who go about among the islands, under +pretext of trading with the natives, and there commit innumerable +crimes and offenses. At the least, they explore all the country, the +rivers, creeks, and ports, and know them better than the Spaniards +do; and they will be of great harm and injury in case of any revolt +or hostile invasion of the islands. + +In order to remedy all the above, it was ordered that the vessels +should not bring so many people of this kind, under penalties that +are executed; that, when the vessels return to China, they take +these Sangleys back with them; that only a convenient number of +merchants remain in Manila, in the Parian, and the mechanics of +all necessary trades; and that these must have written license, +under severe penalties. In the execution of this, an auditor of the +Audiencia is engaged by special commission every year, together with +some assistants. On petition of the city cabildo, he usually allows +as many Sangleys to remain as are necessary for the service of all +trades and occupations. The rest are embarked and compelled to return +in the vessels going to China, and a great deal of force and violence +[254] is necessary to accomplish it. + +Those merchants and artisans who remained in Manila before the revolt +of the year six hundred and three had settled the Parian and its +shops. The Parian is a large enclosed alcaiceria of many streets, +at some distance from the city walls. It is near the river, and its +location is called San Graviel. There they have their own governor, +who has his tribunal and prison, and his assistants; these administer +justice to them, and watch them day and night, so that they may live +in security, and not commit disorders. + +Those who cannot find room in this Parian live opposite, on the other +side of the river, where Tondo is, in two settlements called Baybay +and Minondoc. They are in charge of the alcalde-mayor of Tondo, and +under the ministry of the religious of St. Dominic, who labor for their +conversion, and for that purpose have learned the Chinese language. + +The Dominicans have two monasteries with the requisite assistants, +and a good hospital for the treatment of Sangleys. In a district +kept separate from the infidels, they have a settlement of baptized +Sangleys, with their wives, households, and families, numbering five +hundred inhabitants; and the religious are continually baptizing +others and settling them in that village. But few of them turn out +well, for they are a vile and restless race, with many vices and bad +customs. Their having become Christians is not through the desire +or wish for salvation, but for the temporal conveniences that they +have there, and because some are unable to return to China because +of debts incurred and crimes committed there. + +Each and all, both Christians and infidels, go unarmed and in their +national garb. This consists of long garments with wide sleeves, made +of blue cangan (but white for mourning, while the chief men wear them +of black and colored silks); wide drawers of the same material; half +hose of felt; very broad shoes, according to their fashion, made of +blue silk embroidered with braid--with several soles, well-sewed--and +of other stuffs. Their hair is long and very black, and they take +good care of it. They do it up on the head in a high knot, [255] +under a very close-fitting hood or coif of horsehair, which reaches +to the middle of the forehead. They wear above all a high round cap +made of the same horsehair, in different fashions, by which their +different occupations, and each man's rank, are distinguished. The +Christians differ only in that they cut their hair short, and wear +hats, as do the Spaniards. + +They are a light-complexioned people and tall of body. They have +scant beards, are very stout-limbed, and of great strength. They +are excellent workmen, and skilful in all arts and trades. They are +phlegmatic, of little courage, treacherous and cruel when opportunity +offers, and very covetous. They are heavy eaters of all kinds of meat, +fish, and fruits; but they drink sparingly, and then of hot beverages. + +They have a governor of their own race, a Christian, who has his +officials and assistants. He hears their cases in affairs of justice, +in their domestic and business affairs. Appeals from him go to the +alcalde-mayor of Tondo or of the Parian, and from all these to the +Audiencia, which also gives especial attention to this nation and +whatever pertains to it. + +No Sangley can live or own a house outside these settlements of +the Parian, and of Baybay and Minondoc. Native settlements are not +allowed in Sangley settlements, or even near them. No Sangley can go +among the islands, or as much as two leguas from the city, without +special permission. Much less can he remain in the city at night, +after the gates are shut, under penalty of death. + +There are generally some Japanese, both Christian and infidel, in +Manila. These are left by the vessels from Japon, although they are +not so numerous as the Chinese. They have their special settlement and +location outside the city, between the Sangley Parian and the suburb of +Laguio, near the monastery of La Candelaria. There they are directed +by discalced religious of St. Francis, by means of interpreters +whom the fathers keep for that purpose. They are a spirited race, +of good disposition, and brave. They wear their own costume, namely, +kimonos of colored silks and cotton, reaching half way down the leg, +and open in front; wide, short drawers; close-fitting half-boots of +leather, [256] and shoes like sandals, with the soles of well-woven +straw. They go bare-headed, and shave the top of the head as far +back as the crown. Their back hair is long, and fastened upon the +skull in a graceful knot. They carry their catans, large and small, +in the belt. They have scant beards, and are a race of noble bearing +and behavior. They employ many ceremonies and courtesies, and attach +much importance to honor and social standing. They are resolute in +any necessity or danger. + +Those who become Christians prove very good, and are very devout +and observant in their religion; for only the desire for salvation +incites them to adopt our religion, so that there are many Christians +in Japon. Accordingly they return freely, and without opposition, +to their own country. At most there are about five hundred Japanese +of this nation in Manila, for they do not go to other parts of the +islands, and such is their disposition that they return to Japon, and +do not tarry in the islands; consequently very few of them usually +remain in the islands. They are treated very cordially, as they are +a race that demand good treatment, and it is advisable to do so for +the friendly relations between the islands and Japon. [257] + +Few people come from the other nations--Sian, Camboja, Borneo, Patan, +and other islands--outside our government; and they immediately return +in their vessels. Consequently, there is nothing special to be said +of them, except that care is exercised in receiving and despatching +them well, and seeing that they return quickly to their own countries. + +Since I have told, in the short time at my disposal, the +characteristics of the Filipinas Islands, and their customs and +practices, it will not be inappropriate to discuss the navigation to +them since it is made thither from Nueva Espana; the return voyage, +which is not short, or without great dangers and hardships; and that +made in the eastern direction. + +When the islands were conquered in the year of one thousand five +hundred and seventy-four [_sic; sc_. 1564], the Spanish fleet sailed +under command of the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, from Puerto +de la Navidad [258] situated in the South Sea, on the coast of Nueva +Espana, in the province and district of Xalisco and Galicia, where +resides the royal Audiencia of Guadalajara. A few later voyages +were made also from the same port, until the point for the sending +of these vessels was removed, for better and greater convenience, +to the port of Acapulco, located farther south on the same coast, +in sixteen and one-half degrees of latitude; it is eighty leguas from +Mexico, and in its district. It is an excellent port, sheltered from +all weather; and has a good entrance and good anchorages. Its vicinity +is advantageous, being better provisioned and more populous than that +of La Navidad. There a large Spanish colony has been established, +with its alcalde-mayor, and royal officials who have charge of his +Majesty's treasury; and these attend to the despatch of the vessels. + +The vessels that sail to the Filipinas, as they are despatched annually +on his Majesty's account, must necessarily leave in the certain season +of the brisas, which begin in the month of November and last until the +end of March. This navigation should not be made at any other season, +for from June the vendavals blow, and they are contrary to the voyage. + +As a rule, these ships sail and are despatched at the end of February, +or at the latest by the twentieth of March. They sail west toward the +islands of Las Velas, [259] otherwise called the Ladrones. The island +of Guan, one of them, lies in thirteen degrees of latitude. Inasmuch +as the vessels on leaving Acapulco are wont sometimes to encounter +calms, they sail south from sixteen and one-half degrees, in which +the port is situated, until they strike the brisas, which is generally +at ten or eleven degrees. By this route they sail continually before +the wind, and without changing the sails, with fresh and fair brisas, +and in other moderate weather, for one thousand eight hundred leguas, +without sighting any mainland or island. Then leaving to the south +the Barbudos and other islands, and advancing gradually to a latitude +of thirteen degrees, they sail until they sight the island of Guan; +and above it, in fourteen degrees, that of La Carpana [Seypan]. This +voyage to those Ladrones Islands lasts generally seventy days. + +The natives of those islands, who go naked, and are a very robust +and barbarous race, go out to sea to meet the ships as soon as they +discover them, at a distance of four to six leguas, with many vessels; +these are one-masted, and are very slender and light. These vessels +have a counterpoise of bamboo to leeward, and their sails are made +of palm-leaves and are lateen-sails. Two or three men go in each one +with oars and paddles. They carry loads of flying-fish, dorados, +[260] cocoa-nuts, bananas, sweet potatoes, bamboos full of water, +and certain mats; and when they reach the ships, they trade these for +iron from the hoops of casks, and bundles of nails, which they use +in their industries, and in the building of their ships. Since some +Spaniards and religious have lived among them, because of Spanish +ships being wrecked or obliged to take refuge there, they come more +freely to our ships and enter them. + +Our ships sail between the two islands of Guan and Carpana toward the +Filipinas and the cape of Espiritu Santo, a distance of three hundred +leguas farther on, in the latitude of about thirteen degrees. This +distance is made in ten or twelve days with the brisas; but it may +happen, if the ships sail somewhat late, that they encounter vendavals, +which endanger their navigation, and they enter the islands after +great trouble and stormy weather. + +From the cape of Espiritu Santo, the ships enter the strait of Capul +at the islands of Mazbate and Burias; thence they sail to Marinduque +and the coast of Calilaya, the strait of Mindoro, the shoals of +Tuley, and the mouth of Manila Bay. Thence, they go to the port of +Cabit. This is a voyage of one hundred leguas from the entrance to +the islands and is made in one week. This is the end of the voyage, +which is good and generally without storms, if made in the proper time. + +These vessels now make the return voyage from the Filipinas to Nueva +Espana with great difficulty and danger, for the course is a long one +and there are many storms and various temperatures. The ships depart, +on this account, very well supplied with provisions, and suitably +equipped. Each one sails alone, hoisting as much sail as possible, +and one does not wait for the other, nor do they sight one another +during the voyage. + +They leave the bay and port of Cabit at the first setting-in of +the vendavals, between the same islands and by the same straits, +by the twentieth of June and later. As they set out amid showers, +and are among islands, they sail with difficulty until they leave +the channel at Capul. Once in the open sea, they catch the vendaval, +and voyage east, making more progress when they reach the latitude +of fourteen or fifteen degrees. + +Then the brisa starts. This wind is the ordinary one in the South Sea, +especially in low latitudes. Since it is a head wind, the course is +changed, and the bow is pointed betwen the north and east, as much +as the wind will allow. With this they reach a higher latitude, and +the ship is kept in this course until the vendaval returns. Then, +by means of it, the ship again takes an eastern course in that +latitude where it happens to be, and keeps that direction as long +as that wind lasts. When the vendaval dies, the ship takes the best +course that the winds allow, by the winds then blowing between north +and east. If the wind is so contrary that it is north or northwest, +so that the ship cannot take that course, the other course is taken +so that they may continue to maintain their voyage without losing +time. At four hundred leguas from the islands they sight certain +volcanoes and ridges of the islands of Ladrones, which run north as +far as twenty-four degrees. [261] Among these they generally encounter +severe storms and whirl-winds. At thirty-four degrees is the cape of +Sestos, [262] at the northern head of Japon, six hundred leguas from +the Filipinas. They sail among other islands, which are rarely seen, +in thirty-eight degrees, encountering the same dangers and storms, +and in a cold climate, in the neighborhood of the islands Rica de +Oro ["rich in gold"] and Rica de Plata ["rich in silver"], which are +but seldom seen. [263] After passing them the sea and open expanse +of water is immense, and the ship can run free in any weather. This +gulf is traversed for many leguas with such winds as are encountered, +until a latitude of forty-two degrees is reached, toward the coast of +Nueva Espana. They seek the winds that generally prevail at so high a +latitude, which are usually northwest. After a long voyage the coast +of Nueva Espana is sighted, and from Cape Mendocino (which lies in +forty-two and one-half degrees) the coast extends nine hundred leguas +to the port of Acapulco, which lies in sixteen and one-half degrees. + +When the ships near the coast, which they generally sight betwen forty +and thirty-six degrees, the cold is very severe, and the people suffer +and die. Three hundred leguas before reaching land, signs of it are +seen, by certain _aguas malas_, [264] as large as the hand, round +and violet colored, with a crest in the middle like a lateen sail, +which are called _caravelas_ ["caravels"]. This sign lasts until the +ship is one hundred leguas from land; and then are discovered certain +fish, with half the body in the form of a dog; [265] these frolic with +one another near the ship. After these _perrillos_ ["little dogs"] +are seen the _porras_ ["knobsticks"], which are certain very long, +hollow shoots of a yellow herb with a ball at the top, and which +float on the water. At thirty leguas from the coast are seen many +great bunches of grass which are carried down to the sea by the +great rivers of the country. These grasses are called _balsas_ +["rafts or floats"]. Also many perrillos are seen, and, in turn, +all the various signs. Then the coast is discovered, and it is very +high and clear land. Without losing sight of land, the ship coasts +along it with the northwest, north-northwest, and north winds, which +generally prevail on that coast, blowing by day toward the land, +and by night toward the sea again. With the decrease of the latitude +and the entrance into a warm climate the island of Cenizas [ashes] +is seen, and afterward that of Cedros [cedars]. Thence one sails until +the cape of San Lucas is sighted, which is the entrance of [the gulf +of] California. From that one traverses the eighty leguas intervening +to the islands of Las Marias and the cape of Corrientes ["currents"], +which is on the other side of California in Val de Vanderas ["valley of +banners"], and the provinces of Chametla. Thence one passes the coast +of Colima, Sacatul, Los Motines ["the mutinies"], and Ciguatanejo, +and enters the port of Acapulco--without having made a way-station or +touched land from the channel of Capul in the Filipinas throughout +the voyage. The voyage usually lasts five months or thereabout, +but often six and even more. [266] + +By way of India, one may sail from the Filipinas to Espana, by making +the voyage to Malaca, and thence to Cochin and Goa, a distance +of one thousand two hundred leguas. This voyage must be made with +the brisas. From Goa one sails by way of India to the cape of Buena +Esperanca [Good Hope], and to the Terceras [_i.e._, Azores] Islands, +and thence to Portugal and the port of Lisboa. This is a very long +and dangerous voyage, as is experienced by the Portuguese who make +it every year. From India they usually send letters and despatches to +Espana by way of the Bermejo ["Red"] Sea, by means of Indians. These +send them through Arabia to Alexandria, and thence by sea to Venecia +[Venice] and thence to Espana. + +A galleon bound for Portugal sails and is despatched from the fort of +Malaca, in certain years, by the open sea, without touching at India +or on its coasts. It reaches Lisboa much more quickly than do the Goa +vessels. It generally sails on the fifth of January, and does not leave +later than that; nor does it usually anticipate that date. However, +not any of these voyages are practiced by the Castilians--who are +prohibited from making them--except the one made by way of Nueva +Espana, both going and coming, as above described. And although the +effort has been made, no better or shorter course has been found by +way of the South Sea. [267] + +_Laus Deo_ + + + + +CONQUISTA DE LAS ISLAS MALUCAS + + +By the licentiate Bartolome Leonardo de Argensola. Madrid; [published] +by Alonso Martin, in the year M.DC.IX. + +SOURCE: This is translated and synopsized from the original printed +work, for which purpose have been used the copies belonging to Harvard +University and to Edward E. Ayer, of Chicago. + +TRANSLATION: This document is translated and synopsized by James +A. Robertson. + + + + + + CONQUEST OF THE MALUCAS ISLANDS. + + Dedicated to King Felipe III, Our Sovereign. + + Written by Licentiate + Bartolome Leonardo de Argensola, + chaplain of her Majesty the Empress, + and Rector of Villahermosa. + + Madrid. Printed by Alonso Martin M DC IX. + + + + + +CONQUEST OF THE MALUCAS ISLANDS + +[The usual licenses and preliminary matter precede Argensola's +[268] history. The license of the king permitting the author, +and no other, to have the book printed and sold for the following +ten years, bears date "Madrid, January twenty-four, one thousand +six hundred and nine." The license and approbation of the ordinary, +Doctor Cetina, dated "Madrid, December 30, 1608," certifies that the +history contains nothing against the Catholic faith. Pedro de Valencia, +royal chronicler, under date of "Madrid, January 14, 1609," approves +the work as deserving publicity. Licentiate Murcia de la Llana, +after comparing a single printed copy with the original manuscript, +appends a list of errata, with certification that, with these, the +book corresponds to the original. This bears date "Madrid, May 4, +1609." Pedro Zapata del Marmol, at "Madrid, May seven, one thousand +six hundred and nine," appraises the book and orders that it be sold +at four maravedis per pliego or fold, thus making the price of the +book, since it contains one hundred and six pliegos, twelve reals, +sixteen maravedis. In his dedication, dated "Madrid, May 4, 1609," +Argensola requests the king to read his book, as it "contains victories +of the Church." The author's brother, Lupercio Leonardo de Argensola, +secretary of the empress, chief chronicler of the king in Aragon, +writes a letter "to the readers," in which he meets their arguments +or supposed arguments, and defends the title and contents of the book, +the method of treatment, the style, and its _raison d'etre_. + +The work contains ten books, the first four of which consist almost +entirely of matters extraneous to the Philippines, such as Maluco +matters, the history of Pedro Sarmiento's expedition through the Strait +of Magellan in search of Drake, etc. The last six books contain more +Philippine matter, and while Argensola cannot always be credited with +the same reliability as Morga, he often supplements the latter. His +introduction in the first book reads as follows:] [269] + +I write of the reduction of the Malucas Islands to the obedience of +Felipe III, king of Espana, and the reduction of their kings to their +former vassalage, which their predecessors rendered, and which was +introduced anew by Don Pedro de Acuna, governor of the Filipinas and +general of the Spanish fleet. That was a victory worthy the foresight +of so pious a monarch, of the care of the dignified ministers of his +supreme council, and of the valor of our nation: not so greatly because +of the rare fertility of those provinces, as because by it was taken +from the northern fleets one great compelling motive for sailing our +seas, so that they should not infect the purity of the new faith of +the Asiatic Indians, and the inhabitants of our colonies who trade +with them, with heresy. The short time in which the undertaking +was completed does not detract from its praise; on the contrary, +it can, by that very fact, occupy a worthy place among more copious +narratives. Well do I see the dangers to which I expose myself, but I +am also confident that I shall not find a defense wanting. Illustrious +sculptors or painters are wont to esteem highly the heads, arms, +and other members, that are copied perfectly from living bodies, in +imitation of which they form all the parts, when they wish to make any +figure. Those ignorant of art despise that preparation, and only enjoy +the statue or picture, which is composed of all its members, and do not +examine the imperfections that they may possess. My present relation +of the recovery of those kingdoms will be judged by this esteem and +by this contempt. For the wise, who know how history is formed, will +esteem this part drawn from life. Others who read, as they confess, +only to pass the time, will value it but little--preferring some +highly fabulous monstrosities, or a prolix book, which, under the +name of history, contains a marvelous number of people, and their +deaths; and which gives events, not as God disposed them, but as they +desire them. Hence it happens that many things worth knowing remain +hidden, for, since they are deferred tor general histories, they are +contemporaneously written but meagerly, by those concerned in them; +and when their manuscripts are wanted, they are not to be found, or +else bind the writer to the laws imposed on him by those who wished +to leave that memorial through their self-love or any other passion, +and he can make no examination of their truth. Consequently to free a +success so important as that of Ternate, the capital of all Maluco, +from this danger, I was ordered to write it, during the lifetime of +those who engaged in it either actively, or through counsel I am so +fully informed of what is needful to write this history, that I hope +to supply my want of ability by the truth. Of this alone have I deemed +it fitting to advise the reader, and not of the advantage that will be +derived from a perusal of this relation. For if the reader desire my +relation, any advice on my part will be superfluous; and otherwise, +even though such advice guide him rightly, it will be impossible to +achieve anything thereby. + +[The first four books treat somewhat briefly of the legendary history +and the European discovery of the the Malucos; their importance +in trade, by reason of their spices, and other resources; their +inhabitants; the early Portuguese domination and cruelties, and the +consequent risings and rebellions of the natives; the civil wars +between Ternate and Tidors; and the accession of Felipe II to the +Portuguese crown. The following extracts and abstracts are made from +various parts of these four books:] + +The eastern archipelago ... embraces so many islands, that +even yet we do not know their exact number. Modern writers make +five divisions of this archipelago, which are themselves a like +number of archipelagos--namely, Maluco, Moro, Papuas, Celebes, +and Amboyno. The name of the first in that language is Moloc, +and means the same as "capital," for it is the capital of all the +adjacent parts; and, according to others, Maluco, which signifies +in Arabic, as par excellence, "the kingdom." It is reduced to five +chief islands, all under one meridian, all in sight of one another, +and lying within a distance of twenty-five leguas. They lie across +the equator, their most northern latitude being one-half degree, +and their most southern one degree. They are bounded on the west by +the island of Xilolo, called Batochina de Moro by the Portuguese, +and Alemaera by the Malucos. Of the many islands round about, which +are also called Malucas, ... the following are remarkable for the +abundance of their spice, namely--beginning at the north-Ternate, +Tydore, Motiel, Maquien, and Bacham. In the time of their former +pagans they were called Cape, Duco, Moutil, Mara, and Seque ... The +inhabitants differ from one another, as it were, by the miraculous +kindness of nature. The women are light-complexioned and beautiful, +while the men have a complexion somewhat darker than a quince. The +hair is smooth, and many anoint it with fragrant oils. They have +large eyes and long eyelashes, which, with their eyebrows, they +wear blackened. Their bodies are robust, and they are much given +to war, but to all other employment they are slothful. They live +long, grow gray early, and are always active, on sea no less than +on land. Hospitable and kind to guests, they are importunate and +insistent in their demands when they become familiar. They are full of +self-interest in their dealings, and make use of tricks, frauds, and +lies. They are poor, and consequently proud; and, to name many vices +in one, they are ungrateful. The Chinese occupied all these islands +when they subjugated all that orient, then the Javanese and Malays, +and lastly the Persians and Arabs. These last, by means of commerce, +introduced the superstitions of Mahomet among the worship of their +gods (of whom some families boasted as ancestors). Their laws are +barbarous. They set no limit to their marriages. The chief wife of the +king, called _putriz_ in their language, determines nobility and the +right to the succession--to which her children are preferred, even +when they are younger than the children of other mothers. Not even +the slightest theft is pardoned, but adultery is easily excused. At +daybreak, those appointed for this duty sound (by law) large timbrels +in the streets of the settlements, in order to awaken married people, +whom, on account of human propagation, they judge worthy of political +care. The majority of crimes are punished by death. In other things +they obey the tyranny or will of the conqueror. The headdress of +the men consists of colored Turkish turbans, with many feathers in +them. That of the king, which corresponds to a crown, has the form +of a miter in its peak. The remainder of the clothing universally +consists of jackets which they call _cheninas_, and trousers of +blue, crimson, green, or violet damask. Of the same material are +their cloaks, which are short and military, and fastened diagonally +or knotted on the shoulder, after the fashion of the ancient Roman +garments, as known to us by the writings, statues, and other traces +of those times. The women show off their hair, now letting it hang, +and again knotting it upon the head, and placing various kinds of +flowers in the bands that hold it; so that, in the adjustment of +their headdress, they are not embarrassed by veils, plumage, or +feathers. All that variety, even without art, adorns them. They +wear bracelets, earrings, and necklaces of diamonds and rubies, +and long strings of pearls--ornaments that are not prohibited to +the common people; as neither are silks, which are especially worn +by the women after the fashion of Persians and Turks. These are all +the wealth of the seas and surrounding lands. Men and women betoken +in their dress the natural haughtiness of their disposition. The +variety of their languages is not little. It may happen that one +village cannot understand the language of the next. Malay, being most +easy to pronounce, is most common. From the variety of languages +it is inferred that these islands have been populated by different +nations. Antiquity, and the art of navigating in those districts, is +ascribed to the Chinese. Others affirm that the Malucos are descended +from the Javanese, who, attracted by the sweetness of the odors wafted +by the spices, stopped at Maluco. They took a cargo of cloves, which +until then were unknown, and, continuing to trade in these, carried +them in their vessels to the Persian and Arabian straits. They went +throughout those provinces, carrying also ilks, and chinaware--products +of the resources and skill of the Chinese. The cloves, by means +of the Persians and Arabs, came to the Greeks and Romans. Several +Roman emperors tried to conquer the east, in order to find the spice +regions, so much did they desire the spice. Believing that they all +came from China, they gave them Chinese names. The Spaniards formerly +brought the spices with other merchandise from the Bermejo [_i.e._, +Red] or Erithrean Sea. The kings of Egypt once gained possession of +the spices, and they reached Europe by way of the Asiatics. When the +Romans made Egypt one of their provinces, they continued the trade. The +Genoese, much later, transferring the commerce to Theodosia (now Cafa) +distributed the spices, and there Venecia and other trading nations +established their agents and factories. They sailed later by way of +the Caspian Sea and Trapisonda; but the trade fell with the empire, +and the Turks carried this merchandise in caravans of camels +and dromedaries to Barcito, Lepo, and Damasco, and to various +Mediterranean ports. [270] The sultans of Cayro restored this trade +to the Bermejo Sea, and to Alexandria by the Nilo [_i.e._, Nile] +River. The Portuguese deprived the sultans of it, after their conquest +of the Eastern Indias, and now they bring the spices by way of the +cape of Buena Esperanza in their fleets; while with those that sail +along the coasts of Arabia and Persia, and to the cape of Guardafun, +they prohibit drugs being taken to Cayro, sinking or capturing the +vessel that tries to do so. The sultan's trade was suppressed by this +fear and the security that was introduced, and all the spices come +on the account of the royal crown to India, with innumerable delays, +until they reach Lisboa. He who is master of the navigation will be +master of this pleasing wealth. + +[Mindanao--which, as appears from an allusion by Argensola, was not +always considered a portion of the Philippines proper--is visited +by one of the early Portuguese conquerors, Captain Pinto, being sent +there by Tristan de Atayde "and to the neighboring islands, to provide +themselves with the necessities of life." There "he visited the king, +by whom he was courteously received; and after his credentials were +examined, and consultation over his requests was held with the Sangages +[271] of the king's council, peace and friendship were made. Pinto +sold his merchandise at whatever price he wished, and traded for +and bought a cargo of provisions at will." (Book ii, pp. 49-50.) The +desire for cloves [272] on the part of the Portuguese is so strong in +the Malucos that the natives determine to burn their trees, although +"the clove harvest forms the wealth of the Maluco kings," in order +to cause them to leave. Although the threat is not carried out, +wars prevail constantly between natives and conquerors. The contests +become so vindictive and troublesome that they lead to arguments +for abandoning the Philippines after Felipe II's accession to the +throne. The passages relating to this are as follows:] + +The apprehensions of this danger had made the ministers of all those +provinces anxious, for their fears were being confirmed by proofs +of manifest rebellion. In Goa, Diego Lopez de Mezquita was already +a prisoner in the fortress of Benastirim, and under a strong guard, +and the viceroy was awaiting the decision from Espana to dispose of +him and of the soldiers; for they feared lest the Ternatans would make +use of the great help that could be sent them by the Chinese; which +could be sent much more easily if the matters then being discussed +in Castilla were made certain. It was reported that the Council of +State--having noted that the Filipinas not only did not augment the +royal incomes, but were even lessening them, and were the occasion for +fruitless expense; and that they were so numerous and so difficult +of conservation--had proposed to King Filipo, our sovereign, to +abandon them, and withdraw the Audiencia and presidios that sustained +them. They added to this argument the example of the Chinese kings and +nations, who also had abandoned those islands--although they are so +near and can aid them so easily, that the islands may be reckoned as a +part of their mainland. They said that as Espana was governing them, +signal detriment was being received, and there were no hopes that +any betterment would be obtained in future; for the amount of silver +passing thither from Nueva Espana, both for regular expenses and for +merchandise, was immense. For the same reason, and by the same road, +that treasure was being sent by the hands of the Chinese to the center +of those kingdoms, which, intractable by the severity of their laws, +are debarred by those laws, as by arms and fortifications, from all +trade with foreigners. They asserted that the monarchy, scattered and +divided by so many seas, and climes, could scarcely be reduced to one +whole; and that human foresight could not bind, by means of ability, +provinces separated by nature with so distant boundaries. These +arguments, they said, were born not of the mind, but of experience, +a truth manifest to the senses. All other arguments that could be +adduced against this reasoning they declared to be honorable and +full of generous sound, but difficult of execution. It would be +more advisable to increase the power of the king in Europe, where +the forces could attend to emergencies without the casualties that +militate against them in outside seas and dominions. Each one of these +arguments was enforced so minutely by the ministers of the treasury +that this proposition merited consideration and examination. Had +God permitted the king to exclude the Filipinas from his monarchy, +and leave them exposed to the power of whomsoever should seize them +first, the Malucans would have so strengthened the condition of their +affairs that it would have been impregnable. + +This same resolution has been communicated on other occasions, and +in the reign of King Filipo Third, now reigning. He, conforming +to his father's reply, has ever refused to accept counsel so +injurious. Consequently, that most prudent monarch answered that the +Filipinas would be conserved in their present condition, and that the +Audiencia would be granted sufficient authority so that justice could +be more thoroughly administered; for in the completeness and rigor +of justice the king based the duration and energy of the state. For +the same reason, the military force there would be strengthened, +and the royal incomes of Nueva Espana, or those of any other of his +kingdoms, would be expended for that purpose, for all the treasures, +and those still to be discovered in the bosom of the mines, must be +applied to the propagation of the gospel. For what, he asked, would +the enemies of the gospel say, if they should see that the Filipinas +were deprived of the light, and of the ministers who preach it, +because they did not produce metals and wealth as did other rich +islands in Assia and America? He said that the entire power of the +sovereigns must minister to this superior end, as sons of the Church +and assistants of the apostolic voice, which is being continued in +the successes of the first preaching. If he had refused to yield +one jot in his severity to his northern vassals, [273] or to grant +them liberty for their consciences, why should he relent toward the +pagans and Mahometans, who are the harvest that God has assigned him, +in order to enrich the Church with those so remote children? By this +wise he enjoined silence on the discussion, and with this glorious +aim the decision has ever been made when zeal or human convenience +has discussed the abandonment of those states.... This religious +motive influenced Felipo; but, besides it, those who had experience +of those Asiatic sources of wealth urged others. The most abundant +wealth consists of diamonds, rubies, large and seed pearls, amber, +musk, civet, and camphor, from Borneo and China; vermilion, coral, +quicksilver, copper, and white cloth, from Cambaya and Mengala; rugs, +carpets, fine counterpanes, camlets, from Persia; brocades, ivory, +rhubarb, cardamoms, cassia, [274] incense, benzoin, wax, china, +lac for medicine and dyes, cloves, and mace, from Banda; with gold, +silver, and pearls, medicinal woods, aroes, eagle-wood, calambuco, +[275] ebony, and innumerable other rare plants, drugs, spices, and +ornaments. They say that Venecia lost all this when the commerce +passed to Portugal [276] (Book ii, pp. 84-86).... + +[While the war between the Portuguese and the natives is at its +height, a galleon passes which is later found to have been neither +Spanish nor Portuguese, as the natives fear, "but a ship of Venetians, +private persons, on its way from Manila to China, with various bartered +merchandise of those states and of the east" (Book ii, p. 89). + +A native envoy visits Felipe II in Lisbon, but fails to accomplish +much. The later wars between Portuguese and Spaniards and natives +are characterized by assistance for the latter from English and Dutch +sources. King Felipe "especially to recover Temate," turns "his eyes +to the convenience afforded by all the Filipinas, to a greater extent +than India." Later he orders by "his royal decree" that "all the +governors of the Filipinas should be instructed to aid the Malucas, +and all the Indian states of the Portuguese crown; for this may be +done more conveniently from those islands than from India itself" +(Book iv, p. 140). Argensola recurring again to the proposition of +abandoning the Philippines and other islands, says:] + +The reader should also consider, that although avarice is sometimes +mixed up in the ministry of the preaching of the gospel, and lawless +acts are committed by our captains and soldiers, yet such excesses do +not make the cause less just. He should consider also that, supposing +that his Majesty should choose, for excellent state reasons (as we +said were proposed), to abandon those districts of Asia, as the Chinese +did, and to narrow the bounds of his monarchy, the cause of the faith +would not permit it. Our kings are ministers of the faith, and sons +of the Catholic church, and any war waged for the introduction of the +gospel is most important, and of the greatest profit, even though it +be to acquire or to gain desert provinces. Besides the Filipinas have +shown how docile are their natives, and how thoroughly they benefit by +the example and company of the Spaniards--the tokens of the affection +with which they have received the faith and aid the religious who are +extending the faith and carrying it to China, Japon, Camboxa, Mindanao, +the Malucas, and the other places where endures idolatry or friendship +with the demons (which the former owners of the country left to them +when they excluded those places from their dominion), or the fictions +of Mahomet, which those places afterward admitted. This is the chief +reason for conserving those provinces. (Book iv, pp. 161, 162.) + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Fifth + +After the Luzones or Manilas Islands--both these being ancient +names--had been discovered by Magallanes, Sebastian Cano returned +to Espana, after the former's death and the successive deaths of +his companions, in that venerable ship which--as if significant of +its voyage, which contains more of truth than of probability--they +called "Vitoria." Sebastian Cano was a mountaineer, from the hamlet +of Guetaria in the Pyrenees Mountains, according to Mapheo, [277] in +his Latin history. In his history he devotes much space to the great +courage of Cano, and his skill in the arts of navigation. He recounts +the universal respect and admiration bestowed upon Cano, since he was +the first in the age of mortals to circumnavigate this globe. And in +truth, what estimation can remain to the fabulous Argonauts, Tiphys +and Jason, and the other navigators whom the elegance or the daring +of Grecia extols, when compared to our Cano? He was the first witness +of the commerce of the seas, and nature opened to his eyes what had +been reserved until then for them; and he was allowed to explore it +all, and to furnish a beginning in so arduous endeavors for the law +that saves and renders eternal. After the death of Magallanes, the +Lusones Islands--which ought to have inherited his name, as being +his sepulcher, as the strait did because of his passage through +it--changed that name for that of Filipinas, [278] in the year one +thousand five hundred and sixty-five; although those islands of that +eastern archipeago are also called by that name. Adelantado Miguel de +Legaspe, who was sent from Nueva Espana by Viceroy Don Luys de Velasco +with a Spanish fleet, made port in those islands. He conquered first +the island of Zebu and those in its vicinity, where he remained six +years. That region is called by another name, Pintados, still preserved +by different portions of that coast, because the Indians at that time +went about naked, and with their bodies adorned and painted [_i.e._, +tattooed] in various colors. Legaspe left a guard there and went to +occupy Luzon, one hundred and fifty leguas from Zebu. He fought the +barbarians, whom, after the surprise of our ships, weapons, and faces +had worn off, the same novelty encouraged. Legaspe anchored in a bay +four leguas wide, which shows an island midway in its entrance, now +called Marivelez. The bay has a circuit of thirty leguas to the city of +Manila, and is eight leguas wide from north to east. The inhabitants +of that city resisted him with greater courage than the Pintados, for +they had artillery and a fort. But after the Spaniards had taken that, +the defenders of it surrendered. This was done quickly, and allowed +no time for the inhabitants to unite. Thus did Legaspe enter Manila, +a place fortified by nature. At one point of it (which is surrounded by +the water of the bay) is a river of considerable volume, whose source +is the great Lake of Vay [Bay], five leguas distant. This point, narrow +and slender at first, becomes wider immediately, for the seashore +turns toward the southwest, and the bank of the river toward the east, +so that a very considerable space is left for the city. The city is +entirely surrounded with water, except that part between the west +and south. Legaspe founded the city then with wooden buildings, for +wood is produced abundantly in those regions. The roofs of the houses +were covered with nipa leaves, which resemble our mace-reed, [279] +and which form a sufficient defense against the rains. It is, however, +an inflammable material, and is the occasion of the great fires that +have happened there so often. Luzon is more densely populated than +any of the many islands--which are called Filipinas in honor of King +Filipo II, and which, as is affirmed, number eleven thousand. Luzon has +a circumference of three hundred and fifty leguas. Beyond the bay it +runs one hundred leguas to the north, as far as Nueva Segovia; from +the beginning of that province (namely, Cape Bojador), it runs for +thirty leguas east to the promontory of El Engano. Thence the coast +runs south for eighty leguas, and then with another changed direction +for forty leguas to what they call Embocadero ["the channel"], that is, +the strait opposite the island Tandaya, which is distant eighty more +leguas from the bay. Consequently the island has the shape of a square; +it has many harbors, but few capacious ports. Manila is in slightly +more than fourteen degrees of northern latitude, and in longitude +(reckoning from the Canarias) one hundred and sixty. The most northern +part of Luzon lies in nineteen degrees [of latitude]. With the sea +between them, the great kingdom of China lies on that side of it, +seventy leguas away; while the islands of Japon lie to the northeast, +at a distance of two hundred and fifty leguas. On the east is the open +ocean, and on the south the greatest of the archipelagos of the ocean, +which is divided into live archipelagos. These are broken up into so +many islands, kingdoms, and provinces, that one would believe that +nature did not desire men to ascertain their number. Both Javas, +our Malucas, Borneo, and Nueva Guinea are known; on the west, +and at a distance of three hundred leguas, Malaca, Sian, Patan, +Camboxa, Cochinchina, and other different provinces on the mainland +of Asia. The Chinese abandoned living in our Filipinas, but not its +trade; nor did the cultivation or the fertility of the islands for +that Reason cease. Wheat and other necessary grains are produced +there in abundance: deer, Cattle, buffaloes, goats, and wild boars; +and fruits and spices. If there be anything lacking, the Chinese from +Chincheo bring it, such as chinaware and silks. The wine always used +and drunk there is made from palms, by cutting off the clusters of +fruit that they produce, when green--that fruit is called cocos--from +which, after cutting the leaf stalks, they gather the liquor that +flows forth, and boil it in jars, until it becomes so strong that +it causes intoxication and has the same effects as the strongest +Spanish wine. Of native fruits, there are oranges, lemons, and +very sweet citrons; while they have fig and pear-trees introduced +from Espana. They rear sparrow-hawks, herons [_martinetes_], and +royal eagles in great abundance. They have a great many different +kinds of parrots, and other birds, large and small. In the rivers +and lakes are many horrible caymans or crocodiles; these kill the +Indians very easily--and especially the children, who go carelessly +to their haunts--as well as the cattle when they go to drink. Not +a few times has it happened that they have seized the cattle by the +muzzles and pulled them beneath the water, and drowned them without +power to resist, however large the animal may be. Then the carcass +is dragged ashore and devoured ... Indians are found so courageous +that, notwithstanding the fierceness of those animals, they kill them +with their hands. They cover the left hand and arm with a glove made +from buffalo hide, and hold therein a stake or peg, somewhat longer +than a tercia, [280] and about as thick as the wrist, and sharpened +at both ends. Then they enter the river until the water reaches the +waist. The crocodile rushes upon the Indian with open mouth to devour +him. The latter presents to it his protected arm and the hand with the +stake, so that the beast may seize it, and runs it into the animal's +mouth in such a position that it cannot shut its mouth or make use +of its strong teeth to attack its slayer. Feeling the pain of the +sharp stake the crocodile becomes so docile that it neither resists +nor attacks, nor dares move, for the slightest movement causes it +pain. Thereupon the barbarian, pulling strongly on the stake, wounds +the beast repeatedly with a dagger (carried in the right hand) in the +throat, until it bleeds to death. Then it is drawn ashore with lines +and ropes, with the aid of other Indians who unite to drag it in; and +many are needed, because of the huge bodies of those crocodiles. They +resemble lizards, but are furnished with scales so strong that scarce +can an arquebus-shot dent them. The only vulnerable spots are the +throat and under parts of the legs [_i.e._, where they join the +body], where nature has given them a certain sweet odor, which the +Indians use. Besides cattle, all the animals of Africa and more are +found in those islands--tigers, lions, bears, foxes, monkeys, apes, +squirrels--and in some of them are many civet-cats. These last are wont +to be hunted extensively, in order to take them to different nations +with the other merchandise of China--linens, silks, earthenware, iron, +copper, steel, quicksilver, and innumerable other things, which are +transported annually from those provinces. Religion and government +are the same as those of Espana; but in those islands that are still +unsubdued, foolish idolatry prevails. They attribute immortality +to their souls, but they believe that souls wander from one body to +another, according to that ridiculous [doctrine of] transmigration +invented or declared by Pythagoras. Trading is much in vogue, and is +advanced by the Chinese commerce. The Filipinos are more courageous +than their other neighbors. The Spaniards and creoles do not belie +their high origin. + +By order of King Filipo an army was formed from all this people, in +order to attempt to take the forts of Maluco. Don Goncalo Ronquillo +de Penalosa was governor. Although he had received beforehand certain +information by way of trade and the spies that had gone there, he +was not satisfied with them, and sent another soldier to Maluco. The +latter changed his clothes, and then with that and his aspect, +which was not unlike that of the natives, and their language, which +he spoke fluently, went to Tydore. He found our men very desirous of +the enterprise, and the king of that island ready to push it with his +forces. He went to Ternate with the merchants, and saw the fortresses +and the reefs about the ports; and sounded their friendship with +the English. He found that the latter landed and traded securely--or +rather, as if by right. Nor was the multitude of secret Christians +unknown to him, who would take up arms in due season; nor any of the +other things, that, as an experienced spy, it was necessary for him to +report. Thereupon Ronquillo prepared about three hundred Spaniards and +more than one thousand five hundred Filipinos, with ammunition, food, +and sailors. With three large vessels and a considerable number of +smaller ones, he set sail toward Maluco at the proper season. Pedro +Sarmiento was general, an energetic and experienced man, who still +lives in Manila. He set out courageously and energetically, in order +to destroy any of the enemies then sailing those seas. Several days +previous his Majesty had appointed Pablo de Lima to the charge of +Ternate, if it were gained; and had allowed his brother, Francisco +de Lima, the concession of two voyages to Maluco, in consideration of +their services and those of Henrique, their father. Pablo had married +a Christian woman, and a devout one, although she was a relative +of the king of Tydore, who is not a Christian. For this reason, and +because he possessed in Ternate the ancient inheritance to the towns of +Guita, Mofaquia, Mofaguita, Pauate, Pelueri, Sansuma, Tahane, Mayloa, +and Soma; and in the island of Maquien, Sabele, Talapao, Talatoa, +Mofabouaua, Tabalola, Tagono, Bobaba, and Molapa--of the majority of +which the Ternatan king had dispossessed him, as well as Bitua and +other towns in Tydore, on the pretext of his having abandoned them--he +went to Manila, where he discussed with the governor the method of +facilitating the conquest, on the very eve of its execution. His +counsel was favored, and he gave it as it was his own cause. For, +in addition to the inheritance that the king of Ternate had usurped +from him, he expected to get the island of Moutil, which had belonged +to his ancestors. The expedition was also authorized by the presence +of Don Juan Ronquillo, the governor's nephew, who held equal authority +by land and sea with Sarmiento. If there were anything wanting, it was +thought that it would be supplied easily by the valor of the soldiers, +together with the shortness of the voyage and the carelessness of the +enemy. But the divided command proved an obstacle to that hope. Their +voyage was not stormy, but neither was it so favorable that they +were enabled to anchor exactly at Ternate, as was necessary in order +to deprive the enemy from using their own vigilance. They went to +Moutil to anchor, and within sight of the inhabitants of the land, +fought with some hostile _janquas_. [281] These were captured, and +the Christians found within them were set at liberty. As Pablo de Lima +knew the harbors, and as the people of the island did not possess the +forces necessary to defend themselves against a fleet, and as it was +easily attacked on the sides, it surrendered. The natives came with +branches of palms, citron-trees, and gariofylos [_i.e., caryophyllus_], +or clove-trees, as tokens of peace, and to beg pardon. They obtained +both, and for master, Pablo de Lima. However the vesting him with that +domain proved cf little utility; for a few days after, all the people +slipped away, either considering themselves more secure in Ternate, or +to meet the enemy--who must necessarily carry the war to that island, +as happened. Sarmiento repaired his vessels on that island [_i.e._, +Moutil], and without the loss of a single soldier, and flushed by +his first victory, went to Talangame, passing through the hostile +caracoas, which had been fitted up hastily and without order. The +fort and the king, in possession of our artillery--especially the +rampart, which was enlarged and afterward called Cachil Tulo, after +the king's uncle, who built it--were in readiness long before, and +were threatening some great disaster. Our men landed on that side, +but their landing was opposed by the Ternatans. However night put an +end to battle, and each side retiring to safety, our men finished +landing and mounting their artillery, in the position and manner +counseled by Pablo de Lima, who ever since then has been general of +artillery in the fort of Tydore. The king of that island wished to +join our troops, as was shown by certain actions, and by his promises +to Alferez Duenas; but he doubted the fortune of the Castilians, as +if he had not had many experiences of it. Now the occasion persuaded +him and fidelity bound him, but he still hesitated. The doubt of that +king is believed to have hurt the outcome of the affair. Sarmiento, +after having mounted the artillery and securely fortified himself, +and after having taken some captives (from whom he learned the food +supply and arms of the besieged), commenced to hem in the enemy, and +to bombard them furiously. However he did not scare them, for they +answered boldly. It became necessary to seize the high places, from +which, as from commanding eminences--which were leveled later--our +men harassed the enemy. Had they persevered in this, it would have +sufficed to end the war. But to such an extent did sickness reign +in our camp, that no better medicine was found than that of absence, +and deferring this undertaking to another time. The assistance from +Tydore was of no consequence. They proved lukewarm friends, and all +the rest was spiritless. Heaven knows the other reasons. There must +have been some stronger ones; for, in reality, the camp was raised, +and after embarking returned to Manila, without having had any greater +effect than to increase the confidence of the enemy. + +Then only the English nation disturbed Spanish dominion in that +orient. Consequently King Filipo desired not only to forbid it with +arms near at hand, but also to furnish an example, by their punishment, +to all the northern nations, so that they should not undertake the +invasions that we see. A beginning was made in this work in the year +one thousand five hundred and eighty-eight, as is related in the +following discourse. + +[The beheading of Mary Stuart, the English confederation with Holland, +and the building, disaster, and defeat of the "invincible armada" +follow. The narrative continues:] + +The Hollanders or Zealanders, confederated with Queen Isabel [_i.e._, +Elizabeth of England], being witnesses of that event [_i.e._, the +defeat of the armada], were encouraged to aspire to greater efforts, +in disobedience to their religion and to their sovereign, to usurp +the eastern riches--mines, spices, drugs, and silks--as is seen by +their reckless voyages, in which they have been emulous of the recent +examples set by the English, and by the more ancient ones left us +by Colon, Alburquerque, Magallanes, Gama, and Cortes, as we shall +see later.... + +After Santiago de Vera became governor of the Filipinas, he was +especially ordered to equip a fleet to attack Ternate, where the +English, from that time forward, were trading with all security. All +nations had established factories there, except the Javanese and the +Lascars. More than two thousand five hundred Moros from Meca were +preaching their abominable doctrine. They did not fear Portugal; all +their fear was caused by the Castilians, whom but lately they found +pledged to vengeance. The king of Ternate knew that Sarmiento and +Ronquillo would have taken it, had not disease prevented them. When the +new preparation was learned in Tydore, the rumor was taken to Ternate +by spies. That king immediately summoned his vassals, especially the +islanders of Maquien and Homero, who, inasmuch as those islands are +so densely populated, responded with forty caracoas. The number would +have been greater, but the king would not permit that more should be +equipped than he requested, as he could not conceal his dread lest +they rebel, as the lands were full of Christians, and the tributes +that he had imposed on them were so excessive. Santiago de Vera made +Captain Juan Morones general, who was not lacking in prudence, just as +valor was not lacking to the soldiers, or ammunition and artillery to +the fleet. Pablo de Lima assisted in both forces. But whether caused +by natural ambition, or want of harmony in some other way, they were +so disunited that one would have prophesied jealousies before they +left Manila. They set sail in good weather, and escaped the greatest +hardships of the sea. But when they considered themselves safe, +all the elements were loosed upon the fleet. Light and reckoning +failed them. The boats were shattered and the most important one +sunk, with the loss of all its crew. That was the galleon called +"Santa Helena," which was carrying the pieces to bombard the fortress, +and considerable of the other ammunition and apparatus. However they +persisted, and the king of Bacham assisted them with the men that he +had raised under the pretext of sweeping the sea of certain enemies; +and, as a baptized Christian, he bewailed the apostasy that he had +made, because of persecution, from the glorious confession of our +faith, and promised the restitution of his soul. + +[The futile operations of the Spaniards at Ternate follow. Refusing +advice, the commander tries to take the main fort instead of attacking +in different places with small detachments. Finally the siege is +raised, when the enemy is almost starved out. Communication with +traders from Europe is again free to Ternate, "especially with their +new friends, the English." But internal disputes and ambitions in +Ternate lead to the following letter to Santiago de Vera from Cachil +Tulo, uncle of the illegitimate king of Ternate:] + +My brother, Cachil Babu, former king of Ternate, wrote to Portugal to +the king, requesting justice on a man who killed his father and mine, +in return for which he promised to deliver to his Majesty the fort +of Ternate, of which he had been dispossessed. And as his Majesty +succeeded to the kingdoms of Portugal, he answered my brother's letter +by Cachil Naique, his ambassador. But when it arrived, my brother was +already dead, for which reason we did not then deliver the fortress, as +a bastard son had succeeded him, whom the Ternatans, with the help of +the king of Tydore, elevated as king, although he had no right to the +throne. He refused to fulfil his father's promise and pledge. Neither +would he take my counsel or that of my brother, Cachil Mandraxa, +rightful heir of the kingdom, namely, that he deliver the fortress, +as his father had promised the Portuguese--not because he could not +defend himself from them or from his Majesty, but expressly because +he had been thus ordered by his father and my brother. It must not +be understood that it was taken from us by force of arms, but that +we of ourselves had this will to deliver the fortress to serve his +Majesty. Upon seeing us with this intention he determined to kill +my brother, his uncle, the rightful heir of the kingdom, by having +him stabbed by the hand of a slave, under his word and security and +mine. Therefore, considering such action of my nephew senseless, +and that he refuses to fulfil what his father and I and my brothers +promised to his Majesty, I have determined, now and henceforth, to +become the true vassal and servant of his Majesty. By this present +I bind myself, and I swear by my religion, as I did so swear, and I +shall not annul my pledge, through the father-vicar Antonio Ferreyra, +to give all my help and aid for the taking of the fort, with all my +kindred and friends, until his Majesty's captain takes possession of +it or he who shall hereafter come with the Portuguese and Castilians, +who shall be in his company. [This I shall do] provided that the +captain or captains in his Majesty's name shall fulfil toward me the +signed promise of Duarte Pereyra, the chief captain, inasmuch as I +gave him another such message. That is to proclaim me king of Ternate, +as soon as he shall take possession of the fort for his Majesty; for +it belongs to me both through my father, and by the service that I am +rendering, and that I hope to render later, to his Majesty. Therefore, +I beseech your Lordship for favor, and request you in his Majesty's +name to aid me by sending the greatest possible number of soldiers; +and that quickly, so that this my intention and will to serve his +Majesty in this may be achieved, and, as I hope, without loss of +life--although, as your Lordship will have learned, this fortress +is well garrisoned. The order and arrangement that these soldiers +would better observe will be written to your Lordship by the chief +captain. Given in Tydore, where I have come for this purpose, as the +father-vicar Antonio Ferreyra and the auditor Antonio de Matos will +testify, whom, as such persons, I begged to sign for me. May 23. + +[The letter of the Portuguese commander verifies the above letter, +and asks for four hundred Spanish soldiers, under pretext of sending +them "to drive the Javanese from those seas, whose friendship +the Ternatans value more than ours." They at least will keep the +English from Ternatan ports. Fifteen fragatas and one galleon will +be enough, and they are to be accompanied by Filipino pioneers. He +tries to persuade the governor to undertake the expedition. Vera +is anxious to do so, but is unable to attempt it at once. Meanwhile +Cachil Tulo dies, and the vigilance required in watching the Chinese +and Japanese in the Philippines renders it impossible to send the +expedition to Ternate. "Each one of these expeditions made inroads on +the treasury and forces of the province, to so great an extent that +it was necessary to allow a breathing-space to each of them." It is +thought that a joint expedition from Malaca and Manila will accomplish +more, and this is made some years later, under Andres Furtado de +Mendoza, of whose character and some of whose deeds there follows an +account. The island of Ceylon, its products and fauna are partially +described, and some of its connection with the Portugese. Returning +to Philippine matters, the narrative continues:] + +At this time Santiago de Vera was already dismissed from his +governorship of the Filipinas. After he had communicated with Andres +Furtado, and received an answer from him, in which the latter coincided +with his desire, fortune disturbed these beginnings, and Furtado became +embroiled with those who did not love him, and Santiago de Vera was +withdrawn from his office. Gomez Perez de las Marinas, knight of the +habit of Santiago, succeeded him. He was a man of great reputation, +a native of Betancos in the kingdom of Galicia. He reached Filipinas +in the year one thousand five hundred and ninety. He brought his +son Don Luis with him, a knight of the habit of Alcantara. The new +governor found Manila open to attack, without the form of a city, +and without any money with which to improve it. More than two hundred +thousand pesos were needed for it. However, by his plans and schemes, +he completed the work without public or private loss. He established +a monopoly of playing cards, imposed fines for excessive play, +punished illicit combinations and frauds among the provision-dealers +and the shops of that class: from all of which resulted the walls of +Manila, which measured twelve thousand eight hundred and forty-nine +geometric feet [_i.e._, Spanish feet], each foot being one tercia. To +this he added his own careful oversight, and the assistance of the +inhabitants, who aided willingly because of the request and example of +their chief. The city had but one fort, and that badly constructed. He +built another at the entrance to the river, to which he gave the name +of Santiago, and enclosed the old one. He finished the cathedral, +and, from the foundation, the church of Santa Potenciana, patroness +of the island, as a shelter for women. Then he started the casting of +cannon, and brought good artisans, who furnished the city with large +and small artillery. He built galleys for the trade and commerce or +merchandise--the subsistence of those lands. And in fulfilment of his +promises in Espana, he cast his eyes on Ternate and all of Maluco, on +the late disgrace and the unfortunate results of his predecessors who +had attempted the conquest of that choice kingdom, and the punishments +of its tyrants. He communicated these thoughts orally and by letters +with zealous persons, more particularly with Marta, [282] a priest of +the Society of Jesus, a serious and energetic man, whose experience +and instruction had been of great use in those regions. This man gave +him information, counsels, and helpers for the preparation and for +the work. One of the latter was Brother Gaspar Gomez, a Spaniard, +a lay religious of the same society. Among the many conferences that +were held upon this matter, I find an exhortation from Father Antonio +Marta, in a letter written from Tydore. As it is the original, and +good for the better understanding, I will place it here, translated +from the Portuguese.... + +[The letter above mentioned holds out to Dasmarinas the three +inducements of service to the king, service to God, and personal +ambition, in the proposed Molucca expedition. The war will be an +arduous one, for "it will be fought not with the Ternatans alone, but +with all the Moros of this archipelago," and the natives are brave and +determined. "The people of Tydore already say that they do not want +Spaniards in these regions," and Gomez Perez will find it prudent to +dissemble with them, "so that they will not join the Ternatans." Father +Marta sends a map of the archipelago, promises immense booty, and +assures the governor of the prayers of the religious. This letter, +and conferences with one Geronymo de Azevedo and Brother Gaspar +Gomez, decided the governor to undertake the expedition. He sent +Gaspar Gomez with instructions to visit and inspect various parts of +the archipelago; and the latter visited Ternate, Tydore, Mindanao, +both Javas, and other regions as far as Malaca. The rest of book +five is taken up with a relation of Pedro de Acuna's services and +his appointment to Cartagena in Nueva Espana.] + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Sixth + +Meanwhile Gomez Perez, attentive to his preparation, concealed his +purpose, while not sparing the expenses pertaining to ships, food, +and men. Among other supplies, he built four fine galleys. To man +them--as is there reported--he employed a means that was considered +severe. He ordered that the number of Indians sufficient to equip the +galleys [283] be purchased from those who were the slaves of other +Indian chiefs, and that the Spanish encomenderos should pay for these +men from their own money. The price assigned for each Indian was two +taes of gold--each tae being slightly more than one onza--the value +formerly general among them for slaves. He promised that the sum +spent by the encomenderos for that purpose would be repaid afterward +from the royal exchequer. However, this did not seem any lessening +of the severity, for he improperly called those Indians slaves; but +[among themselves] their masters treat them and love them as children, +feed them at their tables, and marry them to their daughters. Besides, +slaves were then valued higher. To the anger of those who were about +to be sold, was joined that of the encomenderos, who were obliged to +contribute from their property for expenses--which, in their opinion, +were not very necessary--and to offend their tributaries by forcibly +seizing them; while they themselves would never collect the price +they were paying in advance, which was [to them] the most certain +thing. The governor gave out that those galleys were to assure the +country and defend it from the danger that threatened; for he knew +absolutely that the emperor of Japon was going to attack it with +a huge war-fleet. Without galleys it could not be defended, and +consequently he was forced to man them with those slaves, since other +rowers were lacking. These slaves were not to be chained in the galley, +or treated as convicts; but would receive so great kindness that they +themselves would prefer that treatment to that of their owners, whom +they already had as fathers and fathers-in-law. These arguments, +and the pressing need for defense, silenced all objections. But +they did not silence report, for already it was known that he had +come from Espana, pledged to the king, his ministers, relatives, and +backers, to the Ternate undertaking; and, although he concealed it, +unknown authors divulged it. Yet some tried to persuade him not to +entrust the defense of Filipinas to the Chinese or Sangleys, for no +bond, natural or civil, had ever bound or attracted them to any love +for the islands. They bade him remember the recent example of what +those people did on an occasion on which they were employed by his +predecessor, and to be on his guard against them. He [_i.e._, Vera], +sending a reenforcement of men, ammunition, and food to the fort and +settlement of Cagayan--which is on the shore of that island of Luzon, +eighty leguas from the city of Manila--inasmuch as he then had no ship +in which to send them, and being constrained by his present necessity, +thought that he could supply the deficiency by using for that purpose +a ship of the Chinese, then anchored at that port and about to return +to China. He ordered the reenforcement to be embarked on that boat +and the Chinese to convey it; and to leave it, on passing, at its +destination, since that was directly on their way. He promised the +Chinese to recompense and reward them for that service. They offered +to do it with great display of willingness, howbeit that their cunning +was seen in the sequel, and what opportunity teaches to him that awaits +it. The Chinese set sail, and on the second day, while our Spaniards +were asleep, and quite sure of being among friends and faithful ones, +the Chinese attacked them in the night, so suddenly that they could +not defend themselves. They were all beheaded and thrown into the +sea. The Chinese pillaged all their cargo, and after dividing the +booty, sailed for their own country. They only kept with them one +wretched Spanish woman who accompanied our men. They left her alive, +but after having insulted and maltreated her, left her on the first +Chinese shore that they reached. She went then to the magistrates +there, and informed them of the treachery committed by those people, +and of the violence that they had inflicted on her. But although +the judges were courteous to her, no satisfaction was given her for +her injuries, and she was unable to obtain justice. On the contrary +they ordered her to be taken into the interior by certain agents, +and delivered to other supreme judges. On that journey, which was +very long and many leguas, she endured greater hardships--until +some governors, taking compassion on her and her tears, took her to +the city of Macao, where the Portuguese reside, and they set her at +liberty. Through that means, the whole deed was learned, and was in +the mouth of all in Manila; and upon the occasion of this expedition, +they exaggerated it still more. + +Finally, all of the slaves demanded by Governor Gomez Perez had to be +supplied, but with injuries and acts of oppression; and with the same +injuries and oppression they were all put on the galleys. There they +remained some time before sailing, and some of them died, because they +were unused to that life. All those slaves proved insufficient to man +all the galleys, and the flagship was without rowers. On that account, +and in order to complete the work, more severe methods were used than +at first. The governor ordered that two hundred and fifty Chinese be +drafted from those who go to Filipinas to trade, in order to man or +equip the flagship. Each of them was to be paid two pesos monthly from +the royal treasury. The governor assured them that they would not be +chained, but free, and could have their weapons and serve as soldiers, +and would only have to row the galley during calms, if any should +occur, and in order to double certain headlands. This decision being +communicated to the Chinese, they ail refused it as an intolerable +burden. But when our governor insisted upon this, in order to carry +out his design, the Chinese governor assembled his people in order +to discuss the matter, and to plan how they might choose two hundred +and fifty from among them all; and he threatened that he would take +every tenth man by their houses. That threat disturbed them so much, +that the next day, all their windows were closed, and the merchants +closed their shops; and the community was deprived of the provisions +which were supplied to it by them. Our governor, upon seeing this, +saying that they had mutinied, had about fifty of them seized, +the first whom he could find, and put them in the galleys at the +oar. Thereupon the rest, being cowed, assembled, and made up from +among their number all the two hundred and fifty. And inasmuch as no +one of them wished to be of that number, they distributed among those +who accepted that service twenty thousand pesos, which were given +as a present to those Chinese who would go on the galley, each one +being given eighty pesos, besides the king's pay. With this good aid, +Chinese were not wanting to consent to act as rowers, although the +twenty thousand pesos were spent among them--or, more correctly, among +the officers. From those two hundred and fifty Chinese, five companies +were formed, and five Chinese Christians appointed as captains. They +made their musters and reviews, with pikes and catans--which are +but slightly different from cutlasses--and appeared to be happy +and contented. Amid these occupations Brother Gaspar Gomez came +unexpectedly to Manila, loaded with information which he referred to +the governor in a number of private conferences. He said that the king +of Ternate was not badly prepared, although his forces were somewhat +weakened by his not being in very great harmony with the majority of +the chiefs of his kingdom. Many were threatening to rebel because of +his tyrannies and excessive levies of tribute. Now Javanese, Lascars, +and Moros from Meca no longer resorted to Ternate, as they did in +the time when Captain Morones went there during the term of Santiago +de Vera. Gaspar Gomez gave very detailed information about the two +forts of Talangame. He found that the king of Ternate usually had +about three thousand soldiers, one thousand of them arquebusiers; +while a considerable number came from the other kingdoms of his +crown. They fought with missile weapons, campilans, and shields, and +other armor of coats-of-mail and helmets, which Portuguese had traded +for spice. They had considerable ammunition, all made by themselves +from materials taken there by the Javanese as payment for cloves. Their +chief place was the city of Ternate, where the king and all his court +resided. Consequently it was the best guarded, and from that place +the others obtained strength, courage, and all reenforcement. Gaspar +Gomez advised that our army attack before dawn, for all assaults +made at dawn on that people had always succeeded well. If our fleet +could arrive unseen, it would without doubt conquer. But that king +had placed spies and sentinels on almost all of his islands, and +even in Canela, Sarrangan, and Mindanao. From the fort of Amboyno and +from the kings of Syan [_i.e._, Siao] and Tidore, a goodly number of +bronze culverins and much other artillery could be brought in their +caracoas. The Amboynos would send these at command, and they would +be sent from Syan and Tydore as soon as requested; for, besides doing +homage to the crown of Espana, those kings are hostile to Ternate. The +supplies necessary to finish the war, even in case the king of Tydore +should fail them (of whom it might be suspected that he did not wish +to see his enemy totally destroyed), were the artillery and craft that +were being prepared; and more than one thousand two hundred soldiers, +well-armed and equipped with coats-of-mail and helmets, until they +should go to the island of Banda in order to garrison that island as it +needed. There should be a number of light vessels to catch the enemy +when fleeing. Thus would the war be finished entirely and quickly, +and without bloodshed. The infidel Ternatans themselves even said +and published the same. They confessed that, if a large contingent of +soldiers should reach their land, they would universally render homage +without fighting. Consequently he inferred that secret Christians +were living in the Malucas. The entire conquest of that island of +Banda was very useful and advantageous, and of slight risk; and its +maintenance was of great importance to the inhabitants of Amboyno, +which belongs to us. Gaspar Gomez also affirmed that the Portuguese +were facilitating the enterprise considerably, and recounted the +interest and profit that would accrue to his Majesty. Father Antonio +Marta was also of that opinion, in whom Governor Gomez Perez placed +so great faith. Brother Gaspar Gomez to these so full reports and +information added such details that he quite set on fire the mind of +the governor. + +At this time the king of Camboxa, named Landara, sent the governor an +embassy through two Spanish captains, accompanied by many Cambodians, +with the requisite authority for prosecuting his cause. That barbarous +king took care that his ambassadors should not be natives of his +kingdoms, because of the lack of confidence with which his vassals +inspired him as to their faithfulness. He chose the ambassadors from +different classes, so that a good result might come from the difference +of their characters and dispositions. One was a Portuguese, Diego +Veloso by name, and the other a Castilian, Blas Ruyz de Fernan +Goncalez. [284] They presented Gomez Perez with a fine gift, +consisting of a considerable quantity of ivory, benzoin, chinaware, +pieces of silks and cottons, and an elephant of a noble disposition, +as was learned later by experience. They proposed their embassy, which +was, in short, to beg help against the king of Syan [_i.e._, Siam], +who was about to attack the Cambodian king with a vast army. The latter +in recognition of that aid offered to become a vassal of the king of +Espana, and a Christian. That king was certain that so valorous and +courageous a knight as Gomez Perez would, under no circumstance, refuse +a deed in which God would receive so obvious a service, and that would +be so advantageous to the crown of Espana. The governor accepted the +present, and responded to it by another of certain European products, +and thanked the king for his confidence in applying to him. However, +it was impossible for him to set about that help just then, or divert +any portion of those forces that were prepared to punish the king of +Ternate and recover that kingdom and the rest of Maluco, which had +rebelled with so great an insult and outrage to the Spanish nation. His +Highness should trust in God our Lord, and persevere in his attempt to +serve him in the holy and true religion. When the Ternate enterprise +was over, he would take his force to the relief of Camboxa. With +these hopes, which were fulfilled by Don Luys de las Marinas, his son, +those ambassadors left. In order to give them truthful satisfaction +and a just cause for the delay, it was necessary to publish the true +purpose of that fleet, which until then had been kept secret. + +Then the governor determined upon his departure, and tried to take +with him as many men as possible. They were enlisted, willingly or +by force--those who were requested and those who were compelled, +alike. The encomenderos and soldiers caused a prodigal expense in +ships, supplies and parades--which, because of the great opportunity +furnished for all that in Filipinas, exceeded the governor's power and +wishes. The governor sent Don Luys, his son, with all the regulars to +the island of Cebu, where all the fleet was to be assembled. There he +remained six months, awaiting new orders. Gomez Perez was detained +in Manila, planning matters of importance. Two days before leaving, +while a guest and dining at the house of Pedro de Roxas, his assistant, +where he was wont to amuse himself in heavy gaming and merriment, +he became so gay--beyond his custom, and contrary to the harshness +of his character--that many interpreted it as his last farewell, +and an omen of what happened. He recounted in conversation, amid +much laughter, that father Fray Vicente, of the Franciscan order, +had told him that that enterprise could not succeed; for the army +was composed of conscripted men, and especially because the married +men were going. The governor left Manila October seventeen, with six +royal galleys, one galleon, one fusta, one fragatin, and a number of +fragatas, caracoas, and vireys--different varieties of craft of the +natives of the country. All the vessels, those belonging to his Majesty +and those of his vassals who offered their persons for his service, +totaled one hundred. There were one thousand well-armed Spaniards +and more than four hundred arquebusiers from the vicinity of Manila; +and another thousand of those called Visaias, people who use lances, +shields, and bows and arrows. Besides these, there were more than four +hundred others, Chinese, of those living throughout that island; and +of those who come to trade, another goodly number, with pay--the great +majority of whom were conscripts rather than volunteers. There was in +the galleys a quantity of food for the fleet. The governor appointed +his son, Don Luys Perez, as lieutenant of the fleet, and ordered him, +as above stated, to assemble it at the island of Cebu. He himself +embarked in the flagship, a vessel of twenty-eight benches, manned +by two hundred and fifty Chinese; and eighty Spaniards also embarked +in it. They reached Cabite, whence they sailed on the nineteenth, +together with several vessels carrying private persons, who followed +the governor at their own expense. They coasted the island of Manila, +until they reached Balajan; then they separated, for the vessels did +not lose sight of shore, while the governor sailed in the open sea. On +the twenty-fifth, he came alone to pass the night at the promontory of +Azufre [285] ["Sulphur Point"] on the island of Manila, opposite that +of Caca, where the current runs strong and the sea is choppy. As it +was during the blowing of the brisa, the galley could not advance. It +anchored under shelter of the point, but, through the strength of +the current, dragged slightly. In order to return to its shelter, +the Chinese were kept incessantly at the oar. In fact, they rowed +with little energy--either because they were men new to that labor, +and forced to the oar by violence; or because they were fatigued, and +harassed by those who commanded them. Other contrary winds assailed +them, which further impeded the voyage. In order to double certain +promontories of the land, it was necessary to ply the oars, and to +urge on the rowers with the severity and punishment generally used +in galleys. They thought that harsh, and contrary to the governor's +assurance, when he promised them that they would be treated with +affection. But neither the whip nor threats, nor overcoming the +currents by dint of the sweat of their limbs, seemed to them so +intolerable and injurious as to hear from the governor's mouth harsh +and severe words, ordering them to row manfully; for did they not, +he would put them in chains, and cut off their hair. Such an insult +among the Chinese is worthy of death, for they place all their honor in +their hair. They keep it carefully tended and gaily decked, and esteem +it as highly as ladies in Europa; and, in dressing it, display their +taste and their social standing. They determined to mutiny, in order +not to suffer such an insult and disgrace. Having appointed for that +purpose the following night (namely, the twenty-fifth of October), +when the Spaniards had lain down tired out upon the benches, and in +other places in the hull, the Chinese did the same. However, they +so cunningly divided themselves that each Chinese lay down beside +a Spaniard, and pretended to sleep. Just before the hour of dawn, +which they considered the most suitable time and the safest of all, +upon seeing the Spaniards in their soundest slumber, the Chinese, +at the sound of a shrill whistle (which was the signal agreed upon +among them), all arose at the same moment; and each one with the +greatest haste put on a white tunic or shirt, so that, in the midst +of the uproar and the darkness, they might recognize one another, +and distinguish those to be killed. However, for the greater security +of the deed, they also lit a considerable number of wax tapers, which +they had concealed in the folds of the white tunics. Then they seized +their catans, which are sharper and more curved than our cutlasses, +and each Chinese commenced, without disturbing the silence, to strike +his neighboring Spaniard; and then, with the increase of their fury, +to behead all those who were sleeping. More than sixty had embarked +on the flagship, among them the servants of the governor, and others, +old soldiers, who in order to oblige and accommodate him were enduring +discomfort. They had been gambling all the night; and being tired, +and because of the excessive heat, were sleeping naked, some in the +midship gangway, others on the benches, while the more favored ones, +to whom were given better quarters, slept aft. The governor went into +his cabin to sleep. The Chinese proceeded to slaughter those who, +suspecting nothing, were sleeping; it was done so quickly that when +some of those asleep in the stern awakened, the other Spaniards were +already dead. The guard did not perceive it, and such carelessness +could admit of no excuse, for they had been sufficiently warned, and +examples had preceded. Some waked, but finding themselves wounded and +confused, jumped overboard, where most of them were drowned. Some--a +very few--jumped overboard before being wounded, but they were also +drowned, although they were near shore, for they could not reach land +because of the strength of the current. Twelve escaped, and many dead +bodies were found on the beach. The Chinese, now grown bolder, seized +the pikes that they had hidden under the benches, and with outcries +completed their treachery. The governor, who was sleeping below the +hatchway, with a lantern or candle, awaked. In order to awaken him, +the Chinese themselves began purposely to make a greater noise; while +they cried out to him and begged him to come out and settle a quarrel +among the "Castillas," as they call the Spaniards. He, either for that +reason, or thinking that the galley was dragging as on other occasions, +arose in his shirt, opened the hatchway, looked out, and pushed his +body half way through it. At that same time, the Chinese fell upon him +with their cutlasses, and fatally wounded him. They cleft his head, +transfixed him with their pikes, and ran him through with more than +barbaric ferocity. Perceiving that his death was near at hand, he +retired, and took the prayer-book of his order, which he always kept +with him, and an image of our Lady. Between those two refuges, which +were later found bathed in his blood, he yielded up his life. However +he did not die immediately, for they found him later in his bed, +tightly holding the image, where he bled to death. About him were +the bodies of Daniel Gomez de Leon, his valet, Pantaleon de Brito, +Suero Diaz, Juan de Chaves, Pedro Maseda, Juan de San Juan, Carrion +Ponce, and Francisco Castillo--all servants of his--besides the bodies +of four very valiant slaves, who merited the same end. The outcome +was not learned until dawn, for not one of the Chinese dared enter +the governor's room that night, fearing lest a portion of the eighty +Spaniards of the galley had taken refuge there, so cowardly did their +guilt make them. The only survivors in the galley were Fray Francisco +Montilla, a discalced religious of St. Francis, and Juan de Cuellar, +the governor's secretary, who were sleeping below decks--where the +Chinese, since they are so cowardly, did not dare descend for three +days, until after the fury of the first attack had ceased. Then they +put them ashore on the Ylocos coast, on the same island of Luzon, +so that the natives would let them take water, and because the friar +and the secretary had made a certain compact with them, to surrender, +if no harm was done them. The Chinese, assured that no other longtime +Christians were alive, commenced to cry out and rejoice loudly at +having committed that deed, saying now they had no one to fear. + +The Spaniards, who were in other boats, near the land, although they +saw the lights, and indistinctly heard the noise from the flagship, +supposed that it was some unexpected work connected with the galley, +or something of that sort. When they learned what was happening, +after a long interval, from those who escaped by swimming, they could +not remedy it and consequently remained quiet. They were but few, +and of inadequate force, and their enterprise was ruined. They waited +until the morning, and when it dawned they saw that the galley had +already set its bastard, [286] and was sailing toward China with the +wind astern, and they could not follow it. It made its voyage, as the +wind served it, along all the coast of the island, until they cleared +Luzon, the Sangleys continuing to celebrate their victory. [287].... + +[The secretary and friar, after suffering great tortures of mind from +the Chinese, who threatened often to kill them, are saved at last, +through the superstition of the Chinese, and left ashore on the +Ilocos coast. The Chinese show their cowardice in a conflict with +the natives on that coast, whither they return later "to sacrifice +to the demon" one of their Christian Filipino prisoners. Being unable +to reach China, they land at Cochinchina, "where the king of Tunquin +seizes their cargo, and two large pieces of artillery embarked for +the expedition to Maluco, the royal standard, and all the jewels, +ornaments, and money. He let the galley drift ashore." The news +causes great lamentation in Manila. "Some of those who hated the +governor rejoiced, but their wrath immediately vanished and they wept +generally." Subsequent events follow:] + +... The news having been learned in Manila, and no papers of the +governor being found, appointing his successor (although it was known +that he had a royal decree for this), and believing it had been lost +in the galley along with much of his own property, and that of the +king and private persons: the city appointed Licentiate Rojas as +governor, and he filled the post for forty days. But the secretary, +Juan de Cuellar, together with Fray Francisco de Montilla, returning +in a wretched plight to Manila, reported that Gomez Perez, before +leaving, had left the appointment drawn in favor of his son, Don Luis; +and that they would find it in a box in the convent of St. Augustine +with other papers, in care of Fray Diego Munoz. Rojas had already +sent an order to Cebu for all the men of the expedition to return, +which was obeyed. Thereupon Don Luis, having come, by virtue of the +authority delegated by his father, although with certain protests, +succeeded to that government, until the arrival of Don Francisco Tello. + +Such was the end of that cavalier, whose achievements, judged +by themselves, have worth, and receive worth also by his zeal in +performing them. He did not lack political and military virtues, +or prudence in both. But he shut his eyes to examples, and, contrary +to their teaching, dared promise himself results, so that he became +rash and even confident. But Christian charity excuses all this. + +Don Luis, his kindred, and friends, wished to continue the expedition +to Maluco, and Father Antonio Fernandez came for that purpose from +Tydore; but it was not carried out. The fleet was broken up, which was +a signal providence for the Filipinas Islands. For at the beginning +of the following year, one thousand five hundred and ninety-four, +a considerable number of Chinese vessels, laden with men and arms, +but no merchandise as was their wont, came to the islands. The vessels +brought seven mandarins, some of the greatest viceroys or governors of +their provinces. It was rumored and was proved that when they learned +that, as Gomez Perez had undertaken that expedition (on which he had +been accompanied by all the Spaniards), they would find the country +unarmed, they were of a mind to conquer it or sack it--which would +have been very easy for them, had they found it as they expected. The +mandarins left their ships twice to visit Don Luis, attended by +a great pomp and retinue. He received them kindly, and gave each +mandarin a gold necklace. They told him that they had come by order +of their king to get the Chinese who were wandering unsettled among +those islands without his leave. But this was considered a pretext +for the truth, for so many mandarins were unnecessary for it, or so +many armed ships and supplies. Those Chinese were the same as those +who killed Gomez Perez, men from Chincheo. Accordingly Don Luis, +as against a known offender, sent his own cousin, Don Fernando de +Castro, in a vessel to recount their treachery to the Chinese king; +but the voyage turned out badly, and this effort wholly failed. + +At this time Langara, king of Camboxa, requested help earnestly, and +asked Don Luis to keep the promise that his father had made him some +time before. Consequently, in fulfilment of it, and so that those +forces, or some portion of them, should continue in the service of +the Church, for which they were prepared as a benefit for Ternate, +he determined to aid that king with them. + +[A description of Camboxa follows, with observations on its religion, +wealth, products, industries, and fauna. The account of the first +expedition to that country is as follows:] + +Don Luis, with zeal to reduce those nations to the bosom of the +Church, and their wealth and kings to the vassalage of the Spanish +crown, equipped three vessels. In them he sent Captain Juan Xuarez +Gallinato--a native of Tenerife, one of the Canarias Islands--with one +hundred and twenty Spaniards, besides some Filipinos. They left Cebu, +but a terrible storm immediately overtook them, and separated the +boats. Gallinato, borne by the fury of the winds, put in at Malaca, +and the other two vessels at Camboxa. They ascended the river, +where they learned that the king of Sian had routed him of Camboxa, +his neighbor. The latter, with the wretched remnants of his army, +fled to the kingdom of the Laos, also a neighboring people, but +inhuman. While he was begging charity from those most hard-hearted +people, the king of Sian had introduced as king of Camboxa one +Prauncar, nicknamed "Boca tuerta el Traydor" [_i.e._, "Wry-mouth, +the Traitor"], brother of the conquered king. This event did not +hinder the aid that the Spaniards were bringing, under the name of an +embassy. They reached the city of Chordumulo, eighty leguas' distance +from the bar. Leaving forty Spaniards in the ships, forty others went +to visit the place where the king was residing. They immediately made +efforts to visit him, but he refused to be seen that day. However, +he ordered a good lodging to be given them and had them told that he +would grant them audience in three days. But Diego Veloso and Blas +Ruyz--either by their former knowledge of the country, or actuated +by later craftiness, proceeding from their interpretation of that +suspicious delay--visiting a beautiful Indian woman of the king's +house, were secretly told by her that, since she was admitted to +and even desired in the affairs of that usurper, she knew that he +was intending to have them all killed. In the three days that he had +assigned them, as a rest from their journey, he was preparing men, +and the manner of executing his purpose. The Spaniards thanked her for +the warning, not without promises of reward. They were not dismayed at +the news of their peril. On the contrary, thanking the Indian woman +anew for it, they took an heroic although rash decision. They agreed +to invest the king's palace that night, and if necessary, to resist +a whole army. They set about the accomplishment of that enterprise, +disproportionate to human strength. They set fire to the powder +magazine. The townspeople ran up to its aid, or to see the damage. Amid +the confusion, the Spaniards entered the palace, and since they knew +the royal apartments, they penetrated them, until they encountered +the king in person. Having cut to pieces the soldiers of his guard, +they killed him also with their daggers. He defended himself and +cried out, but when his men arrived with help they found that he had +bled to death. The rumor of this deed aroused the guard, and then the +city, which has more than thirty thousand inhabitants. These seizing +their arms, more than fifteen thousand men pursued the Spaniards +with the arms that fury placed in their hands, and with many armed +elephants, which were not unskilled in warfare. Our two captains +formed their squadron, and continued to retire in excellent order, +always fighting, and killing not a few enemies. The battle lasted all +night, and until the second day, when they reached the ships with +incredible effort. They embarked and left that kingdom full of new +dissensions. The second day after, Gallinato arrived in his ship. He +landed, upon hearing of the event, as he thought that he would not be +fulfilling his duty if, when he heard the drums and bells, and saw the +streets and port, before filled with traders, but now with squadrons, +he did not take help to the Spaniards. He gave express orders to his +followers to act with all decorum, so that they might relieve the +anxiety of the Cambodians and reassure them, both by their bearing and +in the calmness of their arguments. The chief men of Camboxa visited +them peacefully, and Gallinato treated them very courteously. He +might have performed some great exploit, but seeing that he had +so few troops for the undertaking, and that affairs had now taken +another form and different condition, he determined to withdraw. He +opposed the majority of those influential men, who promised him the +crown of the kingdom, since they were well inclined to the Spaniards +and to foreign domination. From this came that flippant report that +Gallinato was king of Camboxa, which was believed by many in Espana; +and it was represented in the theaters of that country with acclaim +and applause. Some men well versed in affairs of those provinces were +of opinion that if Gallinato had embraced the opportunity, he might +have seized Camboxa and added it to the Spanish crown. I have seen +letters from Velloso and Blas Ruiz to the Audiencia of Manila after +the event, in which they say the same, and complain of Gallinato for +reprimanding what they did. But Gallinato--whose prudence and valor, +which had been proved on the most perilous occasions in that Eastern +land, and many years before in the wars of Flandes, would not allow +him to be easily affected by popular applause--showing an honorable +aversion to this temptation, sailed away, to return to Manila. He +took in provisions at Cauchinchina. Blas Ruyz and Diego Veloso had +also landed there before, and went alone overland to the kingdom of +the Laos, which lies west of Cauchinchina, to find the deposed king +Langara, to restore him to his throne. They found that he was already +dead, but that his son was living. Upon them telling him that they +had killed the usurper, his uncle and enemy, he went immediately to +his kingdom with Veloso and Ruyz, accompanied by ten thousand men, +whom the king of the Laos gave him, contrary to all expectations. He +attacked Camboxa, where Ruyz and Veloso always faithfully accompanied +him, both during the war, and afterward in the government. After +that the king sent another embassy to Filipinas, asking for men +to quiet the rebellions in the kingdom; and he and his vassals +promised to receive the faith of Jesus Christ. He also promised a +great portion of Camboxa to the Spaniards, so that they might live +off its tributes. This embassy reached Manila, just when Don Luis +had left the government and handed it over to Don Francisco Tello, +which gave occasion to Ternate to establish its tyrannies more firmly. + +[A short account of Pedro de Acuna's fortification of Cartagena, +in the West Indies, is given, and the consequent withdrawal, without +attack, of the Hawkins and Drake fleet despatched in 1595 by Queen +Elizabeth. Acuna shows in every way the ability of a good commander.] + +But let us return to Assia. The Cambodians still hoped to receive +aid from the Filipinas by their usual promise of conversion and +vassalage. Don Luis de las Marinas accepted the expedition, to make +it in person and at his own cost. He left Manila with Don Diego Jordan +(an Italian), Don Pedro de Figueroa, Pedro Villeatil, and Hernando de +los Rios Coronel, Spanish captains--the last named at present a priest, +and who had also been in the first war of Camboxa. A furious tempest +struck them in the open sea, which lasted three days, with the usual +horrors. The shipwreck was pitiful. Two vessels were knocked to pieces, +and the sea swallowed up all the men, provisions, and war materials. Of +all the soldiers and sailors who shipped aboard the almiranta, only +five escaped, by swimming to the Chinese shore. Some soldiers also +escaped from the flagship, which was broken by the waves, among whom +was Captain Hernando de los Rios. The other vessel reached Camboxa +almost destroyed, after heavy storms. It found in the Camboxa River +eight Malay junks. The Spaniards, seeing that the junks were carrying +certain slaves stolen from the king of Camboxa, whom they were coming +to help, inconsiderately grappled with the Malays. The latter, who +were carrying many and unusual fire devices, having recourse to these +rather than to force and arms, burnt our ship, and then in the fire and +smoke killed the majority of the Spaniards. Blas Ruiz and Diego Veloso +were not there at that time; but soon afterward they were besieged +in their quarters by the popular fury, and barbarously murdered in +the country where they were negotiating with the king. Those few +Spaniards who could escape went to the kingdom of Sian, and thence +to Manila. Heaven permitted that this should be the end of all that +preparation made to recover Ternate and the other Malucas. The tyrant +there exulted over the news, and attributed the events to his good +fortune, interpreting them as an approbation of his cause. Then he +confederated anew with our enemies. + +Don Francisco Tello, an Andalusian knight, succeeded Gomez Perez +in the government of Filipinas. He reached Manila in the year one +thousand five hundred and ninety-six. He immediately set himself to +learn the condition in which his predecessors had left matters, and +to provide aid for the garrisons. For, since the emperor of Japon had +caused those glorious martyrdoms among the religious of the Order of +St. Francis, in the year one thousand five hundred and ninety-five, +of which news had so lately been received, it was feared that he was +going to menace Filipinas. + +The inhabitants of the islands [_sic_] of Mindanao hate our nation as +deeply as do the Ternatans, and take arms against us in each and every +disturbance, as they did in that last one of Ternate. Consequently +Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa made certain agreements with Don +Francisco Tello, by virtue of which he made war on the Mindanaos and +Ternatans at his own expense. [288] Estevan Rodriguez was so rich that +he could undertake that exploit with safety. He lived in Arevalo, +a town of the island of Panaz [_sic_], one of the Filipinas. He set +out with some galleys, fragatas, and champans, and one ship, with +Spanish soldiers; and more than one thousand five hundred natives from +Pintados, as pioneers. He reached the river of Mindanao April twenty, +one thousand five hundred and ninety-six, whereupon the natives of +the place (who are especially called Mindanaos) on seeing so brave a +people, fled along up the river, and abandoned their settlement to +the fury of war. The majority of them arrived at the town Buyahen, +where Raxamura, king of the Mindanaos, was then living. The latter, +because of his youthful age, did not have the government in charge, and +everything depended on Silonga, an esteemed soldier and captain. Our +men, proceeding up the river, reached Tampacan, five leguas from the +above village. Prince Dinguilibot, uncle of Monao, its legitimate +lord (also a youth), was governing it. These rulers were, of their +own accord, friends to the Spaniards and consequently, on seeing +their arms, went out peacefully to meet them, and offered them their +help. They told the Spaniards that the enemy--and they were also +hostile to the men of Buyahen--had taken refuge in their fort at that +place. Estevan Rodriguez, having heard the news and having complimented +those princes, ordered the fleet to weigh anchor and to continue the +pursuit for four leguas, always up stream, to Buyahen. Having arrived, +he landed his men on St. Mark's day. Master-of-camp Juan de la Xara +led the men, although they landed with but little order, for they had +not fought with the Mindanaos, and thought that it would be easy to +rout them--as if for that reason, or for any other consideration, one +should permit a lack of military discipline. Estevan Rodriguez tried +to correct the confusion by his presence, by landing in person. He went +clad in armor so strong, that a charge from an esmeril [289] would not +pass through it. Only his head was unarmed, but covered with a cap and +plumes, while a negro carried his helmet. He was accompanied by five +well-armed soldiers. He had not taken more than fifty steps, when an +Indian named Ubal suddenly ran out of some dense tufted thickets, and, +attacking him with his campilan, cleft open his head. Ubal was the +brother of Silonga, and owner of the only cow in all that country. He +killed it three days previous to this misfortune, and, inviting his +friends to the feast, promised to kill the most distinguished person +of the Spaniards in that war. He fulfilled his word, for Estevan +Rodriguez fell, from his wound, and died three days afterward, +without having answered a single word to the questions asked him, +although he declared his answers by signs. The five Spaniards, on +seeing their captain wounded--so suddenly that the murderer appeared +and the blow was heard at the same moment--fell upon Ubal and cut him +to pieces. They informed Master-of-camp Xara of the general's death, +who, stifling his resentment, withdrew his men, and built a fort in +the most suitable place, near the river. He founded there his colony, +with suitable arrangements, so that our people could settle it. He +appointed regidors and ministers of justice, and called it Nueva +Murcia in honor of the Murcia of Espana, his native region. Then +he left affairs incomplete, intending to marry the widow of Estevan +Rodriguez, Dona Ana de Oseguera; and reached Filipinas in the first +part of June. Governor Don Francisco Tello, hearing of the event +at El Embocadero, [290] one hundred leguas from Manila, and having +been warned of Xara's design in coming, arrested him at his arrival, +and sent Captain Toribio de Miranda to take charge of the war in +Mindanao. The latter found the troops withdrawn to the port of La +Caldera, which is on the same island, but distant thirty-six leguas +from the mouth of the river. There they remained until August, when +Don Francisco Tello appointed Don Juan Ronquillo in Manila as captain; +he was also captain of the galleys. He also appointed as captains, to +accompany him, Pedro Arceo, Covarrubias and others; as master-of-camp, +Diego Chaves Canizares; as sargento-mayor, Garcia Guerrero; and as +captains of infantry, Christoval Villagra and Cervan Gutierrez. Don +Juan arrived with this reenforcement to attack the enemy, and fell +upon them so suddenly that, seeing themselves exhausted, they begged +help from the king of Ternate--whom the Mindanaos recognize by certain +payments which are the same, or almost the same, as tributes. Buizan, +a brother of Silonga, went on that embassy to Ternate, and negotiated +so efficaciously that the Ternate king sent seven caracoas with him, +six pieces of artillery, two medium-sized pieces, and some falcons, +together with six hundred men. These, sailing to the river of Mindanao, +tried to ascend as far as Buyahen by it. But they found at its mouths +great obstructions to pass, because in one branch the largest Spanish +fort threatened them, and the galleys and other boats; and in the +other was a narrow pass, which ran to a point, on which was built a +rampart guarded by forty men. From that place to the other side of +the river, our men had themselves built a very strong wooden bridge, +close to which a galliot plied. The Ternatans, seeing so strong a +defense on both sides, resolved to fortify themselves on the chief +mouth of the river. They built a small fort, and, together with an +equal number of Mindanao soldiers, shut themselves up in it. This +news aroused General Ronquillo to dislodge them. He went down to +accomplish it with the galleys and other vessels, and one hundred +and forty well-armed men. He landed with one hundred and sixteen +men, together with Captains Ruy Gomez Arellano, Garcia Guerrero, +Christoval Villagra, and Alonso de Palma. He met the enemy at a +distance of eighty paces on the bank of the river. The Ternatans +and Mindanaos had carefully cleared the front of their fort, but +had designedly left a thicket at one side of it, where three hundred +Ternatans were ambushed, while the rest were inside the fortress. As +both parties saw how few of our men were attacking them, they grew +ashamed of their fortress and ambush. Threatening our men insolently, +they showed themselves and advanced upon the Spaniards. They found +so great opposition from our men that without using any stratagem, +or for no other reason beyond natural strength, at the first shock of +battle nearly all the Ternatans were killed, and the rest fled. Our +men pursued them until they killed them all. The men of Tampaca, +who had been neutral until then, in consideration of the dealings of +Fortune, and seeing that she had declared in our favor, took up arms +for us. Only seventy-seven Ternatans, badly wounded, escaped; and +fifty of these were drowned in the river, into which they had thrown +themselves in desperation. Only three of the twenty-seven survived, +and they informed their king of it. The Spaniards seized the boats, +artillery and spoils of she conquered, and became encouraged to +continue the war against infidels. + +Don Francisco Tello was not neglectful of other similar occurrences. He +learned by his spies, and rumor had it, that the emperor of Japon +was collecting a large army and preparing many boats for it, and +large supplies of arms and food. It was also learned that he was +securing himself, by treaty, from the Chinese, of whom the Japanese, +because of their natural enmity, live in fear. Hence they inferred +that he was equipping himself to make war outside his kingdoms. He +had negotiated and concluded alliances with the king of Ternate, +and with other neighbors who were hostile to the Spanish crown. From +all of those actions there resulted eager conjectures that all that +tempest was threatening the Filipinas, and particularly their capital, +Manila. The governor prepared his forces, and under pretext of saluting +that barbaric emperor with a present, sent Captain Alderete to find +out the truth. The ambassador left for Japon in July. At the same time, +Don Francisco sent the galleon "San Felipe" to Nueva Espana with advice +of those rumors. Those two vessels, that of Alderete and the "San +Felipe," met in Japon, and the natives did not conceive well-disposed +intents concerning them. Alderete learned thoroughly the forces and +designs of the Japanese, and his efforts were of use in clearing up +the apprehensions prevalent in Manila, and preventing unreasonable +fears. He brought another splendid present to the governor, and both +sides made provision for any possible outcome. + +The Audiencia was again established in Manila in the year one thousand +five hundred and ninety-eight, for King Filipo was prudently conferring +authority on that province. The auditors--Licentiates Zambrano, Mezcoa, +[291] and Tellez de Almacan--and Fiscal Geronymo Salazar y Salcedo, +formed it. + +[The same year when the Audiencia was reestablished, Felipe II dies at +the Escorial (September 13, 1598) and is succeeded by his son Felipe +III. Neglect falls upon Molucca affairs:] + +... Now at this time Heaven was hastening the reduction of the Malucas, +and the punishment of the persecution of the faithful, although the +tyrants acted more insolently. But since the enterprise had to be +prepared and executed in the Filipinas Islands, and determined and +encouraged in the supreme Council of the Indias, it was advisable for +the president and counselors to display some warmth in the cause--which +by unhappy circumstances, as one despaired of, no one enlivened; and +the papers of discussion and notices belonging to it were forgotten +and heaped together.... + +[Meanwhile the alliance of Ternate with the English continues. Book +vi ends with a tale of occurrences in the household of the king +of Ternate.] + + + + + +[The greater part of the seventh book is taken up with the translation +or condensation from the Dutch relation of the first voyage of van +Nek to the East Indies. A critical resume of Erasmus's description +of Holland and its people is given, which allows Argensola, as a +churchman and good Catholic, to inveigh against the heresies and many +religions of the Dutch. As a consequence of the Dutch expedition, +the Ternatans gain new life in their opposition to the Portuguese and +Spaniards. Frequent embassies are sent to Manila from the Portuguese +and natives at Tidore, requesting aid for the Moluccas--which Francisco +Tello was neglecting, as other matters appeared more important. One +embassy, in charge of the brother of the king of Tidore, is followed +by another in charge of a Portuguese, Marcos Diaz de Febra, who +presents a letter from the Tidore ruler to Dr. Morga. The embassy is +successful, and in 1602 Diaz returns to Tidore with reenforcements and +a promise of an expedition from Manila. In the Philippines themselves, +the Chinese are continually congregating in greater numbers, and are +rapidly becoming a menace, although the governor is blind to that fact, +and claims that they are necessary to the well-being of the community.] + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Eighth + +[Molucca affairs are given considerable attention in the administration +of Governor Pedro de Acuna. The petitions for aid, sent to the +Philippines from those islands, continue. Tello is removed from +the governorship, and Acuna sent to take his place. The latter is +received in Manila (May, 1602) with great rejoicing, as his merits +and reputation are well known. Tello's death occurs in Manila while +waiting to give his residencia. Acuna enters into affairs with great +energy. The narrative continues (p. 270):] + +... The new governor was pained at beholding the poverty of the royal +chest and treasury, and himself under the obligation of preserving +the king's and his own credit. The Malucas formed part of this +consideration, for their reduction was a considerable part of his +duty. But he reassured himself, believing that he might supply the +lack of money by energy. He attended to matters personally, as was +his custom, both those in Manila and those in its vicinity. He built +galleys and other boats, which were greatly needed for the defense +of the sea, which was then infested by pirates and near-by enemies, +especially the Mindanaos. He visited then the provinces of Pintados, +and attended to the needs of those regions. In one of these visits, +besides the storms suffered by his little vessel (which carried only +three soldiers), another signal danger overtook him. Twenty-two English +vessels, enriched with the booty that they had seized from the islands +of that government, tried to attack and capture him. But for lack of +a tide they remained stranded, and could not row. Don Pedro saw that +they threw overboard more than two thousand of their many Spanish +and islander captives in order to lighten themselves. They also +threw overboard a beautiful Spanish girl seventeen years old. Later, +the Manila fleet went in pursuit of them, and it was able to capture +some of the pirates, and they were punished. But that punishment was +much less than their cruelty. [292] Don Pedro tried to remove the +hindrances to the enterprise that he was meditating; but had to delay +for some months what he most wished to hasten, in order to despatch +Joloan and Japanese matters. + +Chiquiro, the Japanese ambassador, had recently arrived in Manila, +bearing a present of the products and industries of those kingdoms, +and letters; he also had orders to negotiate for friendship with the +governor, and commerce between the Japanese emperor (by name Daifusama) +and the Filipinas and Nueva Espana. The proximity of those provinces, +the power of the Japanese kings, their natural dispositions, and +other circumstances which experience showed to be worthy of serious +consideration, demanded that that commerce be not refused--although, +for the same reasons, the opinion was expressed that it was not +advisable. But since that barbarian had once espoused that desire, +it was not easy to find a means to settle the matter without causing +jealousy or anger. Dayfusama requested then that the Spaniards trade +in Quanto, a port of one of his own provinces; that they establish +friendship, so that the Japanese could go to Nueva Espana; that +the governor send him masters and workmen to build ships for him in +Japon, in order to continue that navigation. Dayfusama insisted upon +this, having been persuaded by one of our religious of the Order +of St. Francis, one Fray Geronymo de Jesus, whom the Japanese king +esteemed greatly. This was a serious matter, and in many ways most +damaging to the Filipinas. In those islands, the greatest security +against those provinces has consisted for many years in the lack of +ships and pilots among the Japanese, together with their ignorance +of the art of navigation. It has been observed by experts that, +whenever that insolent barbarian has shown any intention to arm against +Manila, he has been prevented by this obstacle. Consequently to send +him workmen and masters to build Spanish vessels for him, would be +equivalent to providing him weapons against the Spaniards themselves; +and the navigation of the Japanese would be the prelude to the +destruction of Filipinas and Nueva Espana, while long voyages by the +Japanese were inadvisable, and moreover contrary to safety. Considering +all these reasons, Governor Don Pedro de Acuna ordered the ambassador +Chiquiro to be entertained splendidly. He gave him some presents +for his king and for himself, and despatched a vessel with another +present--a moderate one, so that it might not argue fear, as it would +if he took too much. It sailed together with the ship of Dayfusama and +his ambassador, both being filled with articles of barter. The letters +of Don Pedro contained long compliments at his pleasure in procuring +the establishment of greater friendship. But he said that, although he +had received full power from King Filipe for things pertaining to the +government of Filipinas, that part of the king's embassy touching his +request for sailors and the building of Spanish ships he was unable to +decide, until he should inform the viceroy of Nueva Espana; nor could +the viceroy decide it without special orders from his Majesty. He +promised the Japanese king to write about it for him, and to aid the +accomplishment of so just a desire. But he warned him that it would +be necessary to wait more than three years for the furtherance and +resolution of the matter, because of the distance and accidents of +so long voyages. It was ordered that the same Fray Geronymo himself +should deliver all this message to Dayfusama. Geronymo de Jesus was +written to in secret, instructing and reproving him. He was ordered +to tell the Japanese monarch that the governor esteemed his good will +exhibited toward the commerce and friendship of the Spaniards, and his +own great desire for them. He was to encourage him to keep the peace, +which the governor himself would keep without any infringement. But +he was ordered subtly to divert the king's mind from similar desires +and propositions, and not to facilitate any of them; for although +perhaps there were no hidden deceit in the then reigning monarch, +or any interest greater than that of friendship, it might cause great +harm in times of a less well-intentioned successor, who might abuse +the navigation, and turn it against those who taught it to them. The +governor promised to send another ship soon to trade. Fray Geronymo +was to give the king hopes that some Spanish masters of Spanish boats +would sail in it. Dayfusama was to be patient, and should consider +how offended he would be, if his servants were to open up any new +commerce without consulting him, or without his order. + +With this despatch Chiquiro returned to Japon in his ship.... + +[A storm however overtakes him near Formosa, and his ship is wrecked +and he and his men drowned, the event being learned only long +after. "Daifusama, being persuaded by Fray Geronymo, had granted +leave for our religion to be preached in his kingdoms, to build +our churches, and for all who wished to profess our religion with +public authority." Accordingly the orders send various missionaries +to different districts of Japan. "Many persuaded Don Pedro not to +send away these religious, but, although those persuasions were well +founded, and obstacles put in the way of their departure, it was +determined to allow them to go.... These religious did not find in +the provinces proof of the desires that had been told them. Very few +Japanese were converted, and fewer were disposed toward it, for the +king and tonos [chiefs] ... did not love our religion." Don Pedro +sends the promised ship to Japan laden with "dye-wood, deerskins, +raw silk, and various other articles." Thus Japanese demands are met, +and the emperor is satisfied with the diplomatic answer returned +to him. Meanwhile "Don Pedro's thought bore on the recovery of the +Malucas." Letters pass between him and the Portuguese commander Andrea +Furtado de Mendoza in regard to the expedition, and aid from the +Philippines, and the hostilities of the Dutch. (The Jesuit brother +Gaspar Gomez had been sent by Acuna from Mexico to Spain, to show +the necessity and advantages of the expedition; after various delays +it was set on foot, and Furtado obtained many successes in Amboina, +where he had some encounters with the Dutch. The king of Ternate +asked help from Java and Mindanao.)] + +The season and necessity compelled General Furtado to request +urgently the help that was being prepared in Filipinas. Amboino +is eighty leguas from those islands. Accordingly he sent Father +Andres Pereyra, a Jesuit, and Captain Antonio Brito Fogaco, in May +of the year one thousand six hundred and two. They reached Cebu July +twenty-five. They sailed thence for Manila, August six, and entered +that city September five. Don Pedro de Acuna rejoiced greatly over +their arrival. He asked them--so great was his desire and interest, +or rather, his noble rivalry--minutely concerning the expeditions of +General Furtado. Since the latter had referred to them in his letters, +they gave an extended relation of them, and executed his embassy, +each one fulfilling the office that he professed. Don Pedro did not +delay the sending [of reenforcements.] He assembled the council of +war, where it was resolved to send Furtado the help that he requested, +without delay, although they felt obliged to accommodate themselves to +the necessities of the country. Following this decision the governor +sent a message to the provinces of Pintados ordering captain Juan +Xuarez Gallinato, chief of them, to provide all necessaries for the +expedition, and himself to sail with his best disciplined infantry +from Cebu to the city of Arevalo, the place assigned for assembling +the fleet. Gallinato did this, and also sent a vessel to Oton to +lade as much as possible of the supplies. It reached Oton October +twenty-eight, and the same day Don Pedro left Manila for Pintados, +in order, by his presence, to inspire greater haste in the despatch +of the fleet, which was already almost ready in Oton. He arrived +there November thirteen. So fiery was his spirit that he assembled +the reenforcement and entrusted it to Juan Xuarez Gallinato--without +allowing the expeditions from Xolo and Mindanao to embarrass him, even +though he saw the natives of those islands, divided into different +bodies among the Pintados, pillaging and murdering his Majesty's +vassals--and appointed him general and commander of that expedition. + +[Furtado, after asking the reenforcement from Acuna, goes to the +Moluccas. Some of his men are defeated in a naval engagement with +the natives, whereupon Furtado builds a fort at the friendly island +of Machian.] + +After the fleet, military stores and food had been collected, +they were delivered to Gallinato by the auditors and fiscal of the +Audiencia. The supplies consisted of one thousand fanegas of cleaned +rice, three hundred head of cattle, two hundred jars of wine, eighty +quintals of nails and bolts, forty quintals of powder, three hundred +Ylocos blankets, seven hundred varas of Castilian wool, one hundred +sail-needles, and thirty jugs of oil. The men amounted to two hundred +soldiers--one hundred and sixty-five arquebusiers and thirty-five +musketeers--twenty-two sailors, several pilots, one master, three +artillerymen in the "Santa Potenciana," and twenty common seamen. The +monthly expense of all that equipment amounted to twenty-two thousand +two hundred and sixty pesos. This having been done on the part of +the governor and Audiencia, they required Father Andres Pereyra +and Captain Brito to go with the reenforcement--which Gallinato had +ready, with its colors, and with Captains Christoval Villagra and +Juan Fernandez de Torres. The company of Captain Don Tomas Bravo, the +governor's nephew, son of Don Garcia his brother, was left behind; but +the captain went, and served bravely on the expedition. The infantry +was taken on the ship "Sancta Potenciana," and on the fragatas "Santo +Anton," "San Sebastian," "San Buenaventura," and "San Francisco." The +fleet left the port of Yloilo January twenty, one thousand six hundred +and three, and reached La Caldera in Mindanao the twenty-fifth. They +remained there until the twenty-eighth, as they had some information +concerning those enemies. Then they sailed toward Maluco, and sighted +the island of Siao February seven, and at dawn of the next day that +of Taolan, four leguas from Siao. There the fragata "Sant Anton" was +wrecked on a shoal of the island, which gave greater anxiety to the +fleet. Gallinato made efforts so that the men should not perish. He +sent Captain Villagra, who saved them, as well as the weapons and +the pieces of artillery; the rest was left in the sea. They continued +their voyage and sighted the island of Ternate February thirteen. On +the fourteenth they entered that of Tydore, where they heard of +Andres Furtado's arrival. There they rested but little, in order +to join him sooner. Sailing thence with a good breeze they reached +Ternate, and made harbor at Talangame, one legua from the fortress, +on the sixteenth of the same month. The fleets saluted one another +with tokens of friendly regard, and the generals did the same.... + +[The active campaign soon begins, and notwithstanding some +few successes in the siege of Ternate by Furtado and Gallinato, +sickness, and want of ammunition and provisions, compel the Portuguese +commander to withdraw before the superior forces and equipment of the +Ternatans. Thereupon Gallinato and his men return to the Philippines +via Tidore, while Furtado intends going to Amboina and perhaps to +Malaca. About April of this same year the Jesuit brother, Gaspar +Gomez, reaches Spain, to argue before the Council of the Indias the +necessity of an effective expedition from the Philippines. There it is +agreed that Acuna shall undertake one in person. The following year a +letter received from Acuna by the council describes the ill-success of +Furtado's expedition and the necessity for an effective expedition from +the Philippines, a synopsis of the letter being given by our author.] + + + +Conquest of the Malucas Islands +Book Ninth + +[The action of the council finally secured the king's assent to the +Molucca expedition, and the following decree was sent to Acuna:] + +... Don Pedro de Acuna, my governor and captain-general of the +Filipinas Islands, and president of my royal Audiencia therein. On +September twenty of the past year, six hundred and three, I wrote you +by an advice-boat on which Gaspar Gomez, of the Society of Jesus, took +passage for Nueva Espana, my resolution in regard to what you wrote +me from Nueva Espana, when you went to take charge of that office, +about the Ternate expedition. In accordance with that resolution, +I have ordered a contingent of five hundred men to be collected in +these kingdoms, which are to be conveyed in the trading fleet that +sails to Nueva Espana this year. I wrote to the viceroy to have +another five hundred men enlisted so that, at the very least, eight +hundred men could be sent you for this enterprise. I have appointed +four captains for the contingent from these kingdoms. One of them, +namely, Admiral Juan de Esquivel, is to be commander and governor of +the said soldiers. I have also appointed six substitutes, practiced and +experienced soldiers, so that, in case any of the said captains die, +these may take command of the men, and that they may be in charge +of the companies to be raised in Nueva Espana, as I am writing to +the viceroy. I have assigned forty ducados per month as pay to the +said captains; to Admiral Juan de Esquivel the sum of sixty; and to +the substitutes, twenty-five escudos apiece until ahey reach Nueva +Espana. Thenceforward the said Juan de Esquivel, in case I order +him to be given the title of master-of-camp, shall enjoy the sum of +one hundred and twenty ducados per month; but if he serves with the +title of commander and governor of the said soldiers, he shall have +sixty. The substitutes shall receive forty; and the soldiers--both +those levied in Espana and those to be raised in Nueva Espana--shall +have the sum of eight ducados per month. I have ordered the viceroy, +in accordance with the above, to send to those islands the necessary +money to meet the pay of the soldiers for one year. If they are +detained longer in other affairs of my service, he shall also furnish +what may be necessary after advice from you. I have thought it best +to advise you of the above, in order to charge and order you that, +if the pay of the soldiers can be moderated, in respect to what is +there paid men of that rank, you may reform the schedule justifiably, +advising me thereof, and the viceroy of Nueva Espana. However, you +shall make no alteration in the pay of Admiral Juan de Esquivel, +or of the captains, alferezes, or substitutes. I have also ordered +the viceroy to provide you with whatever may be necessary, up to +the amount of the one hundred and twenty thousand ducados that you +have asked for this undertaking; also six pieces of artillery for +bombardment, and five hundred quintals of arquebus powder. The men +sent from here are armed with muskets and arquebuses. You shall be +careful in the distribution of this money, and in all the rest you +shall exercise the advisable care, system, and caution. You shall +endeavor to attain the end sought, as I confidently expect from you, +with the men sent from Espana, and those from Nueva Espana, together +with those whom you shall have collected in those islands for the +expedition to Ternate. If possible, you shall make the expedition +in person, as you have offered to do, and shall leave those islands +provided as it fitting. In case conditions are such that you cannot +go in person, on this expedition, then you shall appoint another man +of the experience and qualities requisite for it, who may take entire +charge of it; and for this I grant you authority. It is my will that, +in case of your death while on the expedition, or through any other +cause, or the death of the person whom you may appoint for it, Admiral +Juan de Esquivel succeed in it and continue it. All the sea and land +forces who shall take part in the said expedition, shall obey him as +they would yourself. I declare that, in this event, and in case of +your death, and the succession of the said Juan de Esquivel to the +charge of the expedition, he shall be subject and subordinate to my +royal Audiencia in those islands. The captains in whose charge is the +infantry raised in these kingdoms, I have selected as worthy men who +have served. Accordingly I charge and order you chat you honor and +favor them as far as possible, for in that I shall consider myself +served. You shall not dismiss them or deprive them of their companies +to give these to others, without just cause, unless it be to appoint +them to better offices. However, if they should commit crimes you +may punish them, as their superior. It is supposed that by the time +of the arrival of these soldiers at those islands--and they shall +leave Nueva Espana in the first vessels, after the arrival of the +trading fleet there--you will have matters so well in hand that you +may begin the expedition immediately. I charge you straitly to do +with circumspectness, consideration, and caution what I expect from so +gallant a soldier. These men are to be well disciplined and drilled, +and everything so ordered that the desired and so important effect +may be gained, for you see the risk in this and its expense. You shall +endeavor, as I charge you, to have the advisable care and order taken +in the efficient distribution and collection of my revenues, and the +avoidance of superfluous expense. Of the course of events you shall +keep me advised on all occasions. After recovering the fort of Ternate, +you shall place there and on the island the garrison necessary for +its safety. I have ordered the viceroy of Nueva Espana, if he has +any opportunity for it, to advise you as soon as the men raised here +arrive there [_i.e._, in Nueva Espana], and that he report clearly to +you the contingent enlisted in that country, and that will be raised +in any other way, as well as the time that they will leave there, so +that you may take the necessary precautions concerning them from those +islands. If you consider it advisable for these men to stop anywhere +and not to go to Manila, you shall so order it, or give any other +orders that you deem most advisable, in anything. Valladolid. June +twenty, one thousand six hundred and four. + +After the above decree was sent, its dispositions began to be carried +out in Espana. Before this, in the preceding year one thousand six +hundred and three, while governor Don Pedro was occupied in the +preparations necessary for this purpose [_i.e._, of the expedition], +an accident occurred in Filipinas which threatened their loss and +other greater misfortunes. In the month of April a fire broke out +in Manila and burnt the richest part and more than half of the city, +and it was impossible to keep the goods from burning which had been +discharged from the ships recently arrived from Nueva Espana which +were being kept in the most secure of the houses. Two hundred and +seventy houses, wood and stone, were burned, and even the monastery +of St. Dominic (both house and church), the royal Spanish hospital, +and the magazines; and not a single edifice was left standing in +the burned area. Fourteen Spaniards were burned, among whom was +Licentiate Sanz, canon of the cathedral, together with some Indians +and negroes. The loss was estimated at one million.... + +[The incident of the coming of the three Chinese mandarins and their +pretense of looking for an island of gold is described. This with +certain rumors, readily believed, leads to the outbreak of feeling +against the Chinese or Sangleys resident in Manila and other parts of +the island. That same year (1603), the insurrection by them takes +active shape. Argensola's account is substantially the same as +that of other writers. He traces the insurrection during its rise, +and progress, and the retreat of the Sangicys, with the consequent +slaughters of those people. The following extracts and synopses are +made from his account:] + +At the time when Covernor Don Pedro was attending most closely to +the war with Maluco, there occurred in Manila a circumstance such +that it might not only have suspended the war, but extinguished the +entire province. A man was residing in Manila who had remained there +when the great pirate Limaon (of whose history popular accounts are +current) came against the city. He was formerly an idolater, and, as +was reported, served the pirate for a lewd purpose. His name was Encan, +and he was a native of Semygua in the province of Chincheo. He was +baptized during Santiago de Vera's term, and took the latter's surname, +being called Baptista de Vera. He proved sagacious, industrious, and +of efficacious energy, by means of which, exercising his trading, he +came to possess great wealth and to have influence with the governors +of Filipinas. Through his arrangements the Sangleys negotiated with +Don Pedro, asking his consent to finish a parapet of the wall that +he was completing, at their own cost; for they, as a portion of the +commonwealth, wished to do this service for his Majesty. Each of them +offered four reals for the work. This service and the thanks of the +citizens, whom Encan or Baptista had bought by benefits, destroyed +or decreased the suspicions conceived against their conspiracy. He +was respected by the Spaniards and loved by the Sangleys. He had twice +been their governor, and had many adopted sons and dependents.... Near +the Parian was another district inhabited by Japanese, a race hostile +to the Sangleys, with whom they are at constant war in their own +country. The governor summoned their headmen, and sounded them by kind +methods, as he wished to know how to depend on them on any occasion, +and if they would help against the Chinese if war came. The Japanese, +puffed up by the confidence that he placed in them, and elated that +time would give them an opportunity to fight against their enemy, +answered that they were ready to die with the Spaniards. Some trouble +arose from this wise effort, and as the Japanese kept the secret +badly, or referred to it with exaggeration, it became public that +Don Pedro was going to kill the Sangleys with their help. Some of +the Japanese told them that, so that the Sangleys could flee and pay +them for the warning. Many Sangleys tried to take to the mountains, +while all were in fear. Those who wished to revolt were able to +persuade the others to do the same, and to quiet the anxious by +promises. In fact, the greater portion of them determined to rebel, +and assigned St. Francis' day for the beginning of the insurrection, +at the hour when the Christians would be busied in their churches, +in the holy feast. Some said that the time assigned for it was during +the night, when twenty-five thousand of them would enter the city and +behead our men. Some indications of it escaped, notwithstanding their +secrecy. Juan de Talavera, parish priest of the hamlet of Quiapo, +informed the archbishop that an Indian woman, with whom a Sangley was +in love, had revealed to him the plot for St. Francis's day.... All +these advices and some others were learned immediately by the governor +and the royal Audiencia. It would be sufficient to see the haste with +which the Chinese sold everything, even to their shoes, and adjusted +their debts--although this was interpreted rather as a design to go +away than one of treason. In order to relieve them from fear of the +Spaniards and Japanese, the governor talked to them himself, and +had the pledge of safety and the royal faith published anew in all +districts. But no effort could quiet them. Three days before that +of St. Francis, more than four hundred Anhay merchants remained in +the city, because they had been unable to sell their goods. These, +upon seeing the others in confusion because of the report that the +Spaniards and Japanese were about to kill them, sent their embassy +to Don Pedro by one Chican, also an Anhay or Chincheo.... He came at +night, being in fear of the other Chinese. He communicated their fears +to the governor and their present uncertainty; and stated that they +did not know what resolution to take, and consequently came to him +for advice and protection. The governor, after hearing him and having +completely assured him with his answer, went next day personally to +talk to Chican's companions, and satisfied them with affectionate +words, saying that the Spanish nation is not accustomed to execute +or to consent to such deceits. After this talk they were quieted, +but those who had evil intentions were not satisfied.... + +[At the first outbreak of the insurrection, Encan is sent to reassure +and quiet the Sangleys. He returns very late "telling Don Pedro that +he had been in danger of being elected their chief, and that they +wished to force him to accept it." In the slaughter of Don Luis +Dasmarinas and his men which soon follows, over thirty Spaniards +manage to escape. The Japanese aid the Spaniards, while the Sangleys +try to induce all their countrymen of the Parian to join them.] + +The few Sangleys in the Parian caused the Spaniards no less anxiety +than the many in the fort, both because they had them for so near +neighbors and as they supposed that if these saw our cause declining, +they would join their countrymen. Besides, it was known that the +insurgents had sent to ask those in the Parian to join them, and had +advised them of the Spaniards whom they had killed. This was declared +by a Sangley, who was caught while crossing the river by swimming, +by the sentinel of the river-boats. He, confessing, when put to the +torture, that he was a spy, and that he gave and carried messages, +was beheaded. On the other side, it was considered that although it +would lessen the anxiety to kill all the Sangleys or to attempt it, +it did not appear a just punishment toward people of whose crime +they were uncertain--much more so, since they had come to Filipinas +to conduct their trading in good faith, and the governor had given +them his word for their safety if they were quiet and did not mix in +the rebellion.... + +[It is finally resolved to induce the peaceful Sangleys to take refuge +in the Augustinian convent. However, they refuse to take advantage +of the offer, although some put their goods in safety. Meanwhile +the hostile Sangleys attempt to incite them to join their ranks, +and on their refusal, turn upon them "and kill more than two +hundred." Encan is found concealed in a house for fear of capture, +whereupon he confesses his part in the rebellion. The religious +take up arms against the insurgents, notable among them being Fray +Antonio Flores, an Augustinian lay-brother, and formerly a soldier: +he is credited with having slain six hundred Sangleys in the final +slaughter. The Chinese, after driving in an attacking party of five +hundred men under Gallinato, assault the walls of the city, but are +finally driven back with great slaughter. Their Parian is burned, +and they begin their retreat, going to San Pablo and other districts, +pursued by the Spaniards and natives, who kill immense crowds of them +and disperse the rest. Spaniards, Japanese, and Pampangos are sent +out under Sargento-mayor Azcueta, and the insurrection is crushed with +terrible slaughter; "for the Japanese and natives are so ferocious that +nothing can restrain them." The final result of the last campaign shows +that only "slightly more than one hundred [of the Sangleys] survived, +who were kept alive for the galleys. Eight natives and six Japanese +died on our side in these two battles [_i.e._, the slaughters of the +pursuit]. No Spaniard was killed, although many were wounded." Encan +is "hanged and quartered, his head exposed on the site of the Parian, +and his goods confiscated; and in the days following, justice gave the +same punishment to other guilty Chinese." The insurrection costs the +lives of more than twenty-three thousand Chinese and only five hundred +are left for the galleys. "Some say that the number of Sangleys killed +was greater, but in order that the illegality in admitting so many +into the country contrary to royal prohibitions might not be seen, the +officials concealed or diminished the numbers of those that perished."] + +Don Pedro had had some advices of how well affected his Majesty was +to the enterprise of Maluco. Awaiting the effects of that decision, +he wrote by all the ways possible; and by India, to solicit those who +had charge of the matter. Relieved from the hindrance caused by the +Sangleys, he turned his mind to the preparation and equipment of the +fleet, for the time when he should be ordered to set out. But the end +of this war was the beginning of other needs for Manila. Mechanical +trades were stopped, and there was no work or provisions. Prices +of food increased with their lack. All supplies had been formerly +in great abundance, and were obtained through the Sangleys, for the +Indian natives lack the willingness and the energy for such work. The +cultivation of the land, the care of raising fowls, the weaving +of cloth, all of which industries they had exercised in their old +days of infidelity, they had forgotten. Especially was the Parian or +Alcayceria wasted by fire and sword. It was once so full of gain and +abundance that Don Pedro wrote to one of his relatives in Espana, a +short time after his arrival at Manila, these following words of it: +"This city is remarkable for the size of its buildings, which have +surprised me. I shall mention only one, which is the chief one. It has +an Alcayceria that contains all kinds of silks and gold, and mechanical +trades; and for these things there are more than four hundred shops, +and generally more than eight thousand men who trade therein. When +the trading fleets come from China with their merchandise, which is +the present time of the year, there are always more than thirteen +or fourteen thousand men. They bring wonderful things, that are not +found in Europa." Besides this, Don Pedro feared that the chastisement +inflicted in the slaughter would discourage the intercourse of the +Sangleys with us, and that the vessels that were wont to come from +China with food would not come. Greater and universal was the fear +that in place of trading ships, armed vessels would come to avenge the +Sangleys. Don Pedro sent the prior of Manila, Fray Diego de Guevara, to +Espana by way of India, with advices of the deed and of his fears. The +incidents that befell him on his voyage in India itself, and in Persia, +Turquia, and Italia, forced him to delay three years before he could +reach the court, where he found other despatches already arrived. + +At the same time Don Pedro sent Captain Marcos de la Cueva, together +with Fray Luis Gandullo, a Dominican, to Macao--a city of China, where +Portuguese reside--with letters for the commandant and council of +that city, advising them of the rebellion of the Sangleys, and of its +result, so that they might advise him by all ways, at any rumor of an +armed fleet in China. They took letters also for the tutons, haytaos, +and inspectors of the provinces of Canton and Chincheo, giving account +of the transgression of the Chinese, and how it obliged the Spaniards +to inflict so severe a punishment. The ambassadors found the country +quiet upon their arrival, although some fugitive Sangleys, fleeing +from Manila in champans, had related the disturbances among them. The +arrival of those Spanish at Macao was learned in Chincheo. Immediately +some of the most wealthy captains who ordinarily go to Manila, whose +names were Guansan, Sinu, and Guachuan, went to see them. Having +understood the truth of the matter, they took upon themselves [the +delivery of] the message sent to the mandarins by Don Pedro, and the +mandarins received it by their means. The Chincheo merchants determined +to return to their trade at Filipinas, and left Macao in their vessels +with our ambassadors, taking a quantity of powder, saltpeter and lead, +with which the public magazines were supplied. In the following May, +thirteen Chinese ships made port at Manila, and afterward many others +returned thither to continue that commerce. Don Pedro sent to Nueva +Espana the vessels that had brought the relief for the islands. The +flagship foundered and not a person or a plank escaped. He did not +cease at this time to store the city with provisions and ammunition, +in order to find himself free for the expedition to Maluco. At this +juncture, Master-of-camp Juan de Esquivel came from Mexico with six +hundred soldiers, with the report that more men, money, and other +preparations of arms, food, and ammunition were being collected in +Nueva Espana, at the order of his Majesty; these all arrived at Manila +in due season. At that time died its great archbishop, Don Miguel de +Benavides, to the universal sorrow of the country. + +The Chinese ships that returned for the trade bore letters to the +governor in reply to his despatch. Three letters of one tenor came +from the tuton or viceroy, the haytao, and the inspector-general of +the province of Chincheo. Translated by the interpreters into Spanish, +they read as follows: + +[See this letter in _Vol_. XIII, pp. 287-291 of this series.] + +The governor answered these letters by the same messengers, making use +of terms of courtesy and authority. [293] He related the rebellion +of the Sangleys from its inception. He justified the defense of the +Spaniards, and the punishment inflicted upon the delinquents. He says +that no community can govern without punishing those who are evil, +any more than by not rewarding the blameless. Consequently he does +not repent of what was done, as it was to check him who was trying +to destroy us. The inspector should consider what he should do, if +any similar case happened in China. What he was sorry for was in not +having been able to save any of the Anhays among the Sangley merchants, +who perished among the guilty. But it was impossible to prevent that, +for the violence of war does not allow some to be killed and others +exempted, especially since they were unknown to the soldiers in +the heat of war. Employing clemency toward those captured alive, +he condemned them to row in the galleys, which is the punishment +substituted by the Castilians for those who merit death. However, if +they in China thought that the punishment should be lessened, he would +give them liberty. "But it should be noted," says Don Pedro, "that +this might be the cause that, if so serious a crime were unpunished, +they would fall into it a second time, a thing that would close all the +gates to kindness. The goods of the Chinese killed are in deposit. And +in order that it may be seen that I am not moved by any other zeal +than that of justice, I shall have these immediately delivered to their +heirs, or to those to whom they rightfully pertain. I am not moved to +any of these things by any consideration other than that of right. To +tell me that if I do not free the prisoners, permission will be given, +to the relatives in China of those who were killed in the rebellion, +to come with a fleet to Manila, causes no disturbance in my mind; +for I consider the Chinese as so sensible a race, that they will +not be incited to such things with little foundation and especially +since we have; on our side, given them no occasion for it. In case +any other resolution is followed, we Spaniards are people who know +how to defend our rights, religion, and country very well. And do not +let the Chinese consider themselves lords of all the world, as they +give out; for we Castilians, who have measured it with palmos, know +with exactness the lands of China, where it will be well to know that +the king of Espana has continual wars with kings as powerful as their +own [_i.e.,_ the Chinese king], and subdues them and inflicts great +troubles upon them. It is no new case, when our enemies imagine that +we are defeated, to find us desolating and destroying the confines +of their lands, and not ceasing until we have hurled them from their +thrones and taken away their scepters. I would be very sorry for a +change in trade, but I also believe that the Chinese do not wish to +lose it, since so great gain accrues from it, and the Chinese take +to their kingdom so much of our silver, which is never diminished +in amount, in exchange for their merchandise, which is composed of +poor articles that are soon worn out." The English ships that reached +the coast of China, he was determined not to receive, for they are +not Spaniards, but their enemies, and are pirates. Consequently +if they came to Manila they would be punished. "Finally, because +we Spaniards always justify our causes, and we pride ourselves on +the fact that no one in the world can say that we usurp other men's +possessions or make war on our friends, all that is herein promised +will be fulfilled. And hereafter let those in China understand that +we never do anything through fear, or because of the threats of our +enemies." Don Pedro concludes by offering to continue the friendship +with the kingdoms of China by new bonds of peace, saying that he would +release the prisoners in his galleys in due time, although he first +intended to make use of them, as he did, in the expedition of Maluco, +which would soon be despatched. All this he strictly observed. + +Don Pedro received other letters during those same days from the +emperor of Japon, in which, after thanking him for a present of +grape wine--besides other rich presents--that Don Pedro had sent him, +he earnestly requested commerce.... + +[This letter, of which Argensola presents a mere synopsis, is given +complete by Morga, _q.v. ante_.] + +In this same year, one thousand six hundred and four, the islands of +Holanda and Zelanda, in pursuance of their custom, assembled a fleet +of twelve vessels, large and well equipped, and some smaller ones; +and, as if masters of sea and wind, steered their course toward India +by the known routes. In a short time they reached the cape of Buena +Esperanca. All the captains had gone at other times on that voyage, and +the pilots esteemed themselves of no less experience. Their general was +Estevan Drage, [294] faithless alike to his church and to his king.... + +[Thence this fleet continues its course along Mosambique, India, and +neighboring shores, Java, Sumatra, etc., taking prizes and trading. In +February, 1605, they capture Amboina, where they receive the submission +of the Portuguese and allow religious freedom. Finally part of the +vessels go to the Moluccas, where, with the aid of the king of Ternate, +the fort of Tidore is captured--although the Portuguese are warned +beforehand of their coming by English vessels (for the Spanish and +English kings were then friends), and the English leave powder and +shot for its defense. Some Portuguese leave the island, "many going +to the Filipinas, where Governor Don Pedro interviewed them in order +to learn the condition of affairs at Maluco." The narrative continues:] + +One of those who escaped from the fort of Tydore, and reached the town +of Arevalo in Filipinas, was Antonio de Silva, a Portuguese. Besides +being a soldier he was a _naguatato_ or interpreter. This man +gave a judicial account of the matter and added that the English +[_i. e._. Dutch] general, while taking him a prisoner from Amboino, +took a sea-chart, and began to look for Mindoro, Manila, and +Cabite. Being asked by Silva, for what purpose he was looking for +them, he learned that the general intended, in case hit undertaking +at Maluco did not succeed well, to try to capture one of the vessels +plying between Filipinas and Nueva Espana. Silva replied to him +that it was not time for those vessels to sail, either way; for the +first [_i. e._, those from Nueva Espana], arrive about May ten, +and the others [_i. e._, those going to Nueva Espana], sail June +ten. Notwithstanding, this was the end or desire of the Dutchman's +navigation; for he determined to get information in Mindoro, to depart +thence to Macan, to send an ambassador to China, and to avenge the +insult offered by Don Pablos of Portugal in those provinces. Thence he +would lade pepper in Patane, then see if he could defeat the Chinese +ships at the strait of Sincapura [_i.e._, Singapore] on their way to +Malaca; and at all events, continue along that same route his return to +Holanda, laden with wealth. All this did the Dutch general communicate +to Antonio de Silva, as to one who would go to Holanda with him; for he +was a soldier and a skilled interpreter of both languages, and Estevan +Drage made much of him for that reason. Certain others who had fought +and escaped the slaughter of Tydore confirmed this news. Don Pedro +learned it, and grieved over it, as he was so zealous in the service of +the Church and of his king. He considered sorrowfully when he saw that +not even one turret of a fortress was left in Maluco to the crown of +Espana, and how securely a rebel to God and to his legitimate sovereign +held them. And because the prosperity of Dutch affairs made the Dutch +powerful and determined, the governor assembled his council of war, +and appointed Captains Antonio Freyle, chief of the fleet of Pintados, +Pedro Sevil, Estevan de Alcacar, and Bernardino Alfonso to go to the +garrisons of the Pintados and those of other islands that were in +danger, with their infantry companies. He strengthened the ships, and +prepared his artillery, as if he were near a victorious enemy who was +executing his threats with so great success. Antonio de Silva showed +an original letter from another Dutch general, written in the island +of Borneo to the king of Ternate, sent by Philipo Bissegop, a ship +captain. In it the general expressed his compliments and sent him a +present of a number of varas of different fine cloths from Holanda, +six bales containing vessels of musk, twelve flasks of rose water, +six _arrates_ [295] of _Amfion_ [296]--a Dutch compound used, as above +stated, for fighting, which takes away or disturbs the reason--and +six barrels of powder. He gave the king an account of the unfortunate +voyage, and the obstacles, storms, and dangers that Andres Furtado had +until his arrival at Malaca after leaving Ternate. He called the king +"most serene prince and powerful king of Maluco, Bandas, Amboino," +and an infinite number of other islands. He congratulated him on the +success attained upon his arrival at Maluco. He promised him to go to +Ternate with the greater forces that he was awaiting from Holanda, +and garrison the forts, in order to extirpate entirely their common +enemy, the king of Espana. He encouraged him by this hope to hold out +until then. He assured him that he would overrun all those seas from +Maluco, and would extend his empire to China, without any opposition +from the Filipinos or Japanese. For this purpose he requested the king +[of Borneo] to renew friendship with Mindanao, and to give the king +of those islands to understand that he was a friend to the Dutch, and +consequently to facilitate the ports, commerce, and friendships that +were necessary for their voyages. That was what was advisable above +all considerations of the state. He said that he should be warned +and assured that nothing was attended to with more lukewarmness in +Espana, than to strive or attempt to preserve the greater part of their +provinces, or at least, any form of union. Therefore, all the farthest +colonies that recognized their crown, ought to esteem highly the delay +with which they help and deliberate from Espana. For while they are +believing, or examining in order to believe, the news of events, +affairs are assuming another condition; and hence neither Spanish +counsels nor arms arrive in time. The greater part of these things had +been taught to his Highness by experience, and the writer's desire +to serve him obliged him to write those things to the king. Antonio +de Sylva added that he knew with certainty that the king of Ternate +had not neglected to take any of the precautions that the Dutchman +asked him to take; and that he had even proposed to his men to go to +fight far from their islands. Although it was never feared that they +would be bold enough to do so, on that occasion Don Pedro was made more +anxious by this information, because the city had been left so weakened +by the Sangley affair. He was trying, moreover, to supply their lack, +so that the late evils might not again happen; for it was so necessary +to further by another road the trade of Filipinas, and to provide +for its domestic security, in order to be able to take the field. + +But time, which is wont both to take away and to give hopes, consoled +Don Pedro in those afflictions, and brought him in a few months from +Nueva Espana some ships of private persons, and afterward, in good +season, the ships of the regular trading fleet. They reached Manila +on St. Matthew's eve. In them were the Spaniards who left Espana +for that undertaking, together with more than two hundred others +whom the viceroy of Nueva Espana, the Marques de Montesclaros, sent +to Don Pedro, together with the other military stores and money, +in accordance with the royal decree. Some of this came in charge +of Brother Gaspar Gomez, who was received with incredible joy. He +presented to the governor all his despatches. Care was immediately +taken to lodge the captains and soldiers, and assign them quickly +to their stations, so that all might believe that the only thing +intended with them was the safety of the Filipinas, which were +threatened by the emperor of Japon and by the conspiracies of the +Sangleys. Corroboration of this report was sent in various directions +that it might increase and be disseminated outside the kingdom, in +order not to give information to those whom the Spaniards had reason +to fear. Besides, although the report of that great preparation +was useful to the Spaniards in opinion and in conjectures, yet the +actual strength of the forces with which the country was supplied, +besides the reputation of our affairs, acted for defense and security +in them all. In Japon the knowledge alone that Manila was full of +infantry and of armed vessels tempered or dispelled the irritation +felt by their king because Don Pedro denied him shipbuilders. The +Chincheos also refrained from attempting vengeance on an enemy whose +victories were followed by so great succor. Don Pedro considered the +whole question, and inferred from every one of these advices that +he could absent himself from Manila. However the king of Ternate, +as one overjoyed at having escaped from the Spanish yoke, paid +little heed to all that was told him from his neighboring kingdoms, +for he thought that the Spaniards were never to return to their +former possessions. The captains of Holanda, who rebuilt the burned +fortress in Tydore, sent him some large bronze cannon, culverins, +and a considerable number of muskets; and sent him some engineers +from those who came on those ships, so that they might inspect his +fortifications and reside in them or in his city. Some accepted that +abode, and the loose and irreligious liberty of life permitted in that +country. There, by reason of the many trading-posts and fleets from +the north, they lived as if they were not outside their own countries, +since they had intercourse with their kinsmen and friends, or at least +with men of their nation. Exiled Castilians and Portuguese reached +the port of Oton in Filipinas daily. Among them was Pablo de Lima, +a man of long experience, and now general of artillery in Tydore. He +added to the news of the recent destruction, the joy with which the +Dutch disinterred the pieces that he had tried to hide, and how they +had sent ashore more arms and forces from their ships. This man was +received with great honor because of his worth, and because he was one +of those dispossessed, by the king of Ternate, of vassals and other +property in Tydore. For later events, they profited by his warnings +and advice. All, by various employments, although with equal desire, +took part in the furtherance of the war--in building ships, and +collecting provisions, arms, and ammunition. So great was Don Pedro's +vigilance that he was not wanting in the least duty with example and +encouragement. Consequently, it may be asserted that he carried on +the whole enterprise; for he lent a hand in the labors of all. + + +Conquest of the Malucas islands +Book Tenth + +In human actions the moral doctrine is hidden; and judicious writers +are wont to deduce this from the relation of events, as the fruit +of their history. But in writing of the conquest and conservation +of barbarous lands (which is founded on navigations and garrisons), +what civil precepts of those who establish and compose the political +life--however sagacious statecraft may have made them--can we bring +to the reader's view? And what can be offered in this matter that the +reader could not infer as a necessary consequence, contained in the +preceding propositions? Since, then, the subject forbids us this role, +let us finish it, and redeem the promise by which we bound ourselves +at the beginning. Don Pedro de Acuna, now general of the fleet which +was assembled in Filipinas, attended at the same time to its despatch +and to the safety of the province, which he was about to abandon to +go personally upon so stubborn an undertaking. Some attribute the loss +of all the Malucas to Don Pedro's good fortune, so that, time offering +him greater material, the victory might be more glorious. He provided +very diligently what was needed for the war and for almost all the +casualties thereof. The point or promontory of Yloilo extends into +the sea not far from Arevalo in the island of Panay. It is spacious +enough to serve as a camping-place and suitable for those arms then +prepared. There the fleet was assembled. It consisted of five large +ships, and six galleys; three galliots, like galizabras, belonging +to the crown of Portugal--in one of which Pedro Alvarez de Abreo, +commandant of the fort of Tydore, embarked, while the other two were +in charge of Juan Rodriguez Camelo, a commandant sent from Malaca by +General Andres Furtado de Mendoca, to aid with his prudence and his +strength, and to carry to him information of the outcome; one flat +galliot for unloading artillery, which carried three hundred baskets +of rice; four vessels [297] built for transporting the provisions; +two ten-ton champans, carrying one thousand six hundred baskets of +clean rice; two English lanchas, in which the Portuguese went [to +Manila] after the loss of the Tydore fort; seven fragatas belonging +to his Majesty, and seven belonging to individuals; and as many other +champans--in all thirty-six sail. Master-of-camp Juan de Esquivel +took twelve companies of Spanish infantry, of which four were levied +in Andaluzia--namely, his own, that of Captain Pablo Garrucho, that of +Pedro Sevil, that of Lucas de Vergara Gaviria; and six in Nueva Espana, +namely, that of Don Rodrigo de Mendoca (this gentleman is the son of +Don Juan de Baeca y Castilla and of Dona Maria de Mendoca, and on the +latter side grandson to the marques de Montesclaros; and left Italia +to serve his Majesty in Filipinas, at the request of the viceroy of +Nueva Espana, his kinsman), the company of Captain Pascual de Alarcon +Pacheco, that of Martin de Esquivel, that of Bernardino Alfonso, +that of Pedro Delgado, and that of Estevan de Alcacar. The other two, +under Captains Juan Guerra de Cervantes and Christoval de Villagra, +were from the camp of Manila and the province of Pintados. All of +these with their officers amounted to one thousand four hundred +and twenty-three Spaniards. Under Master-of-camp Don Guillermo +and Captains Don Francisco Palaot, Don Juan Lit, Don Luys, and Don +Agustin Lont were three hundred and forty-four Pampanga and Tagal +Indians; while there were also six hundred and twenty men from the +same tribes for the naval and military service, and six hundred and +forty-nine rowers. The entire fleet, exclusive of the household and +following of the general, amounted to three thousand and ninety-five +men; they had seventy-five pieces of various kinds of artillery, +and all the materials for navigating, disembarking, and fighting, +and for bombarding walls. + +Don Pedro left the port of Yloilo with this armament January five, one +thousand six hundred and six, in doubtful weather, but as courageous +as ever. He reached the island of Mindanao, hostile to the Spanish +name and allied with the Ternatans, and anchored in the port of La +Caldera to take in water. There the flagship, called "Jesus Maria," in +which Master-of-camp Esquivel was sailing, began to drag the anchors +with which it was moored--an action which the sailors name by the +peculiar word _garrar_ [298]--and, in order to save itself, had to +set sail. But finding that it could not double a point in this way, +it fired two shots as a call for help, just when the rudder struck. The +galleys hastened to give it a tow, but some cables were snapped atwain; +and their efforts were in vain, for the sea and winds prevented the +work. Captain Villagra was given charge of the rescue of the men and +provisions aboard the flagship. Although many possessions of the king +and of private persons were lost, by incredible effort he saved the +bulk of the provisions and of the clothing, and all the men, artillery, +powder, cables, rigging, and sails. In order that the Mindanaos might +not enjoy the spoils of the shipwreck, he set fire to the hull, after +taking out the nails and bolts. They felt this first misfortune because +of its very importance, and because the soldiers, a class often given +to foolish superstitions, interpreted it in a sinister manner. The +general's prudence calmed everything. He ordered the master-of-camp +to proceed with the fleet from La Caldera to the port of Talangame, +which, as we have said, is situated in the island of Ternate. Don +Pedro accompanied him with his galleys until they got outside the +strait of Sambuanga, a place dangerous because of its currents and +reefs. For that reason they towed the ships, until this danger was +past, and because of a calm that overtook them. The fleet took the +open sea. The galleys, in order to take in water enough to last until +reaching Ternate, coasted along gradually; for the men rescued from the +submerged flagship were distributed in them and in the other boats, and +their weight and peril was greater. The most skilful pilots of those +seas managed the galleys, but notwithstanding their care and that of +the captains and experienced sailors, they fell off their course and +reached the islands of the Celebes or of Mateo, more than sixty leguas +to the leeward of Ternate. Contrary winds were blowing, and they had +to correct their mistake by dint of rowing. In that manner, and with +great difficulty, they reached Ternate March twenty-six, on Easter +day. With their observance of that day, so propitious to all creation, +they forgot their past dangers, and changed them into joy and hope. + +[Don Pedro finds the rest of his fleet at Tidore instead of at Ternate, +as he has expected; but sees at the latter place a Dutch ship, +which shows fight. However, leaving the ship for the present, Acuna +sets about the reduction of Ternate with his own forces and those +of the king of Tidore. Landing at Ternate April first, that fort is +approached in two divisions, meeting with no opposition until they +arrive near the walls. Gallinato's advice as to placing the soldiers +is followed, and the Ternatan scouts in trees are replaced by those +of the besiegers. Active operations begin, and after various minor +successes the wall is carried by assault, and the old fortress built +by the Portuguese is captured. On entering the city the soldiers fall +to looting.] + +When the men entered the city, every one gave himself to his fury and +to plundering. Don Pedro had issued a proclamation, conceding that all +the enemy captured within those four days should become slaves. The +captains halted near the old church of San Pablo, which had been +fortified by the enemy for this war. There were various opinions as to +what course was to be followed. Some thought that they should attend +to preserving what was gained; others that they should go ahead to +gain the chief fortress. Captains Vergara and Villagra were of the +latter opinion; and so great was the exuberance of the soldiers and +their desire for danger that one of them, a native of Estremadura, +of the company of Captain Sevil--who was an Arragonese, and a gallant +fighter, who also approved the advice to pass on--seized Captain +Villagra in his arms, and carried him thus for more than ten paces, +exclaiming, "O good captain, attack the enemy, attack him!" and then +set him down. Thereupon the captain struck him with the flat of his +sword, because he had at such a time seized him so impudently. The +soldier bowed, and said gracefully and smilingly, "Give me another, +by God! [_cuerpo de Dios_] and attack them!" In fact Vergara and +Villagra attacked the principal fortress with few men and gained it, +and were the first to enter its gates. However they were not the +first to go up, for while they were ascending very quickly by the +stairs, at the entrance of the hall an old soldier, named Barela, +a corporal to Captain Cervantes, hurried past them. He, on entering, +took a gilded water-jar, shaped like an urn and very skilfully chased, +from a rich side board and salver placed in the hall, saying to the +captains, "Gentlemen, I take this in token that I entered here with +your Graces." Accordingly he took it, with the consent of all. Then +the entire palace was given over to the pillage of the soldiers, +and exposed to their greed. Don Pedro tried to restrain them, but +was obeyed only near the end of the sack. + +[The king of Ternate and a few of his kinsmen, together with the Dutch, +escape, the former going to the island of Gilolo. The reduction +of the lesser forts continues, and some of the king's relatives +who are well affected to the Spanish, offer to induce the king to +surrender. This he does after a formal safe-conduct has been given +by Acuna. Don Pedro receives him in a manner befitting his rank, +and houses him sumptuously, but at the same time keeps him carefully +guarded. Several days later a treaty is made with the king.] + +Two days after, the governor ordered Master-of-camp Gallinato and +Captain Villagra, together with Pablo de Lima, to confer with the +captive king concerning what agreement it was advisable to make +with him in his Majesty's name for the security and solidity of +matters. They were to persuade him that that was the way to attain +merit and oblige our king to make better conditions in his favor. The +three came, accompanied by other influential persons, among whom +were some Augustinian, Dominican, and Jesuit religious, all of whom +served in their ministry praiseworthily. The king did not refuse to +capitulate. After some discussion as to what form it should take, +through the medium of Pablo de Lima, and after conceding to the +king some things that he requested from the king, our sovereign, +they wrote and signed the following agreements: + +The first thing demanded from King Cachil Sultan Zayde, of Ternate, +and from the rest imprisoned with his Highness who may have any +part in it, is that he is to deliver to his Majesty King Filipo, our +sovereign, the forts that he now possesses--namely, those of Xilolo, +Sabubu, Gamocanora, Tacome, those of Maquien, those of Sula, and the +others. He answers to this that he will deliver to his Majesty the +forts above declared, and that he will send the prince his son, and +Cachil Amuxa, his cousin, with the person or persons who shall go to +take possession of them; and that they shall be delivered up with all +the artillery, ammunition, muskets, and arquebuses contained in them. + +The second. That he shall make restitution of all the captives that +he holds, who may be our subjects, whether Christians or infidels, +from the provinces of Pintados and from the other provinces subject to +the Spaniards in the Filipinas Islands. He answered that all that are +found at present shall be delivered up immediately, and that those who +do not appear now shall be delivered up as they shall be found later. + +The third. That he shall deliver up the Dutch in his power. He replied +that when he left this fort of Ternate, thirteen or fourteen Dutchmen +with him took to flight, and he thought that they went to the Dutch +vessel, for he has not seen them. However, if they appear, he will +deliver them up immediately. + +The fourth. He shall deliver up the Spanish renegades who were in +this fort of Ternate. He answered that there was only one there, and +that he fled like the others the day the fort was taken, and he does +not know where he is, but that he shall be sought and delivered up. + +The fifth. That he shall also deliver up all the villages in the +island of Batochina or El Moro, which were formerly Christian; as well +as the islands of Marotay, and Herrao, which were also Christian, +with all the artillery and ammunition in them. He answered that he +is ready to deliver up everything, as he did with his person. + +Don Pedro de Acuna, governor and captain-general of the Filipinas +Islands, president of the royal Audiencia resident therein, and +general of this Maluco fleet, entrusted these capitulations to General +Juan Xuarez Gallinato and captain Christoval de Villagra. They made +them in the form above declared, with the help of Pablo de Lima, a +Portuguese native of these islands, who was the interpreter of the +[Moro] language. The said king affixed his signature, according to +his custom. It was done in the fort of Ternate April ten, one thousand +six hundred and six. The said general and captain, and the said Pablo +de Lima, also signed it. + +The king signed it in Persian characters with graceful curves, and +the Spaniards simply. This original agreement was brought to Espana +with the other authentic documents. + +[Possession is formally taken of the newly-subdued and of the +reconquered territory in the name of the king of Spain; and after +consultation it is determined to take the king of Ternate to Manila, +leaving governors appointed to carry on his government. All swear +homage to the Spanish monarch, and promise not to admit the Dutch +or other foreigners to their clove trade, and not to prevent +missionary work. Acuna orders a new fort to be built at Tidore, +remits a third part of the tribute to be paid by the Ternatans, +and, after strengthening the fort at Terate, leaves Juan de Esquivel +there with six hundred men, boats, ammunition, and supplies, to act +as governor of all the Moluccas, while he returns to Manila with his +prisoners. Trouble begins immediately, and Esquival is kept busy with +expeditions to the various islands and forts, while the Dutch again +begin their machinations; and sickness fights powerfully against +the Spaniards. At Mindanao, a conspiracy to escape is discovered +among the prisoners, for Mindanao is friendly to the Ternatans. The +narrative continues:] + +In all the time that we have described, no news of our victory +reached Filipinas. From this silence and suspense they argued in +those regions, and especially in Manila, that Don Pedro and his fleet +had perished, or that he had succeeded so poorly that general sorrow +would be caused. Never was virtue free from envious ones who pursue +it, and such were not wanting to Don Pedro in Manila. But although +these were well known [_some words misprinted in text_]--so that +popular suspicion makes them the authors of the poison from which +it was believed that that great knight died, twenty-two days after +his arrival--we ahall suppress their names; since it is unworthy +of the author, who has to maintain neutrality (and indifference, +in fact) to give strength to a rumor which even yet is based only +upon a suspicion. All are now dead, and judged before the tribunal +where not one thought passes without examination. These men, then, +spread the rumor that Don Pedro, having assaulted Ternate, entered it +easily; but that his men became so embarrassed in the midst of their +great plundering that the barbarians, having reflected, attacked +the Spaniards and made them retreat, after killing the majority of +them. They said that the general, ashamed of his lack of discipline, +did not dare return to Manila. When that report reached the Indians' +ears, it did so great harm that they began to rebel, especially in +the provinces of Camarines and Pintados. The friars who were already +attending to their instruction could do nothing with them, for they +asked, since the Malucans were victorious, why they should remain +subject to the Spaniards, who did not defend them from the Moros. They +said that the latter would, with Ternate's protection, plunder them +daily, and worse thenceforward. They did not stop at mere murmurs, +for they began to confer concerning them, and to talk of executing +their plans. But all vanished before the truth and the news of it, +which preceded the arrival of the conquerors..... + +[The conquerors are given a triumphant reception, and the captives +are cheered with hopes of an early release by a decree from Spain, +and lodged comfortably. The king of Ternate has a letter written to +the Spanish monarch, in which he entreats his clemency. Argensola +ends with the reflection that "the Malucos being, then, reduced, our +ministers and preachers went thither, and the voice of the evangelist +began to be heard in the remotest confines of the land."] + + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA + +_Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas_, by Antonio de Morga.--See +Bibliographical Data in _Vol_. XV. + +_Conqvista de las Islas Malvcas_, by Bartolome Leonardo de +Argensola.--This is partly translated in full, partly synopsized, +from the original printed work, from the copies owned by Harvard +University, and Edward E. Ayer, of Chicago. + + + +APPENDIX: CUSTOMS OF THE PAMPANGAS IN THEIR LAWSUITS + +[The following extract forms the second part of a treatise found +in the body of _Ordinances enacted by the Audiencia of Manila_, +given in _Vols_. X and XI. The first part is entitled "Relation of +the customs which the Indians were accustomed to observe in these +islands; written by Fray Joan de Placencia, and sent to Doctor Stiago +de Vera, former president of the royal Audiencia which resided in +these islands." This is signed with Plasencia's name. The second +part, headed as below, bears no signature, but is doubtless by +Plasencia. From their appearance in the body of the above document, +it is probable that the Audiencia considered them in assembly. Both +these reports were written by Plasencia at the command of the governor +or of the Audiencia, in order that the local Spanish magistrates +might be guided by the customs of the natives in deciding matters +of law or justice among the Indians. The first part, omitted here, +is the same, with a few verbal changes, as the relation published in +_Vol_. VII. pp. 173-185; but it is dated, "Narcan, October twenty-four, +one thousand five hundred and eighty-nine" (but this may have been +an error of the clerk of the Audiencia). The second part (_Vol_. VII, +pp. 185-196) is not found in the above Audiencia document.] + + + +Instructions regarding the customs which the natives of Pampanga +formerly observed in their lawsuits + +They never had anyone whom they all generally obeyed, except that +only in each barangay they obeyed their chief, whose people are +called timaguas. Among the chiefs, lords of barangay, he who was most +powerful tyrannized over the others, even though they were brothers, +because they were all intent upon their own interests. + +2. In what concerns regulation in regard to supplies for the country, +they had none, and everyone bought and sold as he could; beyond that +each chief who ruled a barangay ordered his people to sow at the +proper time, and made them assist him at seed-time and harvest. + +3. The timaguas, or common people, came before their chief with their +suits, and he settled them in this way. Whatever petition was made +before them, the chief summoned the party on whom the demand was made, +and asked him if he would come to an agreement with the other and +opposite party. If the two parties made such agreement, there was no +suit. If they would not agree, he exacted an oath from them that they +would submit to his judgment. Then he immediately asked for a _viva +voce_ examination of both, because among these people there were no +writings any suits. If both parties gave like testimony, with the +same number of witnesses, they split the difference of the amount of +the suit. If the number of witnesses was not equal on either side, +such and such a one was condemned to the whole amount, or released +from the claim. If the defeated party would not pay according to the +sentence, the other party and the judge proceeded against him with +the armed hand, and forced him to comply with it. The witnesses were +paid according to their rank, and the judge also. The payment of +the judge and witnesses was so excessive, that they shared equally +with him who won in the suit. The witnesses of the condemned party +were paid nothing; and if anything had been given to them before the +decision of the suit, it was taken back from them. + +4. _Item_: In regard to any murders that occurred, they ruled in this +wise. If one chief killed another chief, the relatives and friends +of the murdered man went to war immediately with the murderer and his +kindred; and if they killed the murderer, the quarrel and difference +between them was ended. If not, they killed as many as possible of his +followers. After these parties had grown weary of their strife, and +a certain time had elapsed after the murder, the other chiefs of the +village or district endeavored to reconcile them. The reconciliation +was as follows. The murderer was to give and pay to the relatives +of the murdered man seventy or eighty taes of gold; and if he were a +prominent chief, one hundred or more. Then they all remained friends, +and one half was divided among the children of the murdered man, +if he had any, or his parents, brothers, or kindred; and the other +half among those chiefs who reconciled them, and the timaguas of the +murdered man's barangay, although the chiefs took the greater part. If +the children or relatives of the deceased refused to be reconciled, +all the chiefs proceeded against them, and assisted the party of the +murderer until the said agreement was completed. + +5. In case any timagua killed any chief or his child, the relatives +of the deceased put the murderer to death, together with his wife +and children, if they succeeded in catching him. They seized all his +property, which they divided among the children of the murdered man, +if he had any, and if not, among his parents, relatives, or brothers; +and if he had no kindred, among those who executed the vengeance for +the murder, this usually being his successor in the barangay. + +6. If the murdered man was a timagua, and the murderer a chief, the +latter gave to the children or heirs of the murdered man the sum of +ten to twenty taes of gold; but if the murdered man had no heirs, +it was divided between the judge passing sentence--who was one of the +chiefs, appointed by the others of the village for the purpose--and +among the said chiefs, the judge taking one half and the others the +other half. Of this they gave no part to the murderer, even though +he was a chief. + +7. _Item_: If one timagua killed another timagua, and had nothing +with which to pay the penalty--ten to twenty taes of gold--all the +chiefs of the village killed him for it, if his own chief did not do +this, by hanging him to a tree or _arigue_ [_i.e._, prop of a house] +or piercing him with many lance-thrusts. + +8. If any woman killed any man, or another woman, by poison or steel +or any other way, the judgment was in conformity with the one above, +with consideration for the said conditions. + +9. If a brother killed a brother or an uncle, or a nephew his uncle, +he did not die for it; but they took all his property away from him +for the heirs of the murdered man, of which they gave no share to the +murderer, even though he should be an heir. This was determined by the +chief of the barangay to which the murderer and the murdered belonged, +if each party were of his barangay. The chiefs of the barangay were +judges, and shared with the heirs of the deceased. + +10. Concerning the murder of a child by a father, or a father by +a child, no precise information could be secured regarding the +punishment, because all asserted that they never remembered such a +murder to have happened. + +11. In case of the burning of any village or crops, if the incendiary +was a chief, he paid for all the damage caused by the fire--which the +chiefs of such town and those nearest it determined--according to +the amount of the damage, even though they did not leave the chief +who set the fire one mais of gold. If the damage did not exceed his +property, and he had some property left over, he retained it. If +the incendiary were a timagua, he was executed, and his goods were +seized to repair the damage. If these did not suffice to pay for it, +they sold his wife and children as slaves, to pay for the said damage. + +12. Concerning thieves: If the thief were a chief, he returned the +plunder, and was fined in proportion to the theft, according to the +opinion of one of the chiefs of the village, whom the other chiefs +selected as judge for that purpose. They say that they ordinarily +appointed the oldest and the most intelligent. The latter could +moderate the penalty, which was divided between the judge and the +other chiefs, the judge taking one half. + +13. If a timagua or slave committed a theft: If the thief were +a timagua, they compelled him to return his booty, and fined him +according to the regulations of the preceding section. If he had +nothing with which to pay, they sold him in another village, in order +to pay what he owed, as a penalty for the theft. If the thief were a +slave, his master paid for him, or delivered the said slave to the +party, and he was soundly lashed. If the owner of the said stolen +goods caught the thief in the act of such robbery, he could kill or +beat him without any penalty. + +14. As for the old men, old women, and witches who committed murders +by any of their practices, when it was ascertained that they had +killed any person with their witchcraft or tricks, the chief of their +barangay, or of the barangay of the murdered man, could kill them with +daggers if he pleased; and if these chiefs did not do this, any of the +other chiefs could kill the criminals. Their property was seized, and +one half was given to the relatives of the murdered man, and the other +half to him who executed the sentence upon such sorcerers and witches. + +15. Insulting words caused great anger among these natives, and it +was considered a very grave offense, especially among the chiefs. They +fined the culprits in heavy sums therefor, inflicting this penalty in +order not to cause murders, and in the following manner. The insulted +person and he who insulted him named a chief, who must be greater +than those in the whole province, to hear this suit, who accepted +and decided it. If either of the two parties refused to conform to +the agreement which the judge prescribed, there was a custom among +them that each one lavished expense, on his own account, on feasts +and assemblies, and he who spent the greater sum they considered the +more powerful and honorable. From these debaucheries and gatherings +sometimes resulted wars between them. If either one of the two was +the most considerable chief of the province, three or four, chosen by +the rest, judged the case. In case the injurious words were said by a +timagua to a chief, if the said timagua had nothing wherewith to pay +the penalty imposed--which was very excessive--he was made a slave; +and if the insulted party were a great chief, the timagua's wife and +children were made slaves. If the chief applied insulting words to +any timagua, the penalty was very light, and many times nothing. + +16. Their marriage custom was to have one wife--from whom they would +separate and marry another, on any occasion or change of feeling--and +to have three or four other women. They always considered that one the +legitimate wife with whom they naturally cohabited. The man always +gave the dowry, and this, together with certain gatherings in which +they drank, was considered marriage. If the man separated from his +wife, he lost the dowry which he had given her. If she separated +from the man, she returned double the dowry which she had received, +even though she had children. The property acquired during marriage, +they always divided equally. They never disinherited the children +in life or death, even though they were born of many women, if they +had been married to these. The other children, born of other women, +whom we call bastards, they called _asiao yndepat_. These did not +inherit, but they always gave them something. Even if any one had no +legitimate child at his death, the bastard could not inherit at all, +but the property went to the nearest relatives of the deceased. + +17. They were not accustomed to will more to any child, except in small +sums, as three or four taes, or small pieces of land of the like value. + +18. When anyone became a widower and no children had been born to the +husband and wife, the whole dowry was returned. But if any sons or +daughters had been born to them, even though these were dead at the +time of bereavement, not more than half the dowry was returned. + +19. If any child were living at the time of the death of the father +or mother, all the property of the deceased was inherited by the +child or children. If they were not old enough to administer it, +the parents of the deceased kept and used it, and not the surviving +father or mother of the minors. If the minor died afterward, neither +the father nor the mother inherited it, but the minor's grandparents, +or the nearest relatives of the deceased from whom the minor had +inherited the property. + +20. Among the slaves, the father and mother shared equally. If both +were slaves of one master, the children were so also. If one slave +belonged to one master and the other to another, the children were +divided in this way. The master of the father took the eldest, the +master of the mother, the second; and so on in this order with the +rest. If there were an odd one, the two masters of the parents divided +him; that is, the slave served both masters equally. If either the +father or mother were free, the children were divided in the same way, +so that if the father was free, the eldest son or daughter was free. On +the contrary, if the father was a slave, the eldest son or daughter was +a slave. This arrangement was kept and observed among them, namely, +to give an equal share to both the father and mother. If one of them +was free or half-free, they gave his part to him and to his children +in proportion to the amount which fell to his lot. + +21. If any chiefs wrangled over their cultivated lands, they came +before the other chiefs of the village; and these tried them, and +received testimony orally from both sides, under oath, according to +their usage--which was sweating by the crocodile, the sun, the moon, +and many other things by which they swore. In conformity with the +evidence of each one, the suit between the said chiefs was decided; +and if either one of them refused to comply with the sentence, all the +chiefs together compelled him to observe it. This order was adhered +to in this matter. + +22. All the aforesaid information I have endeavored to procure from +the oldest inhabitants of this province, and from all the priors of +the province. If it be not set forth in a style as good as I ought +to use, I beg your Lordship to pardon its defects, for the sake of +my good will, etc. + + + + + + +NOTES + +[1] Following in a translation of the title-page of the other +edition of Morga's work, which shows that a second edition of the +_Sucesos_ was published in the same year as was the first. A reduced +facsimile of this title-page--from the facsimile reproduction in +the Zaragoza edition (Madrid, 1887)--forms the frontispiece to the +present volume. It reads thus: "Events in the Philipinas Islands: +addressed to Don Christoval Gomez de Sandoval y Rojas, duke de Cea, +by Doctor Antonio de Morga, alcalde of criminal causes in the royal +Audiencia of Nueva Espana, and consultor for the Holy Office of the +Inquisition. At Mexico in the Indias, in the year 1609." In the lower +left-hand corner of the engraved title appears the engraver's name: +"Samuel Estradanus, of Antwerp, made this." + +[2] The month is omitted in the text.--_Stanley_. + +[3] Fray Diego Bermeo, a native of Toledo, became a Franciscan +friar; and in 1580 went to Mexico, and three years later to the +Philippines. After spending many years as a missionary in Luzon and +Mindoro, he was elected provincial of his order in the islands (in +1599, and again in 1608). Going to Japan as commissary provincial--in +1603, according to Morga, but 1604 as given by Huerta (_Estado_, +p. 446)--he was obliged by severe illness to return to Manila; he +died there on December 12, 1609. + +[4] Luis Sotelo, belonging to an illustrious family of Sevilla, +made his profession as a Franciscan in 1594. Joining the Philippine +mission, he reached the islands in 1600; and he spent the next two +years in ministering to the Japanese near Manila, and in the study of +their language. In 1600 he went to Japan, where he zealously engaged +in missionary labors. Ten years later, he was sentenced to death for +preaching the Christian religion; but was freed from this danger by +Mazamune, king of Boxu, who sent the Franciscan as his ambassador to +Rome and Madrid. Returning from this mission, Sotelo arrived in the +Philippines in 1618, and four years later resumed his missionary +labors in Japan. In 1622 he was again imprisoned for preaching, +and was confined at Omura for two years, during which time he wrote +several works, in both the Spanish and Japanese languages. Sotelo was +finally burned at the stake in Omura, August 25, 1624. See Huerta's +_Estado_, pp. 392-394. + +[5] The present towns of San Nicolas, San Fernando, etc., lying +between Binondo and the sea.--_Rizal_. + +[6] This remark of Morga can be applied to many other insurrections +that occurred later--not only of Chinese, but also of natives--and +probably even to many others which, in the course of time, will be +contrived.--_Rizal_. + +[7] These devices, of which certain persons always avail themselves +to cause a country to rebel, are the most efficacious to bring such +movements to a head. "If thou wishest thy neighbor's dog to become mad, +publish that it is mad," says an old refrain.--_Rizal_. + +[8] This is the famous Eng-Kang of the histories of +Filipinas.--_Rizal_. + +[9] The Rizal edition of Morga omits the last part of this sentence, +the original of which is _"entre vnos esteros y cienagas, lugar +escondido."_ + +[10] "The Chinese killed father Fray Bernardo de Santo Catalina, agent +of the holy office, of the order of St. Dominic ... They attacked +Quiapo, and after killing about twenty people, set fire to it. Among +these they burned alive a woman of rank, and a boy."--_Rizal_. This +citation is made from Leonardo de Argensola's _Conquistas de las +Molucas_ (Madrid, 1609), a synopsis of which will follow Morga's work. + +[11] We are unaware of the exact location of this settlement of +Laguio. It is probably the present village of Kiapo, which agrees +with the text and is mentioned by Argensola. Nevertheless, from the +description of this settlement given by Morga (_post_, chapter viii) +and Chirino, it can be inferred that Laguio was located on the present +site of the suburb of La Concepcion. In fact, there is even a street +called Laguio between Malate and La Ermita.--_Rizal_. + +[12] "Fine helmets were found broken in with clubs... About thirty +also escaped (among whom was Father Farfan), who were enabled to do so +because of being in the rear, and lightly armed" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[13] Argensola says that the Chinese killed many peaceful merchants in +the parian, while others hanged themselves of their own accord. Among +these Argensola mentions General Hontay and the rich Chican--according +to the relation of Fray Juan Pobre, because the latter had refused +to place the famous Eng-Kang at the head of the movement.--_Rizal_. + +[14] "And they tried to persuade the natives to unite with them; +but the latter refused, and on the contrary killed as many of the +Sangleys as they caught" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[15] Argensola says that "four thousand Pampangos, armed in the +custom of their country, with bows and arrows, half-pikes, shields, +and long broad daggers," were sent by the alcalde of Pampanga to the +relief of Manila, which now needed soldiers.--_Rizal_. + +[16] In this struggle many cruelties were committed and many quiet +and friendly Chinese killed. Don Pedro de Acuna, who could not +prevent or stifle this terrible insurrection in its beginnings, also +contributed to the horrible butcheries that ensued. "Accordingly +many Spaniards and natives went to hunt the disbanded Sangleys, +at Don Pedro's order." Hernando de Avalos, alcalde of La Pampanga, +seized more than 400 pacific Sangleys, "and leading them to an estuary, +manacled two and two, delivered them to certain Japanese, who killed +them. Father Fray Diego de Guevara of the order of St. Augustine, prior +of Manila, who made this relation, preached to the Sangleys first, +but only five abandoned their idolatry." ... Would he not have done +better to preach to Alcalde Avalos, and to remind him that he was a +man? The Spanish historians say that the Japanese and Filipinos showed +themselves cruel in the killing of the Chinese. It is quite probable, +considering the rancor and hate with which they were regarded. But +their commanders contributed to it also by their example. It is said +that more than 23,000 Chinese were killed. "Some assert that the number +of Sangleys killed was greater, but in order that the illegality +committed in allowing so many to enter the country contrary to the +royal prohibitions might not be known, the officials covered up or +diminished the number of those who perished" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[17] The coming of the Spaniards to the Filipinas, and their +government, together with the immigration of the Chinese, killed the +industry and agriculture of the country. The terrible competition +of the Chinese with any individual of another race is well known, +for which reason the United States and Australia refuse to admit +them. The indolence, then, of the inhabitants of the Filipinas, is +derived from the lack of foresight of the government. Argensola says +the same thing, and could not have copied Morga, since their works +were published in the same year, in countries very distant from one +another, and the two contain wide differences.--_Rizal_. + +The Chinese question has always been of great importance in the +Philippines. The dislike of the Filipino for the Chinese seemed +instinctive and was deep-rooted. The subject of the Chinese immigration +to the islands has served for special legislation on many occasions +in Spain, but they have nevertheless persisted in their trading and +occupations therein. See Stanley's edition of Morga, appendix II, +pp. 363-368; and _Los Chinos en Filipinos_ (Manila, 1886). + +[18] This should be six hundred and four.--_Rizal_. + +[19] Nueva Espana.--_Rizal_. + +[20] This archbishop seems to have been a principal cause of the +disturbance and massacre of the Chinese, by taking a leading part in +exciting suspicion against them.--_Stanley_. + +[21] The Arab travelers of the ninth century mention that eunuchs +were employed in China, especially for the collection of the revenue, +and that they were called _thoucam_.--_Stanley_. + +[22] "In earlier times a barrier, which ran from Osaka to the +border of Yamato and Omi, separated the thirty-three western from +the thirty-three eastern provinces. The former were collectively +entitled Kuwansei (pronounce Kanse), _i.e._, westward of the Gate; the +latter Kuwanto (pronounce Kanto), _i.e._, eastward of the Gate. Later, +however, when under the Tokugawa regime the passes leading to the plain +in which Yedo, the new capital of Shogune, grew up were carefully +guarded; by the Gate (Kuwan) was understood the great guard on the +Hakone Pass, and Kuwanto or Kuwanto-Hashiu, the eight provinces east of +it: Sagami, Musashi, Kotsuke, Shimotsuke, Hitachi, Shimosa, Katsusa, +and Awa." Thus defined by Rein, in his _Japan_, p. II, Cf. Griffis, +_Mikado's Empire_, p. 68, note. + +[23] A flat-bottomed boat, capable of carrying heavy loads. + +[24] Pedro Alvares de Abreu.--_Rizal_. + +[25] According to Argensola, who gives a succinct relation of this +expedition, the number engaged in it were as follows: Spaniards and +their officers, 1,423; Pampangos and Tagals (without their chiefs), +344; _idem_, for maritime and military service, 620; rowers, +649; Indian chiefs, 5; total 3,041. But he adds that all those +of the fleet, exclusive of the general's household and followers, +numbered 3,095. Probably the 54 lacking in the above number were the +Portuguese under command of Abreu and Camelo, although Argensola +does not mention Portuguese soldiers.... The names of the Indian +chiefs attending the expedition at their own cost were: Don Guillermo +(Palaot), master-of-camp; and Captains Don Francisco Palaot, Don Juan +Lit, Don Luis Lont, and Don Agustin Lont. These must have behaved +exceedingly well, for after the assault on Ternate, Argensola says: +"Not a person of consideration among the Spaniards or the Indians +remained unwounded."--_Rizal_. + +[26] Said Dini Baraka ja.--_Rizal_. + +[27] Combes (_Mindanao_, Retana's ed., cols. 73, 74) describes the +bagacay as a small, slender reed, hardened in fire and sharp-pointed; +it is hurled by a Moro at an enemy with unerring skill, and sometimes +five are discharged in one volley. He narrates surprising instances of +the efficacy of this weapon, and says that "there is none more cruel, +at close range." + +[28] Stanley translates this "flat-boats." Retana and Pastells +(Combes's _Mindanao_, col. 787) derive this word from Chinese _chun_, +"a boat," and regard the _joanga_ (_juanga_) as a small junk. + +[29] "The soldiers, having entered the city, gave themselves +universally to violence and pillage. Don Pedro had issued a +proclamation conceding that all of the enemy captured within those +four days, should be slaves" (Argensola). During the sack, which +Don Pedro was unable to restrain, neither children nor young girls +were spared. One girl was killed because two soldiers disputed for +her.--_Rizal_. + +[30] "The prince's name was Sulamp Gariolano. This step was contrary +to the advice of Queen Celicaya" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +[31] Sangajy, a Malay title (Marsden).--_Stanley_. + +[32] The Jesuit Father Luis Fernandez, Gallinato, and Esquivel made +negotiations with the king for this exile, and Father Colin attributes +its good outcome to the cleverness of the former. What was then +believed to be prudent resulted afterward as an impolitic measure, +and bore very fatal consequences; for it aroused the hostility of all +the Molucas, even that of their allies, and made the Spanish name +as odious as was the Portuguese. The priest Hernando de los Rios, +Bokemeyer, and other historians, moreover, accuse Don Pedro de Acuna +of bad faith in this; but, strictly judged, we believe that they do +so without foundation. Don Pedro in his passport assured the lives of +the king and prince, but not their liberty. Doubtless a trifle more +generosity would have made the conqueror greater, and the odium of +the Spanish name less, while it would have assured Spanish domination +of that archipelago. The unfortunate king never returned to his own +country. Hernando de los Rios says that during Don Pedro de Acuna's +life he was well treated, but that during the administration of Don +Juan de Silva "I have seen him in a poor lodging where all the rain +fell on him, and they were starving him to death." He is described by +Argensola as of "robust proportions, and his limbs are well formed. His +neck and much of his breast are bare. His flesh is of a cloudy color, +rather black than gray. The features of his face are like those of an +European. His eyes are large and full, and he seems to dart sparks +from them. His large eyelashes, his thick bristling beard, and his +mustaches add to his fierceness. He always wears his campilan, dagger, +and kris, both with hilts in the form of gilded serpents' heads." This +description was taken from a picture sent to Spain.--_Rizal_. + +[33] Other disturbances occurred also, because of Don Pedro's enemies +having spread the news that the expedition had been destroyed, and +most of those making it killed. "This report, having come to the ears +of the Indians, was so harmful that they began to mutiny, especially +in the provinces of Camarines and Pintados. The friars who instructed +them could already do, nothing with them, for they asked why, since +the inhabitants of the Malucos were victorious, should they be subject +to the Spaniards, who did not defend them from the Moros. They said +that the Moros would plunder them daily with the help of Ternate, +and that it would be worse henceforth" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +La Concepcion states (_Hist. de Philipinas_, iv, p. 103) that these +Japanese were settled in Dilao; and that the immediate cause of their +mutiny was the killing of a Japanese by a Spaniard, in a quarrel. + +[34] The authors of this poisoning were then known in Manila, and +according to Argensola were those envious of the governor. "But +although they were known as such, so that the suspicion of the crowd +makes them the authors of the poisoning we shall repress their names +... for all are now dead" (Argensola).--_Rizal_. + +Cf. La Concepcion (_Hist. de Philipinas_, iv, pp. 105, 106); he +ascribes the report of Acuna's poisoning to the physicians, who sought +thus to shield their own ignorance of his disease. + +[35] These were the results of having taken the king and his chiefs, +who had entrusted themselves to Don Pedro de Acuna, prisoners to +Manila, the king of Tidore, the ally of Espana, had already found +means to break the alliance. The governors appointed by the captive +king refused to have anything to do with the Spaniards. Fear was +rampant in all parts, and the spirit of vengeance was aroused. "When +his vassals saw the ill-treatment that the Spaniards inflicted on +their king, they hated us so much that they acquired an equal liking +for our enemies. (Her. de los Rios)." Don Pedro lacked the chief +characteristic of Legazpi.--_Rizal_. + +[36] This relation forms an appendix to Theodore de Bry's _Ninth +part of America_ (Frankfort, 1601), and was printed by Matthew Becker +(Frankfort, 1602). The copper plates are different from those of the +Dutch edition of the relation.--_Stanley_. + +The plates representing Oliver van Noordt's fleet, presented in +the preceding volume, are taken from tome xvi of Theodore de Bry's +_Peregrinationes_ (first ed.), by courtesy of the Boston Public +Library. The title-page of the relation reads in part: "Description +dv penible voyage faict entovr de l'univers ou globe terrestre, par +Sr. Olivier dv Nort d'Avtrecht, ... Le tout translate du Flamand en +Franchois, ... Imprime a Amsterdame. Ches Cornille Claessz fur l'Eau +au Livre a Escrire, l'An 1602." This relation was reprinted in 1610, +and numerous editions have appeared since. + +[37] One of the Canary Islands. + +[38] This anchor was given him by a Japanese captain, in Manila Bay, +on December 3, 1600.--_Stanley_. + +[39] What we now call Java used to be called Java major, and the +island of Bali was Java minor.--_Stanley_. + +[Note: Inasmuch as Morga enters somewhat largely into the ancient +customs of the Tagals and other Filipino peoples in the present +chapter, and as some of Rizal's notes indicative of the ancient culture +of those peoples are incorporated in notes that follow, we deem it +advisable to invite attention to Lord Stanley's remarks in the preface +to his translation of Morga (p. vii), and Pardo de Tavera's comment +in his _Biblioteca Filipina_ (Washington, 1903), p. 276. Stanley says: +"The inhabitants of the Philippines previous to the Spanish settlement +were not like the inhabitants of the great Indian Peninsula, people +with a civilization as that of their conquerors. Excepting that they +possessed the art of writing, and an alphabet of their own, they do +not appear to have differed in any way from the Dayaks of Borneo as +described by Mr. Boyle in his recent book of adventures amongst that +people. Indeed there is almost a coincidence of verbal expressions in +the descriptions he and De Morga give of the social customs, habits, +and superstitions of the two peoples they are describing; though many +of these coincidences are such as are incidental to life in similar +circumstances, there are enough to lead one to suppose a community of +origin of the inhabitants of Borneo and Luzon." Pardo de Tavera says +after quoting the first part of the above: "Lord Stanley's opinion is +dispassionate and not at all at variance with historical truth." The +same author says also that Blumentritt's prologue and Rizal's notes +in the latter's edition of Morga have so aroused the indignation of +the Spaniards that several have even attacked Morga.] + +[40] More exactly from 25 deg. 40' north latitude to 12 deg. south latitude, +if we are to include Formosa in the group, which is inhabited likewise +by the same race.--_Rizal_. + +[41] We confess our ignorance with respect to the origin of this +belief of Morga, which, as one can observe, was not his belief in +the beginning of the first chapter. Already from the time of Diodorus +Siculus (first century B. C.), Europe received information of these +islands by one Iamboule, a Greek, who went to them (to Sumatra at +least), and who wrote afterward the relation of his voyage. He gave +therein detailed information of the number of the islands, of their +inhabitants, of their writing, navigation, etc. Ptolemy mentions +three islands in his geography, which are called Sindae in the Latin +text. They are inhabited by the aginnatai. Mercator interprets those +islands as Celebes, Gilolo, and Amboina. Ptolemy also mentions the +island agajou daimonoc (Borneo), five baroussai (Mindanao, Leite, +Sebu, etc.), three sabade'ibai (the Java group--iabadiou) and ten +masniolai where a large loadstone was found. Colin surmises that +these are the Manilas.--_Rizal_. + +Colin (_Labor Evangelica_, Madrid, 1663) discusses the discovery and +naming of the Philippines. He quotes Ptolemy's passage that speaks +of islands called the Maniolas, whence many suppose came the name +Manilas, sometimes given to the islands. But as pointed out in a +letter dated March 14, 1904, by James A. LeRoy, Spanish writers have +wasted more time on the question than it merits. Mr. LeRoy probably +conjectures rightly that many old Chinese and Japanese documents will +be found to contain matter relating to the Philippines prior to the +Spanish conquest. + +[42] It is very difficult now to determine exactly which is this island +of Tendaya, called Isla Filipina for some years. According to Father +Urdaneta's relations, this island was far to the east of the group, +past the meridian of Maluco. Mercator locates it in Panay, and Colin +in Leyte, between Abuyog and Cabalian--contrary to the opinion of +others, who locate it in Ibabao, or south of Samar. But according to +other documents of that period, there is no island by that name, but +a chief called Tendaya, lord of a village situated in that district; +and, as the Spaniards did not understand the Indians well at that time, +many contradictions thus arose in the relations of that period. We +see that, in Legazpi's expedition, while the Spaniards talked of +islands, the Indians talked of a man, etc. After looking for Tandaya +for ten days they had to continue without finding it "and we passed +on without seeing Tandaya or Abuyo." It appears, nevertheless, that +the Spaniards continued to give this name to the southwestern part +of Samar, calling the southeastern part Ibabao or Zibabao and the +northern part of the same island Samar.--_Rizal_. + +[43] Sugbu, in the dialect of the country.--_Rizal_. + +[44] Morga considers the rainy season as winter, and the rest of +the year as summer. However this is not very exact, for at Manila, +in December, January, and February, the thermometer is lower than +in the months of August and September. Consequently, in its seasons +it is like those of Espana and those of all the rest of the northern +hemisphere.--_Rizal_. + +[45] The ancient traditions made Sumatra the original home of the +Filipino Indians. These traditions, as well as the mythology and +genealogies mentioned by the ancient historians, were entirely lost, +thanks to the zeal of the religious in rooting out every national pagan +or idolatrous record. With respect to the ethnology of the Filipinas, +see Professor Blumentritt's very interesting work, _Versuch einer +Etnographie der Philippinen_ (Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1882).--_Rizal_. + +[46] This passage contradicts the opinion referred to in Boyle's +_Adventures among the Dyaks of Borneo_, respecting the ignorance of +the Dyaks in the use of the bow, which seems to imply that other South +Sea islanders are supposed to share this ignorance. These aboriginal +savages of Manila resemble the Pakatans of Borneo in their mode of +life.--_Stanley_. + +[47] We do not know the origin of this word, which does not seem to +be derived from _China_. If we may make a conjecture, we will say +that perhaps a poor phonetic transcription has made _chinina_ from +the word _tinina_ (from _tina_) which in Tagal signifies _tenido_ +["dyed stuff"], the name of this article of clothing, generally of but +one color throughout. The chiefs wore these garments of a red color, +which made, according to Colin, "of fine gauze from India."--_Rizal_. + +[48] Bahag "a richly dyed cloth, generally edged with gold" among +the chiefs.--_Rizal_. + +[49] "They wrapped it in different ways, now in the Moro style, +like a turban without the top part, now twisted and turned in the +manner of the crown of a hat. Those who esteemed themselves valiant +let the ends of the cloth, elaborately embroidered, fall down the +back to the buttocks. In the color of the cloth, they showed their +chieftaincy, and the device of their undertakings and prowess. No +one was allowed to use the red potong until he had killed at least +one man. And in order to wear them edged with certain edgings, +which were regarded as a crown, they must have killed seven men" +(Colin). Even now any Indian is seen to wear the _balindang_ in the +manner of the _putong_. _Putong_ signifies in Tagal, "to crown" or +"to wrap anything around the head."--_Rizal_. + +[50] This is the reading of the original (_cera hilada_). It seems +more probable that this should read "spun silk," and that Morga's +amanuensis misunderstood _seda_ ("silk") as _cera_ ("wax"), or else +it is a misprint. + +[51] "They also have strings of bits of ivory" (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[52] "The last complement of the gala dress was, in the manner of our +sashes, a richly dyed shawl crossed at the shoulder and fastened under +the arm" (even today the men wear the _lambong_ or mourning garment +in this manner) "which was very usual with them. The Bisayans, in +place of this, wore robes or loose garments, well made and collarless, +reaching to the instep, and embroidered in colors. All their costume, +in fact, was in the Moorish manner, and was truly elegant and rich; +and even today they consider it so" (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[53] This manner of headdress, and the long robe of the Visayans, +have an analogy with the Japanese coiffure and kimono.--_Rizal_. + +[54] Baro.--_Rizal_. + +[55] A tree (_Entada purseta_) which grows in most of the provinces +of the Philippines. It contains a sort of filament, from which is +extracted a soapy foam, which is much used for washing clothes. This +foam is also used to precipitate the gold in the sand of rivers. Rizal +says the most common use is that described above. + +[56] This custon still exists.--_Rizal_. + +[57] This custom exists also among the married women of Japan, as a +sign of their chastity. It is now falling into disuse.--_Rizal_. + +[58] The Filipinos were careful not to bathe at the hour of the siesta, +after eating, during the first two days of a cold, when they have +the herpes, and some women during the period of menstruation.--_Rizal_. + +[59] This work, although not laborious, is generally performed +now by the men, while the women do only the actual cleaning of the +rice.--_Rizal_. + +[60] This custom is still to be seen in some parts.--_Rizal_. + +[61] A name given it by the Spaniards. Its Tagal name is +_kanin_.--_Rizal_. + +[62] The fish mentioned by Morga is not tainted, but is the +_bagoong_.--_Rizal_. + +[63] A term applied to certain plants (_Atmaranthus_, _Celosia_, +etc.) of which the leaves are boiled and eaten. + +[64] From the Tagal _tuba_, meaning sap or juice.--_Rizal_. + +[65] The Filipinos have reformed in this respect, due perhaps to the +wine-monopoly. Colin says that those intoxicated by this wine were +seldom disagreeable or dangerous, but rather more witty and sprightly; +nor did they show any ill effects from drinking it.--_Rizal_. + +[66] This weapon has been lost, and even its name is gone. A proof +of the decline into which the present Filipinos have fallen is the +comparison of the weapons that they manufacture now, with those +described to us by the historians. The hilts of the _talibones_ now +are not of gold or ivory, nor are their scabbards of horn, nor are +they admirably wrought.--_Rizal_. + +_Balarao_, dagger, is a Vissayan word.--_Stanley_. + +[67] The only other people who now practice head-hunting are the +Mentenegrins.--_Stanley_. + +[68] A Tagal word meaning oar.--_Stanley_. + +[69] A common device among barbarous or semi-civilized peoples, +and even among boatmen in general. These songs often contain many +interesting and important bits of history, as well as of legendary +lore. + +[70] _Karang_, signifying awnings.--_Rizal_ and _Stanley_. + +[71] The Filipinos, like the inhabitants of the Marianas--who are no +less skilful and dexterous in navigation--far from progressing, have +retrograded; since, although boats are now built in the islands, +we might assert that they are all after European models. The +boats that held one hundred rowers to a side and thirty soldiers +have disappeared. The country that once, with primitive methods, +built ships of about 2,000 toneladas, today [1890] has to go to +foreign ports, as Hong-Kong, to give the gold wrenched from the poor, +in exchange for unserviceable cruisers. The rivers are blocked up, +and navigation in the interior of the islands is perishing, thanks to +the obstacles created by a timid and mistrusting system of government; +and there scarcely remains in the memory anything but the name of all +that naval architecture. It has vanished, without modern improvements +having come to replace it in such proportion as, during the past +centuries, has occurred in adjacent countries....--_Rizal_. + +[72] It seems that some species of trees disappeared or became +very scarce because of the excessive ship-building that took place +later. One of them is the _betis_.--_Rizal_. + +Blanco states (_Flora_, ed. 1845, p. 281) that the betis (_Azaola +betis_) was common in Pampanga and other regions. + +Delgado describes the various species of trees in the Philippines +in the first six treatises of the first part of the fourth book +of _Historia general de Filipinas_ (Manila, 1892). He mentions by +name more than seventy trees grown on the level plains and near the +shores; more than forty fruit-trees; more than twenty-five species +grown in the mountains; sixteen that actually grow in the water; and +many kinds of palms. See also _Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands_ +(Washington, 1902), pp. 85-95, and Buzeta and Bravo's _Diccionario_ +(Madrid, 1850), i, pp. 29-36. + +[73] _Sanctor_ is called _santol_ (_Sandoricum indicum_--Cavanilles), +in Delgado (_ut supra_, note 71). The tree resembles a walnut-tree. Its +leaves are rounded and as large as the palm of the hand, and are +dark green in color. Excellent preserves are made from the fruit, +which was also eaten raw by the Indians. The leaves of the tree +have medicinal properties and were used as poultices. _Mabolo_ +(_Diospyros discolor_--Willd.) signifies in Tagal a thing or +fruit enclosed in a soft covering. The tree is not very high. The +leaves are large, and incline to a red color when old. The fruit +is red and as large as a medium-sized quince, and has several large +stones. The inside of the fruit is white, and is sweet and firm, and +fragrant, but not very digestible. The wood resembles ebony, is very +lustrous, and is esteemed for its solidity and hardness. The _nanca_ +[_nangka_, _nangca_; translated by Stanley, jack-fruit] (_Artocarpus +integrifolia_--Willd.), was taken to the Philippines from India, +where it was called _yaca_. The tree is large and wide-spreading, +and has long narrow leaves. It bears fruit not only on the branches, +but on the trunk and roots. The fruit is gathered when ripe, at +which time it exhales an aromatic odor. On opening it a yellowish +or whitish meat is found, which is not edible. But in this are found +certain yellow stones, with a little kernel inside resembling a large +bean; this is sweet, like the date, but has a much stronger odor. It +is indigestible, and when eaten should be well masticated. The shells +are used in cooking and resemble chestnuts. The wood is yellow, solid, +and especially useful in making certain musical instruments. Buzeta +and Bravo (_Diccionario_, i, p. 35) say that there are more than +fifty-seven species of bananas in the Philippines. + +[74] Pile (_Canarium commune_--Linn.). Delgado (_ut supra_) says that +this was one of the most notable and useful fruits of the islands. It +was generally confined to mountainous regions and grew wild. The +natives used the fruit and extracted a white pitch from the tree. The +fruit has a strong, hard shell. The fruit itself resembles an almond, +both in shape and taste, although it is larger. The tree is very high, +straight, and wide-spreading. Its leaves are larger than those of +the almond-tree. + +[75] Delgado (_ut supra_) describes the tree (_Cedrela +toona_--Roxb.) called _calanta_ in Tagal, and _lanipga_ in +Visayan. The tree is fragrant and has wood of a reddish color. It +was used for making the hulls of vessels, because of its strength and +lightness. The same author describes also the _asana_ (_Pterocarpus +indicus_--Willd.) or as it is called in the Visayas, _naga_ or +_narra_--as an aromatic tree, of which there are two varieties, male +and female. The wood of the male tree is pinkish, while that of the +female tree is inclined to white. They both grow to a great size and +are used for work requiring large timber. The wood has good durable +qualities and is very impervious to water, for which reason it was +largely used as supports for the houses. Water in which pieces of the +wood were placed, or the water that stood in vessels made of this wood, +had a medicinal value in dropsy and other diseases. In the provinces +of Albay and Camarines the natives made curiously-shaped drinking +vessels from this wood. + +[76] So many cattle were raised that Father Gaspar de San Agustin, when +speaking of Dumangas, says: "In this convent we have a large ranch for +the larger cattle, of so many cows that they have at times numbered +more than thirty, thousand ... and likewise this ranch contains many +fine horses."--_Rizal_. + +[77] To the flesh of this fowl, called in Tagal _ulikba_, are +attributed medicinal virtues.--_Rizal_. + +[78] These animals now [1890] exist in the islands, but are held in +small esteem.--_Rizal_. + +[79] See chapter on the mammals of the islands, in _Report_ of +U. S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 307-312. At its end is the +statement that but one species of monkey is known, and one other is +reported, to exist in the Philippines; and that "the various other +species of monkey which have been assigned to the Philippines by +different authors are myths pure and simple." + +[80] _Camalote_, for _gamalote_, a plant like maize, with a leaf a +yard long and an inch wide. This plant grows to a height of two yards +and a half, and when green serves for food for horses (Caballero's +_Dictionary_, Madrid, 1856).--_Stanley_. + +At that time the name for _zacate_ (hay).--_Rizal_. + +[81] In Japanese _fimbari_, larks (Medhurst's _Japanese +Vocabulary_).--_Stanley_. + +[82] _Pogos_, from the Tagal pugo.--_Rizal_. + +Delgado (_ut supra_) describes the pogos as certain small gray birds, +very similar to the sparrows in Spain. They are very greedy, and if +undisturbed would totally destroy the rice-fields. Their scientific +name is _Excalfactoria chinensis_ (Linn.). + +[83] Stanley conjectures that this word is a misprint for _maynelas_, +a diminutive of _maina_, a talking bird. Delgado (_ut supra_) describes +a bird called _maya_ (_Munia jagori_--Cab.; _Ploceus baya_--Blyth.; +and _Ploceus hypoxantha_--Tand.), which resembles the pogo, being +smaller and of a cinnamon color, which pipes and has an agreeable song. + +[84] Stanley translates this as "wild ducks." Delgado (_ut supra_) +describes a bird called _lapay_ (_Dendrocygna vagans_--Eyton.), +as similar to the duck in body, but with larger feet, which always +lives in the water, and whose flesh is edible. + +[85] For descriptions of the birds in the Philippines, see Delgado +(_ut supra_) book v, part i, 1st treatise, pp. 813-853; _Report_ of +U.S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 312-316; and _Gazetteer of +the Philippine Islands_ (Washington, 1902), pp. 170, 171. There are +more than five hundred and ninety species of birds in the islands, of +which three hundred and twenty-five are peculiar to the archipelago, +and largely land birds. There are thirty-five varieties of doves and +pigeons, all edible. + +[86] There are now domestic rabbits, and plenty of peacocks.--_Rizal_. + +[87] Doubtless the python, which is often domesticated in the +Philippines. See _Vol_. XII, p. 259, note 73. + +[88] La Gironiere (_Twenty Years in the Philippines_--trans. from +French, London, 1853) describes an interesting fight with a huge +crocodile near his settlement of Jala-Jala. The natives begged for +the flesh in order to dry it and use it as a specific against asthma, +as they believed that any asthmatic person who lived on the flesh for +a certain time would be infallibly cured. Another native wished the +fat as an antidote for rheumatic pain. The head of this huge reptile +was presented to an American, who in turn presented it to the Boston +Museum. Unfortunately La Gironiere's picturesque descriptions must +often be taken with a grain of salt. For some information regarding +the reptiles of the islands see _Report_ of U.S. Philippine Commission, +1900, iii, pp. 317-319. + +[89] Unless we are mistaken, there is a fish in the Filipinas called +_Pampano_.--_Rizal_. + +[90] For catalogue and scientific description of the mollusks of +the Philippines, see the work of Joaquin Gonzalez Hidalgo--now +(1904) in course of publication by the Real Academia de Ciencias of +Madrid--_Estudios preliminares sobre la fauna malacologica de las +Islas Filipinas._ + +[91] The Rio Grande.--_Rizal_. + +[92] No fish is known answering to this description.--_Stanley_. + +[93] The island of Talim.--_Rizal_. + +[94] Retana thinks (Zuniga, ii, p. 545*) that this device was +introduced among the Filipinos by the Borneans. + +[95] A species of fishing-net. Stanley's conjecture is wrong. + +[96] _Esparavel_ is a round fishing-net, which is jerked along by +the fisher through rivers and shallow places. _Barredera_ is a net +of which the meshes are closer and tighter than those of common nets, +so that the smallest fish may not escape it. + +[97] Cf. methods of fishing of North American Indians, _Jesuit +Relations_, vi, pp. 309-311, liv, pp. 131, 306-307. + +[98] A species of fish in the Mediterranean, about three pulgadas +[inches] long. Its color is silver, lightly specked with black. + +[99] The fish now called _lawlaw_ is the dry, salted sardine. The +author evidently alludes to the _tawilis_ of Batangas, or to the +_dilis_, which is still smaller, and is used as a staple by the +natives.--_Rizal_. + +For information regarding the fishes of the Philippines, see Delgado +(_ut supra_), book v, part iv, pp. 909-943; _Gazetteer of the +Philippine Islands_ (_ut supra_), pp. 171-172; and (with description +of methods of fishing) _Report_ of U. S. Philippine Commission, 1900, +iii, pp. 319-324. + +[100] Paho. A species of very small mango from one and one-half +to five centimeters in its longer diameter. It has a soft pit, and +exhales a strong pitchy odor.--_Rizal_. + +[101] A Spanish word signifying a cryptogamous plant; perhaps referring +to some species of mushroom. + +[102] In Tagal this is kasubha. It comes from the Sanskrit _kasumbha_, +or Malay _kasumba_ (Pardo de Tavera's _El Sanscrito en la lengua +tagalog_).--_Rizal_. + +This plant is the safflower or bastard saffron (_Certhamus +tinctorius_); its flowers are used in making a red dye. + +[103] Not a tree, but a climber. The plants are cultivated by +training them about some canes planted in the middle of certain +little channels which serve to convey irrigation to the plant twice +each day. A plantation of betel--or ikmo, as the Tagals call it--much +resembles a German hop-garden.--_Rizal_. + +[104] This fruit is not that of the betel or _buyo_, but of the _bonga_ +(Tagal _bunga_), or areca palm.--_Rizal_. + +[105] Not quicklime, but well slaked lime.--_Rizal_. + +Rizal misprints _un poco de cal viva_ for _vn poluc de cal viua_. + +[106] The original word is _marcada_. Rizal is probably correct in +regarding it as a misprint for _mascada_, chewed. + +[107] It is not clear who call these caskets by that name. I imagine +it to be the Spanish name, properly spelt _buxeta_. The king of +Calicut's betel box is called _buxen_ in the Barcelona MS. of the +Malabar coasts.--_Stanley_. + +[108] See _Vol_. IV, p. 222, note 31; also Delgado (_ut supra_), +pp. 667-669. Delgado says that _bonga_ signifies fruit. + +[109] Tagal, _tuko_.--_Rizal_. + +[110] This word in the original is _visitandolas_; Rizal makes +it _irritandolas_ (shaking or irritating them), but there are not +sufficient grounds for the change. + +[111] The Indians, upon seeing that wealth excited the rapacity of +the encomenderos and soldiers, abandoned the working of the mines, +and the religious historians assert that they counseled them to a +similar action in order to free them from annoyances. Nevertheless, +according to Colin (who was "informed by well-disposed natives") +more than 100,000 pesos of gold annually, conservatively stated, +was taken from the mines during his time, after eighty years of +abandonment. According to "a manuscript of a grave person who had +lived long in these islands" the first tribute of the two provinces +of Ilocos and Pangasinan alone amounted to 109,500 pesos. A single +encomendero, in 1587, sent 3,000 taheles of gold in the "Santa Ana," +which was captured by Cavendish.--_Rizal_. + +[112] This was prohibited later.--_Rizal_. + +[113] See _Vol_. XIV, pp. 301-304. + +According to Hernando de los Rios the province of Pangasinan was said +to contain a quantity of gold, and that Guido de Labazaris sent some +soldiers to search for it; but they returned in a sickly state and +suppressed all knowledge of the mines in order not to be sent back +there. The Dominican monks also suppressed all knowledge of the mines +on account of the tyranny of which gold had been the cause in the +West Indies.--_Stanley_. + +[114] Pearl-fishing is still carried on along the coasts of Mindanao +and Palawan, and in the Sulu archipelago. In the latter region pearls +are very abundant and often valuable; the fisheries there are under +the control of the sultan of Sulu, who rents them, appropriating for +himself the largest pearls. + +[115] Probably the cowry (_Cypraea moneta_). Crawfurd states +(_Dict. Ind. Islands_, p. 117) that in the Asiatic archipelago this +shell is found only on the shores of the Sulu group, and that it +"seems never to have been used for money among the Indian Islanders +as it has immemorially been by the Hindus." + +[116] Jagor, _Travels in the Philippines_ (Eng. trans., London, 1875), +devotes a portion of his chapter xv to these jars. He mentions the +great prices paid by the Japanese for these vessels. On p. 164, occurs +a translation of the above paragraph, but it has been mistranslated +in two places. Stanley cites the similar jars found among the Dyaks +of Borneo--the best called _gusih_--which were valued at from $1,500 +to $3,000, while the second grade were sold for $400. That they are +very ancient is proved by one found among other remains of probably the +copper age. From the fact that they have been found in Cambodia, Siam, +Cochinchina, and the Philippines, Rizal conjectures that the peoples +of these countries may have had a common center of civilization at +one time. + +[117] "Not many years ago," says Colin (1663), "a large piece [of +ambergris] was found in the island of Jolo, that weighed more than +eight arrobas, of the best kind, namely, the gray."--_Rizal_. + +[118] This industry must now be forgotten, for it is never heard +of.--_Rizal_. + +[119] Perhaps Morga alludes to the _sinamay_, which was woven from +abaka, or filament of the plant _Musa textilis_. The abaka is taken +from the trunk and not the leaf.--_Rizal_. + +[120] This name seems to be Malay, _Babu-utan_, wild swine.--_Stanley_. + +[121] The men of these islands were excellent carpenters and +ship-builders. "They make many very light vessels, which they take +through the vicinity for sale in a very curious manner. They build +a large vessel, undecked, without iron nail or any fastening. Then, +according to the measure of its hull, they make another vessel that +fits into it. Within that they put a second and a third. Thus a +large biroco contains ten or twelve vessels, called biroco, virey, +barangay, and binitan." These natives were "tattooed, and were +excellent rowers and sailors; and although they are upset often, +they never drown." The women are very masculine. "They do not +drink from the rivers, although the water is very clear, because it +gives them nausea.... The women's costumes are chaste and pretty, +for they wear petticoats in the Bisayan manner, of fine medrinaque, +and _lamboncillos_, which resemble close-fitting sayuelos [_i.e._, +woolen shifts worn by certain classes of religious]. They wear long +robes of the same fine medrinaque. They gather the hair, which is +neatly combed, into a knot, on top of the head, and place a rose in +it. On their forehead they wear a band of very fine wrought gold, +two fingers wide. It is very neatly worked and on the side encircling +the head it is covered with colored taffeta. In each ear they wear +three gold earrings, one in the place where Spanish women wear them, +and two higher up. On their feet they wear certain coverings of thin +brass, which sound when they walk." (The citations herein are from +Colin.) These islands have also retrograded.--_Rizal_. + +[122] Cavite derives its name from the Tagal word _cavit_, a creek, +or bend, or hook, for such is its form.--_Stanley_. + +[123] This province had decreased so greatly in population and +agriculture, a half century later, that Gaspar de San Agustin said: +"Now it no longer has the population of the past, because of the +insurrection of that province, when Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara +was governor of these islands, and because of the incessant cutting +of the timber for the building of his Majesty's ships, which prevents +them from cultivating their extremely fertile plain." Later, when +speaking of Guagua or Wawa, he says: "This town was formerly very +wealthy because of its many chiefs, and because of the abundant +harvests gathered in its spacious plains, which are now submerged by +the water of the sea."--_Rizal_. + +[124] Now the port of Sorsogon.--_Rizal_. + +[125] Now the port of Mariveles (?).--_Rizal_. + +[126] Subik (?).--_Rizal_. + +[127] Mindoro is at present [1890] so depopulated that the minister of +the Colonies, in order to remedy this result of Spanish colonization, +wishes to send there the worst desperadoes of the peninsula, to see +if great criminals will make good colonists and farmers. All things +considered, given the condition of those who go, it is indubitable +that the race that succeeds must know how to defend itself and live, +so that the island may not be depopulated again.--_Rizal_. + +[128] Samar. This proves contrary to the opinion of Colin, who places +Tendaya in Leite.--_Rizal_. + +[129] Southeastern part of Samar.--_Rizal_. + +[130] Colin says, however, that they did tattoo the chins and +about the eyes [_barbas y cejas_]. The same author states also that +the tattooing was done little by little and not all at once. "The +children were not tattooed, but the women tattooed one hand and +part of the other. In this island of Manila the Ilocos also tattooed +themselves, although not so much as did the Visayans." The Negritos, +Igorrotes, and other independent tribes of the Filipinas still tattoo +themselves. The Christians have forgotten the practice. The Filipinas +used only the black color, thus differing from the Japanese, who +employ different colors, as red and blue, and carry the art to a +rare perfection. In other islands of the Pacific, the women tattoo +themselves almost as much as the men. Dr. Wilhelm Joest's _Taetowiren +Narbenzeichnen und Koerperbemahlen_ (Berlin, 1887) treats the matter +very succinctly.--_Rizal_. + +[131] This is a confused statement, after what just precedes it and +according to the evidence of Father Chirino (see _Vol_. XII, chapter +vii). Morga must mean that they wore no cloak or covering when they +went outside the house, as did the Tagals (both men and women), who +used a kind of cape.--_Rizal_. [This is the sense in which Stanley +understood and translated this passage.] + +[132] _Gubat_, grove, field, in Tagal. _Mangubat_ [so printed in +the text of Rizal's edition] signifies in Tagal "to go hunting, +or to the wood," or even "to fight."--_Rizal_. + +[133] "At the arrival of the Spaniards at this island (Panay)" says +San Agustin, "it was said to have more than 50,000 families. But +they decreased greatly ... and at present it has about 14,000 +tributarios--6,000 apportioned to the crown, and 8,000 to individual +encomenderos." They had many gold-mines, and obtained gold by +washing the sand in the Panay River; "but instigated by the outrages +received from the alcaldes-mayor," says the same historian, "they +have ceased to dig it, preferring to live in poverty than to endure +such troubles."--_Rizal_. + +[134] This entire paragraph is omitted in the Rizal edition. In the +original it is as follows: + +_La Lengua de todos, los Pintados y Bicayas, es vna mesma, por do se +entienden, hablando y escriuiendo, en letras y caratores que tienen +particulares, que semejan a los Arabigos, y su comun escribir entre +los naturales, es en hojas de arboles, y en canas, sobre la corteza; +que en todas las islas ay muchas, de disforme grueso los canutos, +y el pie es vn arbol muy grueso y macico_. + +[135] This difference is no greater than that between the Spanish, +Portuguese, and Italian.--_Rizal_. + +[136] See Chirino (_Relacion de las islas Filipinas_) _Vol_. XII, +chapters xv-xvii. His remarks, those of Morga, and those of other +historians argue a considerable amount of culture among the Filipino +peoples prior to the Spanish conquest. A variety of opinions have been +expressed as to the direction of the writing. Chirino, San Antonio, +Zuniga, and Le Gentil, say that it was vertical, beginning at the +top. Colin, Ezguerra, and Marche assert that it was vertical but in +the opposite direction. Colin says that the horizontal form was adopted +after the arrival of the Spaniards. Mas declares that it was horizontal +and from left to right, basing his arguments upon certain documents +in the Augustinian archives in Manila. The eminent Filipino scholar, +Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera has treated the subject in a work entitled +"_Contribucion para el estudio de los antiguos alfabetos filipinos_" +(Losana, 1884). See Rizal's notes on p. 291 of his edition of Morga. + +[137] This portion of this sentence is omitted in Stanley. + +[138] Bahay is "house" in Tagal; _pamamahay_ is that which is in the +interior and the house. _Bahandin_ may be a misprint for _bahayin_, +an obsolete derivative.--_Rizal_. + +[139] Cf. this and following sections with Loarca's relation, _Vol_. V, +of this series; and with Plasencia's account, _Vol_. VII, pp. 173-196. + +[140] Timawa.--_Rizal_. + +[141] The condition of these slaves was not always a melancholy +one. Argensola says that they ate at the same table with their masters, +and married into their families. The histories fail to record the +assassination for motives of vengeance of any master or chief by +the natives, as they do of encomenderos. After the conquest the evil +deepened. The Spaniards made slaves without these pretexts, and without +those enslaved being Indians of their jurisdiction--going moreover, +to take them away from their own villages and islands. Fernando de los +Rios Coronel, in his memorial to the king (Madrid, 1621) pp. 24-25, +speaks in scathing terms of the cruelties inflicted on the natives +in the construction of ships during the governorship of Juan de +Silva. A letter from Felipe II to Bishop Domingo de Salazar shows +the awful tyranny exercised by the encomenderos upon the natives, +whose condition was worse than that of slaves.--_Rizal_. + +[142] For remarks on the customs formerly observed by the natives of +Pampanga in their suits, see appendix to this volume. + +[143] This fundamental agreement of laws, and this general uniformity, +prove that the mutual relations of the islands were widespread, and the +bonds of friendship more frequent than were wars and quarrels. There +may have existed a confederation, since we know from the first +Spaniards that the chief of Manila was commander-in-chief of the +sultan of Borneo. In addition, documents of the twelfth century that +exist testify the same thing.--_Rizal_. + +[144] This word must be _sagigilid_ in its Tagal form. The root _gilid_ +signifies in Tagal, "margin," "strand," or "shore." The reduplication +of the first syllable, if tonic, signifies active future action. If +not tonic and the suffix _an_ be added, it denotes the place where +the action of the verb is frequently executed. The preposition _sa_ +indicates place, time, reference. The atonic reduplication may also +signify plurality, in which case the singular noun would be _sagilid_, +_i.e._, "at the margin," or "the last"--that is, the slave. Timawa +signifies now in Tagal, "in peace, in quietness, tranquil, free," +etc. _Maginoo_, from the root _ginoo_, "dignity," is now the title of +the chiefs; and the chief's reunion is styled _kaginoohan_. Colin says, +nevertheless, that the Chiefs used the title _gat_ or _lakan_, and the +women _dayang_. The title of _mama_ applied now to men, corresponds +to "uncle," "Senor," "Monsieur," "Mr.," etc.; and the title _al_ +of women to the feminine titles corresponding to these.--_Rizal_. + +[145] _Namamahay_ (from _bahay_, "house"), "he who lives in his own +house." This class of slaves, if they may be so called, exists even +yet. They are called _kasama_ (because of being now the laborers of a +capitalist or farmer), _bataan_ ("servant," or "domestic"), _kampon, +tao_, etc. + +[146] This class of slavery still exists [1890] in many districts, +especially in the province of Batangas; but it must be admitted that +their condition is quite different from that of the slave in Greece or +Rome, or that of the negro, and even of those made slaves formerly by +the Spaniards. Thanks to their social condition and to their number in +that time, the Spanish domination met very little resistance, while +the Filipino chiefs easily lost their independence and liberty. The +people, accustomed to the yoke, did not defend the chiefs from +the invader, nor attempt to struggle for liberties that they never +enjoyed. For the people, it was only a change of masters. The nobles, +accustomed to tyrannize by force, had to accept the foreign tyranny, +when it showed itself stronger than their own. Not encountering love +or elevated feelings in the enslaved mass, they found themselves +without force or power.--_Rizal_. + +[147] _Inasawa_, or more correctly _asawa_ (consort).--_Rizal_. + +[148] This dowry, if one may call it so, represented to the parents +an indemnity for the care and vigilance that they had exercised in +their daughter's education. The Filipina woman, never being a burden +to any one (either to her parents or to her husband), but quite the +contrary, represents a value, whose loss to the possessor must be +substituted.... The Tagal wife is free, and treated with consideration; +she trades and contracts, almost always with the approbation of her +husband, who consults her in all his acts. She takes care of the money, +and educates the children, half of whom belong to her...--_Rizal_. + +[149] _Bigay-kaya_, "to give what one can," "a voluntary offering, +a present of good will" ... This _bigay-kaya_ devolved entire +to the married couple, according to Colin, if the son-in-law was +obedient to his parents-in-law; if not, it was divided among all the +heirs. "Besides the dowry, the chiefs used to give certain gifts to +the parents and relatives, and even to the slaves, which were great +or less according to the rank of the one married." (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[150] This good custom still exists, ... although it is gradually +passing away.--_Rizal_. + +[151] Such is the law throughout most parts of Asia; in Siam the +woman becomes free without having children. It is only in America that +fathers could and did sell their own children into slavery.--_Stanley_. + +[152] This condition of affairs and the collection of usury is true +still [1890]. Morga's words prove true not only of the Indian, but also +of the mestizos, the Spaniards, and even of various religious. So far +has it gone that the government itself not only permits it, but also +exacts the capital and even the person to pay the debts of others, as +happens with the _cabeza de barangay_ [head of a barangay].--_Rizal_. + +[153] The _tam-tam_ and the _pum-piang_ are still used.--_Rizal_. + +[154] The early Filipinos had a great horror of theft, and even the +most anti-Filipino historian could not accuse them of being a thievish +race. Today, however, they have lost their horror of that crime. One +of the old Filipino methods of investigating theft was as follows: +"If the crime was proved, but not the criminal, if more than one was +suspected ... each suspect was first obliged to place a bundle of +cloth, leaves, or whatever he wished on a pile, in which the thing +stolen might be hidden. Upon the completion of this investigation +if the stolen property was found in the pile, the suit ceased." The +Filipinos also practiced customs very similar to the "judgments of +God" of the middle ages, such as putting suspected persons, by pairs, +under the water and adjudging guilty him who first emerged.--_Rizal_. + +[155] The Filipino today prefers a beating to scoldings or +insults.--_Rizal_. + +[156] From _bago_, new, and _tao_, man: he who has become a +man.--_Rizal_. + +[157] In speaking of a similar custom in Australia, Eyre (_Central +Australia_, i, p. 213), says: "This extraordinary and inexplicable +custom must have a great tendency to prevent the rapid increase of the +population."--_Stanley_. [Stanley does not translate this paragraph +of the text.] + +[158] It appears that the natives called _anito_ a tutelary genius, +either of the family, or extraneous to it. Now, with their new +religious ideas, the Tagals apply the term _anito_ to any superstition, +false worship, idol, etc.--_Rizal_. + +[159] Others besides Morga mention oratories in caves, where the idols +were kept, and where aromatics were burned in small brasiers. Chirino +found small temples in Taitay adjoining the principal houses. [See +_Vol_. XII. of this series, chapter xxi.] It appears that temples were +never dedicated to _bathala maykapal_, nor was sacrifice ever offered +him. The temples dedicated to the _anito_ were called ulango.--_Rizal_. + +[160] San Agustin says that hell was called _solad_, and paradise, +_kalualhatian_ (a name still in existence), and in poetical language, +_ulugan_. The blest abodes of the inhabitants of Panay were in the +mountain of Madias.--_Rizal_. + +[161] Cf. the "wake" of the Celtic and Gaelic peasants. Cf. also the +North-American Indian burial ceremonies, and reverence paid to the +dead, in _Jesuit Relations_, i, p. 215; ii, pp. 21, 149; viii, p. 21; +x, pp. 169, 247, 283-285, 293; xiii, 259; xxi, 199; xxiii, 31; lxv, +141; etc. + +In the Filipino burials, there were mourners who composed panegyrics +in honor of the dead, like those made today. "To the sound of this +sad music the corpse was washed, and perfumed with storax, gum-resin, +or other perfumes made from tree gums, which are found in all these +woods. Then the corpse was shrouded, being wrapped in more or less +cloth according to the rank of the deceased. The bodies of the more +wealthy were anointed and embalmed in the manner of the Hebrews, +with aromatic liquors, which preserved them from decay.... The +burial-place of the poor was in pits dug in the ground under their +own houses. After the bodies of the rich and powerful were kept and +bewailed for three days, they were placed in a chest or coffin of +incorruptible wood, adorned with rich jewels, and with small sheets +of gold in the mouth and over the eyes. The coffin was all in one +piece, and the lid was so adjusted that no air could enter. Because +of these precautions the bodies have been found after many years, +still uncorrupted. These coffins were deposited in one of three +places, according to the inclination and arrangement of the deceased, +either on top of the house among the treasures ... or underneath it, +but raised from the ground; or in the ground itself, in an open hole +surrounded with a small railing ... nearby they were wont to place +another box filled with the best clothes of the deceased; and at +meal-time they set various articles of food there in dishes. Beside +the men were laid their weapons, and beside the women their looms or +other implements of work" (Colin).--_Rizal_. + +[162] _Kasis._ This is another instance of the misapplication of this +Arabic term, which means exclusively a Christian priest.--_Stanley_. + +[163] This custom has not fallen into disuse among the Filipinos, +even among the Catholics.--_Rizal_. + +Lieutenant Charles Norton Barney, of the medical department of the +U. S. Army, has an article in _Journal_ of the Association of Military +Surgeons for September, 1903, on "Circumcision and Flagellation +among the Filipinos." In regard to circumcision he states that it +"is a very ancient custom among the Philippine _indios_, and so +generalized that at least seventy or eighty per cent of males in the +Tagal country have undergone the operation." Those uncircumcised at +the age of puberty are taunted by their fellows, and such are called +"_suput_," a word formerly meaning "constricted" or "tight," but now +being extended to mean "one who cannot easily gain entrance in sexual +intercourse." The "operation has no religious significance," nor is +it done for cleanliness, "but from custom and disinclination to be +ridiculed," probably [as Morga proves] having been learned from the +Moros. The friars were unable to check the custom. Among the Tagals +the operation is called "_tuli_," and the method of circumcising +is described at length. The author derives his information from a +mestizo and a full-blooded native. The custom is mentioned by Foreman. + +[164] Appellation given to their ecclesiastical sages by Mahometans. + +[165] See the king's decree granting this coat-of-arms, in _Vol_. IX, +pp. 211-215, with two representations of the coat-of-arms. + +[166] Convents occupy almost one-third part of the walled +city.--_Rizal_. + +[167] The walls did not even have any moats then; these were dug after +the English invasion of 1762. The walls were also rearranged at that +time, and perfected with the lapse of time and the needs that arose +in the city.--_Rizal_. + +[168] Rizal misprints _al cabo del lienco_ as _al campo del lienzo_. + +[169] Now [1890] the gates of the city are open all night, and in +certain periods, passage along the streets and through the walls is +allowed at all hours.--_Rizal_. + +[170] This powder-mill has several times changed its site. It was +afterward near Maalat on the seashore, and then was moved to Nagtaha, +on the bank of the Pasig.--_Rizal_. + +[171] Probably on the same site where the great Tagal cannon-foundry +had formerly stood, which was burned and destroyed by the Spaniards +at their first arrival in Manila. San Agustin declares the Tagal +foundry to have been as large as that at Malaga.--_Rizal_. + +[172] The Rizal edition omits the words, _muy grande y autorizada, +capilla aparte, camara del sello real_. + +[173] The treasury building. The governor's palace was destroyed +in 1863.--_Rizal_. + +[174] The Audiencia and cabildo buildings were also destroyed, but +the latter has been rebuilt.--_Rizal_. + +[175] The Rizal edition misprints _sacristan_ as _sacristias_. + +[176] This is the largest convent in Manila.--_Rizal_. + +[177] Among the Jesuits, that part of a college where the pensioners +or boarders live and receive their instruction. + +[178] This college of San Jose was founded in 1601, although the royal +decree for it had been conceded in 1585. The number of collegiates to +enter was thirteen, among whom was a nephew of Francisco Tello and +a son of Dr. Morga. From its inception Latin was taught there. In +a suit with the College of Santo Tomas, the Jesuits obtained a +favorable decision; and it was recognized as the older institution, +and given the preference in public acts. The historians say that at +its inauguration the students wore bonnets covered with diamonds and +pearls. At present [1890] this college, after having moved from house +to house, has become a school of pharmacy attached to Santo Tomas, +and directed by the Dominican rector.--_Rizal_. + +[179] After many varying fortunes, this institution has wholly +disappeared.--_Rizal_. + +[180] The Confraternity of Mercy [_Hermandad de la Misericordia_] +was founded in 1594, by an ecclesiastic named Juan Fernandez de +Leon.--_Rizal_. + +[181] San Juan de Dios [St. John of God].--_Rizal_. + +[182] Better, Maalat. The Spaniards pronounced this later +Malate. There lived the chief Tagals after they were deprived of +their houses in Manila, among whom were the families of Raja Matanda +and Raja Soliman. San Augustin says that even in his day many of the +ancient nobility dwelt there, and that they where very urbane and +cultured. "The Men hold various positions in Manila, and certain +occupations in some of the local public functions. The women make +excellent lace, in which they are so skilfull that the Dutch women +cannot surpass them." This is still true of the women.--_Rizal_. + +[183] Now the town of Paco.--_Rizal_. + +[184] _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. ii, tit. xv, ley xi, defines +the district of the Audiencia and states certain perogatives of the +governor and auditors as follows: "In the city of Manila, in the +island of Luzon, capital of the Felipinas, shall reside our royal +Audiencia and Chancilleria, with a president who shall be governor and +captain-general, four auditors, who shall also be alcaldes of criminal +cases, one fiscal, one alguacil-mayor, one lieutenant of the grand +chancillor, and the other ministers and officials necessary. It shall +have as its district the said island of Luzon, and all the rest of the +Filipinas, the archipelago of China and its mainland as yet discovered +and to be discovered. We order the governor and captain-general of +the said islands and provinces and president of the royal Audiencia +in them, to hold personal charge in peace and war of the superior +government of all the district of the said Audiencia, and to make the +provisions and concessions in our royal name, which in accordance with +the laws of this _Recopilacion_ and of these kingdoms of Castilla, +and with the instructions and powers that he shall get from us, he +should and can make. In things and matters of importance that arise in +the government, the said president governor shall discuss them with +the auditors of the said Audiencia, so that they, after consulting, +may give him their opinion. He, after hearing them, shall take what +course is most advisable to the service of God and to ours, and the +peace and quiet of that province and community." Felipe II, Aranjuez, +May 5, 1583; Toledo, May 25, 1596, in ordinance of the Audiencia; +Felipe IV in this _Recopilacion._ + +[185] The original is _canongias, raciones, y medias raciones_, +which literally refers to the office or prebend instead of the +individual. We retain the above terms as expressing the persons who +held these prebends. + +[186] Literaly, the original translates "in the islands of Sebu, +Cagayan, and Camerines." + +[187] This is so changed now [1890] and the employees so increased in +number, that the annual expenses amount to more than 2,000,000 pesos, +while the intendant's salary is 12,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[188] This city has disapeared from the map and from the earth. An +inconsiderable town named Lal-lo occupies its site. It is still +[1890], however, named as the appointment of the bishopric of Bigan, +the actual residence of the bishop.--_Rizal_. + +[189] An attempt was made to supply the lack of prebends in the +cathedral cities of the Philippines by the following law: "Inasmuch as +the bishops of the churches of Nueva Caceres, Nueva Segovia, and of the +Name of Jesus of the Filipinas Islands should have men to assist them +in the pontifical acts, and the bishops should have all the propriety +possible in their churches, and divine worship more reverence; and +inasmuch as there are no tithes with which a few prebendaries can be +sustained in the churches: therefore our governor of those islands +shall appoint to each of the said churches two ecclesiastics of good +life and example, who shall aid and assist the bishop in the pontifical +acts, and in all else relating to divine worship. He shall assign +them a certain modest sum for their support from our royal treasury, +so that with that they may for the present serve the churches, until +there be more opportunity for endowing them with prebendaries and +providing other necessary things." Felipe III, San Lorenzo, October 5, +1606. _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. i, tit. vi, ley xviii. + +[190] The Rizal edition omits a considerable portion of this +paragraph. The omission is as follows: _para guarda del puerto, y +defensa de la ciudad, con bastante guarnicion de soldados de paga, a +orden del alcalde mayor, capitan a guerra de la prouincia que reside +en la ciudad. Sera la poblazon, de dozientos vezinos Espanoles, +con casas de madera, tiene Cabildo, de dos alcaldes ordinarios, +ocho rejidores, alguazil mayor y sus oficiales_. + +[191] Now [1890] of slight importance. Of its former grandeur there +remain only 1,000 inhabitants, with a parochial house, a justice's +house, a prison, and a primary school.--_Rizal_. + +[192] Vigan or Bigan.--_Rizal_. + +[193] Legazpi also had two secular priests, Juan de Vivero and Juan +de Villanueva, who had part in the first conversions.--_Rizal_. + +[194] The Jesuits preceded the Dominicans seven years as missionaries +to the Filipinas. The first Jesuits came over with Domingo de Salazar, +the first bishop, and his Dominican associate.--_Rizal_. + +[195] _Visita_: here meaning a district which has no resident +missionary, but is visited by religious from some mission station, +on which the visita is therefore dependent. + +[196] Cf. with the musical ability of the Filipinos that displayed by +the North American Indians, as described in _The Jesuit Relations_, +vols. vi, p. 183; xviii, p. 161; xxiii, p. 213; xxvii, p. 117; xxxi, +p. 219; xxxviii, pp. 259, 263; etc. + +[197] Chirino (chapter vii) mentions the apportionment, by the king, of +distinct districts to the different orders. The Augustinian authorities +in Mexico granted permission to those of their order going to the +Philippines to establish themselves wherever they wished in the islands +(see _Vol_. II, pp. 161-168), and the latter exercised the omnimodo +[i.e., entire] ecclesiastical authority, as conceded by the popes, +until the arrival of the Franciscans in 1577. Papal concessions +probably marked out the districts as apportioned by the king. + +[198] Morga refers, with his characteristic prudence, to the great +question of diocesan visits, which commenced with Fray Domingo +de Salazar, and which could not be ended until 1775, in the time +of Anda--thanks to the energy of the latter and the courage of +Archbishop Don Basilio Sancho de Santa Justa y Rufina, when after +great disturbances they succeeded in subjecting the regular curas to +the inspection of the bishops. Morga, however, shows that he did not +approve the claims of the religious to independence, but does not +dare to state so distinctly.--_Rizal_. + +[199] The Augustinians received also one-fourth part of the tribute +from the villages while they were building churches; and 200 pesos +fuertes [_i.e._, ten-real pieces] and 200 cavans [the cavan equals +25 gantas, or 137 Spanish libras] of cleaned rice for four religious +who heard confessions during Lent. Fifty cavans of cleaned rice per +person seems to us too much. It results that each friar consumes 12 +1/2 libras of rice or 27 chupas [the chupa is 1/8 ganta or 3 litros] +daily, thirteen times as much as any Indian.--_Rizal_. + +[200] _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. vi, tit. vii, ley xvi, contains the +following in regard to the native chiefs: "It is not right that the +Indian chiefs of Filipinas be in a worse condition after conversion; +rather should they have such treatment that would gain their affection +and keep them loyal, so that with the spiritual blessings that God +has communicated to them by calling them to His true knowledge, +the temporal blessings may be joined, and they may live contentedly +and comfortably. Therefore, we order the governors of those islands +to show them good treatment and entrust them, in our name, with the +government of the Indians, of whom they were formerly the lords. In +all else the governors shall see that the chiefs are benefited justly, +and the Indians shall pay them something as a recognition, as they did +during the period of their paganism, provided it be without prejudice +to the tributes that are to be paid us, or prejudicial to that which +pertains to their encomenderos." Felipe II, Madrid, June 11, 1594. + +[201] The _gobernadorcillo_ ["little or petty governor"]. + +[202] _Bilango_ signifies today in Tagal "the act of imprisoning," +and _bilanguan_ "the prison."--_Rizal_. + +[203] For good expositions of local government in modern times, see +Bowring, _Visit to the Philippine Isles_ (London, 1859), pp. 87-93; and +Montero y Vidal, _Archipielago Filipino_ (Madrid, 1886), pp. 162-168. + +[204] These are now [1890] made in Spanish.--_Rizal_. + +[205] Names of petty officers: the former the name of an +officer in oriental countries; the second signifying one who +commands. Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera (_Costumbres de los Tagalos_, +Madrid, 1892, p. 10, note 1) says the word dato is now unused by +the Tagals. _Datu_ or _datuls_ primitively signified "grandfather," +or "head of the family," which was equivalent to the head of the +barangay. This name is used in Mindanao and Jolo to designate certain +chiefs. + +[206] A later law in _Recopilacion de leyes_ (lib. vi, tit. viii, ley +xi) regulates the encomienda--giving power as follows: "The governor +and captain-general of Filipinas shall apportion the encomiendas, +in accordance with the regulations to worthy persons, without having +other respect than to the service of God our Lord, and our service, +the welfare of the public cause, and the remuneration of the most +deserving. Within sixty days, reckoned from the time that he shall +have heard of the vacancy, he shall be obliged to apportion them. If +he does not do so, the right to apportion them shall devolve upon +and pertain to our royal Audiencia of those islands, and we order +the Audiencia to apportion them, paying heed to the laws, within six +days, and to avail itself of the edicts and diligences issued by the +governor without other new ones. In case the governor shall not have +issued edicts and diligences, the Audiencia shall issue them and make +the provision within twenty days." Felipe III, Madrid, June 4, 1620. + +[207] The rapidity with which many of these encomenderos amassed +great wealth in a few years is known, and that they left colossal +fortunes at their death. Some were not satisfied with the tributes +and with what they demanded, but made false measures, and balances +that weighed twice as much as was indicated. They often exacted the +tributes in certain products only, and appraised the same at what +value they wished.--_Rizal_. + +[208] A law in _Recopilacion de leyes_ (lib. vi, tit. v, ley lxv) +cites the above provision and confirms it anew: "In order to provide +instruction for certain villages of the Filipinas Islands, which did +not enjoy it, or if they had it, it was not sufficient, it was resolved +to increase the tribute, which was formerly eight reals, or its value, +per peso, to the proportion of ten Castilian reals apiece. It was +ordered that the increased amount be placed in our royal treasury, +and one-half real of it be applied to paying the obligations which had +to be met in regard to the tithes, while the one and one-half reals +would remain to pay those soldiers there and for other purposes; +in consideration of the fact that the funds necessary to send out +religious, who are employed in the preaching of the holy gospel, +are supplied from our royal treasury, and that the encomenderos were +obliged to pay for the ordinary instruction from the eight reals, +and the part of the building of churches that fell to their share, +while the Indians had the choice of paying all the tribute in money +or in products, or in both. Thus was it enacted and voted. We order +no innovation to be made in this regard, in consideration of the +welfare and conservation of those provinces and their natives, and +so that the choice of paying in money shall not occasion any lack of +products and cause sterility." Felipe II, San Lorenzo, August 1589; +Felipe III, Zamora, February 16, 1602. + +[209] The following law regulates supervision of the accounts of this +fund: "Inasmuch as, when any encomienda of the Filipinas Islands +happens to be without instruction, the fourth part of the tribute +collected by the encomendero is deposited in a box with three keys, +in order that it may be converted into benefices for the Indians; +and as it is advisable that that ordinance be executed sensibly and +properly, and that we should know the amount of it and how it is +apportioned: therefore, we order our presidents, the governors of the +Filipinas Islands, that whenever they deem it advisable to examine +the account, they shall appoint for that purpose one of the officials +of our royal treasury of those islands--the one most suitable for +it--who shall examine them. The fiscal of our royal Audiencia shall +investigate them before they are finished; and shall ask and see that +they are executed with the care that the matter requires in regard +to their items, charges, articles, and balances, and whatever else +is advisable. He shall advise our president and governor of it all, +so that he may assist him in what may be necessary, and advise us of +the result." Felipe III, Madrid, June 4, 1620, in _Recopilacion de +leyes_, lib. i, tit. xiii, ley xiv. + +[210] The bull here referred to was issued by Gregory XIV, and dated +April 18, 1591. The seventh section reads as follows: "Finally, +since, as we have learned, our very dear son in Christ, Philip, +Catholic King of the Spains, on account of the many deceits wont to +be practised therein, has forbidden any Spaniard in the aforesaid +Philippine Islands to dare to take, or have, or hold any slaves, +or servants, even by right of just and unjust war, or of purchase, +or by whatsoever other title, or pretext; although some, despite the +edict, or mandate, of King Philip himself, still keep the same slaves +in their power: therefore in order that, as is befitting to reason +and equity, the Indians themselves may freely and safely without +any fear of bondage come and go to their Christian doctrinas, and to +their own homes and possessions, we order and command all and singular +the persons living in the same islands, of whatsoever state, degree, +condition, order, and rank they may be, in virtue of holy obedience and +under pain of excommunication, on the publication of these presents, +in accordance with the edict, or mandate of the said King Philip, +to release wholly free, without deceit and guile, whatsoever Indian +slaves and servants they may have, or hold; nor ever for the future +in any manner to take or keep captives, or servants."--[Translated +from the original by _Rev. T. C. Middleton_, O.S.A.] + +[211] This [1890] has disappeared from legislation, although the +personal services for Espana are still continued, and are fifteen +days.--_Rizal_. + +[212] _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. vi, tit. xii, ley xii, treating of +personal services, reads as follows: "The religious and the ministers +of the instruction, and the alcaldes-mayor of the Filipinas Islands +have a weekly repartimiento of Indians which they call _tanores_, so +that the Indians may serve them without pay; and besides the villages +contribute to them the fish necessary to them on Fridays, which is +against reason and justice. We order the governor and captain-general, +the Audiencia, and any other of our justices, to stop and not allow +this personal service and contribution, so that the villages shall +in no manner perform it, and we declare the villages free from any +obligation that they have or may have." This law is dated Madrid, +March 17, 1608. + +[213] Taal was one of the villages where the most rigging was made +for the royal ships.--_Rizal_. + +[214] This word _reales_ is omitted in the Rizal edition. + +[215] A comparatively early law (_Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. vi, +tit. i, ley xv), prohibits the forcible removal of the natives for +expeditions of conquest from one island to another. It is as follows: +"We order that the Indians in the Filipinas Islands be not taken +from one island to another forcibly in order to make incursions, and +against their will, unless it be under very necessary circumstances, +and paying them for their work and trouble. They shall be well treated +and receive no injury." Felipe II, Madrid, November 7, 1574. + +[216] In Java also the Dutch restrict Europeans from roaming about +the country; this is a good regulation for the protection of the +inhabitants.--_Stanley_. + +[217] Stanley praises these regulations; Rizal deplores them, as +keeping the men in authority out of touch with the people. + +[218] _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. iv, tit. x, ley vii, has the +following law, dated Madrid, March 17, 1608: "The governor and +captain-general of Filipinas shall for the present appoint the +magistracy [_regimiento_] of the city of Manila, choosing persons +who shall prove to be suitable for the office and zealous for the +service of God our Lord, and for ours; and he shall not remove them +without our special order." + +[219] Many royal decrees related to playing cards. The monopoly +ceased to exist perhaps before the government monopoly on betel was +initiated.--_Rizal_ (in part). + +[220] In 1890 he received 12,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[221] The prebend, in Spanish cathedrals, superior to a canonry. + +The following laws (xvi and xvii, respectively) as to the appointments +of vacant prebends, are found in _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. i, +tit. vi. + +"Because of the great distance from these kingdoms to the Filipinas +Islands and the inconvenience that might result from the prebends +falling vacant without any provision being made until we present those +who shall take them, we order the governor and captain-general of the +said islands that, when dignidades, canonries, and other prebends in +the metropolitan church become vacant, he shall present other persons +of the sufficiency and characteristics required, so that they may +serve in place of their predecessors, until we provide persons for +them. They shall receive the stipend that their predecessors shall have +received. The governor shall observe the rules made by the laws of this +titulo in his presentations." Felipe II, Guadalupe, March 26, 1580. + +"We order our governors of the Filipinas Islands, and charge the +archbishops of Manila, that when any prebends of that church become +vacant, they send us three nominations for each one, instead of one +only, with very minute advice of their sufficiency, learning, degrees, +and all other qualities that are found in those proposed, so that +after examination, we may appoint the one most suitable." Felipe III, +Lerma, June 28, 1608. + +[222] In 1890 the Filipinas were paying 36,670 pesos annually for +one dean, four dignitarios, five canons, four racioneros, four +medio-racioneros, and other inferior helpers, including the choir, +a total of twenty-six individuals; 3,330 pesos annually is to be +added for sacristans, singers, and orchestra.--_Rizal_. + +[223] Their salary amounted to from 750 to 1,000 pesos. Now [1890] +the salary of each bishop is 6,000 pesos, with two father assistants +at 100 to 150 pesos per month.--_Rizal_. + +[224] Thus in original, but it is carelessly worded; for the Society +of Jesus is not one of the mendicant orders. + +[225] All of the orders held property and had regular means of revenue, +later; while the Dominicans held enormous property in both the islands +and at Hong Kong.--_Rizal_. + +[226] The following law is from _Recopilacion de leyes_ (lib. iii, +tit. x, ley xiv): "The governor and captain-general of the Filipinas +Islands shall be careful to reward the soldiers who shall have +served us there, and their sons, with the posts and emoluments at +his disposal, in accordance with the ordinances, and [he shall do it] +with all fairness, so that they may have some remuneration. He shall +keep in toto the laws relating to this." Felipe III, Lerma, July 23, +1605; Madrid, December 19, 1618. + +[227] _Consejeles_: men sent to service by order of a municipal +council. + +[228] The pay of various of the above officers and men in 1890 was as +follows: Filipino infantrymen, 4 pesos per month; Spanish artillerymen, +13-15 pesos, plus some centimos, per month; Filipino artillerymen, +4 pesos, plus some centimos, per month; captains, 1,500-1,800 pesos +per year; alfereces, 975-1,050 pesos per year; first sergeants, +European, 318-360 pesos per year--native, 180 pesos per year; +second sergeants, European, 248.06-307.50 pesos per year--native, +156 pesos per year; first corporals, European, 189.56-202 pesos per +year--native, 84 pesos per year; second corporals, European, 174-192 +pesos per year--native corporals, 72 pesos per year; the _segundo cabo_ +[lieutenant-commander], 12,000 pesos per year; sargento-mayor _de +plaza_ (now lieutenant-colonel), 225 pesos per month; vice-admiral +[_contra-almirante, general de galeras_], 16,392 pesos per year; +frigate and ship captains, 2,700-5,760 pesos per year, according to +their duties and grades.--_Rizal_. + +The following laws from _Recopilacion de leyes_ regulate the +pay of the soldiers and some of the officers, and impose certain +restrictions on the soldiers, and provide for certain appointments: +"Each soldier established in the Filipinas Islands shall be paid +eight pesos per month, each captain, fifty, each alferez, twenty, +and each sergeant, ten. The governor and captain-general of the said +islands shall give all the men of the companies thirty ducados to each +company of additional pay, as is done in other districts, providing +the additional pay of each one does not exceed ten pesos per year. We +order that all be well paid. When the governor shall provide any of +the captains, officers, or soldiers with an encomienda, or other post, +he shall not allow him to draw pay. While they draw pay they shall +not be allowed to trade or traffic, so that that occupation may not +divert or distract them from their proper exercise and employment +of war. For the same reason, no pay shall be granted to any soldier +who serves any other person, whomsoever he be." Felipe II, Anover, +August 9, 1589, clause 34 of his instructions; Felipe III, Ventosilla, +November 4, 1606; lib. iii, tit. x, ley xiii. + +"We order that when the post of general of artillery of the Filipinas +Islands becomes vacant, either by the death or promotion of its +occupant, or for any other cause, the governor and captain-general +shall not fill it without first notifying us and without our special +order for it. We permit him to appoint a captain of artillery and a +sargento-mayor, and he may assign each of them thirty pesos' pay. We +approve the increase of two pesos in the pay of the musketeers. It +is our will that the pay of the governor's captain of the guard be +increased five pesos, in addition to his fifteen pesos, and that +a like sum be granted to the commandants of forts when they have a +captain of infantry." Felipe II, clause of letter, Madrid, June 11, +1594; Felipe IV, Madrid, January 30, 1631; lib. iii, tit. v, ley iii. + +[229] A definite law, as is shown in _Recopilacion de leyes_, +lib. iii. tit. iv, ley xiii, charged the viceroys of Nueva Espana +to send help to the Philippines. The law is as follows: "We charge +and order the viceroys of Nueva Espana to aid the governor and +captain-general of Filipinas on all occasions that arise, with very +special care, promptness, and diligence, with whatever the latter +shall request; and with the men, arms, ammunition, and money, that he +deems necessary for the conservation of those islands, salaries [the +original is _sueldos_, perhaps a misprint for _suelos_, signifying +'provinces' or 'districts'], presidios, and whatever else is under +his charge." Felipe III, Aranjuez, May 25, 1607. + +The two following laws impose certain restrictions on the +reenforcements sent to the Philippines from Nueva Espana: + +"One of the captains who shall raise men in Nueva Espana as +reenforcements for the Filipinas Islands, shall act as their agent +to the port of Acapulco. There he shall deliver them to the general, +or commander of the ships about to sail; but no captain shall take +passage or go to the islands with the men of his company." Felipe III, +Zamora, February 16, 1602; lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xvi. + +"Among the men sent by the viceroy, who shall go as a reenforcement +from Nueva Espana to Filipinas, he shall not allow, under any +circumstances, or admit, any mestizos or mulattoes, because of +the annoyances that have been experienced from them." Felipe III, +Valladolid, August 30, 1608; lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xv. + +[230] See _ante_, note 227, the citation of the law from _Recopilacion +de leyes_, lib. iii, tit. x, ley xiii. + +[231] See _Vol_. XII ("Various documents relating to commerce"), +pp. 57-75. + +Banuelos y Carrillo, in his relation to the king, says: "That the +inhabitants of the Manilas should be allowed to export as many +boat-loads as possible of the country's produce--such as wax, gold, +perfumes, ivory, and cotton cloth [_lampotes_]--which they must buy +from the natives of the country, who would thus be hindered from +selling them to the Dutch. In this way we would make those peoples +friendly, and supply Nueva Espana with their merchandise; and the +money taken to Manila would not leave that city.... Your Majesty +should consider that one and one-half millions in gold go to China +annually." This commerce was advantageous to the Celestial empire +alone and to certain individuals of Manila. It was fatal to Espana, +and harmful to the islands, whose industry was gradually perishing +like that of the metropolis.--_Rizal_. + +[232] See in _Vol_. VIII, pp. 316-318, a royal decree enforcing these +prohibitions under severe penalties. + +[233] Coarse stuff made of goat's hair, or a glossy silk stuff; +probably the latter is intended in the text. _Gorvoran_ or _gorgoran_ +is a sort of silk grogram. + +[234] This fabric is now called Pina. It is made from threads +stripped from fibers of the leaf of that plant or fruit, and which +are never longer than half a yard. It cannot be woven at all times, +as extreme heat or humidity affects the fiber. The machinery employed +is of wood, unmixed with any metal, and of rude construction. This +fabric is stronger than any other of equal fineness, and its color is +unaffected by time or washing. The pieces are generally only 1 1/2 feet +wide: the price varies from 1.s. 4d. to 2s. 6d. per yard. Pina of a +yard wide is from six reals to a dollar (of eight reals) a yard. All +the joinings of the threads are of knots made by the fingers. It is +fabricated solely by native Indians in many parts of the Philippines, +but especially in Ilo-Ilo. The use of this stuff is extensive, and +the value is estimated at 500,000 dollars or L120,000; the value of +the annual export of it to Europe for dresses, handkerchiefs, collars, +scarfs, and wristbands, which are beautifully embroidered at Manila, +is estimated at 20,000 dollars annually. (Mr. Consul Farren, January +21, 1851).--_Stanley_. + +In order to obtain the fiber of this plant, the fruit is first cut, +so that the leaf may become as long and broad as possible. When +the leaves are well developed they are torn off, and scraped with a +sharp instrument to separate the fleshy part and leave the fiber; +this is washed, dried in the sun, combed out, and classed in four +grades according to its fineness. The cloth has a peculiar softness +and delicacy; and it is said that that made formerly (one or two +centuries ago) was much finer than that made now. + +[235] _Scorzonera_ is a genus of composite plants, of numerous +species; the leaves or roots of many are used as vegetables or +salads. _S. tuberosa_ and other Eastern species have edible roots. + +[236] Delgado (_ut supra_) says that this fruit (_Diospyros kaki_, +Linn.) was brought by the Chinese traders, and called _Xi-cu_ +in their language, whence is derived the word _chiquey_. It is a +beautiful scarlet fruit, although there is another species of a +yellow color. Both are sweet and pleasant to the taste. Some of the +yellow variety were grown in the Visayas, but Delgado says the tree +is not indigenous to the islands. The fruit is shaped like an acorn +but is about as large as a lemon. The peel is soft and the interior +like honey, and it contains several seeds. The tree is wide-spreading +but not very tall. The leaves are small and almost round. _D. kaki_ +is the Chinese or Japanese persimmon; _D. virginiana_ is the American +persimmon. From other species is obtained the valuable wood called +ebony. + +[237] This must be the cloth and not the porcelain of Kaga, which +even today is so highly esteemed.--_Rizal_. + +[238] With very slight differences, this custom and ceremony is +continued to the present [1890].--_Rizal_. + +[239] "A three per cent duty was imposed in the Filipinas on +merchandise, for the payment of the troops. We order that part of the +law to be observed, but that pertaining to the other things paid from +those duties to be repealed." Anover, August 9, 1589. (Ley xxii.) + +"We ordain that the Chinese, Japanese, Siamese, Borneans, and all other +foreigners, who go to the ports of the Filipinas Islands, pay no duty +on food, supplies, and materials that they take to those islands, +and that this law be kept in the form in w, hich it may have been +introduced, and not otherwise." Anover, August 9, 1589. (Ley xxiv.) + +"On the Chinese merchandise and that from other countries, shipped to +Nueva Espana by way of Filipinas, an impost ad valorem tax of ten per +cent shall be collected, based on their value in the ports and regions +where the goods shall be discharged. This tax shall be imposed mildly +according to the rule, and shall be a tax additional to that usually +paid on departure both from the said Filipinas Islands and from the +provinces of Nueva Espana, to any other places where they may and +shall be taken." El Pardo, November 1, 1591. (Ley xxi.) + +"We order that the duty of three per cent collected in the Filipinas +Islands on the merchandise taken thither by the Chinese be increased by +another three per cent." El Pardo, November 20, 1606. (Ley xxiii.) The +above laws are from _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. viii, tit. xv. + +[240] The agave (_Agave americana_; the _maguey_ of Mexico) is found in +the Philippines, and is called _pita_, but Delgado and Blanco think +that it was not indigenous there. Its fibers were used in former +times for making the native textile called _nipis_, manufactured +in the Visayas. As used in the text, _pita_ means, apparently, some +braid or other ornament of agave fibers. + +[241] The ducado of Castilla was worth slightly more than two +pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[242] These imposts and fetters, which the products of the country +did not escape, are still [1890] in force, so that foreign markets +must be sought, since the markets of the mother-country offer no +greater advantages. According to a document of 1640, this commerce +netted the government 350,000 pesos annually.--_Rizal_. + +[243] The salary is now [1890] 40,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[244] _Recopilacion de leyes_ (lib. iv, tit. i, ley v) outlines the +governor's and Audiencia's power in regard to conquests by private +individuals, as follows: "We grant permission to the governor and +president of the Filipinas Islands and its Audiencia to make contracts +for new explorations and conquests [_pacificaciones_] with persons, +who are willing to covenant to do it at their own expense and not at +that of our royal treasury; and to give them the titles of captains +and masters-of-camp, but not those of adelantados [_i.e._, governors] +and marshals. Those contracts and agreements such men may execute, with +the concurrence of the Audiencia, until we approve them, provided that +they observe the laws enacted for war, conquest, and exploration, so +straitly, that for any negligence, the terms of their contract will be +observed, and those who exceed the contract shall incur the penalties +imposed; also provided the parties shall receive our confirmation +within a brief period assigned by the governor." Felipe II, Guadalupe, +April 1, 1580; Toledo, May 25, 1596, a clause of instructions. + +[245] There are eight auditors now [1890], and their salary +has increased to 4,700 pesos, while that of the fiscal is 5,500 +pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[246] _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. v, tit. xv, ley xxviii, contains +the following on suits arising from residencias, dated Lerma, June +23, 1608: "Suits brought during the residencia against governors, +captains-general, presidents, auditors, and fiscals of our Audiencia +of Manila, and against any other officials, both civil and criminal, +shall pass in appeal and be concluded in that Audiencia, if they do +not exceed one thousand pesos of the current money." + +[247] The tributes of the Indians in the Filipinas amount to more +than 4,000,000 pesos now [1890]; and from the Chinese are derived +225,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[248] Now since there is no exploitation of gold mines, and since +the Indians have no jewels that would justify this tenth or fifth, +the Spaniards substitute for this the imposts upon property, which +amount to 105,400 pesos, and that upon industry, which amounts to +1,433,200 pesos. In 1640, the revenue from the above source [fifths or +tenths] had decreased so greatly, that only 750 pesos were collected +annually.--_Rizal_. + +[249] Import duties now [1890] amount to 1,700,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[250] Export duties now [1890] amount to 285,000 pesos.--_Rizal_. + +[251] According to Hernando de los Rios, the Filipinas Islands could +have been self-sustaining from the beginning from their own products, +had it not been for the expeditions and adventurous conquests in the +Moluccas, Camboja, etc.... In the governorship of Don Juan de Silva, +the treasury owed, for the war in the Moluccas, more than 2,000,000 +pesos to the Indians, besides what it must have owed to the inhabitants +of Manila.--_Rizal_. + +[252] This excellent custom has entirely perished.--_Rizal_. + +"The president of our royal Audiencia of Filipinas and one auditor +of that body, shall, at the beginning of each year, examine the +accounts of our royal officials, and shall finish their examination +within the two months of January and February. On finishing their +examination they shall send a copy of them to our council for the +reason contained in the following law. Should the examination not be +finished in the said time, our officials shall receive no salary. The +auditor who shall assist in examining the accounts shall receive as +a compensation the twenty-five thousand maravedis that are ordained; +but he shall receive that amount only in that year that he shall send +the said accounts concluded to our council." Ordinance 97, Toledo, +May 15, 1596. (Ley ix.) + +"For the accounts of our royal treasury, which must be furnished in +the usual form by our officials of the Filipinas Islands annually, +during the administration of their duties, the officials shall +deliver for inventory all the books and orders pertaining to those +accounts, and all that shall be requested from them and that shall +be necessary. They shall continue the course of their administration +[of their duties] with new and similar books. These accounts shall be +concluded before the governor of those islands, and the auditor whom +the Audiencia and the fiscal of that body may appoint. In case of the +finding of any doubts and remarks it is our will that the auditor and +governor resolve and determine them, so that they may be concluded and +finished. And inasmuch as the factor and overseer must give account of +certain things in kind and products of great weight and tediousness, +we order that that account be examined every three years, and that +the concluding and settling of the doubts and remarks shall be made +in the form declared. And we order that when the said accounts of +the said islands are completed and the net balances struck, they +shall be sent to our Council of the Indias, so that the accountants +of its accounts may revise and make additions to them according to +the manner of the accountancy." Valladolid, January 25, 1605. (Ley x.) + +The above two laws are taken from _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. viii, +tit. xxix. + +[253] The Chinese engaged in agriculture and fishing now [1890] +are very few.--_Rizal_. + +[254] The Rizal edition misprints _fuerca e premio_ as _fuerza +a premio._ + +[255] The custom of shaving the head, now prevalent among the Chinese, +was imposed upon them by their Tartar conquerors. + +[256] A kind of stocking called _tabi_.--_Rizal_. + +[257] The following law was issued at Segovia July 4, 1609, and +appears in _Recopilacion de leyes_, lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xviii: +"The governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands shall +ever strive to maintain friendly relations, peace, and quiet, with +the emperor of Japon. He shall avail himself, for that purpose, of +the most prudent and advisable means, as long as conditions permit; +and he shall not risk the reputation of our arms and state in those +seas and among oriental nations." + +[258] This port (established before 1540) was in Colima, Mexico, +near the present Manzanillo. It was plundered and burned by the +English adventurer Thomas Candish, on August 24-25, 1587. + +[259] Thus named because seamen and voyagers noticed especially +the lateen sails of the light vessels used by the natives of the +Marianas.--_Rizal_. + +[260] A marine fish (_Sparus auratus_), thus named because it has +spots of golden-yellow color. + +[261] A chart of the Indian Ocean, by L. S. de la Rochette +(pub. London, 1803, by W. Faden, geographer to the king) shows three +volcanoes in about 25 deg. north latitude, and but a few degrees north +of the Ladrones. One of them is called "La Desconocida, or Third +Volcano," and the following is added: "The Manilla ships always try +to make this Volcano." + +[262] A group of islands called Shidsi To, lying in 34 deg. 20'.--_Rizal_. + +[263] "Thirty-eight degrees" is probably an error for "twenty-eight +degrees," and these islands [the first ones mentioned in the above +sentence] would be the Mounin-Sima Islands, lying between 26 deg. 35' +and 27 deg. 45'; and Lot's Wife in 29 deg. 51', and Crespo, in 32 deg. 46', +which [latter] are supposed by the _Univers Pittoresque_ to be the +Roca de Oro [rock of gold] and the Roca de Plata of the ancient +maps.--_Stanley_. + +For these latter islands, see _Vol_. XIV, p. 272, note 45. + +[264] A fungous substance that grows in the sea, and contains signs +of life. + +[265] Probably the dogfish, a species of shark. + +[266] Most of these places can be identified on the old maps of +the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, and most of the names +are retained today. The island of Cedros is shown on a map of 1556 +(Ramusio: _Vniversale della parte del mondo nvovamente ritrovata_). The +island of Cenizas is shown, on the old maps, in about 32 deg., and Cedros +in about 29 deg.. The Marias or Tres Marias Islands are Maria Madre, +Maria Magdalena, and Maria Cleofas. Cape Corrientes is south of +La Valle de Banderas and Chametla. Socatul is called Socatula and +Zocatula. An English map of 1626, engraved by Abraham Goos, shows +the town of Ciguatlan, north of Aquapulco, which may be the same as +Morga's Ciguatanejo. Los Motines cannot be identified. + +[267] Acosta in his _History of the Indies_ (Hakluyt Soc. edition, +London, 1880) says of the courses between the Philippines and New +Spain: "The like discourse is of the Navigation made into the South +sea, going from New Spaine or Peru to the Philippines or China, and +returning from the Philippines or China to New Spaine, the which is +easie, for that they saile alwaies from East to West neere the line, +where they finde the Easterly windes to blow in their poope. In the +yeere 1584, there went a shippe from Callao in Lima to the Philippines, +which sailed 2000 and 700 leagues without sight of land, and the +first it discovered was the Iland of Lusson, where they tooke port, +having performed their voiage in two moneths, without want of winde or +any torment, and their course was almost continually vnder the line; +... The returne is like vnto the voiage from the Indies vnto Spaine, +for those which returne from the Philippines or China to Mexico, +to the end they may recover the Westerne windes, they mount a great +height, vntill they come right against the Ilands of Iappon, and, +discovering the Caliphornes, they returne by the coast of New Spaine +to the port of Acapulco." + +[268] Bartolome Leonardo de Argensola was born in 1566 of a family +of Italian origin, being the second son. Taking orders, he became +rector of Villahermosa in 1588, and chaplain to Maria of Austria, +the queen, in 1598. After the latter's death he was commissioned by +the Conde de Lemos, president of the Council of the Indias, to write +a history of the conquest of the Moluccas. He later spent some time in +the kingdom of Naples, and about 1618 was made historian of Aragon. He +died at Zaragoza in 1631. In addition to the present history, which +is noted for its excellent literary style, he wrote _Primera parte +de los anales de Aragon_ (Zaragoza, 1630) the continuation of the +_Anales of Zurita_. He was also a poet, whose poems are remarkable for +their purity of style and loftiness of sentiment; they are published, +with those of his elder brother, under the title _Rimas de Lupercio +i del doctor Bartolome Leonardo de Argensola_ (Zaragoza, 1634). One +of the chief poems is an ode in honor of the church after the battle +of Lepanto. + +[269] The original book contains numerous side notes indicative of +the subject matter of the text. We omit such notes in our translated +extracts. + +[270] The above places are identified as follows: Cafa is the +modern Kaffa or Theodosia, a Russian seaport on the Black Sea; +Trapisonda is either the city or district of Trebizond or Tarabozan +(called by the Turks Tarabesoon, and formerly Traplezus); Barcito +(misprint for Bareito?), Lepo, and Damasco, are Beirut, Aleppo, +and Damascus respectively. + +[271] Argensola defines this title, which he also spells _sangaje_, +as equivalent to "count" or "duke," and says that it may be derived +from _senchaq,_ a Turkish word meaning "captain." + +[272] Argensola gives a description of the clove in book ii, pp. 52-54 +of his work. + +[273] The Dutch. + +[274] _Canafistulo_: referring to the drug known as senna, which is +obtained from the leaves of several species of _Cassia_. According +to Retana (Zuniga's _Estadismo_, ii, p. 454*) the Bisayan name for +this plant is _ibabao_ (the ancient name of Samar Island). + +[275] "Eagle" (Latin, _aguila_) is here a corruption of the Malay +name _agila_, referring to the fragrant, resinous wood of a tree +(_Aguilaria agallocha_) used for many centuries by Asiatic peoples, +especially the Chinese, for incense; it is also called "Kalambak" +and "aloes-wood." Calambuco is another species of this genus, its +wood little fragrant, but used in cabinet work (_Century Dictionary_). + +[276] True wealth and prosperity of the republic of Venice were +largely due to its preeminence in the Oriental trade, carried on by +the overland route through Asia, in caravans. By the discovery of +the Cape of Good Hope the Portuguese opened the sea-route to India, +by which the products of the East were carried to Europe more cheaply +and in greater abundance; and the decline of Venetian prestige and +wealth rapidly followed (in the sixteenth century). + +[277] This probably refers to Giovanni Pietro Maffei, a noted +Jesuit scholar and writer, and the book mentioned is his _Historiarum +Indicarum Libri xvi_ (Fiorenze, 1588). Maffei was born at Bergame about +1536, according to Moreri, but in 1533 according to Sommervogel. In +1563 he accepted the chair of rhetoric at Genoa, where he also acted +as secretary of the republic of Genoa. August 26, 1565 (Sommervogel) +he entered the Jesuit novitiate. He occupied a high place in the +order until his death at Tivoli, October 20, 1603. Besides the book +mentioned above, he wrote also a life of St. Ignatius Loyola, and a +history of the pontificate of Gregory XIII, the latter of which was +never published. His temper was irascible and his personality not +very pleasing. He strove always to maintain a pure Latin style in +his Latin writings. + +[278] Argensola, like Morga, confuses the naming of the Philippine +archipelago. + +[279] The aquatic plant commonly known as "cat-tail flag" or reed +(_Typha latifolia_). + +[280] A measure, one-third vara in length. + +[281] Small armed vessels like rafts. + +[282] This was Father Antonio Marta, a Neapolitan, and superior of +the Jesuit missions in the Malucas; with him was associated Antonio +Pereira, so prominent in the expedition of Hurtado de Mendoza. See +La Concepcion's account of Marta's services at this time (_Hist. de +Philipinas_, ii, pp. 197-204). Marta is not mentioned by Sommervogel. + +[283] See Dasmarinas's version of this proceeding, in _Vol_. VIII, +pp. 239, 294; he there states that the Indians thus taken were to be +freed at the end of three years' service. Cf. _Vol_. X, p. 214. + +[284] See letters sent by Dasmarinas and his son Luis to the king of +Camboja, as a result of this embassy, in Vol. IX, pp. 76-78 and 86, +87; and accounts of the Spanish expeditions to that country under Luis +Dasmarinas, in Vol. IX, pp. 161-180, and X, pp. 216, 217, 226-240--also +in Morga's _Sucesos_, chaps. V, VI (in Vol. XV of this series). + +[285] Punta Azufre is on the southern coast of Batangas, Luzon; at +a little distance is Punta Cazador--at the extreme southern point of +Calumpan peninsula--probably the Caca of the text. + +[286] _Bastardo_: the large sail which is hoisted on> a galley when +there is little wind. + +[287] Cf. La Concepcion's account of Dasmarinas's expedition, in +_Hist. de Philipinas_, ii, pp. 194-212. + +[288] See accounts of this and later expeditions to conquer Mindanao, +in _Vol_. IX, pp. 181-188, 281-298; and X, pp. 53-75, 214, 215, +219-226. + +[289] A small piece of ordnance. + +[290] One of the early appellations of the strait between the northwest +point of Samar and the southeast point of Luzon, now known as San +Bernardino Strait. As it was the regular outlet for the vessels plying +between the Philippines and Nueva Espana, this strait was also called +Paso de Acapulco ("the Acapulco passage"). By some authorities the +meridian of San Bernardino was used as the standard, or "meridian +of departure." See San Antonio's _Chronicas_, part i, 55 (cited by +Retana in Zuniga's _Estadismo_, ii, p. 156*; see also p. 409*). + +[291] This is an error or misprint for "Morga." + +[292] See Morga's account of this, where it appears that these were +not English, but native Moro boats. + +[293] The governor's letter is given by Argensola partly in synopsis, +and partly in direct quotation. The latter we enclose in quotation +marks. Sec in _Vol_. XIV (pp. 44-50) this letter, translated from +the MS. preserved in the Sevilla archives; that is apparently at +least a duplicate of the original letter to the Chinese official, +and one of the despatches sent to Spain by Acuna. + +[294] This Dutch commander, was Steven van der Hagen, and this his +second voyage to East Indian waters. See _Vol_. XV, appendix B. + +[295] A Portuguese pound, containing sixteen ounces. + +[296] _Anfion_: a name given to opium in the East Indies. + +[297] In the text, _funcas_; apparently a misprint for _fustas_ +or for _juncos_. + +[298] A word derived from _garra_ (of Old High German origin), +signifying "the foot of a bird" or "the paw of a beast;" _i.e._, the +anchor metaphorically "claws" the bottom of the water where it rests, +struggling to retain its hold against the force of the wind. See +Echegaray's _Diccionario general etimologico_ (Madrid, 1887-89). + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898: +Volume XVI, 1609, by H.E. Blair + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PHILIPPINE ISLANDS *** + +***** This file should be named 15157.txt or 15157.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/5/1/5/15157/ + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman & the PG Distributed Proofreaders Team + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/15157.zip b/15157.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..63050fb --- /dev/null +++ b/15157.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b2ec6e --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #15157 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/15157) |